Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080198817 | System and Method for Enabling Wireless Data Transfer - A method of enabling wireless data transfer to an electronic device having a first transceiver structured to interact with a first wireless network and a second transceiver structured to interact with a second wireless network including repeatedly powering up the second transceiver to await receipt of a second beacon signal through the second wireless network, receiving an instance of the second beacon signal with an indication of availability of data to be transferred to the electronic device through the first wireless network, and in response to the receiving of the instance of the second beacon signal with the indication of availability of the data, powering up the first transceiver to receive the data through the first wireless network. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198818 | System and Method for Enabling Wireless Data Transfer - A method of enabling wireless data transfer to an electronic device having a transceiver structured to interact in a first mode with a first wireless network and in a second mode with a second wireless network, including repeatedly powering up the transceiver and enabling the second mode to await receipt of a second beacon signal through the second wireless network, receiving an instance of the second beacon signal with an indication of availability of data to be transferred to the electronic device through the first wireless network, and in response to the receiving of the instance of the second beacon signal with the indication of availability of the data, enabling the first mode to receive the data through the first wireless network. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198819 | Concurrent Ad-Hoc and Infrastructure Connectivity for a Wireless LAN - A system and methods are disclosed for concurrent ad-hoc and infrastructure connectivity for a wireless local area network. The system comprises an infrastructure access point, an ad-hoc personal device, and a wireless terminal device configured to communicate concurrently with the infrastructure access point and the ad-hoc personal device. Furthermore, the system allows selection of a common communication operation mode. If the common communication operation mode indicates a concurrent operation mode, a wireless terminal is configured to communicate concurrently with an infrastructure access point and an ad-hoc personal device. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198820 | Location-Based Pattern for Scanning for Wireless Local Area Networks - A mobile device having a wireless local area network interface and one or more other wireless interfaces identifies a location of the mobile device via one or more of the other wireless interfaces, estimates a likelihood of finding a wireless local area network at the location, and scans for wireless local area networks while at the location during scan sessions that are separated by intervals, where the intervals are determined by the estimated likelihood. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198821 | Public Access Point - The invention instantiates a Personal VLAN bridge, using IEEE Std. 802.11 elements. The result is a bridge, referred to as a public access point, that is better suited for implementing public wireless data networks than the IEEE Std. 802.11 architecture. The invention also provides a location-update protocol for updating the forwarding tables of bridges that connect public access points together. The invention further provides a method for more controlled bridging, which is referred to as fine bridging. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198822 | Technique for Negotiating on Behalf of a Mobile Ambient Network within a Multi-Operator Wireless Communication System - A mobile ambient network (MAN) negotiator | 08-21-2008 |
20080198823 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK LINK - A user can link a station to an access point by triggering buttons of the station and the access point respectively. After the buttons are triggered, the station scans the SSID of the access point. The access point updates SSID and sends out the new SSID to the station in response to the station's request. Then, the station generates a security key according to the new SSID and links the access point according to the new SSID and the security key so as to establish a WLAN link. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198824 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR QOS PROVISIONING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A method and system for QoS provisioning in broadband wireless mesh networks are disclosed. According to one embodiment, a computer-implemented method, comprises providing a dual mode mesh router having a plurality of radios, wherein the mesh router is used in a cell of a plurality of cells that covers a geographic region. The mesh router includes one or more WiMAX backhaul radios, one or more WiFi backhaul radios, one or more WiMAX access radios, one or more WiFi access radios, and three or more intra-mesh radios. Traffic is received at the dual mode mesh router. A minimum quality of service requirement is identified for the traffic. The traffic is routed via the one or more WiMAX backhaul radio when the minimum quality of service meets a predetermined value. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198825 | System and method for transmitting data packages with a classification mechanism of priority grade - A system and method for transmitting data packages with a priority grade, which applies to a processing procedure of transmitting a data package from an application layer to WLAN device is provided. The system includes at least an analysis module and a QoS classifier. The analysis module is used to analyze the contents of data package transmitted from the application layer, to classify and to record the data or type of service (ToS) of the data package. The QoS classifier is used to mark the priority grade on the data package according to the classification and the record made by the analysis module. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198826 | Method and system of detecting duplicate SSID via self-scanning in WLAN - A method and a system of detecting a duplicate service set identifier (SSID) via self-scanning in a WLAN are provided. An access point (AP), when a scan request is given, generates a probe request packet by inserting a SSID of the AP thereinto, transmits the probe request packet to neighbor APs, receives probe response packets, in response to the probe request packet, from the neighbor APs, detects SSIDs from the probe response packets, and informs the presence of a neighbor AP, the SSID of which is the same as that of the AP, if any of the detected SSIDs is the same as the SSID of the AP. | 08-21-2008 |
20080205354 | Method for Initiating a Wireless Transfer of Data Between at Least Two Electronic Devices, Electronic Device and Software Program Therefor - The invention relates to a method of initiating a wireless transfer of data between two electronic devices. In order to make the initiation particularly user friendly, it is proposed that a concept called “hugging” is employed. A hugging state between two electronic devices is assumed to be given if a first electronic device and a second electronic device are determined to undergo a specific motion pattern relative to each other while being at least in close vicinity to each other. Only in case such a hugging state is detected at a first device, a data transfer channel is opened for transferring data between the first device and some other device, e.g. the second device. The invention relates equally to a corresponding device and to a software program product with a corresponding software code. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205355 | Optimal path routing method in wireless network - An optimal path routing method is provided for transmitting data from a source node to a destination node. The optimal path setting method includes transmitting a shortcut request (SCRQ) message from the source node to a topology server; determining shortcut information at the topology server based on the SCRQ message; and transmitting a shortcut notification (SCNF) message containing the shortcut information from the topology server to the destination node. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205356 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA BROADBAND COVERAGE IN A VEHICULAR AREA NETWORK (VAN) - The disclosure relates to techniques and technologies for providing mobile wireless broadband coverage. In one implementation, Wireless Wide Area Broadband (WWAB) network elements are provided in a Vehicular Area Network (VAN) that also includes a Mobile Network Controller (MNC). The WWAB network elements in the VAN include at least one WWAB base station (BS). A mobility protocol tunnel is provided between a Mobility Management Server (MMS) and the MNC to make mobility of the WWAB network elements in the VAN transparent to the WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. The WWAB BS and the MNC can allow a WWAB-enabled mobile station (MS) to connect to WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205357 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA BROADBAND COVERAGE IN A VEHICULAR AREA NETWORK (VAN) - The disclosure relates to techniques and technologies for providing mobile wireless broadband coverage. In one implementation, Wireless Wide Area Broadband (WWAB) network elements are provided in a Vehicular Area Network (VAN) that also includes a Mobile Network Controller (MNC). The WWAB network elements in the VAN include at least one WWAB base station (BS). A mobility protocol tunnel is provided between a Mobility Management Server (MMS) and the MNC to make mobility of the WWAB network elements in the VAN transparent to the WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. The WWAB BS and the MNC can allow a WWAB-enabled mobile station (MS) to connect to WWAB network elements in the fixed infrastructure. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205358 | Usage of network load information for rate adaptation purposes - The present invention provides a method and apparatus that features obtaining in a terminal, node, point or device information containing one or more indications about a network load of a wireless short-range communication network; and adjusting rate adaptation logic in the terminal, node, point or device based on the network load information. The information may be obtained in a network control message, including one or more beacon and probe response frames having information about at least one of a load, an average access delay, available admission capacity, access delay, or some combination thereof, of the wireless short-range communication network. The wireless short-range communication network may take the form of a wireless local area network (WLAN), wireless fidelity network (Wi-Fi), an ultra wideband network (UWB) or other suitable network using beacon-based communications protocols either now known or later developed in the future. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205359 | Transmitter with digital up conversion and multimode power amplifier - A voice, data and RF integrated circuit (IC) includes a transmitter processing module, coupled to receive outbound data and to produce processed data in accordance with a selected one of a plurality of protocols and that generates a control signal based on the selected on of the plurality of protocols. A digital up conversion module produces a digital up-converted signal from the processed data. A radio receiver front end includes a programmable power amplifier that produces a transmit signal from the digital up-converted signal in accordance with the selected one of the plurality of protocols, based on the control signal. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205360 | Balancing clusters of a wireless mesh network - An apparatus and method of propagating a size of a cluster within a wireless mesh network is disclosed. The method includes a gateway within the cluster maintaining information of access nodes within the cluster. The gateway determines a cluster size based on the maintained information, and transmits routing packets that include the cluster size of the gateway. An apparatus and method of balancing clusters of a wireless mesh network is also disclosed. The method includes the gateway of each cluster originating beacons, wherein the beacons include a size of the cluster of the gateway. The access nodes of each cluster, re-broadcasts beacons received from the gateway of the cluster. A connecting access node selects which cluster to connect to at least in part based on the size of each of the clusters. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205361 | Wireless communication system and terminal - The present invention provides a wireless communication system and a terminal. A base station includes means that notifies terminals of an intensity of a received interference power. The terminal includes means that controls a transmission power for transmitting data to the base station, which is one of base stations and to which data is to be transmitted, by referencing an intensity of interference power (OSI) notified from base stations to which data is not to be transmitted. The means that controls a transmission power calculates a decision value for increasing/decreasing the transmission power, wherein the decision value is variable according to the current transmission power of the terminal and propagation attenuations between the terminal and the base stations to which data is not to be transmitted, and variably controls the amount of transmission power increase/decrease according to the decision value for increasing/decreasing a transmission power. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205362 | Address Resolution Protocol-Based Wireless Access Point Method and Apparatus - A wireless access point ( | 08-28-2008 |
20080205363 | Method for operating a VoIP terminal device and a VoIP terminal device - In one aspect, a method for operating a cordless VoIP terminal device in a private network is provided. The VoIP terminal device is authorized to access the private network. Data stored on the VoIP terminal device is assessable via a standard interface for facilitating data access only after the VoIP terminal device has been successfully logged into the private network. A VoIP terminal device for carrying out the method is further provided. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205364 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING A FRAME IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for configuring a frame in a communication system is provided. The method includes determining a number of frames for configuring one multi-frame, wherein the number is at least two, and configuring each of the determined number of frames, wherein the determined number of frames include a first frame and a second frame temporally discriminated from each other, each of the determined number of frames includes a downlink sub-frame and an uplink sub-frame, a downlink sub-frame of the first frame includes a first area for transmitting a reference signal used for an acquisition of synchronization between a base station and a mobile station, a second area including system information and common control information related to the multi-frame, a third area including modulation scheme information and allocation information of data bursts, a fourth area to which a downlink data burst is allocated in a diversity mode and a fifth area to which a downlink data burst is allocated in a band Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC) mode, and a downlink sub-frame of the second frame includes a sixth area including modulation scheme information and allocation information of data bursts, a seventh area to which a data burst is allocated in a diversity mode, and an eighth area to which a data burst is allocated in an AMC mode. | 08-28-2008 |
20080212544 | Method in a wireless sensor reader for obtaining sensor data from a radio frequency addressable sensor - A method in a wireless sensor reader for obtaining sensor data from one or more radio frequency (RF) addressable sensors includes transmitting signals to the one or more RF addressable sensors wherein the signals initialize the one or more RF addressable sensors; interrogating the one or more RF addressable sensors to isolate an individual RF addressable sensor; receiving sensor data from the isolated RF addressable sensor, wherein the received sensor data includes sensor identification information; communicating sensor identification information to a processor external to the wireless sensor reader; receiving sensor data processing information; and processing the sensor data based on the received processing information. At least the transmitting step includes common designation network communications. The wireless sensor reader is capable of powering down to conserve energy and capable of powering up in response to an electronic signal. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212545 | Demand-driven prioritized data structure - A system and method for optimizing the efficiency of data sharing among a set of radio nodes in a radio environment is provided. The technique includes identifying a data unit and assigning it a class, identifying a connectivity type, computing a significance factor based on connectivity type and assigned class, mapping the significance factor to a priority factor, and scheduling output of the data unit based on the priority factor. A scheduler algorithm can be used for scheduling output. The class can be assigned based on which nodes of the set of radio nodes possess copies of the data unit at a given time. An arbitration process can be used to determine the priority factor. A significance factor weighting algorithm, based on how many nodes will be receiving the data and on how much a node needs the data, can be used to determine the significance factor. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212546 | HIERARCHICAL SERVICE LIST - The present invention relates to communicating between a network and user equipment in a wireless communication system. The invention includes receiving an indicator on a first transmission frequency having no associated uplink service. The indicator indicates at least one transmission frequency different from the first transmission frequency and having no associated uplink service. Moreover, the indicator indicates whether the availability of a service on the at least one transmission frequency is provided on the first transmission frequency. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212547 | Wireless communication system, wireless communication apparatus, wireless communication method, and computer program - A wireless communication network that forms an ad-hoc network without the arrangement of a controlling station sets a period that a communication apparatus can utilize with priority and performs isochronous communication in the period as required. When isochronous communication has not been performed or after isochronous communication has finished in the priority utilization period, other communication apparatuses perform arbitrary communication. When another communication is performed in a communication apparatus's own priority utilization period, the start of isochronous communication is temporarily delayed. In an ad-hoc communication environment, data having a real-time characteristic, such as AV content, can be efficiently transmitted through the isochronous communication. | 09-04-2008 |
20080219223 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK UNIT AND METHOD FOR EXCHANGING CAPABILITY INFORMATION - A communication network unit having a memory for storing, for each communication terminal of a plurality of first communication terminals which are each associated with a same user identification, information about communication capabilities of the respective communication terminals a determining unit for determining which communication capabilities can be used for communicating with the user identified by the user identification based on the information about the communication capabilities of the first communication terminals, and a signaling unit for signaling to a second communication terminal which communication capabilities can be used for communicating with the user identified by the user identification. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219224 | System and Method for Providing Secure Mobility and Internet Protocol Security Related Services to a Mobile Node Roaming in a Foreign Network - A method for connection roaming a Mobile Node (MN) to a Network GateWay (NGW) for providing secure data path using Internet Protocol (IP) security procedure. Also Mobile IP (MIP) is required for providing mobility to the user, when the MN moves from one sub-network to another. However, when the Home Address of the network is not known, a cyclic interdependency is observed between the IP Security (Ipsec) procedures and MIP procedures. If the home address of the MN is not known initially during the procedure, IPsec Security Associations (SA's) are formed between the MN and NGW such that only MIP packets are passed through. After the MIP Registration is completed, the Home Address of the MN is known from the MIP registration Reply. MN now forms a data path tunnel with the NGW by exchanging Create_Child_SA messages. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219225 | Method for Bearer Independent Call Control (Bicc) Optimization for Ip Bearer Support - A method is disclosed for the optimization of a BICC (Bearer Independent Call Control) IP Bearer Support in a WCDMA R4 Telecommunication system, and provides for exchange of IPAddress and Port Id between two MGWs by avoiding tunneling between two MSCs, reducing the number of message exchanges, and reducing the message sizes. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219226 | Wireless Lan System and Its Broadcasting Station - In a wireless LAN system according to the present invention, when a first communication station transmits packets to a second communication station, the first communication station can select a first method in which the second communication station returns first transmission-confirmation information to the first communication station for each packet that the second communication station receives, and a second method in which the second communication station returns, in response to the request of the first communication station, second transmission-confirmation information to the first communication station for plural received packets. The first communication station selects either one of the first method and the second method, based on a number k of packets to be acknowledged by the second transmission-confirmation information. With this arrangement, in the wireless LAN system capable of using plural kinds of transmission confirmation information, transmission confirmation information capable of improving transmission efficiency is selected. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219227 | Method and Apparatus to Create Multicast Groups Based on Proximity - Devices and methods use close range communication links, such as near field communication (NFC) protocol links, to enable users to authenticate mobile devices to one another to create or expand secure multicast groups. Once the two or more devices establish a close range communication peer-to-peer link the devices exchange multicast group communication data sufficient to permit the devices to receive or send multicast messages. Long range wireless or wired network communication links are then used for multicast message communications. Proximity limits of the close range communication P2P link enables mutual trust to be presumed among devices, reducing the need for security and authentication signaling. The limited range of close range communication P2P links renders multicast groups established in this manner less vulnerable to eavesdropping and intrusion. Embodiments enable users to initiate secure multicast group participation merely by bringing two or more devices into close proximity. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219228 | PEER POWER SAVE MODE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP (TDLS) WIRELESS NETWORK - A protocol for a peer power save mode (PPSM) in a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS) wireless network and a system therefor are provided. A station (STA) set up a TDLS link can send a frame having a power management bit set to a peer STA to enter into a power save mode (PSM). In this case, the station entering into the PSM operates in a PPSM client mode. When the peer STA operates in the PPSM client mode, the STA can operate in the PPSM access point (AP) mode or can enter into the PPSM client mode. The STA operating in the PPSM AP mode buffers data for the STA operating in the PPSM client mode and informs the peer STA of information indicating that there is buffered data by the use of a peer traffic indication frame or the like. In principle, a U-APSD procedure can be applied to the transmission of data through a direct link from the STA operating in the PPSM AP mode to the STA operating in the PPSM client mode. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219229 | WIRELESS RELAY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless relay communication system and method are provided. The system includes a BS, at least one RS and subscriber terminals. The method includes: configuring a downlink relay zone and an uplink relay zone in downlink sub-frame and uplink sub-frame of physical layer frame structure of a BS, respectively, configuring a downlink relay zone and an uplink relay zone in uplink sub-frame and downlink sub-frame of physical layer frame structure of an RS, respectively, to define one or more combinations of OFDMA symbols and relay subchannels or relay timeslots for communication between the RS and BS; performing relay communication between the BS, the RS and a subscriber station. In the invention, an advanced relay mode is supported, i.e. an MSS/SS may access BS via the relay of RS, thereby broadening the effective coverage of BS, and improving the throughput of MSS/SS. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219230 | Method and system for authentication of WLAN terminal interworking with broadband wireless access network - A method and a system for interworking with a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal. According to the method, a relay station for connecting the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal with the Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network sets a connection with the Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network through an initialization process. A user authentication with the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal is performed by the relay station in compliance with a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) protocol. A user authentication with a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network Access Control Router (ACR) is performed in compliance with a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network protocol by the relay station in place of the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) terminal. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219231 | WIRELESS PACKET COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - An access point in a wireless packet communication system is disclosed. The access point has an antenna for receiving IP data encoded according to a wireless IP communication protocol. The access point also has a combiner having an input coupled to said antenna and having first and second outputs. The access point further has a first decoder for receiving encoded IP data on a first channel at a first output of said combiner. The access point also has a second decoder for receiving encoded IP data on a second channel at a second output of said combiner. The access point further has a router for receiving unencoded IP data from said first decoder at a first input, and receiving unencoded IP data from said second decoder at a second input, said router having a single output for passing unencoded IP data from said first decoder and said second decoder. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219232 | LAN BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of routing calls from a mobile unit to a destination location can include registering the mobile unit with a wireless adjunct, wherein the wireless adjunct is in communication with a switching unit and a packet based network and is operable to receive data from the switching unit and place the data, in packetized form, on the packet based network. The method can further include responding to a call setup request from the mobile unit and querying a subscriber database to determine if the mobile unit is a resident or a guest. If the mobile unit is a resident, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through the switching unit to a first destination location. If the mobile unit is a guest, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through an RF source to a second destination location. | 09-11-2008 |
20080225803 | Transmitting Device, Wireless Communications System, and Program and Computer-Readable Storage Medium Storing Same - A worker uses a remote controller ( | 09-18-2008 |
20080225804 | Real-Time Sessions for Wireless Mesh Networks - A real-time data transport protocol directed to aggregating multiple packets of a real-time protocol session and transmitting redundant copies of the packets as defined by a sliding window. In particular implementations, a method comprising accessing a plurality of packets of a real-time protocol session; aggregating, over a sliding window, a contiguous sequence of packets in the plurality of packets into real-time data transport packets, and transmitting the real-time data transport packets to a receiving node. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225805 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVISIONING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method and apparatus for provisioning a communication device is disclosed. An apparatus that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a communication device having a controller element that establishes wireless communication with a base unit operating according to a short-range cordless phone communication protocol, and receives from the base unit provisioning information that enables a communication device to establish wireless communications with an access point operating according to a wireless fidelity (WiFi) communications protocol. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225806 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING MOBILITY IN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORKS - A method to enable mobility while connected to an Internet protocol network comprises receiving a first data packet from a mobile node at a first mobile gateway in a mobile-gateway-communication network via a first access point and determining if a communication session is ongoing responsive to receiving the first data packet. When it is determined that a communication session is not ongoing, the first mobile gateway is established as a home mobile gateway for the duration of the communication session. When the mobile node connects to a second mobile gateway in the mobile-gateway-communication network via a second access point during the communication session, a tunnel is opened from the second mobile gateway to the home mobile gateway so that the communication session is maintained regardless of the protocol implemented by the mobile node and the access points. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225807 | Transmitter, receiver and system as well as related methods and computer programs for identifying at least one network capability - It is disclosed a method comprising transmitting an identifier for identifying at least one network capability related to mobile internet protocol, | 09-18-2008 |
20080225808 | Integrated media system and method - An integrated media system and method comprising a media server and one or more client interfaces disposed in communicative relation with a network. The media server may be structured to communicate an interactive media object to the client interface over the network. The interactive media object comprising at least one primary communication module, at least one secondary communication module having multi-media content, and one or more communication services, such as, for example, e-mail, VoIP, live chat, etc. Further, the primary communication module may be structured to resemble a printed publication. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225809 | Topology system of wireless network with dynamic balance - The present invention is to provide a topology system of wireless network with dynamic balance comprising at least one subsidiary topology system of wireless network each having a plurality of access points and only one access point automatically becomes a root access point which operates on a channel different from others, and dynamically generates an unique derivative group ID different from others as the root access point linked with a wired network; other access points not linked with the wired network join one of subsidiary topology systems of wireless network according to loading and dataflow of the subsidiary topology systems of wireless network, and automatically become either a pure access point or an escape access point, dynamically generate an unique derivative group ID same as those linked with other root access points, and operate on a channel same as those linked with other root access points. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225810 | CONFIGURABLE ZONE-BASED LOCATION DETECTION - An improved technique provides location detection using wireless net-works such as Wi-Fi networks in a flexible, configurable manner that allows for variations in the environment and tracks target movement accurately in such an environment. Zones of different relative sizes and sensitivities can be defined, so as to vary the degree of resolution for different parts of the area being detected. Mechanisms are provided to take into account fluctuations in signal strength, and reduce the incidence of false positives resulting from incorrectly detecting zone or location changes due to fluctuations of signal strength. In addition, detection time can be configured for zone entry and/or exit. Self-adjustment based on heuristic analysis can also be implemented. Data can be sent or received based on the physical location as determined by the zone. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225811 | Systems and Methods For Reliable Broadcast and Multicast Transmission Over Wireless Local Area Network - Broadcast and multicast (BM) systems have not been reliable in the wireless local area networks. Higher bandwidth and more reliable BM transmissions are necessitated by video and audio applications. A class of BM reliable frames is transmitted at a higher rate. The access point performs some rudimentary collision avoidance to enhance reliability, and individual stations are given the ability to send feedback to the access point regarding the quality of the transmission. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225812 | VoIP-only Base Transceiver Station - Embodiments for a low-cost, flexible, VoIP-Only Base Transceiver Station are disclosed. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225813 | Personal network, and method to secure a personal network - Personal network, being associated with a user, the personal network comprising a plurality of personal devices associated with the user, wherein the personal devices are configured to be interconnected with each other via one or more communication connections, to allow datacommunication there-between; and at least one personal network control unit and/or service configured to control access to the personal network, wherein the control unit and/or service is operable to be in at least a first mode to allow access of all of the personal devices to the personal network, and a second mode to restrict the access of at least one of the personal devices to the personal network. Also, there is provided a method to secure a personal network of a user. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225814 | Wireless access point service coverage area management - A Wireless Access Point (WAP) of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) infrastructure includes a processor, a radio and a directional antenna. The radio supports communications with a first plurality of wireless terminals and listens to, but does not participate in transmissions of at least some of a second plurality of wireless terminals to collect non-participatory WAP data. Based upon the non-participatory WAP data, the processor creates WAP operational reports and provides the WAPs operational reports to the WLAN. The WLAN creates directions based thereon and directs the WAP to alter the gain pattern of the directional antenna. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225815 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MESSAGES ON A WIRELESS DEVICE CONNECTING TO AN APPLICATION SERVER - A system and method for providing a message on the graphic display of a wireless device while the wireless device is connecting to an application download server across a wireless network. When the wireless device attempts to communicate with an application download server or changes files while navigating an application download server, a message is transmitted across the wireless network to the computer platform of the wireless device and displayed to the user of the wireless device. The message can be transmitted to the wireless device from the same application download server that the wireless device is attempting to connect to or navigate, or alternately, the message can be transmitted from another server on the wireless network. | 09-18-2008 |
20080232335 | Enhanced Network Allocation Vector Mechanism for Optimal Reuse of the Spectrum in a Wireless Communication System - Wireless networks and methods of use includes a source that transmits a signal to at least one destination during a scheduled time period. The network also includes at least one node, which is hidden from the destination, and which transmits a signal during the scheduled time period. The networks and their methods of use provide for efficient use of the medium. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232336 | Systems, Methods, and Computer-Readable Media for Communicating Via a Mobile Wireless Communication Device - Methods, systems, and computer-readable media are provided for communicating via a mobile wireless communication device (MWCD). According to exemplary embodiments, a message is generated for a customer premises equipment located at a customer premises. The message is provided to the customer premises equipment via a mobile wireless communication device located at the customer premises. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232337 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING FREQUENCY OVERLAY IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. A sending apparatus in the broadband wireless communication system includes a controller for distributing packets to a plurality of processors to transmit the packets in a multi-Frequency Allocation (FA) access mode; the plurality of the processors for processing the packet provided from the controller in a Media Access Control (MAC) layer; and a plurality of senders for encoding the packets provided from the corresponding processors in a physical layer and transmitting a signal generated through the physical layer encoding. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232338 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SECURE, PORTABLE, WIRELESS AND MULTI-HOP DATA NETWORKING - A mobile network solution provides secure and portable wireless networking service to mobile users with devices equipped with wireless network interfaces. The Secure Nomadic Wireless Network, or SNOWNET, follows a hierarchical approach. Special SNOWNET nodes are deployed in the area where networking service is needed and form a backbone network. At the same time, SNOWNET nodes provide local access service to regular mobile clients. SNOWNET provides security through authentication of the nodes and clients, as well as through encryption of the data. | 09-25-2008 |
20080240048 | MULTIRADIO MANAGEMENT THROUGH SHARED TIME ALLOCATION - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of radio modules integrated within the same wireless communication device. In at least one embodiment of the present invention, time may be allocated for use in communicating over one or more wireless communication mediums. The allocated time may take the form of timeslots. The timeslots may be dedicated or shared timeslots, the type of timeslot affecting the behavior of each wireless communication medium. Use of shared timeslots may, for example, be determined locally to the radio modules based on a relative priority between the wireless communication mediums sharing the timeslot. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240049 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THROUGHPUT OF ACCESS CLASSES IN A WLAN - A system comprises a monitoring module operative to monitor traffic on a wireless medium, the traffic belonging to one or more of two different access classes (ACs), one access class (AC) being a higher-priority AC and the other being a lower-priority AC; a throughput adaptation module communicatively coupled to the monitoring module and operative to dynamically generate data corresponding to one or more AC-sensitive parameters based on the monitored traffic and on a desired throughput ratio between the two different ACs; and a wireless communication module communicatively coupled to the throughput adaptation module and operative to communicate the data to one or more wireless stations on the wireless medium. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240050 | TDMA MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK (MANET) WITH SECOND ORDER TIMING AND TRACKING - A communication system includes a plurality of mobile nodes forming a mobile ad-hoc network (MANET) and having a network clock time. A plurality of wireless communications links connects the mobile nodes together. Each mobile node includes a communications device and controller for transmitting and routing data packets wirelessly to other mobile nodes via the wireless communications link using a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) data transmission. Each mobile node includes a clock circuit having a digital clock time. A clock circuit is operative for processing a second order internal clock compensation factor as a learned and accumulated value for establishing a virtual clock time to correct any clock timing errors of the physical clock time from the network clock time. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240051 | WIRELESS DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless diagnostic monitoring system and a method for monitoring wireless devices are provided. The system includes at least one wireless device having a first RF transceiver and a first microprocessor operably coupled to the first RF transceiver. The wireless device is configured to transmit an RF signal having a diagnostic message having operational status information associated with the wireless device and a unique identifier identifying the wireless device. The system further includes a monitoring device having a second RF transceiver and a second microprocessor operably coupled to the second RF transceiver. The second RF transceiver is configured to receiver the RF signal. The second microprocessor is configured to determine an operational task to perform based on the operational status information. The second microprocessor is further configured to store data associated with the operational task in a memory device. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240052 | CLIENT-BASED INFORMATION SERVICE FOR SEAMLESS VERTICAL HANDOVERS - A system and method to enable a wireless device having multiple radios to obtain information about wireless networks without each radio having to independently scan for all available networks. The wireless device downloads information from a remote information server, such that the information is later accessible locally. The local information server may be updated independently according to the preferences of the user. The system enables any of the radios to obtain access information without having to perform time- and power-consuming scanning operations, where the access information is sufficient for the radio to make contact with the wireless network, irrespective of whether the radio is tailored to support that network. The system may include wireless neighborhood map(s) of one or more geographic regions. The wireless device is able to ascertain the wireless network landscape of a region without having to actually reside in the geographic region. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240053 | Quality of service (QoS) negotiation between network nodes in a Mobile IP network - Techniques for negotiating QoS between a foreign agent and a home agent of a Mobile IP network are described herein. According to one embodiment, quality of service (QoS) parameters are extracted from a registration reply message received from a home agent of a home network in response to a registration request message originated from a mobile node coupled to a foreign network. Thereafter, network traffics between the mobile node of the foreign network and the home agent of the home network associated with the mobile node are routed according to at least a portion of the QoS parameters. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240054 | Relay scheduling in wireless networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems for communicating in a wireless network are disclosed. One embodiment includes a method for communication in a wireless network that comprises scheduling relay transmissions by stations in separate cells of the wireless network based on out-of-cell interference. The method may also include transmitting data by one or more wireless nodes within the wireless network using orthogonal downlink frame formats and uplink frame formats that prevent a first station of a particular class from transmitting while a separate, second station of the particular class is listening. Other embodiments are disclosed and claimed. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240055 | Wireless network beacon timing - An apparatus and method of a wireless network timing transmission of multiple BSSID beacons is disclosed. The method includes identifying multiple personalities of the wireless network, wherein a separate MAC address corresponding with each of the personalities. A beacon type is assigned for each of the personalities. During each transmission interval, a plurality of the beacon types are consecutively transmitted, wherein the different beacon types are consecutively spaced during transmission by a predetermined inter-frame spacing, wherein the predetermined inter-frame spacing is substantially less than an air-time duration of each transmission interval. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240056 | Air-time control of wireless networks - A method and apparatus for controlling transmission air-time available to a wireless node within a wireless network is disclosed. The method includes occupied by transmission packets. The method includes the wireless node monitoring air-time available to the wireless node for wireless transmission. The wireless node controls wireless transmission of neighboring wireless devices if the air-time available is detected to be lower than a threshold. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240057 | Accessing hardware initialization data of WLAN module using die identifier - A method, system and apparatus of accessing hardware initialization data of WLAN module using die identifier are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes accessing a die identification data of a WLAN module when the WLAN module is integrated to a device having a non-volatile memory, and writing initialization data corresponding to the die identification data to the non-volatile memory. The method may further include storing the initialization data to a database file during a manufacturing process of the WLAN module. The method may include comprising detecting a presence of the initialization data through accessing the non-volatile memory. In addition, the method may include automatically fetching the initialization data of the database file using a trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP) when the detecting the presence of the initialization data fails. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240058 | SIMULTANEOUS WLAN COMMUNICATIONS TO CARRY PERSONAL AREA NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - An integrated circuit radio transceiver and associated method comprises a multi-mode device operable to support personal area network communications as well as traditional wireless local area network communications. In one embodiment, IEEE 802.11 protocol IBSS communications are used to transport Bluetooth communication data packets. In another embodiment, a direct link comprising direct packet transfers without beaconing is performed between the multi-mode device and another multi-mode device. Thus, the multi-mode device is operable to establish traditional BSS communications with an Access Point in addition to establishing peer-to-peer communications with another multi-mode device to transport the Bluetooth communications over the 802.11 IBSS communication link or over an IEEE 802.11 direct communication link. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240059 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD OF SUBSCRIBER OF SERVICE NEGOTIATION SYSTEM - A resource allocation method of a subscriber station in a service negotiation system is provided. The resource allocation method includes gathering statistics of bursty data, bandwidth grant situation, and measuring wireless signal quality. The subscriber station switches its operation mode according to the statistics and bandwidth data derived by the signal measurement. When the subscriber station in a wireless system switches into a normal operation mode, it allocates bandwidth to management message and numbers of data connections to satisfy the quality of service (QoS) of each connection. When the subscriber station in a wireless system switches into an emergency operation mode, it allocates bandwidth to management message and unsolicited grant service (UGS). | 10-02-2008 |
20080240060 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REAL-TIME CORRELATION OF AAL2 AND AAL5 MESSAGES FOR CALLS IN UTRAN - System and method for correlating multiple frames of data associated with a single call into a call record. One embodiment comprises correlating data in a radio access network by capturing data passing to and from a radio network controller, identifying ATM Adaptation Layer type 5 (AAL5) frames within the data, assigning a first call identifier to the AAL5 frames, identifying ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) frames within the data, assigning a second call identifier to the AAL2 frames, and combining AAL2 frames and AAL5 frames having a same first call identifier and a same second call identifier into a call record. The data passing to and from the first radio network controller may be data passing over an Iub interface between a Node B and the radio network controller or data passing over an Iur interface between two radio network controllers. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240061 | AIRCRAFT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH DATA MEMORY CACHE AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A communications system for an aircraft carrying at least some personnel having personal electronic devices (PEDs) for wireless data communications outside the aircraft includes a ground-based communications network, and an access point in the aircraft for providing a wireless local area network (WLAN) for data communications with the PEDs. An air-to-ground transceiver in the aircraft cooperates with the access point for data communications with the ground-based communications network. An aircraft data memory cache is in the aircraft and cooperates with the access point for storing common data accessible by the PEDs during flight of the aircraft. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240062 | AIRCRAFT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH NETWORK SELECTION CONTROLLER AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A communications system for an aircraft carrying at least some personnel having personal electronic devices (PEDs) for wireless data communications outside the aircraft includes a ground-based communications network, and a satellite-based communications network. An access point is in the aircraft for providing a WLAN for data communications with the PEDs. An air-to-ground transceiver in the aircraft cooperates with the access point for data communications with the ground-based communications network. A satellite receiver in the aircraft cooperates with the access point for data communications with the satellite-based communications network to the PEDs. At least one network selection controller determines whether to send data communications to the PEDs through the air-to-ground transceiver or the satellite receiver. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240063 | High-Density Wireless Local Area Network - A data communication system includes an access point and a plurality of stations each for exchanging wireless data communication messages with the access point. At least some of the messages are in a format that includes at least one message header and a plurality of data units. Each of the data units includes a respective data unit header and a respective data frame. Each data unit header identifies a respective one of the stations as a recipient to receive the respective data frame of the data unit. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240064 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FRAMES IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - On the case of receiving data frame from a station, the method of the present invention instructs the repeater to replace the content of the receiver address field by the address of the bridge when receiving the frame transmitted from the station, and then forwards the frames to the bridge. On the case of receiving a data frame transmitted from the bridge, the repeater can replace the content of transmitter address field by the address of the repeater itself, and then forwards the data frame to the station. | 10-02-2008 |
20080247366 | Forced silencing of transmitting device - Various embodiments are described relating to sharing scanning operations among nodes in a wireless network, such as a WiMedia ultra-wideband (UWB) network. In an example embodiment, a message may be sent from a sending node to one or more receiving nodes requesting the receiving nodes to reduce transmissions on a wireless medium. The sending node and the receiving nodes may be included in a distributed wireless network. In an example embodiment, the wireless medium may be scanned at the sending node to determine whether the one or more receiving nodes are participating in the distributed wireless network by periodically transmitting beacons during a repeated interval, wherein the scanning may be performed periodically, aperiodically, or continuously. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247367 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SCHEDULING TRANSMISSIONS FOR COEXISTENCE OF DIFFERING WIRELESS RADIO PROTOCOLS - Embodiments of systems and methods for Bluetooth and WiMAX coexistence are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. In some embodiments systems and methods are described to determine a temporal reference associated a frame, and then align another wireless frame with that temporal reference. Once aligned, transmissions and receptions in one wireless frame may be arranged to not temporally overlap with transmissions or reception the other wireless frame. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247368 | NON CENTRALIZED SECURITY FUNCTION FOR A RADIO INTERFACE - A module dual mode device architecture and method of use is disclosed. The system architecture provides a distributed design of an IEEE 802.11i compliant supplicant module that provides security to data/voice packets sent over the wireless local area network (“WLAN”) radio interface from a dual mode device to an access point. The dual mode device establishes a connection with the access point and if the access point is security enabled, one or more session keys are generated. The session keys are used to provide security for communications over the radio interface between the dual mode device and the access point. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247369 | System and Method for Presence in Wireless Networks - The invention relates generally to a method for providing presence and instant messaging in a computer network. In particular, the invention is directed to a modified implementation of known wireless networking protocols to provide instant messaging and presence services to mobile units using. The instant messaging and presence services are provided within the framework of the native wireless networking protocol. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247370 | Training Signals for Selecting Antennas and Beams in Mimo Wireless Lans - A computer implemented method selects antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output wireless local area network that includes multiple stations, and each station includes a set of antennas. Multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets are received in a station. Each sounding packet corresponds to a different subset of the set of antennas. A channel matrix is estimated from the multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets, and a subset of antennas is selected according to the channel matrix. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247371 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE SAME - Provided are a wireless network system and a method of configuring the same, in which stations that perform directional communication in a high-frequency band can share information regarding their communication capabilities with each other. An apparatus for managing stations that transmit/receive data using millimeter wave (mmWave) includes a communication capability information management module which receives an association request frame and determines the communication capability of an associating station that has transmitted the association request frame based on the association request frame; an information-frame-generation module which generates a wireless video area network (WVAN) information frame specifying the communication capability of the associating station; and a communication module which transmits the WVAN information frame, wherein the apparatus serves as a wireless network coordinator. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247372 | Data Synchronization for Multicast/Broadcast Service in Wireless Relay Network - Wireless communication relay networks and techniques for providing data synchronization in Multicast Broadcast Services (MBS). | 10-09-2008 |
20080253339 | Interconnection Device For a Radiocommunication Network - Local radiocommunication device comprising an IP access point adapted to communicate outwards from the network in IP mode, a point-to-point communication module adapted to communicate with a terminal according to at least one point-to-point communication protocol, and an interface adapted to allow the IP access point to communicate with the point-to-point communication module and thus to allow the said terminal to communicate with the outside of the local radiocommunication network. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253340 | Hybrid Mobile Communication System Comprising Multi-Hop-Ad-Hoc and Circuit-Switched Modes - According to the present invention, connection can be always maintained between the mobile node and the access router, and disruption of on-going transport session can be prevented by making effective use of two architectures (hierarchical and mesh architectures). The mobile nodes | 10-16-2008 |
20080253341 | Method for Improving Self-Coexistence of Wireless Communication Networks - Self-coexistence of first and second wireless communication networks ( | 10-16-2008 |
20080253342 | Signaling in convergence sublayer in WiMAX - Examples and implementations of techniques for providing an efficient and flexible convergence sublayer service enablement strategy in establishing the initial service flows and pre-provision service flows during the initial Mobile Subscriber (MS) Terminal network entry time (i.e. attachment to the WiMAX access network). | 10-16-2008 |
20080253343 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD OF SEARCHING - A communication terminal capable of wireless LAN communication includes: a search unit that searches for a base station that should be an access point; a database that stores an application of the wireless LAN communication and search information utilized for searching associated with the application; a set-up unit that sets up the application; and a determination unit that determines search information in accordance with the application, by retrieving search information corresponding to the application from the storage unit. The search unit searches for a search-targeted base station that should be an access point, by targeting only a base station that corresponds to a base station identifier contained in the search information, for a predetermined period. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253344 | Wireless LAN medium access controller supporting mode change and mode change method therreof - A wireless LAN medium access controller supporting mode change and the mode change method thereof are proposed. A physical layer detects signal strength in the environment and writes a mode index value of the stronger signal into a register. When the written mode index value is different from a mode index value in the communication system, a medium access controller is informed to perform mode change. The physical layer then sends out an interrupt signal to a central processor and sends the mode index value to the central processor for comparison via a DMA module and a memory. An interface module is used to access the mode index value in the memory for providing an external interface for the medium access control layer. When the mode index value doesn't conform to the signal in the environment, a software layer in the medium access controller is used for mode change. | 10-16-2008 |
20080259881 | Method of Testing the Availability of a Connection to a Home Authentication Server Prior to Associating With a Wlan Access Point - A method of determining availability of a connection between a wireless local area network and a home network of a mobile user device prior to initiating connection or authentication comprises selecting a network device; and sending a probe signaling message comprising a user device to the selected network device. The network device uses this home identifier data to formulate a signaling message that it sends towards the appropriate home network to contract a home authentication server. An indication to the user device of the result of the attempt is returned. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259882 | Determining a WLAN Regulatory Domain - A mobile station is in a wireless local area network ‘WLAN’ environment and receives beacon frames that lack any WLAN regulatory information. The mobile station nonetheless determines a WLAN regulatory domain and configures the physical layer of its WLAN interface for operation in that WLAN regulatory domain. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259883 | Method and System for Client-Driven Channel Management in Wireless Communication Networks - A method and system for assigning channels to a plurality of access points (APs) of a wireless communication network is disclosed. The method includes obtaining first information regarding first interference experienced by a first client due to multiple APs being positioned in proximity of that client, and obtaining second information regarding second interference experienced by either the first client or a first of the APs with respect to which the first client is associated, where the second interference is due either to others of the APs that are in proximity to the first AP, or to others of the clients that are in proximity to either the first client or the first AP. Additionally, the method further includes determining channel assignments for the plurality of APs based upon each of the first and second information. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259884 | IMS Network-Based Multimedia Briefcase - A system for managing multimedia is provided. The system includes an IMS (Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem) network that has a media server and a Call Session Control Function (CSCF) server. The system includes a data store that is in communication with the IMS network. The system also includes an application configured to promote storing multimedia data to the data store. The multimedia data is created by a client. The client communicates with the CSCF and the multimedia server to promote providing the multimedia data for storage to the data store and to promote retrieving the multimedia data stored on the data store. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259885 | DUAL MODE DEVICE WITH MAC ADDRESS CAPTURE AND PAIRING - Seamless connectivity by a user device between a licensed and an unlicensed network is provided through capturing of MAC address information relating to one or more access points servicing the licensed and/or the unlicensed networks. One or more access points can be chosen as a designated access point. If the access point is available for communication with the device and other device criteria is met, the access point is designated. If designated, when the device is in vicinity of the access point seamless and transparent connectivity is automatically established with that access point. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259886 | Plain Old Telephony Equivalent Services Supported Via Unlicensed Mobile Access - An access point ( | 10-23-2008 |
20080259887 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PRESENTING MULTIMEDIA OBJECTS IN CONJUNCTION WITH VOICE CALLS FROM A CIRCUIT-SWITCHED NETWORK - The present invention provides systems and methods for presenting a multimedia object to a handset in conjunction with voice call from a circuit switched (CS) network. The voice call is delivered over the CS network and the multimedia object is delivered over a packet-switched (PS) network. The multimedia object can be rendered as a voice call alert, during the voice call, or after the voice call. The multimedia object can be an advertisement object and can be provided by a third party. The systems and methods described are applicable to IMS and non-IMS networks. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259888 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - Disclosed herein is a communications system that uses multiple transmission media, the system including: communications interface combining adapters connected via a power-line transmission path and a wireless transmission path between wireless LAN access points, each adapter having a power line communication interface and a wireless LAN interface, the wireless LAN interface having an access point function and an inter-access point communication function; wireless LAN terminals connected to the access points included in the adapters; and a wired LAN terminal connected to a wired LAN interface included in at least some of the adapters. Data transfer between the wireless LAN terminals or between one of the wireless LAN terminals and the wired LAN terminal is performed via a high-speed combined interface logically formed by using the power-line transmission path and inter-access point communication between the adapters to which the terminals participating in the data transfer are connected. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259889 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TERMINAL ENTERING AND LEAVING IDLE MODE - A communication method and system for terminal entering and leaving idle mode in a mobile communication system are disclosed. The communication method for a terminal entering an idle mode includes: triggering a flow of entering the idle mode for the terminal; and a serving access service network gateway sending the information of anchor function entities serving the terminal to an anchor function entity information storing unit, so as to store the information. With the technical scheme of the invention, when the anchor function entities serving the terminal are not located at the same physical entity, the addressing process can be accomplished correctly, and the smoothness of the network service flow can be guaranteed. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259890 | VoIP Service Threshold Determination by Home Wireless Router - A home wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) that supports wireless communications within a WLAN service area. The home wireless router establishes broadband communications via a broadband connection with a VoIP service accumulator. The home wireless router services a plurality of wireless terminals within the WLAN service area, including at least one Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) wireless terminal. The home wireless router receives a query from the VoIP service accumulator requesting information regarding the home wireless router's prior servicing of (or ability to service) VoIP calls. In response, the home wireless router responds to the VoIP service accumulator with information regarding the home wireless router's prior servicing of (or ability to service) VoIP calls. The home wireless router and the VoIP service accumulator subsequently service VoIP calls within the WLAN based upon the information regarding the home wireless router's prior servicing of (or ability to service) VoIP calls. | 10-23-2008 |
20080267142 | Distributed Antenna Wlan Access-Point System and Method - A wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) system comprises a first plurality of distributed remote antenna units operative to transmit and receive RF signals and a central WLAN beam-forming unit connected to each distributed remote antenna unit and operative to provide communication between the antenna units and a second plurality of wireless clients. The WLAN AP system can be used for simultaneous communications with the wireless clients over the same radio frequency (RF) channel while avoiding mutual interferences. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267143 | TERMINAL INITIATED CONTEXT PRESERVATION - A method, a system, a network device, a terminal device, and computer programs for controlling a packet data protocol context in a mobile communication system. According to an example embodiment, an enhanced context modification request may be generated at a terminal device of the mobile communication system by adding a preservation information indicating a desired preservation of a packet data protocol context. The enhanced context modification request may be transmitted towards a core network of the mobile communication system, and a context-related decision may be controlled at the core network based on the preservation information. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267144 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING BROADCAST AND/OR MULTICAST BASED COMMUNICATION SESSIONS FOR MOBILE NODES | 10-30-2008 |
20080267145 | Methods and Apparatus for Managing Wireless Networks Using Geographical-Level and Site-Level Visualization - A WLAN system and method enables network modeling and management through an easy-to-use user interface. A console coupled to the WLAN is configured to display a first set of graphical entities representing locations of the multiple sites in a geographical view, and display a second set of graphical entities in a site view representing a subset of the components selected in response to user input. An XML format may be used to display the various views on a browser operating within the console. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267146 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING PACKETS - A system and method for sending and receiving packets is provided. An embodiment includes a system comprising a wireless communication device configured to communicate with at least one application server via device access node and a wireless local area network. The wireless communication device is configured to communicate with the device access node through the wireless local area network using at least one protocol layer that is native to the wireless local area network, and using at least one protocol layer that is native to the device access node. The device access node is configured to send and receive application information carried over above-described protocol layers. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267147 | Automatic Discovery and Connectivity Protocol for Bluetooth Scatternet Formation - A system and method for wireless communication by a plurality of devices in a scatternet network is provided. The method includes discovering one or more of the plurality of devices in the scatternet network. The method includes determining roles for one or more of the plurality of devices, and transferring data between one or more of the plurality of devices. The discovering of other devices, determining roles, and transferring data between one or more of the plurality of devices occur substantially simultaneously. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267148 | Communication unit, system and method for saving power therein - A communication unit comprises a receiver for receiving a message sent on an allocation channel, packet identifying logic, capable of identifying a data type of the received message, operably coupled to buffer logic for buffering data packets to be sent to the second communication unit. In an active mode of operation, the receiver of the communication unit is capable of intermittently receiving the message sent on the allocation channel and transition to continuously receive the message sent on the allocation channel in response to either: the buffer logic identifying that data packets are to be transferred to the second communication unit; or the packet identifying logic receiving a communication resource allocation message and identifying resource allocation data therein. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267149 | Selecting receiver parameters based upon transmitting device identification via transmission characteristics - A wireless device includes at least one antenna, an RF interface, and processing circuitry coupled to the RF interface and indirectly to the at least one antenna. The wireless device identifies other wireless devices that service based upon transmission characteristics of wireless signals received from other wireless devices and/or relative positions of the other wireless devices with respect to itself. In a first operational period, the wireless device determines transmission characteristics of the other wireless devices. Then, during a second operational period, without further interaction with the other wireless devices, the wireless device determines communication link characteristics based simply upon transmission characteristics of the other wireless devices. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267150 | Motion adaptive wireless local area nework, wireless communications device and integrated circuits for use therewith - A circuit includes an on-chip gyrating circuit that generates a motion parameter based on motion of the circuit. A global positioning system (GPS) receiver receives a GPS signal and that generates GPS position data based on the GPS signal. A processing module processes the motion parameter to produce motion data, generates position information based on at least one of the GPS position data and the motion data, converts outbound data into an outbound symbol stream, and converts an inbound symbol stream into inbound data. A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver section generates an outbound RF signal from the outbound symbol stream, and converts an inbound RF signal into the inbound symbol stream. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267151 | Wireless Local Area Network Antenna Array - A wireless local area network (“WLAN”) antenna array (“WLANAA”) is disclosed. The WLANAA may include a circular housing having a plurality of radial sectors and a plurality of primary antenna elements. Each individual primary antenna element of the plurality of primary antenna elements may be positioned within an individual radial sector of the plurality of radial sectors. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267152 | MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE (MBMS) SERVICE DISCOVERY - A system and method for discovery of and access to service in a Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service (MBMS) environment by user equipment (UE) when roaming. The UE may be associated with a plurality of URLs including a home URL and a symbolic URL. When the UE is roaming, the symbolic URL is resolved by a local DNS server to a local URL that is assessed by a local Service Discovery server to determine the MBMS services that may be accessed by the UE in the visiting network. Further, when roaming, the home URL is resolved by the local DNS server and forwarded to a home Service Discovery server where the home URL is assessed to determine the MBMS services that may be accessed by the UE in the home network. Accordingly, the UE is operable to access home network MBMS services as well as visiting network MBMS services when roaming. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267153 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HOME NODE-B IDENTIFICATION AND ACCESS RESTRICTION - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), including a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), for identifying a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell are disclosed. The WTRU receives a broadcast from a cell including a cell identifier (ID). If the cell ID is associated with a CSG cell, the WTRU determines whether the CSG ID is programmed in the USIM. The cell broadcast may include a single bit information element (IE) indicating that the cell is a CSG cell. If the cell ID is a CSG ID, the cell ID may further include a plurality of fields which indicate at least one of a country, a region, an operator, and a home evolved Node-B (HeNB) number. The cell broadcast may further include a bit indicating whether the CSG cell is public or private. The cell broadcast may further include a bit indicating that emergency calls are allowed from all users. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267154 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AVOIDING HANGING PDP CONTEXTS - A method and system for avoiding hanging Packet Data Protocol (PDP) contexts in a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network. A time-out period is included in a request message to create a PDP context. The request message is transmitted from a first GPRS Support Node (GSN) to a second GSN. The second GSN receives the request message and transmits a response message to the first GSN. If the second GSN is unable to create the PDP context within the time-out period, the response message informs the first GSN that creation of the PDP context has been aborted. A Network Service Access Point Identifier (NSAPI) may be included in the response message so that the first GSN may request the second GSN to delete the request for creating the PDP context after a N3-T3 timeout of the first GSN has expired. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267155 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE SUPPORTING ENHANCED CALL FUNCTIONS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit services voice communications in a WLAN with at least one other wireless device and includes a WLAN interface, a transcoder, and a switch box. The WLAN interface wirelessly communicates with at least one wireless device to receive inbound packetized audio data from the at least one wireless device and to transmit outbound packetized audio data to the at least one wireless device. The transcoder receives the inbound packetized audio data and converts the inbound packetized audio data to inbound Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) WLAN audio data. The WLAN interface also receives outbound PCM WLAN audio data and converts the outbound PCM WLAN audio data to the outbound packetized audio data. The switch box operably couples between the transcoder and a PCM bus, to which an audio COder/DECoder (CODEC) couples. A speaker and a microphone coupled to the audio CODEC. The switch box enables the wireless transceiving integrated circuit to perform call conferencing operations, call forwarding operations, call hold operations, call muting operations, and call waiting operations. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273505 | Providing Handover/Handoff for Dual Mode (Wifi/GSM) Mobile Terminals in a GSM Network Using A Three-Way Calling Mechanism - Current WiFi and WiMAX access points are designed to provide enterprise grade services to consumers. With the proliferation of IP based services, specifically Voice over IP (VoIP), problems emerge with the reliability of the access points providing telecom services. Specifically, 911 services and maintenance are perceived to be significantly inferior in the VoIP environment. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273506 | Adaptive Beamforming Configuration Methods And Apparatus For Wireless Access Points Serving As Handoff Indication Mechanisms In Wireless Local Area Networks - Methods and apparatus for use in configuring a wireless access point (AP) which serves as a handoff indication mechanism (“AP tripwire”) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) for mobile device handoffs between the WLAN and a wireless wide area network (WWAN) are described. During a configuration procedure or training mode of operation of the wireless AP, radio frequency (RF) signals transmitted from a plurality of communication devices are received at the wireless AP. The plurality of communication devices include a first group of communication devices positioned at locations of undesired RF coverage of the wireless AP, outside of an RF coverage boundary of a WLAN coverage region of one or more other wireless APs of the WLAN. The plurality of communication devices also include a second group of communication devices positioned at locations of desired RF coverage of the wireless AP, around the RF coverage boundary of the WLAN coverage region and within the WWAN coverage region. Wireless transceiver parameters of the wireless AP are automatically determined and set to adjust boundaries of an RF coverage region, such that RF signal coverage of the first group of communication devices is minimized but RF signal coverage of the second group of communication devices is maximized. Preferably, the parameters of the wireless transceiver are determined through use of an adaptive beamforming technique (e.g. a minimax optimization) which is performed automatically by the wireless AP without user intervention. After the configuration procedure, the wireless AP operates with use of the configured wireless transceiver parameters in a normal, steady-state mode of operation as the AP tripwire of the WLAN. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273507 | Direct station-to-station link between wireless network devices - Some embodiments of the invention may establish a direct station-to-station-link (STSL) between client devices in an IEEE 802.11 network by using the payload portion of communicated frames to set up the STSL. Legacy access points may be able to handle this procedure without having to be modified, as they would to implement a Direct Link Setup (DLS) approach. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273508 | PACKETIZED AUDIO DATA OPERATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit includes a WLAN interface, an input buffer, an input buffer controller, and a processor. The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit may also include an output buffer, an output buffer controller, a transcoder, and/or an audio Coder-Decoder (CODEC). The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit is installed in a WLAN device that services voice communications. The input buffer receives packetized audio data from the WLAN interface. When the input buffer satisfies a buffer vacancy threshold, the processor and the input buffer controller cooperatively operate to fill at least a portion of the input buffer with packetized audio data. The processor copies packetized audio data from the input buffer and fills the input buffer with the copied packetized audio data to maintain an audio pattern in the input buffer. The input buffer controller fills the input buffer when the processor is available and after copying/filling is no longer effective. The processor operates to maintain the audio pattern when additional packetized audio data is received by the WLAN interface. These operations are also performed for the output buffer, which receives packetized audio data from the transcoder and writes the packetized audio data to the WLAN interface. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273509 | Method, System And Device For Optimizing Routing In Mobile IPv6 - This disclosure relates to a method, system and device for optimizing routing in a mobile IPv6. The core is that the communication between a mobile node and a correspondence node is performed in a routing optimization mode, while providing a secure verification, so that the care-of address of the mobile node would not be obtained by a distrustful third party or a distrustful correspondence node. Moreover, to further ensure the privacy of the location of the mobile node, the current care-of address of the mobile node is shielded from the correspondence node by separating the binding cache from the correspondence node. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279158 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION CONNECTION AND METHOD FOR USING A COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - A communication device including a communication connection establishing circuit configured to establish an ad hoc network communication connection between the communication device, a second communication device and a third communication device, a generating circuit configured to generate encryption parameters to be used by the second communication device and the third communication device for encrypting and decrypting data transmitted between the second communication device and the third communication device via the communication connection when the first communication device has left the communication connection, a signaling circuit configured to signal the encryption parameters to the second communication device and the third communication device, and a disconnection circuit configured to remove the communication device from the communication connection. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279159 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT MPEG TRANSMISSION OVER 802.11 - In one embodiment, a method includes characterizing a first packet of a video stream as being associated with a first frame type, wherein the video stream is arranged to be transmitted on a wireless local area network. The method also includes processing at least the first packet of the video stream as being associated with the first frame type if the first packet of the video stream is characterized as being of the first frame type. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279160 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HAVING A DEVICE COORDINATOR SELECTION CAPABILITY - A system and method for wireless communication having a device coordinator selection capability are disclosed. In one aspect, the method comprises determining a coordinator priority of each device based on a static priority table, the table assigning a priority to each type of devices. The method further comprises selecting a first device among the plurality of devices as the coordinator based at least in part on the coordinator priority of each device, and a coordinator candidate from the plurality of devices except the current coordinator, based on the coordinator priority of each device and probing results. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279161 | Modifying remote service discovery based on presence - Modifying remote service discovery based on presence involves identifying service discovery data using ad-hoc, peer-to-peer, service discovery protocols of a local network. The service discovery data is aggregated via an entity of the local network. Presence data associated with a remote device located outside of the local network is identified and the aggregated service discovery data is altered based on the presence data. The altered aggregated service discovery data is made available to the remote device using out-of-band communications. The out-of-band communications are different from the service discovery protocols of the local network. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279162 | Shared processing between wireless interface devices of a host device - An integrated circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives first packetized data between a host module and a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol, wherein the first wireless interface circuit includes a first processing module that processes the first packetized data. A second wireless interface circuit, coupled to the first wireless interface device, transceives second packetized data between the host module and a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol, wherein the second wireless interface circuit includes a second processing module that processes the second packetized data, wherein the second wireless interface circuit is operable to assign a first processing task to the first processing module and wherein the first processing task relates to the processing of the second packetized data. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279163 | Cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device with acknowledge priority - A wireless communication device includes a host module. A first wireless interface device transmits a first outbound packet in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol at a first power level and a first rate during a first time interval and that transmits a second outbound packet at a second power level and a second rate during a second time interval, wherein the first power level is less than the second power level and wherein the second rate is less than the first rate. A second wireless interface device transceives data between the host module and a second external device during the second time interval in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol. An antenna section provides at least one radio frequency communication path between the first wireless interface device and the first external device and between the second wireless interface device and the second external device. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279164 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO A WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention provides a method for connecting with a wireless network device. The method includes following steps: upon configuring the wireless network device, executing a first target procedure to connect the wireless network device with the terminal device; executing a second target procedure, allowing the sharing device to be searched by the wireless network device according to at least one target signal; executing a third target procedure to select a target sharing device corresponding to the wireless network device according to the target signal; and connecting wirelessly the wireless network device with the target sharing device. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279165 | MULTI-CHANNEL INTER BASE-STATION COMMUNICATION - The invention relates generally to communication systems and in particular to radio frequency (RF) architectures. Some embodiments of the invention are directed towards a multi-channel inter-BS communication system. The multi-channel inter-BS communication system includes a plurality of co-existing wireless regional area network (WRAN) cells, wherein each of the plurality of co-existing WRAN cells includes a plurality of data frames and at the end of each of the plurality of data frames is a slotted co-existence window. Additional embodiments of the invention include CB frames, fixed-slot host scheduling and modulo scheduling. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279166 | WIRELESS-AWARE NETWORK SWITCH - An application-specific integrated circuit and related network switch are disclosed. The integrated circuit includes switch circuitry for receiving a 802.11 wireless data frame and forwarding it to a predetermined port. Inspection circuitry is provided for inspecting attributes of the data frame. Decision circuitry is provided for instructing the switch circuitry to forward the data frame based on the attributes, both 802.3 wired and 802.11 wireless. | 11-13-2008 |
20080285526 | SIGNAL ACQUISITION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that generate pilots for signal acquisition in a wireless communication system based on time domain sequences. The pilots may be generated by a base station and transmitted in a pilot field to one or more access terminals to aid in signal acquisition at each of the access terminals. One of the pilots may be common to all access points in the wireless communication system, thereby allowing an access terminal to obtain a timing estimate for the system while minimizing the effects of interference variations between base stations. Further, one or more generated pilots may be unique to each access point in order to allow each respective access point to be identified by its generated pilots. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285527 | Method and Apparatus for Sharing Common Interest Links Between Communication Devices - Techniques for processing data related to common interests of two or more users of a communication system are disclosed. In an exemplary method disclosed hererin, the occurrence of a trigger event at a first communication device is detected, wherein the trigger event is related to communications between the first communication device and a second communication device. In response to the trigger event, the transmission of a first data object to the second communication device is initiated, wherein the first data object comprises information indicating one or more interests of a user of the first communication device. The exemplary method further comprises receiving and processing a second data object formed in response to the first data object, the second data comprising data related to one or more common interests shared by the users of the first and second communication devices. Similar methods suitable for implementing at a user communication device or at a data object server are disclosed, as are correspondingly configured devices. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285528 | System and Method for WLAN Multi-Channel Redundancy for VoIP Optimization - A system includes a wireless switch and a plurality of wireless nodes. A mobile device connects to the wireless switch by communicating a packet to the wireless switch via two or more of the plurality of wireless nodes. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285529 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING PILOT SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a pilot signal in a wireless communication system. A reference cell scrambling code or one of a plurality of additional cell scrambling codes is selected for each combination of one of a plurality of first scrambling codes (PSCs) applied to a first synchronization channel (P-SCH) and one of a plurality of second scrambling codes (SSCs) applied to a second synchronization channel (S-SCH). It is determined whether to transmit the pilot signal using the reference cell scrambling code or one of the plurality of additional cell scrambling codes. The reference cell scrambling code or the additional cell scrambling code is generated according to the determination. The pilot signal is transmitted using the generated reference cell scrambling code or the additional cell scrambling code. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285530 | Wireless Node Location Mechanism Featuring Definition of Search Region to Optimize Location Computation - A wireless node location mechanism that defines a search region to optimize the computations associated with estimating the location of a given wireless node. According to one implementation, a coverage map associated with each radio receiver that records signal strength data is defined out to a threshold signal strength level. Before computing the estimated location of a given wireless nodes, a search region is defined based on the intersection of the coverage maps associated with each radio receiver that detects the wireless node. Some implementations use information provided by the fact that certain radio receivers did not detect the wireless node to further optimize the location estimate. By defining a search region, which is a generally small area relative to the space encompassed by an entire RF environment, the present invention provides several advantages, such as reducing the processing time and/or power to compute estimated locations for wireless nodes. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285531 | High frequency module - A high frequency module comprises: a switch circuit connected to two antenna terminals; a diplexer connected to two reception signal terminals and the switch circuit; and a diplexer connected to two transmission signal terminals and the switch circuit. Each of the diplexers incorporates two band-pass filters and a low-pass filter. Each of the band-pass filters is formed by using a resonant circuit. | 11-20-2008 |
20080291879 | Man-Portable Incident Command Platform - A man-portable incident command platform is provided. A controller for a rechargeable battery system is disclosed that evaluates whether a cover of the rechargeable battery system is open or closed; determines whether an AC power source is available; evaluates a charge level (for example, from a system management bus) of one or more batteries in the rechargeable battery system; and enables a charging circuit for one or more batteries requiring a charge based on whether the cover of the rechargeable battery system is open or closed and if the AC power source is available A charging circuit for the rechargeable battery system is disclosed that comprises one or more programmable voltage sources for charging one or more batteries in the rechargeable battery system. A power distribution unit (PDU) is disclosed for a rechargeable battery system that supplies power to a plurality of devices each having a different voltage requirement The PDU comprises a plurality of DC/DC converters for converting a first DC value to a plurality of DC levels, wherein each of the plurality of DC levels are associated with a different one of the voltage requirements. A portable communications device is disclosed that comprises a plurality of wireless backhaul connections to a public network; and a mobile mesh network connection for establish a wireless local area network. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291880 | RANDOM ACCESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The random access communication method according to the present invention includes a mobile station transmitting a transmission continuation request signal which requests a continuation of transmission of random access data to a base station during transmission of the random access data, the base station judging, upon receiving a transmission continuation request signal from the mobile station, whether or not to permit a continuation of transmission of the random access data depending on the current communication situation, the base station transmitting a transmission continuation permission signal or a transmission continuation rejection signal to the mobile station depending on whether or not to permit the continuation of transmission of the random access data, and the mobile station continuing, upon receiving the transmission continuation permission signal from the base station, transmission of the random access data. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291881 | Communication Network - A communication network ( | 11-27-2008 |
20080291882 | Aggregated Links - A method and a transport scheme for packets of traffic over a logical link made up of the aggregation of several physical links ( | 11-27-2008 |
20080291883 | MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND STATION SUPPORTING MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE - Provided are a management procedure in a wireless communication system and a station supporting the management procedure. In the method, a requested station receives a location request frame including a location request option sub-element which contains a value for indicating a timing measurement request from a requesting station. The requested station transmits an acknowledgement frame in response to the location request frame to the requesting station. The requested station transmits to the requesting station a location response frame including a timing measurement sub-element which contains a time difference between a transmission end time of the acknowledgement frame and a reception end time of the location request frame in response to the location request frame. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291884 | System and method for transmitting/receiving signal in communcation system - A system and method are disclosed for transmitting/receiving a signal in a communication system in which a first communication system and a second communication system coexist, the second communication system being evolved from the first communication system and being capable of using a control signal and a broadcast signal used in the first communication system. The method of transmitting a signal includes the steps of transmitting a first message including common control information and frame control information for the first communication system in a first frame, transmitting a second message including common control information and frame control information for the second communication system in a second frame, and signaling location information of the transmitted second message in the second frame. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291885 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION OF MIPv6 MOBILE NODES - A method for communication of MIPv6 mobile nodes, comprising: the mobile node accesses network at access location and obtains care of address, calculating a privacy identifier PID using the care of address etc. the mobile node replaces its home address by the PID, and sends the PID and the care of address together as binding update message to the home agent and correspondent node, the home agent and correspondent node recover the home address for the mobile node using the PID after they have received the binding update message. The method for communication of MIPv6 mobile nodes according to the present invention uses that a configuring replaced identifier replacing the home address is sent, thereby hiding Ipv6 address. By setting PID and its algorithm, we improve the sequence number in the binding update messages enabling the sequence number has randomness, and prevent the intercepting person continue tracking the mobile node through the home address. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291886 | VoIP WLAN CONFERENCE CALLING VIA HOME WIRELESS ROUTERS - A home wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and services a plurality of wireless terminals within the WLAN service area including at least one Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) wireless terminal. The home wireless router receives a request from the VoIP wireless terminal to establish a VoIP conference call with at least two other VoIP wireless terminals. The home wireless router interacts with the VoIP service accumulator to determine at least one other home wireless router required to service the VoIP conference call, queries the at least one other home wireless router to determine its ability to service the VoIP conference call for at least one serviced VoIP wireless terminal, and receives a response from the at least one other home wireless router. The home wireless router, the at least one other home wireless router, and the VoIP service accumulator then set up and service the VoIP conference call. | 11-27-2008 |
20080298327 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING GATEWAY BANDWIDTH SHARING AD-HOC NETWORKS - Systems and methods for establishing gateway bandwidth sharing ad hoc networks. In a first aspect, a method includes establishing a relationship with a gateway that retrieves data from a remote location and divides the data into at least a first portion and a second portion. The method further includes establishing an ad hoc network comprising at least one local lender, receiving the first portion from the gateway via the at least one local lender, receiving the second portion from the gateway, and joining the first portion and the second portion to re-create the data. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298328 | TRUSTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS WITH STATION-TO-STATION LINK ASSOCIATION - After establishing a direct station-to-station link (STSL) with a second wireless client device in a centralized network, a first wireless client device may initiate a process with the second wireless device to secure the link. Prior to securing the link, any exchange of frames that are routed through the intermediate access point (AP) may place the related security information in the payload of the frames. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298329 | Method of Beacon Management For Merging Piconets - A method for synchronizing communications between first and second piconets is provided. It is determined whether superframes corresponding to the first and second piconets are synchronized according to respective beacon period start times from the detected beacons. When the superframes are not synchronized, a type of overlap is determined. The type of overlap includes 1) an overlap between beacon periods, 2) an overlap between reservation periods and 3) an overlap between beacon periods and reservation periods of the superframes. The first and second piconets are merged into a single piconet according to rules based on the determined type of overlap. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298330 | Using Presence Detection To Control A Wireless Network - A wireless system coupled to a local area network (LAN) ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298331 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - When a wireless communication network is built in an ad hoc mode, it is possible to appropriately build the wireless communication network regardless of start timings of wireless communication functions of image capturing apparatuses. In order to achieve the object, there is provided the image capturing apparatus which is capable of building a wireless communication network by wirelessly connecting to another image capturing apparatus in an ad hoc mode, and which is capable of switching between a function as a creator and a function as a joiner, including a start unit configured to start as the creator, a unit configured to execute a scan process, and a unit configured to determine based on a result of the scan process whether to function as the creator and to function as the joiner, and to control the image capturing apparatus in accordance with the determination result. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298332 | PACKET DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION AND CONTROL STATION - A packet data communication method including a radio base station receiving packet data from a mobile terminal, and generating a data frame having a packet frame error detection code and transmitting to a control station. The control station detects an error in a packet frame contained in the data frame based on the error detection code. Packet frames with no error detected therein are separated, while a sequence number of the packet frame with an error detected therein is detected. The packet frames are arranged in order of sequence number, and the arrival of a packet frame having a missing sequence number is awaited. After a waiting period packet frames, other than those with an error detected therein, are arranged in continuous order by sequence numbers. | 12-04-2008 |
20080298333 | SCANNING PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS LAN, STATION SUPPORTING THE SAME, AND FRAME FORMAT THEREFOR - Provided is a scan procedure in a wireless local access network, and station and frame format for the scan procedure. In the scan procedure, a second station receives from a first station a probe request frame which comprises a Homogeneous Extended Service Set Identifier (HESSID) field containing a desired HESSID of the first station and a network type field containing a desired network type of the first station. And, the second station transmits a probe response frame to the first station in response to the probe request frame in case that the HESSID field in the probe request frame is set to a wildcard HESSID or the HESSID of a second station which received the probe request frame, and the network type field in the probe request frame is set to a wildcard network type or the network type of the second station. | 12-04-2008 |
20080304455 | Method, System, Mobile Communication Terminal and a Node Adapted for End-to-End Quality Access Selection of an Access Network - In a method of selecting an access network from among one or more access networks capable of providing service to a mobile communication terminal, measuring (S | 12-11-2008 |
20080304456 | Communication System, Radio Lan Base Station Control Device, and Radio Lan Base Station Device - There are provided a communication system, a radio LAN base station control device, and a radio LAN base station device capable of increasing the control reliability and improving communication stability and safety between the radio LAN base station control device and the radio LAN base station device. In this communication system ( | 12-11-2008 |
20080304457 | Secure mobile IPv6 registration - In one embodiment, a method comprises receiving by an agent a request from a network node for generation of a secure IPv6 address for use by the network node, the request including a selected subset of parameters selected by the network node and required for generation of the secure IPv6 address according to a prescribed secure address generation procedure, the selected subset including at least a public key owned by the network node; dynamically generating by the agent at least a second of the parameters required for generation of the secure IPv6 address; generating by the agent the secure IPv6 address based on the selected subset and the second of the parameters required for generation of the secure IPv6 address; and outputting, to the network node, an acknowledgment to the request and that includes the secure IPv6 address, and the parameters required for generation of the secure IPv6 address. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304458 | Inter-Working of Networks - In a heterogeneous network environment comprising a plurality of first wireless networks and a second wireless network, said plurality of first wireless network utilizing a first wireless communication protocol and said second wireless network utilizing a second wireless communication protocol different to said first, a method of gathering data from said plurality of first wireless networks, which method comprises the steps of: electronically extracting a network identifier from at least one of said first wireless networks; transmitting said network identifier to a remote server; and said remote server compiling a database of network identifiers received from said plurality of first wireless networks, storing of said database facilitating inter-working between one or more of said plurality of first wireless networks and said second wireless network. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304459 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A CONTROL STATION, A METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A TERMINAL STATION, A CONTROL STATION, A TERMINAL STATION, AND A COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A method for controlling a control station (H | 12-11-2008 |
20080304460 | CELLULAR NETWORK/WLAN VoIP SERVICE INTERACTION BY HOME WIRELESS ROUTER - A home wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). The home wireless router services a plurality of wireless terminals within the WLAN service area, the plurality of wireless terminals including at least one Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) wireless terminal. The home wireless router receives a request to terminate a WLAN VoIP call to the VoIP wireless terminal. The home wireless router determines that the VoIP wireless terminal is currently servicing a cellular call via a cellular network. The home wireless router causes the cellular network to be misled into concluding that another cellular call is to be serviced by the VoIP wireless terminal, the cellular network places the cellular call on hold in the incorrect conclusion that it will service the another cellular call, and the WLAN VoIP call is terminated to the VoIP wireless terminal. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304461 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-NETWORK COVERAGE - A system and method are provided for a multi-network wireless communications access terminal (AT) to access multi-network coverage. The method registers a multi-network AT in a first communications network. In response to registering with the first network, the AT receives information via the first network that is required for accessing a second communications network (e.g., an IEEE 802.20 or 1xEV-DO network). The AT obtains services accessed via the second network, in response to the access information received via the first network. For example, the second network access information may be system information, channel information, or access point parameters. The AT retains the option of obtaining services accessed via the first network if the second network cannot be accessing the second network. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310375 | Return Routability Optimisation - A method of managing switching of a virtual private network (VPN) tunnel termination point from a first address to a second address. The VPN operates between a fixed network node and a mobile node which defines the termination point. The address of the mobile mode is switched from the first address to the second address and a notification from the mobile node to the fixed node is sent to indicate that the address of the mobile has changed from the first address to the second address. Verification of the trustworthiness of the second address is also then made. A searching manager for performing the method is also disclosed. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310376 | Method and System for Routing Packets in an Ad Hoc Wireless Network - A system for routing packets in an ad hoc wireless network. In response to entering the ad hoc wireless network, location data is broadcast to other nodes within the ad hoc wireless network. Location data is received from the other nodes within the ad hoc wireless network. The received location data is recorded in a routing table. In response to determining that one or more packets need to be transmitted, a best route is calculated to transmit the one or more packets within the ad hoc wireless network using data in the routing table. Then, the one or more packets are transmitted to a node within the ad hoc wireless network based on the calculated best route. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310377 | Method and system for providing routing protocols in a frequency hopping spread spectrum network - A method and system for providing a network and routing protocol for utility services are disclosed. In one embodiment, a computer-implemented method comprises discovering a utility network, wherein a utility device (for example, a constant powered meter) sends network discovery messages to find the utility network. Neighboring meters are discovered and the device listens for advertised routes for one or more networks from the neighbors. The device is then registered with one or more utility networks, receiving a unique address for each network registration. Also illustrated in this invention disclosure is how each device of a class of devices (for example, battery powered meter) finds and associates itself with another device (for example, constant powered meter). The constant powered meter also registers its associate battery powered meter with the utility networks. The constant powered meter registers itself with the access points and the upstream nodes in the path out of each network. Each upstream node can independently make forwarding decisions on both upstream and downstream packets i.e. choose the next hop according to the best information available to it. The constant powered meter can sense transient link problems, outage problems, and traffic characteristics. It uses the information to find the best route out of and within each network. Each network device thus maintains multi-egress, multi-ingress network routing options both for itself and the device(s) associated with it. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310378 | SELECTIVE PHASE CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiple-phase selective connection establishment in wireless communications networks. Radio resource control (RRC) layer communications can be instantiated between a mobile device and base station. Additional information can be required by a downstream network component regarding the mobile device. Accordingly, the RRC resources can be utilized to transmit the additional information from the mobile device to the network component to facilitate the multiple-phase establishment. This can be accomplished using non-access stratum (NAS) messages. Further, the information can relate to authorization, security re-configuration, context re-synchronization, an identity of the mobile device, and the like. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310379 | Short-Distance Wireless Data Transmitting Apparatus and Method - A short distance wireless data transmission system and method which are capable of minimizing data loss are disclosed. The short distance wireless data transmission system can monitor variation amount of memory data, which is buffered in the master side when data transmission errors occur, can perform re-transmission of data having transmission errors, and can perform a change toward new replacement channel without interference if variation amount of memory data, which is buffered therein, exceeds a predetermined reference value to re-transmit from data in which the first transmission error occurs thereto, such that real time data cannot be lost, although a channel change is generated by successive channel interference. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310380 | ADAPTIVE HISTORY AWARE BEAM STEERING - The present invention relates to the field of multi-path wireless communication. The present invention provides a system for assisting in providing a wireless communication link between a first communication device and a second communication device based on a plurality of communication paths comprising a history manager for providing, based on a recorded history of communication path states, a proposal for one or more communication paths based on which the communication link can be provided. The present invention further provides a corresponding method and a communication system and a communication device comprising the system of the present invention. Based on the proposal provided by the present invention, path switching can be performed more effectively, less and shorter interruptions of the communication link can be obtained and an enhanced transmission quality can be provided for multi-path wireless communication systems. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310381 | GENERIC WIRELESS SERVICES DISCOVERY - Embodiments of the invention relate to wireless communications. More particularly, embodiments of the invention relate to generic discovery mechanisms that may be utilized in wireless communications. | 12-18-2008 |
20080316979 | Configuring a host device by way of MMP - The claimed subject matter relates to configuring a host device through utilization of MMP, which is a protocol that is based upon MIP but not associated with several deficiencies associated therewith. In particular, a wireless terminal can be configured to run MMP and send messages that conform to MMP over a wireless link. A base station can be configured to act as a DHCP server. The base station can provide configuration information to host device by way of DHCP. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316980 | Arrangement and a Method in Communication Networks - The present invention relates to an arrangement comprising a functional server node forming part of a conglomerate, or pool, of functional server nodes in common controlling a number of radio network control means, each functional server node being able to control any, or a number of, radio network control means, to which mobile stations are connected. The functional server nodes support transfer/redistribution of mobile stations between each other without interrupting the connection of the mobile stations, a target functional server node, to which it has been decided that a mobile station is to be transferred from a current functional server node, generates an area update or transfer acceptance message comprising an identification of the current functional server node, an identification of the target functional server node and a transfer indications. The invention also relates to a method of redistributing or transferring mobile station contexts. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316981 | MODULATION CODING SCHEMES FOR CONTROL FRAME TRANSMISSION UNDER 802.11N - A control frame transmission algorithm is disclosed for 802.11n devices operating in a wireless neighborhood that includes both high-throughput (HT) devices and non-high throughput devices. The control frame transmission algorithm establishes the characteristics of a control frame initiated by the station, as well as the characteristics of a response control frame, which is sent in response to a frame received from another station. These characteristics include the PHY protocol data unit format, the transmission rate, and modulation coding scheme to be used. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316982 | Managing Dense Wireless Access Point Infrastructures in Wireless Local Area Networks - Techniques for enhancing the throughput capacity available to client devices connected to a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. Specifically, existing WLAN resources are converted into wireless access points (APs) to create a dense infrastructure of wireless APs. To leverage this dense AP infrastructure, central management techniques are employed. With client-to-AP mapping, these techniques are used to prevent the discovery of multiple APs in a WLAN by a client device and to select a single AP (using certain policies) to associate with the client device and provide it with an enhanced wireless connection to the WLAN. Additionally, techniques are employed to centrally determine, using central policies, when the AP should disassociate from the client device and when another centrally selected AP should respond to, and associate with, the client device to provide it with an enhanced wireless connection to the WLAN—without interrupting/disrupting the client device's access. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316983 | Service information in a LAN access point that regulates network service levels provided to communication terminals - A LAN access point maintains service information that defines which of a plurality of network service levels is allocated to a plurality of communication terminals. The LAN point regulates the network service levels that it provides to the communication terminals in response to the service information. The service information may allocate different maximum communication bandwidth levels and/or allow/deny access to various network services to defined communication terminal identifiers, identifiers route locations hosted on communication terminals, and/or identifiers for users of the communication terminals. Moreover, the service information may define a time of day schedule and/or day of week schedule that varies the allocation of maximum communication bandwidth levels and/or access to various network services. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316984 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARTUS AND CONTROL METHOD OF AN INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, an information processing apparatus includes a radio communication unit, a searching unit which searches for an external device with which the radio communication unit is capable of performing data transfer, a detecting unit which detects all of radio communication functions provided in the external device, a monitoring unit which monitors a link speed attained with respect to the external device, a determining unit which determines whether or not the link speed acquired by the monitoring unit reaches a link speed which makes it possible to perform a radio communication function requiring the highest link speed among all of radio communication functions, and a control unit which makes a connection to the external device unit when the determining unit determines that the link speed is reached. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316985 | WLAN having load balancing based on access point loading - A network having distribution of access point loading includes access points to which mobile stations can associate themselves based upon access point beacon signal levels and loading levels for the various access points. A mobile station receives beacon signals from various access points and determines a signal strength for the received beacon signals. The mobile station also receives access point loading information from the access points. The mobile station associates with an access point based upon the access point beacon signal strengths and the access point loading information. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316986 | Remote Antenna for Wireless Access Point - A center access point ( | 12-25-2008 |
20080316987 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE MULTIPLE RECEIVERS - Briefly, a wireless communication device that includes a processor to enable a determined number of receivers of a MIMO system according to a value provided with a request to enable the receivers is provided. A method for enabling the receivers of MIMO system is also provided. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316988 | METHOD FOR FAST ROAMING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A roaming service method for a fast and secure wireless network is provided. In an embodiment of the present invention, an AP, which an STA associates with, transmits proactive keys needed for roaming to neighbor APs of the AP. When the STA moves to one of the neighbor APs, a reassociation is carried out between the STA and the neighbor AP using the already provided proactive key. In another embodiment of the present invention, an authentication server transmits proactive keys needed for roaming to neighbor APs to which the STA is likely to move, so that when the STA moves to one of the neighbor APs, a reassociation is carried out between the STA and the neighbor AP using the already provided proactive key. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316989 | METHOD AND EQUIPMENT FOR ACCESSING A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for accessing a network in a telecommunication system which comprises at least one terminal and a plurality of networks in which information sets describing settings needed to access networks and their resources are stored in the terminal. The terminal scans for information about available networks. Available information sets are determined by comparing the information about available networks to the stored information sets. At least one network is accessed based on the settings defined in the available information sets. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316990 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING LINK RANGE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING A SELF-CONFIGURABLE ANTENNA - Embodiments of the invention facilitate providing wireless links with longer link ranges and/or better suppression of interference than can be provided by the integrated antennas of a typical wireless network node. While, in some cases, it is possible to install intermediate wireless network nodes to hop through long expanses between distant wireless network nodes, it is desirable for distantly spaced wireless network nodes to reach one another through a single transit link (i.e. one hop). This approach is preferable because a single transit link is capable of higher data rates and better interference suppression than multi-hop transit links. The present invention provides methods and apparatus for enhancing the link range achievable by typical wireless network nodes so that distantly spaced wireless network nodes are able to communicate with one another using only a single-transit link. | 12-25-2008 |
20090003291 | SIX-ADDRESS SCHEME FOR MULTIPLE HOP FORWARDING IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A six field address scheme identifies both the originating point and the endpoint of a data frame enabling multiple hop forwarding though a plurality of intermediate mesh points in a wireless mesh network. Data frames originating or ending at a point outside of the wireless mesh network access the wireless network at a mesh access point using a legacy address scheme. The legacy address schemes are converted to a six address scheme using a proxy address table at the access point. Each mesh access point includes not only a routing table but a proxy address table as well as enabling the mesh access point, and/or mesh portal points, to convert address schemes having less than six address fields to the six field format. Subsequent to the conversion, mesh points within the wireless mesh network need only the routing table to facilitate the forwarding of the data frame. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003292 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR TRACKING AND LOCATING LAPTOPS - An arrangement for employing a host of receivers that may already be present in a laptop, to enable the laptop to collect a significant amount of data about its location. Once the system then finds a readily available connection, it can then transmit information about its location as well as other information to help pinpoint the location of the laptop. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003293 | Accounting for map parsing delay to enable coexistence of multiple radios - In general, in one aspect, the disclosure describes an apparatus that includes a first radio to communicate with a first wireless network and a second radio to communicate with a second wireless network. The first wireless network transmits a map defining locations within an assigned spectrum data is to be communicated therebetween. An earliest possible location defined in map is such that the map can be parsed within the time it would take to get to the earliest possible location so that the radio can be turned off after receiving the map until the location defined in the map, and the second radio is active when the first radio is not. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003294 | Multiple radio platform transmission power control - In general, in one aspect, the disclosure describes an apparatus that includes a first radio to communicate with a first wireless network and a second radio to communicate with a second wireless network. A controller is used to estimate signal to noise and interference ratio (SINR) for signal being received by the first radio when the second radio is transmitting. The controller is also to determine if the estimate meets a threshold. Transmissions are permitted from the second radio while the first radio is receiving if the threshold is met. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003295 | AD-HOC NETWORK DEVICE WITH REDUCED DATA LOSS - When data is to be transmitted from a transmission source to a transmission destination in a wireless or wired ad-hoc network constructed in an indoor environment such as a house or an office, the data is transmitted by using a path that is formed over a plurality of channels that the respective nodes have. Also, when data transmission with high reliability is to be performed, same data is sent to two or more paths, thereby even when the data on one path cannot be normally delivered due to noise, the data can be delivered to the transmission destination without being affected by the noise by using the data transmitted on another channel. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003296 | Method And System For Interconnecting Digital Subscriber Line Network And Radio Communication Network - A method and system for interconnecting a DSL network and a radio communication network are disclosed. The DSL network carries data transmitted in the radio communication network so that the radio communication network and the DSL network are interconnected. The xDSL is adopted to perform the base station transmission. The scheme may function as a radio extension of the wire access of the DSL network and is suitable to fixed wireless, nomadic connectivity, laptop and mobile access applications. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003297 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC LMA ASSIGNMENT IN PROXY MOBILE IPv6 PROTOCOL - Methods and apparatuses are provided for supporting mobility in a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol (“IP”) network without having a mobile node (“MN”) to participate in certain mobility related signaling. Instead, a proxy agent might implement functions of a mobile access gateway (“MAG”) in a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol Version 6 (“IPv6”) network. The proxy agent, rather than the MN, might send a request to a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (“DHCP”) server, and receive back a local mobility anchor address (“LMAA”) of a local mobility anchor (“LMA”). The proxy agent might instead perform a Domain Name System (“DNS”) lookup for the LMAA of the LMA first; in response to a failure to receive the LMAA, the proxy agent might then send the request to the DHCP server to receive the LMAA. The proxy agent might further update DNS information of the MN. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003298 | SIX-ADDRESS SCHEME FOR MULTIPLE HOP FORWARDING IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - A six field address scheme identifies both the originating point and the endpoint of a data frame enabling multiple hop forwarding through a plurality of intermediate mesh points in a wireless mesh network. Data frames originating or ending at a point outside of the wireless mesh network access the wireless network at a mesh access point using a legacy address scheme. The legacy address schemes are converted to a six address scheme using a proxy address table at the access point. Each mesh access point includes not only a routing table but a proxy address table as well as enabling the mesh access point, and/or mesh portal points, to convert address schemes having less than six address fields to the six field format. Subsequent to the conversion, mesh points within the wireless mesh network need only the routing table to facilitate the forwarding of the data frame. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003299 | METHOD FOR CLEAR CHANNEL ASSESSMENT OPTIMIZATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and apparatus are directed toward optimizing clear channel assessment (CCA) parameters in a wireless local area network having an access point (AP) and at least one station. An upper bound and a lower bound for an energy detect threshold (EDT) parameter are determined. A value of the EDT parameter is calculated and is bound by the upper bound and the lower bound. The EDT parameter is updated. The method can be performed at each station or at the AP, with the updated CCA parameters being signaled to each station associated with the AP. | 01-01-2009 |
20090010230 | AUTOMATIC WIRELESS NETWORK LINKING METHOD WITH SECURITY CONFIGURATION AND DEVICE THEREOF - An automatic wireless network linking method with a security configuration includes: providing an access point with a floating service set identifier and a shared key. The floating service set identifier has a prefix name. Next, a host system is provided to execute a setting and linking application to automatically scan the access point with the prefix name and obtain the floating service set identifier of the access point. Both the access point and the setting and linking application perform an operation process to generate a dynamic key. The dynamic key is converted into a wireless network encryption algorithm. Finally, the host system links to the access point to perform wireless communication, and uses the wireless network encryption algorithm to encrypt and decrypt data. Thereby, the time required for setting up the wireless network platform is reduced. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010231 | COMMUNICATIONS METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO SYNCHRONIZATION WITH RESPECT TO A PEER TO PEER TIMING STRUCTURE - Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communication networks are described. A peer to peer timing structure is implemented which includes recurring peer discovery intervals and traffic intervals. Some embodiments further include recurring paging intervals for peer to peer pages. A wireless communications device, supporting peer to peer communications and storing information defining the timing structure, determines a time reference point, facilitating a coarse level of synchronization with respect to the timing structure. The time reference point is determined based on a broadcast signal received from a communications device, e.g., a satellite, base station, or beacon signal transmitter. Multiple peer to peer wireless communications devices in a local vicinity thus obtain the same basic understanding as to the current relative point in time with respect to a common recurring peer to peer timing structure. Peer to peer timing synchronization is further refined based on received signals communicated between peers. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010232 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATIONS TIMING STRUCTURE - Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communication networks are described. A peer to peer timing structure is implemented which includes a pattern of different types of time intervals including at least a peer discovery time interval and a traffic interval. A wireless communications device, supporting peer to peer operations stores the peer to peer timing structure information, accesses the stored information, and used the accessed information to determine an operation to be performed during a current time period. The operation is, e.g., a peer discovery operation, a peer to peer timing synchronization operation, a peer paging operation, or a peer to peer traffic signaling operation. Various exemplary relationships between the different types of intervals, including relative frequencies, relative durations, and spacing information, are described. Advantageous construction of the recurring peer to peer timing structure facilitates efficient utilization of air link resources and/or higher traffic data throughput capabilities. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010233 | Wireless Gateway in a Process Control Environment Supporting a Wireless Communication Protocol - A wireless gateway for use in a process control environment includes a wireless interface for communicating with a first wireless network using a first wireless communication protocol, such that the wireless network includes a plurality of field devices operating in the process control environment. The wireless gateway further includes a host interface for communicating with an external host disposed outside the wireless network using a second communication protocol and a protocol translator to enable an exchange of data between the first interface and the second interface. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010234 | ROUTING PROTOCOL FOR A NETWORK EMPLOYING MULTI-USER WIRELESS CHANNELS - A routing protocol, according to one embodiment of which a first station of a wireless network monitors its outgoing transmissions corresponding to a traffic flow for occurrence of multi-tier signals and for ability to achieve a specified minimum transmission rate. Based on the monitoring, the first station may transmit an outgoing solicitation message that identifies the monitored traffic flow as a candidate for rerouting. Upon receipt of the solicitation message, a second station of the wireless network evaluates whether rerouting of the monitored traffic flow through the second station is capable of increasing data throughput for that traffic flow without decreasing data throughputs for other traffic flows presently handled by the second station. Based on this evaluation, the second station may transmit to the first station an offer to reroute the monitored traffic flow. The first station, in turn, evaluates this offer, e.g., by comparing its benefits with those of alternative offers that the first station might have received from other stations of the wireless network in response to the solicitation message. Based on the latter evaluation, the first station may reroute the monitored traffic flow through the station whose offer is deemed preferable. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010235 | WIRELESS LOCAL ACCESS NETWORK SYSTEM MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - Provided are WLAN system management procedure and a station supporting the procedure. In the management procedure, a station receives one or more event request frames each of which includes zero or more event request elements, wherein each of the event request elements comprises an event type field for specifying the event type of an event request. After reception, if the station moves to a different Extended Service Set (ESS), the station cancels all outstanding event requests of the event request frames and deletes all pending event report frames and event data. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010236 | Mobile Communication Control Method, Mobile Terminal, and Access Router - A technology is disclosed that provides a mobile communication control method, a mobile terminal, and an access router that allow communication to be continued after a handover without newly establishing all protocol states from the beginning. The technology includes a step at which a mobile node | 01-08-2009 |
20090010237 | Communication Method, Communication System, Mobile Node and Network Node for Notification About the Proximity of a Second Wireless Network Via a First Wireless Network - For communications between several different types of wireless networks and a mobile node, technology to provide various services from a wireless network to the mobile node which is not covered by that network without exhaustion of the mobile node battery is disclosed. According to this technology, the mobile node sends an update message to a currently accessible network node, which transfers the update message to the same or different types of nearby network nodes with incrementing the hop count for every transfer. The different type of network node that has received the update message checks whether the hop count decreases from that previously received and judges that the mobile node is approaching if the hop count decreases and sends the guide message to the mobile node via the same and different types of networks. | 01-08-2009 |
20090016306 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN EFFICIENT TIM ELEMENT SUPPORTING MULTIPLE BSSes IN A WIRELESS LAN - Aspects of a system for an efficient traffic indication map (TIM) element supporting multiple basic service sets (BSSes) in a wireless LAN may include an access point (AP) the enables generation of a traffic indication virtual bitmap based on the presence of stored data pending transmission to one or more WLAN stations (STAs) via a wireless communication medium. The AP may generate a partial virtual bitmap based on the generated traffic indication virtual bitmap. The partial virtual bitmap may comprise a first segment and a second segment, wherein each segment may be derived from the generated traffic indication virtual bitmap. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016307 | Information Communication Terminal, Radio Communication Apparatus, Radio Communication Network System and Program Product Capable of Performing Communication Corresponding to Purpose - An information communication terminal can transmit data of a plurality of attributes over a radio communication network. The information communication terminal transmits the data to the radio communication network, stores information correlating a network address of the radio communication network with the attribute of the data, extracts the attribute of the data to be transmitted, extracts the network address correlated to the extracted attribute and transmits a beacon including the extracted network address. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016308 | Antenna in cargo container monitoring and security system - An antenna system for a container monitoring system includes: a short range wireless communications device associated with each container, each short range wireless communications device including a transmitter element and a complementary receiver element; at least one long range communications device communications device associated with each container; a global positioning or GPS element; and an antenna system which is integrated into the construction of each container wall, door, or roof. | 01-15-2009 |
20090022113 | SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SERVICE SYSTEM - Disclosed are a subscriber information management system and a method for a mobile communication service system for managing subscriber information. System comprises a subscriber information management system for a mobile communication service system that a wire terminal and a wireless terminal respectively connected with an integrating and managing server and provides at least one portal service from the integrating and managing server, the system comprising: a subscriber information management unit, wherein the subscriber information management unit is included in the integrating and managing server, and links subscriber information transmitted from the wireless terminal with subscriber information transmitted from the wire terminal using a predetermined key value. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022114 | ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS LAN - A wireless access device in a local area network (LAN) having a plurality of transceivers. Each transceiver has a directional antenna positioned in a substantially circular array to communicate signals with a plurality of stations in a corresponding sector. Each sector defines a portion of a coverage area surrounding the wireless access device. The wireless access device has a network interface to a data network, and an array controller to control communication of data between the stations and the transceivers, and between the transceivers and the network interface. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022115 | MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORKS - A device may receive a discovery signal from a mobile node, register the mobile node in response to receiving the discovery signal from the mobile node, assign a mobility label to the mobile node after the registration, distribute messages describing the mobility label and the mobile node to edge routers in the network to create a label switched path, and route communication messages from a remote node to the mobile node along the label switched path in the network. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022116 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY SETTING UP AND TEARING DOWN CONNECTIONS IN MESH NETWORKS - Wireless mobile communication (WMC) devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form a mesh (ad hoc wireless) network. WMC devices may form and/or tear down intra-mesh connection with other WMC devices in the same mesh network. WMC devices may utilize information related to other WMC devices in the mesh network in determining formation and tearing down of intra-mesh connections. This information may comprise relative speeds, locations, and directions of movement of the WMC devices forming/tearing intra-mesh connections. Other information including data bandwidth and/or power consumption may be utilized in such determination. This information may also comprise available services advertised by WMC devices in the mesh network. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022117 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING CONNECTION TO AND USE OF LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES - Methods and systems for a handheld portable communication device for configuring connection to and use of local and remote resources are disclosed and may include discovering available networks and resources, establishing a route between the handheld wireless communication device and a selected one or more of the available resources via a selected one or more of the available networks based on user preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device, and communicating multimedia data between the handheld wireless communication device and the selected one or more of the available resources via the established route. The established route may be dynamically adjusted, based on network availability and bandwidth. The handheld wireless communication device may communicate utilizing a plurality of wireless protocols. The preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device may be dynamically adjusted. The resources may be local or remote to the handheld wireless communication device. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022118 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN ATOMIZING FUNCTION OF A MOBILE DEVICE - Methods and systems for an atomizing function for a mobile device are disclosed and may include discovering available resources via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) and assessing respective cost functions for processing tasks by the HWCD and/or the discovered resources. The tasks may be apportioned for local and/or remote execution by the HWCD and/or the discovered resources based on the assessed cost functions. The assessed cost functions may be dependent on factors comprising communication bandwidth, memory space, CPU processing power, and battery power, which may be weighted. The cost functions may be dynamically assessed, enabling dynamic reapportioning of the tasks, which may be apportioned based on latency, quality of service (QoS), priority and/or user preferences associated with the local and/or remote execution. The apportioning of the processing of the tasks may be based on the assessed cost functions, and a priority and/or a QoS associated with the task. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022119 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A PERSISTENT REQUEST GENERATED BY A WIRELESS DEVICE, EXECUTED REMOTELY AND OUTPUT TO CONFIGURABLE LOCAL RESOURCES - Methods and systems for a persistent request generated by a wireless device, executed remotely and output to configurable local resources are disclosed and may include generating via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) a persistent request for a user that may be communicated to remote devices for execution and storage of results. The stored results may be received from local resources local which may be configured by the remote devices based on user preferences to deliver the stored results to the user. The stored results may be received by the user via the HWCD or another wireless communication device, and the identity of the user may be authenticated prior to receiving the stored results. The remote devices may discover the local resources based on the detection of the user logging into the network. User preferences may be stored in networked devices or may be stored in the HWCD. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022120 | Method And System For Enabling Rendering Of Electronic Media Content Via A Secure Ad Hoc Network Configuration Utilizing A Handheld Wireless Communication Device - An ad hoc network enabled to handle secure data may be created for a specified user via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) such that rightful access to protected data stored on one or more networked devices may be extended to one or more distributed rendering devices. The HWCD and/or the user may be authenticated. The HWCD may enable configuration of one or more dynamic connections on the ad hoc network as needed until communication of data is complete. Bandwidth and throughput of one or more communication links may be adjusted according to bandwidth availability. The data may be buffered via the HWCD and/or one or more of the distributed rendering devices. Processing data tasks may be assigned to one or more networked resources on the ad hoc network. The data may undergo format conversion and be consumed on the one or more distributed rendering devices and/or the HWCD. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022121 | Apparatus and method for redundant connectivity and multi-channel operation of wireless devices - A wireless network includes leaf nodes (such as wireless sensors or other wireless devices) and infrastructure nodes (such as access points). The leaf nodes communicate data messages to the infrastructure nodes. The infrastructure nodes communicate the data messages to gateway infrastructure nodes, which transmit the data messages over a wired network. The leaf nodes may communicate data messages to multiple infrastructure nodes in various ways. For example, the leaf nodes may transmit multiple messages, one at a time, to multiple infrastructure nodes. The leaf nodes may also broadcast a single message to multiple infrastructure nodes. In addition, the leaf nodes may communicate a single message containing a group identifier (such as a multi-cast group address) associated with multiple infrastructure nodes. In this way, communications from the leaf nodes may be more reliable. This may be particularly useful, for example, in networks such as 802.11-based networks. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022122 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION OUTSIDE A MESH BY INCLUDING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION IN ROUTER CONFIGURATION MESSAGES - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may maintain user preference information, which is unique to the WMC device capabilities and the device user. WMC devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form an ad hoc wireless network wherein each WMC device within the network may function as a router for other devices. Utilizing such routing capability within an ad hoc wireless network may allow WMC devices that are out of their wireless coverage area to use other WMC devices within such ad hoc wireless network to route any impending communication through such other WMC devices wherein these devices may have wireless connectivity to their coverage networks. WMC devices that are may have external connectivity may be enable to be selective in routing information and/or data from other WMC devices in the ad hoc network. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022123 | Apparatus and method for providing contents sharing service on network - The present invention relates to a network-based contents sharing service providing device and method. A contents provider stores at least one content in a memory and manages it, classifies information on shared contents to be shared with the contents receiver according to a predetermined reference, generates a shared contents list by making information on the classified shared contents into a list, manages the list, and provides the shared contents list to the corresponding contents receiver when there is a contents receiver for sharing shared contents from among the contents receivers in the service area in which the contents provider is positioned. A contents receiver presents the shared contents list to the contents receiving user, receives at least one shared content from the contents provider through downloading or streaming according to selection of the contents receiving user having acquired the list, and performs it. Accordingly, the contents receiving user can freely use various contents of the contents provider positioned in the service area such as his portable terminal. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022124 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING AN ANCHORING POINT FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile terminal includes an Internet Protocol (IP) address module that requests and receives a first IP address from a home anchoring point within a home network. The first IP address is an address of the home anchoring point. The system also includes a packet module that exchanges packets with the home anchoring point via a first attachment point. The packets include the first IP address. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022125 | DIRECT LINK TEARDOWN PROCEDURE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP (TDLS) WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE SAME - Provided are a direct link teardown procedure in a TDLS (Tunneled Direct Link Setup) wireless network and a station supporting the direct link teardown procedure. In the direct link teardown procedure, an initiating station of the teardown procedure transmits a TDLS teardown request message to the peer station of the direct link. The initiating station receives a TDLS teardown response message in response to the TDLS teardown request message from the peer station. Then, the initiating station disables its direct Rx path and destroys the security parameters relevant to the direct link upon receipt of the TDLS teardown response message. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022126 | MULTIPLE PACKET DATA NETWORK SUPPORT OVER TRUSTED ACCESS - A media access gateway comprises a wireless network interface, an authorization module, a filter information module, and a proxy mobility agent module. The wireless network interface selectively establishes a wireless link with a first interface of a wireless terminal that has a plurality of wireless interfaces. The authorization module determines a home agent corresponding to the wireless terminal. The filter information module receives filter information from one of the wireless terminal and a server and generates output filter information. The proxy mobility agent module transmits a binding update to the home agent. The binding update includes the output filter information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022127 | SECURE LOCALIZATION FOR 802.11 NETWORKS WITH FINE GRANULARITY - A system and method that uses wireless-capable desktop computers in a vicinity such as to enable one to securely determine the location of an untrusted user with office level granularity. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022128 | ACCESS POINT WITH SIMULTANEOUS DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION OF INDEPENDENT DATA FOR MULTIPLE CLIENT STATIONS - A wireless network device comprises R modulation modules that receive R independent data streams, that modulate the R independent data streams, and that apply a multiplexing matrix to generate M modulated and multiplexed data streams, respectively, where R and M are integers greater than one. M summing modules sum portions of each of the M modulated and multiplexed data streams to generate M transmit data streams. M transmitters simultaneously transmit the M transmit data streams during a simultaneous downlink transmission (SDT) period. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022129 | DISTRIBUTED STORAGE AND AGGREGATION OF MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method for the aggregation of multimedia information storage via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. Information about storage resources accessible to a broadband access gateway may be collected and used in selecting storage capacity used for storing multimedia information such as, for example, streaming video, broadcast video, digitized video, digitized audio, text, and digitized images. The gateway may manage storage and retrieval of the multimedia information based upon user defined criteria and characteristics of the available storage resources. Multimedia information may be parsed for storage across multiple storage resources, and the location and nature of the storage resources used for storage of multimedia information items may be unknown to the user. Storage services accessible via a broadband connection may also be used as storage resources. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022130 | Switching between two communicaiton modes in a WLAN - Method and system for switching a network application operating in a first communication mode to a second mode within a wireless local area network, comprising: judging whether mobile nodes are neighboring according to location information; when nodes are neighboring inquiring whether mobile nodes want to switch to second mode to run network applications; when all mobile nodes agree to switch to second mode, downloading and installing network application provided by the application server to one of the mobile nodes; configuring each of the mobile nodes with the communication parameters under the second mode; and switching all mobile nodes to the second communication mode to continue the previous network application. The invention dynamically switches between Infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode to balance system resources, improve QoS, reduce the communication traffic, waiting time and the cost of the users, and increase the income of the provider of the network service. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022131 | Communication system - The present invention deals with a method and system for producing services in the communication system of a building. In the method of the invention, the communication system comprises at least one terminal device applicable for local-area communication, at least one communication means, at least one server controlling the communication system, at least one base station for implementing a local-area network in the communication system, and a local network for implementing mutual data transfer between the said communication means, the said server controlling the communication system and the said base station. In the method, a number of service folders are generated in the terminal device and a service folder applicable to the purpose in each case is selected. From the selected service folder, a service request is selected which is transmitted from the terminal device to the communication system, where the service request is executed in one or more sub-stages using one or more communication means. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022132 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS TERMINAL - A wireless communication system includes first and second wireless terminals capable of performing transmission by at least one of a first transmission scheme and a second transmission scheme. The first wireless terminal performs transmission of a first frame to the second wireless terminal by using the second transmission scheme. The second wireless terminal communicates with the first wireless terminal to notify the first wireless terminal of information associated with a status of the reception of the first frame transmitted from the first wireless terminal by using the first transmission scheme. | 01-22-2009 |
20090028116 | DYNAMIC VLANS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods are described for managing a wireless network. Packets addressed to subscriber stations may be assigned a tag based on the base station at which the packet is received and the base station at which the subscriber station first entered the network. The tag can identify a media access address associated with subscriber equipment accessible through the subscriber station and an IP address associated with the subscriber equipment. The tag may be obtained from a table linking each of a plurality of virtual local area networks to one or more subscriber stations previously registered at a network base station. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028117 | PROVIDING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY AND SERVICE STATE INFORMATION TO APPLICATION SERVERS | 01-29-2009 |
20090028118 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND SYSTEMS FACILITATING MANAGEMENT OF AIRSPACE IN WIRELESS COMPUTER NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating the management of wireless computer network environments and the detection of rogue and other devices that may affect the performance and/or security of the wireless computer network. The present invention enables accurate and cost effective WLAN airspace mapping. In one embodiment, the present invention allows any conforming access point the ability to routinely scan its airspace, collect data on all operating frequencies and report this information back to a management platform. In one embodiment, the management and reporting functionality described herein uses a standards-based vehicle, such as Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). In one embodiment, the present invention facilitates isolation of rogue wireless devices affecting the computer network environment and effective decision-making as to management of the detected device. The present invention also allows network administrators to optimize the configuration of the wireless network environment for performance and security. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028119 | Method of managing transmission within a wireless communications network - The method includes sending a request for permission to transmit by each ready node in the wireless network. Each ready node is a node of the wireless network ready to transmit, each request identifies a node in the network that is the destination, and each request is sent over a control channel. An iterative process based on priorities determined for the ready nodes is then performed to determine which ready nodes to block from transmission and which ready nodes to clear for transmission. Transmissions are sent over a payload channel from ready nodes in the clear to transmit state. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028120 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING NEIGHBORHOOD AP INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method of managing communications in a wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system providing a plurality of channels and comprising an information server for storing the neighborhood access point (AP) information. The method comprises scanning a plurality of channels to detect at least one channel used by a first AP, generating neighborhood AP information including channel information for identifying at least one of the detected channels, and transmitting the neighborhood AP information to an information server, wherein said scanning is performed by a second AP and wherein the first AP is a neighboring AP of the second AP. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028121 | WIRELESS LAN TERMINAL, A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, A MAC ADDRESS LEARNING METHOD AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A wireless LAN terminal includes a wired LAN interface, a wireless LAN interface and a bridge unit. The bridge unit detects that a terminal apparatus connected with the wired LAN interface moves to a position under different wireless LAN equipment and learns a MAC address of the terminal apparatus which moves. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028122 | WIRELESS LAN TERMINAL ALLOWING ANOTHER PROCESSING IN ITS WAITING OR IDLE STATE - Wireless LAN (Local Area Network) terminals are provided for executing a four-way handshaking procedure when they communicate with one another directly in a wireless ad hoc network mode. Each of the wireless LAN terminals may include a state processor which takes action in accordance with a communication state of its own wireless LAN terminal, and, upon sending a message during the four-way handshaking procedure, issues sending-completion information that indicates completion of the sending. The terminal may further include a state manager which, based on the sending-completion information, causes the communication state to be in a waiting state so that even during the four-way handshaking procedure, a message in processing procedure other than the message sent during the four-way handshaking procedure can be sent and received. | 01-29-2009 |
20090034492 | Supporting Idle Stations in Wireless Distribution Systems - Supporting idle stations in an IEEE 802.11 wireless distribution system. When a station in an IEEE 802.11 wireless distribution system (DS) enters the idle state, it is not associated with any access points (APs) in the DS, Prior to entering the idle state, a station may establish filters indicating what traffic it wishes to receive. These filters are sent to a server in the DS. When a station goes idle, it is associated with a paing server in the DS, which buffers all received for the idle station, and initiates paging of the idle station when such traffic meeting filter criteria is received. When the station exits the idle state by reassociating with an AP in the DS, the server is notified, and forwards the buffered traffic to the station through its AP. The server may be implemented as a process running in a controller or portal in the DS. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034493 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATIONING BASED NAT ACCESS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and systems are provided for location-based network address translation (NAT). The system allows an administrator to logically partition an environment into a plurality of spatial regions. The method then includes specifying, for each of the spatial regions, whether network address translation (NAT) is allowed or not allowed for that spatial region, then performing a locationing procedure to determine in which spatial region the mobile unit is located. NAT is allowed for wireless data communication from the mobile unit if the mobile unit is within one of the spatial regions for which NAT is allowed, and is not allowed for wireless data communication from the mobile unit if the mobile unit is within one of the spatial regions for which NAT is not allowed. The systems and methods are applicable, for example, to networks operating in accordance with 802.11, RFID, WiMax, WAN, Bluetooth, Zigbee, UWB, and the like. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034494 | Method for Allocating a Temporary Address to a Mobile Node of a Telecommunication System, Equipment and Programs for Implementing Same - The invention concerns a method wherein the mobile node ( | 02-05-2009 |
20090034495 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING A PERSISTENT APPLICATION SESSION WITH ANONYMITY BETWEEN A MOBILE HOST AND A NETWORK HOST - System and method for facilitating a persistent application session with anonymity between a mobile host and a network host in a wireless communication environment. The system and method include establishing a first communication session between the mobile host and the network host through a first radio access point; receiving a first mobile host identifier and a mobile host address from the mobile host during the first communication session, wherein the first mobile host identifier is different from the mobile host address; terminating the first communication session due to movement of the mobile host; establishing a second communication session between the mobile host and the network host using the first mobile host identifier, through a second radio access point; and receiving a second mobile host identifier from the mobile host during the second communication session, wherein the second mobile host identifier is different from the first mobile host identifier and the mobile host address. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034496 | PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR A MOBILE STATION - A packet data protocol (PDP) context management method is provided. The PDP context management method enables a mobile station to manage the PDP contexts of networks integrally by evaluating PDP context capacities of the networks in a proactive manner. A packet service method of the present invention includes creating a network information table after activating a packet data protocol (PDP) context to a network, determining, when a multiple PDP context activation is requested, whether the network has a multiple PDP context capacity with reference to the network information table, requesting, if the network has a multiple PDP context capacity, a multiple PDP context activation to the network and stopping, if the network has a multiple PDP context capacity, attempt of a multiple PDP context activation to the network. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034497 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - If a WiMAX base station cannot receive a ranging signal from a WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal or if adjustment is not completed even after the WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal adjusts a parameter depending on adjusted value information for a pre-determined number of times, negotiation is performed via a heterogeneous network to establish a communication connection for upstream communication from the WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal to the WiMAX base station, and only downstream communication from the WiMAX base station to the WiMAX-embedded wireless terminal is performed via a WiMAX network. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034498 | Simultaneously Maintaining Bluetooth and 802.11 Connections to Increase Data Throughput - A device for wirelessly communicating between one or more mobile communication devices over a wireless network. A primary mobile communication device is configured to establish one or more connections to one or more secondary mobile communication devices. The primary mobile communication device is further configured to establish a first connection and a second connection to at least one of the secondary mobile communication devices. The first connection is a Bluetooth (BT) connection and the second connection is a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) connection. The primary mobile device is also configured to establish a third connection to another secondary mobile communication device wherein the third connection is a WiFi connection. Additionally, the primary mobile communication device is configured to simultaneously maintain the BT connection and the WiFi connections during the bi-directional transmission of data between the primary mobile communication device and the secondary mobile communication devices. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034499 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTE OPTIMISATION IN NESTED MOBILE-NETWORKS - The invention provides a method and apparatus for building a linked binding cache. The method includes storing mobile router entries in a binding cache. The mobile router entries include a first mobile router entry having a prefix and an indication of the prefix's length along with an associated intermediate address. The method also includes linking a second mobile router entry to the first mobile router entry for delivering at least one data packet via the first mobile router. The method further includes adding a pointer in the binding cache from the entry of the second mobile router to the first mobile router entry when the intermediate address of the second mobile router matches the first mobile router's prefix in order to create a linked binding cache. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034500 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF UNACKNOWLEDGED NETWORK LAYER SERVICE ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER (NSAPI) RECOVERY IN SUB-NETWORK DEPENDENT CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL (SNDCP) COMMUNICATION - A system and method of unacknowledged Network Layer Service Access Point Identifier (NSAPI) recovery in Sub-Network Dependent Convergence Protocol (SNDCP) communication are disclosed herein. The disclosed techniques prevent the loss of data which may result from changing between GPRS/GSM modes in a Class B mobile station (MS). | 02-05-2009 |
20090040986 | METHOD OF RECOVERING COMMUNICATION ACCESS IN DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A wireless system and method including a medium access control (MAC) layer adapted to recover service in restricted channels. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040987 | APPARATUS FOR REDUCING SIGNALLING DATA BURSTS IN MOBILE NETWORK - A technology is disclosed for reducing the burst of DAD messages which may be triggered due to the change of the network prefix when using the technique of the neighbor discovery proxy. According to this technology, in roaming from the access network link | 02-12-2009 |
20090040988 | AVOIDING PPP TIME OUTS DURING IPCP NEGOTIATIONS - Methods and apparatus are presented for extending the protocol synchronization period between a PPP client and a PPP server, wherein the PPP server is located on a wireless communication device. In one aspect, the PPP server generates and sends an IPCP Configure-Nak message to the PPP client whenever the PPP client sends an IPCP Configure-Request message, wherein an arbitrary non-zero value is deliberately sent as the primary DNS address, the secondary DNS address, the primary WINS address, or the secondary WINS address is sent in the IPCP Configure-Nak message. The IP address is deliberately omitted from the IPCP Configure-Nak message. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040989 | High performance wireless networks using distributed control - A design and proof of concept of a new type of WLAN, complete with simulation and results from the simulation has been described. Each AP Node is implemented as a self-contained embedded OS unit, with all algorithms resident in its Operating system. The normal day-to-day functioning of the AP node is based entirely on resident control algorithms. Upgrades are possible through a simple secure communications interface supported by the OS kernel for each AP node. Benefits provided by a wireless network, as proposed in this invention, are that: it installs out of the box; the network is self-configuring; the network is redundant in that mesh network formalism is supported, ensuring multiple paths; load balancing is supported; there is no single point of failure; allows for decentralized execution; there is a central control; it is network application aware; there is application awareness; there is automatic channel allocation to manage and curtail RF interference, maximize non interference bandwidth and enable seamless roaming between adjoining wireless sub networks (BSS) and it supports the wireless equivalent for switching—for seamless roaming requirements. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040990 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AVOIDING AVALANCHE EFFECT IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for avoiding access point transmission rate fall-back mechanism having an avalanche effect when acknowledgements are not received for packets sent during co-existence of WLAN and other wireless network technologies. A receiver comprises at least two dissimilar network technology subsystems. In some embodiments, a transmitter transmits a handshake to the receiver prior to transmission of at least one data packet and does not reduce a transmission rate of future transmissions to the receiver if the transmitter does not receive a reply to the handshake. In other embodiments, the receiver is able to send an indicator to a transmitter requesting a protection mechanism be employed prior to transmission by the transmitter of at least one data packet. In further embodiments, the receiver is able to negotiate with the transmitter for the transmitter to employ a protection mechanism prior to transmission of at least one data packet to the receiver. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040991 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - An object of the present invention is to realize a distributed autonomous transmission scheduling by using a terminal without the need to observe packets in relation to communication of other wireless terminals in a cell, such as VoIP, in which a plurality of wireless terminals that periodically transmit packets exist, thereby allowing intermittent reception during the packet observation and enabling to control power consumption of the wireless terminal as well as to reduce the load to thereby improve the communication quality. To attain the object, a VoIP terminal | 02-12-2009 |
20090040992 | Method and mobile terminal for acquiring packet service - A method and mobile terminal for acquiring a packet service in a mobile communication system is provided. A mobile terminal of the present invention determines, when it powers on, whether to register with a network on the basis of previously stored packet service usage frequency and updates, when using the packet service after registering with the network, the packet service usage frequency. The mobile terminal of the present invention can reduce waste of resources required for the packet service by reducing communication with the network. A packet service acquisition method of the present invention helps reduces a number of mobile terminals registered with a network, whereby the network can reduce its processing load, resulting in improvement of network throughput. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040993 | Apparatus and method for supporting mixed quality of service setup type in a broadband wireless communication system - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. The system includes: an access service network (ASN), consisting of at least one base station (BS) and at least one access service network_gateway (ASN-GW), for supporting a first quality of service (QoS) setup type for a first Mobile Station (MS) and for supporting a second QoS setup type for a second MS; the first MS for obtaining information on the first QoS setup type, which is an available QoS setup type of the first MS, through the access service network after an authentication process is completed during an initial network entry process, and for performing communication by processing a service flow (SF) according to the first QoS setup type; and the second MS for obtaining information on the second QoS setup type, which is an available QoS setup type of the second MS, through the access service network after the authentication process is completed during the initial network entry process, and for performing communication by processing the SF according to the second QoS setup type. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040994 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY DEVICES IN AN IEEE 802.15.4 NETWORK - In a 802.15.4 network, each reduced functionality device (RFD) is permitted to communicate with only an assigned full function device (FFD). The present invention allows each of the RFDs to communicate with another RFD upon the RFD determining that the local FFD assigned to the RFD is inoperable or unable to communicate. Under emergency conditions, the RFD is able to communicate with a closely located RFDs such that the closely located RFDs can receive and respond to an emergency situation and/or repeat the message. To satisfy the 802.15.4 standards, communication between the RFDs is allowed only during emergency conditions and when the FFD is inoperative. A comprehensive test procedure is included to insure the integrity of the system is preserved at all times. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040995 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY ACROSS HETEROGENEOUS ADDRESS SPACES - A mobile node includes a processor, a network interface, and a storage device having computer program code for execution by the processor. The computer program code includes a network layer for transmitting and receiving packets and an intermediate driver that transmits packets to the network layer and receives packets from the network layer using a virtual internet protocol (IP) address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver transmits packets to the network interface and receives packets from the network interface using a routable actual IP address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver permits the actual IP address to change when the mobile node moves from a first subnet to a second subnet without a corresponding change in the virtual IP address. A corresponding NAT associates the virtual IP address with a second actual IP address when the NAT is notified that the mobile node is in the second subnet. | 02-12-2009 |
20090046676 | AD HOC SERVICE PROVIDER CONFIGURATION FOR BROADCASTING SERVICE INFORMATION - An ad hoc service provider includes a processing system configured to enable access by one or more mobile clients to a first wireless network via a second wireless network. The processing system is further configured to assemble service information for broadcasting to one or more mobile clients. The service information includes attributes of access to the first wireless network, the access being offered by the ad hoc service provider to one or more mobile clients. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046677 | Portable cellular enhancer - An apparatus for sharing user-defined media content with a peer. The apparatus comprises a repository for storing media content inputted by a user of the apparatus and a wireless interface for establishing a wireless personal area network (WPAN) with a first communication entity of the peer in a proximity to said apparatus. The WPAN allows the peer to access the media content using the first communication entity, thereby allows the user to share said media content with the peer. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046678 | Method for predicting the mobility in mobile ad hoc networks - Disclosed are methods for determining the neighborhood local view of a mobile node in time which can facilitate the forwarding decision in the design of network protocols. In conventional mobile ad hoc networks nodes set up local topology view based on periodical received “Hello” messages. The conventional method is replaced with proactive and adaptive methods of predicting locations of nodes based on preserved historical information extracted from received “Hello” messages and constructing neighborhood view by aggregating predicted locations. This method is useful for providing updated and consistent topology local view that a network communication employs to determine optimal forward decisions and improve communication performance. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046679 | Access Router Device, Mobility Control System, and Mobility Control Method - In a network configuration in which a mobility control node is placed in the network, a packet is forwarded from a communication partner to the mobility control node by a basic IP mobility protocol for supporting movement in a local network managed by the mobility control node, a movement of a mobile terminal device across local networks formed by mobility control nodes is achieved without adding a function to the mobile terminal device. A mobility control node to be provided to the mobile terminal device is identified by a trigger reporting a movement has been performed to the network from the mobile terminal device, and, in the case of HO across between mobility control nodes, network information before the movement is reported instead of network information to be originally reported. Thus, the mobile terminal device determines that the movement is in the same network and can continue communication without performing an address generation procedure. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046680 | DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND METHOD THEREOF - A station transmit data to another station positioned outside its regulatory maximum transmit power via an access point according to a method defined in an infrastructure mode and directly transmit data to another positioned within a range of its regulatory maximum transmit power according to a method defined in a direct transmission mode. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046681 | Multichannel mac in wireless networks - A method of transmitting data over a plurality of channels, said channels forming a bonded channel comprising a bonded channel superframe, the bonded channel superframe comprising a bonded channel beacon period and a bonded channel data period;
| 02-19-2009 |
20090046682 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for transmitting information of a network interworking with a wireless LAN (802.11, Wi-Fi) network or EMID (ESS MAC ID) provided from an EMID server to a wireless user equipment if the wireless user equipment accesses the wireless LAN network is disclosed. A wireless communication system which performs communication using a plurality of subcarriers includes at least one access point receiving messages from at least one wireless user equipment and communicating with another access point through a distribution system, and at least one interworking information broker receiving information request message of subscriber service provider network (SSPN) through interface with the at least one access point and acquiring response information corresponding to the information request message through interface with a network entity which includes information of the SSPN, the information request message of the SSPN being transmitted from the wireless user equipment to the at least one access point. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046683 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for performing P2P communications in a communication system are provided, in which a first MS transmits a request signal requesting P2P communications with a second MS and a unique identification number of the second MS to a BS, receives from the BS a CID of the second MS allocated by the BS and transmission information required for initial synchronization of the P2P communications in response to the request signal, acquires synchronization with the second MS using the CID of the second MS and the transmission information, and establishes a P2P connection with the second MS. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046684 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - A communication apparatus determines a communication mode in a network in which the communication apparatus is to participate. If the communication apparatus determines that the communication mode is the infrastructure mode, it selects a client function. If the communication apparatus determines that the communication mode is the ad hoc mode, it selects a server function. The communication apparatus operates as an apparatus having the selected client function or server function. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046685 | Method and System for a Wireless Transmission over GPRS Communications Network - The present invention provides a system and method of wireless transmission in GPRS communications network, comprising a virtual COM utility program for creating virtual COM ports. A GPRS virtual COM gateway server is coupled to the virtual COM ports via LAN or Internet. A plurality of remote electronic device is coupled to its corresponding GPRS data terminals. Remote electronic devices can connect to GPRS virtual COM gateway server by GPRS data terminals through GPRS network and Internet for wireless transmitting data to the local device. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046686 | WIRELESS CONNECTING SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING NETWORK APPARATUS TO WIRELESS NETWORK AND NETWORK APPARATUS USED IN WIRELESS CONNECTING SYSTEM - A wireless connecting system includes a first network apparatus connected to a wireless network and a second network apparatus to be connected to the wireless network. The first network apparatus stores a network wireless setting and an ad-hoc wireless setting. The second network apparatus stores the same ad-hoc wireless setting as that stored in the first network apparatus. The first network apparatus sends the network wireless setting using the ad-hoc wireless setting. The second network apparatus receives the network wireless setting using the ad-hoc wireless setting, determines whether or not the received network wireless setting is adaptive in the second network apparatus, and sends the determination result using the ad-hoc wireless setting. The first network apparatus receives the determination result using the ad-hoc wireless setting, and outputs the received determination result. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046687 | MOBILE WIMAX NETWORK SYSTEM HAVING PRIVATE NETWORK AND MOBILE IP TERMINAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMax) network system having a private network and a mobile Internet Protocol (IP) terminal processing method thereof are provided. A private access control router performs an initial access procedure for a WiMax terminal requesting initial access. When a mobile IP address is set in the WiMax terminal, a mobile IP registration procedure for the WiMax terminal is performed according to a mobile IP standard. When the WiMax terminal is a local subscriber WiMax terminal, a virtual IP address for accessing the private network mapped to the mobile IP address is registered in an IP mapping table. A single private access control router can process a local intranet service and a public Core Network (CN) service without an additional access control router and a local subscriber WiMax terminal can receive simultaneously the local intranet service and the public CN service without any special operation. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046688 | Method and System for Providing Broadband Multimedia Services - A wireless router access point for use with a mesh network employing a mesh protocol and a point-to-multipoint network employing a point-to-multipoint protocol, and a multimedia system employing the same. In one embodiment, the wireless router access point includes a mesh access point subsystem configured to translate between a point-to-multipoint protocol and a mesh protocol to communicate with the mesh network. The wireless router access point also includes a point-to-multipoint access point subsystem configured to translate between a mesh protocol and a point-to-multipoint protocol to communicate with a user of the point-to-multipoint network. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046689 | Mobile communication system using a downlink shared channel - A mobile communication system includes a radio network control apparatus having inside a function block for processing a downlink shared channel and table means for storing various setting information related to the downlink shared channel communication and the downlink shared channel multi-cast communication. According to the information, a multi-cast communication (including uni-cast communication) is realized by using the downlink shared channel for one or more mobile apparatuses. Moreover, a base station has a function to transmit the downlink shared channel data and signaling data received from a radio network control apparatus, to a mobile apparatus via a radio line. Furthermore, it is possible to multi-cast data selectively to a particular mobile apparatus being call-connected. | 02-19-2009 |
20090052409 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD - A telecommunications system for communicating internet packet data in accordance with a first internet protocol (IPV6) via a packet radio network operable in accordance a second internet protocol (IPV4). The system comprises a user equipment operable to request a bearer for communicating internet protocol data according to the second internet protocol (IPV4) to and from a gateway support node of the packet radio network. The gateway support node is operable to establish a tunnelling protocol bearer for communicating the internet packet data to and from the user equipment across the packet radio network. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to form an address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (IPv6). The address includes an interface identifier having a tunnel end identifier of the tunnelling protocol bearer which ends at the gateway support node of the packet radio network. The internet packet data is communicated to and from a correspondent node via the gateway support node and the established bearer using internet protocol address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (Ipv6). | 02-26-2009 |
20090052410 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, EDGE ROUTER, AND TRANSFER CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM USED THEREFOR - The present invention aims to provide continuous communication, between mobile terminal, based on edge mobility technology, during hand over a mobile terminal, even if addresses of edge routers before/after movement of the mobile terminal may not be acquired from the mobile terminal. It is configured so that when the mobile terminal moves, it becomes connected to the edge router and a CN information request command is transmitted to a home agent. The home agent manages a care-of address corresponding to a home address of the mobile terminal and transmits the CN information request command to this care-of address, which corresponds to the edge router before the mobile terminal moves, and the edge router manages a care-of address of a communication partner of the mobile terminal. Therefore, the care-of address of the communication partner of the mobile terminal can be acquired. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052411 | ADAPTIVE INTERFERENCE CONTROL - Systems and methods which control communications in a carrier sense multiple access environment to provide a balance between communication sensitivity and transmission availability are shown. Adaptive interference control techniques of embodiments operate to determine a media error time metric representing the time associated with receiving interfering signals. The media error time metric of embodiments is used to adjust operation of various network systems in order to adjust communication sensitivity and/or transmission availability. Desensitizing thresholds and sensitizing thresholds may be used to define operating boundaries, such that desensitizing thresholds are used to control network desensitize actions which result in decreased error times and sensitizing thresholds are used to control network sensitizing actions which result in increased error times. Error time metrics and corresponding desensitizing and sensitizing thresholds may be utilized with respect to a plurality of radios. Embodiments provide for adjustment of control parameters based upon historical operation. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052412 | Minimizing Packet Loss During Fast Roaming - A packet loss reduction system. In particular implementations, a method includes responsive to indications of roaming intent of a wireless client relative to currently associated wireless access point, determining if a traffic stream associated with the wireless client is to be proactively buffered by one or more potential wireless access points; conditionally transmitting a command to the one or more potential wireless access points to cause the potential, wireless access points to set up resources to proactively buffer packets of the traffic stream; duplicating received packets of the traffic stream destined for the wireless client; and transmitting the duplicate packets to the potential wireless access points for storage in a proactive stream buffer. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052413 | INVOKING MULTIPLE SIP BASED SERVICES DURING A SINGLE COMMUNICATION SESSION USING RESOURCE LISTS - The present invention discloses use of resource lists to invoke multiple services in an IMS environment. More specifically, SIP clients can exchange XML content with each other and/or with SIP servers that includes an XCAP resource list. A list entry can exist for each service that is to be included within a communication session. Each service specifying entry can include sub-attributes for the service, which comprise attribute-value pairs able to be read using standard conventions. Use of the resource lists alleviates a need to define a schema and write custom code each time a new service is developed. In one embodiment, additional nested XCAP resource lists can be used to define content that is to be shared among multiple services. For example, a resource list can be used to define a participant list, which is shared as common input data across the multiple services. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052414 | Communication management apparatus, communication control apparatus, and wireless communication system - A 3G authentication apparatus ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090052415 | Radio Communication System and Radio Communication Method - A terminal ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090052416 | MOBILE ROUTER, HOME AGENT, AND TERMINAL POSITION MANAGEMENT METHOD - In a mobile network system composed of plural mobile networks and a home agent, the home agent inquires mobile routers in a mobile network whether or not a terminal is connected, if detecting the absence of the terminal, when data addressed to the terminal arrives at a home network of the terminal in the mobile network. Responding to this inquiry, the mobile routers search whether or not the terminal is connected to the own mobile networks. If the terminal is connected, the mobile routers inform the home agent of the presence of the terminal. When receiving this notice, the home agent transfers data addressed to this terminal to a mobile router as a notice source. This process, even if a terminal moves to a mobile network having a same network prefix as that of the home network, allows transferring a packet accurately to the terminal. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052417 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication device includes: a detection part detecting presence/absence of a reception of a packet; a judgment part judging whether or not temporal change of presence/absence of the reception of the packet detected in the detection part corresponds to a predetermined identifier; and a power source control unit controlling a power source based on a result of a judgment in the judgment part. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052418 | IAS-based configuration for UMB femto devices - A method and apparatus for configuring Femto Devices in an Ultra Mobile Broadband network system. A Femto Device transmits a Femto pilot signal to an Access Terminal, which is served by a plurality of base stations in the Ultra Mobile Broadband network system. The Access Terminal then transmits to the Femto Device an identifier of a base station that controls a macrocell where the Femto Device is located. Next, a Neighbor Discovery Request message is transmitted from the Femto Device to the base station in dependence upon the received identifier of the base station. In response to the Neighbor Discovery Request message received, a Neighbor Discovery Report message is transmitted from the base station to the Femto device. The Neighbor Discovery Report message includes a field indicating network addresses of a Session Reference Network Controller and an Access Gateway that connect to the base station. Finally, the Femto Device connects to the Session Reference Network Controller and the Access Gateway via the Femto device in dependence upon the network addresses of the Session Reference Network Controller and the Access Gateway. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052419 | Redirecting Data Flow Of A Secondary PDP To A Primary PDP Before Establishing The Secondary PDP Context - A solution in a telecommunications infrastructure network for creating a secondary PDP context for a time critical application, ensuring that no packets are lost by masquerading a primary PDP context as the secondary PDP context. This may be achieved by for instance sending a fake TEID or including a filter in a PDP creation request for the secondary PDP context and updating the GGSN with a correct TEID or a new Traffic Flow Template (TFT) when the secondary PDP context is established. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052420 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA AND BUFFER STATUS REPORTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, WIRELESS DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING SUCH METHOD - The method provides buffer status reporting for the transmission of uplink data from a wireless device ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090052421 | DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN DEVICES OF DIFFERENT TYPES IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A method and system for distinguishing between devices of different types (e.g., mobile and stationary devices) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) in order to provide additional services to one or the other. The method includes obtaining a device type for the terminal, and providing specific services to the terminal if the terminal is a device of a certain type. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052422 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING LOCATION INFORMATION - Disclosed is a method for providing location information of a terminal by using an Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). To this end, a location request and a location estimate are transferred between terminals by using messages used in the SIP. In particular, it is possible to receive location information of a counterpart during communication, or transfer the location information of its own to a counterpart, in consideration of the fact that real-time voice service mainly uses the SIR Moreover, it is possible to request and transmit location information on using multimedia services. Therefore, a terminal or a server using the SIP easily uses location information, so that it is possible to provide new services inter-working with location services. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052423 | Systems and Methods for Improved Mobility and Quality of Service in a Wireless Network - For a mobile node visiting a packet-switched wireless access network, said access network using a tunnelling-type micro-mobility protocol and a Quality of Service (QoS) routing protocol to route packet data to and from said mobile node, and comprising an access router to which said mobile node may attach, a mobility agent and a gateway, a method of configuring said access network to route packet data toward said mobile node which method comprises the steps of: (a) receiving in said access network a handover indication of said mobile node or a login request therefrom; (b) in response to said handover indication or login request computing a QoS route for said mobile node, which QoS route is useable to route packets between said mobility agent and said mobile node; (c) performing step (b) at a location in said access network remote from said mobility agent; and (d) transmitting said QoS route and said handover indication or login request from said remote location toward said mobility agent; whereby upon receipt of data transmitted in step (d) said mobility agent may handle both mobility configuration and QoS route configuration for said mobile node as part of said network layer handover. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052424 | SHARING OF WIRELESS TELEPHONE SERVICES FOR A PERSONAL WIRELESS TELEPHONE AND A VEHICULAR WIRELESS TELEPHONE - Sharing of wireless telephone services between a subscriber's personal wireless telephone and the subscriber's vehicular wireless telephone. The shared service may be a connectivity service, allowing the subscriber's personal wireless telephone to communicate directly with the subscriber's vehicular wireless telephone. Alternately, or additionally, the shared service may be one or more services provided for by the wireless service agreement plan of the subscriber's vehicular wireless telephone or the subscriber's personal wireless telephone. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052425 | PACKET TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE AND MOBILE NODE - Disclosed is technique for avoiding packet reflection between home agents. According to the technique, a MN | 02-26-2009 |
20090052426 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCED DATA RATE ADAPTATION AND LOWER POWER CONTROL IN A WLAN SEMICONDUCTOR CHIP - A method of optimising the operation of a WLAN device which is used in the transmission and reception of a service over a medium, the WLAN device comprising a WLAN chip set and power amplifier, the method comprising the steps of: determining a the value of a collision avoidance metric of the chip set at a specific time; predicting the available bandwidth of the WLAN from the value of the metric; determining the current data rate of the WLAN based on predicted available bandwidth and the type of service; and selecting a power amplifier bias voltage that is the minimum permitted for the determined current data rate to reduce the power consumption of the WLAN device. | 02-26-2009 |
20090059872 | WIRELESS DYNAMIC RATE ADAPTATION ALGORITHM - A wireless switch is provided. A processor is adapted to set a radio frequency (RF) transmission speed for a wireless client based on a location of the wireless client and a signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) of a radio frequency signal received by the wireless client. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059873 | Characterizing uncoordinated interference of a wireless network - An apparatus and method of a wireless access node within a network characterizing uncoordinated interference is disclosed. One method includes the wireless node collecting air-time usage history as perceived by the wireless access node. The wireless access node receives air-time usage history as perceived by at least one neighboring wireless node. The wireless access node comparatively analyzes the collected air-time usage and the received air-time usage. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059874 | WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEMS - The invention provides method of, apparatus capable of, and computer software for, providing a user with access to a communications system including a plurality of wireless access points, said method comprising providing set of functions for use on a user terminal, said functions including functions for: storing a plurality of sets of user identification data, said user identification data relating to one or more wireless access points via which the user has authorisation to access the communications system; providing a directory of wireless access points in said communications system, said directory including wireless access point identification data; using said directory to identify a wireless access point; and using one of said plurality of sets of user identification data to access the communications system via an identified wireless access point. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059875 | NODE FAULT IDENTIFICATION IN WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINTS - A wireless access point array having a plurality of access point radios, a monitor radio and an array controller. The array controller includes processes, methods and functions for verifying the operation of the access point radios. The access point radios may be verified by attempting to establish a data connection between the monitor radio and each of the access point radios. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059876 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UPDATING MAC TABLE OF LAYER-2 SWITCH IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. An apparatus for a Base Station (BS) comprises a controller for determining whether to accept an entry of a mobile terminal (MT) by handover from an adjacent BS, a handler for generating a message to get an L2 switch to update a Media Access Control (MAC) table, and a communicator for transmitting the message to the L2 switch. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059877 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device includes: a determination unit that determines a selected first and second numbers based on relationship information; a calculation unit that calculates the number of frames transmittable through the first channel within a time period as a first frame number based on the selected first number, and the number of frames transmittable through the second channel within the time period as a second frame number based on the selected second number; a selection unit that selects smaller one of the first and second frame numbers; an aggregation unit that aggregates frames for the selected frame number to generate a single aggregation frame; and a transmission unit that transmits the aggregation frame through one of the first channels or the second channel for which a transmission permission is acquired based on a channel status of the first and the second channels. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059878 | WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - A wireless LAN (Local Area Network) access point includes: a housing; and a plurality of sub-access points provided in the housing. The plurality of sub-access points being operable independently of one another. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059879 | Wireless communication system for communicating via wireless LAN - Provided is a wireless communication system, comprising: a base station providing communication by a plurality of communication methods; and a mobile node for communicating with the base station by the plurality of communication methods. The mobile node calculates a first distance between a wireless LAN access point and the mobile node; and judges whether the communication by the wireless LAN is possible by comparing the calculated first distance and a second distance that is a distance within which communication by a wireless LAN is available. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059880 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In performing SVD-MIMO transmission, a set-up procedure is simplified while assuring a satisfactory decoding capability with a reduced number of antennas. A transmitter estimates channel information based on reference signals sent from a receiver, determines a transmit antenna weighting coefficient matrix based on the channel information, calculates a weight to be assigned to each of components of a multiplexed signal, and sends, to the receiver, training signals for respective signal components, the training signals being weighted by the calculated weights. On the other hand, the receiver determines a receive antenna weighting coefficient matrix based on the received training signals. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059881 | WIRELESS NETWORK SELF-ADAPTIVE LOAD BALANCER - A load balancer is provided for balancing distribution of wireless clients among wireless access points. The load balancer includes a tracking implementation for tracking at least one telemetry parameter of each wireless client's wireless link with each respective wireless access point. A goal implementation is included for comparing one or more telemetry parameter against at least one predetermined goal to obtain a fitness measure. A control implementation is also provided for varying the operation of at least one of the respective wireless access points and wireless clients in response to the fitness measure, so as to balance the distribution of load among the respective wireless access points. | 03-05-2009 |
20090067392 | FLOOR DETERMINATION FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus configured to acquire received signal strength intensities (RSSIs) for a wireless device from a plurality of access points (APs) located on a plurality floors. The apparatus is configured to determine which floor the wireless device is on by analyzing the RSSIs. In an example embodiment, the RSSIs are adjusted, and the adjusted RSSIs for each floor are summed. The floor with highest sum of adjusted RSSIs is determined to be the floor the wireless device is on. In an example embodiment, the floor that the wireless device is on is determined by calculating the probability that the wireless device is within the cell of each AP on the network, and combining the probabilities for each floor. Known RSSIs between APs can be employed for comparing measured RSSIs with the known RSSIs to determine the probability that the wireless device is within the cell of each AP. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067393 | Concentric rings wireless network architecture - A wireless network includes access points arranged in concentric rings and grids of concentric rings. At low network loads, only access points in the center are on to reduce power consumption. As network loads increase, access points in concentric rings are turned on. As network loads decrease, access points in concentric rings are turned off. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067394 | Mobile Network user Terminal Status Monitoring | 03-12-2009 |
20090067395 | Routing Network Requests Based on a Mobile Network Signature - Disclosed are systems and methods for responding to a web page request from a mobile device by providing the network address of a server hosting content formatted for the mobile device. The systems and methods include means and ways for redirecting a request for URL resolution from a DNS server to an enhanced DNS server with facilities to determine the kind of the requesting device, e.g., whether the requesting device is fixed or mobile. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067396 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH (BT) DELAYED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT (ACK) - A method and system for Bluetooth (BT) delayed acknowledgment is presented. Aspects of the system may include an initiator device, such as a WLAN access point (AP), which enables transmission of a protocol data unit, such as a BlockAckReq frame, to a responder device, such as a Smartphone, via a first network, for example a WLAN. The Smartphone may be equipped with capabilities that enable communication via WLAN and Bluetooth networks. The AP may wait to receive a response protocol data unit, such as a BlockAck frame, via the first network (WLAN) for a response time duration. The response time duration may be based on the communication slot time duration for communication by the Smartphone on a second network, for example a BT piconet. The communication slot time duration may correspond to the time duration for a BT slot. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067397 | PROCEDURE FOR WIRELESS NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - There is provided a procedure for wireless network management and a station supporting the procedure. In the procedure, non-AP station which wants to us a traffic filter service (TFS) transmits a TFS request message including one or more TFS request elements for defining information about the requesting traffic filters to an access point (AP). And, the non-AP station receives, from the AP in response to the first TFS request message, a TFS response message including one or more TFS response elements for defining information about the status of the requesting traffic filters. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067398 | Implementing Location Awareness In WLAN Devices - A set of global location signals, an SBAS (Satellite Based Augmentation System), or an ACI (ambient country identifier) signal can be used to automatically provide location awareness for a WLAN device. If one of the set of global location signals, the SBAS signal, or the ACI signal is detected, then the WLAN device can configure itself to comply with channel and power settings for the country/region having the detected signal(s). After configuration, the WLAN device can be “locked” to the country/region having the signal(s), thereby ensuring legal operation of the WLAN device even after subsequent restarts. If one of the signals is not detected, then the WLAN device can be configured in a default mode, e.g. an “open mode” in which end users can configure the WLAN device by entering a country of operation or a “common mode” in which the channel and transmit power settings meet global spectrum usage requirements. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067399 | Method and System for Imposing Air Interface Service Level - A method and system for providing services in communications networks. A gateway layer determines information about a communication session and responsively sends a signaling message to a session manager, providing the information. The session manager may then send a signaling message to a service agent, also providing the information. The service agent may in turn apply a set of service logic based at least in part on the information, so as to derive a service treatment, and the service agent may send a signaling message so as to cause an enforcement engine (such as the gateway or session manager) to carry out the service treatment. Advantageously, this arrangement may facilitate imposition of services across various types of communication sessions (such as voice sessions and/or data sessions) and access networks (such as circuit-switched and/or packet-switched), at session initiation and during the course of an ongoing session. A variety of useful services may thereby be provided. | 03-12-2009 |
20090067400 | METHOD OF SUPERVISING AT LEAST ONE TUNNEL SET UP FOR ROUTING PACKETS BETWEEN A MOBILE ROUTER AND A REFERRING EQUIPMENT ITEM IN A HOME NETWORK OF THE MOBILE ROUTER - A method supervises at least one tunnel set up for routing packets between a mobile router and a referring piece of equipment in a home network of the mobile router. The method detects a change in an availability state of the tunnel and sends notification of the change in the availability state of the tunnel to at least one node connected to the mobile router, and uses the tunnel set up for routing packets between itself and a network. | 03-12-2009 |
20090073941 | MESH NETWORK CONNECTING 3G WIRELESS ROUTERS - A communication routing arrangement includes two or more wireless routers coupled to a communication network, and a user device adapted to couple with the communication network through a communication path including at least one of the two or more wireless routers. The communication path between the user device and the communication network is selected based on available resources of the two or more wireless routers. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073942 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DEVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK OF DEVICES HAVING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS - A system and method for wireless communication are disclosed. One aspect of the system includes a plurality of wireless devices forming a wireless network. The plurality of wireless devices are configured to wirelessly communicate with one another. Each of the wireless devices includes a device table including a list of one or more of the wireless devices and the directions of the one or more of the wireless devices with respect to the wireless device including the device table. In the wireless system, any one of the plurality of wireless devices is configured to perform device discovery directly with a new wireless device entering the wireless network. The one wireless device is further configured to update the device table therein and to transmit the updated device table to other wireless devices in the wireless network. Other devices in the wireless system can update their device tables, based at least partly on the updated device table without performing device discovery directly with the new wireless device. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073943 | HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS AD HOC NETWORK - A heterogeneous wireless ad-hoc network includes a server and a number of ad-hoc service providers that provide connectivity to a network for mobile clients. The mobile client is configured to search for ad-hoc service providers with wireless backhauls to the network and associate with one of the ad-hoc service providers detected in the search based on one or more parameters. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073944 | Restricted Cyclic Shift Configuration for Random Access Preambles in Wireless Networks - Transmission of random access preamble structures within a cellular wireless network is based on the use of cyclic shifted constant amplitude zero autocorrelation (“CAZAC”) sequences to generate the random access preamble signal. A pre-defined set of sequences is arranged in a specific order. Within the predefined set of sequences is an ordered group of sequences that is a proper subset of the pre-defined set of sequences. Within a given cell, up to 64 sequences may need to be signaled. In order to minimize the associated overhead due to signaling multiple sequences, only one logical index is transmitted by a base station serving the cell and a user equipment within the cell derives the subsequent indexes according to the pre-defined ordering. Each sequence has a unique logical index. The ordering of sequences is identified by the logical indexes of the sequences, with each logical index uniquely mapped to a generating index. When a UE needs to transmit, it produces a second sequence using the received indication of the logical index of the first sequence and an auxiliary value and then produces a transmission signal by modulating the second sequence. The auxiliary value is selected from one of two sets based on a set indicator broadcast by the eNB | 03-19-2009 |
20090073945 | DIRECT LINK SETUP PROCEDURE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - Provided are a Tunneled Direct Link Setup (TDLS) establishment procedure for a TDLS initiator and a station supporting the establishment procedure. In the establishment procedure, a requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup request frame via an access point(AP) to an intended peer Non-AP QSTA. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA receives a TDLS setup response frame via the AP from the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup request frame. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup confirm frame via the AP to the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup response frame. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073946 | Wireless Transmission System - A wireless transmission device makes it possible to access the internet from a wireless LAN terminal, and notifies the state of wireless connection to a public wireless transmission network to the wireless LAN terminal, thereby alleviating uncertainty and disquiet on the part of the user when connecting to this network. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073947 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A network controller for facilitating roaming of a mobile wireless communications device between access points communicates with at least one access point over a wired network which, in turn, communicate with a mobile wireless communications device over a wireless network. The network controller includes a data processing system including a protocol stack that facilitates a communication session between the mobile device and a network device on the wired network, and a session table identifying session information for each said communication session. The session information identifies the current access point with which the mobile device is currently associated. The protocol stack updates the session table from session information received from the current access point, maintains a first virtual circuit with the network device, maintains a second virtual circuit with the current access point, and bridges communication between the virtual circuits in accordance with the session information. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073948 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING PACKETS ORIGINATING FROM LOCAL AND NEIGHBORING BASIC SERVICE SETS - A method and apparatus for efficiently processing packets from neighboring basic service sets (BSSs) to characterize the traffic within a wireless local area network (WLAN), mesh network, or similar wireless communication system is disclosed. The apparatus may be an access point (AP) in a BSS which includes a measurement period (MP) interval timer, a promiscuous measurement period (PMP) timer and a receiver filter. An interval of the MP interval timer is set while the receiver filter is enabled. During the interval, the AP only processes packets which originated from the AP's own BSS. When the MP interval timer expires, a value of the PMP timer is set to a predetermined time duration and the receiver filter is disabled. During the predetermined time duration, the AP processes all received packets irrespective of which BSS the packets originated from. The receiver filter is again enabled when the PMP timer expires. | 03-19-2009 |
20090080387 | Method and system for controlling operation of a communication network, related network and computer program product therefor - In a network wherein nodes request services adapted to be provided via a plurality of home agents, a system includes nodes configured for having associated a service identifier identifying a service requested by the at least one node, the system being configured for selecting the home agents to provide the services requested, wherein the home agents are selected based on the service identifiers. A node may thus have a first service identifier and a second service identifier identifying two different services adapted to be provided, even simultaneously, by a first and a second home agent respectively. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080388 | Wireless Local Area Network and access point for a Wireless Local Area Network - Embodiments related to Wireless Local Area Networks and access points for a Wireless Local Area Network are described and depicted. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080389 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND A DATA FRAME FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A means for determining a channel for communication in a wireless communication system is provided. A method includes receiving one or more sub-frames of a beacon signal on a beaconing channel until a legitimacy condition of the beacon signal is met. The beacon signal is transmitted by a beaconing device. The method further includes determining a suitability of the channel for communication in the wireless communication system based on the legitimacy condition. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080390 | Method of Discovering Devices Located in Different Wireless Networks - The invention discloses a method of discovering devices located in different wireless networks, a wireless network being built up for a device, wherein network is identified with a wireless network identification (Service Set Identification (SSID)) having an array for identifying device types, a correspondence between the array for identifying the device types and the device types being arranged at a user terminal, the method comprising steps of: A. searching for a currently available wireless network by the user terminal in a wireless network environment in order to obtain an SSID corresponding to the currently available wireless network; B. determining a device type corresponding to an array owned by the obtained SSID according to the arranged correspondence, and displaying a device icon for the device type corresponding to the SSID, by the user terminal. The method enables the user terminal to discover a device located in a wireless network different from the user terminal rapidly and conveniently. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080391 | Network interworking system and method for negotiating qos in network interworking system - A 3GPP-WLAN interworking system to which WLAN user equipment is accessed includes a WLAN access network including a WLAN access point, a 3GPP packet-switched service network including terminal equipment, a 3GPP core network connecting the WLAN access network and the 3GPP packet-switched service network, and a packet data gateway relaying the 3GPP core network and the 3GPP packet-switched service network. The WLAN user equipment negotiates a QoS according to a wireless environment with the WLAN access point to generate a WLAN bearer, negotiates a QoS according to a type of user data with the packet data gateway to generate a WLAN 3GPP IP access bearer, and negotiates a QoS according to data process performance of the terminal equipment with the terminal equipment to generate an end-to-end bearer. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080392 | Communication terminal device and communication transmission method - A communication terminal device is provided. The communication device includes a control unit, a WLAN module, a WMAN module and a VoIP module. The control unit provides a drive module for driving the WLAN module, the WMAN module and the VoIP module, and provides a real-time kernel module for achieving quality performance of the communication terminal device. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080393 | WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system which includes first to third terminals which belong to a first network, and the first and the third terminals belong to a second network. The first terminal transmits a first packet generated by the first terminal to a second terminal through the first network. When the second terminal receives the first packet, the second terminal monitors a route between the first and the second terminals. When the monitored results satisfy prescribed conditions, the second terminal transmits a second packet to the third terminal. When the third terminal receives the second packet, the third terminal transmits a third packet, which indicates that the third terminal can be connected to the second network, to the second terminal. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080394 | WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM - The invention realizes a wireless control system capable of reducing loads on a wireless network and gateway nodes and improving reliability of the system. The wireless control system for collecting data from a plurality of wireless nodes constituting a wireless network to a supervisory node via gateway nodes, wherein said each gateway node and said each wireless node have group IDs assigned thereto in advance and said each wireless node selects a route having the most excellent communication quality of routes leading to the gateway nodes having the same group ID as a self-node and transmits data to the selected route. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080395 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a mobile communication system including a plurality of communication terminals each equipped with a wireless communication device for performing wireless communication between the local station and the secondary station and a base station apparatus wirelessly connected to the plurality of communication terminals, the communication terminal comprises identification information regarding the local station and the secondary station, with which wireless communication can be performed, to the base station apparatus, while the base station apparatus comprises a receiving device for receiving the identification information, a interlinking device for interlinking communication packets for the plurality of communication terminals in accordance with a communication method adapted to the communication terminal and the received identification information, a selecting device for selecting the communication terminal corresponding to a transmission destination of the interlinked communication packets based on information representing communication conditions of the plurality of communication terminals, and a transmitting device for transmitting the interlinked packets to the selected communication terminal, wherein the communication terminal is constituted such that the interlinked packets are received, then, at least packets for the secondary station within the received interlinked packets are transferred to the secondary station by the wireless communication device. Thus, it is possible to apparently improve the throughput by effectively using time slots. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080396 | SELECTIVE REVIEW OF BUNDLED MESSAGES FROM A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system, method, and computer device that allow a wireless communication device to selectively bundle messages in an access channel communication packet being sent to another computer device on the wireless communication network, such as a base station are disclosed. The bundled messages are typically sent in response to a request sent to the wireless communication device for response to a specific event, such as the setup of a group communication call. The receiving computer device determines if the access channel communication packet contains data indicating one or more bundled messages are therewithin such that resources only then will expended to review the bundled messages to check for the availability of the requested resources. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080397 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING RESOURCE REGION TO REDUCE MAP OVERHEAD - A method of allocating a radio resource in a wireless access system is disclosed. The method includes receiving a control message associated with radio resource allocation for transmitting uplink data to the base station, wherein the control message comprises a first persistent uplink allocation information element comprising first resource allocation information associated with a first resource allocation region for transmitting the uplink data of a mobile station and transmitting an acknowledgment (ACK) message from the mobile station to the base station in response to successfully receiving the first persistent uplink allocation information element. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080398 | Hierarchical Communication System Providing Intelligent Data, Program and Processing Migration - A hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. Copies of data, program code and processing resources are migrated from their source toward requesting destinations based on request frequency, communication link costs and available local storage and/or processing resources. Each appropriately configured network device acts as an active participant in network migration. In addition, portable two-dimensional (2-D) code reading terminals are configured to wirelessly communicate compressed 2-D images toward stationary access servers that identify the code image through decoding and through comparison with a database of images that have previously been decoded and stored. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080399 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING PROXY MOBILE IP REGISTRATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for enabling mobility of a node that does not support Mobile IP are disclosed. When an AP receives a data packet, the AP may compare the data packet (e.g., source address) with the AP information for one or more APs to determine whether to send a registration request on behalf of the node. More particularly, the AP determines from the source address whether the node is located on a subnet identical to a subnet of the AP. If the node is located on the subnet of the AP, no Mobile IP service is required on behalf of the node. However, when it is determined from the source address that the node is not located on the subnet identical to the subnet of the Access Point, the AP composes and sends a mobile IP registration request on behalf of the node. For instance, the mobile IP registration request may be composed using the gateway associated with the “home” AP (e.g., having a matching subnet) as the node's Home Agent. | 03-26-2009 |
20090080400 | RADIO GATEWAY SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERFACING A RADIO SYSTEM AND AN IP NETWORK - A radio gateway system and method for interfacing one or more radio systems and a packet network. The system comprises a plurality of gateways, each gateway including a radio interface port, a protocol converter and packet interface. The gateways convert audio and signaling from the radio system into packet signals in a generic protocol. The gateways also convert packet signals in the generic protocol into audio and signaling in a protocol understandable by a respective radio system. | 03-26-2009 |
20090086687 | CONFIGURABLE AND FLEXIBLE WIRELESS LINK ADAPTATION METHOD AND DEVICE - A method and apparatus for implementing user defined Link Adaptation solutions in a wireless system. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086688 | REMOTE ACCESS TO A CUSTOMER HOME NETWORK - A wireless application server may receive, from a wireless device, information identifying an application residing on a network device in a home network. The wireless application server may further cause a connection to be established to the application and transfer traffic between the application and the wireless device. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086689 | CAPWAP/LWAPP MULTICAST FLOOD CONTROL FOR ROAMING CLIENTS - A method, an apparatus, a system, and logic encoded in one or more computer-readable tangible medium to carry out a method. The method includes maintaining the state of clients of an access point controlled by a controller in the controller of the access point, including multicast group information, and updating the access point with multicast group identification for the clients, such that the controller in combination with the access point can forward packets, and such that multicast group information for a roaming client of the access point is maintained. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086690 | Method for Selecting Antennas and Beams in MIMO Wireless LANs - A computer implemented method selects antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output wireless local area network that includes multiple stations, and each station includes a set of antennas. Multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets are received in a station. Each sounding packet corresponds to a different subset of the set of antennas. A channel matrix is estimated from the multiple consecutively transmitted sounding packets. A frame including a high throughput (HT) control field is sent to initiate a selecting of antennas, and a subset of antennas is selected according to the channel matrix. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086691 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO FACILITATE HANDLING OF ACCESS TERMINALS CAMPED ONTO AN ACCESS POINT BASE STATION - Devices and methods are provided for handling a visitor access terminal (AT) associated with a macro network, in response to the visitor AT entering a coverage area of an access point (AP) base station. In one approach, the method involves allowing registration of the visitor AT with the AP base station, and forwarding information regarding the registration to the macro network. Upon activation of the visitor AT, communication between the visitor AT and the macro network may be facilitated by, for example, forwarding a paging request to the visitor AT through the AP base station. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086692 | APPARATUS AND METHOD SUPPORTING WIRELESS ACCESS TO MULTIPLE SECURITY LAYERS IN AN INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND AUTOMATION SYSTEM OR OTHER SYSTEM - A method includes receiving a message at a first wireless node. The first wireless node is associated with a first wired network, and the first wired network is associated with a first security layer. The method also includes transmitting the message over the first wired network when at least one destination of the message is located in the first security layer. The method further includes wirelessly transmitting the message for delivery to a second wireless node when at least one destination of the message is located in a second security layer. The second wireless node is associated with a second wired network, and the second wired network is associated with the second security layer. The first and second security layers may be associated with different security paradigms and/or different security domains. Also, the message could be associated with destinations in the first and second security layers. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086693 | System and method for RF space protection and control - A system and method of controlling the operation of the wireless communications between a mobile device and access point by monitoring and modifying the communications. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086694 | Multimedia communication gateway for hospitality and convention facilities - The present invention may be used for interfacing disparate forms of communication media and networks in hospitality and convention facilities. A gateway unit that may be used in a guest room may have a front panel, a connector panel and at least one antenna. A computing device, multiple memory elements and communication interface elements may be interconnected in the gateway unit for communication sensors, controls, ports and antennas of the gateway unit. The gateway unit may include hub and router functional elements and may integrate the external and internal media and network system content for a user to interface user elements while in a guest room. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086695 | Mechanism for communication with multiple wireless video area networks - A device is disclosed having a first radio component to enable the device to communicate with devices in a first wireless network via a first wireless communication protocol and a second radio component to enable the device to communicate with devices in a second wireless network via a second wireless communication protocol. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086696 | Wireless Transmission Device, Wireless Transmission Method, Wireless Communication System, and Program - A wireless transmission device according to the present invention includes a packet transmission portion, a Block ACK receiving portion, a retransmission control portion, and a transmission rate revision portion. The packet transmission portion transmits a plurality of packets to a receiving terminal. The Block ACK receiving portion receives a Block ACK that is received from the receiving terminal after the plurality of the packets are transmitted. The retransmission control portion determines a plurality of the packets to be consecutively transmitted, based on the Block ACK. The transmission rate revision portion revises a transmission rate that is used when the plurality of the packets are consecutively transmitted from a value that is normally used in accordance with a wireless channel quality. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086697 | Information Communication Terminal Having Wireless Communication Function - A terminal includes a communication unit. The communication unit determines which one of an AP mode and an ST mode is set as an operating mode of the terminal. In the ST mode, the communication unit accepts a received frame, and then outputs the accepted frame to a host system. In the AP mode, the communication unit transmits the received frame as it is to a wireless network, that is, relays the frame. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086698 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING A COLLISION IN COMMON E-DCH TRANSMISSIONS - A method and apparatus for managing a collision in random access channel (RACH) access transmissions are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) transmits WTRU-dependent information to confirm that a detected acquisition indicator (AI) is intended to the WTRU. The WTRU-dependent information may be transmitted separately after detecting the AI, may be transmitted along with a RACH preamble, or may be sent in an E-RACH message. The WTRU-dependent information may be a random number, a sequence or scrambling code randomly selected from a pre-determined set of sequences or scrambling codes. Alternatively, the WTRU-dependent information may be a pre-configured identifier, or information derived from the pre-configured identifier. Alternatively, after detecting an AI, the WTRU may randomly select an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) resource from a set of E-DCH resources associated with an RACH resource used for transmission of the RACH preamble and transmit an E-RACH message using the selected E-DCH resource. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092106 | WIRELESS LAN SETTING SYSTEM IN AN IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS, AND A WIRELESS LAN SETTING METHOD - A wireless LAN setting system mounted on an image forming apparatus that performs network connection through a wireless LAN and used for performing wireless communication with plural terminals, the wireless LAN setting system including a mode for checking, before setting is performed, existing setting contents (setting items and setting states) presently set. Guide indications are attached to respective setting screens. With the wireless LAN setting system, proper determination is performed and setting operation is correctly performed even if a user (an administrator) does not have professional knowledge. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092107 | System and Method for Inter-Radio Access Technology Signal Measurement - A multi-mode user equipment is provided. The multi-mode user equipment includes a processor configured to promote measurement of a signal strength of a microtechnology-based network during a portion of a macrotechnology-based communication from a network component to the multi-mode user equipment. The signal strength of the microtechnology-based network is measured during a portion of the macrotechnology-based communication when no user data is being transmitted. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092108 | System, method and computer readable medium for re-connecting to a Zigbee network - An end device on a Zigbee network exits a power saving mode and transmits a wake notification message to the network. The network retrieves a cached status flag indicating whether the end device is defined on the Zigbee network and transmits the status flag to the end device. If the end device is undefined on the Zigbee network, the end device attempts to re-join the network. During the power saving mode, the network can cache messages intended for the end device and transmit the messages to the end device when the device exits the power saving mode. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092109 | Method and Apparatus for Enabling Discovery Within a Home Network - A method and Home IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Gateway for enabling a non-IMS enabled device within a home network to discover the availability of the Home IMS Gateway. The Home IMS Gateway is interposed at a control plane between a remote network and the non-IMS enabled device. The Home IMS Gateway sends an advertisement message to the non-IMS enabled device advertising the availability of services on the remote network via the Home IMS Gateway. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092110 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD USING VARIABLE TRANSMISSION RATE - A wireless communication apparatus includes a transmission section and a control section. The transmission section transmits data using wireless communication. The control section controls a transmission rate for the transmission section. The control section limits data size of data to be transmitted to at most a prescribed value and requests a transmission acknowledgement, during a period from immediately after a change in the transmission rate until number of times that the transmission section transmits data reaches a prescribed number of times. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092111 | CONTROL OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSION BASED ON NODE STATUS - Transmission by a first node may be controlled based on a status of a second node. The status of the second node may indicate, for example, whether the second node will be communicating with the first node. Thus, if it is determined based on the status of the second node that the second node may not be communicating with the first node, transmissions by the first node may be temporarily disabled until there is a change in status, and vice versa. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092112 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK SYSTEM AND CLUSTER MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - A wireless sensor network system and a cluster management method thereof. The wireless sensor network system includes at least one cluster having at least one sensor node for collecting sensing data, and a cluster head for aggregating the sensing data from the at least one sensor node. A sink node collects the aggregated sensing data from the at least one cluster, wherein the cluster head of a first cluster determines a cluster size of the first cluster, and when the first cluster is a master cluster and the cluster size of the first cluster is less than a threshold size, merges, the first cluster into a second master cluster, and switches the first cluster to a slave cluster. In each cluster, management efficiency can thereby be maintained within a specified range, and the lifetime of a wireless sensor network can be prolonged by reducing energy consumption. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092113 | Graphical Display of Status Information in a Wireless Network Management System - Methods, apparatuses and systems directed to, or facilitating, the graphical display of status information in wireless network management systems. In one implementation, the present invention provides a graphical user interface that allows a network administrator to readily ascertain the overall status of a wireless network, and quickly identify the network element(s) within the network that are associated with any potential problem or condition. In another implementation, the present invention provides a graphical user interface that provides status icons that efficiently convey status information for corresponding access points. In another implementation, the present invention provides a hierarchical network model that facilitates network data management, configuration and display tasks associated with wireless network management systems. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092114 | WLAN AND WIRED MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND LOCATION FINDING SYSTEM - Wired and mobile cascaded communication systems and processors used in wired and wireless local area network (WLAN) and mobile systems with touch screen generated communication and control signal and position finding signals. Systems with distinct modulators for wired, WLAN and mobile systems operated in separate network and systems. The WLAN includes use of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed (OFDM) signal, the mobile communication system includes use of time division multiple access (TDMA) signal and Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) signal. Cascaded communication system includes receiving, processing and transmitting a Bluetooth signal. Communication system and WLAN has non-linearly amplified amplifier and linearly amplified amplifier for signal amplification and transmission and non-quadrature modulator and a quadrature modulator. Quadrature modulator is used for modulation of TDMA or CDMA filtered cross-correlated in-phase and quadrature-phase baseband signals. Position finding with processor for processing and providing processed location finding signals received from multiple GPS satellites and processed location finding signals received from land based cellular transmitters. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092115 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR CENTRAL CONTROL OF MESH NETWORKS - A method and a wireless communication device that implements a control node for a mesh network. Preferably, the device and method are used in an 802.11 LAN. | 04-09-2009 |
20090097458 | Method and System for Agent Redirecting the Terminal Request - A method and system for agent redirecting the terminal request is provided. Firstly a uniform service address is preset for each service in the terminals. The terminal initiates a service access request. The agent gateway queries the service subscribing information of the user. The agent gateway determines the type of the service requested by the terminal according to the uniform service address and queries the address of the corresponding service server. The agent gateway transmits the service access request to the service server obtained by query. The service server returns the access response of the service to the terminal via the agent gateway. The present invention can choose the suitable service server and agent redirect the service access request to the designated service server in the case that multiple servers exist by presetting the uniform service address in the terminal. In the meantime, presetting the uniform service address in the terminal can avoid the complicated configuration process of the server address in the terminal and improve the service level for the users. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097459 | METHOD FOR WAN ACCESS TO HOME NETWORK USING ONE TIME-PASSWORD - A mobile device is configured to securely access a trusted network over of wide area network. The mobile device includes a communication interface, a processor, and a memory. The mobile device connects to the trusted network via a local access point in the trusted network at a first point in time, receives a password list containing a plurality of one-time passwords from the trusted network while the mobile device is connected to the trusted network via the local access point, stores the password list in memory, subsequently connects remotely to the trusted network over a wide area network, and sends a selected one-time password from the password list to access network resources in the trusted network. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097460 | Method for contention-free NPD periodic updating - Methods and apparatus for a next-in-line protecting device to periodically broadcasting its existence in a communication system. A next-in-line protecting device periodically transmits the next-in-line codeword to inform a primary protecting device and a plurality of secondary devices that the next-in-line device still exists in a communication system. The NPD transmits the NPD codeword intelligently in order to reduce the probability of collision with the RTS codewords transmitted by the other SPDs. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097461 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CONTENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing one or more contents to one or more devices in a wireless communication network. The method includes associating the one or more contents with one or more headers corresponding to one or more data packets transmitted for the one or more devices at an anchor datapath gateway in the wireless communication network The method further includes rendering the one or more contents with data represented by the one or more data packets to the one or more devices in response to associating the one or more contents with the one or more headers. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097462 | Deployable Cellular Communication Extension System - Embodiments of systems and methods provide deployable cellular telecommunication base stations capable of sending, receiving, and extending telephone calls in areas where commercial cellular communications are unavailable. The deployable base station can send and receive cellular telephone calls via cellular communication transceivers, and relay such calls to a distant teleport via a satellite communication link. The deployable base station includes routers for encoding voice calls in voice-over IP data format and for routing calls via the satellite communication link. The deployable base station may also include land mobile radio (LMR) communication interoperability circuits to enable LMR communications to be relayed to a distant teleport. At the teleport, received communications can be routed via a public switched telephone network to an intended receiver to enable telephone communications with the global commercial network from areas lacking commercial cellular communications. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097463 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097464 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons. | 04-16-2009 |
20090103502 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A display apparatus selects one of multiple wireless communication apparatuses and activates the selected wireless communication apparatus as a second access point of a second group. The activated wireless communication apparatus establishes the second group including multiple wireless communication apparatuses. After the second group is thus established, the transmission power of the wireless communication apparatus activated as the access point and the multiple wireless communication apparatuses included in the second group is controlled. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103503 | Location Aware Background Access Point Scanning for WLAN - Respective distances between a communication device and a plurality of wireless local area network (WLAN) access points are determined. One of the plurality of WLAN access points with which the communication device is to associate is selected based on the determined distances | 04-23-2009 |
20090103504 | Multiplexed Communication System and Multiplexed Communication Method - A transmission processing apparatus selects, based on flow control information, user packets to be multiplexed, stores the user packets in the payload of a multiplexed packet based on the position order of multiplex flags corresponding to destination users, stores a multiplex flag group in which only the multiplex flags of the user packets are set in the header of the multiplexed packet, and transmits the multiplexed packet. A reception processing apparatus extracts the multiplex flag group from the header of the received multiplexed packet, transmits flow control information according to the storage state of a reception buffer to the transmission processing apparatus, demultiplexes the user packets from the payload of the multiplexed packet, extracts destination user information corresponding to the set multiplex flags from user management information, and outputs the user packets to the destination users corresponding to the user management information. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103505 | Method and Apparatus of Selectively Tying the Opening and Closing of EVDO and PPP Sessions - Method, and associated apparatus, for operating a hybrid access terminal operable in a CDMA 1x/EVDO hybrid communication session system. The hybrid access terminal is operable to communicate pursuant to an EVDO communication session and to a PPP communication session. The opening and closing of the communication sessions are independent of one another. Opening of one session does not require opening of another of the sessions. And, closing of one of the sessions does not require closing of the other of the sessions. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103506 | Separating Control and Data in Wireless Networks - Wireless communication techniques are described in which control and data are separated. In an implementation, a method is described which includes sending data packets on a first wireless channel and sending control data relating to the data packets on a second wireless channel having a data rate that is lower than a data rate of the first wireless channel. | 04-23-2009 |
20090109940 | Headphone with Enhanced Voice Communication - A headphone having ability to communicate using Internet Protocol (IP) standard. The capability may be used as a basis to facilitate a user to conduct voice calls using voice over IP (VoIP). The headphone may also facilitate voice calls with users connected via cellular networks (e.g., GSM, CDMA, etc.). In an embodiment, the headphone is provided a wireless LAN (WLAN) network interface such that VoIP calls are conducted using wireless medium. Similarly, a Bluetooth protocol type interface is also provided to communicate with a cellular phone and the communication forms the basis for the voice calls between the headphone and other cellular phones connected via the cellular network. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109941 | WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method of providing access to a communications system via a plurality of wireless hotspot access points, comprising:
| 04-30-2009 |
20090109942 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Controlling Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) For Voice Communications In A Network - In one illustrative example, a mobile communication device receives, via a generic access network (GAN) from a GAN controller, a message having a discontinuous transmission (DTX) indication. For a voice communication session, the mobile device causes a connection to be established with the GANC, via the GAN and over a wireless communication link with a wireless access point of the GAN, for the communication of voice data of the voice session which is provided via a core network of a mobile telecommunications network. In response to identifying that the DTX indication indicates that the DTX functions are instructed or supported by the GANC, the mobile device causes DTX functions to be performed for the communication of the voice data of the voice session over the wireless link. On the other hand, in response to identifying that the DTX indication fails to indicate that DTX functions are supported or instructed by the GANC, the mobile device refrains from causing the DTX functions to be performed for the communication of the voice data of the voice session over the wireless link. Preferably, the message which carries the DTX indication is a GA-RC REGISTER ACCEPT message or a GA-RC REGISTER UPDATE DOWNLINK message. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109943 | RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless network system including a first terminal for sending a request-to-send signal including information on a medium use period to a second terminal before sending data, receiving a clear-to-send signal from the second terminal, and sending data to the second terminal during the medium use period; the second terminal for receiving the request-to-send signal and sending the clear-to-send signal; a third terminal for receiving the request-to-send signal and transmitting data to a fourth terminal during the medium use period; ant the fourth terminal. Thus, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a problem that when it is judged that the wireless channel is being used, transmission of the station is suppressed. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109944 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING DATA FRAME IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a method of generating a data frame used in a wireless personal area network (WPAN). The method of generating a data frame used in a wireless personal area network (WPAN), the method including: generating a plurality of sub frames by using one or more MAC service data units (MSDUs); and generating sub headers including information about each sub frame; generating a PHY service data unit (PSDU) by using the plurality of sub frames, the sub headers, and a MAC header, wherein each sub frame includes a frame check sequence (FCS) field for detecting an error of a corresponding sub frame. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109945 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED DATA DEMODULATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A wireless network uses an improved frame structure to increase timing acquisition capabilities as well as reduction of spectral lines. In one aspect, the frame packet can be used to communicate the different modes of operation under which the packet was created. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109946 | Open-Host Wireless Access System - An “open-host” wireless access system includes a wireless access point (AP) that identifies the SSID from a WLAN connection request. A wireless service provider (WSP) is associated with the SSID. The AP is coupled to a demarcation switch within the access system. The demarcation switch includes a series of ports, where one or more ports are associated with a particular WSP. A WSP can connect equipment such as a router to its associated port or ports. The AP opens a VLAN to the designated port or ports to establish connections to the WSPS equipment based on the SSID. The WSP provides IP address assignments and authentication as a native process on the network such that the user experience is customizable by each WSP. Unique login screens and authentication methods can be employed by each WSP. | 04-30-2009 |
20090116462 | High Speed Overlay Mode for Burst Data and Real Time Streaming (Audio) Applications - In a wireless 802.15.4 communication system ( | 05-07-2009 |
20090116463 | MOBILE NODE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A technology is disclosed for a mobile device with multiple interfaces to make use of its multiple interfaces capability with Mobile IP. According to this technology, MN (Mobile Node) | 05-07-2009 |
20090116464 | ACCESS POINTS WITH SELECTIVE COMMUNICATION RATE AND SCHEDULING CONTROL AND RELATED METHODS FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANs) - The present invention is directed to methods and wireless communication devices that are configured to enhance communication capacity in a wireless network. In one aspect of the invention various scheduling processes and schedulers for the transmissions of data packets are disclosed. In another aspect of the invention, the selection of appropriate transmission rates to advertise by a common unit which provides wireless service to different types of wireless transmit receive units (WTRUs) is addressed. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116465 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, WIRELESS LAN TERMINAL AND BASE STATION SEARCHING METHOD FOR SUCH SYSTEM AND TERMINAL - In terminal ( | 05-07-2009 |
20090116466 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - A mobile communications handset ( | 05-07-2009 |
20090116467 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR ACCESSING NETWORK - The present disclosure discloses a method and system for a user accessing a network in which a user terminal obtains a requirement for an attribute of a network element, selects a network element meeting a capability requirement of a service to be used according to the requirement for the attribute of the network element, and accesses the network element meeting the capability requirement of the service to be used. The service requested by the user terminal can be implemented normally. Meanwhile, the present disclosure also discloses a user terminal and a Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF) discovery device. | 05-07-2009 |
20090122768 | Communication Device, Communication Method, Communication Program, and Storage Medium Thereof - In the present invention, when a CP is extended longer than that of a preset schedule, a CP having been set in a subsequent schedule cycle in the preset schedule is omitted until the delay is recovered, that is, until the preset schedule and an actual schedule are synchronized with each other. In case where the CP indicative of a period for executing a communication method in which a QAP does not manage spectrum allocation is extended longer than a period the QAP has set in the preset schedule, subsequent spectrum allocation in a QAP delays from the schedule, so that a power save efficiency of a QSTA drops. The foregoing technique suppresses the drop of the power save efficiency. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122769 | NETWORK NODE - A technology is disclosed for efficiently and effectively conveying location and mobility related information about a mobile node to the network in order to facilitate Location and mobility related functions and services. According to this technology, in order to detect location and mobility (for example, movement velocity) of the mobile node, dissemination of information including the identification information of the mobile node and the count metric indicating the distance to the mobile node is performed among adjacent network nodes. The network node, upon receiving this message, stores the information in the message, and generates a new count metric by decreasing the count metric. The network node then sends the message including the identification information of the mobile node and this newly generated count metric to the other network nodes. For example the network node determines the priority of resource reservation for each mobile node based on the count metric of each mobile node. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122770 | SENDER AND/OR HELPER NODE MODIFICATIONS TO ENABLE SECURITY FEATURES IN COOPERATIVE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Wireless protocols that employ a helper node are adapted so that they may take advantage of authentication security (and perhaps encryption security). Thus, such protocols may be used with security protocols such as 802.11i protocol (or the like) for example. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122771 | OFDM/OFDMA FRAME STRUCTURE FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology for communication systems is disclosed. The OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology comprises a variable length sub-frame structure with efficiently sized cyclic prefixes and efficient transition gap durations operable to effectively utilize OFDM/OFDMA bandwidth. Furthermore, the frame structure provides compatibility with multiple wireless communication systems. An uplink frame structure and a downlink frame structure are provided. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122772 | NETWORK SWITCHING METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MOBILE TERMINAL - A network switching method and apparatus of a mobile terminal for enabling the mobile terminal to switch between private and public networks for portable Internet access is provided. The network switching apparatus of a mobile terminal includes a connection manager for managing public network information, private network information including mappings between public base stations of a public network and private base stations of a private network, and authentication information, and a control unit for determining whether a signal strength of a signal received from a public base station, that is associated with a mobile terminal, is less than a threshold value, for determining, when the signal strength is less than the threshold value, whether to switch to a private base station of a private network mapped to the public base station, and for establishing, after determining to switch to the private base station, a connection with the private base station of the private network. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122773 | ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION BASED ON RECEIVED ACCESS POINT SIGNALS - An access point is configured based on signals received from one or more access points on a forward link. Such an access point may comprise, for example, a relatively small coverage area access point and/or an access point that is deployed in an ad-hoc manner. In some aspects, an access point may determine its location based on signals received from several neighboring macro access points. In some aspects, the timing of an access point may be synchronized to timing indicated by signals that are received from one or more neighboring access points. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122774 | MESH DETERMINISTIC ACCESS (MDA) PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK AND WIRELESS DEVICE SUPPORTING THE SAME - Provided are a procedure for mesh deterministic access (MDA) in wireless mesh network and a wireless device supporting the procedure. In the method, an intended transmitter transmits an a mesh deterministic access opportunity (MDAOP) setup request message including information for specifying times of a new MDAOP set and information for identifying the new MDAOP set to intended receivers. In this case, the MDAOP setup request message is a setup request message for a broadcast MDAOP. And, the intended transmitter receives an MDAOP setup reply message including a reply code from the intended receivers. The reply code may indicate either accept or refusal of the request for the new MDAOP set. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122775 | METHODS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES FOR WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS USING RECEIVER DETERMINED CHANNELS AND TRANSMITTED REFERENCE SIGNALS - Electronic devices for communicating in wireless ad-hoc networks and multiple access systems (such as mobile radio telephone communications systems) are disclosed. For example, a disclosed transmitter can transmit data to a first receiver in an ad-hoc wireless network (or multiple access system) over a first channel and can, further, transmit data to a second receiver in the ad-hoc wireless network (or multiple access system) over a second channel that is separate from the first channel, where the first and second channels are determined by the respective receivers which will receive the first and second transmitted data. Accordingly, communications between transmitters and different receivers in the ad-hoc wireless network (or multiple access system) can be carried on simultaneously. Related receivers as well as methods, computer program products, and systems for communicating are also disclosed. | 05-14-2009 |
20090129346 | Method and Apparatus for Monitoring TCP Sessions in a Mobile Data Network and Developing Corresponding Performance Metrics - These teachings provide for receiving ( | 05-21-2009 |
20090129347 | Approach For Configuring Wi-Fi Devices - According to an approach for configuring Wi-Fi devices, a wireless access point changes its mode of operation from a normal operating mode to a configuration operating mode to configure one or more Wi-Fi devices. When operating in the configuration operating mode, it is more difficult for an eavesdropper to intercept messages between the wireless access point and the Wi-Fi devices being configured. Upon completion of the configuration process, the wireless access point changes its mode of operation from the configuration operating mode back to the normal operating mode. This approach reduces the likelihood of an eavesdropper intercepting configuration messages exchanged between a wireless access point and one or more Wi-Fi devices during the configuration process. The approach also allows automated configuration of Wi-Fi devices and reduces the amount of user interaction required to configure Wi-Fi devices. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129348 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR MOBILE TERMINATED CALL PROCESSING BY A FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for processing a call setup in a network system are provided. A femtocell system receives a call origination for a call to be terminated with a user equipment serviced by the femtocell system from a core network, transmits a page message to the user equipment, performs a service connection with the user equipment, creates a connection for the core network, and completes the call setup with the user equipment. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129349 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE PROCESSING BY A FEMTOCELL SYSTEM - A system, method, and computer readable medium for processing messaging services in a network system are provided. A femtocell system receives a message delivery request and message content to be delivered to a destination device from a user equipment serviced thereby. The femtocell system packetizes the message content and transmits the packetized message content to a core network. A confirmation is then received by the femtocell system from the core network. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129350 | PREAMBLE DESIGN FOR A WIRELESS SIGNAL - Providing for management of wireless communications in a heterogeneous wireless access point (AP) environment is described herein. By way of example, system data of an over-the-air message can be configured to include information identifying a distinct type of transmitting base station. In some aspects, the information can include an access type of the base station and/or a sector ID for distinguishing the base station among large numbers of other base stations. According to other aspects, the information can include wireless channel resources designated for a particular type of base station, or blanked by the transmitting base station, to facilitate interference reduction on such resources. By employing aspects of wireless communication management disclosed herein, efficient and reliable communication can be affected in large heterogeneous AP networks. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129351 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT - An apparatus and method are provided for transmitting data by a Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) that communicates with a first communication equipment supporting a first communication protocol and a second communication equipment supporting a second communication protocol. The apparatus and method includes receiving data packets from the second communication equipment, determining a data grant interval of the first communication equipment according to a preset Quality of Service (QoS) scheme of the first communication equipment, determining an amount of data to be transmitted for the data grant interval, collecting data packets from the received data packets below the determined amount of transmission data, and transmitting the collected data packets to the first communication equipment every data grant interval. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129352 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SPLIT POLICY ENFORCEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless local area network system allows policy enforcement execution to be split between an access port and a centralized wireless controller. The policy may be of various types, including, but not limited to, a firewall policy, a QoS policy, a traffic shaping policy, and a bandwidth-management policy. On the AP, for all the traffic that is to be bridged or forwarded to specified ports, the policy table on the AP is checked. If it matches the policy table entry, then the specified action is taken. For all the traffic that gets forwarded to the controller by the AP, the match is checked with the policy table at the controller. If a match is detected, then the appropriate action specified by the policy is taken. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129353 | METHOD FOR RECOGNIZING AVAILABLE CHANNEL IN IEEE 802.15.4 PROTOCOL CSMA/CA MECHANISM - Disclosed is a method of recognizing an available channel in order to prevent channel occupation requirements from colliding with each other when one wireless channel is shared by plural terminals in a CSMA/CA mechanism using an IEEE 802.15.4 protocol slot, the method including: a first step of initializing a counter, CW, as 2, the CW being used for CCA which an attempt to perform is made before frame transmission; a second step of determining if a required channel is occupied; a third step of decreasing the CW by 1 when the channel is idle in the second step; a fourth step of re-determining if the channel is occupied; and a fifth step of, based on a determination result in the fourth step, determining if the CW is 1 when the channel is occupied. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129354 | ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION SCHEMES - An access point is configured based on acquired information. An access point may be configured based on the configuration(s) of at least one other access point. An identifier to be transmitted by an access point may be selected based on the identifier(s) transmitted by at least one other access point. An access point may configure itself with assistance from a configuration server. For example, the access point may send information such as the location of the access point to a configuration server and the configuration server may respond with a list of neighboring access points for that access point. A configuration server may provide configuration information to an access point based on the location of the access point. A configuration server also may direct an access point to a different configuration server. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129355 | APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING PACKETS OF WIRELESS LOCAL NETWORK AND METHOD FOR USING THE SAME - An apparatus for transmitting packets of a wireless local area network comprises a packet buffer area, a host controller and a timer. The packet buffer area is configured to temporarily store a plurality of packets. The host controller is configured to aggregate and control the plurality of packets in the packet buffer area. The timer is used to determine whether there are time-limited packets in the packet buffer area. While the host controller is aggregating the packets in the packet buffer area, an aggregation busy flag is enabled; and when the packet buffer area is outputting the time-limited packets, a timer busy flag is enabled. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129356 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION - A method, an apparatus and a system for information transmission are provided. The method includes the following steps. A second user equipment receives update information issued by a wireless access point (AP). The second user equipment is located within a coverage area of the wireless AP. After detecting that the second user equipment has the update information, a first user equipment establishes a connection with the second user equipment and obtains the update information from the second user equipment. The first user equipment is located outside the coverage area of the wireless AP. In the present invention, the user equipment can update the information without additionally increasing the transmit powers of the wireless AP and the user equipments when located outside the coverage area of the wireless AP, and thus the interference to other equipments is minimized. | 05-21-2009 |
20090135792 | Method and System for Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Phase Shifter Training - Aspects of a method and system for wireless local area network (WLAN) phase shifter training are presented. Aspect of the system may enable a receiving station, at which is located a plurality of receiving antennas, to estimate the relative phase at which each of the receiving antennas receives signals from a transmitting station. This process may be referred to as phase shifter training. After determining the relative phase for each of the receiving antennas, the receiving station may process received signals by phase shifting the signals received via each of the receiving antennas in accordance with the relative phase shifts determined during the phase shifter training process. Signals received via a selected one of the receiving antennas may be unshifted. The processed signals may be combined to generate a diversity reception signal. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135793 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING AN IP ADDRESS SPACE OF AN ADDRESS SERVER IN A MOBILITY NETWORK - The invention manages an IP address space in a mobility network, including partitioning of the IP address space, assignment of IP addresses from the IP address space, and/or use of hysteresis to control reassignment of IP addresses from the IP address space. The IP address assignment is performed using one or more residual time statistics from a residual time profile maintained for the mobile node requesting assignment of an IP address. A residual time profile of a mobile node includes one or more residual time statistics associated with the mobile node. The residual time statistics for a mobile node are determined using a residual time associated with each IP address assigned to the mobile node. The IP address space partitioning is performed using residual time statistics maintained for mobile nodes of the network. The reassignment of IP addresses from the IP address space is controlled using hysteresis. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135794 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND ROAMING METHOD - A wireless communication terminal roaming from a current access point (AP) to a destination AP within a plurality of APs includes various functional modules. The wireless communication terminal detects a current service quality parameter of each of the plurality of APs, a roaming frequency, and a packet retransmission rate of the wireless communication terminal in a predetermined detection period. Furthermore, the wireless communication terminal calculates a value of an RQI according to the current service quality parameter of each of the plurality of APs, the roaming frequency, and the packet retransmission rate of the wireless communication terminal, and regulates a roaming threshold of the current AP according to the value of the RQI and determines the destination AP that has satisfied a roaming condition corresponding to the value of the RQI. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135795 | FEMTOCELL ARCHITECTURE IN SUPPORT OF VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and systems for providing voice and date services in a femtocell wireless network. The proposed approach integrates IWLAN architecture into femtocell architecture by introducing a gateway to serve both IWLAN and femtocell users. The proposed approach handles the voice and data in a different way so that it enhances the data handling efficiency while re-using existing MSC investment. The proposed approach carries the data traffic from a femtocell base station to the gateway in native IP packet, instead of encapsulating them in 3G data, thus enhancing the efficiency and performance for the data traffic. The data traffic can then be sent to GGSN or directly to packet data network. The approach tunnels voice traffic to MSC through the gateway as in conventional Iu-CS approach. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135796 | INTERFACE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING SUBFRAME TIME REUSE - Interference that occurs during wireless communication may be managed by subframe time reuse. A method, apparatus amend medium of communication determines interfering subframe gating sequences. The transmission gating in a home access point is adjusted by determining a first gating sequence from a first unplanned access point. A second gating sequence is selected based on the first gating sequence, wherein the first and second gating sequences are non-interfering. Signals are transmitted according to the second gating sequence from a second unplanned access point to an associated access terminal. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135797 | Mobile telecommunications architecture - A mobile telecommunications architecture is disclosed. A downlink mobile telecommunications signaling message is received via a first communication interface associated with a single shared network controller connection to a mobile switching center (MSC) server. The downlink mobile telecommunications signaling message is mapped to one of a plurality of small scale base stations each of which is configured to perform at least some network controller functions. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135798 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Switching Communication Operations Between A Wireless Wide Area Network And A Wireless Local Area Network - Methods and apparatus for use by a mobile communication device in switching operation for communications from a wireless wide area network (WWAN) to a wireless local area network (WLAN) are disclosed. While providing operation for communications in the WWAN, the mobile device continually maintains visited cell site history information in its memory. The visited cell site history information is indicative of one or more visited cell sites of the WWAN that served the mobile device over a moving time period of its operation. The mobile device continually monitors the visited cell site history information to identify whether it has been contained within a local geographic region over the moving time period. When the mobile device is identified to have been contained within the local geographic region, it is permitted to operate for communications with the WLAN. In response to such permission, the mobile device may enable its WLAN radio transceiver and select the WLAN for communications. Advantageously, switching operation for communications from the WWAN to the WLAN is performed only when appropriate. The WLAN radio transceiver may be enabled only when needed, which reduces power consumption and saves battery life in mobile device. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141691 | Access Point for Wireless Local Area Network - Embodiments of an access point for an expanded wireless local area network are described and depicted. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141692 | OPTIMIZED AD HOC NETWORKING - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to improve network performance for ad hoc WLANs save power in service discovery phase and provide service availability information quickly and independently from the wireless channels used in the WLAN ad hoc networks. The embodiments perform link-local addressing, Multicast Domain Name Service (DNS), and DNS Service Discovery operations one or more channels of an ad hoc IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN. A protocol handler in a wireless device is coupled between a standard service discovery protocol module in the device, such as a Zeroconf protocol module or a UPnP protocol module, and at least one internet protocol stack in the device. The Transport, Internet, and Network Interface layers of the IP protocol stack are mapped by the protocol handler to corresponding functions in the standard service discovery protocol module, using a service table for storing information on relationships between available services, wireless devices, and channels on one or more ad hoc wireless networks. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141693 | Technique for Achieving Connectivity between Telecommunication Stations - A technique for enabling a secure, point-to-point wireless connection between a secondary computer (e.g., a personal digital assistant, etc.) and a primary computer (e.g., a notebook, a desktop, etc.) is disclosed. The primary computer is associated with an extended infrastructure through an access point. The present invention enables the secondary computer to communicate either with the associated primary computer or with an extended network indirectly through the access point. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141694 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING AND MANAGING ACCESS POINT AND ACCESS CONTROLLER - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for configuring and managing access points AP and an access controller AC. The method includes: creating at least one virtual radio interface, each of which is assigned a standard Management Information Base (MIB) interface index, wherein each of the at least one virtual radio interface corresponds to at least one physical radio interface of at least one AP; determining a physical radio interface to which a virtual radio interface corresponds and sending configuration information on the virtual radio interface to the determined physical radio interface when there is a need to send the configuration information to the physical radio interface. By using embodiments of the present invention, a standard MIB can be re-used for operating APs, thereby costs for managing the APs are reduced. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141695 | METHOD OF CREATING INCENTIVES FOR USING WIRELESS HOTSPOT LOCATIONS - A system and method of distributing incentives for wireless hotspots is provided. The method includes providing an access point to a wireless hotspot for wireless devices to wirelessly connect to a larger network in a publicly accessible location, evaluating use statistics of the access point of the wireless hotspot by portable devices, and providing an inducement to a user of the wireless hotspot based on the evaluated use statistics. The system includes a first provider for providing an access point to a wireless hotspot for wireless devices to wirelessly connect to a larger network in a publicly accessible location, an evaluator for evaluating use statistics of the access point of the wireless hotspot by portables devices, and a second provider for providing an inducement to a user of the wireless hotspot based on the evaluated use statistics | 06-04-2009 |
20090147758 | MOBILE INTERNET DEVICE WITH DETACHABLE WIRELESS MODULE - Mobile computing systems are provided having an ultra-mobile PC and a detachable wireless communications module operable as phone and a short range and long range wireless data link. In one embodiment, the wireless communications module is capable of synchronizing data with the ultra-mobile PC. Another embodiment provides parasitic charging of the wireless communications module from the ultra-mobile PC battery for extended battery life. Another embodiment provides ability to synchronize data to and from the ultra-mobile PC even when it is powered off. Another embodiment provides drag and drop capability between the wireless module screen and the UMPC screen, which may provide application or operating system data transfers. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147759 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF NODE USING LAYER 2/LAYER 3 ADDRESSES - Provided is a network-based mobility supporting method for supporting mobility of a node not having a mobility supporting function. The network-based mobility supporting method which is performed by a plurality of agents that connect a plurality of access networks to an Internet protocol core network integrating the plurality of access networks, includes: acquiring address information of a mobile node connected to an access point from the access point; transmitting the address information of the mobile node and layer 3 address information of an agent to a management unit which is located on the Internet protocol core network and manages the plurality of access networks, and registering a location of the mobile node; transmitting the layer 3 address information of the correspondent agent to the mobile node, in order to allow the mobile node to transmit a data packet to the agent; and receiving and transmitting the data packet between the mobile node and a correspondent node in consideration of the address information of the mobile node and information registered in the management unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide high-speed mobility to a mobile node. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147760 | Method and apparatus for routing in wireless sensor network - Provided are a method and apparatus for efficiently performing routing in a wireless sensor network having a tree-hierarchical structure, the method and apparatus reducing the number of hops required for transmitting data. According to the method and apparatus, a node is determined as a proximal node from among nodes within range of a wireless signal of a transmission node, wherein the node is a node having the smallest difference from among differences between each of address values of the nodes within the range and an address value of a target node, and data is directly transmitted from the transmission node to the proximal node. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147761 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS STATION - A station determines the presence/absence of directional beam control in an access point, on the basis of received power measured when data transmitted from the access point are received, and the type of the received data. In accordance with the result of this determination, the station controls transmitting power to transmit data to the access point. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154431 | MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL FOR XOR-ED PACKETS - Various example embodiment are disclosed. An example embodiment may include sending, by a relay node in a wireless network, a ready to send message to a plurality of wireless nodes. The ready to send message may indicate access channels for each of the wireless nodes to send clear to send messages. This example may also include receiving, via the indicated access channels for sending the clear to send messages, the clear to send messages from each of the wireless nodes. This example may also include sending an XOR-ed packet to the wireless nodes in response to receiving the clear to send messages. The XOR-ed packet may indicate access channels for each of the wireless nodes to send acknowledgment messages. An example may also include receiving, via the indicated access channels for sending the acknowledgment messages, the acknowledgment messages from each of the wireless nodes | 06-18-2009 |
20090154432 | COMPUTER RADIO WITH PRE-DEFINED CONFIGURATION SET - A computer with a software defined radio that can be configured based on a wireless technology specification. The computer may negotiate with a second computer that also includes a software defined radio to define a set of wireless technology specifications and trigger events indicating when each of the wireless technology specifications is to be used. As the computers communicate, if a trigger event occurs, both computers may reconfigure their software defined radios using a different specification in the set. By appropriately defining the wireless technology specifications in the set and the trigger events, the computers can operate with configurations that allow communication despite events that might otherwise disrupt communication between the computers. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154433 | LOCAL AREA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - An apparatus and method for local area communication between Bluetooth and MBOA-MAC devices is provided. A new Bluetooth Protocol Adaptation Layer (PAL) is implemented to adapt a Bluetooth host module and an MBOA-MAC to each other so as to enable use of conventional legacy Bluetooth applications in a wireless network environment employing a WiMedia Multiband OFDM Alliance (MBOA)-based Media Access Control (MAC) layer. This allows devices equipped with a conventional Bluetooth host module to perform high-speed data communication based on MBOA-MAC, thereby increasing the efficiency of utilization of networks. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154434 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In a system and method for facilitating wireless communication between agents in a wireless network, each agent is equipped with an agent's device using a main wireless infrastructure and a separate auxiliary wireless infrastructure. Initial contact between any first agent's device and any other agent's device is made within the auxiliary wireless infrastructure, whereas, once this initial contact has been established, all ensuing communications between the first agent's device and the other agent's device take place within the main wireless infrastructure. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154435 | PORTABLE INTERNET RADIO ACCESS STATION INCLUDING MULTIPLE MANAGEMENT PROCESSORS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE MULTIPLE MANAGEMENT PROCESSORS - The present invention relates to a portable internet radio access station, and more particularly, to a portable internet radio access station including a plurality of management processors and a method of controlling the plurality of management processors. A first management processor of a portable internet radio access station according to the present invention includes: an obstruction sensing unit sensing an obstruction in the first and second management processors; a call processing database storing a call processing information of the portable internet radio access station; an operation state determining unit determining an operation state of the first management processor based on the obstruction; and a database synchronizing unit synchronizing the call processing database with a call processing database of the second management processor based on the operation state of the first management processor Accordingly, continuity and reliability in call processing are obtained in the portable internet radio access station of the present invention. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154436 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA OVER WIRELESS LAN MESH NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting data over a WLAN mesh network. Transmission sections of priority frames and general frames are initially set, and the priority frame transmission section is varied step-by-step within a specific range. Thus, QoS with respect to data requiring the real-time property can be guaranteed and transmission of general frames can be guaranteed to some degree. Accordingly, there is an effect that data transmission efficiency can be improved significantly. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154437 | WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION THEREIN - A method for performing communication in the wireless sensor network is disclosed. The upper node transmits a beacon message to the lower nodes, wherein the beacon message distinguishes an indirect transmission interval, in which the upper node transmits downlink data to the plurality of lower nodes, from a direct transmission interval adjacent to the indirect transmission interval, in which the upper node receives uplink data from the plurality of lower nodes. The lower nodes determine the indirect transmission interval and the direct transmission interval from the received beacon message. The downlink data is transmitted from the upper node to the lower nodes in the indirect transmission interval. The uplink data is transmitted from the lower nodes to the upper node in the direct transmission interval. When communication is performed between the upper node and the lower nodes, the data can be efficiently transmitted from the upper node to the lower nodes. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154438 | PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - A packet transmission method for a WPAN that for alleviating traffic concentration in an active period and improving network throughput by controlling packet transmission timing in the active period. A packet transmission method for a wireless personal area network including a coordinator operating with a specific duty cycle and a plurality of devices includes determining, when a packet is generated, whether there is another packet waiting to be sent; determining, if there is no other packet waiting to be sent, whether the network is in an inactive period; setting, when network is in an inactive period, a backoff time; and sending the packet when the backoff time has expired. The packet transmission method controls an initial backoff value adaptively to a duty cycle of the network. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154439 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, CONNECTION DEVICE, AND CONNECTION DEVICE DESIGNATION METHOD FOR DESIGNATING CONNECTION DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO CONNECT TO - When connecting a wireless LAN terminal to a specific wireless access point, an inquiry is made to a server about the specific wireless access point, via the wireless access point which the wireless LAN terminal is connecting to, and then connection information for connecting to the specific wireless access point is automatically received, whereby wireless communication are established between the wireless LAN terminal and the specific wireless access point. Furthermore, in a case where wireless LAN terminals which are permitted to connect are registered into each wireless access point, when a wireless access point receives a connection request from a wireless LAN terminal that is not permitted to connect, an inquiry is made to another wireless access point regarding whether there is a wireless access point which that wireless LAN terminal is permitted to connect to. Then, if a wireless access point which that wireless LAN terminal is permitted to connect to is found as a result of the inquiry, then connection information for connecting to that wireless access point is notified to the wireless LAN terminal. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154440 | Wireless Communications Systems and Wireless Communications Methods - Wireless network access methods, communication device configuration methods, configuration devices, communications systems, and articles of manufacture are described. According to one aspect, a wireless network access method includes providing a communications device, providing a wireless network including access to a service, storing wireless network access data and service access data using a configuration device, communicating the wireless network access data and the service access data to the communications device using the configuration device, communicating the wireless network access data to the wireless network using the communications device to establish the communications device as a node on the wireless network, communicating the service access data to the wireless network using the communications device, and accessing the service using the communications device responsive to the communicating the service access data. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161639 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EVALUATING PROXIMITY TO A WLAN FOR A UMA/GAN COMPATIBLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and system for evaluating proximity of the electronic device to a wireless local area network (WLAN) involves generating a location where the location is defined by a list of cellular communication access points that is sorted based on signal strength for each access point. The list may be scored against one or more similarly defined reference locations to determine if the electronic device is at a geographic position that is favorable to probe for a WLAN that the electronic device was connected to at a prior time, but is presently not connected. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161640 | Mobile Wireless Access Router for Separately Controlling Traffic Signal and Control Signal - A wireless access router for separately controlling a traffic signal and a control signal is provided. In a mobile communication access network structure, in order to optimally support a mobile communication terminal, a control signal and a traffic signal of a base station are divided, and a router is controlled by mobile communication system functions such as a mobility management function, a QoS management function, a session control of the terminal, a mobility control, and a QoS control function that are effectively processed. With a wireless access router having the divided control signal and traffic signal, it is expected the traffic concentration and a packet transmission delay can be prevented. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161641 | Method and System for Rate Selection Algorithm to Maximize Throughput in Close Loop Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) System - Aspects of a method and system for rate selection algorithm to maximize throughput in closed loop multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) system are provided and may comprise computing a maximum number of binary bits to be, simultaneously transmitted via an RF channel based on signal quality. A modulation technique may be selected based on the computed maximum, communicating feedback information comprising the selected modulation technique. Subsequently transmitted data may be received via an RF channel which is modulated based on the feedback information. Another aspect of the method may comprise receiving feedback information comprising at least one of a selected modulation technique and coding rate via an RF channel, and transmitting subsequent data via said at least one of a plurality of RF channels which either modulated, or coded, based on the feedback information. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161642 | AUTOMATIC AND DYNAMIC CHANGING OF CLASS IN CLASS-BASED NETWORKS - A wireless radio frequency data communication device includes memory in which is stored a common designation; a radio frequency transmitter component and receiver component for wirelessly sending and receiving data packets; and electronics for processing data. The device is configured to filter a wireless communication received by it for an identification of its common designation within the communication, and process the communication if an identification of its common designation is found therein, and not process the communication if an identification of its common designation is not found therein. The device includes a profile stored in its memory and is configured to automatically and dynamically change its common designation in accordance with its profile. The profile may include a plurality of common designations, which may be conditional. The foregoing common designations may be class designations for use in class-based asset tracking systems. The device may include an interface for sensor-acquired data. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161643 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A radio communication system and apparatus is disclosed wherein setting necessary for communication with a desired radio communication apparatus with which a user wants to communicate can be performed with certainty by an operation system familiar to the user and a high security level can be assured for the communication which uses the setting. When a first radio communication apparatus receives a request for communication information necessary for communication through a radio network from a second radio communication apparatus through a radio circuit, it transmits identification information for the radio network and information regarding the security set in advance as communication information therein to the second radio communication apparatus through the radio circuit. The second radio communication apparatus sets the communication information to itself. The invention can be applied to a radio LAN for which a household electric appliance is used. | 06-25-2009 |
20090168733 | Wireless Access Points - A floor chamber ( | 07-02-2009 |
20090168734 | BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS APPARATUS AND FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE AVOIDING METHOD THEREOF - A broadband wireless access apparatus that can be separated to improve its portability and mobility and its frequency interference avoiding method are disclosed. The broadband wireless access device includes: a main body unit having a power and multi-network management function; an antenna cradle rotatably combined with the main body unit; and a detachable (separation-type) wireless access device detachably attached to the antenna cradle. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168735 | STATION, SETTING INFORMATION MANAGING DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SETTING INFORMATION OBTAINING METHOD, COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - In a wireless communication system including a setting information managing device for managing setting information required for wireless communication, an access point, and a base station belonging to the access point for conducting wireless communication, the station belongs to the access point using connecting information for wireless connection to a setting network, connects via the access point to the managing device on the setting network, and obtains the setting information from the managing device. In this way, in the wireless communication system, the setting information required for wireless communication can be obtained by use of the connecting information for wireless connection to connect to the setting network. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168736 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system is provided that includes a first wireless communication device, a second wireless communication device, and a base station that relays wireless communication between the first and second wireless communication devices. The first wireless communication device is capable of direct communication with another wireless communication device, and transmits a first data frame of a particular frame type to the second wireless communication device via the base station. If the second wireless communication device is capable of the direct communication, when receiving the first data frame of the particular frame type, the second wireless communication device transmits a second data frame of the particular frame type via the base station. When the first wireless communication device receives the second data frame from the second wireless communication device, it determines that the second wireless communication device is capable of the direct communication. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168737 | Transmission Using a Plurality of Protocols - Included are embodiments for communicating data using a plurality of formats. At least one embodiment of a method includes transmitting a plurality of first format data frames with a predetermined time period between transmitted first format data frames and determining a duration of the time period between the transmitted first format data frames. Similarly, some embodiments include fragmenting a second format data frame into a plurality of second format subframes such that the second format subframes may be transmitted during the time period between the transmitted first format data frames. | 07-02-2009 |
20090175250 | Method for mobile terminal access to wireless lan based on access point services and service parameters - A wireless LAN provides access to a mobile terminal (MT) utilizing beacon frames to broadcast access point (AP) service specific information. The MT listens to the beacon frames and compares the broadcast service(s) and service parameters to a predetermined service profile stored in the MT. When the services offered by an AP matches the services designated in the stored service profile, the MT associates with that particular AP. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175251 | Multiple Wireless Local Area Networks For Reliable Video Streaming - A media center system comprises a first wireless controller operative to communicate with a first set of devices on a first WLAN using a first wireless standard; a first network processor coupled to the first wireless controller and operative to establish wireless communication over a first channel with the first set of devices on the first WLAN; a second wireless controller operative to communicate with a second set of devices on a second WLAN using a second wireless standard, the second wireless controller substantially dedicated for multimedia content delivery; and a second network processor coupled to the second wireless controller and operative to establish wireless communication over a second channel with the second set of devices on the second WLAN, the second channel being different than the first channel. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175252 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING NODES TO A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK WITHOUT USING A BRIDGE CONCEPT - A wireless station ( | 07-09-2009 |
20090175253 | Frame format for random access response of wireless communication transmission - A frame format for random access response of wireless communication transmission is provided. The frame format comprises a header segment and a variable length data segment. The header segment includes one or more random access response subheader and 0 to N load control subheader. The variable length data segment including one or more random access response data payload corresponding to the one or more random access response subheader. The one or more random access response subheader includes a status indication field to represent a last random access response subheader, a load control subheader, a random access response data payload with a T-CRNTI field, or a random access response data payload without a T-CRNTI field. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175254 | Secure Integrated Mobile Internet Protocol Transit Case - A self-contained wireless internet protocol system includes a power supply converter for receiving input power of any type and converting the input power to a system power. A wireless local area network (WLAN) bridge and a wireless wide area network (WWAN) bridge contained within a case receives the system power. A mobile access router also receives the system power and facilitates data communications between the WLAN bridge and the WWAN bridge. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175255 | WIRELESS TERMINAL AND BASE STATION DEVICES FOR MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATION - A wireless terminal device and a wireless base station device can reduce power consumption required to transmit or receive data in a wireless manner. A frame sent from a wireless LAN terminal station, transfer source, is sent to another wireless LAN terminal station, transfer destination, on a transfer route indicated by routing information stored in a memory to establish a multi-hop communication with a wireless LAN base station. | 07-09-2009 |
20090180447 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR MONITORING WIRELESS LINKS DURING TRANSMISSION GAPS - Provided is a communication system in which a wireless access network communicates with a mobile station via a wireless link. One of the mobile station and the wireless access network proposes a plurality of candidate transmission gap configurations to the other of the mobile station and the wireless access network, and the other selects one of the candidate transmission gap configurations. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180448 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND AD HOC ROUTE INFORMATION ACQUIRING METHOD - The invention is to provide a wireless commutation device which can maintain fairness of transmission powers for wireless communication devices in an ad hoc network and reduce processing load and power consumption of a wireless commutation device. In a case when receiving a communication request from the upper layer processing unit | 07-16-2009 |
20090180449 | Mobile WLAN Gateway - A technique for operating a mobile station as wireless local-area network [“WLAN”] gateway. The mobile station is provided with a gateway application to control the following operations: activating ( | 07-16-2009 |
20090180450 | INSERTION OF NULL PACKETS TO MITIGATE THE EFFECTS OF INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Mitigation of interference effects in certain wireless communications is accomplished by the disclosed method. A wireless communications device communicates utilizing a protocol which requires hopping from channel to channel within a communications frequency band while transmitting. Operating according to the disclosed method, the device scans the available communications channels and identifies channel(s) experiencing interference from other transmitting devices. When hopping to such identified channels, the device transmits only null packets, thus avoiding the need to re-transmit packets due to interference and mitigating the effects of such interference on the communications data rate. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180451 | APPARATUS FOR AND METHOD OF COORDINATING TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION OPPORTUNITIES IN A COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE INCORPORATING MULTIPLE RADIOS - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of coordinating the allocation of transmission and reception availability and/or unavailability periods for use in a communications device incorporating collocated multiple radios. The mechanism provide both centralized and distributed coordination to enable the coordination (e.g., to achieve coexistence) of multiple radio access communication devices (RACDs) collocated in a single device such as a mobile station. A distributed activity coordinator modifies the activity pattern of multiple RACDs. The activity pattern comprises a set of radio access specific modes of operation, (e.g., IEEE 802.16 Normal, Sleep, Scan or Idle modes, 3GPP GSM/EDGE operation mode (PTM, IDLE, Connected, DTM modes), etc.) and a compatible set of wake-up events, such as reception and transmission availability periods. To prevent interference and possible loss of data, a radio access is prevented from transmitting or receiving data packets while another radio access is transmitting or receiving. In the event two or more RATs desire to be active at the same time, the mechanism negotiates an availability pattern between the MS and a corresponding BS to achieve coordination between the RATs. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180452 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A communication terminal and method is provided for improving channel utilization efficiency in a wireless sensor network using contention-based channel access mechanism is disclosed. The communication method according to the present invention comprises initializing, when a packet transmission is required, a contention window to a size; resetting, when a channel is assessed to be busy, the size of the contention window in a hybrid expansion mode; and attempting, when the channel is assessed to be idle, the packet transmission through the channel. | 07-16-2009 |
20090185542 | Method And Apparatus For Controlling Energy Expanding Of Sensor Network Nodes - Present invention is to provide a method and apparatus for controlling energy expanding of sensor network nodes, wherein the method comprises steps of: acquiring energy information, said energy information being indicative of an energy status of a node in the network; and adjusting at least one data transmission parameter accordingly based on the energy information. With present invention, on the premise that the communication capacity and power energy of sensor nodes are limited in a wireless sensor network, it is capable of efficiently utilize the network resource, save the power consumption of sensor node, and prolong the whole life of sensor network. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185543 | METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING SYSTEM INFORMATION BIT STREAMS AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for transmitting system information bit streams of one or more base stations in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: identifying network-entry-related bit streams and non-network-entry-related bit streams from the system information bit streams, where the network-entry-related bit streams carry essential system information for a terminal to access a network through at least one of the base stations; modulating the network-entry-related bit streams according to a first set of modulation and coding schemes (MCSs) and modulating the non-network-entry-related bit streams according to a second set of MCSs; and transmitting the system information bit streams with different frequencies, where the network-entry-related bit streams are periodically transmitted according to a first predetermined period. | 07-23-2009 |
20090190564 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE HOME AGENT - A technique is disclosed to decrease unnecessary routing during communication between a mobile node and a correspondent node in case a home agent of the mobile node is a mobile home agent. According to this technique, HA | 07-30-2009 |
20090196265 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A VISITED NETWORK - The present invention is aimed to provide a mechanism whereby a roaming user can select a visited network allowed for roaming by the home network operator among a plurality of visited networks accessible through an access network. Therefore, the present invention provides a new method, a new roaming device likely embedded in another network entity and enhanced user equipment whereby the home network, upon a user equipment indication, may submit towards the user equipment a list of allowed or preferred visited networks as well as selection criteria for selecting one visited network from the list. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196266 | Method and apparatuses for mobile communication - According to an embodiment, an apparatus such as a femto base station may include a transmitter to send via a local network an information to a mobile network for informing on an active state of apparatus. The apparatus may be configured to send the information when being switched on, or on a periodical or repeated basis in a switched-on state of the apparatus. A macro base station may add the femto base station to a network configuration list. Respective methods are also provided. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196267 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING LOCATION BASED SERVICES (LBS) UTILIZING WLAN AND/OR GPS SIGNALS FOR SEAMLESS INDOOR AND OUTDOOR TRACKING - Systems and methods for tracking a wireless device are disclosed. According to one aspect, the wireless device includes a hybrid global positioning system (GPS) and wireless local area network (WLAN) circuit board for seamless indoor and outdoor tracking. In embodiments, GPS and WLAN data are combined to obtain a position estimate of the device. In other embodiments, the circuit board automatically switches between WLAN and GPS data for indoor and outdoor environments. A Location Based Services (LBS) algorithm for determining the position of a wireless device using WLAN and/or GPS signals is also disclosed. The LBS algorithm is implemented by way of method steps including: sensing GPS and/or WLAN signals, measuring and/or converting the sensed signals to obtain distance data, fusing the distance data, and applying one or more approximation algorithms to the distance data to obtain a position estimate of the wireless device. A method for rendering position data using a Marching Cubes algorithm is further disclosed. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196268 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDICATING A SUBSCRIBER'S ZONE WITHIN CONVERGED TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A system and related method provide a registration request via an access point, wherein the access point is associated with a defined service zone. In response, an authorization signal to access telecommunications services is received. The authorization signal includes service zone name data for the service zone and/or at least one service zone icon indicator for the service zone. Further details are described herein. | 08-06-2009 |
20090201895 | Telecommunications - In a MIPv6 network, a mobile home agent (MHA) in a foreign network (FN) acts as an intermediate node between a mobile node (MN) and a correspondent node (CN) and allocates itself a secondary care-of address (SCoA) different from the care-of address (CoA) of the mobile node (MN), with a one-to-one relationship between the secondary care-of address (SCoA) and the home address (HAddr) of the mobile node. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201896 | DATA SHARING BASED ON PROXIMITY-BASED AD HOC NETWORK - A system and method is described for constructing a proximity-based ad hoc network among a plurality of sensor-enabled devices and for using such a network to facilitate data sharing among users of those devices (referred to herein for simplicity as “sensors”). The system and method advantageously enables data to be shared among co-located sensors in a manner that does not require local connections or communication among those sensors and that protects user privacy. The system and method also beneficially enables data to be transferred among heterogeneous sensor types that would otherwise be incapable of detecting and/or communicating with each other. The system and method may perform user-initiated data transfer as well as automatic data transfer responsive to sensor proximity and other factors, such as commonality of user interests or activities or membership in a social network. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201897 | CLASSIFICATION PROCESS INVOLVING MOBILE STATIONS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. In an example embodiment, a method may comprise receiving data from a home agent, wherein the data is directed to a mobile station that is coupled with a foreign network and the data includes an outer header having a foreign network address associated with the mobile station and an encapsulated header having a home network address associated with the mobile station; reading the encapsulated header to determine the home network address; and performing data classification using at least the home network address of the encapsulated header. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201898 | End-to-End Packet Aggregation in Mesh Networks - A packet aggregation system. In particular implementations, a method includes accessing one or more transmit queues, each corresponding to a wireless client associated with a given wireless mesh access point of a plurality of mesh access points. The method further includes selecting a mesh access point of the plurality of mesh access points and selecting a transmit queue corresponding to a wireless client associated with the selected mesh access point. The method further includes aggregating packets that are destined for the selected wireless client, up to a size limit, taking into account the path to the selected mesh point as well as quality of service constraints, and composing and transmitting the aggregated packet to the selected mesh access point. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201899 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method includes identifying, at a first wireless node, routing costs associated with routing data to a destination through multiple paths in a wireless network. The method also includes identifying, at the first wireless node, information propagation values associated with the first wireless node and at least one second wireless node. The information propagation values are based on the routing costs and wireless link qualities associated with the wireless nodes. The method further includes scheduling transmission of the data by the first wireless node based on the information propagation values and transmitting the data based on the scheduling. The routing costs may include potential values associated with distances of the wireless nodes from the destination. Also, the information propagation values indicate which of the wireless nodes have a greater chance of propagating the data towards the destination in a single broadcast. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201900 | Radio Base Station, Relay Station, Radio Relay System, And Radio Relay Method - A radio base station for performing communication with a radio terminal via a relay station, including a radio frame generation unit which generates a radio frame including a signal relay region allocated in the relay station to transmit received data with predetermined delay from the radio terminal or the radio base station to the radio base station or the radio terminal respectively, and a data relay region allocated in the relay station to perform demodulation and decode, further encode and modulation processing for receive data and to transmit from the radio terminal or the radio base station to the radio base station or the radio terminal respectively; and a transmission unit which transmits the generated radio frame to the relay station. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201901 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 08-13-2009 |
20090207816 | Method for Ensuring the Service Platform the Acquisition of the User Terminal Information Under Multiple Application Protocols - The present invention discloses a method for ensuring the service platform the acquisition of the user terminal information under multiple application protocols, wherein client terminal service connection software is set in the user terminal or the user card, and said client terminal service connection software has service connection user interface and is able to inspect and control the mobile service connection carried out by the mobile terminal. By adding the step of sending the general application protocol request to the proxy server before the service request of the user terminal, it is ensured that the service platform is still capable of acquiring the user's cellphone number without upgrading the proxy server, so that it avoids the problem of frequent upgrading for equipments caused by new application protocol's appearance, increases the adaptability to the upgrading of application protocols, decreases the network rebuilding cost, increases the flexibility of the management for terminals, and improves the service serving level and the user's feelings. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207817 | Policy-Based Data Routing For A Multi-Mode Device - Communication devices capable of at least two communication modes (e.g. WLAN, WMAN and WWAN and/or wired modes) can be configured to optimize communications using a policy-based mechanism to configure connections and routes. A rules engine evaluates its policies on a state change (e.g. network availability, time of day, etc.) to configure a routing table and, together with communication APIs, provides an appropriate connection to an application for its respective communications. Policies may be responsive to various factors such as Radio Access Technology (high/low bandwidth), cost, presence, time of day, location, application type and quality of service (QoS) requirements among others to optimize communications. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207818 | PACKET DECODING FOR H-ARQ TRANSMISSION - Techniques for efficiently decoding packets sent with H-ARQ are described. Packet decoding for H-ARQ may be performed based on local search around a start of packet (SOP) decision for a packet. The SOP decision for the packet may be made based on traffic detection results for received transmissions. At least one SOP hypothesis may be determined for the packet based on the SOP decision, and the received transmissions may be decoded based on the at least one SOP hypothesis. A sliding SOP window may be used to keep track of SOP hypotheses for the packet. The sliding window may be initialized at an earliest received transmission, moved forward for each subsequent received transmission with no detected packet data, and maintained at the first received transmission with detected traffic. Rotating buffers may be used to store received transmissions for packets for decoding. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207819 | MOBILE STATION AS A GATEWAY FOR MOBILE TERMINALS TO AN ACCESS NETWORK, AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING THE MOBILE STATION AND THE MOBILE TERMINALS IN A NETWORK - A mobile station is designed, as a gateway for one or several mobile terminals, to establish a connection between the mobile terminal(s) and an access network. The mobile station supports a network-based mobility management such that the mobile station acts as a client instead of the mobile terminals during communication with a home agent of a home network or intermediate network connected to the access network in the framework of a mobile IP connection. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207820 | TRANSMISSION OF DATA PACKETS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for retransmitting data packets in a network. Further, the invention relates to an adapted system for performing the method. To improve the robustness in the transmission of an acknowledgment message by a mobile terminal to the network, while minimizing a signaling overhead, the invention provides mechanisms that optimize the retransmission of data packets and manage acknowledgement messages. The mechanisms disclosed are particular applicable to heterogeneous radio access networks. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207821 | MAINTAINING PREFIX CONSISTENCY IN DYNAMIC MOVING NETWORKS - The present invention relates to arrangements providing a solution for maintaining prefix consistency in dynamic (splitting and merging) moving networks and reducing the negative consequences of splits and mergers. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207822 | Method for transmitting and receiving signals using collaborative MIMO scheme - A method for reducing inter-cell interference and a method for transmitting a signal by a collaborative MIMO scheme, in a communication system having a multi-cell environment are disclosed. An example of a method for transmitting, by a mobile station, precoding information in a collaborative MIMO communication system includes determining a precoding matrix set including precoding matrices of one more base stations including a serving base station, based on signal strength of the serving base station, and transmitting information about the precoding matrix set to the serving base station. A mobile station in an edge of a cell performs a collaborative MIMO mode or inter-cell interference mitigation mode using the information about the precoding matrix set collaboratively with neighboring base stations. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207823 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SELECTIVE MOBILITY INVOCATION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes invoking a mobile access gateway function based on an end user requesting an Internet Protocol (IP) address in a wireless or a wireline network. The invocation is selective such that the mobile access gateway function is invoked if the end user requires IP mobility services. The method also includes communicating with a gateway in order to obtain the IP address. The mobile access gateway function is coupled to a network element that receives packets for a communications flow from the end user that can conduct the flow through the wireless network and through the wireline network. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207824 | Wireless Access Point Device - A wireless (such as Wi-Fi or similar) access point is included in or attached to a device, such as a cellular phone, WiMAX device, other mobile device, etc. One or more wireless units wirelessly access a communication network (and in some cases the Internet) through the wireless access point device. Additionally, such a wireless access point device can receive a transmission from a wireless tag that has been attached to an object to be monitored and can forward information from the wireless tag to a target device along with location information. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207825 | MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN WIRELESS LAN - A media access control (MAC) apparatus and corresponding methods for guaranteeing quality-of-service in a wireless local area network (LAN) are presented. The MAC method includes the steps of extracting, performing, determining, a first transmitting step, and a second transmitting step. The extracting step includes extracting a user priority from a frame received from an upper layer and separately storing a voice frame and a non-voice frame according to an access category (AC). The performing step includes independently performing backoff operations for the voice frame and the non-voice frame. The determining step includes determining whether the backoff operations for the voice frame and the non-voice frame have simultaneously ended. The first transmitting step includes transmitting the voice frame having a higher priority first and performing the backoff operation for the non-voice frame if the backoff operations have simultaneously ended. The second transmitting step includes transmitting a frame whose backoff operation ends if the backoff operations have not simultaneously ended. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207826 | Simultaneous Operation of Wireless LAN and Long-Range Wireless Connections - A method for communication includes establishing a first connection between a wireless terminal and a base station of a long-range wireless data network, which operates in accordance with a first protocol that defines a sequence of time frames for transmission of data between the wireless terminal and the base station. A signal is sent from the wireless terminal to the base station identifying an interval including one or more of the time frames during which the wireless terminal will not receive data from the base station. During the interval, a second connection is established between the wireless terminal and an access point of a wireless local area network (WLAN) in accordance with a second protocol, different from the first protocol. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207827 | HIGH DATA THROUGHPUT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK RECEIVER - A method for receiving a frame in a high data throughput wireless local area network begins by receiving a preamble of the frame via a channel in accordance with a default receiver filter mask. The processing continues by validating the preamble. The processing continues by, when the preamble is validated, interpreting the preamble to determine a high data throughput channel configuration. The processing continues by reconfiguring the default receiver filter mask in accordance with the high data throughput channel configuration to produce a reconfigured receiver filter mask. The processing continues by receiving a data segment of the frame in accordance with the reconfigured receiver filter mask. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207828 | TRANSPARENT SESSION INITIATED PROTOCOL - Method and apparatus employing a transparent session initiation protocol (SIP) technique for communication especially between a user device in one domain and an application/service provided in an external domain. The transparent SIP technique is usable in wired or wireless systems such as 3G systems and wireless local area networks (WLANs). | 08-20-2009 |
20090213819 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INITIATING WLAN SERVICE USING BEACON SIGNALS - An access point transmits a beacon signal when a multimode communication device is within a maximum proximity of the access point. A wireless wide area network (WWAN) receiver in the access point monitors a WWAN uplink channel used by the multimode wireless communication device to communicate with a WWAN base station. The access point determines, or at least estimates, a proximity of the multimode communication device to the access point based on a received WWAN uplink signal transmitted by the multimode wireless communication device. If the proximity is less than a proximity threshold, the access point transmits the beacon signal. The beacon signal at least indicates the presence of the access point and, in some circumstances, includes instructions or information to assist in a handoff from the WWAN to the WLAN. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213820 | Appending a Ranging Waveform to a Frame to Maintain Communication Protocol Interoperability - A technique is provided to enable a ranging-enhanced communication device that operates according to a legacy communication protocol to transmit a ranging waveform that is not defined in, or part of, the rules of the legacy communication protocol. In one embodiment, a ranging-enhanced communication device that is to transmit the ranging waveform generates information representing a time interval within which to wirelessly transmit a ranging waveform that is not defined by a legacy communication protocol. This information is encoded into a field of a frame that is formatted according to the legacy communication protocol to protect the time interval from transmissions by legacy communication devices that operate according to the legacy communication protocol. The ranging-enhanced communication device transmits the frame and transmits the ranging waveform during the time interval following the frame. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213821 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A WAKE UP RATE OF NODES OPERATING WITHIN A MULTI-HOP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is provided which enables the connection of nodes out of communication range while minimizing the energy consumption in standby nodes. Specifically, the present invention provides a method to control the wake up rate of standby nodes in a multi-hop communication system. An access point collects, processes, and refines statistical information regarding one or more system parameters; determines a wake up rate based on the statistical information and one or more historical information; and transmits the wake up rate to nodes in its coverage area. A node receives the wake up rate; and periodically changes from a sleep state to a wake up state at the wake up rate to support routing functions for providing multi-hop communication to the one or more access points. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213822 | METHOD FOR DATA COLLECTION AND SUPERVISION IN WIRELESS NODE NETWORKS - A wireless networking method includes providing a plurality of different sets of wireless links and a plurality of wireless nodes. The nodes are in mutual bidirectional wireless communication via the wireless links. Each of the links enables the communication between a respective pair of the nodes. Information is transmitted to a selected one of the nodes from each of other ones of the nodes via a first of the sets of the wireless links. The step of transmitting information to the selected one of the nodes from each of other ones of the nodes is repeated via each of other ones of the sets of the wireless links, respectively. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213823 | NETWORK GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR RELOCATING THE SAME - A method for relocating network gateways comprises the steps of obtaining a moving average of drop ratios and setting the duration of the next detection interval based on the moving average of drop ratios, and requesting at least one mobile station to perform a CSN mobility management procedure when the moving average of drop ratios exceeds a high drop ratio. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213824 | Wireless local area network packet transmitting and receiving system - A wireless local area network transmitting and receiving system includes a network driver interface, a random network layer, an infrastructure layer, a packet format conversion module and a distributed module. The packet format conversion module provides the wireless local area network with bridges to receive and convert wireless local area packets of the infrastructure layer, and then executes processes of transmitting and receiving the wireless local area network packets instructed by the network driver interface. The distribution module is connected to the infrastructure layer and the random network layer and then transmits the wireless local area network packets. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213825 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF A BASE STATION - Methods and apparatus for controlling transmission of a base station, such as a Femto cell, based on the determined quality of a backhaul connection to a network are disclosed. In particular, a quality of a backhaul connection of a base station to a node in a communication network is determined. Based on this quality determination, transmission from the base station is either limited or stopped when the determined quality fails to meet a predefined condition. The degradation in quality of the backhaul connection, for example, affects the ability of the base station to offer sufficient service to access terminals. By limiting or stopping wireless transmission of the base station when the backhaul quality is degraded, access terminals either currently accessing the base station or attempting to connect to the base station can then more efficaciously hand off to another base station or access point. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213826 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING SHORT MESSAGES IN AN IMS - The present invention discloses a method for delivering short messages in an IMS. The method includes: The sender encapsulates multiple concatenated short message segments into an IMS message, and sends the IMS message to the receiver. The present invention also discloses a system and apparatus for delivering short messages in an IMS. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the receiver can obtain a complete short message upon receiving the message. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213827 | Dual-Function Wireless Data Terminal - Apparatus for communication includes at least one RF receiver circuit, which is coupled to receive and downconvert first and second RF signals that are transmitted respectively over different, first and second wireless networks in accordance with different, first and second network protocols, so as to output first and second downconverted signals. A baseband processing circuit includes processing components that are coupled to receive and process the first and second downconverted signals so as to extract first and second data from the signals. The processing components have a first configuration for demodulating the first downconverted signals in accordance with the first network protocol and a second configuration for demodulating the second downconverted signals in accordance with the second network protocol. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213828 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK-BASED POSITION LOCATING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - The location of one or more mobile nodes in a wireless local area network (WLAN) is determined. Nodes in the WLAN include respective ping drivers to generate ping event values related to transmit count stamps and receive count stamps for wireless messages exchanged between the nodes. Each wireless message is associated with a transmit offset corresponding to an expected transmit time. A sorting module groups the ping event values and produces a difference between the respective receive count stamps and the transmit count stamps for each wireless message. Based on the sorted ping event values, the sorting module generates transmit offset values relating to the transmit offsets. A space-time calibration unit generates, from the sorted differences and the transmit offset values, a clock rate solution and a location solution for at least one of the nodes in the WLAN. | 08-27-2009 |
20090219898 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR INCREASING THE ROBUSTNESS OR THE CAPACITY OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The invention relates to a method for increasing the capacity of a wireless communications system comprising at least two users U | 09-03-2009 |
20090219899 | Method for Interfacing a Second Communication Network Comprising an Access Node with a First Communication Network Comprising a Contact Node - An operational method interfaces a second communication network containing an access node with a first communication network encompassing a contact node. In a first step, an access node reads or receives an identity which is specific for the second communication network and is stored in a storage medium of a memory node. Then an interfacing message containing the identity that is specific for the second communication network is transmitted from the access node to the contact node, which is defined by an address stored in the storage medium. A packet data service to the access node is supplied by the contact node such that the second communication network is interfaced with the first communication network. An assembly and a storage medium are provided for interfacing the second communication network with the first communication network. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219900 | Method, System and Arrangements for Setting Up and Maintaining a WLAN Connection within predictably moving vehicles - Setting up and maintaining wireless communication connections with end user's terminals ( | 09-03-2009 |
20090219901 | Wireless Content Aquisition for Mobile Electronic Devices - Improved methods, computer readable media and systems that facilitate data acquisition by mobile electronic devices are disclosed. One aspect pertains to content acquisition between mobile electronic devices that are within range of a local wireless network. Another aspect pertains to content acquisition by mobile electronic devices capable of communicating across a peer-to-peer wireless network. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219902 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION CONTROL STATION DEVICE, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a radio communication terminal device, a radio communication control station device, and a radio communication method capable of effectively managing a radio resource allocated to a terminal and context such as registration information when the terminal compatible with a plurality of different RATs moves between the RATs. According to them, when the WLAN Network control unit ( | 09-03-2009 |
20090219903 | MILLIMETER-WAVE REFLECTOR ANTENNA SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING USING MILLIMETER-WAVE SIGNALS - Embodiments of millimeter-wave chip-array reflector antenna system are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. In some embodiments, the millimeter-wave chip-array reflector antenna system includes a millimeter-wave reflector to shape and reflect an incident antenna beam and a chip-array antenna comprising an array of antenna elements to direct the incident antenna beam at the surface of the reflector to provide a reflected antenna beam. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219904 | Method and apparatus for enabling coexistence of plurality of communication technologies on communication device - A method and apparatus for enabling coexistence of a plurality of communication technologies on a communication device is provided. The method includes receiving one or more first communication events from a first communication technology of the plurality of communication technologies. The method further includes converting the one or more first communication events to one or more second communication events for one or more second communication technologies of the plurality of communication technologies. Converting emulates one or more first peer to peer communication links of the one or more first communication technologies as one or more second peer to peer communication links of the one or more second communication technologies. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219905 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION COLLISION DETECTION - Collisions in a wireless network are detected and resolved through the use of transmissions by access points in the network. In some aspects, each access point may select a resource from a set of resources and transmit an indication of a unique identifier (e.g., a long identifier) of that access point on the selected resource. In some aspects, each access point may select a bit and append that bit to a reused identifier (e.g., a short identifier) of that access point to provide a channelization parameter that is used to channelize signals transmitted by the access point. The selection by a given access point may be based on a unique identifier assigned to that access point. The selection by a given access point may be a pseudorandom selection (e.g., based on a corresponding unique identifier). Another node (e.g., an access terminal) in the network may identify a collision based on the transmissions by the access points. In this case, the node may transmit an indication of the collision to cause one of the access points to cease transmitting. The node may then inform one colliding access point of the existence and identity of the other colliding access point to enable the access points to resolve the collision. | 09-03-2009 |
20090232114 | PRIORITY-BASED MULTIMEDIA STREAM TRANSMISSIONS - A method is provided that accesses a priority and a multimedia stream to be transmitted. The priority then is embedded within the multimedia stream. The multimedia stream thereafter is transmitted. Another method is provided that receives the multimedia stream that includes the priority. Here, another priority is accessed and both priorities are compared. The control of multimedia stream transmissions to other communication devices is based on this comparison. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232115 | SUPPORTING COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING AN IP ADDRESS - An apparatus for wireless communications and method for the same are provided. The apparatus is configured receive an identifier associated with a first node, determine an IP address of the first node from the identifier, and use the IP address to communicate data with the first node through a second node, wherein the data relates to managing air link resources of the first node. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232116 | MECHANISM TO AVOID INTERFERENCE AND IMPROVE CHANNEL EFFICIENCY IN MMWAVE WPANS - Briefly, a mechanism to avoid interference and improve channel efficiency in mmWave Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs) is disclosed. According to an embodiment of the present invention, neighbor devices can identify whether a certain high rate channel is being used or not through a communication on another channel, and thus avoidance actions may be taken by neighbor devices even if they do not receive signals from the high rate channel. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232117 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL CONTROL METHOD - A mobile phone terminal acquires and stores therein current position information thereof from a public wireless base station. The mobile phone terminal reads out a profile name corresponding to the acquired position information from a public wireless base station WLAN profile association table, and sets the read WLAN profile as a scan profile. Then, the mobile phone terminal scans the wireless LAN access point with the set WLAN profile when the mobile phone terminal is out of the WLAN service area. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232118 | COORDINATED UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN LTE DRX OPERATIONS FOR A WIRELESS TRANSMIT RECEIVE UNIT - A method and apparatus for discontinuous reception (DRX) operation in a wireless transmit receive unit aligns uplink and downlink transmissions with a DRX cycle. The transmission may be a channel quality indicator report, a sounding reference signal, or a silence descriptor among other downlink and uplink transmissions. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232119 | METHOD OF UPDATING PROXY INFORMATION - A method of updating proxy information in a mesh network is provided. The method includes transmitting a first multi-hop management frame from a source mesh point (MP) to a destination MP, the first multi-hop management frame comprising a proxy update information element (IE) to update the source MP's proxy information, and receiving a second multi-hop management frame from the destination MP, the second multi-hop management frame comprising a proxy update confirmation IE in response to the first multi-hop management frame. When proxy information updated, flooding overhead may be released. | 09-17-2009 |
20090238157 | Enhanced scanning for access entities - The invention proposes a method for detecting an access entity in a network comprising the access entity and a device for wireless communication, wherein the detection is performed with respect to a changeable parameter, and for each specified parameter the following steps are performed: buffering data packets to be transmitted between the device for wireless communication and the access entity, performing the scan process, by the device for wireless communication, based on the specified parameter, and transmitting the buffered packets between the device for wireless communication and the access entity. The invention also proposes a corresponding device for wireless communication. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238158 | Packet Fragment Adaptation for Improved Coexistence - This disclosure relates to transmitting wireless packets between multiple stations and changing the duration or fragmentation of the packets. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238159 | Mobile communication system and communication control method - A mobile communication system for connecting a terminal to service networks includes a wireless access network device, a gateway device, and a mobility management device. The wireless access network device connects to the terminal. The gateway device establishes a plurality of tunnels connecting the terminal to the service networks and switches the plurality of tunnels according to a request. The mobility management device sends to the gateway device the request to collectively switch the plurality of tunnels. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238160 | Hybrid Multiple Access Method and System in Wireless Networks with extended Content Free Access Period - A method for communicating in a network including a coordinator node and a set of leaf nodes transmits periodically, from the coordinator node to the set of leaf nodes, a beacon defining a superframe, wherein the supper frame includes an active period and an inactive period, and wherein the active period includes a first contention access period (CAP- | 09-24-2009 |
20090238161 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING WIRELESS BASE STATIONS - A system for detecting wireless base stations and a method thereof are provided. The system includes a detection module, a count module, a storage module, and a switch module. The method includes sending a detection request to a channel, determining whether a wireless base station corresponding to the channel physically exits, and whether the channel is detected, based on a detection response returned by the channel; returning a detection response; calculating the sum of the detection request and the detection response so as to create a count result to be stored in the storage module; and switching directly from the wireless base station currently in use and the corresponding channel to the next undetected channel and a corresponding wireless base station, based on the count result. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238162 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless base station according to an aspect of the present invention is one of a plurality of base stations each forming a wireless area and communicating with a mobile station within the wireless area. The wireless base station includes a reception unit configured to receive a connect request from a mobile station that exists within the wireless area; an information acquirer configured to acquire connection history information indicating connection history to a base station which was connected by the mobile station in the past; a condition storage configured to store a connection permission condition to permit connection with the mobile station; a judgment unit configured to judge whether or not the connection permission condition is satisfied based on the connection history information; and a reporting unit configured to report a message of connection permission to the mobile station when the connection permission condition is satisfied. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238163 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING AND OPTIMIZING THROUGHPUT OF SHORT RANGE WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and systems for determining and optimizing a throughput of a short range wireless network are provided. The method mainly includes acquiring respective time parameters in a contention access period based on information transmission characteristics of the short range wireless network; and computing and optimizing the throughput of the short range wireless network based on the respective time parameters. These time parameters are determined based on a non-persistent Carrier Sense Multiple Access CSMA mechanism. Therefore, the present invention employs a non-persistent CSMA mechanism to analyze the CAP of a short range wireless network and thus simplifies complexity in determining the network throughput and the analysis process of network optimization. As such, accurate throughput parameters of the standard network of the short range wireless network may be obtained, the network performance may be optimized and the performance of the short range wireless network is improved. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238164 | ADAPTIVE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND ACCESS POINT - The embodiments of the present disclosure disclose an adaptive communication system, communication method, communication terminal and Access Point (AP). The system includes: an application mode information obtaining module, configured to obtain information about the application mode supported by the network; and an AP, configured to: provide a communication terminal with application mode information obtained by the application mode information obtaining module, wherein the application mode information indicates the application mode supported by the network; and create a communication connection with the communication terminal based on the application mode negotiated and determined according to the information about the application mode supported by the communication terminal and the information about the application mode supported by the network. The embodiments of the present disclosure may make the most of the access resources, improve the success ratio of access, and reduce unnecessary delay and power consumption. | 09-24-2009 |
20090245214 | Selecting uplink sounding sub-carriers - A method and apparatus of selecting a number of uplink sounding sub-carriers are disclosed. One method includes estimating an uplink channel of between a base station and a subscriber. A time domain channel response is determined from the estimated uplink channel. A sub-carrier distribution of uplink sounding sub-carriers is selected based on characteristics of the time domain channel response, wherein the distribution defines a spacing of pilot sub-carriers within the uplink sounding symbol. The subscriber transmits uplink sounding symbols having the selected sub-carrier distribution. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245215 | Mobile Communication Terminal, Mode Switching Method, and Network Switching Method - In order to input/output only necessary information in accordance with the form of application, a mobile phone includes: a wireless circuit | 10-01-2009 |
20090245216 | COEXISTENCE MECHANISM FOR WIMAX AND IEEE 802.11 - A network device includes a first communication module and a second communication module. The first communication module communicates with a first device using a first wireless communication standard. The first communication module receives data from the first device during a first time period and transmits data to the first device during a second time period. The second communication module communicates with a second device using a second wireless communication standard. The second communication module receives a block of packets from the second device during the first time period. The second communication module transmits an acknowledgement to the second device during the second time period when the block of the packets is received. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245217 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - An information processing apparatus includes a storage unit including plural memory banks, a wireless communication unit for executing the wireless communication process, a communication quality information storage unit for storing the communication quality information indicating the communication quality of the wireless communication unit in the case where one of the plural memory banks is used, a memory bank selection unit for selecting the memory bank based on the communication quality information stored in the communication quality information storage unit in the case where the wireless communication process is executed by the wireless communication unit, and a memory bank switching unit for switching to the memory bank selected by the memory bank selection unit. | 10-01-2009 |
20090252126 | SELECTING PORTALS TO SERVICE NETWORK TRANSMISSIONS - A system, apparatus, and method to dynamically select and establish connections with portals of a mesh network are described herein. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252127 | BUILDING WIRELESS ROUTING STRUCTURES USING OUT OF BAND SIGNALING - In an example embodiment, an access point (AP) uses out-of-band signaling on a single non-DFS (Dynamic Frequency Selection) frequency band radio in an N-radio system to synchronize information with neighboring APs and to learn about their radio interfaces. This enables the AP to be able to acquire information about neighbor APs on different frequency bands and to build and maintain mesh routing structures while minimizing backhaul down-time. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252128 | MULTI-TRANSCEIVER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHODS FOR OPERATING DURING DEVICE DISCOVERY AND CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - Embodiments of a multi-transceiver wireless communication device and methods for operating during device discovery and connection establishment are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the multi-transceiver wireless communication device includes a broadband wireless access network (BWAN) transceiver and a short-range frequency-hopping (SRFH) transceiver. The SRFH transceiver transmits a non-continuous sequence of either page or inquiry trains to either discover or establish an initial connection with a SRFH device when an active BWAN connection exists with a base station. The non-continuous sequence of trains may include a regularly repeating vacant transmission interval selected to coincide with listen intervals of frames when the BWAN transceiver is in sleep mode. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252129 | Known station hidden network discovery - A method includes storing a table that contains identifications of certain ones of network devices and, when operating a wireless network access node in a hidden mode of operation, transmitting a probe response only to a probe request that is received from a network device having an identification stored in the table. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252130 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING CLIENT-HOST ASSOCIATIONS WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In embodiments, a one-to-one association is established between a client and a host in a wireless network, such as a wireless local area network or a wireless personal communication network. The client may be a display device. The host may be a cellular telephone. Active association corresponds to the host exclusively using a shared resource of the client. When the association is solid, requests from other hosts to establish an active association are denied. When the association is fragile, such requests are granted. In the case of a semi-solid association, a request from another host to establish an active association causes the client to generate a query to the host currently owning the active association. If the host currently owning the association grants a release, a new active association is established between the requesting host and the client. Otherwise, the request from the other host is denied. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252131 | RADIO TERMINAL AND BASE STATION SEARCH METHOD BY MEANS OF RADIO TERMINAL - Provided is a base station search method by means of a radio terminal that includes an out-of-zone power saving base station search control function that, by setting a timer, sequentially extends an interval of a base station search during which the radio terminal returns to a communication zone after moving outside a communication zone from an initial interval. According to this base station search method, when a predetermined change of state is detected in the radio terminal during execution of a base station search, the timer is reset, an interval of the base station search is returned to the initial interval, and the base station search is resumed. If the predetermined change of state is detected again before a predetermined time elapses from the moment of resetting the timer due to detecting the predetermined change of state, the base station search is continued without resetting the timer. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252132 | SELECTIVE BEARER ESTABLISHMENT IN E-UTRAN/EPS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate selectively and simultaneously establishing multiple bearers in wireless communication networks. A core network entity in a wireless network can transmit a bearer establishment request to an access point comprising a list of bearers to establish with a related mobile device. The bearer establishment request comprising list of bearers includes separate non-access stratum (NAS) messages corresponding to each bearer in the list. The separate NAS messages can be linked to each bearer entry in the list. The access point can receive the list and attempt to initialize one or more radio bearers in the list. Since the NAS messages individually correspond to a given bearer, the access point can forward NAS messages to the mobile device only for bearers that are successfully initialized allowing selective establishment thereof. In addition, the access point can provide initialization status for the individual bearers to the core network. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252133 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ACCESS GATEWAY HAVING PLURAL USER PLANE AGWS - In a mobile communication system including an access gateway (AGW) comprising a C-AGW for handling control messages and a plurality of U-AGWs for forwarding data packets, the C-AGW is provided with a management table indicating an address of U-AGW to be an endpoint of tunnel, in association with each of mobile station IDs. When a tunnel setup request message including a mobile station ID is received from one of base stations, the C-AGW searches the management table for the address of U-AGW corresponding to the mobile station ID and notifies the base station of the U-AGW address, and if the mobile station ID is not found in the management table, the C-AGW notifies the base station of an address of a particular U-AGW selected out of the U-AGWs, so that the base station establishes a tunnel for forwarding data packets toward the notified U-AGW. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252134 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile broadband routable internet (MBRI) providing for carrier-grade, networked, broadband, IP-routable communication among a plurality of mobile devices, where the mobile devices may represent a plurality of nodes that are linked together through a mobile ad-hoc network (MANET). Mobile devices may operate as peers in a peer-to-peer network, with full IP routing capabilities enabled within each mobile device, thereby allowing routing of IP-based traffic, including deployment of applications, to the mobile device without need for infrastructure conventionally required for mobile ad hoc networks, such as cellular telephony infrastructure. Full IP-routing to mobile devices may allow seamless integration to the fixed Internet, such as through fixed or mobile access points, such as for backhaul purposes. Thus, the MBRI may function as a standalone mobile Internet, without connection to the fixed Internet, or as an IP-routable extension of another network, whether it be the Internet, a local area network, a wide area network, a cellular network, a personal area network, or some other type of network that is capable of integration with an IP-based network. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252135 | EFFICIENT POWER MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method of providing power management in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is presented. The method includes receiving a Traffic Indication Map (TIM) at a station, indicating the presence of buffered frames, associated with any AC, for the station at an Access Point (AP). The method further includes sending, by the station, one of an uplink data frame if one is buffered, and a null frame to retrieve the buffered frames from said AP. The station remains awake to receive frames from the AP until a downlink frame is received containing an indication that it is the last frame to be transmitted in the service period. The method may further include determining at the end of service period whether there are more frames remaining buffered for the station at the AP. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252136 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY ROUTING INFORMATION - A hierarchical communication system is described in which two wireless local area networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed to link inherently portable or mobile computer devices. A series of radio base stations make up a infrastructure network. The infrastructure network and at least one portable computer device make up the first local area network. The communication on the first local area network is accomplished by spread spectrum frequency hopping communication A second local area network allows for radio communication between a portable computer device and peripheral devices with built-in transceivers utilized by the portable computer device. The communication in each local area network is controlled by a reservation access communication protocol. The communication protocol facilitates frequency hopping synchronization and supports adaptive data rate selection based upon the quality of communication on the communication channel. The communication protocol prevents interference between communication on the first local area network and communication on the second local area network. In a premises LAN, a series of radio base stations and a backbone LAN make up an infrastructure network. The infrastructure network and at least one mobile computing device make up a higher-power LAN, utilizing a frequency hopping protocol. A lower-power LAN allows for radio communication between a mobile computing device and peripheral devices, utilizing a single-frequency spread spectrum protocol. A vehicular LAN provides for short-range communication between a vehicle terminal and a portable terminal. When out of direct RF range of the premises LAN, the vehicle terminal maintains indirect communication when necessary with the premises LAN via one of several alternate RF channels. A microprocessor, located inside radio units which participate in multiple LAN's, selects the appropriate protocol, frequency band and power level for communicating through the network. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252137 | SCANNING FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS WITH VARIABLE SCAN RATE - A wireless communication terminal includes a radio frequency (RF) transceiver and a baseband processing circuit, which is arranged to detect an indication of a rate of movement of the terminal. The baseband processing circuit is coupled to cause the RF transceiver to scan periodically for access points that are available to communicate with the mobile terminal at a scan rate that is selected responsively to the indication, and upon detecting an available access point, to establish a wireless connection between the terminal and the available access point. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252138 | ESTIMATION OF SPEED AND DIRECTION OF TRAVEL IN A WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE POSITION ESTIMATIONS - A method for estimating the speed and bearing of a Wi-Fi enabled device using WLAN radio signals in a WLAN based location service is provided. A method used to estimate a speed of travel of a Wi-Fi enabled device comprises the Wi-Fi enabled device receiving signals transmitted by Wi-Fi access points in range of the Wi-Fi enabled device, and using the signals to estimate the speed of and/or direction of travel of the Wi-Fi enabled device. | 10-08-2009 |
20090257412 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK REGISTRATION BY A MOBILE STATION DURING NETWORK CONGESTION - Systems and methods for providing mobile stations (“MS”) registration to a generic access network (“GAN”) via a wireless LAN interface are disclosed. The MS may receive a rejection message from a GAN controller with a “network congestion” indication set. The MS may also receive a “connection status” information element as part of the rejection message. The MS can determine from the information element whether the MS can release the connections made to a security gateway (“SEGW”) and to the GAN controller and whether it can release its WLAN connection facility. When the MS releases these connections, battery power is conserved while performing a timer decrement loop. At the end of the timer decrement loop, the MS makes another registration request. The network can reallocate resources when the MS releases the connections to the SEGW and the GAN controller. Methods for performing the GAN registration during network congestions are described. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257413 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING CHANNEL MEASUREMENTS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and system for facilitating channel measurements in a communication network is disclosed. The method includes contending for a control channel to reserve a logical subchannel of a data channel. The control channel operates in a first frequency band and the data channel operates in a second frequency band. Further, the method includes sending an announce message on the control channel for announcing a reservation at a particular time period of the logical subchannel of the data channel when the contention for the control channel is successful, sending a channel sense message on the logical subchannel of the data channel at the particular time period to facilitate at least one other node to perform channel measurements based on the channel sense message, and monitoring the data channel and performing channel measurements based on at least one other channel sense message received from the at least one other node. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257414 | Heterogeneous MAC protocol for multiple base stations in wireless networks - This disclosure describes a new Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols into a heterogeneous MAC protocol used for forwarding VoIP traffic in VoIP systems on wireless networks using multiple base stations which addresses the need to transport high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257415 | Heterogeneous MAC protocol for multiple base stations in wireless networks - This disclosure describes a new interference avoidance Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols into a heterogeneous MAC protocol used for forwarding VoIP traffic in VoIP systems on wireless networks using multiple base stations which addresses additional interference elimination and the need to transport high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257416 | ACCESS POINT - An access point has a connection to a wide area network, and is configured to allow a device to connect thereto, and includes an Application Programming Interface for allowing a remote application to connect to the access point over the wide area network, and to obtain information relating to the device connected to the access point. In particular, the access point is configured to allow a device to connect thereto over a wireless interface, and to provide bearer translation such that traffic over the wireless interface can be directed over the wide area network. The Application Programming Interface may then allow the application to obtain information relating to a connection status of a wireless device associated with the access point. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257417 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION WITH AN ICS-CAPABLE WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating communication operations with a wireless device that is ICS or DTM capable. Signaling protocols and apparatus are provided for operation of the wireless device when an ICS with the wireless device is ongoing, and the device leaves an area that provides for ICS as well as when the ICS can be provided using circuit-switched connections. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257418 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION WITH AN ICS-CAPABLE WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating communication operations with a wireless device that is ICS or DTM capable. A message generator is provided, configured to generate a network-terminated message, the network-terminated message including a media feature tag that identifies support of ICS. When transmitted to a network node, the message is detected. And, a wireless-device-terminated message that provides for mapping of a SIP URI into a calling name presentation. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257419 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 10-15-2009 |
20090262714 | Network gateway and network system for a vehicle - The present invention relates to the network gateway for a vehicle and network system in which the mobile device which supports the wireless LAN is able to use the Internet by using the telematics module of a vehicle. For this, the present invention includes an user interface in which a user command is inputted and the process result for the user command is indicated; a telematics module in which a mobile communications network connecter is mounted to be able be connected to Internet that the mobile communications network provides; a mobile device equipped with a wireless LAN; and a network gateway which connects the mobile device to the Internet through the telematics module according to the request of the user interface or the mobile device in the state of being connected to the mobile device through the wireless LAN. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262715 | BRIDGE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR BRIDGING A WLAN TO A WWAN - A bridge device for bridging a wireless local area network (WLAN) and a plurality of wireless wide area networks (WWANs) includes a first communication port, a second communication port, a third communication port, a first media controller, a second media controller, a third media controller and a bridge module. The bridge module includes a flow controller and a data converter. The media controllers receive inbound data packets from corresponding communication ports and transmitting outbound data packets to corresponding communication ports. The flow controller controls data packet flow between the WLAN and the WWANs and records current bandwidths and utilization statuses of the WWANs, and the data converter converts between the inbound data packets and the outbound data packets accordingly. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262716 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication system includes: a service terminal configured to have a wireless LAN access point capability and a proximity communication capability, the wireless LAN access point capability enabling the service terminal to act as a wireless LAN access point to be connected via a network to a service provider providing a network connection service on a chargeable basis, the service terminal thereby offering the chargeable network connection service; and a user terminal configured to have a wireless LAN terminal capability and a proximity communication capability, the wireless LAN terminal capability enabling the user terminal to connect with the wireless LAN access point, the user terminal further connecting to the network using the chargeable network connection service. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262717 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication device in a wireless network sets management information notification cycles at specified time intervals and transmits management information containing receive timing information showing its own position to start receiving information, receive window information, and receive cycle information. Another wireless communication device receiving that management information links it to a communication device number for the corresponding wireless communication device and stores the receive timing, the receive window information, and the receive cycle information. When sending information, the receive start position of the corresponding communication device is found from the receive timing information, the receive window information, and the receive cycle information of the other communication and information is then transmitted at that timing. An asynchronous ad-hoc communication wireless network can therefore be configured without a particular control station. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262718 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK CONTEXT CONTROL PROTOCOL - A Wireless LAN Context Control Protocol (WLCCP) is used to establish and manage a wireless network topology and securely manages the “operational context” for mobile stations in a campus network. The WLCCP registration protocol can automatically create and delete links in the network, securely distribute operational context, and reliably establish Layer 2 forwarding paths on wireless links. A single infrastructure node is established as the central control point for each subnet, and enables APs and MNs to select the parent node that provides the “least-cost path” to a backbone LAN. Context messages provide a general-purpose transport for context and management information. WLCCP “Trace” messages facilitate network diagnostic tools. Ethernet or UDP/IP encapsulation can be used for WLCCP messages. Ethernet encapsulation is employed for intra-subnet (e.g. AP-to-AP or AP-to-SCM) WLCCP messages. IP encapsulation is used for inter-subnet WLCCP messages and may also be used for intra-subnet WLCCP messages. | 10-22-2009 |
20090268702 | SYNCHRONIZING CALL FEATURE DATA BETWEEN AN IMS NETWORK AND A LEGACY NETWORK - Communication networks and methods are disclosed that synchronize call feature data between an IMS network and a legacy network, such as a cellular network. An IMS subscriber server (e.g., a Home Subscriber Server (HSS)) is notified of changes to feature data for a call feature (e.g., call forwarding, call waiting, etc) in the IMS network. Responsive to the notification, the IMS subscriber server updates a legacy subscriber server (e.g., a Home Location Register (HLR)) in the legacy network based on the change to the feature data. Similarly, the IMS subscriber server identifies changes to feature data for a call feature in the legacy network. Responsive to the change, the IMS subscriber server notifies one or more application servers in the IMS network of the change to the feature data. Through the IMS subscriber server, feature data for call features is synchronized between the IMS network and the legacy network. | 10-29-2009 |
20090274128 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A radio device, which is the source, transmits a route request packet (RREQ) to a radio device. In response to the route request packet (RREQ), the radio device transmits to the radio device a route setup packet (RSET) including a route Radio Device Radio Device Radio Device Radio Device by looking-up topology information (TPIF). In response to the route setup packet (RSET), the radio device produces a route notification packet (RNTF) and transmits the produced route notification packet (RNTF) to radio devices, and. In response to the route notification packet (RNTF), the radio device, which is the destination, produces a route reply packet (RREP) and transmits the produced route reply packet (RREP) to the radio device, which is the source. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274129 | DISTRIBUTED LOAD BALANCING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Distributed load balancing in wireless digital networks. In a network having a plurality of access nodes with at least one wireless client connected to a first access node, the client is encouraged to move to a different access node by reducing the apparent signal strength of transmissions from the access node to the client. Apparent signal strength can be reduced by reducing transmit power, by using beam forming, antenna switching, or a combination. Other access nodes may send unsolicited frames, such as probe response frames to the client, encouraging the client to move. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274130 | Wireless network communication apparatus, methods, and integrated antenna structures - Wireless mesh network communication apparatus and methods are disclosed. Directional antennas are respectively operatively coupled to dedicated communication devices to provide multiple independent wireless communication links. Exchange of communication traffic through the wireless communication links provided by the communication devices and the antennas is controlled by a switch. Any or all of the antennas may be adjustable so as to provide for flexibility in antenna beam alignment. Beam alignment may be physically or electronically adjustable. Radio units including the communication devices and the antennas, and possibly also the switch, may be enclosed in a single housing. The housing may be shared with other components such as wireless communication network base station antennas. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274131 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC DISTRIBUTION OF TRAFFIC IN CHANNEL BONDING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK(LAN) SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for dynamically distributing traffic in a channel bonding wireless local area network (LAN) system. The method includes extracting information regarding a flow from an arrived packet and classifying the packet in the unit of the flow based on the extracted flow information; monitoring the state of each of bonded channels; and allocating the flow sorted in the extracting to the optimum channel by referring to information regarding the channel state monitored in the monitoring. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274132 | ACCESS POINT USED IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The access point used in the wireless LAN system acquires, from a network, an IP address of a management device that holds a list of wireless LAN control devices to each of which the access point can be subordinate, in response to an event start input, acquires the list from the management device via the network by using the IP address of the management device, and accesses at least one of the wireless LAN control devices registered in the list via the network and determines a wireless LAN control device to which the access point should be subordinate, based on a response sent from the at least one of the wireless LAN control devices. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274133 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM THEREOF - A communication apparatus that can perform communication with an external apparatus by switching between a plurality of communication methods, the communication apparatus comprises: a detection unit that detects a change in a position and/or orientation of the communication apparatus; and a switching unit that switches a communication method for use in accordance with a detection result by the detection unit. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274134 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A communication network includes a plurality of network interface devices each covering a respective one of a plurality of cells. Each of the plurality of network interface devices communicates with communication entities in the respective cell using radio frames of the respective cell. The radio frames of a first one of the plurality of cells are shifted in time with respect to the radio frames of a second one of the plurality of cells. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274135 | DIRECT LINK SETUP METHOD IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE METHOD - Provided are a Tunneled Direct Link Setup (TDLS) establishment method for a TDLS initiator and a station supporting the establishment method. In the establishment method, a requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup request frame via an access point(AP) to an intended peer Non-AP QSTA. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA receives a TDLS setup response frame via the AP from the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup request frame. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup confirm frame via the AP to the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup response frame. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274136 | Automatic Partitioning of Wireless Access Points Into Overlay and Underlay Networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems directed to partitioning access points into two or more network access layers, such as overlay and underlay network access layers. According to one implementation of the present invention, a wireless network management system partitions a set of wireless access points into an overlay network for low-functionality clients and an underlay network for high-functionality clients. As described in further detail below, each of the overlay and underlay networks provides a class of network service, where each class of network service differs relative to at least one attribute (e.g., type of 802.11 access, data rates, High-Density, Quality-of-Service, encryption, compression, etc.). For didactic purposes, the overlay network is also referred to as the overlay network service layer (NSL) and the underlay network is referred to as the underlay NSL. In one implementation of the present invention, a partitioning algorithm is used to partition wireless access points into overlay and underlay networks. As described in further detail below, the partitioning algorithm, in one implementation, automatically assigns access points to the overlay and underlay networks based on the coverage needs of each network and the coverage parameters of each access point. In one implementation, the partitioning algorithm can be configured such that the overlay network provides maximum coverage for low-functionality clients, and the underlay network enables maximum performance for high-functionality clients. | 11-05-2009 |
20090279515 | Apparatus and a method for service continuity between umts network and wlan - The present invention relates to a method for guaranteeing service continuity between a 3GPP network and a non-3GPP network. According to the exemplary embodiment of the present invention, when a mobile station receiving a service from the 3GPP network moves to the non-3GPP network or it moves back to the 3GPP network from the non-3GPP network, an inter-working gateway inter-works with a SGSN or a GGSN through the 3GPP network to provide a seamless service to a mobile subscriber. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279516 | UN-INTERRUPTED VOIP RADIO GATEWAY SERVICES THROUGH CLUSTERING - A voice-over-internet system and method is disclosed which comprises a gateway ( | 11-12-2009 |
20090279517 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-MODE TERMINAL SCANNING - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method for scanning for paging messages in a second radio access technology (RAT) network, such as a CDMA network, while connected to a first RAT network, such as a WiMAX network. For certain embodiments, an enhanced scanning request message may facilitate establishing a scanning cycle in the first RAT that aligns with a paging cycle of the second RAT. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279518 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR PROVIDING A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A method and an arrangement for providing a wire-free mesh network are provided. An approval procedure is carried out in situations in which a subscriber who is registering on the mesh network transmits an MAC address which already exists in the mesh network, such that two different subscribers within the mesh network never have identical MAC addresses. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279519 | LOCATION SURVEY FOR POWER CALIBRATION IN A FEMTO CELL - System(s) and method(s) are provided to survey a confined area serviced by femto cell for power calibration. Building survey facilitates calibration of femto cell power to suit actual coverage conditions within the building. A femto access point (AP) is set to “calibration mode” while a “calibration call” is effected (e.g., by a subscriber) throughout the intended in-building coverage area. Wireless signal strength for macro and femto coverage is measured and employed to establish an optimal femto AP power. Building survey for power calibration affects operation of the both a building-based AP serving the femto cell and wireless devices, and enhances subscriber experience. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279520 | Scalable WLAN Gateway - A technique for combining transmission bandwidths of several mobile stations (MS | 11-12-2009 |
20090279521 | BASE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND BASE STATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A base station device connected to a base station management device including: a wireless receiving unit receiving transmission data from a wireless terminal; a mode retaining unit stored with a centralized mode for setting a transmission destination of the transmission data in the base station management device, or a distributed mode for setting the transmission destination of the transmission data in none of the base station management device; and a wired transmitting unit transmitting the transmission data, wherein the wired transmitting unit, when the mode set in the mode retaining unit is the centralized mode, transmits the transmission data received from the wireless terminal to the base station management device, and, when the mode set in the mode retaining unit is the distributed mode, transmits the transmission data received from said wireless terminal toward a destination device of the transmission data. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279522 | Network device and method for local routing of data traffic - The present invention is related to a network device for serving a local network being in connection with a mobile network. The network device comprises interfaces for exchanging a data packet and further comprises a packet filter arranged for being connected to a local anchor point replicating the data connection context of an anchor point in the mobile network and arranged for determining, based on at least a destination address contained in the data packet, whether the data packet has a destination within the local network. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279523 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a wireless communication apparatus wherein random multi-access can be performed while ensuring a transmission distance, even with a radio wave having directivity. A wireless communication apparatus ( | 11-12-2009 |
20090279524 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING CONTROL SIGNALING OVERHEAD IN HYBRID WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention include a method and apparatus for reducing control signaling overhead in a hybrid wireless network. The method comprises receiving a wireless frame in the hybrid wireless network at a first terminal, and determining whether the received wireless frame is a control frame for a wireless channel reservation; if the received wireless frame is a control frame for the wireless channel reservation, reading by the first terminal a value of Duration field in control frame, and updating a timer for a channel reservation period in the first terminal with the value of Duration field, instead of updating network allocation vector of the first terminal; determining whether the remaining time of the timer for the channel reservation period is longer than the time required for transmitting the data frame or not before transmitting a data frame by the first terminal; and transmitting the data frame directly by the first terminal without transmission of a control frame for the wireless channel reservation if the remaining time is longer than the time required for transmitting the data frame. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279525 | ASSOCIATION IN CONTENTION ACCESS PERIOD - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for association in contention access periods and to a method for multi-cycle training in channel time allocation periods. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279526 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, A TERMINAL AND A RECORDING MEDIUM READABLE BY A COMPUTER - In a wireless LAN system, a terminal that includes a device for wireless LAN connection is capable of simple connection setting for wireless LAN. In said terminal, a simple connection setting recorder records each methods of simple connection setting that easily sets the simple connection setting for the wireless LAN, and an access point identifier identifies connected access point by detecting an information that is output by the access point. And a connection setting selector selects a simple connection setting corresponding to the access point, which the access point identifier identified from the simple connection settings recorded in the simple connection setting recorder. Finally, a connection setting processor processes connection setting, which corresponds to each method of the simple connection settings that the connection setting selector selected. | 11-12-2009 |
20090285189 | Wlan Combo Access Point Device for Interface With WiMedia UWB Based Wireless USB and Software Layer Structure of Combo Access Point Device - Provided is a combo access point (AP) device integrated with an WiMedia ultra wideband (UWB) based wireless universal serial bus (WUSB) and a wireless local area network (WLAN) AP. A combo AP device includes a wireless local area network (WLAN) AP block providing wire and wireless telecommunications interfaces, and a wireless universal serial bus (WUSB) block configured in one integral structure with the WLAN AP block and providing a ultra wideband (UWB) based wireless interface with WUSB devices using a WiMedia UWB interface mode. Configuring the combo AP device by matching the functions of the WLAN AP with the WiMedia UWB based WUSB interface can provide dual functions of the WUSB and the WLAN AP and allows personal computer users to easily access commonly shared WUSB devices. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285190 | PERFORMING NETWORKING TASKS BASED ON DESTINATION NETWORKS - Methods and systems which identify and interact with network interfaces based on the network to which they provide access. A computing device operating in accordance with one or more of the principles described herein may examine available network interfaces and identify the network to which the network interfaces provide access, and perform networking tasks on interfaces based on the network identified. For example, a user may instruct a computing device to connect to a specified network, and the computing device will select a particular network interface by which to connect from the one or more available network interfaces that are able to connect to that network. Alternatively, a user may manage policies (e.g., security, connection, and application policies) based on the network to which a network interface provides access and thereby manage a network regardless of which of multiple network interfaces is used to access the network. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285191 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING TRANSMISSION EFFICIENCY OF A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for enhancing transmission efficiency of an access point in a wireless local area network includes generating a threshold, which is a maximum service number of clients in Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery (UAPSD) mode of the access point, and a number of counts of packet retransmissions, counting a number of clients currently in UAPSD mode, and adjusting the number of counts of packet retransmissions according to the number of clients currently in UAPSD mode and the threshold. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285192 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CAPABLE OF PERFORMING AGGREGATED TRANSMISSION - When a communication is performed between an access point and a wireless terminal according to the IEEE 802.11 of a wireless LAN communication, a MAC layer block of a wireless communication apparatus used as the access point adds an identifier showing a support of aggregated transmission of a MAC layer management frame or upper layer several frames to a body of a beacon frame. | 11-19-2009 |
20090290561 | Method for Controlling Base Stations in Wireless Communication Networks - A base station is controlled inactively provided that no radio signal is received from a mobile terminal in the radio range thereof while radio signals can still be receive from mobile terminals. An inactively controlled base station is once again controlled actively when a radio signal of at least one mobile terminal is received. The radio range, of the base station, is deactivated while radio signals can be received from the mobile terminal when the base station is controlled inactively. Thus, the number of actively controlled base station may be minimized and the environmental impact of radio signals caused by the base stations reduced. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290562 | METHOD OF DELIVERING MULTICAST PACKETS IN A MESH NETWORK - In a mesh network, when a wireless mesh link exists between a first mesh access point and a second mesh access point, the first mesh access point can deliver a multicast packet to the second mesh access point through the wireless mesh link. When the second mesh access point determines that the multicast packet from the first mesh access point is a redundant packet, the second mesh access point will send a multi-path notice to the first mesh access point. After receiving the multi-path notice, the first mesh access point stops delivering the multicast packet through the path. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290563 | Antenna/Beam Selection Training in MIMO Wireless LANs with Different Sounding Frames - A method selects antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) that includes a plurality of stations, and each station includes a set of antennas. Plural consecutive packets, received at a station, include plural consecutive sounding packets. Each sounding packet corresponds to a different subset of the set of antennas, and at least one of the plural consecutive packets includes a high throughput (HT) control field including a signal to initiate antenna selection and a number N indicative of a number of sounding packets which follow the at least one packet including the HT control field and which are to be used for antenna selection. A channel matrix is estimated based on a characteristic of the channel as indicated by the received N sounding packets, and a subset of antennas is selected according to the channel matrix. Station and computer program product embodiments include similar features. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290564 | APPARATUS FOR AND METHOD OF SUPPORTING NETWORK-BASED MOBILITY FOR DUAL STACK NODES - An apparatus for and method of supporting network-based mobility for a dual stack terminal are provided. More particularly, a mobile anchor point (MAP) apparatus for binding and data transmission of a dual stack terminal which has moved from a dual network to an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) network or an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) network, and a method of implementing the MAP apparatus are provided. If the IPv6, which is a next-generation Internet protocol, begins to be applied to networks, a dual stack terminal supporting both the IPv4 and IPv6 will also be introduced. In an environment in which this dual stack terminal moves, movement of the dual stack terminal to an IPv4-only network or an IPv6-only network as well as movement between IPv4/IPv6 dual networks will be considered. According to the apparatus and method, a MAP used in a conventional network-based mobility supporting method is extended. Accordingly, when a dual stack terminal moves between different network-based localized mobility management domains, such as an IPv4-only network or an IPv6-only network, a binding management message is made to be exchanged between two MAPs of the networks, thereby establishing an IPv6-in-IPv4 tunnel or an IPv4-in-IPv6 tunnel between the two MAPs. In this way, even when the dual stack terminal moves to an IPv4-only network or an IPv6-only network, communication with an external terminal is enabled. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290565 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A ROUTER AND A COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A router has a function of handling a plurality of sessions and includes, a communication control unit for communicating with a plurality of terminals, and receiving a desired priority level of each session from each terminal at a time of starting communication; a priority adjustment unit for adjusting the desired priority level among terminals when it is determined that simultaneous communication of all sessions cannot be performed and the desired priority level competes among terminals if every desired priority level is permitted as it is without changing; and a priority control unit for assigning a transmission bandwidth to each session according to a determined priority level corresponding to each of the plurality of sessions. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290566 | Receiving Apparatus and Receiving Method - There is provided a receiving apparatus including a radio receiving section that receives a first radio signal transmitted according to a first communication system and a second radio signal transmitted according to a second communication system, a first detection section that detects the first radio signal among radio signals received by the radio receiving section, a second detection section that detects the second radio signal among radio signals received by the radio receiving section using a predetermined correlation threshold, and a threshold control section that temporarily changes the correlation threshold of the second detection section when the first radio signal is detected by the first detection section. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290567 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PERFORMING WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION - A local station of an example of the invention performing TCP/IP communication conforming to a IEEE 802.11 standard comprises an unit for receiving a WLANDATA frame formed by encapsulating a TCPDATA segment from a center station, an unit for transmitting a WLANACK frame which is delivery confirmation information corresponding to the WLANDATA frame to the local station, and an unit for executing processing of stopping transmission of a TCPACK segment which is delivery confirmation information corresponding to the TCPDATA segment when the WLANACK frame is transmitted to the center station. | 11-26-2009 |
20090296669 | Access control system in wirelesss lan system - In a wireless LAN system using an access point to perform access control for accesses from a plurality of client terminals, an access point and each of a plurality of client terminals have a transmission means using a data transmission carrier wave frequency and a control signal transmission carrier wave frequency; each of the plurality of client terminals has a memory storing priority information; when the data transmission carrier wave frequency is not sensed on the wireless LAN, data are transmitted to the access point at a relevant data transmission carrier wave frequency; when the data transmission carrier wave frequency is sensed on the wireless LAN, a band reservation request is sent to the access point at a relevant control signal transmission carrier wave frequency along with priority information stored in the memory; and after a transmission confirmation is received from the access point for the band reservation request, data is transmitted to the access point at a relevant data transmission carrier wave frequency. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296670 | PULL-BASED DATA TRANSMISSION APPROACH - A network can include a number of nodes that link a source node to a sink node. When a first node in a network sends a packet to its downstream node, this information is also received at its upstream node. In response to learning that the first node has sent a packet, the upstream node sends another packet to the first node. In essence, a pull-based transmission approach is used to mitigate congestion and address the funneling effect in data transmission networks such as wireless video sensor networks. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296671 | COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A CLIENT DEVICE AND AN INFRASTRUTURE DEVICE - Techniques are provided for communicating information between a wireless client device (CD) and an infrastructure device (ID) in a WLAN in which the CD wirelessly communicates with the ID in IBSS mode over a pseudo-BSS/IBSS air interface. The CD includes a WLAN NIC that operates in IBSS mode and a client host system that includes a client custom driver module (CCDM) and a WLAN NIC driver module configured to operate in IBSS mode. The ID includes a hardware interface and a host system which includes a packet separation driver module (PSDM) and an infrastructure custom driver module (ICDM). The CD operates in pseudo-BSS/IBSS mode (PBIM). The CCDM provides pseudo BSS-like service(s) with respect to packets generated by upper protocol layer modules to generate pseudo-BSS-like packets that it provides to the WLAN NIC via WLAN NIC driver module. Based on the pseudo-BSS-like packets, the WLAN NIC generates PBIM packets and transmits them. The PSDM receives packets from the hardware interface and separates them. When the PSDM receives PBIM packets, the PDSM sends the PBIM packets to the ICDM which performs one or more BSS-like services with respect to the PBIM packets. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296672 | METHODS FOR WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATING INFORMATION BETWEEN A CLIENT DEVICE AND AN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVICE - Techniques are provided for communicating information between a wireless client device (CD) and an infrastructure device (ID) in a WLAN in which the CD wirelessly communicates with the ID in IBSS mode over a pseudo-BSS/IBSS air interface. The CD includes a WLAN NIC that operates in IBSS mode and a client host system that includes a client custom driver module (CCDM) and a WLAN NIC driver module configured to operate in IBSS mode. The ID includes a hardware interface and a host system which includes a packet separation driver module (PSDM) and an infrastructure custom driver module (ICDM). The CD operates in pseudo-BSS/IBSS mode (PBIM). The CCDM provides pseudo BSS-like service(s) with respect to packets generated by upper protocol layer modules to generate pseudo-BSS-like packets that it provides to the WLAN NIC via WLAN NIC driver module. Based on the pseudo-BSS-like packets, the WLAN NIC generates PBIM packets and transmits them. The PSDM receives packets from the hardware interface and separates them. When the PSDM receives PBIM packets, the PDSM sends the PBIM packets to the ICDM which performs one or more BSS-like services with respect to the PBIM packets. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296673 | APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A PSEUDO-BASIC SERVICE SET (BSS)-LIKE NETWORK OVER AN INDEPENDENT BASIC SERVICE SET (IBSS) MODE AIR INTERFACE - Techniques are provided for communicating information between a wireless client device (CD) and an infrastructure device (ID) in a WLAN in which the CD wirelessly communicates with the ID in IBSS mode over a pseudo-BSS/IBSS air interface. The CD includes a WLAN NIC that operates in IBSS mode and a client host system that includes a client custom driver module (CCDM) and a WLAN NIC driver module configured to operate in IBSS mode. The ID includes a hardware interface and a host system which includes a packet separation driver module (PSDM) and an infrastructure custom driver module (ICDM). The CD operates in pseudo-BSS/IBSS mode (PBIM). The CCDM provides pseudo BSS-like service(s) with respect to packets generated by upper protocol layer modules to generate pseudo-BSS-like packets that it provides to the WLAN NIC via WLAN NIC driver module. Based on the pseudo-BSS-like packets, the WLAN NIC generates PBIM packets and transmits them. The PSDM receives packets from the hardware interface and separates them. When the PSDM receives PBIM packets, the PDSM sends the PBIM packets to the ICDM which performs one or more BSS-like services with respect to the PBIM packets. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296674 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DENSITY DETERMINATIOIN IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Each node in a wireless communication network adds information in hello messages wherein the information comprises the number of hello messages received at the node from a plurality of nodes. Also, the nodes are configured to determine the node density based on additional information extracted from the received hello messages. For example, a first node in the wireless communication network receives a hello message from a second node, wherein the hello message comprises additional information indicating at least a number of hello messages received by the second node from a plurality of nodes in the wireless communication network. The first node extracts the additional information from the received hello message and based on the extracted additional information, the first node determines at least one channel performance metric. Based on the at least one channel performance metric the first node determines density of neighboring nodes in the wireless communication network. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296675 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING RRC CONNECTIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate selective release of mobile devices using conflicting identifiers when communicating with an access point. The access point can detect the conflicting identifier and transmit a selective release message to the mobile devices. The selective release message can include a disambiguation identifier so the appropriate mobile device can identify that it is incorrectly connected to the access point and can release its connection. The disambiguation identifier can be one or more unique aspects of the correctly or incorrectly connected mobile device, such as an identifier, previous message related aspects, whether a security or context check can be decoded, etc. Thus, connection of the incorrectly connected mobile device can be released without additionally releasing the correctly connected mobile device. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296676 | Seamless Wireless Mobility - Seamless wireless mobility is described. In one embodiment, a mobility manager can query a subscriber catalog for a current registration status of handset. The mobility manager can then use the registration status to send a first signal to the handset over either a wireless network or an Internet protocol-based network. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296677 | WIRELESS PERSONAL LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A transceiver apparatus for creating a wireless personal local area network between a computer terminal and one or more peripheral devices. A separate transceiver is connected to the computer terminal and to each peripheral device. The transceivers can be connected to the terminal or peripheral device either internally or externally. A low power radio is used to communicate information between the computer terminal and peripheral devices. Different transceivers can be used for modifying the carrier frequency and power of the local area network. The microprocessor is located inside each transceiver and controls the information flow of the transceiver including the communication protocol which allows each device to know if other devices are communicating, which devices are being communicated to, and selectively address the peripheral devices. An Idle Sense communication protocol is used for information transfer between the computer terminal and the peripheral devices, increasing efficiency in power management and compensating for transmission collisions. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296678 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERIC DATA MAPPING BETWEEN WIRELESS COMPONENT APPLICATIONS AND APPLICATION DATA SOURCES - An application gateway is configured to facilitate message communication between an application executing on a wireless device and a backend server. The application gateway comprises a message interface, a backend connector and a transformer. The message interface facilitates communication between the wireless device and the application gateway in a compact format. The backend connector facilitates communication between the application gateway and the backend server using a schema-based internal format. The transformer translates data between the compact format and the internal format. The transformer further includes a transformer mapping document for correlating elements in the compact format with elements in the internal format. | 12-03-2009 |
20090303971 | Method and Apparatus For Transmitting/Receiving Control Message Related to Packet Call Service in an IP Multimedia Subsystem - Apparatus and Method for transmitting control message related to a packet call service in an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) that transmits/receives an IMS control message using a control plane to reduce a delay caused by setting of a user plane in a packet call setup process. A user equipment (UE) determines whether an IMS service is registered in response to a radio resource control (RRC) connection request. The UE sets an SRB_IMS request parameter requiring that the IMS control message be processed through a signaling radio bearer (SRB) depending on whether the IMS service is registered. The UE transmits an RRC connection request message including the SRB_IMS request parameter to a radio network controller (RNC). The UE configures an SRB_IMS entity. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303972 | Dynamic Scrambling Techniques for Reducing Killer Packets in a Wireless Network - Techniques are disclosed in which a parameter used for scrambling packet data is changed. If the initial scrambling of a packet causes a killer packet to be generated, the packet is re-scrambled using a different value for the parameter, so that a killer packet is avoided. In a network that employs frequency-hopping spread spectrum communications, a channel identifier can be employed as an input to the scrambling algorithm. In this implementation, a given packet of data will be transmitted on one channel with a first sequence of bits when it is scrambled, and on another channel with a different sequence of bits. If the scrambled packet for one of these channels results in a killer packet, it is statistically unlikely that it will also be a killer packet when it is re-transmitted on the other channel. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303973 | PACKET DATA NETWORK SELECTION - According to an example embodiment, a method may include sending, by a mobile station in a wireless network, a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) message to a DHCP server via a base station. The DHCP message may identify a packet data network (PDN) by access point node (APN). The method may also include exchanging data with the indicated packet data network via the base station. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303974 | WIRELESS NETWORK, ACCESS POINT, AND LOAD BALANCING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless network, an access point (AP), and a load balancing method thereof are provided. Each AP of the wireless network obtains data related to bandwidth and radio frequency (RF) signal strength by interchanging messages with the other APs. Each AP performs a calculation according to the data to evaluate the advantage of potential bandwidth of the AP with respect to a user side mobile station (MS). By this advantage evaluation, one of the APs is selected to accept the association request of the MS. This method can be used to balance the load of the APs of the wireless network. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303975 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS COEXISTENCE - A system and method for reducing wireless local area network (WLAN) interference with a different wireless network (non-WLAN). A wireless device includes a WLAN transceiver and a non-WLAN transceiver. The WLAN transceiver is configured to operate in a WLAN, and configured to operate selectively using one of a greater bandwidth and a lesser bandwidth in a frequency band. The wireless communication of the non-WLAN is incompatible with the WLAN. The non-WLAN transceiver is configured to request the WLAN transceiver operate using the lesser bandwidth. | 12-10-2009 |
20090310576 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION MONITORING METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ACCESS POINT AND PROGRAM - Electro-magnetic wave reachability between a wireless client and wireless access points including access points of wireless communication system components is judged for every wireless access point, useful states of wireless resources at the wireless access points are calculated for every wireless access point, and incoming and outgoing calls of a communication session are controlled or usability or vacant capacity of the wireless communication system is monitored in accordance with information including judged results of the electro-magnetic wave reachability and calculated results of the useful states of wireless resources. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310577 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - A wireless LAN system of the present invention is provided with a wireless LAN client terminal ( | 12-17-2009 |
20090310578 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING MULTI-CHANNEL DIRECT LINK CONNECTION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK, RELATED NETWORK AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A wireless communication network includes an access point and a plurality of stations. The access point sends towards the stations periodic information arranged in time frames or beacon intervals. The stations in the network are configured to in a first mode through the access point, and in a second mode directly with each other. The time frames are partitioned into a first time interval wherein the stations communicate in the first mode over a first channel; a second time interval wherein the stations communicate in the second mode over a second channel, and a third time interval wherein the stations communicate in either of the first or the second mode. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310579 | MOBILE STATION AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - In a mobile station UE1, a service-type information detection unit 41 for detecting service-type information contained in the header of a packet in which transmit data is carried is provided at a radio link control layer | 12-17-2009 |
20090310580 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS - An apparatus, method and system for enabling a portable electronic device (PED) ( | 12-17-2009 |
20090310581 | HRPD/3GPP EPC network connection apparatus, system, and method - An apparatus, system, and method may include a user device, an HRPD network comprising a HSGW, and a 3GPP EPC network comprising at least one gateway. The user device may be configured to detect a need to establish a connection with the 3GPP EPC network, determine an APN value that corresponds to the 3GPP EPC network, include the APN value in a connection request, and communicate the connection request to an HRPD gateway of the HRPD network. The HRPD gateway may be configured to receive the connection request from the user device, determine a PDN gateway of the 3GPP EPC network that corresponds to the APN value in the connection request, and enable a connection between the user device and the 3GPP EPC network. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310582 | Systems and Methods for Distributed Data Routing in a Wireless Network - In various embodiments, the data plane may be abstracted from a control plane in a wireless network such as WiMax, WiFi, LTE or the like. In some embodiments, a routing device comprises a control module, a service module, and a router module. The control module may be configured to receive communication instructions from a control server. The service module may be configured to process the communication instructions and provide data path instructions based on the communication instructions. The router module may be configured to receive data from a source device and route the processed data to a target device based on the data path instructions. The control server may comprise a WiMax server such as an ASN server or a CSN server. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310583 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - When a wireless communication apparatus capable of directly communicating with another communication apparatus performs communication via an access point, the wireless communication apparatus shares communication setting information with the other communication apparatus, the communication setting information being information for performing direct communication with the other communication apparatus without using that access point. If a radar signal is detected during communication with the other communication apparatus via the access point, switching to direct communication with the other communication apparatus is made based on the shared communication setting information. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310584 | Self Organizing Network - A method for implementing a self organizing network includes establishing a connection between a femto base station and a network access device operable to provide the femto base station with Internet access. The method also includes establishing a backhaul connection between the femto base station and a wireless service provider's network via the Internet. The method further includes synchronizing the femto base station with a wireless network via the backhaul connection. The method additionally includes receiving initial wireless parameters from the wireless service provider's network via the backhaul connection. The method also includes determining whether wireless operation is possible, and upon determining wireless operation is possible, operating within the wireless network. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310585 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DETERMINING LOCATION USING A CELLULAR AND WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM BY SELECTING THE BEST WLAN PS SOLUTION - The disclosed subject matter relates to a method and system for increasing the accuracy of a WLAN based position estimate using cellular positioning information. In some embodiments, the method can include determining a set of possible WLAN location solutions for a WLAN and cellular enabled device based on one or more WLAN access points, obtaining cellular measurements from at least one cell tower, and determining the best WLAN location solution from the set of possible WLAN location solutions using the cellular measurements. In one embodiment, the method can include using the cellular measurements from the at least one cell tower to provide a cellular based location estimate for the WLAN and cellular enabled device. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310586 | Cooperative Wireless Networks - A wireless local area network (WLAN) communicatively couples together a group of mobile wireless terminals configured to operate in a wireless wide area network (WWAN). A network-management operator processes WWAN-control messages used by the mobile wireless terminals and the WWAN. One or more of the mobile wireless terminals may function as the network-management operator. | 12-17-2009 |
20090316667 | GSM HARMONIC EMISSION DESENSITIZATION IN 5-GHZ WLAN - A method for improving data communication quality in collocated GSM and WLAN subsystems. The GSM device can spuriously emit third harmonics whose frequencies depends on which GSM channel is presently being used. The WLAN receiver uses OFDM subcarriers that can be interfered with by third harmonics of particular ones of the GSM channels. Which OFDM subcarriers would be adversely affected by a particular one of the GSM channels being in use is computed. Then a corresponding particular OFDM subcarrier is deleted after a FFT process and before Viterbi decoding. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316668 | Method for generating extented route message, method for generating an extended route reply message, extended route request message, extended route reply message and first and second nodes - Route discovery of a route from a source node of an IEEE 802 connection to a destination node of an IEEE 802 connection, including a mesh network path with a source node of the mesh path and a destination node of the mesh path, is initiated by an extended route request message generated by the destination node. The extended route request message includes a flag that indicates whether the source node of the IEEE 802 connection is located inside or outside the mesh network, and either one source address of the source node, if the node is inside the mesh network, or two source addresses covering (a) the source address of the source node of the mesh path and (b) the source address of the source node of the IEEE 802 connection, if the node is outside the mesh network. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316669 | Method, Device And System For Selecting A Wireless Access Network On The Basis Of Environment Information, Computer Program And Corresponding Data Support - The method of selecting a wireless access telecommunication network in a global link between a first terminal ( | 12-24-2009 |
20090316670 | Element-Based Method for Auto-Configuration of Handsets by a Base Station in a Heterogeneous Mac Protocol for Wireless Networks - An element-based method to automatically configure mobile handsets by the base station using a protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols for use in wireless VoIP systems with multiple base stations is disclosed. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316671 | Method and Apparatus of Transmitting, Receiving, Displaying and Playing Weather Data - A transmitter transmits time synchronized data via a pager/WiMax/802.x access to a receiver system, wherein the receiver system is programmed to receive data for specific geographic locations. The geographic locations may be specified by the user or by the receiver system, and includes state, zip codes, towns, counties, towns, or cardinal regions. The receiver is able to find its location when outside its cell region and is able to synchronize to the data transmitted in the new cell region. Further, the receiver system is able to remotely monitor weather data and other information at a different location via wireless Internet or voice over IP. A transceiver may also be used to receive weather or alert data. In response to receiving data, the transceiver transmits the data to low powered devices in a house using a different frequency band than the frequency band it received the data. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316672 | Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) With PDIF and SIP Gateway - Apparatus and methods are described for establishing a connection to a wireless subscriber network over a wireless LAN. A secure tunnel is established between a PDIF and a mobile station. Both voice and data calls are exchange via the tunnel. Voice calls are forwarded to a SIP GW while data calls are routed to the Internet. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316673 | VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION GATEWAY - A system for enabling secure access to an in-vehicle gateway module includes a mobile wireless transceiver on the vehicle in communication with the gateway module, and at least one stationary wireless transceiver in communication with a home computer system, for example, as part of the vehicle owner's home network, or via an internet connection to the home network. The home computer system authenticates all data transfer to and from the vehicle gateway module while preferably also providing a “server” or information consolidation function. | 12-24-2009 |
20090323644 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM - If a network having the same SSID as but a different BSSID from those of a network that has been established by a first communication apparatus is detected, the network established by the first communication apparatus is terminated and the first communication apparatus participates in the detected network. This makes it possible for the first communication apparatus and another communication apparatus to participate in the same network. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323645 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE, DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication terminal is provided. The wireless communication terminal including a first wireless communication section configured to operate in a first clock system; a second wireless communication section configured to operate in a second clock system different from the first clock system, and perform short-range wireless communication; and an asynchronous interface that mediates between the first wireless communication section and the second wireless communication section. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323646 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRLESS LAN (WLAN) DATA MULTIPLEXING - Embodiments addressing MAC processing for efficient use of high throughput systems are disclosed. Data associated with at least one MAC ID can be aggregated into a single byte stream. The single byte stream can be formatted into MAC PDUs and then muxed. The muxed MAC PDUs can then be transmitted on a single MAC frame. Muxing of the MAC PDUs can be based on the priority of the MAC PDUs or other criteria. A MAC header can comprise information about the muxed PDUs, such as a pointer, that identifies the location of the MAC PDUs within the MAC frame. A MAC frame can contain partial MAC PDUs. The transmitted muxed MAC PDUs can be retransmitted, and an acknowledgment or feedback scheme may be used to help manage the transmission of the protocol data units. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323647 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PEER DISCOVERY ASSIST - Methods and apparatus related to peer/network/service discovery in a mobile wireless system, e.g., an ad hoc peer-to-peer network are described. Transmission of discovery information, e.g., upper layer discovery information, is divided into a number of portions to be transmitted separately over time. Transmission of the individual portions is structured so as to enable flexibility in the frequency of the peer discovery transmissions as well as the monitoring of such transmissions. Various embodiments facilitate rapid discovery and/or secure discovery, e.g., selective discovery by trusted peers. The structuring enables proxying of some transmissions by a third party, e.g., an assist node. The assist node receives discovery information portions being communicated at a first rate and retransmits the received discovery information portions at a second rate which is higher than the first rate. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323648 | MULTI-RATE PROXIMITY BASED PEER DISCOVERY METHODS AND APPARATUS - Various embodiments relate to wireless communications devices which support multiple modes of peer discovery operation. In some embodiments, the multiple modes of peer discovery operation include different modes which are associated with different rates of transmitting peer discovery information. In some embodiments, the multiple modes of peer discovery operation include different modes which are associated with different rates of monitoring peer discovery information. In various embodiments, a communications device determines whether or not to switch between different peer discovery modes of operation as a function of proximity to a location of interest. Proximity determinations may be, and sometimes are, based upon geographic position comparisons. Alternatively or in addition, proximity determinations may be, and sometimes are, based upon received signal strength measurements. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323649 | WIRELESS MARINE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An exemplary device that is useful for facilitating wireless communications on a body of water includes a support platform that is configured to remain at least partially on a surface of the water. A transceiver station is mounted on the support platform. The transceiver station is configured to communicate over at least one wireless link with at least one mobile station. The transceiver station has a connection to an underwater cable through which the transceiver station communicates with another device. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323650 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PERFORMING EXPRESS FORWARDING FRAMES HAVING MULTIPLE FRAGMENTS - A method, apparatus and computer program product for the express forwarding frames having multiple fragments are presented. A timer (NAV) is maintained at each respective node of a wireless Local Area Network (LAN). At least two fragments of a frame are designated as a Time Sensitive Quality of Service (TSQ) frame fragments to be express forwarded. A duration field of each of the TSQ frame fragments is incremented by a first predetermined time increment (DT | 12-31-2009 |
20090323651 | Techniques for management of shared resources in wireless multi-communication devices - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a network adapter configured for wireless communication using more than one technology, wherein the network adapter is configured to share a plurality of shared hardware (HW) components by generating a notification when a shared HW resource becomes available to a requesting device that needs the HW resource, and registering the requesting device so that it will receive the notifications when generated; and wherein upon receiving the notifications, the requesting device will wake up and perform a pending action. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323652 | Methods and apparatus for antenna isolation-dependent coexistence in wireless systems - Methods and apparatus for selectively switching one or more antennas in a multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) antenna array so as to mitigate interference with another RF interface within the same space-constrained device, based on radio frequency isolation. In one embodiment, the MIMO interface comprises a WLAN interface having a 2×2 or 3×3 array of antennae which are placed in a wireless device in an asymmetric fashion with respect to the antenna of the second interface, and the other interface comprises a PAN (e.g., Bluetooth) interface operating in an overlapping frequency band (e.g., ISM band). When both interfaces are operating, interference is mitigated through selectively switching off one or more of the MIMO antennae, and using the remaining antenna(e) having the best isolation from the Bluetooth antennae. This approach allows simultaneous operation of both interferences without significant degradation to user experience or the operation of either interface, and may also provide power savings critical to mobile device battery longevity. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323653 | Communication service support device, method and program - A communication service support device includes a parameter storage, a terminal information storage, a comparator, a register, and a notifier. The parameter storage stores, in a manner associated with one another, identification information identifying multiple mobile terminal units, identification information identifying multiple points, identification information identifying service that the individual mobile terminal units can receive at the respective points, and identification information identifying management servers for managing the respective points. The comparator compares the identification information stored in the parameter storage and identifying the management servers with identification information transmitted from a mobile terminal unit at a point and identifying a management server. When agreement of the identification information is found as a result of the comparison, the notifier notifies the mobile terminal unit from which the identification information identifying the management server has been received that the mobile terminal unit is permitted to use the service. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323654 | WIRELESS AD HOC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication terminal performs wireless ad hoc communication with another terminal via a first wireless interface dedicated to reception and a second wireless interface for both transmission and reception. The terminal executes defining a communication area to be divided into cells of first polygonal shapes and each of the cells to be divided into a plurality of sub-cells of second polygonal shapes different from the first polygonal shapes; allocating, so as to prevent adjacent cells from belonging to a set of two identical wireless channels, a first wireless channel and a second wireless channel as the set of wireless channels to the cells; and setting the first wireless channel and the second wireless channel so that the same transmission channel is set for sub-cells brought into contact between the adjacent cells while different transmission channels are set for adjacent sub-cells in an own cell where an own terminal is present. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323655 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INVITING AND SHARING CONVERSATIONS BETWEEN CELLPHONES - A system and method perform wireless networking that allows a cellular phone user to invite and share conversations with other cellphones or wireless communication devices in local spatial proximity by means of a wireless mesh or infrastructure or an ad-hoc network. In the system and method, there is no per-minute cost by using wireless local area networks in the unlicensed spectrum, such as a 802.11 network. Conversations are shared with only the intended persons. To join a conversation using the method, users only require any wireless device, and not necessarily a cellphone, such as a laptop with wireless capability. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323656 | CIRCUIT-SWITCHED AND MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM VOICE CONTINUITY - The present invention relates to moving session control for a user element from a circuit-switched subsystem, such as a cellular network, to a multimedia subsystem (MS), such as the Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). Session control is provided by the MS irrespective of whether the user element is using cellular or local wireless access for the sessions. Notably, multiple sessions may be controlled for a given user element at the same time. Session control for originating and terminating multiple simultaneous sessions in the CS or MS as well as transferring these sessions between the CS and MS is anchored at a continuity control function (CCF) in the MS. All session signaling for each of the multiple sessions is passed through the CCF. The CCF is a service provided in the MS, and anchors the user element's sessions as well as enables domain transfers between the CS and MS. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323657 | Tri-core architecture for reducing mac layer processing latency in base stations - A tri-core architecture for reducing MAC layer processing latency at the base stations is described. The new architecture minimizes the processing delay by introducing a pipelined approach. The fundamental concept involves splitting the Medium Access Control (MAC) layer functionality into three distinct tasks, with each processor performing a given task. All tasks will be thus performed concurrently, avoiding much of the overhead encountered while processing received packets and preparing packets to be transmitted. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323658 | Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) Architectures - Apparatus and methods are described for establishing a connection to a subscriber access network, such as a 3G network, over and untrusted network, such as a wireless LAN. A stream ID is assigned to a mobile device upon initialization of the device, and the stream ID remains active until the device powers down, loses WLAN coverage, or de-registers with the network. Both voice and data calls may be routed over the tunnel using the assigned stream ID. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323659 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING AD-HOC MODE CONNECTION USING CELLULAR NETWORK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for establishing an ad-hoc mode connection in a cellular wireless communication system are provided. In the method, a request message requesting an ad-hoc mode connection with a counterpart mobile terminal is transmitted to a base station in a cellular network. A Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Internet Protocol (IP) address information are received from the base station. The ad-hoc mode connection with the counterpart mobile terminal is established using the SSID and IP address information. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323660 | Telecommunication System for Automatically Locating by Network Connection and Selectively Delivering Calls to Mobile Client Devices - A communication system for an organization having multiple sites uses a dual-mode device capable of both cell phone communication and telephone communication on a local area network (LAN). IP LANS are established at organization sites such that a temporary IP address is assigned to a dual-mode device that logs onto an organization LAN, and the IP address is associated at a PSTN-connected server on the LAN with the cell phone number of the communication device. The IP server notifies a PSTN-connected routing server when a device logs on to a LAN, and also provides a destination number for the IP server. Cell calls directed to the device are then redirected to the IP server and directed to the device connected to the LAN. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323661 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication control apparatus comprises a terminal control part that generates available-terminal information representing a communication terminal belonging to a group of available-terminals and also generates call-status information representing one of the communication terminals having calls and also representing the media of the communication terminals; a terminal/media selecting part that, upon detection of an event occurrence, if the call-status information matches terminal/media information of a terminal/media information storing part and further if changed-terminal/media information of the terminal/media information storing part is included in the available-terminal information, then determines the communication terminal represented by the changed-terminal/media information as a communication terminal to be incorporated into the calls of the media of the communication terminals; and a session control part that establishes a call of the medium of the determined communication terminal between the determined communication terminal and a communication terminal of another user. | 12-31-2009 |
20100002659 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication method wherein the power consumption can be reduced as compared with the conventional one and a wireless communication apparatus can synchronize its super-frame with the super-frame of another wireless communication apparatus in an ad hoc network. According to this method, in the ad hoc network where a plurality of wireless communication apparatuses use broadband signals to data-communicate with each other, a wireless communication apparatus transmits an end tone ( | 01-07-2010 |
20100002660 | MULTI-HOMING BASED MOBILE INTERNET - In one embodiment, a method of providing mobile internet comprises receiving a down-link packet having a endpoint identity protocol element (EIP), the EIP comprising a global locator associated with a provider network, a first local locator set to a predetermined value, and an endpoint identifier associated with a mobile host; querying the provider network to obtain a second local locator value associated with the mobile host, the second local locator indicates the location of a first radio router with which the mobile host had previously exchange authentication; overwriting the first local locator portion of the EIP with the second local locator; and routing the down-link packet towards the mobile host using the second local locator. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002661 | MULTIPLE-TRX PICO BASE STATION FOR PROVIDING IMPROVED WIRELESS CAPACITY AND COVERAGE IN A BUILDING - One embodiment is directed to a system for providing wireless coverage and capacity for a public land mobile network within a building. The system comprises a pico base station comprising multiple transceiver units. The pico base station is installed in the building. The system further comprises a plurality of antennas located within the building. The plurality of antennas are located remotely from the pico base station. The pico base station is communicatively coupled to the public land mobile network. The pico base station is communicatively coupled to the plurality of antennas. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002662 | ENTERPRISE MOBILE NETWORK FOR PROVIDING CELLULAR WIRELESS SERVICE USING LICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND SUPPORTING MULTIPLE-DEVICE RING FOR INCOMING CALLS - One embodiment is directed to an enterprise mobile network for providing wireless service within a coverage area associated with an enterprise using licensed radio frequency spectrum. The enterprise mobile network is configured to have local subscribers thereof. At least one local subscriber has assigned thereto a local mobile phone number and one or more other numbers (such as a PBX extension number, a public mobile phone number, and a Unified Communications end point). The enterprise mobile network is configured so that the local mobile phone number and one or more of the other numbers ring in response to incoming calls made to the local mobile phone number or the other numbers. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002663 | Base Station and Data Transferring Method - A base station forms a communication area communicable with a mobile communication network through a local network that includes the base station. The base station includes an obtaining unit that obtains a local-network address assigned to a mobile terminal in the communication area to communicate with a communication terminal in the local network; another obtaining unit that obtains a mobile-network address assigned to the mobile terminal to communicate with the mobile communication network; a storing unit that correlates and stores therein the local-network address and the mobile-network address; a receiving unit that receives, from the communication terminal, data having a destination address that is the local-network address; a converting unit that converts the destination address into the mobile-network address correlated with the local-network address and stored in the storing unit; and a transmitting unit that transmits, to the mobile terminal, the data whose destination address has been converted. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002664 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING A COLLISION BETWEEN A SCHEDULING REQUEST AND A PERIODIC RANK INDICATOR REPORT OR A PERIODIC CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATOR/PRECODING MATRIX INDICATOR REPORT - A method and apparatus are described for avoiding a collision between a scheduling request (SR) and a periodic rank indicator (RI) report or a periodic channel quality indicator (CQI)/precoding matrix indicator (PMI) report. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002665 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND METHOD FOR WIDEBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A base station includes a deciding part configured to decide a period of performing data transmission/reception and a period of not performing data transmission/reception when performing intermittent communications, a generating part configured to generate a predetermined signal to a mobile station, and an adjusting part configured to adjust the period of performing data transmission/reception and/or the period of not performing data transmission/reception according to a response signal transmitted from the mobile station in response to the predetermined signal. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002666 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication system capable of transmitting, at a high speed, information requested by a communication terminal to the communication terminal which moves through a spot wireless area at a high speed. In an integrated base station | 01-07-2010 |
20100002667 | Wireless Terminal, Wireless Communication System And Method for Controling Wireless Terminal To Switch Between Networks In Wireless Communication System - The invention provides a mobile terminal having a first network module for connecting to a wireless wide area network (WWAN) and a second network module for connecting to a wireless local area network (WLAN). The WWAN and the WLAN connect to a control center. The mobile terminal connects to the WLAN and detects a WWAN signal level of a WWAN signal transmitted by the WWAN and a WLAN signal level of a WLAN signal of a WLAN signal transmitted by the WLAN. The mobile terminal calculates a modified signal level according to a first compensation value and the WLAN signal level and sends the modified signal level and the WWAN signal level to the control center. If the modified signal level is smaller than a first threshold and the WWAN signal level is greater than a second threshold, the control center sends a switch command to the mobile terminal and the mobile terminal switches the connection from the WLAN to the WWAN. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002668 | SERVICE IN WLAN INTER-WORKING, ADDRESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AND METHOD - The present invention provides a solution to the mobile terminal address management in the WLAN inter-working. By using the access control framework, the mobile terminal could obtain the address, and setup the tunnel together with the granting of service access. The management process would be shielded by the inherent encryption and protection of the access control process, and thus does not need extra security setup procedures to be performed. The invention also provides a method for the terminal to obtain address that binds to the session, using a fine grain service authorization procedure. The terminal could maintain multiple addresses when accessing multiple parallel sessions. The address management is also integrated with the policy control mechanisms. The policy control would provide means for the terminal and its home network to configure the WLAN when necessary after an address alternation. QoS, or tunnelling information would be modified and provisioned according to the new status using channels available in the existing policy control procedures. By this, a smooth address transition in the roaming time could be achieved, and QoS interruption could be minimized. | 01-07-2010 |
20100008336 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION OF RF MODULE ACTIVITIES - An apparatus and method for synchronizing RF activities comprising receiving a notification relating to transmission activities; determining at least one of a plurality of RF modules to relay the notification; and relaying the notification to at least one of the plurality of RF modules. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008337 | METHOD PROVIDING POSITIONING AND NAVIGATION INSIDE LARGE BUILDINGS - Positioning and/or navigation of an electronic device within a building when GPS signals are unavailable is provided. The electronic device scans for available Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Access Points (APs) upon, e.g., entering a building. The electronic device detects a signal (e.g., beacon) from at least one available WLAN AP, whereupon the electronic device retrieves the indoor location of the available WLAN AP. The location information can be directly downloaded from the WLAN AP while in state-1 via, e.g., a Native Query Protocol which includes an extension to currently defined Native Query info elements that returns location information. Alternatively, the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the WLAN AP can be read from the beacon signal, which is then used to retrieve the location of the WLAN AP from an associated database. Additionally, various embodiments may be implemented with or via a mapping application or service, where the mapping application is able to display any floor's floor plan of a building and determine/obtain the position of the electronic device inside the building relative to the floor plan. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008338 | HIGH TRANSMISSION POWER USING SHARED BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK FRONT END MODULE - A novel and useful system for providing high transmission power using a shared Bluetooth and Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) front end module (FEM). A single power amplifier in the front end module is shared between the WLAN and Bluetooth radio cores, thus providing a high power transmission option (Bluetooth class 1) for the Bluetooth core. Interface circuitry in the FEM couple either the WLAN TX output or the Bluetooth TX output to the input of the power amplifier and couple the output of the power amplifier to the external antenna. In the receive direction, the interface circuitry steers the antenna input to the respective WLAN or Bluetooth receivers in accordance with one or more control signals. Alternatively, a switch in the WLAN/Bluetooth radio chip functions to switch the Bluetooth TX output to a conventional FEM, thereby allowing the FEM power amplifier to be shared between the WLAN and Bluetooth radio cores. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008339 | DUAL MODE PHONE AND METHOD FOR ACTING AS AN ACCESS POINT - A dual mode phone includes a wireless wide area network (WWAN) antenna, a WWAN module, a wireless local area network (WLAN) antenna, a WLAN module, and a processing module. The WLAN module includes a client mode sub-module, an access point (AP) mode sub-module, and a switch sub-module. The switch sub-module selectively enables the client mode sub-module or the AP mode sub-module according to a WLAN mode selection instruction. The client mode sub-module triggers the dual mode phone to enter a WLAN client mode when enabled. The AP mode sub-module triggers the dual mode phone to enter a WLAN AP mode to provide network access services to other WLAN clients when enabled. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008340 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING AN ORIGINAL CALL ANCHORING IN VOICE CALL CONTINUITY SERVICE - The present invention offers a system and method for implementing an original call anchoring in voice call continuity service, and the system comprises the MSC/VLR, HLR, MGCF and VCC application server. A UE originates a call to the MSC/VLR in the CS domain, and the MSC/VLR sends the original request ORREQ message to the HLR, and then the HLR determines whether the UE has VCC service or not, if yes, it sends the message to the VCC application server which saves the information such as the called party number and returns the VCC application server number to the HLR after receiving the message sent by the HLR, and the HLR returns the VCC application server number back to the MSC/VLR through ORREQ response message; the MSC/VLR sends initial address message (IAM) including the VCC application server number to the MGCF, and the MGCF sends the INVITE message to the VCC application server number after it receives the IAM; the VCC application server obtains the called number and proceeds to the next-step call after it receives the INVITE message. The present invention achieves anchoring a call in the CS domain even if there is no intelligent network in the CS domain. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008341 | PAGING AND POWER MANAGEMENT SCHEMES FOR LOCAL NETWORK ACCESS - Paging and power consumption are managed in conjunction with providing local breakout in a wireless wide area network. In some aspects, if a packet destined for an access terminal is received at an access point that provides local breakout, the access point may inform the network so that the network will cause the access point to page the access terminal. Alternatively, in some aspects an access point that provides local breakout may maintain idle context of the access terminal, whereby the access point may autonomously page the access terminal (i.e., without involving the core network). In some aspects local breakout traffic is filtered at an access point to reduce the number of pages or packets sent to an access terminal. In some aspects an indication of a packet type is provided with a page message to enable an access terminal to determine whether to receive the packet. In some aspects a local link interface may be selectively disabled or enabled to limit traffic at an access terminal. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008342 | OPTIMIZING IEEE 802.11 FOR TCIP/IP DATA TRANSFER - Systems and methods are described for increasing data transfer efficiency between networks. The invention being particularly well suited when establishing connectivity between wireless networks, such as based on IEEE 802 standards, and traditionally wired network protocols (often referred to as internet protocols), such as TCP/IP and UDP. The invention provides formatting of network packets and then processing of network packets according to one or more optimization processes. One optimization process comprises performing partial packet retransmissions to increase network efficiency, especially in high bit error rate networks such as wireless networks. Another optimization process comprises suppressing unnecessary packet acknowledgements, therein reducing burst traffic and saving substantial overhead in lossy networks. Additional aspects of the invention provide further benefits. The invention may be implemented within the MAC layer of a network interface, in particular within wireless network interfaces which are being increasingly utilized for both home and office short range interconnectivity. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008343 | Coverage Enhancement Using Dynamic Antennas and Virtual Access Points - Mechanisms for wireless local area network coverage enhancement using dynamic antennas are provided. The dynamic antennas may be used, for example, in an antenna apparatus of an access point. The access point maps a plurality of virtual access points (VAPs), each VAP corresponding to at least one of a plurality of directional antenna patterns of the antenna apparatus. The processor transmits broadcast communication on each of the VAPs a further distance from the access point as compared to transmitting on an omnidirectional antenna pattern of the antenna apparatus. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008344 | SELF-CONFIGURABLE WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK NODE - In a wireless local area network including an access controller (AC) and an access points (AP), the AC transmits a functionality inquiry to the AP. Upon receiving the inquiry, the AP transmits a query response including the functional capabilities of the AP. The AC then generates a map of the functional capabilities present in the network based on the inquiry response. Conflicting or redundant functional capabilities are identified and are disabled, enabled, or reconfigured by instructions from the AC. The AC may selectively enable and/or disable functional capabilities at nodes in the network to provide a more balanced load on the network, and to provide for load sharing by allocating functionalities between and among network nodes having common functional capabilities to satisfy a variety of situations encountered in the network. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008345 | DISTRIBUTED VOICE NETWORK - A method and apparatus that receives an IP packet and encapsulates the packet with an IP header. Further, time-domain multiplexed voice data is received and converted into VoIP packets. Still further, Signaling System 7 (SS7) compliant signals are decoded. The decoded SS7 signals are received and encapsulated prior to transmission to a telephony device. | 01-14-2010 |
20100014491 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REINFORCING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY WITHIN WIRELESS NETWORK GROUP - A method and system is provided to reinforce wireless communication capabilities between multiple network nodes of an wireless network group. The method and system first detects a wireless transmission capability between a first network node and a second network node. When the wireless transmission capability is lower than a threshold value, one set of reinforcing coordinates will be derived by introducing the first geographic information and the second geographic information. Afterwards, move a third network node to a position with the set of reinforcing coordinates to establish an alternative wireless transmission route between the first network note and second network node. Therefore, when an original wireless transmission route between any two network nodes is abnormal, the alternative wireless transmission route will be available in time and reduce the risks of losing transmission signals. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014492 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINISTIC LATENCY-CONTROLLED COMMUNICATIONS IN PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS - A method includes obtaining a data message having data associated with a process system and mapping the data message to one of multiple classifications. The method also includes wirelessly transmitting the data message, where a Quality of Service (QoS) associated with the transmission is based on the mapping. Mapping the data message could include identifying a type associated with the data message and mapping the data message based on the identified type. The type may include a publish message type, an alert message type, or a management message type. The publish message type could be mapped to an Unsolicited Grant Service (UGS) class, the alert message type could be mapped to a real-time Polling Service (rtPS) class, and the management message type could be mapped to a Best Effort (BE) or non-real-time Polling Service (nrtPS) class. A WiMAX standard could be used to transmit the message, and a WiMAX or WiFi standard could be used to obtain the message. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014493 | NETWORK FOR WIRELESS DATA TRANSMISSION - A wireless data transmission network, the mode of operation of which is determined by a protocol stack according to the OSI reference model in addition to existing standards, is disclosed. In order to enable application-specific modifications during the transmission of data without having to dispense with or infringe upon the respective standard, an interoperability layer is inserted in the protocol stack between the security layer that follows the bit transmission layer and the additional protocol layers based thereon. The additional protocol layers are based on the interoperability layer with, for example, various interfaces in parallel individual stacks. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014494 | ENTERPRISE MOBILE NETWORK FOR PROVIDING CELLULAR WIRELESS SERVICE USING LICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND THE SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL - Support for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) devices is provided in an enterprise mobile network that provides wireless service within a coverage area associated with an enterprise using licensed radio frequency spectrum. In various embodiments, support SIP devices is provided by, for example, incorporating SIP user agent in a mobile switching subsystem or in a base station subsystem or by incorporating SIP server functionality into a mobile switching subsystem. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014495 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ITS METHOD, AND DEVICE AND PROGRAM USED FOR SAME - Wireless LAN base station devices ( | 01-21-2010 |
20100014496 | NODE PLACEMENT METHOD WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK, SUCH AS A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The disclosure includes a method of and associated system for placing nodes in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The method includes receiving user-specified parameters regarding the network. The parameters can include a layout of a building or other space, and requirements for the WLAN. An algorithm then employs these parameters to automatically create and optimized layout of multiple wireless access points for the WLAN. The method can display the layout and provide various types of information to the user. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014497 | SELECTIVELY RESTRICING PARTICIPATION IN COMMUNICATION SESSIONS AT A COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments are directed to determining whether to permit a server-arbitrated communication session at a wireless communications device within a wireless communications system. The wireless communications device receives a request to participate in the server-arbitrated communication session. The wireless communications device obtains information related to a current location of the wireless communications device. The wireless communications device determines whether the obtained information satisfies one or more conditions of restriction and/or permission for participation of the wireless communication device in server-arbitrated communication session. The wireless communications device selectively restricts itself from participating in the server-arbitrated communication session based on this determination. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014498 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIDE BANDWIDTH MIXED-MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A network device for implementing high-rate greenfield transmission in a mixed mode frame structure. The network device is configured to transmit a mixed mode frame on two adjacent channels. The mixed mode frame comprises at least two backward compatible portions of a first frequency and a greenfield portion of a second frequency. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014499 | Probabilistic Location Prediction for a Mobile Station - A probabilistic prediction is made of the location of a wireless-enabled mobile station in a wireless local area network. The prediction includes calculating a vector representing movement of the mobile station through a space in which two or more access points of the network are located, and determining a region surrounding the vector in which the mobile station has at least a given probability to be located within a certain period of time. | 01-21-2010 |
20100020773 | FLOW CONTROL TECHNIQUES FOR CO-LOCALIZED WLAN AND BLUETOOTH - Flow control techniques for co-localized wireless local area network (WLAN) and Bluetooth (BT) allowing efficient sharing of radio medium are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes deriving an available medium time (T | 01-28-2010 |
20100020774 | INTERACTIVE WiFi CONNECTIVITY FOR MOVING VEHICLES - Systems and methods are provided to enable high-performance Internet access on board moving vehicles using WiFi data communication protocols. In an illustrative implementation, an exemplary wireless data communications environment comprises a ViFi module, an instruction set comprising at least one instruction set to process data for wireless communication between a cooperating component onboard a moving vehicle and other cooperating wireless components, and one or more wide-area wireless communications links. In an illustrative operation, the ViFi module can perform one or more wireless communications techniques to exploit macro-diversity and opportunistic receptions by cooperating WiFi base stations to minimize disruptions for mobile clients. The exemplary ViFi module can communicate data to and from one or more cooperating WiFI base stations such that the one or more base stations can operatively opportunistically overhear a packet, and can probabilistically relay the packet to the intended next hop. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020775 | Mobile Communication Method and Mobile Terminal - A mobile communication method, in which communication is performed using the 3G1X protocol prescribing that mobile terminal MS receives a paging message from a 1x base station through an EV-DO base station, includes the steps of: receiving, at the mobile terminal MS, the paging message through the EV-DO base station BS# | 01-28-2010 |
20100020776 | Wireless network-based location approximation - The invention pertains to location approximation of devices, e.g., wireless access points and client devices in a wireless network. Location estimates may be obtained by observation/analysis of packets transmitted or received by the access point. For instance, data rate information associated with a packet is used to approximate the distance between a client device and the access point. This may be coupled with known positioning information to arrive at an approximate location for the access point. Confidence information and metrics about whether a device is an access point and the location of that device may also be determined. Accuracy of the location determination may be affected by factors including propagation and environmental factors, transmit power, antenna gain and diversity, etc. A location information database of access points may employ measurements from various devices over time. Such information may identify the location of client devices and provide location-based services to them. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020777 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A management apparatus transmits a registration message to a base station when executing a wireless parameter setting sequence. The base station registers the management apparatus upon the detection of the message. This makes it possible to decrease unwanted communication traffic, and to reduce the time taken to perform the wireless parameter setting processing. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020778 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE - A communication method includes the steps of: establishing a session with one or two or more other communication terminals according to a set content before it is changed in a case where a change request for own set information about a radio communication is received; notifying a set content to be changed to the one or two or more other communication terminals with which the session is established; and changing the own set information from the set content before it is changed to the set content to be changed. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020779 | DATA ROUTING THROUGH LOCAL NETWORK CONNECTED TO A BASE STATION - A base station routes data between a wireless communication device and a local device through a local network. When a route-local indicator is received from the wireless communication device, the base station routes data through the local network to the local device without routing the data through a cellular network. Accordingly, the physical path of the data includes the base station and the local network and does not include cellular equipment other than the base station. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020780 | PSEUDO-RESPONSE FRAME COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PSEUDO-RESPONSE FRAME COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PSEUDO-RESPONSE FRAME TRANSMITTING DEVICE - A great delay in communication and deterioration in quality are avoided from occurring. | 01-28-2010 |
20100027515 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING CONNECTIVITY OF A MOVING OBJECT TO AN EXTERNAL NETWORK - A method and a system for providing connectivity of a moving object to a external network. The method and system relate to offering high speed Internet access to moving objects that utilize electricity for power and which are powered by a power line. Exemplary applications include trains, trams or streetcars. The system and method make use of at least two stationary connection points connected to the external network and the power line of the moving object. By using the power line as a carrier in order to transfer data from the external network to the moving object and/or from the moving object to the external network and selecting one stationary connection point of the stationary connection points depending on the current position of the moving object in order to route the data to be transferred over the selected stationary connection point, a simple and reliable network connection between the moving object and the external network may be achieved. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027516 | WIRELESS SWITCH WITH VIRTUAL WIRELESS SWITCH MODULES - A wireless switch device is provided that includes a first wired Ethernet interface and a second wired Ethernet interface, and a plurality of virtual wireless switch modules (VWSMs) implemented within the wireless switch device. The VWSMs include a first VWSM that is coupled to a first access port via the first wired Ethernet interface that is allocated to the first VWSM, and a second VWSM that is coupled to a second access port via the second wired Ethernet interface that is allocated to the second VWSM. The first VWSM can be control and manage the first access port, and the second VWSM can control and manage the second access port. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027517 | METHOD FOR MULTI-BAND COMMUNICATION ROUTING WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operation of a node for multi-band communication routing within a wireless communication system comprises communicating a communication session on a default route within an identified quality of service objective on a first frequency band; broadcasting, on a second frequency band, one or more route discovery messages at each of a plurality of sets of transmission variables; storing one or more alternate route table entries in a route table, wherein each of the one or more alternate route table entries are indexed by each of the plurality of sets of transmission variables that are at least within the quality of service objective; selecting a stored alternate route that is at least within the quality of service objective of the communication session on the second frequency band; and switching the communication session to operate using the transmission variables related to the selected alternate route. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027518 | REAL-TIME VISUALIZATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK STATUS - Status of a wireless network is visualized in real-time by collecting data from the network, including locations of the wireless network nodes, and displaying this information in a geographical information service (GIS) such as Google Earth. Node information such as node status may be gathered from nodes by a display node, or may be gathered and maintained by a node controller. Unity scaled antenna models may be used to display node coverage. Updates to network status may be polled by the display node, or by the network controller and pushed to the display node. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027519 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCANNING IN WLAN - The embodiments disclose a method for scanning in a radio communication system, in particular in a WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network), including transmitting by a MS on all channels a probe message containing the IP address of the original AP of the MS and an MAC address of the MS; switching to the original channel; transmitting a response inquiry message to the original AP; and receiving a probe response message within a predetermined period, wherein, if the AP of the probe message received on the channel is not the original AP, then the AP transmits the probe response message containing the MAC address to the original AP according to the IP address; and the original AP buffers the probe response message received, and transmits the probe response message to the MS according to the MAC address after the response inquiry message sent by the MS has been received. The embodiments further disclose a scanning system in a WLAN. By using the method and system, not only the time delay during the scanning is reduced, but also the network security is improved and the difficulty for realization is decreased. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027520 | Transmission terminal, reception terminal, and information distribution system - A transmission terminal includes an information generation unit, a transmission unit, a delivery management unit, and a reception unit. The information generation unit generates information that is to be transmitted to a destination reception terminal. The transmission unit transmits information that the information generation unit has generated. The delivery management unit manages transmission of information. The reception unit receives information that the destination reception terminal transmits. Furthermore, the information generation unit generates or receives transmission information that is to be transmitted to the destination reception terminal and generates redundant information for the destination reception terminal to restore the transmission information. The delivery management unit causes the information generation unit to generate, and causes the transmission unit to retransmit, the redundant information when the reception unit has not received a successful reception reply from the destination reception terminal. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027521 | INTRA-PREMISES CONTENT AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - System(s) and method(s) are provided to route traffic and signaling between a set of networked femto access points (APs) and devices served there from, and enable management of content and equipment that is part of a network functionally coupled to the set of networked femto APs. Networked equipment spans a network deployed within the coverage area spanned by the set of femto APs. A routing platform functionally couples the networked equipment and the femto AP to enable content manipulation amongst a mobile device and the equipment. Routing platform also affords remote control of the networked equipment. Delivery of advertisement and monetary incentive(s) can be provided through the routing platform to the equipment. Routing platform further provides security features related to operation of specific equipment and wireless services supplied via the routing platform. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027522 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication system capable of transmitting, at a high speed, information requested by a wireless communication terminal to the wireless communication terminal which moves through a spot wireless area at a high speed. In a wireless base station | 02-04-2010 |
20100034177 | TWO-TIER RANDOM BACKOFF AND COMBINED RANDOM BACKOFF AND TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for two-tier backoff interval randomization are presented. An initial message transmission can have both a chip level and an access cycle duration level backoff applied to avoid potential collisions. Additionally, improved transmit power calculations and the random backoff can be combined to further improve the probability of a successful message reception and decoding. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034178 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITY-BASED ADOPTION OF AN ACCESS DEVICE - Apparatus and methods are provided for priority-based adoption of access devices coupled to a wireless switch. A method comprises maintaining a respective adoption priority for each of a plurality of access devices adopted by the wireless switch. The method further comprises receiving, in response to a disconnection event, an adoption request from a first access device coupled to the wireless switch, wherein the first access device has an adoption priority. The method further comprises analyzing the adoption priority for the first access device, and responding to the adoption request in a manner that is influenced by the analysis. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034179 | Legacy mobile station support on sip-based Femto device - A Femto network capable of relaying wireless communications is provided. The Femto network includes a Femto Access Point (FAP) and an MSC Femto Interworking Function (MFIF). The FAP and the MFIF each include a modified XML schema. The FAP modified XML schema is configured to include subscriber station identification information in a Presence Information Data Format Location (PIDF-LO) signal. The FAP is configured to transmit said the PIDF-LO via session initiation protocol. The MFIF XML schema is configured to interpret the PIDF-LO signal and extract the subscriber station identification information from said PIDF-LO signal. The MFIF is configured to send said messages and said subscriber station information to a mobile switching center (MSC). | 02-11-2010 |
20100034180 | Apparatus And Method For Network Access Device Localization On A Wireless Network - According to an example embodiment, a method for wireless communication includes establishing a communication session between a base station associated with a wireless network and a network access device associated with a separate communications network. The network access device provides the base station access to the communications network. The method further includes receiving location information from the network access device. The location information describes the location of the network access device. The network device receives the location information from a server on the communications network. In addition, the method includes providing a service to at least one wireless device utilizing the location information. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034181 | BASE STATION AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A base station forms a communication area enabling communication with a mobile communication network through a local network that includes the base station. The base station includes a monitoring unit that monitors an address for data communication with the mobile communication network and assigned to a mobile terminal in the communication area; a storage unit that stores combination information indicating a combination of the address monitored and identification information of the mobile terminal; a receiving unit that receives, from a communication terminal in the local network, data having the identification information; a comparing unit that compares the combination information with a combination of a destination address of the data and the identification information in the data; and a transmitting unit that transmits the data to the mobile terminal if the combination and the combination information coincide, and performs error processing if the combination and the combination information do not coincide. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034182 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - When a wireless communication apparatus transmits a data frame requesting an ACK frame, it is expected that a receiver station will transmit the ACK frame. A preamble analyzer analyzes whether or not a preamble pattern added to the header of a received frame exists from the time it is expected that the ACK frame will be received. When a desired preamble pattern is detected, the preamble analyzer supplies instructions to start an operation of demodulating a reception signal to a demodulator via a controller. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034183 | Flexible WLAN/WPAN system with high throughput - Flexible WLAN/WPAN system with high throughput. A medium access controller (MAC), that is capable to be implemented within a communication device, is operative in accordance with any one of a number of capability sets, based on which capability set is enabled when implemented within a particular communication device. Each respective capability set directs operation of the MAC in accordance with a corresponding set of operational parameters. The enabling of one of the capability sets may be based upon one or more of a type of physical layer transceiver (PHY) with which the MAC interfaces (e.g., within the communication device), a communication protocol by which the apparatus communicates with a communication network, and/or other considerations. The MAC can include an optimization module therein that is operative to adjust one or more operational parameters based on a change of an operational condition of the communication network with which the communication device communicates. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034184 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MAIN COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND AUXILIARY COMMUNICATION DEVICE OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system comprises a main communication device including a first communication unit executing wireless communication by a first method (mainly for voice data communication) and a second communication unit executing wireless communication by a second method (for communication of data other than voice data at a higher transfer rate) and an auxiliary communication device (operating on a secondary battery) including first and second auxiliary communication units executing wireless communication with the first and second communication units by the first and second methods, respectively. Whether communication of data (except voice data) should be executed by the first method or by the second method is determined based on the amount of the data. When the first method is selected, the data is segmented in prescribed data units and the communication of the segmented data is executed by the first communication unit and the first auxiliary communication unit by the first method. | 02-11-2010 |
20100040029 | Apparatus, system, and method for obtaining local connectivity settings - An apparatus, system, and method for a communication network that includes a mobile device, a target device, and a connection settings server. The mobile device is configured to transmit a request for device-to-device connection settings data to the connection settings server, the connection settings server is configured to receive the request, determine appropriate device-to-device connection settings data, and transmit the appropriate device-to-device connection settings data to the mobile device, the mobile device is further configured to receive the appropriate device-to-device connection settings data and establish a device-to-device connection with the target device, wherein the establishing of the device-to-device connection is facilitated by the device-to-device connection settings data. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040030 | Communication device, communication system, communication method and communication program - The object is to prevent a third party from specifying a condition of data communication executed by a radio terminal in a radio network using a radio communication device easily accessible to anyone such as WLAN. The radio base station | 02-18-2010 |
20100040031 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESSLY DISTRIBUTING MULTIPLEX SIGNAL COMPRISING MULTIMEDIA DATA OVER A LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Described herein are various techniques for gathering multimedia data from one or more sources and transmiting that data over a local network to one or more devices, thereby providing ubiquitous multimedia across the network. In one configuration, a device comprising a server receives multimedia data from one or more devices on a local network, creates a multiplex signal from the various multimedia data received from the devices, and wirelessly transmits the multiplex signal over the local network. The server is further configured wherein the multiplex signal comprises a plurality of logical channels, with at least one of the logical channels representing multimedia data received from one of the devices on the network. By then tuning into one or more of the logical channels of the transmitted multiplex signal, a device on the local network can present to a user multimedia data that originates from or resides on another device on the network. According to other configurations, the multiplex signal contains not only multimedia data retrieved from devices on a local network, but can also include multimedia data that originated from sources on a wide area network, such as the Internet or a cellular telephone network. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040032 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING INTER-PICONET MULTI-HOP MESH COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS THEREOF - In the environment of a wireless personal area network (WPAN) with a plurality of piconets, to allow a tree-based routing service and an optimized routing service through repeatedly building parent-child piconets, an inter-piconet mesh communication device and method for providing a multi-hop communication function among a plurality of piconets is provided by defining a mesh sublayer between a frame convergence sublayer and a MAC sublayer and providing a mesh data service to the frame convergence sublayer through a mesh service access point, defining a mesh sublayer management entity between a device management entity and a MAC sublayer management entity and providing a mesh management service to a device management entity through a mesh sublayer management entity service access point. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040033 | REVERSE DIRECTION GRANT (RDG) FOR WIRELESS NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES SUBJECT TO COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE - In accordance with at least some embodiments, a system includes an access point and a station in communication with the access point. The station has at least two network technology subsystems subject to coexistence interference. The station selectively uses reverse direction grant (RDG) for communications by network technology subsystems subject to coexistence interference. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046485 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE CHANNEL ACCESS AND NAV RECOVERY - An apparatus and method for communications are disclosed. The apparatus may include a processing system configured to send data to a node on a first channel and receive an acknowledgement to the data from the node, the processing system being further configured to determine whether a second channel is available from information contained in the acknowledgement. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046486 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - It is an object of the present invention to provide a wireless communication system which can allow a wireless LAN terminal device ( | 02-25-2010 |
20100046487 | MULTICHANNEL ARCHITECTURE FOR HIGH THROUGHPUT MODEMS - An apparatus for wireless communications is disclosed herein that is configured to have a plurality of transceivers arranged to process a plurality of spatial streams, wherein each of the plurality of transceivers is configured to operate asynchronously and simultaneously with other transceivers of the plurality of transceivers. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046488 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING A SCHEDULED LEGACY PROTECTION FRAME - A method for informing a nearby device of an upcoming data transmission is described. A scheduled time is obtained. A legacy protection frame is sent within a fixed time period. The legacy protection frame can be decoded by the nearby device. A long range (LR) data transmission may be sent after the fixed time period. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046489 | Enhanced E911 network access for a call center using session initiation protocol (SIP) messaging - A switched emergency call (e.g., a 911 call, an alarm company call) forwarded by a telematics call center is converted into a session initiation protocol (SIP) packetized phone call at the call center, and routed over an IP network, for presentation to an emergency services gateway, which connects to a selective router via dedicated circuits, gaining full access to the Enhanced 911 network. This provides a PSAP receiving a call from a telematics call center or other call center with all features available in an Enhanced 911 network, e.g., callback number of the 911 caller, and location of the 911 caller. Location of the caller is provided using a VoIP positioning center (VPC), queried from the call center. In this way, the switched emergency call is converted into a SIP packetized phone call and routed without further passage through the public switched telephone network (PSTN). | 02-25-2010 |
20100046490 | INTELLIGENT PICO-CELL FOR TRANSPORT OF WIRELESS DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS OVER WIRELINE NETWORKS - In one embodiment a pico cell may be used to detect a presence of a wireless device and receive a wireless signal from the wireless device. The wireless signal may then be converted from a protocol used by the wireless device to a converted signal in a protocol suitable for use with a broadband connection. The converted signal may then be transmitted over the broadband connection. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054217 | REGISTRATION OF MULTIPLE CARE-OF-ADDRESSES - Systems, methods, devices and software are described which provide for bulk registration of care-of-addresses (CoAs) associated with mobility signaling in communication networks. A mobile node transmits a bulk CoA registration message towards a correspondent node. The correspondent node receives the bulk CoA message, generates tokens associated with the CoAs and transmits the tokens back toward the mobile node. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054218 | Method and System for Detecting Broadcast Receivers and Transitioning to Selective Communications - A method and a device for detecting the presence of broadcast receivers, such as mobile communication devices, within a communication network and transitioning to selective communications to one or more of the receivers. The method including sending a broadcast query to a plurality of mobile units (“MUs”), receiving at least one response from each at least one of the MUs, each of the responses specifying whether each of the at least one MU that can receive a broadcast transmission, and indicating to a user whether any of the MUs responded to the broadcast query. Described is a further method including receiving a broadcast transmission from an MU, sending a request to the MU to conduct a private communication session, and conducting the private communication session with the MU. Described is a device including means for determining whether further devices can receive a broadcast transmission from the device, and means for transitioning from a broadcast communication session to a private communication session. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054219 | Private Access Point Beacon Signals In Wireless Networks - This patent application relates to private access point beacon signals in wireless networks. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054220 | NETWORK-INITIATED IMS REGISTRATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method and a system for the network-initiated IMS registration of a telecommunication terminal. According to said method, the network transmits a message having specific characteristics to the terminal via an existing communication link, and the terminal recognizes said message as an IMS registration request based on the characteristics of the message end subsequently sends a registration message to the network to register with the IMS. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054221 | ACCESS POINT, MOBILE STATION, AND METHOD FOR DETECTING ATTACKS THEREON - A mobile station (STA) communicates with a WLAN device over a communication system includes a storage system, at least one processor, a detection module, an address determination module, a transmission module, and a response module. The STA detects a MAC management protocol data unit (MMPDU) over the communication system, determines whether the MMPDU comprises a spurious data frame posing as the STA to the WLAN device, based at least partly on a comparison of a source address and a destination address of the MMPDU with network addresses of the STA and the WLAN device, respectively, transmits a request data frame having a highest priority in a current connection state to the WLAN device, and determines whether the WLAN device has been attacked based on whether a response data frame is received from the WLAN device. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054222 | Gateway Selection Mechanism - An arrangement and method in a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) for selecting a gateway to connect a User Equipment (UE) to a home PLMN when the UE is located in an access network connected to a visited PLMN. The arrangement receives a first Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), which includes an identity of the UE user. Based on the identity of the user and knowledge of the visited PLMN, the arrangement selects whether the UE should establish a connection only to a gateway in the home PLMN, only to a gateway in the visited PLMN, or both. The arrangement transmits to the UE, an appropriate address for the home PLMN gateway, the visited PLMN gateway, or both depending on the selection. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054223 | Physical Layer Data Unit Format - In a wireless communication system wherein communication devices exchange information utilizing data units that conform to a first format, a beamforming training (BFT) data unit that conforms to a second format is transmitted, wherein a length of the BFT data unit is shorter than lengths supported by the first format, wherein the BFT data unit is for transmitting PHY beamforming training information. Information to indicate the BFT data unit conforms to the second format is transmitted to a receiving device. The BFT data unit is generated according to the second format, wherein the BFT data unit includes BFT information elements. The BFT data unit is then transmitted to the receiving device. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054224 | COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM FOR WIRELESS DEVICES OR THE LIKE - Briefly, in accordance with one embodiment of the invention, a wireless terminal may include an application subsystem and a communication subsystem. The communication subsystem in one embodiment may enable a virtual direct interface to a remote network to be presented to the application subsystem via a wireless communication system air link interface. The communication subsystem may allow applications of the application subsystem to be independent of any particular radio technology or network implementation of a wireless communication system air link interface. Once a session is established between the communication subsystem and the wireless communication system air link interface, the application subsystem may gain access to the remote network through the communication subsystem via a transport interface. | 03-04-2010 |
20100061349 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - A wireless access point is provided for transmitting radio signals that has isolators positioned about the perimeter of the wireless access point dividing the perimeter of the wireless access point into segments and reflector plates positioned within each segment for directing the transmission of the radio signals within each segment. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061350 | MULTI-CHANNEL MESH NODES EMPLOYING STACKED RESPONSES - Rather than using a large number of transceivers (transmitter/receiver pairs) operating in parallel, Access Points with multiple channels are used to aggregate, or stack, transmitted response communications, e.g., transmitting multiple acknowledgements (ACKs) in a single packet to one or more sources of received packets. The method includes sending on a plurality of channels, by each of a plurality of respective first nodes, a communication to a second node, receiving on the plurality of channels, by the second node, the communication from each of the plurality of first nodes and sending, by the second node, a transmission that contains a response to each communication that was successfully received from each of the plurality of first nodes. The response to each of the plurality of first nodes is part of a single message sent by the second node. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061351 | MULTI-COEXISTENCE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED ON INTERFERENCE-AWARE ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE SAME - A multi-coexistence communication technology is provided. A multi-coexistence communication system based on an interference-aware environment and a method for operating the same can remove interference detected using an interference temperature limit from at least one transmission signal and transmit the signal to a main/sub communication terminal during data communication on a wired/wireless communication network formed of a main base station, a sub base station, the main communication terminal, and the sub communication terminal, thereby smoothly providing a high-speed seamless data transmission service based on a multi-coexistence communication environment where a distributed small-scale network requiring a low transmission rate, a medium-scale network for providing various wireless communication services, and a large-scale broadcasting network requiring a high transmission rate and high quality coexist, and preventing congestion due to increased demand for frequency resources. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061352 | METHOD FOR ROUTING TRAFFIC IN A LOCAL MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for routing VoIP traffic in a local mobile communication network includes selecting a path among a set of possible paths between two nodes of the network based on the number of hops and the transmission time of a reference voice packet along the possible paths, the transmission time along each path being a function of the transmission rates associated with the links composing the path. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061353 | ULTRA WIDEBAND ETHERNET BRIDGING APPARATUS AND METHOD - Provided is an ultra wideband (UWB) Ethernet bridging apparatus and method. The UWB Ethernet bridging apparatus differentiates control frames and data frames from one another and transmits the differentiated frames to the different internal path. A processor processes the control frames, and the data frame is processed by using separate hardware so that the UWB Ethernet bridging apparatus can be miniaturized/simplified by using a small-sized embedded processor that is cheap and has low performance. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061354 | OFFSET TIME FOR RANGING REQUEST MESSAGES - Various example embodiments are disclosed. According to an example embodiment, a method may include sending, by a base station in a wireless network, a paging message to a mobile station, the paging message identifying the mobile station. The method may also include receiving, at an offset time after the sending the paging message, a ranging request message from the mobile station, the offset time being based at least in part on an identifier of the mobile station. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061355 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DETERMINATION METHOD - A communication terminal comprising: a determination unit which determines whether or not the communication terminal is able to connect to a first external terminal using a wireless communication, based on a communication condition of wired or wireless communication with a second external terminal which is different from the first external terminal, when the communication terminal receives a connection request from the first external terminal. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061356 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERFERENCE REDUCTION THROUGH PROXIMITY BASED TRANSMISSION MODE CHANGE - A method for transmission mode change in a telecommunication network, said network having a public network comprising at least one public base station (NB) covering a public cell and a private network comprising at least one private base station (PBS) covering a private cell, wherein said at least one private base station has limited access rights for User Equipment (UEs) in the private network, and where said UEs are able to also communicate with the public network, comprising the step of: performing a private base station transmission mode change when the private base station is in an interference reduction transmission mode to an active transmission mode when a UE with access right to said private base station is detected in proximity of said private base station, where a detection of said proximity is based on information being specific for said UE and its relation to said private base station. The disclosure also relates to a telecommunication system. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061357 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication system for carrying out data communication among a plurality of communication stations is disclosed in which a first communication station for transmitting to other communication stations a Request To Send (RTS) signal for requesting a transmission upon the start of the data transmission; and a plurality of second communication stations transmitting to other communication stations a Clear To Send (CTS) signal for notifying the completion of preparing the reception, wherein the first communication station transmits the RTS signal describing at least each of addresses the second communication stations that are desired to receive the data, and receives a plurality of CTS signals transmitted from each of the second communication stations in order to increase communication capacity. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061358 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication system for carrying out data communication among a plurality of communication stations is disclosed in which a first communication station for transmitting to other communication stations a Request To Send (RTS) signal for requesting a transmission upon the start of the data transmission; and a plurality of second communication stations transmitting to other communication stations a Clear To Send (CTS) signal for notifying the completion of preparing the reception, wherein the first communication station transmits the RTS signal describing at least each of addresses the second communication stations that are desired to receive the data, and receives a plurality of CTS signals transmitted from each of the second communication stations in order to increase communication capacity. | 03-11-2010 |
20100067503 | Method for the Transmission of Ethernet Transmission Protocol-Based Data Packets Between at Least One Mobile Communication Unit and a Communication System - In order to transmit Ethernet transmission protocol-based data packets between at least one mobile communication unit and a communication system via generic route encapsulation tunneling established between a home agent unit and a foreign agent unit, at least one GRE key provided for establishing generic route encapsulation tunneling is linked to the media access control address assigned to the mobile communication unit. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067504 | System and method for exposing malicious clients in wireless access networks - Malicious clients within a wireless access network are identified using bait traffic transmitted between a collaborating wireless access point and a collaborating client. The bait traffic entices a malicious client to transmit malicious traffic towards the collaborating wireless access point. Upon receiving the malicious traffic, the collaborating wireless access point is able to identify the malicious client and report the presence of the malicious client within the wireless access network. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067505 | Performance of a Wireless Communication System - The invention relates to a device to be used in a wireless communication system with CSMA-based MAC, comprising means for transmitting at least a first and a second RTS message and at least a first and a second data packet on a transmission medium, and a spatially selective antenna. It is further proposed that said device uses a distributed antenna that combines the antenna elements of several devices and that said device observers the transmissions of other devices, analyzes the observed transmissions for transmission patterns and adapts its own transmissions to said detected transmission patterns. The invention further relates to a system, a method and a computer program to be used in a wireless communication system. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067506 | WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network ( | 03-18-2010 |
20100067507 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING A SECOND RECEIVER TO ESTABLISH TIME AND FREQUENCY - Apparatus and methods for synchronizing a network element (e.g. access points, femtocells, etc.) to a master network (such as a cellular network) to provide accurate frequency and/or time references for their internal systems. In one embodiment, the network element utilizes a dedicated receiver (or transceiver) to receive timing information from the master network. The implementation of the dedicated receiver is advantageous for cost and simplicity reasons. Furthermore, the timing or frequency information, as received from the master network, is used to correct the network element's internal timing. In addition, the network element's internal timing can operate in open-loop mode, if no master network can be found, thereby allowing for the device to continue providing service to network users. Additionally, a dedicated receiver can also receive information (e.g. location, SID, NID, SSID, etc.) local to the network element, such information may be useful or required for seamless operation within the master network. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067508 | METHOD FOR SELECTING SERVING PNC BASED ON FER IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Provided is a method for selecting a serving PNC at a wireless device in a wireless mesh network for data communication. In the method, an initial PNC is selected if data is generated to transmit. Then, an initial MAC frame size is decided and data communication is performed with the selected initial serving PNC. A PNC having a best channel state is reselected from PNCs in a same coverage as a serving PNC after selecting the initial serving PNC. A MAC frame size is decided for the reselected serving PNC and data communication with the reselected serving PNC is performed. The data communication is terminated if a FER of the reselected serving PNC is larger than a maximum allowable FER or if there is no data to transmit after the data communication is performed. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067509 | RAPID LOCAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - According to one embodiment, apparatus having corresponding computer programs comprise: a receiver to receive a first wireless signal from a wireless network; an address module to determine a type of Internet Protocol address assignment employed by the wireless network based on the first wireless signal; and a connection module to establish a network-layer connection to the wireless network based on the type of Internet Protocol address assignment determined by the address module. According to another embodiment, apparatus having corresponding computer programs comprise: a transmitter to transmit a first wireless signal, wherein the first wireless signal represents an indication of a type of Internet Protocol address assignment employed by a wireless network connected to the apparatus. | 03-18-2010 |
20100074234 | WIRELESS NETWORKS AND METHODS USING MULTIPLE VALID NETWORK IDENTIFIERS - A wireless sensor network comprises a plurality of nodes. Each of the plurality of nodes is configured to communicate messages through the wireless sensor network based on a first network identifier identifying the wireless sensor network. Each of the nodes is further configured to communicate messages through the wireless sensor network based on a default network identifier identifying the wireless sensor network, and the first network identifier and the default network identifier are concurrently valid for communicating messages through the wireless sensor network. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074235 | GROUPING OF CELLS FOR EFFICIENT NEIGHBOR CELL INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is described a method and apparatus to group at least one cell of a network according to at least one characteristic of a physical layer cell identification of the at least one cell, and to signal a representation comprising the at least one characteristic of the grouped at least one cell to a mobile station. In addition, according to another exemplary aspect of the invention there is at least a method and apparatus to receive signaling comprising a representation of a grouped at least one cell of a network, where the representation is according to at least one characteristic of a physical layer cell identification of the at least one cell, and to determine, based on the signaling, whether the grouped at least one cell are to be considered for an operation including at least one of reselection and measurement reporting. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074236 | Wireless communication system, access point, controller, network management device, and method of setting network identifier of access point - There is provided a wireless communication system including: a wireless terminal that communicates information; an access point that performs wireless communication with the wireless terminal; a main server that communicates with the access point through a network and manages line connection of the wireless terminal; and a survival server that communicates with the access point through the network and manages the line connection of the wireless terminal in place of the main server, wherein the access point detects a communication state between the main server and the access point and between the survival server and the access point, and sets a network identifier of the access point according to the communication state, and wherein the wireless terminal performs wireless communication with the access point using the network identifier, and communicates information with the main server or the survival server according to the network identifier. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074237 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND IDENTIFYING TRANSMIT POWER VALUE IN MULTI-USER MIMO - A method for transmitting and identifying a transmit power value in a multi-user MIMO scheme is disclosed. The transmit power value transmission method includes calculating available transmit power ratios for respective layers, reducing a number of bits used to represent entire transmit power ratio values by allocating same bit value to a plurality of same transmit power ratio values among the calculated transmit power ratio values for the respective layers; quantizing a transmit power ratio values of symbols to be transmitted to the UE using the entire transmit power ratio values of the reduced number of bits; and transmitting the quantized transmit power ratio values to the UE. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074238 | VIRTUAL NETWORK IMAGE SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SERVICES - A virtual network image system (VNIS) maintaining virtual counterparts for each of the entities in a real-world, physical wireless local area network (WLAN) to which the VNIS corresponds. The virtual counterparts operate in accordance with a communication protocol that corresponds to that of the WLAN and under the control of a VNIS manager component. The VNIS manager component predicts and optimizes operating configurations associated with the virtual counterparts, based on “what-if” analyses, to provide automation of various services relating to the operation of the physical WLAN. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074239 | Wireless Detector and Adapter - The handheld wireless network detector and adaptor includes a housing at least partially enclosing a processor, a self-contained power source, an interface, a wireless transceiver, a wireless network detector and a wireless network adapter. The interface is configured to communicate with an external computing device. The wireless transceiver is configured for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The wireless network detector is configured to use the wireless transceiver to detect a presence of a detected wireless network. The wireless network adapter is configured for facilitating real time communication between the external computing device and the detected wireless network via the interface and said wireless transceiver. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080197 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GIGABIT WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - A method and system for wireless communication with a mobile device. A first wireless communication network, such as a WiMax or cellular-based network, has a first maximum wireless speed. A second wireless communication network, such as a near-photonic speed gigabit link (“GiLink”) network, has a second maximum wireless speed. The second wireless maximum speed is less than the first maximum wireless speed. The second wireless communication network provides control plane services for wireless communication between the mobile device and the first wireless communication network. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080198 | INTERNET PROTOCOL CELLULAR PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE - In one embodiment, a communication system includes a private cellular base station subsystem to communicate, using a cellular radio frequency air radio interface, with home cellular wireless devices and visiting cellular wireless devices located within a coverage area associated with the private cellular base station subsystem. Each of the home cellular wireless devices has associated therewith (i) a public cellular number from a home public land mobile network, and (ii) a private cellular number from a private branch exchange (PBX) numbering scheme. The communication system further includes a private cellular switching subsystem to provide cellular switching functionality within the communication system for the home cellular wireless devices in connection with sessions that are associated with the respective private cellular numbers of the respective home cellular wireless devices. The private cellular switching subsystem is coupled to Internet Protocol (IP) devices, each of the IP devices having an associated extension number from the PBX numbering scheme. The private cellular switching subsystem is used to provide PBX services to the home wireless devices and IP devices. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080199 | OUT-OF-SYNCHRONIZATION HANDLING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method for handling out-of-synchronization (SYNC) includes generating a plurality of combination sets of transport channels utilized by a communication device. The method also includes selecting, based on a window-based parameter, a highest-ranking combination set of transport channels out of the plurality of combination sets of transport channels. The highest-ranking combination set of transport channels excludes one or more out-of-SYNC transport channels. The method further comprises providing, to a window-based data processing unit, data packets from transport channels in the highest-ranking combination set of transport channels, without providing data packets from the one or more out-of-SYNC transport channels to the window-based data processing unit. Apparatus and machine-readable media for out-of-SYNC avoidance and/or detection are also provided. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080200 | IDENTIFYING A DESIRED MESH NETWORK IN A MULTIPLE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Network devices in a multi-network wireless mesh network environment identify themselves as members of the network by receiving a broadcast message from a first mesh network device that has joined the wireless mesh network, and identifying that the broadcast transmission has been received such as by actuating a light, playing a sound, or sending an identifying reply message back to a broadcasting mesh network device. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080201 | Wi-Fi broadcast of links - A method and system is disclosed for transmitting wide fidelity (Wi-Fi) signals to an electronic device. These Wi-Fi signals may contain content specific links that may be relevant to the surroundings of a user. The user may be able to select these links by interfacing with the electronic device to view media content relevant to the user. The Wi-Fi signals may be transmitted from a base station. The base station can be configured by an operator of the base station to transmit any type of link deemed relevant to a user of the electronic device. Additionally, the base station may be configured to transmit location information to the electronic device for use with a positioning program in the device. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080202 | WIRELESS DEVICE REGISTRATION, SUCH AS AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION OF A WI-FI ENABLED DEVICE - A system for providing a wireless device with access to a computer network includes an access point that sets up a radio link with the wireless device and couples the wireless device to the network. The system also includes a server that receives data packets from the access point through the computer network. The data packets include at least one data packet that has a first identifier that uniquely identifies the wireless device and a second identifier that corresponds to at least one of a manufacturer code or a vendor code of the wireless device. The system further includes a database that is coupled to the server and stores data for associating a service plan with the first and second identifiers and basing the service plan, at least in part, on the second identifier. Other features and systems are also disclosed. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080203 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Wireless Communications Within a Building - A wireless distribution secured cabling system includes faceplates, each of which contains an antenna or other radiating element and an active amplifier, which serves as a bi-directional repeater for the wireless communication system. The system further includes a patch panel or distribution module which connects multiple cables, which may be either twisted pair or coaxial, to amplifier, acting as a power divider and/or an impedance matching device. An antenna, which may be mounted either outside of a building structure or inside the building structure, provides communications between the structured cabling system and a service provider base station. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080204 | WLAN TRANSCEIVING SYSTEM - A WLAN transceiving system, which comprises: a plurality of antennas; a plurality of receiving circuits, wherein each one of receiving circuits is coupled to one of the antenna to receive a input signal from the antennas; and a plurality of transmitting circuits, for outputting one of an output signal and an amplified output signal, wherein at least one of the transmitting circuit includes a power amplifier and utilizes at least one of the power amplifier to amplify an output signal to generate the amplified output signal, where a number of the power amplifiers is less than a number of the antennas. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080205 | RATE RECOVERY MECHANISIM, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A WLAN-BLUETOOTH COEXISTANCE SYSTEM - In accordance with the invention, a method and system relating to the rate recovery mechanism in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and Bluetooth coexistence system is provided. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080206 | AUTOCONFIGURATION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK AND ITS METHOD, AND GATEWAY APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention enables connection between a wireless sensor node and a service server while reducing load on the wireless sensor node. | 04-01-2010 |
20100085947 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A system for transmitting data via a core portion of a computer network to a mobile device is described. The network includes a plurality of access points wherein each access point includes a memory where data for onward transmission to the mobile device may be cached and is operable to communicate with the mobile device over a short-range wireless connection, when the mobile device is in range thereof, and with the core portion of the network over a backhaul connection on a substantially continuous basis. The system comprises: a location collection server for receiving location data from the mobile device; an access point prediction engine for generating predictions of one or more of the access points which the mobile device is considered likely to come in range of in the future based on recent location data received at the location collection server; and a content delivery server for transmitting the data or a portion thereof to the one or more predicted access points via the backhaul connection for caching at the access points and for onward transmission to the mobile device in the event that the mobile device comes into range of the access point, or one or more of the access points where data is transmitted to more than one predicted access point. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085948 | Apparatuses for Hybrid Wired and Wireless Universal Access Networks - A gateway switch comprises: two or more transceiving modules, wherein each of the transceiving modules is capable of transmitting and receiving data, wherein the data is an analog signal or a digital signal, and wherein each of the transceiving modules provides a different network connection type; a system module for processing the received data in accordance with one or more rules; and a switching module for symmetrically switching the processed data from any one of the transceiving modules to a selected one of the transceiving modules for transmission of the processed data; wherein the system module selects one of the transceiving modules for the transmission of the processed data as a function of the rules. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085949 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, AUTHENTICATOR APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ATTACHING A BASE STATION APPARATUS TO AN AUTHENTICATOR APPARATUS - A Base Station apparatus includes a network attachment device and a memory. The network attachment device is adapted to attach the Base Station apparatus to an Authenticator apparatus by sending a Base Station Attachment signal. The Base Station Attachment signal is adapted to request globally scoped or per-Base Station information from the Authenticator apparatus and the memory is adapted to store received globally scoped or per-Base Station apparatus information. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085950 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device includes a physical layer protocol processor which can transmit and receive data by first to Nth communication schemes, where ith communication scheme has compatibility with the first to (i−1)th communication scheme. A first controller generates a first frame for forbidding communication by the first to Nth communication schemes for a first period, and orders the physical layer protocol processor to transmit the first frame by the first communication scheme. A second controller generates a second frame for lifting the forbiddance on communication, and orders the physical layer protocol processor to transmit the second frame by a jth communication scheme. A third controller generates a third frame for forbidding communication by a (j+1)th to Nth communication schemes for a second period, and orders the physical layer protocol processor to transmit the third frame by the (j+1)th communication scheme. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085951 | MANAGING UNSCHEDULED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A MULTIRADIO DEVICE - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of radio modules integrated within the same wireless communication device. A control strategy may be employed to manage both more predictable and more spontaneous wireless communication mediums, wherein a local controller may be employed in a radio module utilizing an unscheduled wireless medium, like WLAN, for determining whether adequate time has been allocated to complete a transaction. If the transaction cannot be completed in the allowed time, it may be delayed until adequate time exists, and the delay may be reported so that the time may be reallocated to other radio modules. The radio module may then enter a power-saving mode until the transaction can be completed. | 04-08-2010 |
20100091745 | COVERAGE OPTIMISATION FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - In a wireless network comprising access points deployed within a designated zone of coverage, the radio frequency field strength resulting from radiation from the access points is optimised as a function of location by means of control of the transmission power and/or radiation pattern of the access points in response to measurements from sensors at defined locations that measure received signal power, the received power being related to radio frequency field strength. Sensors may be deployed within the designated zone of coverage, at the edge of the zone and/or outside the zone and optimisation of the transmission parameters of the access points in terms of transmission power and/or radiation pattern is carried out taking into account the location of the sensors in addition to the received power at the sensors. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091746 | COVERAGE-HOLE DETECTION and SELF HEALING - A system, apparatus and techniques for detecting and self-healing coverage hole conditions in a wireless network are disclosed. The apparatus includes a monitor module that is configured in a data forwarding plane of a network switch and a regulatory module configured in a control plane of the switch. The monitor module is configured to detect a coverage hole condition affecting a mobile device associated with an access port and the regulatory module is configured to adjust transmission power to the access port based on the condition. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091747 | Dynamic thermal control for wireless transceivers - Methods and apparatus for dynamic thermal management and control within, e.g., small form-factor wireless devices such as laptop computers or cellular “smartphones”. In one embodiment, a thermal management system monitors the temperature (or other relevant criteria) for one or more components, and implements different operating states within the wireless transceiver (e.g., Wi-Fi™ or WiMAX transceiver) so as to both reduce thermal output and minimize disruption to the wireless link and/or user experience. In another embodiment, a wireless client may communicate with other clients, and/or access points, so as to cooperatively provide more options for thermal management. In addition, methods and apparatus employing “high performance” (e.g., high power output or high data rate) radios within aggressively small industrial designs are also disclosed. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091748 | Voice Transmission Apparatus - A voice transmission apparatus includes a jitter absorbing buffer unit provided in the receiving unit and which absorbs a transmission delay in the packets, and a transmission wait control unit provided in a transmitting unit and which links a packet to be transmitted when transmission temporarily breaks down to a queue. A transmission wait control unit | 04-15-2010 |
20100091749 | Transmission and Reception Parameter Control - A system and method for implementing transmission parameter control at a transmitting station is described. The exemplary system and method comprises querying a transmission parameter control module for a transmission schedule. The transmission schedule comprises at least one schedule entry defining a set of transmission parameter controls as they pertain to a destination address. At least one packet of data is then transmitted to the destination address according to the transmission parameters controls of at least one schedule entry from the transmission schedule. A system and method for selecting an antenna configuration corresponding to a next transmission of packet data is also disclosed. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091750 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION - A device and method for receiving, by a mobile terminal, system information from a base station. The method includes: receiving a block of first system information from the base station in a predetermined frame of a broadcast channel configured to broadcast only system information; and after the block of first system information is received, receiving a first block of second system information from the base station in a predetermined frame of a downlink shared channel configured to carry system information and other data, the first block of second system information including schedule information relating to a second block of second system information. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091751 | COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEM FOR WIRELESS DEVICES OR THE LIKE - Briefly, in accordance with one embodiment of the invention, a wireless terminal may include an application subsystem and a communication subsystem. The communication subsystem in one embodiment may enable a virtual direct interface to a remote network to be presented to the application subsystem via a wireless communication system air link interface. The communication subsystem may allow applications of the application subsystem to be independent of any particular radio technology or network implementation of a wireless communication system air link interface. Once a session is established between the communication subsystem and the wireless communication system air link interface, the application subsystem may gain access to the remote network through the communication subsystem via a transport interface. | 04-15-2010 |
20100098033 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING NETWORK DATA - A method for transmitting network data is provided. A sender and receivers can stably transmit and receive data using a packet reception result report request frame and a packet reception result report frame, and data stability at the receivers can be improved through retransmission of network-coded data. In addition, service can be provided at a high transfer rate and with good data stability by adjusting a transfer rate according to a network environment using adaptive transfer rate control. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098034 | Wi-Fi ENABLED ROUTER HAVING UPLINK BANDWITH SHARING CAPABILITY - A method and apparatus is provided for forwarding data traffic to a broadband network. The method includes receiving at a local broadband wireless router data traffic to be forwarded to a broadband network and acquiring over a wireless communications link current bandwidth utilization rates for one or more neighboring broadband wireless routers. Based at least in part on the current bandwidth utilization rate of the local router and the current bandwidth utilization rate acquired from the one or more neighboring wireless routers, the data traffic is forwarded to the broadband network over a broadband interface of the local router or to a selected one of the neighboring routers over a wireless interface of the local router. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098035 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SERVICE PROVISIONING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - An open service provisioning method may be implemented by a terminal. The method may include receiving a customer's selection of a first-time network access provider and network service provider (NAP/NSP). The method may also include establishing a connection with the first-time NAP/NSP. The method may also include receiving information about possible other NAPs/NSPs while connected to the first-time NAP/NSP. The method may also include receiving the customer's selection of a home NAP/NSP. The method may also include assisting the customer to sign up for service with the home NAP/NSP. The method may further include establishing a connection with the home NAP/NSP. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098036 | SELF-CONFIGURATION OF WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A self-configuration method for access devices in a wireless network begins by performing wireless data collection with the access devices during an automated calibration period. During this time, each access device receives beacons from one or more transmitting access devices, the beacons being transmitted and received using a plurality of different channels available to the wireless network. The method records radio frequency (RF) data associated with the received beacons, and processes the RF data to select, from the plurality of different channels, a respective channel for each of the access devices. In addition, the RF data is processed to adjust transmit power levels for the access devices. The selected channels and adjusted transmit power levels are then used as configuration settings for the access devices. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098037 | Apparatus,systems and methods adapted for opportunistic forwarding of uplink short messages in wireless metropolitan area networks - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a subscriber station (SS) operable to communicate with a base station (BS) and at least one additional subscriber station (SS) in a wireless metropolitan area network, wherein the at least one additional SS attempts to overhear a first message from the SS and piggy back a second message for the overheard message from the SS's uplink data to the BS with its uplink data. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098038 | DEPLOY APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREOF FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - A deploy apparatus, method and computer program product thereof for a wireless network are provided. The wireless network comprises at least one first network node and a second network node. The method comprises the following steps: calculating an output constant and a node constant according to a first default value, a second default value and a third default value; calculating a first evaluation function according to the related information of the network nodes of the wireless network; moving or removing the second network node from the wireless network when the output constant is smaller than one and a test value is smaller than the node constant; calculating a second evaluation function according to the related information of the network nodes of the wireless network; and deploying the wireless network after comparing the first evaluation function and the second evaluation function. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098039 | Method for Variable Cyclic Length in OFDM Communications - Messages transmitted between a receiver and a transmitter are used to maximize a communication data rate. In particular, a multicarrier modulation system uses messages that are sent from the receiver to the transmitter to exchange one or more sets of optimized communication parameters. The transmitter then stores these communication parameters and when transmitting to that particular receiver, the transmitter utilizes the stored parameters in an effort to maximize the data rate to that receiver. Likewise, when the receiver receives packets from that particular transmitter, the receiver can utilize the stored communication parameters for reception. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098040 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING VoIP SERVICES FOR WIRELESS TERMINALS - The present invention relates to a system and method for wireless telecommunication in a packet-based network comprising a Software Radio Port (SRP) which functions as a radio base station and a VoIP gateway to interconnect the wireless network with the VoIP packet network. Together with a Network Server Platform (NSP) and VoIP call-server, the SRP combines mobile call processing signaling with the VoIP call signaling to establish calls between the mobile and VoIP device or between mobiles. The SRP establishes the voice path to the mobile station over the air and the RTP media path to a party over a packet network for a call. These two paths are interconnected at the SRP so that an end-to-end voice path is established. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098041 | Intra-Premises Wireless Broadband Service Using Lumped and Distributed Wireless Radiation From Cable Source Input - A premises, connected to receive broadband service(s) and also connected to a cable system, is provided with a broadband interface which connects to in-premises cabling which is coupled to consumer receivers such as a television sets, PDAs, laptops. Connected to the broadband interface is an adjunct device which channels broadband, data and voice signals supplied to an in-premises wireless system as distinguished from the signals supplied to the cable connected consumer receivers. The adjunct device formats the broadband and voice signals or any broadband service into packet format suitable for signal radiation and couples them to the in-premises coax cabling, via a diplexer, at a first selected location. At a second cable location a second diplexer, connected to the cable, separates the broadband, data and voice signals and couples them to a signal radiation device (i.e., an RF antenna or leaky coaxial cable) which radiates the signal to the immediate surrounding location. Various devices, near to the second cable location for specific services, receive the wireless signals (i.e., broadband, data and voice) from the radiating antenna. | 04-22-2010 |
20100103909 | DATA PACKET, SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLE NODES TRANSMITTING UNDER AD-HOC NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A system and method are provided for multiple nodes to wirelessly transmit in an Ad-hoc network architecture. First of all, an integration module of the system integrates a multi-node transmission protocol into a reservation column of a data packet. Next, an initial node of the system transmits the integrated data packet. Afterwards, according to the multi-node transmission protocol, one or more bridge node of the system receives the integrated data packet transmitted from the initial node. And finally, according to the multi-node transmission protocol, a destination node of the system receives the integrated data packet transmitted from the bridge node. By means of the proposed system and method, data transmission between multiple nodes is achieved under the Ad-hoc network architecture. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103910 | SMART DEVICE PROFILING - Providing device profiles for devices attached to local ports of access nodes on a wireless network. A device connected to a local port of an access node on a wireless network, such as a USB, IEEE1394 or wired IEEE 802.3 Ethernet port, is identified and the identification information sent to the controller. The controller may send further queries to the access node to be executed in further identifying the device. The controller configures the appropriate profile for the device and sends the profile to the access node. The profile may contain access control information such as access control lists. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103911 | Apparatus and method providing an IEEE-802.16 self-organizing network - Systems and methods are disclosed that include a receiver configured to receive a command message a controller configured to interpret the command message. The controller is also configured to perform a scan according to the command message using the receiver. The controller can also transmit a report message based upon one or more parameters within the command message using a transmitter. In some systems and methods, the report message comprises information related to contention within the wireless network. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103912 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CAUSING COMPUTER TO EXECUTE THE CONTROL METHOD - In 80211.n, the time during which the band is occupied is prolonged by the use of the frame aggregation method or in accordance with the type of communication frame, and this may influence communication of another apparatus. To solve this problem, a communication frame length (a communication frame to be used and the number of frames to be aggregated) is determined by taking account of priority information of a plurality of communication apparatuses. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103913 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING CONTENTION WINDOW SIZE IN MULTI USER MIMO BASED WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A Multiple-Input Multiple-Output data transmission system includes access stations and an access point having multiple receive antennas. An access point has a minimum contention window size decision unit to determine a minimum contention window size based on the number of receive antennas and a number of access stations, a broadcasting unit to broadcast the determined minimum contention window size to the access stations, and a receiver to receive data from the access stations in a contention window that is calculated based on the minimum contention window size. An access station receives the minimum contention window size from the access point, determines a first contention window size based on the minimum contention window size, and transmits data to the access point within the first contention window. If the transmission fails, the access station determines a second contention window size and retransmits the data in the second contention window. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103914 | Wireless Transmission Method, Apparatus, And System - A wireless transmission method, performed in a second layer of a wireless LAN apparatus, for transmitting data from a first layer of the wireless LAN apparatus to a third layer of the wireless LAN apparatus, comprising steps of: retrieving information related to unacknowledged frames from the first layer; aggregating the unacknowledged frames into a data unit if a processing time of the retrieving and aggregating step is less than a short inter frame space corresponding to a transmission opportunity; and transmitting the data unit to the third layer in the transmission opportunity. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103915 | VIRTUAL STREAMS FOR QOS-DRIVEN WIRELESS LANS - A virtual stream (VS) in a basic service set (BSS) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) that exists solely within the medium access control (MAC) sublayer of the WLAN. The VS includes a unidirectional path in the wireless network between a station sourcing a quality of service (QoS) session and at least one station receiving the QoS session in the same BSS. The VS is defined by a VS identifier (VSID) that is unique within and local to the BSS, an address of the sourcing station, and an address of the at least one receiving station. The VS can be a virtual down-stream (VDS), a virtual up-stream (VUS) or a virtual side-stream (VSS). The VS can be a unitcast or a multicast VS. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103916 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication system, a radio communication apparatus, and a radio communication method allow networks to operate without interference between contending networks. When plural piconets collide on the same frequency channel, a control station of one of the piconets temporarily sets a buffer super frame period to coexist between the piconets. When an apparatus other than a control station receives a beacon signal of the buffer super frame period, a shorter super frame period based on that super frame period is temporarily set to make fine adjustment of the next beacon signal transmission timing. An apparatus that has not received a beacon signal looks for a beacon signal of its own piconet for a redundant time to find a start time of a new super frame period. | 04-29-2010 |
20100111051 | MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit processes the inbound control data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111052 | MANAGEMENT UNIT WITH LOCAL AGENT - A management unit manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via either a logical or physical control channel. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit includes a local agent that gathers environmental data, wherein the management processing unit processes the inbound control data, the environmental data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111053 | Techniques for enhanced network discovery - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising retrieving a first network scan while connected to a second network access point (AP), without actually accessing the air, by the AP sending a message to “Get first network base station (BS) list” to devices in communication with the AP and operable to communicate in the first and the second networks, merging by the AP all answers from the devices to provide a list of all base stations (BS's) in the AP's vicinity, and querying the AP by other devices for the network BS list. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111054 | System and method for robust data loss recovery in a wireless local area network - A system and method for robust data loss recovery in a wireless local area network is provided. The method includes splitting user data into multiple data fragments. The method further includes creating multiple beacon frames by placing each data fragment in a unique beacon frame and broadcasting the beacon frames through a wireless medium by an access point of the network. Prior to transmission, the method includes arranging the frames into a plurality of groups and creating a parity frame for each group, to be transmitted along with the beacon frame. After transmission, the beacon frames are received by a wireless client and data fragments are extracted from each beacon frame. At the receiving end, the wireless client checks whether all the transmitted beacon frames have been received. Finally, the user data is reconstructed from the extracted data fragments by reassembling the data fragments. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111055 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT, WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE, AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - The invention provides a wireless access point, a wireless network architecture, and a method for establishing the wireless network architecture. The method of the invention includes the following steps. First a first wireless access point and a second wireless access point are defined. Second a first function mode of the first wireless access point is set to be a router mode. Third a second function mode of the second wireless access point is set to be a wireless access point mode, a repeater mode or an adapter mode. Fourth a communication connection is established between the first wireless access point and the second wireless access point to perform a data exchange procedure. At last, a plurality of operational parameters of the second wireless access point are set by the second wireless access point itself according to the second function mode to finish the establishment of the wireless network architecture. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111056 | RECALCULATING AIRTIME QUOTA IN WLAN TO USE UP BANDWIDTH - In a wireless communication channel, the time per a service interval is distributed among multiple data services. The data services have been allocated airtime quotas in order to comply with their QoS requirements. These airtime quotas are scaled by a factor that is the ratio between, on the one hand, the time available per service interval for accommodating data of these services and, on the other hand, the total of the airtime quotas. This allows the services to use more airtime in case not the entire service interval has been allocated. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111057 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND ACCESS POINT CONNECTION METHOD - A wireless communication device quickly connectable to an access point of a destination service area without wasting power when the wireless communication device moves from a service area to a different one. When a state change detecting section ( | 05-06-2010 |
20100111058 | DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION OPERATION DURING CONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION - The present invention relates to communicating between a network and a mobile terminal in a wireless communication system. The invention includes receiving a coded data unit from a network, determining whether the coded data unit can be successfully decoded, determining not to receive a transmission from the network for a first predetermined amount of time independent of whether the data unit is successfully decoded, and determining not to receive a transmission from the network for a second predetermined amount of time when the data unit is successfully decoded. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111059 | CONTENT DELIVERY - Wireless routers having an ADSL or cable connection to content data available via the Internet, a wired connection for connecting local clients in a LAN and a wireless controller for connecting to other wireless routers and clients in a wireless local area networks (WLANs). The WLANs often intersect and therefore it is possible to communicate between wireless routers in order to exchange content data via the wireless LAN in addition to the ADSL or cable connection. Further, each wireless routers has a cache data store to cache content data requested by the user, or any other information sent to the wireless router from another wireless router. A central server can schedule transfer of content data between wireless routers by considering information packets stored on the server | 05-06-2010 |
20100111060 | Communication Of Information Between Devices In Communication Networks - A first node in a connection network and a method for providing said first node with information related to a geographical position of a user terminal, which connection network comprises said first node, a second node and an access network, wherein: the first node has access to at least one user terminal via a wireless interface provided by the access network; and the second node is connected to the first node and has access to at least one external network, which method is characterized by the steps of: sending a session request from the second node to the first node; and sending a session response from the first node to the second node after receiving said session request, which session response comprises information related to a geographical position of the terminal associated with the session in question. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111061 | ADDRESSING SCHEME FOR A RELAY NETWORK SYSTEM - According to one general aspect, a method may include collecting at least one Mobile Station (MS) Medium Access Control (MAC) Packet Data Units (PDUs), associated with at least one Mobile Station. In various embodiments, the method may also include generating at least one MS station identifier (STID) sub-header (MSID-SH), indicating for each MS MAC PDU (MPDU) a MS STID that is associated the respective MPDU. In some embodiments, the method may include packing the MSID-SH and the at least one of MPDU into a single Relay MAC PDU (RPDU). In various embodiments, the method may also include wirelessly transmitting the RPDU. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111062 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH HIERARCHICAL CELL STRUCTURE - An apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving system information in a wireless communication system with a hierarchical cell structure are provided. A method for transmitting system information in a micro Base Station (BS) in a wireless communication system in which at least one micro cell exists within a macro cell includes transmitting first system information to a Mobile Station (MS) communicating with a macro BS within a micro cell and an MS communicating with a micro BS within the micro cell, and transmitting second system information to the MS communicating with the micro BS within the micro cell. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111063 | Signal strength guided intra-cell upstream data forwarding - Intra-cell upstream data forwarding is utilized in a wireless network such as a wireless local area network. A network forwarding path is determined based on the signal strength of an access point signal received at client stations within the network, referred to as the OASS. In particular embodiments, a station that is either originating or forwarding a frame inserts its own OASS into the frame before transmitting it and a client station that receives a frame forwards it only if its own OASS exceeds the frame-enclosed OASS, illustratively by at least a predetermined amount. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111064 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SELECTIVELY TYING THE OPENING AND CLOSING OF EVDO AND PPP SESSIONS - Method, and associated apparatus, for operating a hybrid access terminal operable in a CDMA 1x/EVDO hybrid communication session system. The hybrid access terminal is operable to communicate pursuant to an EVDO communication session and to a PPP communication session. The opening and closing of the communication sessions are independent of one another. Opening of one session does not require opening of another of the sessions. And, closing of one of the sessions does not require closing of the other of the sessions. | 05-06-2010 |
20100118841 | DEVICE BEACON FOR HANDOFF MANAGEMENT OF HANDOFFS TO BASE STATIONS - A detecting base station comprises a device beacon detector that is configured to apply wireless wide area network (WWAN) system timing to receive a device beacon transmitted by a wireless communication device in accordance with the WWAN system timing and outside of a WWAN uplink channel. The detecting base station may include a wireless wide area network (WWAN) interface configured to receive the WWAN system timing from the WWAN. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118842 | DEVICE BEACON FOR HANDOFF MANAGEMENT OF HANDOFFS TO ACCESS NODES - An access node receives a device beacon transmitted from a wireless communication device in accordance with a system timing of a wireless wide area network (WWAN). When transmitted within a WWAN uplink channel, the device beacon is mapped to designated beacon channels within the time-frequency space of the uplink WWAN channel assignment. In response to the reception of the device beacon, communications between the wireless communication device and the access node are established. In one example, the access node is a femtocell base station. In another example, the access node is a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118843 | COMMUNICATIONS METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN COMMUNICATING WITH ACCESS ROUTERS AND/OR OTHER DEVICES ACTING AS COMMUNICATIONS PEERS - Methods and apparatus for performing peer to peer communications with access routers and non-access router peer devices are described. An access terminal generates a channel estimate estimating the channel between the access terminal and an access router. For at least some communication with the access router, a channel compensation operation is performed on a symbol to be transmitted prior to its transmission to the access router. In contrast, symbols transmitted to other access terminals are not subject to a channel compensation operation prior to transmission with the receiving access terminal being responsible for implementing a channel compensation operation on the received signal. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118844 | DYNAMIC LIGHTWEIGHT REMOTE MANAGEMENT OF HYBRID FEMTOCELL GATEWAYS - System(s) and method(s) that facilitate dynamic remote management of consumer premise devices comprising femtocells integrated into broadband gateways are presented. A communication network platform is associated with a consumer premise device(s) and can include a remote management component that facilitates dynamic and remote management of consumer premise devices in a wireless communication network. The remote management component monitors and measures desired parameters respectively associated with a consumer premise devices and employs remote controls to remotely adjust parameters based on predetermined optimization criteria. The remote management component calculates channel capacity based on measured channel signal-to-noise ratio to facilitate determining whether to hand off a current cell to another cell, wherein at least one cell is associated with a consumer premise device. The remote management component can generate and store Quality of Service profiles respectively associated with the consumer premise devices to facilitate remote management of the consumer premise devices. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118845 | Method and Apparatus for Implementing Generic Access Network Functionality in a Wireless Communication Device - According to one aspect of the teachings presented herein, a “smart” phone or other wireless communication device includes a “modem” processor configured to support cellular communication network signaling and an “applications” processor configured to host call control and/or user applications, such as by providing a desired Operating System (OS) for hosting such applications. In at least one embodiment of a wireless communication device contemplated herein, the modem processor implements a cellular network signaling controller, a Generic Access Network (GAN) manager, and a privately routable, first Internet Protocol (IP) stack. Further, the applications processor implements a publicly routable, second IP stack that implements routing, e.g., a Network Address Translation (NAT) routing, for routing GAN traffic to and from the first IP stack on a local IP link bridging the first and second IP stacks. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118846 | MOBILE ROUTER WITH SERIAL DEVICE INTERFACE - A mobile router having a serial interface is disclosed. According to various embodiments, the mobile router may comprise a serial port data publisher module that may take data received from a serial device connected to a serial port of the mobile router and make the data from the serial device available via a TCP stream. In that way, the serial port data publisher module may be used, for example, to populate a remote database with the data from the serial device. That way, the data from the serial device may be remotely accessed via the Internet, for example. In addition, the mobile router can be used to output a received signal from the device connected to its serial interface. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118847 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, ACCESS POINT EQUIPMENT, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING AND EXTRACTING DATA - A wireless communication system includes a first network including a base station, a second network including a second base station, and a data providing server. The second base station extracts a first identification data to identify the base station by receiving a radio wave transmitted from the base station. The data providing server collects the first identification data from the second base station and a second identification data to identify the second base station, and provides the second identification data for a wireless communication terminal connected to the first network. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118848 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND IMAGE DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A communication terminal capable of easily transferring image data of a taken image and rapidly transferring the image data by using wireless LAN ad-hoc mode communication. In the terminal, a transmission section ( | 05-13-2010 |
20100118849 | OFDM RECEIVING DEVICE AND OFDM RECEIVING METHOD - An OFDM receiver | 05-13-2010 |
20100118850 | Method and apparatus for transmitting data in wireless network - A method and apparatus for transmitting data in a wireless network. A piconet coordinator transmits a frame, which is built by combining and capsulating a plurality of datagrams respectively corresponding to a plurality of devices, to the plurality of devices. Thus, since a time interval to ensure a frame header and an inter frame space (IFS) can be excluded, it is possible to improve transmission efficiency. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118851 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WLAN SERVICE USING MULTIPLE CHANNEL - Provided are an apparatus and method for providing a WLAN service using multiple channels. The wireless local area network (WLAN) service apparatus includes a service request receiver configured to receive service request information from a first wireless terminal accessed through a first channel, a data receiver configured to receive data from a first access point accessed through a second channel according to the service request information, a data transmitter configured to transmit the data to the first wireless terminal in a predetermined service area, and an access controller configured to control the first wireless terminal and the first access point to be accessed through different channels. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118852 | System and Method of Processing Data Using Scalar/Vector Instructions - A method of processing data is disclosed that includes performing a fetch of a plurality of instructions from a memory unit. The method also includes grouping the plurality of instructions into packets of instructions of different types for parallel execution by a plurality of instruction execution units. The packets of instructions include a first instruction and a second instruction. The method includes using a combined scalar and vector condition code register to execute the first instruction for a compare operation and the second instruction for a conditional operation using the combined scalar and vector condition code register. The method also includes when the compare operation is a scalar compare operation, receiving a scalar compare instruction for the scalar compare operation at an instruction executing unit and storing results of the scalar compare operation in the combined scalar and vector condition code register. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118853 | Advance Notification of Transmit Opportunities on a Shared-Communications Channel - A technique is disclosed that enables both an IEEE 802.11 transceiver and a Bluetooth transceiver to be employed in a single wireless telecommunication station (e.g., a device supporting a wireless telephone, personal digital assistant, etc.) without interfering on each other. In particular, the illustrative embodiment enables standard “off-the-shelf” IEEE 802.11 and Bluetooth transceivers to work in a coordinated fashion in a single telecommunications terminal. In the illustrative embodiment, an IEEE 802.11 transceiver that uses a shared-communications channel notifies a Bluetooth transceiver that a transmit opportunity exists and that the Bluetooth transceiver has permission to use the shared-communications channel. The technique disclosed is also applicable to communications protocols other than IEEE 802.11 and Bluetooth. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118854 | DUAL BAND WLAN COMMUNICATION FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER TECHNIQUE - A dual band WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) communications technique is provided where a frequency synthesizer unit generates an LO (Local Oscillator) signal at a frequency between both frequency bands and two downconversion units and/or two upconversion units are provided. One of the units performs conversion between the LO signal and an IF (Intermediate Frequency) signal while the other conversion takes place between the IF signal and a zero-IF or low-IF signal. Signal processing is performed on the zero-IF or low-IF signal. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124210 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING BEAMFORMING WITH GPS GUIDANCE - A method for radio frequency transmitting and receiving beamforming using both GPS guidance and wireless access points is disclosed. The method comprises providing a wireless networking device with preloaded wireless access point locations; calculating a relative vector to an access point based upon at least one of the preloaded wireless access point locations; steering a transmitted beam with a sounding packet to the access point; calculating a channel condition by the access point; and sending a packet by the access point to the wireless networking device to establish a connection. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124211 | REDUCING AN OCCURRENCE OF A VOIP CALL ON HOLD FROM BEING DROPPED IN EV-DO SYSTEMS - Methods, apparatuses, and systems for reducing an occurrence of a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call from being disconnected in an Evolution Data Only (EV-DO) system are disclosed. The VoIP call is placed on hold and at least one keep-alive packet is issued to prevent a radio link from disconnecting. The at least one keep-alive packet is issued at least while the VoIP call associated with the radio link is on hold and is configured to reset a dormancy timer for the call at one or more network entities. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124212 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING BEAMFORMING WITH LOCATION OR GPS GUIDANCE - A method and system for radio frequency transmitting and receiving beamforming using both GPS guidance and wireless access points is disclosed. The method and system comprises providing a wireless networking device with a locating system; providing an access point, the access point broadcasting its location; calculating a relative vector from the device to the access point based upon the location; steering a transmitted beam with a sounding packet to the access point; calculating a channel condition by the access point; and sending a packet by the access point to the wireless networking device to establish a connection. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124213 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - A wireless terminal device performs first, second, and third scans in sequence to detect wireless access points; stores base station information on the detected wireless access points in a storing unit; sets a disappearance flag in base station information that correspond to a wireless access point that was detected in the first scan and not in the second scan; sets a reappearance flag in base station information that correspond to a wireless access point that was not detected in the second scan and was detected in the third scan; identifies a wireless base station corresponding to base station information in which the disappearance flag and the reappearance flag are set; and displays information on the wireless base station identified on a display unit. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124214 | Position based WPAN (Wireless Personal Area Network) management - Position based WPAN (Wireless Personal Area Network) management. Based on either the relative position or the specific location of devices within a WPAN, communication between the various devices is managed by grouping the devices into two or more groups. In addition, the communication between theses various devices may be governed by profiles assigned to the groups (or even the actual individual devices) that are assigned based on their locations within the WPAN. The relative locations of the devices may be made using ranging that is performed by transmitting UWB (Ultra Wide Band) pulses between the various devices within the WPAN. Alternatively, each device may include GPS (Global Positioning System) functionality and information corresponding to the specific locations of the devices may be communicated between the devices, and that information may be used to group devices user and/or assign profiles to govern the communication to and from the devices. | 05-20-2010 |
20100128701 | BEACON TRANSMISSION FOR PARTICIPATION IN PEER-TO-PEER FORMATION AND DISCOVERY - Aspects relate to allowing multimodal devices to communicate over multiple bands to take advantage of lower traffic bands. A device can transmit its interface presence information to a base station on an uplink. The base station can broadcast the presence information to other nodes within the vicinity of base station. Based on the received presence information, the device can selectively establish communication in a peer-to-peer configuration. The presence information on the uplink can be sent on a first interface and the communication between the devices in the peer-to-peer configuration can be on a second interface. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128702 | Ad Hoc Communication Protocol Method and Apparatus - According to one embodiment, a connection is established between a first communication device and a second communication device in accordance with one or more communication layers. Each communication layer is associated with a standard structure and protocol. An ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol are determined at the first communication device. The ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol are communicated to the second communication device. One or more of the standard structures and/or protocols are replaced at the first communication device with the ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol responsive to the second communication device acknowledging acceptance of the ad hoc communication layer structure and/or protocol. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128703 | Method for Routing Packets in Wireless Ad-Hoc Networks with Probabilistic Delay Guarantees - A method determines an optimal route to deliver a packet from a source node via relay nodes to a destination node in a network. A graph of nodes connected by edges represents possible routes in the network. A probability that the packet arrives at the destination before a deadline time is assigned to each edge. A minimal delay route is selected from the possible routes, and an arrival time for delivering the packet using the minimal delay route is determined. The arrival time is comparing to a deadline time, and the probabilities are scaled accordingly until the minimal delay route is an optimal route. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128704 | Mulitcasting, location services, payment methods and performance management in broadband wireless access networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems for location discovery, electronic payment and multicast broadcast in a wireless broadband network disclosed. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128705 | TRANSMITTER STATION WITH DETECTABLE FUNCTION FOR RADIO CONDITION - In a wireless LAN system, the transaction efficiency may be enhanced. The transmitter station holds the number of transaction successes, the number of transaction failures, the data rate when the transaction is carried out, and the number wait to perform the transaction. The transmitter station determines that the radio wave condition is in the state {WS} from the data rate at which the transaction succeeded; the area covered by the transmitter station is influenced by the hidden terminal by the average rate of the failure transaction, and the area is influenced by the collision terminal from the relation between the number of the wait for the transaction and the data rate. The transmitter station selects an optimum mode for respective conditions. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128706 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INCREASING OPERATION TIME IN IEEE802.15.4-2006 BEACON BASED WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Provided are an apparatus and method for increasing operation time in an IEEE802.15.4-2006 beacon based wireless sensor network (WSN) with respect to the same amount of power consumption used by coordinators included in a WSN, by reducing unnecessary standby power consumption required during an active period of a super frame in a beacon-enabled mode. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128707 | CALL CONTROL DEVICE, RELAY DEVICE, CALL CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A call control device, which controls call connections between a plurality of terminals, includes a device information storage unit that stores device information on call-connectable terminals; a call request accepting unit that accepts a call request from one terminal to another terminal; a determining unit that determines, when the call request accepting unit accepts a call request, whether the device information on the other terminal is stored in the device information storage unit; a holding unit that holds a call state of the one terminal when the determining unit determines that device information on the other terminal is not stored in the device information storage unit; a state acquiring unit that acquires state information indicating a state of the other terminal; and a holding tone setting unit that sets a holding tone to be transmitted to the one terminal associated with the state information acquired by the state acquiring unit. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128708 | FEMTOCELL LOCAL BREAKOUT MECHANISMS - A system and methodology that employs local breakout mechanisms at a femto access point (FAP) to facilitate efficient utilization of backhaul and/or macro networks is provided. In particular, a slave Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) can be integrated within the FAP to directly route the incoming traffic from a user equipment (UE) at the FAP. In one example, Internet bound traffic can be directly routed to the Internet, without employing macro network resources. Further, the system can avoid hairpinning by routing traffic between the UE and a home Local Area Network (LAN) by a anchoring a call or a session in the slave GGSN and facilitate integration of UEs with home applications by employing a UE Digital Home Agent. In addition, the FAP can perform UE-to-UE CS media breakout to facilitate communication between UEs attached to the FAP, without routing the traffic through the core macro network. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128709 | HOME SERVICE INTEGRATION AND MANAGEMENT BY EMPLOYING LOCAL BREAKOUT MECHANISMS IN A FEMTOCELL - A system and methodology that facilitates home services integration by employing a local breakout mechanism at a femto access point (AP) is provided. In particular, the system can perform mapping to provide home functions to an authorized user equipment (UE) attached to the femto AP and provide integration with one or more home services. Further, a monitoring component is employed for home monitoring and facilitates monitoring and/or controlling devices on the home Local Area Network (LAN) via the UE. Furthermore, an access management component is utilized to set, manage and implement access privileges associated with UEs authorized to access the DH LAN. In addition, shared location data is determined and utilized for location based management and/or location assistance services. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128710 | INFRASTRUCTURE FOR WIRELESS LANS - A wireless data communications system includes simplified access points which are connected to ports of an intelligent switching hub. The switching hub relays data packets to the access points in accordance with destination address data in the data communications. In a preferred arrangement the access points are provided with power over the data cable from the switching hub location. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128711 | TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL FOR MOBILE UNIT - In a wireless local area network which includes access point having variable transmitter power levels, transmitter power data is sent from the access points to the mobile units and used by the mobile units in order to provide a corresponding variation in the transmitter power of the mobile unit. | 05-27-2010 |
20100135263 | Wireless sensor system - Providing wireless communication between an access point and a wireless device includes the wireless device operating in a first reduced power mode for a first period of time, where the wireless device does not receive communications while operating in the first reduced power mode and includes the wireless device operating in a full power mode for a second period of time, where the wireless device transitions back into the first reduced power mode in response to there being no communication from the access point to the wireless device during the second period of time. The wireless device may be a wireless sensor. In response to the access point directing the wireless sensor to collect data at a particular collection time, the wireless sensor may enter the first reduced power mode for a time prior to the collection time. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135264 | Communication Method under IEEE 802.11e Enhanced Distributed Channel Access - The present invention provides a method for the Medium Access Control (MAC) layer in IEEE 802.11 | 06-03-2010 |
20100135265 | DYNAMIC EQAM DISCOVERY IN M-CMTS ARCHITECTURE - In one example, an Edge Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (EQAM) communicates EQAM information to a Modular Cable Modem Termination System (M-CMTS) core using a routing protocol that is configured on a packet switched network coupling the EQAM to the M-CMTS core. The EQAM generates a routing message according to the routing protocol and inserts EQAM information, such as a description of a modulated channel extending from the EQAM, the service-group information, etc, into the routing message. The EQAM then floods the EQAM information over at least portions of a routing domain by transmitting the routing message to an adjacent intermediary device. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135266 | PROVIDING PRIVATE ACCESS POINT SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A private access point may be utilized to establish a local network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the private access point. The private access point is then operable to determine services that may be provided in its local network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within its local network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Private access points are also operable to utilize local and/or remote resources to provide additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in private access point networks is incentivized to the private access points and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the private access points. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in private access point networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135267 | METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE BEACONING - A method of adaptive beaconing includes operating a node within an ad hoc wireless communication network to calculate a probability P for an interval of time I; transmit a beacon when a uniformly distributed random number is less than the probability P; and wait for the interval of time “I” and repeat the calculate, transmit, and waiting operations when the uniformly distributed random number is greater than the probability P. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135268 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY TRUNCATION - A method and device for communicating in a contention-based communication network. The method includes upon an early termination of a previously obtained transmission opportunity (TXOP) for communications with one of a mobile device and a base station, transmitting a contention free end (CF-End) frame to the base station for further broadcasting to the network by the base station. Also, a method and device for communicating in a contention-based communication system. The method includes receiving in a base station a first contention free end (CF-End) frame from a first mobile device indicating an early termination of a transmission opportunity (TXOP) previously obtained by the first mobile terminal for communications between the first mobile device and one of the base station and a second mobile device; and omnidirectionally broadcasting a second CF-End frame with a duration field having a value equal to zero. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135269 | RETRIEVING VOICE-BASED CONTENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH WIRELESS APPLICATION PROTOCOL BROWSING - A WAP-enabled device can request text-based and/or voice based content from a WAP Server. The WAP device communicates over a conventional wireless service provider network. This network provides a connection between the WAP device and a WAP Gateway. The WAP Gateway operates as a gateway between the wireless service provider network and the TCP/IP-based Internet. Content requests are sent from the WAP gateway to the WAP Server. When a request for voice-based content delivery is received, the WAP Server responds by sending a TCP/IP instruction to a Voice Portal Node. The Voice Portal Node is operative to establish a voice-based communication session with the WAP device. The WAP Server will transmit voice-based content to the Voice Portal Node. An audible transmission is then played over the telephone connection established between the Voice Portal Node and the WAP device in response to the request initiated by the WAP device. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135270 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CALL CONTROL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication system for calling a plurality of terminal devices in response to a single request of call connection, assigning, for a single terminal device which answered the call, a communication band to be occupied in a communication band which can be used, and establishing the call connection in the assigned communication band, the communication system includes a deriving section that derives a communication band required for the call connection of each of the terminal devices to be called when the request of call connection is received, a securing section that secures a communication band including the maximum width in each of the derived communication bands in the communication band which can be used; and an assigning section that assigns a communication band to be occupied in the secured communication band to the terminal device which answered the call. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135271 | PACKETIZED AUDIO DATA OPERATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit includes a WLAN interface, an input buffer, an input buffer controller, and a processor. The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit may also include an output buffer, an output buffer controller, a transcoder, and/or an audio Coder-Decoder (CODEC). The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit is installed in a WLAN device that services voice communications. The input buffer receives packetized audio data from the WLAN interface. When the input buffer satisfies a buffer vacancy threshold, the processor and the input buffer controller cooperatively operate to fill at least a portion of the input buffer with packetized audio data. The processor copies packetized audio data from the input buffer and fills the input buffer with the copied packetized audio data to maintain an audio pattern in the input buffer. The input buffer controller fills the input buffer when the processor is available and after copying/filling is no longer effective. The processor operates to maintain the audio pattern when additional packetized audio data is received by the WLAN interface. These operations are also performed for the output buffer, which receives packetized audio data from the transcoder and writes the packetized audio data to the WLAN interface. | 06-03-2010 |
20100142499 | SUPPORT OF UICC-LESS CALLS - The invention relates to a method comprising initiating a session from a subscriber terminal, wherein the subscriber terminal does not comprise a specific user identification module, and authenticating the session based on a temporary identification of the subscriber terminal, by using a procedure performing a server authentication and avoiding a client authentication. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142500 | COEXISTENCE INTERFACE FOR MULTIPLE RADIO MODULES USING A REDUCED NUMBER OF CONNECTIONS - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a first radio is operated in a first coexistence mode between the first radio and a second radio. The first radio monitors a first signal received from a third radio to determine if the third radio is active. In the event the third radio is active, the first radio switches to a second coexistence mode between the first radio and the third radio, and the first radio then operates in the second coexistence mode. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142501 | System and method for location services over wireless LANs - A system and method for location determination based on available information about the premises served by a Wireless Access Point is disclosed. More specifically, what is described is a method that enables the mobile terminal to deliver adequate and valuable location information to the service when proper function of the service requires this information. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142502 | Wireless Communication Device and Computer Usable Medium Therefor - A wireless communication device is provided. The wireless communication device includes a first obtainer configured to obtain an identifier of a wireless network to which a first external device belongs, the identifier of the wireless network being detected based on radio waves transmitted from the first external device, a second obtainer configured to obtain an identifier of a wireless network to which a second external device belongs, the identifier of the wireless network being obtained from the second external device through an IP network to which the wireless communication device has been connected, and an output controller configured to output a first identifier obtained commonly by the first obtainer and the second obtainer to an output unit so that the first identifier is presented to be distinguishable from other identifiers obtained by solely one of the first obtainer and the second obtainer. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142503 | Hierarchical Data Collection Network Supporting Packetized Voice Communications Among Wireless Terminals And Telephones - A packet-based, hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. The network accommodates real time voice transmission both through dedicated, scheduled bandwidth and through a packet-based routing within the confines and constraints of a data network. Conversion and call processing circuitry is also disclosed which enables access devices and personal computers to adapt voice information between analog voice stream and digital voice packet formats as proves necessary. Routing pathways include wireless spanning tree networks, wide area networks, telephone switching networks, internet, etc., in a manner virtually transparent to the user. A voice session and associate call setup simulates that of conventional telephone switching network, providing well-understood functionality common to any mobile, remote or stationary terminal, phone, computer, etc. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142504 | Simultaneous Operation of Wireless LAN and Long-Range Wireless Connections - A method for communication includes establishing a first connection between a wireless terminal and a base station of a long-range wireless data network, which operates in accordance with a first protocol that defines a sequence of time frames for transmission of data between the wireless terminal and the base station. A signal is sent from the wireless terminal to the base station identifying an interval including one or more of the time frames during which the wireless terminal will not receive data from the base station. During the interval, a second connection is established between the wireless terminal and an access point of a wireless local area network (WLAN) in accordance with a second protocol, different from the first protocol. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142505 | MULTIPLE PROTOCOL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS IN A WLAN - A method for multiple protocol wireless communications begins by determining protocols of wireless communication devices within a proximal region. The method then continues by determining whether the protocols of the wireless communication devices within the proximal region are of a like protocol. The method continues by, when the protocols of the wireless communication devices within the proximal region are not of a like protocol, selecting a protocol of the protocols of the wireless communication devices within the proximal region based on a protocol ordering to produce a selected protocol. The method continues by utilizing the selected protocol by the wireless communication devices within the proximal region to set up a wireless communication within the proximal region. | 06-10-2010 |
20100150116 | Method and Apparatus for Adjusting EDCA Channel Access Parameters - A contention based communications channel access method emulates scheduled access by dynamically updating Enhanced Distribution Channel Access (EDCA) parameters for groups of member stations in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). | 06-17-2010 |
20100150117 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LAN-BASED INDOOR POSITION LOCATION - A method and system for position location of clients in wireless local area networks. (WLANs). The position location technique utilizes time-of-flight (TOF) measurements of signals transmitted from a client to a number of wireless access points (APs) or vice versa to determine distances. Round-trip time (RTT) measurement protocols are used to estimate TOF and distances between the client at an unknown position and the WLAN APs. The method and system improves positioning accuracy by identifying and mitigating non-line-of sight (NLOS) errors such as multipaths. Trilateration algorithms are utilized in combination with median filtering of measurements to accurately estimate the position of the client. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150118 | Method and System for Time Based WLAN Scanning - Certain aspects of a method and system for time based wireless local area network (WLAN) scanning may include controlling scanning of a plurality of wireless access points in one or more WLANs by a WLAN station based on one or more factors comprising power consumed by the WLAN station based on the scanning, and/or a priority level of one or more media packets to be handled by the WLAN station. The information may be acquired for one or more of the plurality of wireless access points in one or more WLANs during the controlled scanning. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150119 | Handling of Terminating Calls in a Distributed System - A technique for handling mobile terminating calls in a distributed switch is described. The switch includes at least one cluster wherein the at least one cluster comprises a plurality of cluster members. Each cluster member is associated with a set of roaming numbers and adapted to route a mobile terminating call to either a recipient subscriber served by the cluster member or to another cluster member which serves the recipient subscriber. The at least one cluster further comprises a first data structure having a content that is common to and accessible by all the cluster members of the cluster. The first data structure specifies the plurality of cluster members and the roaming number set associated with each cluster member. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150120 | MOBILE APPLICATIONS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet that may facilitate use of mobile applications in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain mobile applications may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150121 | FIXED MOBILE CONVERGENCE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS USING WIDEBAND VOICE CODEC - A fixed mobile convergence (FMC) communication apparatus using a wideband audio codec is provided. The FMC communication apparatus includes an application processor which is capable of processing one or more wireless communication protocols and supports a wideband audio codec; a wideband audio signal input/output (I/O) unit which is connected to the application processor and processes the input and output of wideband audio signals; a mobile network access unit which is connected to the application processor and accesses a mobile communication network; and a wireless local area network (LAN) access unit which is connected to the application processor and wirelessly accesses an access point (AP). The FMC communication apparatus can access the base station of a mobile internet system or the base station of a mobile communication system. In addition, the FMC communication apparatus can access a Bluetooth device or an AP using a short-range wireless communication method. Moreover, the FMC communication apparatus can provide high-quality voice call services and various multimedia internet services by using a wideband audio codec. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150122 | MANAGING AND MONITORING EMERGENCY SERVICES SECTOR RESOURCES - A system includes one or more wireless islands, one or more incident management applications, and one or more message management and routing (MMR) systems. Each MMR systems is configured to act as an intermediary for communication between one of the wireless islands and one or more of the incident management applications. One of the wireless islands includes a radio network. The radio network includes a plurality of remote sensor nodes (RSNs), and a gateway controller. An RSN of the plurality of RSNs is worn by ESS personnel, the gateway controller is mounted to an ESS vehicle, and the RSN is configured to wirelessly communicate with the gateway controller. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150123 | IPTV SERVICE PROVISION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FIXED AND MOBILE DEVICES - An Internet Protocol (IP) TeleVision (IPTV) service provision method and system is provided for providing both fixed and mobile device users with IPTV services. The IPTV service provision method of the present invention includes establishing, when a Mobile-IPTV terminal function (M-ITF) including a first Open IPTV Terminal Function (OITF) having a plurality of functional entities and an embedded gateway having a plurality gateway functions detects a gateway function of an IPTV Terminal Function (ITF) including a second OITF having a plurality of functional entities and a plurality of gateways, a link with the gateway function of the ITF; disabling the embedded gateway; requesting a service provider network for an IPTV service via the gateway function of the ITF; and establishing a service link with the service provider network to received the IPTV service. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150124 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK COMPRISING A LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method is provided for use by a subscriber device associated with a LAN comprised in a wireless network, to enable provisioning of services to another subscriber device associated with that LAN. The method comprises the steps of: (i) at the first subscriber device, receiving an outgoing packet generated by the other subscriber device associated, wherein that outgoing packet has been tagged with a VLAN label; (ii) forwarding the outgoing packet towards an address being a source MAC address the subscriber device; (iii) associating a DSCP value with the outgoing packet; (iv) removing VLAN label and Ethernet MAC layer from the outgoing packet and forwarding the remaining IP packet to a MAC convergence sub-layer; (v) at the MAC convergence sub-layer, forwarding the outgoing packet to a service flow determined by using a DSCP value associated with the outgoing packet; and forwarding the outgoing packet along an air-link service flow connection that corresponds to the respective DSCP associated with the outgoing packet. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150125 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RECEIVED CHANNEL POWER INDICATOR (RCPI) MEASUREMENT - A received channel power indicator (RCPI) value is used as a measure of the received RF power in the selected channel, measured at the antenna connector. This parameter is a measure by the PHY sublayer of the received RF power in the channel measured over the PLCP preamble and over the entire received frame. RCPI is a monotonically increasing, logarithmic function of the received power level defined in dBm. | 06-17-2010 |
20100157960 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SUPPORTING CONTROL BY MULTIPLE APPLICATIONS - A computing device configurable as a wireless network access point that can be controlled from multiple applications. The computing device provides an interface through which applications may input commands to change the state of the access point. The interface responds to these commands and other events, such as association or disassociation of a wireless client, in a manner that does not disrupt the applications or devices using the access point. To determine an appropriate response to any event, the interface may maintain state information, including a count of the number of applications and/or wireless devices that have taken action indicating an operating state of the wireless access point. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157961 | Method and Apparatus for Scheduling Communication Traffic Flows - In one or more embodiments of the disclosed technology, an Access Point (AP) schedules communication traffic flows or service tasks between an Access Point (AP) and one or more member stations in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). The communication traffic flows or service tasks may include both control and management flows and data traffic flows. The communication traffic flows or service tasks may include traffic flows or streams of different types, each of which may have different service intervals. The order of service tasks can be changed from cycle to cycle, randomly, by rotation, or based on historical delay records. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157962 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME IN WIRELESS LAN - The transmission delay of a voice frame can be reduced by performing internal collision resolution and frame aggregation according to the presence or absence of a voice frame awaiting transmission in a MAC layer, thereby reducing an end-to-end voice transmission delay time for a VoIP service. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157963 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING MOBILITY TO MOBILE NODE IN PACKET TRANSPORT NETWORK, PACKET TRANSPORT NETWORK SYSTEM AND GATEWAY SWITCH - A method for providing mobility of a mobile node in a packet transport network, and a packet transport network system are provided. The packet transport network system includes a plurality of gateway switches configured in a plurality of packet transport access networks to connect a packet transport core network and transmit/receive a packet to/from a certain terminal via a certain access switch. When the certain terminal moves, each gateway switch updates a tunnel mapping and management table according to the movement of the certain terminal, allocates a pre-set tunnel by using information included in the tunnel mapping and management table, and transmits/receives a packet to/from a counterpart terminal via the allocated tunnel. Thus, a packet loss and delay due to the influence of handover occurring when the mobile node moves between networks can be minimized and the handover procedure can be simplified. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157964 | SERVER TO GUIDE RECONNECTION IN MOBILE INTERNET, METHOD FOR GUIDING SERVER RECONNECTION, AND SERVER RECONNECTION METHOD - If a terminal attempts a connection to an Internet site while a server in charge of the site is under maintenance, a connection request may be denied and an error message is sent to the terminal. After the server maintenance returns to a connection enabled state, a connection guide message is sent to notify the terminal. The server includes a communication unit, a message generator, a storage unit to store identification information of the terminal, and a controller. The server generates the error message if the connection attempt occurs while the server is in a connection disabled state, generates the connection guide message if the connection disabled state is released, and transmits the messages to the terminal. The server performing the connection management function may be a content server or a connection management server. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157965 | Dynamic preamble detection - A data packet, comprising a preamble and the preamble comprising a plurality of synchronization bits, is received where the preamble may be of either a first preamble type or a second preamble type. Channel estimation is performed using at least a first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits. It is determined whether the preamble is of the first preamble type or of the second preamble type, where the determination overlaps in least in part with the channel estimation. The performance of the channel estimation is controlled such that: in the event it is determined the preamble is of the first preamble type, the performance of the channel estimation continues for a second portion of the plurality of synchronization bits, adjacent to the first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits, after the processing of the first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits; in the event it is determined the preamble is of the second preamble type, the performance of the channel estimation ends after processing the first portion of the plurality of synchronization bits. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157966 | THROUGHPUT IN MULTI-RATE WIRELESS NETWORKS USING VARIABLE-LENGTH PACKETS AND OTHER TECHNIQUES - In a wireless communication network having a plurality of devices operating at different data rates that contend for access to the network, an apparatus is provided that assigns network access parameters so as to control throughput on the network. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157967 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE AS WELL AS COMPUTER PROGRAM - Communication performed within a network including a plurality of communication stations is provided, in which when an access control is performed so that communication timing of a packet can not collide with that of another station by detecting a signal which is transmitted from another station, “a header area processed not to become easily an error such as a physical layer header portion of a packet” which is transmitted from a communication station is made to have at least information which is required for extracting information in a payload of the packet and a field for controlling an access reservation of transmission of a packet which is generated as a result of transmission of another packet so that processing using the field can be performed. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157968 | HANDLING OF MULTIMEDIA CALL SESSIONS AND ATTACHMENTS USING MULTI-NETWORK SIMULCASTING - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of multimedia information using simulcasting using a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information during exchanges between access devices over a wireless wide area network. The wireless wide area network may intercept multimedia information, and may, for example, determine that the access device of the recipient is incompatible with the multimedia information. The wide area network may then redirect the multimedia information to a broadband access gateway that may cause the storage of the received multimedia information. In another representative embodiment of the present invention, the wide area network may adapt intercepted multimedia information to be compatible with the access device of the recipient, and may also redirect the original intercepted multimedia information to a broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may then cause the original intercepted multimedia information to be stored for later access. A recipient of the multimedia attachment or information may be notified of the redirection of the multimedia attachment or information, and may retrieve the stored multimedia information using a wired or wireless access device. | 06-24-2010 |
20100165956 | OFDM COGNITIVE RADIO WITH ZERO OVERHEAD SIGNALLING OF DELETED SUBCARRIERS FREQUENCIES - A system, device and method are described for suppressing certain sub-carrier frequencies within a multi-path transmission system and efficiently notifying a receiver ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100165957 | PROVIDING A CELLULAR NETWORK WITH CONNECTIVITY TO A DIFFERENT NETWORK - Among other things, a system for use in wireless communication includes a first device communicating via a first protocol in a first network, a cellular device communicating via a second protocol in a cellular network, the second protocol being incompatible with the first protocol, and an access point in the cellular network, the access point being accessible by the cellular device and being configured to enable communication between the first device and the cellular device. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165958 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING FAIR ASSOCIATION OF CLIENT DEVICES WITH ACCESS POINTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for facilitating association of a client device with an access point in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the access point receiving at least one client parameter and required throughput from the client device. The access point computes an achievable transmission rate for the client device based on the client parameter. The access point then estimates throughput for the client device based on the achievable transmission rate. Thereafter, the access point computes a utility value considering an association with the client device. The utility value is based oil the estimated throughput and the required throughput of the client device. The access point then determines a possibility of an association of the client device based on the utility value. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165959 | MULTI-RADIO CONTROLLER AND METHODS FOR PREVENTING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN CO-LOCATED TRANSCEIVERS - Embodiments of a multi-radio controller and methods for preventing interference between co-located transceivers are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the multi-radio controller operates within a multi-radio device and is configured to cause a wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver to transmit a triggering frame after an active period of a wireless wide-area network (WWAN) transceiver. The triggering frame indicates the duration of a transmission opportunity, which may be restricted to the time between active periods of the WWAN. In response to receipt of the triggering frame, the WLAN access point is configured to transmit a downlink data frame within the transmission opportunity. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165960 | PERSONAL ACCESS POINT MEDIA SERVER - In general, media data is stored in a storage medium of a mobile base station. The mobile base station transmits the media data from the mobile base station to a handheld device through a packet data protocol context. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165961 | SOCIAL NETWORKING AND ADVERTISEMENTS IN A MOBILE DEVICE ON A LOCAL PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for media access control (MAC) layer processing to support social networking and advertisements over the MAC layer of a local personal area network (PAN). An application interface permits a service category corresponding to the application to be selected, and further permits service announcements corresponding to the application to be advertised. Generator logic may generate the service announcements to be advertised. The MAC layer processor inserts the service announcements into beacons in the local MAC layer of the local PAN and also receives advertisements from other devices over the MAC layer of the local PAN. Monitor logic can monitor the MAC layer of the local PAN for advertisements corresponding to the selected service category. The monitor logic is also operatively coupled with the application interface for displaying advertised services corresponding to the selected service category. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165962 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION OF DATA PACKETS BASED ON DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION STANDARDS, A DUAL PLATFORM COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER AND A WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER - A dual platform communication controller, a method of controlling communication of data packets based on different communication standards and a wireless transceiver. In one embodiment, the dual platform communication controller includes: (1) a signal interpreter configured to recognize first data packets based on a first communication standard and second data packets based on a second communication standard and (2) a traffic manager coupled to the signal interpreter and configured to dynamically control communication of the second data packets including active second data packets and allocate bandwidth for communication of the first and second data packets. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165963 | ROBUST UNICAST/BROADCAST/MULTICAST COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - Methods and apparatus for implementing a robust unicast/broadcast/multicast protocol are provided. In one aspect, a method of avoiding collision of intra-basic service set unicast, broadcast or multicast transmissions notifies stations in the basic service set of a reserved transmit opportunity for a unicast, broadcast or multicast transmission. Transmissions from at least one station in the basic service set are deferred until after the reserved unicast, broadcast or multicast transmit opportunity. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165964 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication apparatus that transmits data in certain communication interval to a receiving apparatus, using one or more communication channels among a plurality of adjacent communication channels, is provided. The apparatus includes: a setting unit configured to set the one or more communication channels for transmitting the data; a transmission unit configured to transmit the data using the one or more set communication channels; and a detection unit configured to detect interference with other wireless communication apparatuses, when the transmission unit transmits the data using the one or more set communication channels; wherein the setting unit changes the number of the one or more communication channels based on a time duration that the data transmission has been restrained due to the detected interference, and the communication interval. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165965 | DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A method of data transfer between wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) is performed by a sending communication device soliciting environment information relating to active communication devices operating within the local area of the WTRU. The local area of the WTRU may be determined by an environment variable that may be configured to indicate a search radius. Within the local area, information relating to active candidate WTRUs is received through a communication peripheral. User actions on the user interface are converted to electromechanical signals which act as an input along with the environment information to select a target WTRU from the candidate WTRUs to receive the data transfer. The environment information and user input are used to uniquely discriminate the target WTRU as the intended recipient of the data transfer. Transmission instructions are generated based on the solicited information and the user input. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165966 | DYNAMIC APPROPRIATION OF AT LEAST ONE MULTIMEDIA DEVICE DURING CALL SET-UP - The invention relates to a method of dynamic appropriation of at least one second multimedia device by a first device situated in a geographical area in which said at least one second multimedia device is situated in the event of a request to set up a call between the first device and a third device, the method including a step of setting up a first signaling link between a server and the first device and a step of controlling the second and third devices from said server with a view to setting up between the second and third devices at least one first payload data stream forming a first part of said call. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165967 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM USING SPACE-TIME BLOCK CODING (STBC) HAVING BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY WITH PRIOR STANDARDS - A method of communicating data to a receiving antenna from N transmitting antennas, where N is an integer, includes the steps of determining whether a legacy transmission mode has been selected, producing N data streams from outbound data, and applying the N data streams to a space/time encoder to produce N encoded signals. When the legacy transmission mode has not been selected, the N encoded signals are transmitting from N transmitting antennas and when the legacy transmission mode has been selected, the one encoded signal is transmitted from one of the N transmitting antennas. The legacy transmission mode allows receivers to receive and process transmitted signals when the receivers are only configured to receive the transmitted signals from a single transmitting antenna. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165968 | Wireless LAN Control over a Wired Network - Apparatus for mobile communication includes a switch and a plurality of access points, which are arranged in a wireless local area network (WLAN) to communicate over the air on a common frequency channel with a mobile station using a common basic service set identification (BSSID) for all the access points. The access points are coupled by a LAN to the switch so that upon receiving at one or more of the access points an uplink signal transmitted over the WLAN by the mobile station on the common frequency channel, the one or more of the access points convey messages responsively to the uplink signal over the LAN to the switch. A manager node is coupled to the switch so as to receive the messages and is adapted to process the messages so as to select one of the access points to respond to the uplink signal. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165969 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication system of the invention comprises a plurality of communication stations decentralized-autonomously construct a network without having a relation between a control station and a station to be controlled under a communication circumstance where a plurality of channels are prepared. In this case, each of the communication stations prepares a plurality of operation modes for activating transmitting and receiving operations, informs the own operation mode, and receives information regarding operation modes of peripheral stations to manage its operation mode of each of the peripheral stations. | 07-01-2010 |
20100172332 | Method and apparatus for controlling a vocoder mode in a packet switched voice wirelss network - A method for controlling speech vocoder rates in a packet switched voice wireless network, comprises a base station included in the network controlling the adaptive multirate (AMR) codec rate. The network may be in accordance with LTE standards and the base station be an eNB. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172333 | Method of conditionally routing a call made to a fixed telephone number - The invention relates to a method of routing a call made by a calling party to a fixed telephone number of a called party, wherein the call is routed to one or more mobile terminals ( | 07-08-2010 |
20100172334 | WIRELESS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AGGREGATED PACKETS - Embodiments of a wireless network and method for communicating aggregated packets are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an aggregation header frame that identifies the originator is included in an aggregation of media-access control (MAC) frames to allow the originator to be easily identified when none of the MAC frames are properly received. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172335 | Data transmission method and apparatus based on Wi-Fi multimedia - An apparatus can transmit data based on Wi-Fi Multimedia. The apparatus utilizes different retransmission limits for different service types or access categories. Therefore, it is possible to perform data transmission conforming to characteristics of specific services. In particular, the retransmission limit for a data transfer service emphasizing a real-time constraint is set to a value less than that for a data transfer service emphasizing an error-free delivery constraint. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172336 | Periodic Location Update Handling - A method and apparatus are provided for providing periodic location updates to a MSC-S in a CS core network providing CS services for a terminal attached to a PS cell of a radio access network such as an LTE radio access network. The method comprises sending periodic location updates from a PCSC in the core network to the MSC-S for as long as the terminal is registered with the PCSC or the PCSC receives location updates from the terminal. | 07-08-2010 |
20100177749 | Methods of and apparatus for programming and managing diverse network components, including electronic-ink based display devices, in a mesh-type wireless communication network - A wireless communication network for programming and monitoring a plurality of network-managed devices, including electronic-ink based display devices, comprising a network management computer system, a network gateway device, one or more wireless network routers, a plurality of network-managed devices, and a network coordinator. The wireless communication network of the present invention bridges the gap between wireless display networks, wireless sensor networks, and the worlds of passive, active and partially-active RFID and real-time locating systems. The wireless communication network of the present invention allows conventional communication network protocols to operate in more flexible ways in dynamic, diverse, and heterogeneous application environments, in fields including retail, healthcare, transport, logistics, manufacturing, education, etc. At the same time, the wireless communication network of the present invention is preferably based on the IEEE 802.15.4 network layer standard, which offers low-cost wireless network communication between a large number of wireless network end-devices. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177750 | Wireless Diplay sensor communication network - A wireless sensor communication network supporting a plurality of electronic-ink display sensor devices adapted for use in environments where a local source of electrical power is not available at the point of sensing/monitoring, and there is a need to display sensed data at the point of sensing/monitoring, and minimize the level of servicing required to maintain the wireless sensors. The wireless sensor communication network includes a network gateway device, one or more wireless network routers, a plurality of wireless electronic-ink display sensor devices, and a network coordinator. Each wireless electronic-ink display sensor device comprises: an addressable electronic-ink based display module providing a display surface on which to display graphics. Each wireless electronic-ink display sensor device also includes a power source module including an electrochemical battery, and also a sensor module for sensing a parameter or condition associated with the ambient environment in which the wireless electronic-ink display sensor device is located, generating environmental data representative of the sensed parameter or condition, from which environmental data packets are generated by an onboard programmed processor. The programmed processor, a RF transceiver and a RF antenna cooperate to transmit environmental data packets over the second communication medium, for reception by a network management computer network, and wherein the programmed processor and the addressable electronic-ink based display module cooperate to display the environmental data on the display surface. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177751 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DELIVERING CONTENT OVER A LOCAL WIRELESS SYSTEM - A local wireless system comprises a plurality of wireless communication units to transmit to and receive wireless signals from one or more wireless devices and a soft switch coupled to the plurality of wireless communication units to obtain connection information for each of the one or more wireless devices. The soft switch comprises a memory to store the connection information and location-based data associated with a service area of the plurality of wireless communication units; and a gateway to process non-real-time data requests and provide an interface to a packet network. The soft switch is operable to push the location-based data from the memory to at least a subset of the one or more wireless devices using the connection information stored in the memory. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177752 | NETWORK-BASED MICRO MOBILITY IN CELLULAR NETWORKS USING EXTENDED VIRTUAL PRIVATE LAN SERVICE - A new architecture provides network-based mobility in cellular networks that is built on Internet Protocol (IP)/Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technologies, such as Virtual Private Local Area Network (LAN) Service (VPLS), the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and BGP MPLS Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). The architecture consists of several building blocks that provide functionality for different aspects of cellular network mobility. One building block is network-based macro mobility in IP/MPLS networks. The macro mobility techniques described herein are built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block relates to transferring subscriber context between network devices while preserving the IP address of the subscriber. The techniques described herein provide a subscriber context transfer mechanism for mobile subscriber management that is built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block of the mobility architecture is network-based micro mobility based on VPLS. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177753 | Method for Operating a Wireless Mesh Data Network with Multiple Nodes - A method for operating a wireless mesh data network with multiple nodes, wherein data frames are transmitted from a source node via one or more intermediate nodes to a destination node, wherein the source node, the one or more intermediate nodes, and the destination node constitute network nodes of the data network, wherein during transmission of a data frame, at least some of the network nodes which receive the data frame, using a precursor list for the destination nodes which is assigned to the destination nodes of the data frame, check whether the network node sending the data frame is in the precursor list, and wherein in the case of a positive result, the data frame is transmitted to a further network node, and in the case of a negative result, the data frame is thrown out or processed by an error recovery routine. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177754 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING OVER MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS BY USING ROAMING PROFILES - There is disclosed a system and method for enabling transmission of data between an application pair, a first one of the applications in a nomadic/mobile subsystem and a second one of the applications in a ground subsystem comprising a first router within the nomadic/mobile subsystem, the first router interconnected with the first application, a second router within the ground subsystem, the second router interconnected with the second application, and a secure data transfer tunnel established between the first router and the second router, the tunnel comprising a plurality of communication pipes, each one of the plurality of pipes having associated therewith one of a plurality of different communication networks and at least one filtering rule dictating circumstances under which the pipe can be used to transmit data. When at least one attribute of the data to be transmitted matches the at least one filtering rule of a matching one of the plurality of pipes, the transmission of the data between the application pair is assigned to the matching pipe. In a particular embodiment each of said different communication networks comprises a network driver, and each of said plurality of pipes further comprises a roaming profile consisting of a set of rules defining how the pipe can transmit and receive data packets from at least one of said network drivers. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177755 | HIGH THROUGHPUT FEATURES IN 11S MESH NETWORKS - The addition of high throughput capability elements to beacon frames and peer link action frames in wireless mesh networks enable the utilization of desirable features without further modifications to the network. Rules can be established for high throughput mesh point protection in a mesh network, Space-time Block Code (STBC) operations and 20/40 MHz operation selections. However, features such as PSMP (power save multi-poll) and PCO (phased coexistence operations) are barred from implementation to prevent collisions. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177756 | ASSOCIATION METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE CHANNELS - An association method in a wireless LAN system using multiple channels includes: broadcasting a beacon frame including first channel information which is information on first available frequency channels of an access point; receiving an association request frame from a wireless station having received the beacon frame, the association request frame including the second channel information which is information on second available frequency channels of the wireless station among the first available frequency channels; and transmitting an association response frame to the wireless station, the association response frame including third channel information which is information on frequency channel allocated to the wireless station. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177757 | METHOD FOR SETTING TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY AND FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE CHANNEL - A transmission opportunity setting method in a wireless LAN system using multiple channels includes: receiving a request-to-send (RTS) frame from a wireless station, the RTS frame including information on a wireless LAN mode of the wireless station; and transmitting a clear-to-send (CTS) frame to the wireless station according to at least one of the number of remaining available channels among the multiple channels and the wireless LAN mode of the wireless station. | 07-15-2010 |
20100182982 | Method for Broadcasting Alert Message in Mobile Multi-Hop Networks Using Inferred Distance Prioritization - A method and system broadcasts an alert packet in a wireless multi-hop network of nodes. An event is sensed in a source node of the network, and an alert packet is broadcast in response to sensing the event. The alert packet is received in a set of candidate nodes within a broadcast range of the source node. Each candidate node infers a distance between the candidate node and the source node based on a receive power of the received alert packet, and determines a priority for rebroadcasting the alert packet, wherein the priority is based on the distance to minimizing a probability of collisions while rebroadcasting the alert packet and extend a range of the rebroadcasting. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182983 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS AS A SERVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The system comprises a WLAN network controller and a plurality of access points. The WLAN network controller is in communication with each of the plurality of access points via a transport data network. The WLAN network controller is configured to perform one or more network control functions for the benefit of the plurality of access points. The network control functions may be selected from management and operation, client authentication, mobility, and per-user administration. The WLAN network controller is remotely located and operated with respect to the plurality of access points. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182984 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS AS A SERVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The system comprises a WLAN network controller and a plurality of access points. The WLAN network controller is in communication with each of the plurality of access points via a transport data network. The WLAN network controller is configured to perform one or more network control functions for the benefit of the plurality of access points. The network control functions may be selected from management and operation, client authentication, mobility, and per-user administration. The WLAN network controller is remotely located and operated with respect to the plurality of access points. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182985 | Methods, Apparatuses and Computer Program Product For User Equipment Authorization Based on Matching Network Access Technology Specific Identification Information - It is disclosed a method including providing a relation of network access technology-specific identification information (NATSII) of a user equipment or user and network identity-related information (NIRI) of the user equipment, receiving an inquiry comprising network identity-related inquiry information (NIRII), resolving the received NIRII based on the provided relation, and sending a response including the NATSII according to a result of the resolved NIRII; a method including receiving a registration request comprising NIRII from a user equipment or user, obtaining NATSII based on the received NIRII, appending the received NIRII with the obtained NATSII, and sending the appended NIRII; and a method receiving a registration request comprising first NATSII and NIRI, obtaining second NATSII based on the received NIRI, matching the received first NATSII against the obtained second NATSII, and authorizing access for a user equipment based on a result of matching. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182986 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal includes: a communication timing arbitration section adapted to control the allocation of first and second communication protection periods. The communication timing arbitration section exercises control so that the first and second wireless communication terminals use the same frequency band before the first wireless communication terminal enters an active communication period, and also exercises control so that a packet containing a network allocation vector is transmitted according to the second communication scheme, the network allocation vector being adapted to define the communication protection period for the first wireless communication terminal. | 07-22-2010 |
20100182987 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Provided is a method and apparatus for transmitting/receiving data in a wireless communication network. The method for transmitting data from an access point to a plurality of stations in a wireless communication network includes: simultaneously transmitting request-to-send messages to the plurality of stations, the request-to-send messages having transmission order information of clear-to-send messages; receiving the clear-to-send messages transmitted from the stations according to the transmission order information; and simultaneously transmitting the data to the stations which have transmitted the clear-to-send messages. | 07-22-2010 |
20100189083 | WIRELESS LOCAL NETWORK RECONNECTING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless local network reconnecting system and method is provided. The method detects a connection-lost signal generated when a network node of the wireless local network group lost connection. A reconnecting coordinate is calculated according to the connection-lost signal and transmitted to the connection-lost network node through an external communication network. Afterwards, the method guides the connection-lost network node to move to the reconnecting coordinate and reconnect with the wireless local network group wirelessly. Since the external communication network is used to connect with the connection-lost network node, the connection-lost network node is able to reconnect with the wireless local network group through the proposed method. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189084 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMAL CONTROL OF DATA DELIVERY PATHS FOR A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A network controller within a femtocell may be operable to control communication of data among devices within a communication system comprising the femtocell and one or more other femtocells, end-point devices, base stations and/or access points and with devices external to the communication system. The network controller may receive and/or analyze status, measurements and/or operating constraints of one or more of the devices. Quality of service constraints, latency constraints, data type constraints and/or security constraints for communication of the data may be determined. The network controller may allocate physical and/or logical resources, may control security and/or quality of service and/or may allocate bandwidth for the communication of the data. The network controller may assign one or more of the devices comprised by the communication system to handle the communication of the data. The data may be communicated via wired, optical and/or wireless interfaces. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189085 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HIGH RELIABILITY DELIVERY OF CONTENT TO A PLURALITY OF USERS VIA A PLURALITY OF FEMTOCELLS - A cellular enabled device may be operable to receive replicas of content that are communicated from a plurality of femtocells via transmit diversity. The content may comprise voice, video and/or data. A location of the cellular enabled device may be determined and/or communicated to each of the plurality of femtocells. Synchronization may enable the transmission of the content replicas based on the location of the cellular enabled device. Transmission times of the content replicas may be adjusted based on a location of the cellular enabled device. Transmission power and/or gain of the content replicas that are transmitted from each of the plurality of femtocells may be adjusted based on the location of the cellular enabled device. The content replicas may be received via different ones of a plurality of wireless communication standards. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189086 | MOBILE ACCESS POINT APPARATUS FOR AD HOC NETWORK - The present invention comprises a mobile access point having a processor, a memory, a computer-readable medium, a radio frequency transceiver coupled to the processor, a communications interface coupled to the memory, and software that, when executed, causes the mobile access point to act as an access point in an ad hoc network. The mobile access point may also be coupled to a portable computer by means of the communications interface. The portable computer may be loaded with software tools that allows a user to troubleshoot a network node which has lost connectivity with the timely organized ad hoc network. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189087 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT - A mobile phone terminal receives current position information thereof from a public wireless base station, and stores the current position information. The mobile phone terminal reads a profile name corresponding to the position information from a public wireless base station-WLAN profile association table, and sets the WLAN profile as a scan profile. Then, the mobile phone terminal scans the WLAN profile when the mobile phone terminal is located outside the WLAN service area. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189088 | DYNAMIC NETWORKING MODES METHOD AND APPARATUS - A portable electronic device is disclosed. The portable electronic device includes a wireless transceiver, a processor coupled to the wireless transceiver, a memory coupled to the processor and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor. The program provides automatic transitioning between a wireless infrastructure communication mode to an ad-hoc communication mode. The infrastructure mode is used when a request from a mobile device is received to access a communications network. The ad-hoc mode is used when a request from the mobile device is received to access resources on the portable electronic device. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189089 | COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE DEVICE FOR PERSONAL ELECTRONIC DEVICES (PEDS) OPERATING ON A GENERAL AVIATION AIRCRAFT AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A communications device is to be removably positioned in an aircraft that includes a radio, and a first modem coupled thereto. The communications device includes a portable housing to be removably positioned within the aircraft, and a second modem carried by the portable housing and coupled to the first modem. A wireless access point is carried by the portable housing to provide a wireless local area network (WLAN) within the aircraft to communicate with a personal electronic device (PED) carried by an occupant of the aircraft. A data router is coupled between the wireless access point and the second modem. A processor is carried by the portable housing to couple the PED in communications with the radio via the WLAN. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189090 | LOCAL AREA NETWORK HAVING MULTIPLE CHANNEL WIRELESS ACCESS - A communication network having at least one access point supports wireless communication among a plurality of wireless roaming devices via a first and a second wireless channel. The access point comprises a first and a second transceiver. The first and second transceivers operate on the first and second wireless channels, respectively. Each of the plurality of wireless roaming devices are capable of communicating on the first and second wireless channel. In one embodiment, the first wireless channel is used to exchange data, while the second channel is used to manage such exchanges as well as access to the first channel. In an alternate embodiment, both channels are used to support communication flow, however the first channel supports a protocol that is more deterministic than that of the second channel. Allocation of ones of the plurality of wireless roaming devices from one channel to the next may occur per direction from the access point. It may also result from decisions made by each of the wireless roaming devices made independent of the access point. For example, a decision may be made based on the data type being transferred or based on the current channel load. Such factors may also be used by the access point for allocation determinations. In addition, allocation may be based on the type of roaming device involved, such as allocating peripherals to a slower channel. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189091 | SPATIAL PUNCTURING APPARATUS, METHOD, AND SYSTEM - Stations in a N×N multiple-input-multiple-output (MIMO) wireless network always puncture the weakest spatial channel. N−1 spatial channels are always used regardless of the channel state. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195631 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING FROM MISCONFIGURATION IN A WLAN - A method of recovering from misconfiguration of APs and other networked components includes storing a “safe” configuration, implementing a configuration request received from a network operations center (NOC), then reverting to the stored configuration in the event that connectivity is not restored with the NOC within a predetermined time period. The NOC is configured to transmit one or more handshake messages to the AP after sending the configuration request. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195632 | ACCESS POINT DETECTION FOR WIRELESS NETWORKING - Methods and systems for detecting one or more access points in a wireless network are disclosed. The location coordinates of a wireless communication device (WCD) are first determined. Based on comparisons made with the WCD location coordinates, if the WCD is within range of a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point and remains stationary for a preset time interval, a wireless local area network (WLAN) radio interface may be activated within the WCD to connect to the WLAN via the access point. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195633 | MAPPING SERVICE COMPONENTS IN A BROADCAST ENVIRONMENT - Services and service components in a broadcast network may be mapped to disparate physical layer transmission channels (PLPs) using logical layer pipes (LLPs). The use of LLPs allows different service components of a single service to be mapped to physical layer transmission channels (PLPs). Accordingly, service components may be shared among different services. Additionally or alternatively, different functions (e.g., different error detection or correction protocols) may be applied to each service components of a service. A receiver may identify services, service components and corresponding PLPs based on LLP identifiers. The receiver may then access and receive desired services and service components through the identified PLPs. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195634 | Method to provide connectivity and power for different aircraft sub-systems varying in levels of criticality and intended purposes while using a single partitioned Airborne Local Area Network (ALAN) - System for providing non-flight critical aircraft sub-system communication, over an ALAN, meeting DO-254/DO-178 certification. This system deterministically makes data available to each aircraft sub-system without regard to specific bandwidth requirements. This system network supports functions that are certified on a non-interference basis. The system network deterministically places all non-required functionality into a low priority to assure that all required data functions sets are not dropped. One aspect of this system is how the clients are able to join sessions. In this system, network clients are preprogrammed based on their hardware coding to be able to join a specific LVAN, or LVANs, in accordance with their predetermined functions. The present system is an ALAN based on a ring Ethernet topology, for redundancy, which provides two paths to each connection point without requiring all the wiring associated with a star wiring topology. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195635 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION - A wireless communication system including a gateway device that connects a core network and a wireless access network. The wireless access network includes a virtual base station that includes a representative base station connected to the gateway device and a plurality of unrepresentative base stations, which are subordinate to the representative base station. The presence of the unrepresentative base stations is hidden from the gateway device and an adjacent base station. | 08-05-2010 |
20100202422 | METHOD FOR SELECTIVE DISTRIBUTION OF COMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE - A wireless communication system is provided for configuring a multihop chain while suppressing the cost and complexity. In this system, one network controller (NC) ( | 08-12-2010 |
20100202423 | SERVICE ADVERTISEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device is operable to receive broadcast information communicated by a network access device specifying one or more advertised services provided via the network access device. The communication device then determines whether to connect via the network access device based on the received information. The network access device comprises an IEEE 802.11 access point, a user end-point device, a private access point network access device, and/or a wired network routing device. The advertisement broadcast is performed via beacon signals, other broadcast messages, and/or utilizing advertisement framing procedure, wherein service related information are set directly into beacons signal messaging, and/or communicated via advertisement subframes. The advertisement communication may comprise a multi-stage procedure, where a first stage enables obtaining service related information without attachment and/or full login into the network access device. User authentication and/or validation may be performed in subsequent stages. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202424 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DECODING BROADCAST PAGING MESSAGES IN WIMAX NETWORKS - Embodiments of the present disclosure propose a method for addressing MAC protocol data units which include MOB_PAG-ADV messages in an attempt to improve the success rate of decoding BS broadcast paging messages. For example, certain embodiments propose parsing and continuing to decode MPDUs with MOB_PAG-ADV messages although the corresponding CRC failed. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202425 | DUAL MODE UNIT FOR SHORT RANGE, HIGH RATE AND LONG RANGE, LOWER RATE DATA COMMUNICATIONS - A technique for communication with a local area network (LAN) via a wireless connection determines whether a first short-range, high-speed, wireless communication path is available and connects to the LAN using a longer range, lower speed wireless communication path if the short-range, high-speed wireless communication path is not available. The low-range, high-speed wireless communication path is a wireless communication path is a wireless LAN connection such as an IEE 802.11-compliant wireless LAN and the long-range, low-sped wireless communication mode is a cellular CDMA-type connection. Determining whether the first IEEE 802.11 mode is available can be done by detecting a beacon signal, or transmitting a probe request message and detecting a probe response message in response to the probe request, indicating the presence or availability of the short-range, high-speed wireless communication path. Alternatively, the availability of short-range, high-speed wireless communication path can be detected by simply detecting activity on it. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202426 | Wireless station and wireless LAN system - A wireless LAN system in which data communication between a wireless station whose connection method as a method for wireless connection can be set to one of a plurality of connection methods and a wireless access point whose connection method has been preset to one of the connection methods is made possible by setting the connection method of the wireless station to a method identical with the connection method of the wireless access point. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202427 | Apparatus and Method of Flow Movement for Network-Based Mobility Management Protocol - An apparatus comprising a local mobility anchor (LMA) configured to forward a flow to a mobile node (MN) via a first mobile access gateway (MAG) in a first network and via a second MAG in a second network, and to bind the flow to the second MAG from the first MAG, wherein the first MAG is configured to manage the MN mobility in the first network and the second MAG is configured to manage the MN mobility in the second network, wherein the first MAG sends a binding update comprising a flow description information to the LMA, and wherein the LMA replies to the binding update with a binding acknowledgement. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202428 | System and Method for Concurrently Utilizing Multiple System Identifiers - System and Method for providing access to multiple wireless service providers (WSPs) on a shared network infrastructure. The system includes a plurality of access points (Aps) coupled to a network which may be distributed in airports, mass-transit stations, businesses, etc. The network may couple to a wide area network, such as the Internet. Each AP may include a plurality of virtual Aps (VAPs), each corresponding to a WSP. A portable computing device (PCD) of a user stores identification information indicating a WSP of a plurality of possible WSPs, and which may include an access level of the user. Each AP “listens for” or detects identification information associated with numerous WSPs. When the AP receives the identification information from the PCD, it determines the VAP/WSP for the PCD using the identification information. Network access is then provided to the PCD through the determined WSP at the determined access level. | 08-12-2010 |
20100208711 | System and method for efficiently populating an access point database - A system and method for populating an access point database includes a network of access points that are implemented to transmit access point signals by utilizing a wireless broadcasting procedure. One or more mobile devices are then configured to wirelessly receive and analyze the access point signals to produce access point scan data corresponding to the access points. A location server receives and analyzes the access point scan data to determine specific access point locations for the access points. The location server then utilizes the access point locations to populate the access point database. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208712 | Enhancing WLAN performance in the presence of interference - A wireless access point coherently receives signals transmitted from client devices and from interfering devices, measures noise and interference capture samples from the received signals, and computes a characterization of noise plus interference. Receive gains and threshold levels are adjusted based on the computed noise plus interference characterization. A set of weights for an interference suppression spatial filter are calculated from the measured noise and interference capture samples and used to produce a filtered signal by spatially filtering the received signals such that interference is spatially nulled in the filtered signal. The method may also include setting PHY parameters at the wireless access point based on the computed noise plus interference characterization. In some embodiments, a protection transmission is transmitted from the wireless access point, requesting connected client devices to suspend transmissions during a specified time period. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208713 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208714 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208715 | Classifier for communication device - Classifier for communication device. A communication device includes a classifier and a number of PHY (physical layer) receivers communicatively coupled thereto that enable the communication device to process various received signal types. Each of the PHY receivers is operable to perform pre-processing of a received frame (or packet) of data and to calculate a confidence level indicating whether the received frame is intended for that particular PHY receiver; this pre-processing does not involve processing (e.g., demodulation and/or decoding) of the received frame. Those PHY receivers having sufficiently high confidence levels assert claims to the classifier for the received frame. The classifier is operable to arbitrate between competing claims by 2 or more PHY receivers and to ensure that the received frame is provided to the PHY receiver for which it is intended. | 08-19-2010 |
20100215024 | MOBILE PEER-TO-PEER CONTENT SHARING METHOD AND SYSTEM - Embodiment of the disclosure set forth methods for sharing data in a wireless network. Some example methods include storing in a database a content related information associated with a first mobile device, receiving a request for the content related information from a second mobile device, searching the database for the content related information, and transmitting a search result to the second mobile device to enable the transfer of content between the first mobile device and the second mobile device. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215025 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication apparatus for performing a communication parameter configuration process as one of a communication parameter providing apparatus and a communication parameter receiving apparatus, comprises: a first reception unit adapted to receive a communication parameter from another communication apparatus; and an enabling unit adapted to enable a communication parameter providing function for providing a communication parameter to another communication apparatus, after the communication parameter is received. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215026 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING UNIFIED OPERATOR AND RAT MAPPING AND SELECTION SCHEME - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide a unified scheme for selecting an operator and a radio access technology (RAT) by a multi-mode wireless device during a power-up or a handover process. By utilizing the proposed scheme, the mobile station may switch between RATs that are associated with the Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX), 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) or 3GPP2 standards. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215027 | Techniques for Flexible and Efficient Beamforming - A method includes generating a first data unit to be transmitted during a first time period, including generating a field that specifies a first number of beamforming training data units that can be communicated during a first training session; processing a second data unit received during a second time period, including determining whether the first training session was accepted based on a first field of the second data unit, and determining a second number of beamforming training data units that can be communicated during a second training session based on a second field of the second data unit; and if the first training session was accepted, causing the specified first number of beamforming training data units to be communicated during the first training session. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215028 | PROVIDING WIRELESS COVERAGE INTO SUBSTANTIALLY CLOSED ENVIRONMENTS - A communication system includes a master host unit, communication links, a remote server unit, an analog communication medium, and remote units. The master host unit communicates analog signals with service provider interfaces using a first set of bands of analog spectrum. The master host unit communicates digitized spectrum in N-bit words across communication links and converts between the first set of bands and N-bit words. The remote server unit communicates N-bit words with the master host unit across communication links and converts between N-bit words and a second set of bands of analog spectrum. The remote server unit communicates the second set of bands with the remote units across the analog communication medium. Each remote unit frequency converts the second set of bands to a third set of bands of analog spectrum and transmits and receives wireless signals, associated with service provider interfaces, over air interfaces. | 08-26-2010 |
20100220697 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-MODE CONVERSATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention proposes a method for performing multi-mode conversations for mobile terminals, comprising the steps of: 1)detecting whether there is Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) available nearby; 2)accessing a network device for correlative location information of another mobile terminal which it intends to communicate with when there is a WLAN available; 3)establishing communication with said another mobile terminal by using said correlative location information via said WLAN after receiving said correlative location information of said another mobile terminal sent back by said network device; and 4)accessing said network device to request updating correlative location information of said mobile terminal when said correlative location information of said mobile terminal changes. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220698 | WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless LAN terminal (AP) transmits a data frame to a counter wireless LAN terminal (STA-j), and receives an ACK frame from STA-j. AP measures a response time from the transmission of the data frame to reception of the ACK frame, and measures a transmission interval time from the previous transmission of the data frame to STA-j to the current transmission. AP includes a memory to store a predetermined set transmission interval time and a set response time for said terminal station. AP re-transmits the data frame when the transmission interval time does not exceed the set transmission interval time and the response time exceeds the set response time, and stores the response time in said memory as the set response time, when the transmission interval time exceeds the set transmission interval time. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220699 | Medium reservation protocol for directional wireless networks - Two wireless communications devices in a wireless network may reserve a period of time for directional data communications between themselves during a Contention Access Period. The technique may include transmitting Clear-to-Send messages to each other, and to any other devices with which either has established a directional link, to prevent interfering transmissions from these other devices. Other devices that have not established a directional link with either of these two may overhear the CTS messages and also refrain from transmitting interfering signals during the reserved time period. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220700 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES BETWEEN AN ACCESS POINT AND A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND PROVIDING A MISSING INFORMATION NOTIFICATION - A method and system for selectively provisioning connections between an access point, which supports telecommunications services over an IP network, and a carrier network includes a network connection and a telephone connector suitable for connecting to a landline telephone, a cordless telephone, or a mobile device. The access point sends a provisioning request, which includes identifying information such as a subscriber identifier and a MAC address, to a network controller. The network controller attempts to find a geographic, street, or other address associated with the connection to be provisioned. If an address is not found, the network controller rejects the connection and sends a missing information notification to the access point. After receiving the missing information notification, the access point controls a user indicator to provide error information. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220701 | Client/Bridge and Method and System for Using Same - The transmission of data is accomplished across a network having wireless and wired interfaces. Data is transferred through a wireless interface from an Access Point to a Client/Bridge and then to one of a Intelligent Electrical Device (IED) connected to the Client/Bridge through a wired connection. Data is transferred from the Access Point to the Client/Bridge through a 4 address mode wireless interface having originator, transmitter, receiver and destination address fields. The originator address uniquely identifies an IED in the overall network, the transmitter address identifies the AP transmitting the data, the receiver address identifies the Client/Bridge receiving the data through the wireless interface while the destination address refers to one of the IEDs connected to the Client/Bridge through the wired interface. Communication can also be performed in reverse from one of the IEDs connected to the Client/Bridge through the wired interface to an IED in the overall network. The Client/Bridge determines context cache information representing the media access control numbers of each of the IEDs connected to the Client/Bridge through the wired interface and transfers this context cache information to the AP. In the event of a failure of the Client/Bridge, the context cache information stored at the AP can be transferred to the Client/Bridge using the wireless interface to facilitate recovery of the Client/Bridge. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220702 | LOW POWER CONTROL FOR WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION - A wireless networking device includes a transceiver that transmits and receives communications over a wireless local area network (WLAN), and a processor cooperatively operable with the transceiver. The processor transmits over the transceiver one WLAN frame of a file transfer to a receiving networking device and then transitioning from transmit power level down to a state of receive power level while waiting for an “ACK” signal to the transmitting. The processor also receives over the transceiver the “ACK” signal from the receiving networking device, and the “ACK” signal triggers going into a doze state of a low power level for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period of time expires and triggers transitioning the processor to a state of receive power level for an inter-frame space while waiting to transmit a next WLAN frame. The low power receive power level is lower than the receive power level. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220703 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING CALL ADMISSION IN IMS - A method and a system for controlling call admission for parallel ringing processes to a realm in an IMS is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a call control message to a called party, determining whether the called party has parallel ringing enabled, if positive, generating a plurality of parallel call control messages, associating to each parallel call control message a parallel ringing identifier indicating that the corresponding call control message is a parallel call control message, receiving a plurality of call control messages directed towards the realm, performing call admission control for this realm by verifying whether a parallel ringing identifier is associated to each call control message directed towards this realm so as to determine if the call control message is a parallel call control message. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220704 | Extended Call Handling Functionality Using Multi-Network Simulcasting - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using simulcasting of multimedia information via a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information simultaneously exchanged by an associated access device via a wide area network. The broadband access gateway may store the received multimedia information locally, within the broadband access gateway, or may communicate the multimedia information to storage accessible from the broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may cause a user of the access device to be notified of the availability of multimedia information for a recorded call, and may communicate the multimedia information to the access device for playback. A user may be notified if storage and bandwidth for the recording of a call is not available. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220705 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-02-2010 |
20100226344 | Method and System for Scheduling Multiple Concurrent Transmissions During a Contention Access Period in a Wireless Communications Network - Aspects of a method and system for scheduling multiple concurrent transmissions during a contention access period in a wireless communications network are presented. Aspects of the system comprise communicating devices (DEVs) within a piconet that are operable to derive a neighborhood map of a piconet. The neighborhood map information may enable a plurality of DEVs to concurrently transmit signals during a given channel time allocation (CTA) time slot. The ability for multiple DEVs to transmit signals concurrently during a single CTA time slot may increase spectral reuse within a wireless communication medium. In another aspect the system, the neighborhood map information may enable individual DEVs to set clear channel assessment (CCA) thresholds. Individual DEVs may utilize CCA threshold information to determine when to transmit signals to one or more destination DEVs and/or at what rate to transmit data via the signals. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226345 | ENCODED INFORMATION READING TERMINAL OPERATING IN INFRASTRUCTURE MODE AND AD-HOC MODE - An encoded information reading (EIR) terminal can comprise a central processing unit (CPU), a memory communicatively coupled to the CPU, an EIR device, and a wireless communication interface communicatively coupled to the CPU. The EIR device can be selected from the group consisting of a bar code reading device, an RFID reading device, and a card reading device. The EIR device can be configured to perform one of: outputting raw message data containing an encoded message, outputting decoded message data corresponding to an encoded message. The wireless communication interface can comprise a first logical communication interface operating on a first frequency channel and a second logical communication interface operating on a second frequency channel. The wireless communication interface can be configured to transmit infrastructure mode beacons. The infrastructure mode beacons can include a service set identifier. The wireless communication interface can be further configured to transmit ad-hoc mode beacons on the second frequency channel. The ad-hoc mode beacons can include an identifier of a mesh path selection protocol. The EIR terminal can be further configured to route MAC frames between the first logical communication interface and the second logical communication interface. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226346 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY PROVISIONING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES BETWEEN AN ACCESS POINT AND A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK USING A SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFIER - A method and system for selectively provisioning services between an access point, which supports telecommunications services over an IP network, and a carrier network includes a network connection and a telephone connector. At least one detection component detects whether a landline telephone is plugged in to the telephone connector. The access point and network are configured to provision telecommunications services based at least in part on an identifier stored in an identification module. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226347 | AUTHORIZING ACCESS TO TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS FOR MOBILE DEVICES, SUCH AS MOBILE DEVICES ACCESSING NETWORKS VIA NON-TRADITIONAL ENTRY POINTS - A system and method for authorizing mobile devices to carrier networks via non-traditional entry points is described. In some examples, the system reviews a registration message sent during establishment of a communication session between the mobile device and the carrier's network to determine the type of access network used by the mobile device. In some cases, the system may identify the base station controller originating the registration message when determining whether the access request came from an IP-based network or other non-traditional entry point. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226348 | UWB COEXISTENCE SCHEME - Roughly described, a first radio is configured to operate according to a first protocol and configured to use a coexistence signaling scheme with a second radio configured to operate according to a second protocol, wherein the coexistence signaling scheme is configured to allow a radio configured to operate according to the second protocol to be co-located and non-interfering with a radio configured to operate according to a protocol different to the first protocol, and wherein the first radio comprises behavioral logic for generating messages for the second radio in accordance with the coexistence signaling scheme to cause the second radio to adopt behavior suitable for coexistence with the first radio. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226349 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus has a transmission unit that transmits a transmit signal in a condition where either acknowledgement or negative acknowledgement is set therein, a reception unit that receives a response signal in response to the transmission signal, a counter that counts the number of times the reception unit has not received the negative acknowledgment signal in response to the transmission signal in which the negative acknowledgement is set, and a control unit that causes the transmission unit to set the negative acknowledgement if a count value of the counter is less than a predetermined value and, if the count value is equal to or larger than the predetermined value, causes the transmission unit to set the acknowledgement. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226350 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATIONG USING INTERNET PROTOCOL - Disclosed is a system and a method for communication using different IPs, i.e. a mobile IP supporting mobility and a simple IP, according to the service by a UE. The method includes network initiated IP allocation (i.e. the network allocates different IPs to the UE) and UE initiated IP allocation (i.e. the UE directly requests an IP corresponding to a specific service). As such, the IP is selected and used based on consideration of continuity of the service to be supported by the UE. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226351 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226352 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
20100226353 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-09-2010 |
20100232401 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SCAN BASED ON LOCATION - A system, apparatus and methods are described that define the frequency in which a scan for a wireless local area network access point ( | 09-16-2010 |
20100232402 | Handling Multiple User Interfaces in an IP Multimedia Subsystem - A method of operating an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network having a plurality of user interfaces. A terminal agent is interposed between a plurality of Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) User Agents and a Serving Call/Session Control Function (S-CSCF) of the IMS network. The terminal agent registers its contact address with the S-CSCF on behalf of the plurality of SIP User Agents and emulates a single SIP User Agent to the S-CSCF. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232403 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING EMERGENCY CALLS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a network element operably couplable to an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem network where the network element has a controller to receive an SIP request associated with a call, determine whether the SIP request comprises an identifier associated with an Emergency Call Session Control Function (E-CSCF) where the identifier was added to the SIP request by the E-CSCF, and provide the call to an emergency network when the identifier is associated with the E-CSCF. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232404 | SCALABLE DISRUPTIVE-RESISTANT COMMUNICATION METHOD - A method for transmitting data in vehicular network comprising determining a communication window between at least two nodes, grouping a plurality of fragments of content together into an aggregate fragment block, forwarding the aggregate fragment block to a target node and assembling the plurality of fragments into the content. The content is divided into the plurality of fragments. A fragment signature is generated for the fragments that contain fragment index information regarding each fragment. Each fragment is unambiguously identified by its signature. A number of fragments grouped into the aggregate fragment block is dependent on the communication window. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232405 | INFORMATION COLLECTION SYSTEM, INFORMATION REGISTRATION SERVER, INFORMATION COLLECTION METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE - A public wireless LAN accessible area collection system includes a mobile terminal device having GPS means, wireless LAN communication means, and data communication means and a server which has storage means and accessible area map generation means and performs data communication with the mobile terminal device. When the wireless LAN communication means recognizes that the mobile terminal device exists in the area in which the mobile terminal device can be connected to the public wireless LAN, it obtains access information in the area. The data communication means transmits location information and access information to the server. The server associates the location information with the access information that are received from the mobile terminal device and stores them in the storage means. The accessible area map generation means applies the location information about the area in which the mobile terminal device can be connected to the public wireless LAN to the map data according to the location information stored in the storage means. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232406 | USING WLAN FOR MEDIA TRANSPORT IN CELLULAR MOBILE NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method of operating a telecommunication network for setting up a call between a first and a second WLAN-enabled mobile terminal. The telecommunication network comprising a first switching node, a second switching node, a gateway switching node, a first WLAN AP serving said first WLAN-enabled mobile terminal and a second WLAN AP serving said second WLAN-enabled mobile terminal. The first and second WLAN AP insert LMT indications into for example DTAP Setup messages, indicating that media transfer may take place directly from the WLAN APs. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232407 | GATEWAY RELOCATION IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Systems and methods that provide a mechanism to relocate functions from one gateway to another gateway in a wireless communication network are disclosed. The gateway can implement an access service network (ASN) gateway in a WiMAX based network with a number of functionalities co-located on the gateway such as an authenticator, an anchor FA, an anchor DPF, a PMIP client, and a prepaid client. These functionalities can then be relocated from a first ASN gateway to a second ASN gateway. The proposed system and method reduces the messaging needed for the relocation and the number of components in the network, which can save capital and operating expenses. Additionally, the reduced messaging can reduce latency and delay in the process of relocating, which saves bandwidth and increases the level of service provided to the user. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232408 | METHOD OF CONNECTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME - A wireless communication device and method for same, including: a first communication unit configured to use a non-IP-based wireless communication protocol, a second communication unit configured to use an IP-based wireless communication protocol, and a controller configured to: search for a wireless device for communication, the wireless communication device configured to provide a universal plug and play (UPnP) service, the search being by use of the first communication unit, and initiate the UPnP service with respect to a found wireless device for communication by use of the second communication unit. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232409 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL WITH ACCESS POINT - Disclosed is a method for connecting a mobile communication terminal with an access point located in a local area providing a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) service in which a server managing the access point compares Media Access Control (MAC) information of the mobile communication terminal or MAC information of the access point transferred from the mobile communication terminal through a mobile communication network with MAC information previously stored in the server and transfers network setting information required for connection to the access point to the mobile communication terminal if the MAC information of the mobile communication terminal or access point is identical to the MAC information previously stored in the server. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232410 | METHOD OF DETERMINING TRANSMISSION RATE OF CONTROL RESPONSE FRAME FOR ACKNOWLEDGING DATA RECEIPT IN WIRELESS LAN - A method is provided for determining a transmission rate of a control response frame for acknowledging data receipt in a wireless local area network. The method includes obtaining transmission parameters of a transmitting station from a data transmission frame received from the transmitting station, searching a receiving station for transmission parameters which correspond to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station, determining the transmission rate of the control response frame according to transmission parameters of the receiving station if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are found in the receiving station, and determining a maximum rate among a set of basic transmission rates to be the transmission rate of the control response frame if the transmission parameters corresponding to the transmission parameters of the transmitting station are not found in the receiving station. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232411 | SIGNALING FORMAT FOR WLANS - A method for wireless communication begins by determining whether legacy devices are within a proximal region of the wireless communication. The method continues, when at least one legacy device is within the proximal region, formatting a frame to include: a legacy preamble; a signal field; an extended preamble; at least one additional signal field; at least one service field; an inter frame gap; and a data field. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232412 | MOBILE VIRTUAL LAN - A communication system in which multiple protocols and proxy services are executed by an access point. In one embodiment of the invention, GVRP and GMRP registrations are combined in a single packet when a wireless device roams to a different VLAN. In addition, outbound GVRP and GMRP multicast messages are handled by an access point (also referred to as a GVRP and GMRP “gateway”) such that the wireless device is not burdened with the associated computational overhead. In a further embodiment, a wireless device may dynamically switch between a VLAN-aware state and a VLAN-unaware state depending on the nature of a detected access point. For example, if a relevant access point supports GVRP, the wireless device may operate as a VLAN terminal. If a wireless device is not attached to an access point with a matching VLAN ID, the wireless device sends and receives VLAN tagged frames. If a wireless device configured with a VLAN ID is attached to an access point with a matching VLAN ID, or if the wireless device is attached to a non-VLAN access point, then the wireless device may send and receive raw/untagged frames. In addition to the gateways described below, the ability of a wireless device to detect when it can send untagged frames is considered novel. In another embodiment of the invention, a special ID that is different than the native VLAN ID for a switch port is used for VLAN-unaware devices. This allows such devices that do not issue tagged frames to belong to a single VLAN ID. | 09-16-2010 |
20100238911 | Apparatus and methods for addressable communication using voice-grade radios - The invention relates to methods and apparatus for conducting directed communication using voice-grade radios. The methods and apparatus can be used to form a packet-switched wireless network using legacy analog transceivers, providing, e.g., both data and voice-over-Internet Protocol communication. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238912 | SIGNALING METHODS FOR MMSE PRECODING WITH EIGENMODE SELECTION - Different methods of signaling between an access point and user terminals in a multiuser wireless system for performing a minimum mean square error (MMSE) precoding at the access point preceded with eigenmode selection are provided. For one embodiment of the present disclosure, a compact feedback may be utilized between a plurality of user terminals and the access point. For another embodiment of the present disclosure, a hybrid feedback may be utilized between the plurality of user terminals and the access point. For yet another embodiment of the present disclosure, a full feedback may be utilized between the plurality of user terminals and the access point. | 09-23-2010 |
20100246542 | Disparate radios in a wireless mesh network - A wireless mesh network that makes use of strategically placed nodes with radios having superior communication range through the use of high gain antennas, MIMO technology, high power transmitters, high sensitivity receivers, a combination thereof, etc. Besides the obvious effect of extending the physical coverage area of a network, the effect of the longer distance links formed by the nodes with superior range is a flattening of the wireless mesh network by reducing hop count, thereby improving performance, latency, reliability, cost, and power consumption among other factors. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246543 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA FRAMES - A method of transmitting a data frame is disclosed and may include transmitting a preamble, transmitting a physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) header, and transmitting a plurality of MAC protocol data units (MPDUs). Each MPDU may be configured to reset a convolutional decoder state after each MPDU. The method may also include transmitting an MPDU aggregation header. The MPDU aggregation header may include a count of packed MPDUs, an array of offsets, an array of lengths, a frame check sequence (FCS) for the MPDU aggregation header, a group of tail bits, or a combination thereof. Further, an end of the MPDU aggregation header may be aligned to an interleaved symbol boundary. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246544 | INDOOR COMPETITIVE SURVEY OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - System(s) and method(s) are provided to collect network operation data within a confined indoor wireless environment for generation of competitive intelligence and strategic network planning. Scanner component(s) survey and compare signals transported in a set of electromagnetic frequency bands, and in accordance with a set of radio technologies associated with competing networks. Collected data can be aggregated and delivered to femto gateway node(s), which can supply the data to an analysis component that generates network operations NetOp intelligence. A report component can manage received and aggregated network operation data and convey a portion thereof to planning tool(s) that can produce competitive intelligence and develop strategic network planning. Planning tool(s) can request specific network operation data or NetOp intelligence. Aggregated network operation data can be employed to identify service provider indoor coverage strengths or weaknesses relative to competitors to focus sales activities related to network services, and network improvement efforts. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246545 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK MOBILITY - An approach is provided for extending private enterprise networking to wireless interconnecting domains. A home agent maintains a first routing table for a first wireless router configured to route according to a first address space. The home agent also maintains a second routing table for a second wireless router configured to route according to a second address space. The first address space and the second address space are overlapping. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246546 | METHOD OF SELECTING ANTENNAS AND TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - In a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) system, a method is provided for selecting at least one antenna from a plurality of antennas and transmitting a data frame from a station to an access point via the selected antenna or antennas. A method for transmitting data from a plurality of stations to an access point in the MIMO WLAN system includes detecting a channel status of a channel from the access point to each transmitting antenna of the station, selecting at least one transmitting antenna from among the station's transmitting antennas based on the detected channel status, and transmitting a data frame from the station to the access point via the selected transmitting antenna or antennas. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246547 | ANTENNA SELECTING APPARATUS AND METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a reception antenna selecting method of a receiver including a plurality of antennas in a wireless communication system. The reception antenna selecting method aligns amplified frames according to levels of received signals and performs CRC for each of the aligned frames. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246548 | BASE STATION, METHOD FOR MANAGING CELL, METHOD FOR DETECTION SIGNAL, TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL THEREOF - A base station according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes: a receiver receiving environment information of a first terminal from the first terminal positioned at a cell boundary and receiving usable resource information from a neighbor base station; a resource allocator allocating a resource to the first terminal on the basis of the usable resource information; and a transmitter transmitting information on the resource allocated to the first terminal to the neighbor base station. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246549 | System and Methods for Distributed Medium Access Control and QOS Scheduling in Mobile Ad-Hoc Networks - A communication device and method are provided for communicating with a receiving device over a channel within a mobile ad-hoc network. The receiving device includes a clear-to-send (CTS) packet generating portion that can generate and a CTS packet based on a parameter of the channel and that can transmit the CTS packet over the channel. The communication device includes a transmitter portion, a receiver portion and a management portion. The transmitter portion can transmit information into the channel. The receiver portion can receive information from the channel. The management portion includes a request-to-send (RTS) packet generating portion, a CTS packet receiving portion, a threshold database, a comparator and an RES packet generating portion. The management portion is in communication with the transmitter portion and the receiver portion. The RTS packet generating portion can generate a RTS packet and can provide the RTS packet to the transmitter portion. The transmitter portion can transmit the RTS packet to the receiving device by way of the channel. The receiver portion can receive the CTS packet from the receiving device by way of the channel and can provide the CTS packet to the CTS packet receiving portion. The threshold database can store a threshold value for the parameter of the channel and can provide the threshold value to the comparator. The CTS packet receiving portion can provide channel parameter information, to the comparator, based on the CTS packet. The comparator can compare the threshold value and the channel parameter information and can generate an instruction signal based on the comparison. The RES packet generating portion can generate an RES packet based on the instruction signal and can provide the RES packet to the transmitter portion. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246550 | HIGH PERFORMANCE WIRELESS NETWORKS USING DISTRIBUTED CONTROL AND SWITCH-STACK PARADIGM - A design and proof of concept of a new type of WLAN, complete with simulation and results from the simulation has been described. Each AP Node is implemented as a self-contained embedded OS unit, with all algorithms resident in its Operating system. The normal day-to-day functioning of the AP node is based entirely on resident control algorithms. Upgrades are possible through a simple secure communications interface supported by the OS kernel for each AP node. Benefits provided by a wireless network, as proposed in this invention, are that: it installs out of the box; the network is self-configuring; the network is redundant in that mesh network formalism is supported, ensuring multiple paths; load balancing is supported; there is no single point of failure; allows for decentralized execution; there is a central control; it is network application aware; there is application awareness; there is automatic channel allocation to manage and curtail RF interference, maximize non interference bandwidth and enable seamless roaming between adjoining wireless sub networks (BSS) and it supports the wireless equivalent for switching—for seamless roaming requirements. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246551 | Performance optimization for wireless networks with mixed modulation types - In one embodiment, different physical layer standards are segregated into different frequency channels. In one implementation, 802.11b traffic and 802.11g traffic are segregated into different frequency channels. A network management tool allows the user to specify channels to either, e.g., 802.11b-only, 802.11g-only, 802.11b preferred and 802.11g discouraged, or 802.11g preferred and 802.11b discouraged. Access points are given the capability of preventing or discouraging client traffic of either given type. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246552 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DELIVERING IPP2T (IP-PUSH-TO-TALK) WIRELESS LAN MOBILE RADIO SERVICE - A wireless subscriber terminal (ST) for use with IP push-to-talk (IPP2T) service using a wireless local area network (WLAN) operating in a plurality of modes, including a mobile terminal having an ability to communicate over the air to a wireless Access Point (AP), the mobile terminal further programmable to use conventional WLAN protocols, and a method for operating the wireless terminal are described. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254357 | Method and System for Remotely Communicating Information to a Plurality of Devices Within a Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for remotely communicating information to a plurality of devices within a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of communication devices operable to communicate with one or more of a plurality of femtocells via one or more wireless connections and/or via one or more wired connections. The plurality of femtocells may be managed via a femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of communication devices may be operable to receive information from the femtocell management entity via one or more of the plurality of femtocells utilizing one or both of the one or more wireless connections and/or the one or more wired connections. One of the plurality of communication devices may be configured by utilizing the received information. The received information may comprise one or more of software, service profiles, device configuration data and/or synchronization data. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254358 | WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTING AND SETTING METHOD AND APPLICATION THEREOF - A wireless network connecting and setting method includes the following steps; a detect signal is transmitted through a first wireless network device; a detect reply is replied to the first wireless network device when the detect signal is received by a second wireless network device; a wireless access point (AP) profile of the first wireless network device, according to which the first wireless network device connects to a wireless AP, is transmitted to the second wireless network device; the second wireless network device is connected to the wireless AP according to the wireless AP profile, such that the second wireless network device connects to a network through the wireless AP. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254359 | Mobile terminal, mobile communication system, base station searching method, and storage medium storing base station searching program - A first mobile terminal forming a mobile communication system connects to a base station by using a first wireless communication method (for example, GSM method). Further, a second mobile terminal acquires unique information of the base station (for example, cell information) from the first mobile terminal by communication with the first mobile terminal by using a second wireless communication method (for example, wireless LAN method), and searches a transmission frequency of the base station included in the unique information. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254360 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO CONTROL DEVICE, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND MESSAGE TRANSMISSION METHOD - A mobile communication system according to the present invention comprises a mobile terminal ( | 10-07-2010 |
20100254361 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - Provided is a wireless communication device which includes a function information transmitting unit for transmitting, via a wireless communication network, function information relating to a function of the wireless communication device, a function information receiving unit for receiving function information transmitted from another device, a function information comparison unit for comparing the function information of the wireless communication device and the function information received from such other device, and a function determination unit for determining which of the wireless communication device and such other device is to play a function of an access point, based on a result of the comparison by the function information comparison unit. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254362 | NETWORK COMBINING WIRED AND NON-WIRED SEGMENTS - A local area network ( | 10-07-2010 |
20100254363 | NETWORK COMBINING WIRED AND NON-WIRED SEGMENTS - A local area network ( | 10-07-2010 |
20100254364 | RATE-ADAPTIVE METHOD FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - This invention relates to a rate-adaptive method for wireless mesh network in areas of wireless networking technology. In the invention, each node in the wireless mesh network broadcasts probe packets and meanwhile receives probe packets from its neighboring nodes, and maintains a rate priority table in time based on the sending success ratio of probe packets, and then sets up a new dynamic probe queue according to this rate priority table, selectively sending all the probes with rates that are listed in the rate priority table or close to them, and the automatic rate selection is accomplished by decisions on probes' sending success ratio. This invention can adapt to the changes of the network conditions very well, and reduce the influence of route broadcast and convergence on network throughput as much as possible, and at the meantime, it takes the changes in network topology into account, thus is very suitable for conditions with a complex spatial distribution of electromagnetic waves. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254365 | EMERGENCY CALL HANDLING IN CONTENTION-BASED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - An apparatus and methods for handling emergency message frames (e.g., “911” call frames, etc.) sent by a station in a wireless local-area network are disclosed. The illustrative embodiment increases the probability with which an emergency message frame is accorded the singularly highest quality-of-service by modifying one or more IEEE 802.11 e parameters (e.g., back-off contention window length, Arbitration Inter-Frame Space [AIFS], etc.) for a station or access point that transmits an emergency message frame. | 10-07-2010 |
20100260157 | MOBILE BROADBAND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, SUCH AS A DEPLOYABLE SELF-CONTAINED PORTABLE SYSTEM - Systems and methods for establishing IT services in edge environments are described. In some examples, the system comprises a transportable housing capable of being carried by personnel, a plurality of commercial off-the-shelf components contained in the housing and coupled together and configured to provide the broadband communications network, a software management system operatively coupled to the plurality of components, a network connection subsystem defined by at least a first portion of the plurality of components and configured to establish access to the broadband communications network, and a connection subsystem defined by at least a second portion of the plurality of components and that provides a user with a connection to the broadband communications network via the network connection subsystem | 10-14-2010 |
20100260158 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - Provided is a wireless communication device which includes a notification information transmitting unit for transmitting, via a wireless communication network, notification information of the wireless communication device, a notification information receiving unit for receiving notification information transmitted from another device, a frequency switching unit for successively switching, at random cycles, a frequency at which the notification information is transmitted or a frequency at which the notification information is received, and a transmission processing unit for performing a data transmission process after transmitting or receiving an acknowledgement to the notification information to/from such other device. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260159 | PHYSICAL LAYER FRAME FORMAT FOR WLAN - In a method for generating a data unit for transmission via a communication channel, wherein the data unit conforms to a first communication protocol, a preamble of the data unit is generated. The preamble includes a first field having information that indicates a duration of the data unit, the first field being formatted such that the first field is decodable by a receiver device that conforms to a second communication protocol but does not conform to the first communication protocol to determine the duration of the data unit based on the first field. Additionally, the preamble is formatted such that a portion of the preamble is decodable by a receiver device that conforms to a third communication protocol but does not conform to the first communication protocol. Also, the preamble is formatted such that a receiver device that conforms to the first communication protocol can determine that the data unit conforms to the first communication protocol. A data portion of the data unit that conforms to the first communication protocol and does not conform to either (i) the second communication protocol or (ii) the third communication protocol is generated. | 10-14-2010 |
20100265926 | Mobile Station Methods and Systems for Maintaining PLMN Continuity When Moving Between Networks of Different Types as a Function of PLMN Continuity Preference - Mobile station methods and systems for maintaining PMLN continuity when moving between networks of different types as a function of PLMN continuity preference are provided. PLMN continuity preference concerns a preference for the mobile station when transferring from a first network type, such as cellular, to a second network type, such as GAN to reduce the possibility of dropping calls, for example. The mobile station transmits this preference to the network, and the mobile station then perform network selection based on the preference. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265927 | Efficient Allocation of Power to Bandwidth In a Multi-Carrier Cellular Communication System - A cellular communication system includes a plurality of base stations ( | 10-21-2010 |
20100265928 | METHOD FOR SELECTING AN ACCESS POINT AND APPARATUS FOR USING THE SAME - The method generates a candidate list in accordance with the contents of frames transmitted by access points and sequentially performs the handshaking operations with the access points on the candidate list to select a personal identification number (PIN) enabled access point. During the candidate list generating process, this method places Wi-Fi protected setup (WPS) PIN-enabled access points at high priority positions but eliminates non-WPS access points and WPS push button configuration enabled access points. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265929 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING A MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME - A method for determining a modulation and coding scheme for signals with packets of different lengths comprises the steps of: grouping signals according to their packet lengths, wherein each group has a weighting for each modulation and coding scheme; transmitting signals with different modulation and coding schemes; adjusting weights of each modulation and coding scheme of each group according to the quality of receiving the transmitted signals; determining a modulation and coding scheme according to the weightings of each modulation and coding scheme in the group corresponding to the packet length of the signal to be transmitted. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265930 | METHOD FOR SCANNING WIRELESS CHANNELS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR USING THE SAME - In order to obtain information related to operating channels of access points, the method receives lightweight beacons on a common channel. The method generates a channel scanning list in accordance with the content of the lightweight beacons and sequentially scans all the channels on the list. The method is capable of reducing the scanning time and the data loss rate during the scanning operation. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265931 | Range-Based Wireless Alarm System - A range-based alarm system comprised of a controlling device and a plurality of portable, handheld devices communicating over a wireless local area network (WLAN); wherein the controlling device frequently computes the distance between itself and the plurality of portable, handheld devices and raises an audible or visual alarm when one of the computed distances exceeds its programmed operating range. An audible or visual alarm is also triggered on any of a plurality of portable, handheld devices when it has lost communication with the controlling device or when instructed by the controlling device. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265932 | Wireless transmitter, wireless transmission method, wireless receiver and wireless reception method - A wireless transmitter which includes: a packetizer which generates a special packet with a payload containing transmitted video signals and a header containing distinguishing information used to distinguish the special packet from an IP packet; and a wireless transmitting section for generating and transmitting wireless radio signals which contain a special packet generated by the packetizer. | 10-21-2010 |
20100272080 | Techniques for generating proof of WiMAX activation and safely handling a disconnect during a WiMAX provisioning session - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising using actual values inside an Open Mobile Alliance Device Management (OMA DM) activation session to produce a unique combination of values for a mobile device operable in a wireless network to verify activation by a certain network service provider (NSP). | 10-28-2010 |
20100272081 | COMMUNICATION METHODS AND APPARATUS - Methods and apparatus well suited for efficiently communicating small amounts of information relatively frequently in a wireless communications system are described. An uplink timing frequency structure for an access point includes a set of dedicated uplink communications resources, e.g., expression advertisement interval air link resources. Different ones of the set of dedicated uplink communications resources correspond to different individual wireless communications devices currently registered with the access point. In the downlink timing frequency structure for the access point there are dedicated downlink broadcast communications resources, e.g., expression broadcast interval air link resources and neighbor expression broadcast interval air link resources. Information received on dedicated uplink air link resources is echoed back or selectively echoed back on the dedicated downlink air link resources. Wireless communications devices monitor downlink dedicated air link resources to recover expression information being communicated by other wireless communications devices in its local vicinity. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272082 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ROUTING DATA IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING BLUETOOTH - Systems and methods are disclosed for use in a wireless network that includes a first device using an wireless association protocol. In some embodiments the wireless association protocol uses at least one inquiry packet and a scatternet topology. These systems promote communication with other devices using the wireless association protocol through a routing protocol. This routing protocol routes data according to a network topology created through information obtained through the wireless association protocol. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272083 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - There is provided a wireless communication device including a control-message creation/transmission-instruction unit which sends notification information via a wireless communication network and also sends response information in the case of receiving notification information sent from another device, a reception/interpretation processing unit which receives, from another device which has received the notification information of the wireless communication device, response information of such other device and also receives the notification information sent from such other device, and an operation mode determination unit which determines, based on operation mode determination information included in the notification information of such other device or the response information of such other device, that the wireless communication device is caused to operate as one of a master device and a slave device. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272084 | ACCESS NODE SWITCHING METHOD - A method of switching a terminal from a source access node (NA | 10-28-2010 |
20100272085 | Method for WLAN Localization and Location Based Service Supply - A method is for WLAN localization and corresponding location based service supply. By providing a WLAN data set as an actual WLAN fingerprint of a geographical unit for the usage in a mobile device the user is enabled to localize himself self-sustained. Thereby the mobile device receives WLAN signals from at least three WLAN senders for the localization. Due to self-sustained identifying of the WLAN senders by the mobile device on basis of the received WLAN signals the mobile device may calculate the actual geographical position of the mobile device. The calculation is done on basis of the WLAN data set and on basis of the received WLAN signals from the at least three different WLAN senders. Furthermore a location based service is supplied by the mobile device the a user of the mobile device on basis of the calculated actual position. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272086 | Method of Releasing An Access Restriction at High Interference Cell in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and UE providing wireless communication services, and a method of transmitting and receiving data between a terminal and a base station in an evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, or a LTE-A (LTE-Advanced) system, and more particularly, to a method of releasing an access restriction at high interference cell, such that an effect of the interference can be minimized. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272087 | TERMINAL DEVICE WITH SEPARATED CARD AND STATION BASED ON WIMAX SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a mobile terminal with separated card and station based on World Interoperability for Microwave Access, WiMAX, system, in communication field, which comprises: a main station; one or more consumer identification modules, connected to the main station in a removable way. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272088 | System and Method for Managing Call Continuity in IMS Network Environment - In one embodiment, a scheme is disclosed for managing call continuity in a network environment including a circuit-switched (CS) network and an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) network wherein unique identity (ID) information supplied by a user equipment (UE) device is utilized. A pool of dynamically allocable IP multimedia routing numbers (IMRNs) maintained at an IMS network node are used for associating an IMRN with call information received from the UE device, which can include at least one of a GRUU, Instance ID, and the called party number relating to a call. When the dynamically allocated IMRN is returned by the UE device, the network node utilizes the IMRN mapping to effectuate call continuity with respect to the called party. | 10-28-2010 |
20100278157 | Determining Optimal Locations For Wireless Access Points In A Wireless Network - A computer-implemented method for predicting signal coverage in a wireless network environment includes segmenting the wireless network environment into a plurality of zones, in which each one of a plurality of wireless communications devices operating in the wireless network environment is assigned to a corresponding one of the plurality of zones. The method continues with determining that a dependency exists between at least two signal reference relations from at least two of the plurality of zones and merging the at least two of the plurality of zones. The method concludes with adjusting the search space size for the optimal solution that predicts the signal coverage for the wireless network environment and locating at least one wireless access point within the wireless network environment based on the optimal solution. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278158 | Selecting an access point in a wireless network using a data flow metric - Available access points (AP) are searched in a wireless network for information of each channel between a client and each AP and the information includes at least one network performance metric. A list of the available APs and the information are received at the client and the client has at least one interface used for communicating with each AP. A type of a data flow and a corresponding data flow metric for the type of data flow are also determined. An AP is selected to receive the data flow from the list of the available APs based on the information of each channel and the type of the data flow metric, and the data flow is received at the client from the selected AP in the wireless network. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278159 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENDPOINT BASED ARCHITECTURE FOR VOIP ACCESS POINTS - A VoIP access point may be operable to provide VoIP servicing to a plurality of wireless audio endpoint devices. The VoIP access point may extract VoIP audio data received via IP backbone and communicating the extracted audio data as non-VoIP formatted data to the wireless audio endpoint devices. In the uplink direction, the VoIP access point may receive non-VoIP formatted audio data from the wireless audio endpoint devices and pack the received data into IP packets for VoIP communication. The VoIP access point may also be operable to perform PCM encoding/decoding operations during VoIP servicing operations. The wireless audio endpoint devices may perform audio processing during VoIP communications via the VoIP access point. One or more intermediary communication devices may be utilized to route messaging between the VoIP access point and at least some of the wireless audio endpoint devices. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278160 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HYBRID SCHEMES OF MIMO MODE DECISION - A system and method a hybrid scheme of mode decision in a network having a plurality of mobile stations communicably coupled to a base station may include a mode decision module associated with the base station. The mode decision module may include one or more processors configured to select a first mode configuration for use during transmission of a first communication from the base station, receive first feedback information comprising a first mode recommendation and first channel information, identify a first system state of the first communication based at least in part on the first condition information, determine whether to use the first mode recommendation configuration based at least in part on the first system state, and configure the second communication using a second mode configuration based on the determination. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278161 | SELF OPTIMIZATION OF FORBIDDEN NEIGHBOR CELL LIST - An apparatus, a system, and a method to self-optimize a forbidden neighbor cell list (FNCL). A FNCL includes a list of cells sent to a user equipment (UE). The UE would not report those cells in the list to a network but may be considered by the UE for measurement purposes only. The self-optimization of the FNCL includes building a list of neighbor cells in an autonomous and/or automatic manner, with or without human intervention. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278162 | METHOD OF MAINTAINING DATA COLLECTIONS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile device configured to communicate with one or more various enterprise services and Internet services. Such services include such features as e-mail, calendar, and personal information management (PIM). The mobile device is configured to maintain a distinction between each of these services by having a number of databases, each database dedicated to a specific service. To facilitate this distinction, a service identifier is generated with respect to each database. When a service is removed, the mobile device no longer has access to the service. In such an instance, the mobile device is configured to maintain the associated database and the service identifier. Should a removed service become reactivated for the mobile device, the maintained database will become re-associated with the proper service by using the service identifier. By distinguishing between databases using the service identifiers, the mobile device may prevent “cross-pollination” between its databases when synchronizing with different services. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278163 | METHOD OF DELIVERING DATA IN WIRELESS PRESONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is a method of delivering data in a wireless personal area network. One of nodes forming the wireless personal area network broadcasts data including the address and the sequence number of one node to a plurality of other nodes, and broadcasts one of the data and other data to the other nodes depending on whether the data is received from the other nodes within a predetermined time. Accordingly, all the nodes on the network can receive data reliably and simultaneously power consumption is reduced, and thus the life of the network is extended. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278164 | Method, Base Station, Mobile Station, Telecommunication System, and Computer Program for Detecting a WLAN - A method comprising operating a base station is disclosed. The operating consists of providing synchronisation for mobile stations; and broadcasting information comprising information about an access point enabling generic access network, GAN, communication, from the base station operating a pure broadcasting telecommunication cell. An access area of the access point and the pure broadcasting telecommunication cell cover essentially the same area. Therefore, mobile stations able to receive the broadcasting information become aware of accessibility to the access point. Corresponding base station, mobile station, telecommunication system, and computer program are also disclosed. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278165 | RADIO TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The radio terminal comprises a base station communication unit ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100278166 | METHOD FOR SWITCHING CHANNEL IN MESH NETWORK - A method of performing a channel switch in a mesh network by a first Mesh Point (MP) includes configuring a peer link between the first MP and a second MP, and transmitting a mesh channel switch announcement frame from the first MP to the second MP. The mesh channel switch announcement frame includes a new regulatory class field and a new channel number field. The new regulatory class field indicates the number of a new regulatory class after the channel switch and the new channel number field indicates the number of a new channel to which the first MP is moving. | 11-04-2010 |
20100284378 | Method for packet classification based on the protocol type and on priorities - External packets entering a transmitting entity of a broadband wireless access system are forwarded to a receiving entity onto MAC layer connections at the wireless interface between such entities in a manner depending on the result of a packet classification performed by using a set of classification rules identified by a rule index and associated with a priority index determining the order of application of different rules to packets relating to a same service. The classification rules include both classification rules specific for data communication protocols and containing one or more protocol-specific parameters to be matched by corresponding fields in a packet being classified, and a pass-through classification rule only containing a priority index and a rule index, but no protocol-specific matching parameter, said pass through classification rule being applied to a packet not having matched a protocol-specific classification rule. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284379 | WIRELESS RECEIVER WITH INTERMITTENT SHUT-OFF OF RF CIRCUITS - A terminal ( | 11-11-2010 |
20100284380 | QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR WLAN AND BLUETOOTH COMBINATIONS - A hybrid device ( | 11-11-2010 |
20100284381 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT IN THE PRESENCE OF BURSTY INTERFERENCE - A method and system for operating a wireless access point is disclosed. In an embodiment, a wireless access point determines whether bursty interference is present within the operating range of the wireless access point and then adapts a transmission characteristic in response to the determination. In an embodiment, the wireless access point determines whether bursty interference is present by changing at least one transmission characteristic and monitoring the resulting error rates. The presence of bursty interference can be detected if a lowering of the transmission rate causes an increase in the error rate. The increase in the error rate is a result of the lower transmission rate and corresponding longer transmission time for each frame, which in turn increases the likelihood that a frame will overlap with bursty interference. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284382 | EMERGENCY CALLING DEVICE FOR A VEHICLE - A network-based emergency call device for a vehicle. A first connection between the vehicle and a server is firmly prescribed as a permanent IP connection. This connection is used to send an emergency call, together with the necessary emergency call data to the server. The latter forwards the emergency to all the registered assistance units via further connections directly and without human action. The assistance unit providing assistance is selected automatically by taking the emergency call by an assistance unit. The subsequent setup of a communication link between the assistance unit taking the call and the vehicle involves the use of the already existing IP connection between the vehicle and the server for the communication link which is to be set up. The data to be transmitted and the data rate can also be customized to the current situation of the vehicle and to the surroundings of the vehicle. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284383 | INTERNET-ORIENTATED AD-HOC NETWORK - A hierarchical directional internet-oriented ad-hoc network, defined by a software infrastructure, is composed of fixed gateway nodes and a plurality of wireless nodes, which may be fixed or mobile, and which may act as subscribers, routers, or both. The infrastructure hierarchy is defined by the hop count of each node (distance of that node to a fixed gateway node). The software infrastructure includes two tables associated with each node in the network: the upstream routing table which provides shortest routes to fixed gateway nodes through upstream neighbors, and the downstream routing table which provides shortest routes to subscribers through downstream neighbors. These two tables are used by routing algorithms. A peer table can also be used for alternate routes. The maintenance of the aforementioned tables is performed by autonomous algorithms operating locally on each node by receiving and processing signals from their neighbors. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284384 | USE OF THE WLAN STANDARD FOR C2C COMMUNICATION BY ADDING NEW PACKET TYPES - C2X communication is made possible efficiently via WLAN by apparatuses and a method for filtering data frames received by a vehicle from a receiver via a WLAN connection, wherein a frame type indicated in a received data frame is used to decide that device to which data in the data frame are transmitted. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284385 | LAN BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of routing calls from a mobile unit to a destination location can include registering the mobile unit with a wireless adjunct, wherein the wireless adjunct is in communication with a switching unit and a packet based network and is operable to receive data from the switching unit and place the data, in packetized form, on the packet based network. The method can further include responding to a call setup request from the mobile unit and querying a subscriber database to determine if the mobile unit is a resident or a guest. If the mobile unit is a resident, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through the switching unit to a first destination location. If the mobile unit is a guest, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through an RF source to a second destination location. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284386 | LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS CAPABILITY INDICATION - Aspects describe indicating to a mobile station whether an access point supports local Internet Protocol (IP) access. The indication can be sent through utilization of common signaling, which allows the mobile station to have information about the local IP access availability before connecting to the access point. The indication can be sent through utilization of dedicated signaling, which allows the mobile station to find out about availability of local IP access after the mobile station connects to the access point. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284387 | PAGING FOR LOCAL IP ACCESS PACKETS - Local IP access paging schemes facilitate paging of an access terminal when packets destined for the access terminal are received via local IP access. In some implementations, a local entity acquires information that enables local paging of the access terminal by sniffing messages passing through the local entity. In some implementations, a local entity sends a packet or message to cause the core network to page an access terminal when a local IP access packet destined for the access terminal arrives at the local entity. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284388 | Management of a Hybrid Communication Network Comprising a Cellular Network and a Local Network - Disclosed herein is a method of managing a hybrid network including a cellular network and a local network wherein a number of dual mode mobile terminals are connectable to a base station of the cellular network through a direct cellular link and are also connectable, one with respect to the other, through the local network by a radio access technique. The method includes the steps of computing a cost associated with a direct connection established along a path (A) extending from a selected mobile terminal to the base station through the cellular link only, computing a cost (C | 11-11-2010 |
20100284389 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING A MEDIA PLAYBACK IN A NETWORKED ENVIRONMENT - Described herein are systems and methods for providing media playback in a networked environment. In one embodiment, a networked media playback device is configured to provide a web server for delivering data indicative of a browser-renderable control interface for the networked media playback device, or for a related networked media playback system. In overview, the user of a networked device, such as a wireless web enabled device, is able to render the control interface in a web browser, and in this manner control playback of digital media via the networked media playback device or networked media playback system. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284390 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING AND APPLING HISTORY INFORMATION OF TERMINAL IN CONVERGED PERSONAL NETWORK SERVICE ENVIRONMENT, AND CONVERGED PERSONAL NETWORK SERVICE SERVER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND END DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed herein is a system for managing and using history information of terminals in a Converged Personal Network Service (CPNS) environment. The system includes a CPNS server for collecting and storing access information and history information of mobile communication terminals and end devices which transmit and receive information over a wireless local area network, and, if the previously stored history information is requested while a CPNS service is active between a mobile communication terminal and an end device, extracting the corresponding information, and providing the extracted information to the mobile communication terminal and the end device, the mobile communication terminals each for, while using the CPNS service, performing a CPNS service-related procedure using the history information received from the CPNS server, and the end devices each for, while using the CPNS service, performing a CPNS service-related procedure using the history information received via the mobile communication terminal. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284391 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESSLY TRANSMITTING VENUE-BASED DATA TO REMOTE WIRELESS HAND HELD DEVICES OVER A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system for wirelessly transmitting venue-based data in video data packets to remote wireless hand held devices over an 802.11 wireless network. Such a system includes one or more processors for processing video captured by at least one venue-based video camera into data packets for transmission to remote wireless hand held devices, wherein the remote wireless hand held devices each further comprise a display screen for displaying the data and for viewing video while held in the same manner as a personal digital assistant during use, and in a hand of a user and away from a face and head of the user. Such a system additionally includes at least one 802.11 wireless network transmitter for wirelessly transmitting the data packets to the remote wireless hand held devices. | 11-11-2010 |
20100290440 | Mobile Communications Terminal for Use in Several Wireless Local Networks and Method for Operating - The invention relates to a mobile communications terminal for use in a plurality of wireless local networks. Said terminal comprises a log on memory, in which an access address that is designed to be used for a new log on process is stored. According to the invention, information concerning the access addresses that were received by the mobile communications terminal in previous log on operations and the network among the plurality of wireless local networks that was used, is stored in an allocation memory. The terminal is configured in such a way that when a new access request is received for a sought network among the plurality of wireless local networks, it searches for a previous access address that was allocated for the sought network and is also configured in such a way that when said previous access address for the sought network has been found, it writes the address to the log on memory and permits the log on operation. The invention also relates to a method for managing log on information that is designed for the mobile communications terminal. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290441 | ROUTE SELECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROMOTING ROUTE DISTRIBUTIONS AMONG MULTIPLE DEVICES IN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - In a mesh network having a plurality of wireless nodes, including a first, second, third and fourth node, wherein each node includes a routing table, a method of route discovery. A first route request message is broadcasted from the first node and received at the second and third nodes. In the second node, a link quality metric is calculated as a function of link quality of the link to the first node and as a function of capacity in the routing table of the second node. In the third node, a link quality metric is calculated as a function of link quality of the link to the first node and as a function of capacity in the routing table of the third node. A second route request message is broadcasted from the second node and received by the fourth node, wherein the second route request message includes the link quality metric calculated by the second node. A third route request message is broadcasted from the third node and received by the fourth node, wherein the third route request message includes the link quality metric calculated by the third node. A route path is selected as a function of the link quality metric calculated by the second node and the link quality metric calculated by the third node. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290442 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATIC CONNECTION WITH A WIRELESS NETWORK - A Intelligent Mobile HotSpot (IMHS) comprises a wide area network radio interface configured to enable communications between a wide area network and the IMHS; a local area network radio interface configured to enable communications between the IMHS and a computing device; a power input configured to cause the IMHS to be powered on; memory configured to store instructions; and a processor coupled with memory, the instructions configured to cause the processor to perform the following in response to an activation of the power input: automatically establish a data connection with a base station associated with the wide area network over the wide area network, automatically establish a data connection with computing device over the local area network, and be in a ready state to route data packets from the computing device to the base station via the local area network data connection and the wide area network connection. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290443 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - The invention relates to a method for controlling communication between at least one stationary and at least one mobile, data-exchanging unit. In said method, a position of the mobile unit is determined, and communication is made possible in response thereto. According to the invention, a priority measure is determined in response to the determined position, and data can be transmitted from the mobile, data-exchanging unit according to the priority. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290444 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATIC CONNECTION WITH A WIRELESS NETWORK - A Intelligent Mobile HotSpot (IMHS) comprises a wide area network radio interface configured to enable communications between a wide area network and the IMHS; a local area network radio interface configured to enable communications between the IMHS and a computing device; a power input configured to cause the IMHS to be powered on; memory configured to store instructions; and a processor coupled with memory, the instructions configured to cause the processor to perform the following in response to an activation of the power input: automatically establish a data connection with a base station associated with the wide area network over the wide area network, automatically establish a data connection with computing device over the local area network, and be in a ready state to route data packets from the computing device to the base station via the local area network data connection and the wide area network connection. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290445 | Methods, Apparatus and Computer Readable Medium For Conveying Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Policies From Designated to Roamed Network - A method, apparatus and computer program product for providing policy inheritance between Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) is presented. The systems disclosed herein are able to convey, from a designated (i.e., first) VLAN to a roaming (i.e., second) VLAN, mobility VLAN policies enabled at the designated VLAN that are not provided at the roaming VLAN. In operation, example embodiments of the present invention detect a roaming mobile unit in the roaming VLAN. VLAN policies for the mobile unit are then requested from a VLAN server mobility switch in the designated VLAN. VLAN policies are then received and applied in the roaming VLAN. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290446 | METHOD FOR ENABLING MOBILITY OF CLIENT DEVICES IN LARGE SCALE UNIFIED NETWORKS - Embodiments herein include systems and methods for providing a mechanism to enable smooth, seamless, and reliable connectivity for wireless devices in a unified network. The system supports roaming of mobile units across mobility switches. A given mobile unit can retain its IP address in both intra-subnet and inter-subnet roaming scenarios. The given mobile unit also retains its membership to a mobility VLAN to which it had been assigned, even during roaming scenarios. Embodiments include a framework for wireless switches to advertise VLANs they support to peer wireless switches in the mobility domain, and to advertise their capability to act as VLAN servers for those VLANs. Embodiments support VLAN membership management capabilities that allow access points and peer wireless switches to request wireless switches to add VLANs to the tunnels they share. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290447 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFORE - Different communication parameters are automatically provided in accordance with a setting scheme in communication parameter automatic setting. To do this, when transferring communication parameters to another communication apparatus, a communication parameter provider identifies a communication parameter setting scheme to use, and selects, in accordance with the identified setting scheme, communication parameters to be transferred. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290448 | PRE-FETCHING OF INPUT DATA FOR ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION - The present invention relates to a method, an Access Selection Server and a communication network for network access selection. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290449 | PREAMBLE EXTENSIONS - Systems and/or methods for communication that generate a plurality of spatial streams are disclosed. Each of the spatial streams comprises a plurality of symbols. At least a portion of a training sequence is distributed across a first symbol in a first one of the spatial streams and a second symbol in a second one of the spatial streams. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290450 | ACCESS POINT MULTI-LEVEL TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL BASED ON THE EXCHANGE OF CHARACTERISTICS - A wireless access point and multiple wireless terminals exchange utilization, status, mobility and reception characteristics. Each wireless terminal generates reception characteristics based on transmissions received from the wireless access point and from other devices in the network. In one operating mode, the characteristics gathered by the wireless devices are forwarded to the wireless access point, and, based on all received characteristics, the wireless access point selects its own transmission power for different types of the transmission. In another mode, all characteristics are exchanged between every wireless terminal and the access point so that each can independently or cooperatively make transmission power control decisions. In a further mode, the wireless access point adjusts protocol parameters based on an assessment of the characteristics received from the client devices. The utilization, status, mobility, and reception characteristics include received signal strength, error rates, estimated battery life, availability of unlimited power, active versus sleep mode ratios, anticipated bandwidth utilization, coding schemes available, deterministic/non-deterministic requirements, encryption and security requirements, quality of service requirements, position, velocity, stationary status, etc. Gathering of such characteristics involves both retrieval of preset parameters from memory and generating parameters based on received transmissions (including test packets). | 11-18-2010 |
20100296495 | WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND BEACON TRANSMITTING METHOD - A wireless LAN communication device is provided for making it possible to set beacons including DTIM information elements not to be synchronous in the case that the timing for generating the beacons including DTIM information elements is the same among access points, so that it is avoidable that only a terminal device under a specific access point among access points using the same channel is subjected to a delay and jitters, while anxiety about mutual interference of the terminal devices is removed in the case of broadcast and multicast service, so that a fair broadcast and multicast service can be received. In the device, a wireless LAN control unit ( | 11-25-2010 |
20100296496 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONCURRENT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS AND SENSING - This invention describes systems and methods for combining the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) infrastructure and Wireless Intrusion Prevention Systems (WIPS) by leveraging a common radio platform equipped with more than one WLAN radio and a unified management system. The invention provides all the benefits of the WLAN, without sacrificing the 24×7 dedicated security monitoring and performance troubleshooting available from an overlay WIPS system, while reducing the deployment cost and management complexity, by sharing a common hardware platform for the WLAN Access Point (AP) and WIPS sensor and leveraging an integrated management system. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296497 | HYBRID NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR FEMTOCELLS AND ACCESS POINTS - A communication system may comprise a hybrid network controller, femtocells, access points and/or endpoint devices. The hybrid network controller may control communication of information between two or more specified femtocells, access points and/or endpoint devices by communicating control information. The communication of information via the femtocells, access points may be managed by the hybrid network controller. The network controller may handle network traffic associated with the communication of the information. The hybrid network controller may control one or more wired and/or wireless interfaces for handling of the network traffic. Quality of service and/or bandwidth allocation may be managed by the hybrid network controller. Resources utilized by the endpoint devices, the femtocells and/or the access points may be allocated and/or de-allocated by the network controller. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296498 | INTEGRATED FEMTOCELL AND WLAN ACCESS POINT - Aspects of a method and system for integrated femtocell and WLAN access point are provided. In this regard, an IFWAP device comprises an integrated WLAN interface and an integrated femtocell cellular interface. The IFWAP device may be operable to receive data, determine a destination of the received data, and transmit the received data to one or more end-user devices via the integrated WLAN interface and/or the integrated femtocell cellular interface based on said determined destination. In various embodiments of the invention, the IFWAP device may be operable to receive data from one or more end-user devices via the integrated WLAN interface and/or the integrated femtocell cellular interface, process the received data to re-format and/or re-packetize it into one or more corresponding IP packets, and transmit the one or more IP packets to one or more destination devices via a single network connection. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296499 | COMMUNICATIVELY COUPLING WLAN AND FEMTOCELL NETWORKS UTILIZING A FEMTOCELL-TO-WLAN NETWORK BRIDGE AND CONTROLLER - Aspects of a method and system for communicatively coupling WLAN and femtocell networks utilizing a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller are provided. In this regard, data communicated via one or more femtocells and one or more WLAN access points may be managed via a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller communicatively coupled between a femtocell controller and an access point controller. The femtocell controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more femtocells, and the access point controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more WLAN access points. The FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller, the femtocell controller, and the access point controller may interoperate to manage data communicated between a first end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the femtocells and a second end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the access points. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296500 | MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR SCANNING A SERVICE SET IDENTIFIER - A mobile station scans a wireless channel that an access point uses to communicate with a third-party mobile station, receives a management frame from the access point in the wireless channel, and determines that the access point utilizes a close service set identifier (SSID) according to the management frame. The mobile station further imitates one of the access point and the third-party mobile station to transmit a disconnection frame to the other one of the access point and the third-party mobile station, so as to disconnect a communication between the access point and the third-party mobile station. The mobile station further intercepts a reconnection frame transmitted between the access point and the third-party mobile station, and extracts the closed SSID of the access point from the reconnection frame. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296501 | METHOD FOR GENERATION OF BEACONS BY A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The invention, which relates to a method for the generation of beacons by a base station in a wireless communications network, consisting of at least one base station and at least one station, the beacons being generated repeatedly at time intervals, is based on the object of specifying a method with which the generation of the beacons can be tailored to needs, achieving a reduction of the energy demand and the emissions, and an improvement in the security. According to the invention, the object is achieved in that the generation of the beacons is started with a switching on of the base station and is ended after the expiry of a wait time t | 11-25-2010 |
20100303046 | WIRELESS VIDEO AND AUDIO NETWORK DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - This disclosures describes a wireless local area network (LAN) video and audio system | 12-02-2010 |
20100303047 | Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device - Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device. Various services that may be used by a wireless communication device within a particular location may be referred to as location based services (LBS). As such, means by which the location of a wireless communication device that may use such available services, within such a locale, is made by using more than one type of location determination approach. For example, a wireless communication device includes communication capability (e.g., RX and TX) in accordance with a first communication protocol (e.g., Bluetooth) and also includes a communication capability (e.g., RX only) in accordance with a second communication protocol (e.g., WiFi/WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)). The RX capability is operative to assist in location determination for the wireless communication device based on knowledge of at least one wireless communication device that communicates with the wireless communication device. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303048 | USE OF THE WLAN STANDARD FOR A C2C COMMUNICATION BY ADDING NEW PACKET TYPES - C2X communication is made possible efficiently via WLAN by apparatuses and a method for filtering data frames received by a vehicle from a receiver via a WLAN connection, wherein a frame type indicated in a received data frame is used to decide that device to which data in the data frame are transmitted. The C2X communication can be used for recognizing pedestrians. It is also possible to use a plurality of transmission paths and/or UDP. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303049 | Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device - Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device. Various services that may be used by a wireless communication device within a particular location may be referred to as location based services (LBS). As such, means by which the location of a wireless communication device that may use such available services, within such a locale, is made by using more than one type of location determination approach. For example, a wireless communication device includes communication capability (e.g., RX and TX) in accordance with a first communication protocol (e.g., Bluetooth) and also includes a communication capability (e.g., RX only) in accordance with a second communication protocol (e.g., WiFi/WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)). The RX capability is operative to assist in location determination for the wireless communication device based on knowledge of at least one wireless communication device that communicates with the wireless communication device. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303050 | Method for Implementing an Intelligent Content Rating Middleware Platform and Gateway System - The method for implementing an Intelligent Content Rating middleware platform and gateway system disclosed herewith provides telecommunications carriers and network operators with the ability to define routing and actions based on HTIP/SIP based content and subscriber context through a powerful, extensible Layer 4-7 switching fabric technology. The invention mediates communications between applications and networks for IP packet flows, personal messaging, location-based services and billing. Furthermore, it enables advanced context-sensitive dialogue scenarios with the wireless subscriber such as, but not limited to, Advice-of-Charge dialogues. The art permits telecommunications network operators and like entities to introduce real-time rating of data services for both prepaid and post-paid subscribers. Further advances in the art include the validation of digital signatures, combined with authentication and non-repudiation techniques to ensure subscriber privacy remains protected. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303051 | ACCESS POINT SCAN METHOD, ACCESS POINT SCAN APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM STORING ACCESS POINT SCAN PROGRAM - A probe request for an access point scan is transmitted over a specified radio channel according to an order of scanning, a connection candidate AP list including information indicating an access point which transmits a probe response and a received signal strength indication is generated when the probe response is received, the connection candidate AP list is referred to, one access point is selected from access points whose corresponding received signal strength indications exceed a predetermined threshold, connection processing is performed on the one access point being selected on the specified radio channel, and scanning is repeatedly performed by specifying a radio channel which is second in the order until scanning on all radio channels for which the order of scanning is set is completed when no probe response is received or the connection candidate AP list includes no received signal strength indication which exceeds the threshold. | 12-02-2010 |
20100309893 | Techniques for detecting beacons on wireless channels - A wireless local access network (WLAN) radio listens for a beacon for a listening duration on each of multiple channels. Periodically, the WLAN radio changes the channel on which the WLAN radio listens for a beacon. The WLAN radio rotates through all channels until an entire beacon period is listened to. The number of iterations is chosen to minimize the overlap of successive listening durations. The WLAN radio can detect a beacon by detecting an incomplete portion of a beacon. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309894 | Method and Apparatuses for Allowing a Nomadic Terminal to Access a Home Network on Layer 2 Level - A method of allowing a nomadic terminal to access a home network on the Layer 2 level. The method comprises connecting said terminal to a remote access network via an access point, the remote access network being connected to an operator's backbone network via a remote access router. Signalling is exchanged between the access point and an authentication server within the backbone network in order to authenticate the terminal to the authentication server and, following successful authentication, a Layer 2 tunnel extending across the backbone network is established for the purpose of connecting said nomadic terminal to the home network. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309895 | DATA TRANSMISSION FROM A VEHICLE AND NETWORK REGULATION - The invention provides a method for transmitting data from a vehicle. The vehicle is provided with a monitoring apparatus ( | 12-09-2010 |
20100309896 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE AND ADAPTER THEREOF - A wireless local area network (WLAN) device includes a WLAN adapter having a USB terminal connected to a USB terminal of a PC (personal computer). The WLAN adapter is loaded with a program for setting a WLAN and executing a communication, and a connection of the adapter to the PC prompts the PC to recognize the adapter as a CD-ROM drive, and prompts the program for setting a WLAN and executing a communication to run automatically. The PC loads data of SCSI standard into the WLAN adapter by using a vender defined command of SCSI standard by way of the program for setting a WLAN and executing a communication. The WLAN adapter converts the data of SCSI standard into data for setting a WLAN or data of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol), and sets the WLAN and executes the communication. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309897 | NETWORK PARTICIPANT STATUS EVALUATION - Methods and apparatus for obtaining and providing status information for network devices. In one implementation, a wireless device includes: an antenna; a wireless communication interface connected to said antenna and supporting wireless communication across a wireless connection provided by said antenna; a memory supporting storing data; and a controller connected to said wireless interface and to said memory, supporting an application service and a network evaluation service; wherein said application service provides execution and management of one or more application programs accessible by said controller using application data stored in said memory, said network evaluation service provides evaluation of status information of other devices available for wireless communication through said wireless interface and provides status information of the wireless device to another device upon request, and status information provided by said network evaluation service includes information indicating at least one application program for which application data is stored in said memory. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309898 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS DEVICE ACTIVITY MESSAGING - A method and system of reachability indication between a wireless device and at least one push server, the method comprising the steps of: sending device status information from the wireless device to the at least one push server; and receiving the status information at the at least one push server; wherein the at least one push server is enabled to selectively start and stop serving the wireless device on the basis of the status information. The method further comprises sending status information to a packet data serving node that stores a list of push servers associated with a wireless device, and having the packet data serving node forward the status information to the push server. The system and method further includes selectively starting and stopping the serving of the wireless device by the push server during a voice call. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309899 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND NETWORK NODE - Disclosed is a technique for achieving reduction in processing load caused when a mobile terminal having two or more interfaces registers flow control information with a network and reduction in traffic of signaling for the registration. According to this technique, a mobile terminal (MN | 12-09-2010 |
20100316029 | ROAMING BROKER AND NETWORK INTERWORKING CONTROL GATEWAY - An apparatus provides roaming broker functionality. The apparatus comprises a negotiation controller for negotiating a roaming agreement between an originating network and a destination network. The apparatus further comprises a rule generator generating rules according to a negotiated roaming agreement, and a configuration unit configured to implement configuration settings according to respective rules generated by the rule generator. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316030 | TECHNIQUES FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE PROTOCOLS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of supporting multiple protocols in a wireless network operating according to an Institute for Electronic and Electrical Engineers IEEE) 802.16 standard, comprising adding a new convergence sub layer (CS) type in which an extra field is added to an 802.16 service data unit (SDU) to indicate which higher layer protocol is carried in a 802.16 SDU payload. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316031 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND CONTROL METHOD - Communication terminal | 12-16-2010 |
20100316032 | Service Period Recovery wIth Source/Destination help - SP recovery between communications of a source and destination apart from the PCP can occur by performing, prior to the initial frame response between a source and a destination, a back-off procedure using back-off parameters for SP recovery when the initiator of a SP cannot receive a responding frame from the destination and detects the communication medium being idle. In alternative embodiments the source and/or destination can send a notification frame to the PCP informing the PCP of transmission failure. When the PCP determines the communication medium to be idle, the PCP truncates and reallocates the remaining portion of the SP. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316033 | ENHANCEMENTS FOR OFF-THE-SHELF 802.11 COMPONENTS - Methods and systems are disclosed for deploying mobile ad hoc networks using commercial off-the-shelf components conforming to the IEEE 802.11-2007 networking standard. In particular, a physical layer (which may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of these) is provided at or below the MAC layer that adapts operation of standard chipsets to an enhanced ad hoc wireless networking protocol such as the MBRI protocol described herein. This may include suppressing or disabling certain operations of the 802.11 chipset, and adding other functions to support augmenting functionality of the protocol stack to provide various higher-level network functions (e.g., network, routing, and other functions) of an enhanced protocol within or through the physical layer. In one aspect, there is disclosed herein a method for operating a network device that includes disabling at least one function of an 802.11 chipset and providing at least one additional network function through a physical layer application programming interface for the 802.11 chipset. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316034 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING A SERVICE UNAVAILABLE THROUGH A NETWORK CELL - A method performed by user equipment (UE) includes receiving a request to access a service unavailable through a first network cell associated with the UE, and receiving a message from an access device associated with the first network cell, wherein the message identifies a plurality of second network cells providing the service. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316035 | POSITION INFORMATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE, NETWORK EDGE DEVICE, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - Disclosed is a technique that, in a network-based local mobility management method, reduces the load of a network node for managing position information of a mobile terminal and achieves a high scalability with respect to the number of mobile terminals. According to the technique, a LMA (Local Mobility Anchor) ( | 12-16-2010 |
20100316036 | WIRELESS NETWORK ROAMING TIMER METHOD AND APPARATUS - A mobile station in a wireless network includes a roaming timer. The roaming timer is set based on various criteria, and when the roaming timer expires, an attempt to roam is performed. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316037 | METHOD OF SECURING NETWORK ACCESS RADIO SYSTEMS - A method of providing security for network access radio systems and associated access radio security systems used with the systems. The method includes connecting an access radio having a radio link to a network; communicating between the access radio and a computer over the network using a ping application having ping commands and unique encrypted codes; and enabling operation of the access radio when the access radio is receiving ping commands. Typically, the access radio and the computer are nodes on the network and the network is a local area network (LAN). The ping application sends packets of information from the computer to the access radio and receives a response from the access radio. The ping application must be functioning (i.e., sending and receiving commands between the computer and the access radio) to enable the access radio to communicate via the radio link with a remote network. | 12-16-2010 |
20100322212 | Optimization in heterogeneous networks - A heterogeneous wireless communication network includes a home access network with a home network characteristic and a home network policy, and a visiting access network with a visiting network characteristic and a visiting network policy. A packet data node gateway is adapted to communicate with the home access network and the visiting access network over a first communication path. An out-of-band communication path substantially separate from the first communication path is adapted to carry the visiting network policy from the visiting access network to the packet data node gateway. When the terminal is handed off from the home network to the visiting network, the packet data node gateway retrieves the visiting network policy, and the terminal accesses the visiting network over the first communication path using the visiting network policy. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322213 | SERVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments of service discovery in a wireless network involve an Access Point (AP) proxy service to represent service providers. The AP manages service provider information, which is provided in response to service requests from service consumers. The AP proxy capability is advertised as a broadcast message in the wireless network. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322214 | WIRELESS NETWORK POLLING AND DATA WAREHOUSING - Methods and systems are provided to collect and update data on client devices connected to WiFi access points is provided. An inventory of WiFi cable modems and WiFi access points coupled to the WiFi cabled modems within a specific network is periodically collected. Internet Protocol (IP) addresses of WiFi cable modems and WiFi access points coupled to the WiFi cabled modems are periodically updated. Traps are periodically received from the WiFi access points. The traps are parsed to collect an inventory of client devices wirelessly connected to the WiFi access points and a time at which a client device connected to the WiFi access point. The WiFi access points are periodically polled to collect data on client devices, the data including a period of time that a client device has been connected to a WiFi access point and a physical location of the client device. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322215 | METHODS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS DOMAIN SWITCHING, NETWORK NODES, USER TERMINAL AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREFOR - A technique for controlling an access domain selection is described. The technique is applicable to user terminals that are capable of switching from a first network access domain to a second network access domain while services are provided to the user terminals. According to a network aspect of this technique, a network node receives a request message from a user terminal. In response to this request message, the network node sends a rule set including one or more access domain switching rules to the user terminal. These access domain switching rules may be dynamically selected by the network node to control the access domain switching behaviour of the user terminal. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322216 | Method for controlling the steering of the roaming of user equipment in a wireless telecommunication network - The invention concerns a method for controlling the steering of the roaming of a user equipment (UE) by the HPLMN to which said UE is attached via a WLAN Access Point wherein said HPLMN sends a EAP Request Identity message to said UE including a SoR information (SoR Command) and said UE performs a network reselection based on said SoR information as soon as possible. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322217 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING IDLE MODE IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for supporting an idle mode of a terminal in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. In the method, a first request message for starting an idle mode is transmitted to a first access node to which the terminal is currently connected and a first response message with respect to the first request message is received from the first access node, and in this case, when the first response message includes acceptance information with respect to the start of the idle mode, the idle mode starts. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322218 | MULTI-USER, MULTI-MODE BASEBAND SIGNALING METHODS, TIMING/FREQUENCY SYNCHRONIZATION, AND RECEIVER ARCHITECTURES - A femtocell wireless signaling/data mesh network for multi-user, multi-mode baseband signaling methods, timing/frequency synchronization, and receiver architectures is disclosed. The femtocell wireless signaling/data mesh network includes a plurality of femtocells connected by a plurality of wireless links. A first femtocell of the plurality of femtocells directly communicates with a second femtocell of the plurality of femtocells via a wireless link between the first femtocell and the second femtocell. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322219 | Management frame directed cluster assignment within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Management frame directed cluster assignment within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. From a first wireless communication device, a management frame may be transmitted to a number of other wireless communication devices to assign respective clusters (i.e., cluster being one or more channels within one or more bands) for use in communications by those other wireless communication devices. The first wireless communication device may be an access point (AP), and the others may be wireless stations (STAs); alternatively, all of the wireless communication devices in the communication system (e.g., including the first wireless communication device) may be STAs. The cluster assignment may be modified for any of a number of various reasons (e.g., periodically, after a certain number of packets being transmitted and/or received, communication system operating condition change, change in number, type, capabilities, etc. of the various wireless communication devices in the communication system, etc.). | 12-23-2010 |
20100322220 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REGULATING SENDING IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of regulating sending implemented by a station having at least one data packet to be sent via a wireless communication network comprises at least one step of obtaining a binary value representative either of an authorization to send, or of a prohibition to send, a step of sending said packet, said sending step being executed on condition that at least one criterion relating to the binary value or values obtained is satisfied, wherein the binary value or values are dependent on an index value assigned randomly to said station and a class of packets to which the packet to be sent belongs. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322221 | RADIO TRANSMITTING DEVICE AND RADIO TRANSMISSION METHOD - Each of radio frame multiplexing circuits generates radio frame data by multiplexing multiplexed data inputted from a LAN terminating circuit, into the transmission area of a radio frame, and by assigning the transmission area of the radio frame other than the area, to which LAN-received data is assigned, as the transmission area of PDH data signal strings; inserts data assignment information into a radio over-header; and transmits the data from a radio transmitting/receiving circuit to a remote device via a transmission line. Each of radio frame demultiplexing circuits demultiplexes the multiplexed data based on the data assignment information in the radio over-header. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322222 | SHARED PROCESSING BETWEEN WIRELESS INTERFACE DEVICES OF A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - An integrated circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives first packetized data with a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol, wherein the first wireless interface circuit includes a first processing module that processes the first packetized data. A second wireless interface circuit, coupled to the first wireless interface device, transceives second packetized data with a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol, wherein the second wireless interface circuit includes a second processing module that processes the second packetized data, wherein the second wireless interface circuit is operable to assign a first processing task to the first processing module and wherein the first processing task relates to the processing of the second packetized data. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329222 | MIMO BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND SYSTEM - A wireless telecommunications system having a plurality of radio base stations, the base stations in the system are arranged for communication with at least one user terminal in accordance with a first principle of wireless telecommunication. The system has at least a first sub-set of the plurality of radio base stations arranged for communication with at least one user terminal in the system in accordance with said first principle but also as MIMO-stations in cooperation with each other. Preferably, said first principle of wireless telecommunication is a principle within cellular telephony. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329223 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to one embodiment, a communication device connected wirelessly to a source-side communication device includes a wired communication module, first and second wireless communication modules, and a communication controller. The wired communication module transmits a video signal and exchanges a data signal with a sink device via wired communication. The first wireless communication module receives a video signal through a first wireless communication system. The second wireless communication module transmits and receives a data signal through a second wireless communication system. The communication controller performs processing related to a physical address used in the communication system of the wired communication module. The communication controller relays information as to data communication capability exchanged between the sink device and the source device, and exchanges information as to data communication capability with the source-side communication device. When the devices are capable of data communication, the communication controller sets data communication as possible. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329224 | CALL ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques to configure quality of service (QoS) and utilize radio resources for a call in a WLAN are described. In an aspect, a station ensures that an access point in the WLAN is suitable for receiving service prior to performing registration to receive services via the WLAN. In another aspect, the station first requests for radio resources for traffic flows, then requests for radio resources for signaling flows, and sends signaling as best effort traffic if radio resources are not granted for the signaling flows. In yet another aspect, the station aggregates QoS for multiple applications and requests for radio resources based on the aggregated QoS. In yet another aspect, the station releases extra radio resources corresponding to the difference between the QoS granted by the WLAN and the QoS proposed by a remote terminal for the call. In yet another aspect, the station requests for the same QoS or lower from a new access point during handoff. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329225 | CALL ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques to configure quality of service (QoS) and utilize radio resources for a call in a WLAN are described. In an aspect, a station ensures that an access point in the WLAN is suitable for receiving service prior to performing registration to receive services via the WLAN. In another aspect, the station first requests for radio resources for traffic flows, then requests for radio resources for signaling flows, and sends signaling as best effort traffic if radio resources are not granted for the signaling flows. In yet another aspect, the station aggregates QoS for multiple applications and requests for radio resources based on the aggregated QoS. In yet another aspect, the station releases extra radio resources corresponding to the difference between the QoS granted by the WLAN and the QoS proposed by a remote terminal for the call. In yet another aspect, the station requests for the same QoS or lower from a new access point during handoff. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329226 | SIP Server Discovery in an Interworking WLAN/IMS System - The present invention relates to a node and a method for transmitting initiation information related to a SIP-proxy server between an IMS-client stored in a user equipment (UE) and a Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) via a Access Network (AN) and a Tunnelling Termination Gateway (TTG) node in IP core network. The present invention offers smooth transfer between different protocols and Interworking between different networks. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329227 | ROBUST CODING IN MULTI-HOP NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus which make use of a multiple receiver (MR) frame aggregation for creating data units so that they require acknowledgment of a single packet data unit by a group of several intended receivers. A multi-hop topology information regarding the neighborhood of a destination node can be used to derive the intended receivers which acknowledge a packet transmission besides the primary destination node of the packet. | 12-30-2010 |
20110002313 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MESSAGING ACROSS CELLULAR NETWORKS AND A PUBLIC DATA NETWORK - A computer program product for instant message communication in a wireless and non-wireless environment. A message is sent from a mobile unit device over a wireless communication network. The message includes a destination address, information associated with the mobile unit device's user, message content and message address. If, according to information previously stored for the mobile unit device's user at the instant message system, the destination address is associated with an instant message function, the associated instant message function is executed at the instant message system using the information contained in the message content, if required as determined by the associated instant message function. If, according to information previously stored for the mobile unit device's user, the destination address is associated with an instant message name, an instant message is created according to the message content and is sent to the user with the associated instant message name. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002314 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZATION OF FEMTOCELL NETWORK MANAGEMENT - Methods and apparatus that reduce network management overhead required for the operation of wireless femtocells. In one aspect of the invention, a central network entity governs the simultaneous operation of several femtocells by specifying modes of operation, and operational parameters for one or more of the femtocells. In one embodiment, at least one of the specified modes of operation directs a femtocell to operate in a substantially autonomous manner within the network-defined operational parameters. The network-defined constraints are provided to the femtocell for example, responsive to a successful registration attempt. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002315 | DIGITAL MULTIMEDIA LOCAL AREA WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND LOCAL AREA WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD USING THE SAME - A local area wireless transmission system includes: at least one transmitter transmitting a multimedia data signal with a first speed; at least one receiver receiving the multimedia data signal; and at least one master receiver transmitting a synchronization control signal with a second speed lower than the first speed, the at least one master receiver receiving the multimedia data signal from the at least one transmitter wirelessly and from the at least one receiver wiredly. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002316 | APPARATUS AND A METHOD FOR ENABLING A WLAN DEVICE TO ACCESS A WIMAX NETWORK - The present invention provides an apparatus for enabling a wireless local area network device to access a WiMAX network, the apparatus comprises: WiMAX means, configured to encapsulate uplink data from data means into a transmission message in an 802.16e protocol format, to send the transmission message to a WiMAX base station, to re-encapsulate a received message from the WiMAX base station into downlink data that can be processed by the data means and to send the downlink data to the data means; the data means, configured to receive the downlink data from the WiMAX means and the uplink data from WLAN means and to perform processing to the uplink data and the downlink data; and the WLAN means, configured to encapsulate the downlink data received from the data means into a downlink data message in an 802.11a/b/g protocol format, to send the downlink data message to a terminal device, and to re-encapsulate the uplink data message received from the terminal device into the uplink data that can be processed by the data means. The present invention also provides a method for enabling a wireless local area network device to access a WiMAX network. Therefore the facile movement in a local area is achieved. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002317 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MAPPING THE INITIAL LOCATION OF DOWNLINK PILOT - A mapping method for the initial location of the downlink pilot comprises the following steps: acquiring a cell sequence number; mapping the cell sequence number to k; and setting an initial location of a downlink pilot on a first antenna as the K | 01-06-2011 |
20110002318 | MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - It is an objective of the present invention to efficiently use an uplink radio resource, when transmitting user data based on an uplink high efficient transmission method. A mobile station according to the present invention includes a transmission section configured to transmit high efficient uplink data channel frames for transmitting user data based on the uplink high efficient transmission method, so that transmission timings of the high efficient uplink data channel frames are synchronized among mobile stations located in a single area. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002319 | SIGNALING OF TRANSMISSION SETTINGS IN MULTI-USER SYSTEMS - The present invention relates to a transmitting apparatus, a receiving apparatus, a system, a signal, and a method of multi-user transmission, wherein transmission settings are divided into common signal information, containing settings/information relevant for multiple receivers and user stream specific information, containing settings/information relevant only to a related user stream. Furthermore, the common signal information may comprise at least one of a duration of the longest user stream field and multi-user resource allocation field, so that the receivers know the mapping of user streams to receivers. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002320 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING INFORMATION FOR SUPPORTING LEGACY SYSTEM AND MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method for transmitting information that supports a legacy system and a multi-carrier system is disclosed. The method for transmitting information supporting a legacy system includes constructing a frame structure for supporting the legacy system, and transmitting a frame header including allocation information of the frame structure to a mobile station. | 01-06-2011 |
20110007721 | METHOD FOR DIRECTIONAL ASSOCIATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product operable in a wireless communication system are provided in which an access probe is generated for transmission to a wireless node. A first signal is generated for transmission to the wireless node. The first signal includes information corresponding to a first preferred beam pattern from the wireless node to the apparatus. A second signal is received from the wireless node including information corresponding to a second preferred beam pattern from the apparatus to the wireless node. The second preferred beam pattern is determined based on the access probe. The apparatus communicates with the wireless node using at least one of the first preferred beam pattern or the second preferred beam pattern. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007722 | Base Station Selection Method for a Wireless Communication System and Device Using the Same - A base station selection method is disclosed. The wireless communication system includes a plurality of base stations with overlapped radio ranges and a plurality of wireless devices. The method includes steps of modeling the plurality of base stations as a plurality of variable nodes in a factor graph, modeling the plurality of wireless devices as a plurality of constraint nodes in the factor graph, and selecting a base station for transmission from the plurality of base stations based on the factor graph. Each variable node is defined as a frequency band state of a corresponding base station. Each constraint node is linked to the variable nodes corresponding to the base stations that include the corresponding wireless device in their radio ranges, and is defined as that the frequency band states of the base stations including the corresponding wireless device in their radio ranges can not be all turned off. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007723 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION THEREOF - Disclosed is a communication apparatus in a network system constituted by a plurality of communication apparatuses, wherein the fact that a specific communication apparatus connected to a temporary network constructed temporarily has left the temporary network is detected. In response to the specific communication apparatus leaving the temporary network, another communication apparatus connected to the temporary network is allowed to return to the original network. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007724 | HIERARCHICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM PROVIDING INTELLIGENT DATA, PROGRAM AND PROCESSING MIGRATION - A hierarchical communication system, arranged in a spanning tree configuration, is described in which wired and wireless communication networks exhibiting substantially different characteristics are employed in an overall scheme to link portable or mobile computing devices. Copies of data, program code and processing resources are migrated from their source toward requesting destinations based on request frequency, communication link costs and available local storage and/or processing resources. Each appropriately configured network device acts as an active participant in network migration. In addition, portable two-dimensional (2-D) code reading terminals are configured to wirelessly communicate compressed 2-D images toward stationary access servers that identify the code image through decoding and through comparison with a database of images that have previously been decoded and stored. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007725 | Network Access Points Using Multiple Devices - A system and method for providing access to a communication network includes providing a radio node comprising a first set of access point components including a radio component, and providing a physically separated controller node in communication with the radio node. The access point controller comprises a second set of access point components distinct from the first set of access point components, creating a distributed access point. A system controller may also be used to control at least one of the radio node and the controller node. The radio node, the controller node, and the system controller communicate over a communication link, such as a wireless or wired link. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007726 | METHOD, ROAMING PROCESSING DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING INTERNATIONAL ROAMING - There are disclosed an international roaming method, a roaming processing device and a communication system for international roaming of an international roaming subscriber of a first operator in a third operator network. When the international roaming subscriber of the first operator provided with a first operator IMSI and a second operator IMSI. roams in the third operator network, the roaming processing device of a second operator modifies a first signaling message from a first operator network and carrying the first operator IMSI to a second signaling message carrying the second operator IMSI and transmits the second signaling message to the third operator network. and modifies a third signaling message from the third operator network and carrying the second operator IMSI to a fourth signaling message carrying the first operator IMSI and transmits the fourth signaling message to the first operator network. There is also disclosed a gateway device. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007727 | METHOD FOR A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for a first coordinator operating at a first channel frequency in a wireless personal area network (WPAN), the WPAN further comprising a second coordinator operating a second channel frequency, the method comprising the steps of transmitting a message at a plurality of channel frequencies including the second channel frequency, requesting the second coordinator to change from the second channel frequency to the first channel frequency, and communicating with the second coordinator using the first channel frequency. As discussed above, advantages with the present invention includes that no priority based mechanism is needed due to the fact that the coordinator that initiates (e.g. starts) communication-decides on used frequency. Furthermore, every coordinator is able to have the coordinator it wants to communicate with to change to its decided frequency. The present invention also relates to a corresponding method for a second coordinator, a first and a second coordinator, a system comprising at least a first and a second coordinator, and a corresponding computer program. | 01-13-2011 |
20110013603 | Techniques for MIMO beamforming for frequency selective channels in wireless communication systems - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus that may include a transceiver operable as a base station (BS) in a wireless network and adapted for multiple input multiple output (MIMO) beamforming and further adapted for wireless communication with a receiver that feeds back to the transceiver a plurality of beamforming matrixes per subband and interpolates the beamforming matrixes across the subband. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013604 | Methods, Systems and Computer Program Products for Controlling Devices Using Portable Electronic Devices - Remote devices are managed using a portable electronic device. If a portable electronic device is determined to have entered an area associated with a local area network (LAN), a link between the portable electronic device and the LAN is established. User services are established between the portable electronic device and a remote server using the established link based on a user profile associated with the portable electronic device. Devices associated with the remote server communicatively coupled to the LAN are controlled using the portable electronic device. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013605 | MOBILE ROUTER WITH SESSION PROXY - A mobile router having a session proxy module is disclosed. The session proxy module may act as a proxy (such as a TCP proxy) for all sessions (e.g., TCP sessions) going through the mobile router. That is, for example, when a local end-user seeks to establish a TCP session from their local end-user device (such as laptop) with a destination (such as a third party server), the session proxy module may (1) terminate the TCP session coming from the local end-user device and (2) establish a TCP (or some other protocol) session on the backhaul interface with the destination. That way, all end-user traffic between the end-user and the destination may be transparently routed through the mobile router. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013606 | METHOD OF OPERATING ACTIVE SCANNING TO CONFIGURE MESH NETWORK - A method of operating active scanning to configure a mesh network includes receiving a probe request frame from a mesh point (MP), the probe request frame comprising a Mesh Identifier (ID) information element, and transmitting a probe response frame to the MP when a Mesh ID in the Mesh ID information element is a wildcard Mesh ID or a specific Mesh ID. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013607 | CONSTRUCTING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT LONG TRAINING FIELD SEQUENCES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for constructing a long training field (LTF) sequence in a preamble to reduce a peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) at a transmitter. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013608 | ACCESS POINT FOR PROVIDING WLAN VIRTUALIZATION, WLAN VIRTUALIZATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROVIDING ACCESS TO WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a WLAN virtualization system which is capable of efficiently separating a Basic Service Set (BSS) into a plurality of virtual BSSs in a Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) manner. The WLAN virtualization system includes an Access Point (AP) for providing a plurality of vBSSs, and a plurality of stations corresponding to the vBSSs provided by the AP. Each of the vBSSs is operated on a superframe basis, the superframe being scheduled by a beacon frame transmitted from the AP. The superframe includes the beacon frame, one contention-free period, and one contention period. The CPs of the vBSSs include intervals which do not overlap each other. The vBSSs can be classified into any groups designated by a service provider based on certain criteria such as physical layer, QoS, security level, or network access authority, and times can be allocated to superframes at different rates or frequencies. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013609 | METHOD FOR A MORE EFFICIENT SEARCH FOR RADIO NETWORK ACCESS POINTS FOR CLOSED GROUPS IN RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method for identifying access points for a closed group of mobile radio devices to a cellular mobile radio network, wherein the use of said access points is authorized only for the closed group of mobile radio devices, wherein the data from a neighboring cell are transmitted to a mobile radio device checked into said cell by a cell forming such an access point, and/or a search for currently receivable neighboring cells is performed by the mobile radio device checked into said cell, the data from the neighboring cell are stored at least temporarily in the mobile radio device, and a search for the access point is initiated if the mobile radio device is present within range of one or more neighboring cells, wherein, in case the access point is not found, a renewed search for the access point is performed by the mobile radio device if the geographic position of the mobile radio device has changed significantly relative to a previous position, within the range of the neighboring cells. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013610 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS APPARATUS USING THE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless unit performs a frequency conversion process, a quadrature modulation process, and a quadrature detection process. A modem performs a modulation/demodulation process. A processing unit performs digital signal processing on a signal from the modem and on a signal to the modem. An image capturing unit acquires an external image and outputs the acquired image to a coding unit. The coding unit generates image data by performing a compression encoding process on the image received from the image capturing unit and outputs the image data to a control unit. The control unit controls the overall movement of a vehicle camera apparatus. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013611 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENABLING DISCOVERY OF WIRELESS DEVICES - A method and apparatus discover hidden wireless devices in a wireless network using a directional antenna system, preventing partitioning of the wireless network. A first wireless device located in a first antenna sector is joined in response to an initial first beacon. First beacons are received from the joined first wireless device during corresponding first beacon periods. At least a second antenna sector is scanned during at least one first beacon period to listen for second beacons from a second wireless device in the second antenna sector, while remaining joined with the first wireless device. The first beacons are not received while the second antenna sector is scanned. The second wireless device is joined in response to an initial second beacon. Second beacons are then received from the joined second wireless device during corresponding second beacon periods, and the first beacons are received during the corresponding first beacon periods. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013612 | Protocol Coexistence - A communication device having: a first communication unit for transmitting and/or receiving by a first protocol acknowledgements for data received by the device; a second communication unit for transmitting data units of a second protocol, the first and second protocols being such that the data units of the second protocol can interfere with the acknowledgements of the first protocol; and a controller configured to control the device such that, when a data unit of the second protocol is being transmitted by the second communication unit and the first communication unit is to transmit or receive an acknowledgement of the first protocol: the second communication unit interrupts the transmission of the data unit of the second protocol, the first communication unit transmits or receives the acknowledgement of the first protocol and the second transmitter resumes transmission of the data unit of the second protocol from the point that transmission of the data unit would have reached if it had not been interrupted. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013613 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HARQ IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a system configuration signal, the system configuration signal comprising frame configuration information and HARQ delay information, receiving a downlink (DL) signal in a DL subframe and transmitting an acknowledgement (ACK)/not-acknowledgement (NACK) signal for the DL signal in a UL subframe. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013614 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A telecommunications system communicates data packets to and from a mobile terminal in accordance with a mobile internet protocol. The system comprises a packet radio network including a first radio access interface and a gateway support node. The packet radio network is operable to communicate data packets to and from the mobile terminal, through the gateway support node and via the first radio access interface. The gateway support node is operable to provide a home address via which a correspondent node may transmit data packets via the gateway support node to the mobile terminal when the mobile terminal is attached to the packet radio network. The system further comprises a wireless access network including a second radio access interface and a home agent, the wireless access network being operable to communicate data packets to and from the mobile terminal through the home agent via the second radio access interface, the wireless access network being operable to provide a care of address for the mobile terminal via which the correspondent node may transmit data packets via the home agent to the mobile terminal when the mobile terminal is attached to the wireless access network. The mobile terminal is arranged to connect to one of the packet radio network or the wireless access network and, when connected, to detect which of the packet radio network and the wireless access network the mobile terminal has connected. Upon detection that the mobile terminal is attached to the packet radio network, the mobile terminal and the home agent are arranged so that data packets are transmitted to and from the mobile terminal via the gateway support node in preference to the home agent. | 01-20-2011 |
20110019650 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZATION OF DEVICE CAPABILITY EXCHANGE IN A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for optimizing the exchange of capabilities or other request messages across a network. In an exemplary embodiment, IMS architecture is disclosed which leverages the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) to optimize the exchange of capabilities of various user equipment (UE) client devices present on a network. The IMS architecture leverages intermediate entities (such as a home network gateway) to collect the capabilities of all UE devices on a given home network and forward this collected capability information onto a requesting UE device. The requesting entity generates a capabilities request message and appends this message with an information element that requests the capabilities of all UE devices on a given network (such as a user's home network). In response, the receiving device or intermediate entity generates a capabilities response message that includes the capabilities of all UE devices on the requested network. In this manner, signaling messages are reduced. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019651 | Mobile router stack - A wireless mobile router stack ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110019652 | MOBILE SPECTRUM SHARING WITH INTEGRATED WiFi - Methods and systems are disclosed for realizing MBRI networks and network devices using commercial off-the-shelf components (e.g., chipsets) conforming to the 802.11 networking standards. In particular, a physical layer is provided at or below the medium access control layer that adapts the lowest level of a hardware chipset to the MBRI protocol. Also disclosed are methods of managing and operating an integrated MBRI router that supports a tightly or loosely coupled WiFi MAC and PHY layer operations in an all-IP mobile ad hoc network (MANET) with carrier grade network performance and improved spectrum utilization through IP transparent routing, media access control and physical layer convergence protocols. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019653 | SCANNING METHOD IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - A scanning method in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a station supporting the scanning method, and a new type of interworking information element format including information about a distribution system (DS) are disclosed. In the scanning method, information about a DS is included in a beacon frame or a probe request frame/frame response frame. Such information about the DS may be included in a network type field of for example, an interworking information element. In an active scanning method, a user equipment (UE) may specify its DS type by transmitting a probe request frame including DS information such as the DS type or the like. In a passive scanning method, the UE may select a suitable AP by using DS information such as a DS type included in the beacon frame or the like. The DS type may be information indicating whether a DS is a wireless network such as a mesh network or any other wired network. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019654 | Method and Apparatus for Use in a Communications Network - A method is provided of enabling access for a terminal ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110026500 | LOW LATENCY MESH NETWORK - In an example embodiment, there is disclosed herein an apparatus comprising a wireless transceiver and packet processing logic coupled to the wireless transceiver. The packet processing logic is responsive to receiving a packet from a first node on a first path addressed to a node on a second path via the wireless transceiver to forward the packet on the second path towards the node on the second path via the wireless transceiver. The packet processing logic is further configured to send a reply to the packet to the first node on the first path via the wireless transceiver to a second node on the first path that is within range of the wireless receiver and on the second path to the first node on the first path responsive to determining the wireless transceiver cannot send a message directly the first upstream node. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026501 | VIRTUAL NETWORK SERVICE PROVIDER FOR MOBILE VIRTUAL NETWORK OPERATOR ACTIVATION - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods and system configurations to activate a mobile virtual network operator (MVNO). A method includes wirelessly broadcasting a virtual Network Service Provider (NSP) to provide wireless activation of one or more Mobile Virtual Network Operators (MVNOs) associated with a NSP, directing a mobile station (MS) connected to the virtual NSP to a subscription portal that presents to a user of the MS the one or more MVNOs for selection, and provisioning the MS with configuration parameters for a selected MVNO to allow connection of the MS with the selected MVNO. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026502 | Method and System for Simultaneous Local and EPC Connectivity - A system for providing simultaneous local and global connectivity for a 3 | 02-03-2011 |
20110026503 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS INFORMATION CHANNEL - Methods and apparatus to enable a wireless network system to dynamically change information channel message broadcasts. In one aspect, cellular network systems optimize pilot channel message delivery based at least in part on one or more network parameters. Base stations and/or cellular devices can dynamically configure the pilot channel message delivery or reception based on the network parameters. For example, such flexible pilot channel message delivery may more frequently deliver prioritized pilot channel messages, and less frequently broadcast low priority messages. Cellular subscribers with appropriately enabled user equipment may improve their power and applications performance through implementation of the invention. Furthermore, base stations may reclaim the freed cellular resources to support other services. Legacy subscribers are advantageously not affected. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026504 | CONTINUOUS GROUP OWNERSHIP IN AN IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method is provided that includes participating in a peer-to-peer wireless communications network that includes a group controller for creating and ending the network and controlling access to the network by wireless stations. A member of the network receives a status indicator from the group controller indicating that the group owner is or will be no longer serving as group owner. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026505 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR FORWARDING FRAME IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A wireless communication device, system and a method of forwarding frames between stations of a wireless communication system are disclosed. The wireless communication system includes a sending station, a forwarding station and a receiving station. The sending station is able to send a frame including a forwarding field, a receiving station address field, a sending station address field and a forwarding station address field. The forwarding station is able to receive said frame and to forward the frame as is to the receiving station. The receiving station upon receiving the frame reads the forwarding field and if the forwarding field indicates that the frame has been forward from the sending station, the receiving station exchanges the address of the sending station with the address of the receiving station and the address of the receiving station with the address of the sending station and sends a block acknowledge frame including exchanged addresses to the sending station via the forwarding station. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026506 | EFFICIENT COLLECTION OF WIRELESS TRANSMITTER CHARACTERISTIC - Systems, methods, and processor-readable storage media are disclosed for collecting information pertaining to the configuration of one or more wireless networks and using this information in turn to estimate the location of mobile wireless devices associated with those networks. Certain embodiments of the present disclosure are directed to providing efficient systems and methods for collecting the information, which are responsive to the coverage or quality of the wireless network configuration information already stored in a network database. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026507 | FILTER CIRCUIT AND RECEIVER USING THE SAME - Gain setting can be performed at high speed while reducing DC offset due to a filter cutoff frequency changeover without the need for input signal muting. A filter circuit having first and second filters is capable of allowing settings of first and second cutoff frequencies. First and second filter switch circuits and a charging circuit including a charging resistor and a charging switch are provided. For a first time period, the first switch circuit is controllably turned on while the second switch circuit is controllably turned off, thereby providing the first filter function. For a second time period, the first switch circuit is controllably turned off while the second switch circuit is controllably turned on, thereby providing the second filter function. For the first time period, the charging switch is controllably turned on so that the second capacitor is charged via the charging resistor. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026508 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve a problem of an accumulation on the transmission side, a delay on the reception side, and the like at the time of transmission in a communication system such as a wireless LAN system, each communication station in a network transmits a beacon in which information with respect to the network is written and sets a state in which a reception operation is performed during periods of time before and after the transmission of the beacon signal when performing access control not to make communication timing of a packet collide with that of another station by detecting a signal transmitted from another station. With performing such processing, a system can be formed based on minimum level of transmission and reception operation when transmission and reception data does not exist in each communication station in the network, and also a data transfer can be performed with latency as small as possible in a minimum necessary level of transmission and reception operation by making a transition of a transmission and reception state in accordance with a fluctuating volume of transmission and reception data. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026509 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus includes: a first local generator that generates a first local frequency arranged around a center frequency of a band group; a first down converter that receives a supply of a local signal from the first local generator; and a complex filter that quickly changes filter wave characteristics according to frequency hopping. A control to set the hopping complex filter to all-pass characteristics in wireless communication in a band crossing a local frequency among the bands for hopping and in wireless communication for simultaneously using the bands and to set the hopping complex filter to one side frequency suppression characteristics in other wireless communications is performed. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026510 | Method for Enabling Communication between a User Equipment and an IMS Gateway - A Femto base station ( | 02-03-2011 |
20110032913 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING AP SELECTION AND SIGNAL QUALITY - An embodiment of the invention involves a method for selecting and maintaining wireless communications for wireless mesh networks between tier-2 and tier-3 nodes. The method comprises a first operation of receiving channel information from a first wireless node operating as an access point. The channel information includes each channel number used by one or more wireless nodes that are detected by the first wireless node to be operating within a signal coverage area of the first wireless node. Then, an active scan is conducted on a frequency spectrum for wireless signals based on the channel information. Such scanning is accomplished by initially scanning frequencies of each channel number used by the one or more wireless nodes. After the scanning, a determination is made whether to (i) maintain wireless communications with the first wireless node or (ii) establish new wireless communications with a new wireless node (AP). Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032914 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SHARING A PAYLOAD AMONG MOBILE DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and methods for sharing a payload among mobile devices in a wireless network. A first mobile device is configured to communicate with an access device via a first wireless path and with a media gateway server via a second wireless path. One or more other mobile devices are configured to communicate with the media gateway server via the second wireless path and with the first mobile device via a third wireless path. A payload is received at the first mobile device from the access device via the first wireless path and is partitioned into portions. One portion is assigned to the first mobile device, and the remaining portions are assigned to each of the one or more other mobile devices. The assigned payload portions are sent to the media gateway server via the second wireless path. The assigned payload portions are received at the media gateway server, and the payload is reconstructed from the received payload portions. The payload is sent to a destination address via a network. Payloads may also be received at the media gateway server, portioned, distributed to the first mobile device, reconstructed and delivered to the access device in a similar manner. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032915 | LOCAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD EMPLOYING FREQUENCY-VARIABLE SIGNAL DETECTION - A system for performing a local wireless communication using a predetermined frequency band divided into a plurality of channels. The system includes a hub for scanning each channel to identify available one of the plurality of channels and transmitting data over the available channel. The system further includes a sensor set to start to operate when the sensor detects a signal within the predetermined frequency band. The sensor spectrum-senses the signal of the frequency band for each channel, and analyzes a header of packet data for each channel, and receives and processes the packet data if the signal is identified to have a designated code. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032916 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD USING THE SAME - The present invention discloses a wireless communication method for transceiving packets in wireless networks. The method comprises the steps of: transmitting a first packet with a first packet format, wherein a header of the first packet with the first packet format comprises information of a first communication duration; and performing a communication procedure during the first communication duration for transmitting at least one second packet with a second format, for receiving at least one third packet with the second format, or for both transmitting the at least one second packet and receiving the at least one third packet. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032917 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE RELIABLE TRANSMISSION OF COMPRESSED NETWORK HEADERS - Method for transmitting data in a transmission system, the data being transmitted in the form of packets including a compressed header field and a data field and according to a format suited to the transmission system comprising the following steps: recovering the data packet to be transmitted including a compressed header and useful data, identifying the header part from the useful-data part, applying a corrector coding which is selected at the level of the header, and providing the resulting new packet to the link layer, while also communicating the protection mode used, generating the link header according to the transmission format of the relevant transmission system integrating the mode of protection used, and the adaptation of the CRC checksum of the link layer, on reception, performing the error corrector decoding in two steps. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032918 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR - A communication apparatus decides whether to provide, to a receiving apparatus that receives provided communication parameters, communication parameters that have been set by a communication-parameter setting process performed with another communication apparatus. When it is determined to provide the set communication parameters, a parameter that controls sending of an informing signal is changed in order to increase the number of informing signals sent by the communication apparatus per unit time. | 02-10-2011 |
20110038357 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SCANNING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FREQUENCY BAND - Device, system, and method of scanning a wireless communication frequency band. In some embodiments, a device may include a wireless communication unit to scan a first wireless communication frequency band and, upon detecting at least one access point communicating over the first wireless communication frequency band, to receive from the detected access point information identifying one or more channels of a second wireless communication frequency band, different from the first wireless communication frequency band, and to scan the identified channels to detect wireless area network communications of at least one wireless area network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038358 | Apparatus And Method For Neighbor-Aware Concurrent Transmission Media Access Control Protocol - An apparatus and method for neighbor-aware concurrent transmission media access control (MAC) protocol is provided, which determines whether a plurality of communication connections may be established concurrently in a wireless network, where each node in the network obtains the topology information of its multi-hop neighbors via a neighbor discover module. A cross-layer observation module integrates the physical and virtual carrier sensing, observes the address field of a control frame of a MAC layer in the wireless network, and compares the address field information of the control frame against the topology information obtained by the neighbor discover module to determine whether a plurality of connections may be established for concurrent transmission. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038359 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR CAUSING COMPUTER TO EXECUTE THE CONTROL METHOD - In 802.11n, the time during which the band is occupied is prolonged by the use of the frame aggregation method or in accordance with the type of communication frame, and this may influence communication of another apparatus. To solve this problem, a communication frame length (a communication frame to be used and the number of frames to be aggregated) is determined by taking account of priority information of a plurality of communication apparatuses. | 02-17-2011 |
20110044302 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a radio communication system that simultaneously uses plural radio channels (STA | 02-24-2011 |
20110044303 | DEVICE, SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF ADJUSTING A CONTENTION WINDOW FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - Device, system, and method of adjusting a contention window for wireless transmission. In some embodiments, a wireless communication unit may control transmissions of a wireless communication device in a wireless area network during a contention period, wherein the wireless communication unit is to select a back-off period within a contention-window having a contention-window size, which is adjusted based on a number of stations included in the wireless area network, and wherein the wireless communication unit is to wait for the back-off period prior to beginning a wireless transmission during the contention period. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044304 | Wireless Gateway Supporting A Plurality of Networks - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, systems and methods are illustrated for an apparatus comprising a modem component, a wireless communications component, at least one processor, and at least one tangible electronic memory storing data and numerous computer-executable modules to enable wireless hotspots with multiple network identifiers. Examples of at least some of the computer-executable modules includes, but is not limited to an input module, network identifier module, session management module, network management module, automatic location management module, authentication module, bandwidth negotiation module, billing interface module, and activity-based location module. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044305 | CHANNEL DEPENDENT GATING - Network element ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110044306 | CALL SETUP METHOD FOR MOBILE VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK AND ACCESS POINT APPARATUS THEREOF - A call setup method is provided for a MVPN which includes at least one access point apparatus, at least one database, and a plurality of users. The database records a private extension number, a user phone number, and a user identity module of each user and a link address of the corresponding access point apparatus. The access point apparatus corresponding to a MO user receives a call setup request message for setting up a call with a MT user from the MO user. The access point apparatus corresponding to the MO user determines whether the link address of the access point apparatus corresponding to the MT user is valid according to the database. If the link address of the access point apparatus corresponding to the MT user is valid, the MO user and the MT user set up the call through the access point apparatuses corresponding to the link addresses. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044307 | Deregistration with Context Retention for Inter-RAT Operations - A method to perform deregistration with context retention is presented. In one embodiment, the method includes storing a context associated with a mobile station in response to a deregistration request from the mobile station. The method includes determining whether or not to accept the deregistration request with context retention and sending a deregistration command message to the mobile station if the deregistration request with context retention is allowed. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044308 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - It is an object of the invention to provide a wireless communication terminal and wireless communication method in which, even when moved outside the wireless area during communication, communication between terminals can be continued without requiring an operation of previously registering identification information or key information. A wireless communication terminal ( | 02-24-2011 |
20110044309 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DEPLOYING TRACKING AREAS - The present invention provides a method and a device for deploying tracking areas. The method comprises: the mobile management entity MME acquires the connection establishment request from the Evolved Node B (e Node B), wherein, the connection establishment request carries one or more tracking area identities TAIs corresponding to the one or more tracking areas belonging to the e Node B; the MME acquires the one or more TAIs from the connection establishment request and locally searches the one or more TAIs; if the one or more TAIs are not found, the MME deploys the one or more tracking areas corresponding to the one or more TAIs. By the present invention, the MME of the mobile communication packet domain evolution system directly deploys the tracking areas, which increases the number of the tracking areas of the mobile communication packet domain evolution system, and satisfies the demand to the tracking areas of the mobile communication packet domain evolution system. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044310 | SYSTEM FOR ON-DEMAND ACCESS TO LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A roaming company makes payments to an aggregator of independent WLAN operators in exchange for providing Internet access services to subscribers of the roaming company. Independent WLAN operator accounts are maintained at the aggregation company. | 02-24-2011 |
20110051698 | Mobile Remote Access - Providing mobile remote access in a secure manner. A bridge application is provided for devices such as smart phones which establishes a first secure connection to a host controller using a carrier network, advertises one or more SSIDs using a second wireless connection on the device such as an IEEE 802.11 interface, accepting and authenticating connections from a target device to the advertised SSID, and acting as a bridge for traffic between the target device and the host controller. The bridge application may be delivered to the device fully configured, or it may be delivered unconfigured with configuration information either supplied by the user or provided in an e-mail to the user of the device. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051699 | Traffic Forwarding in Mesh Networks - Prioritizing traffic forwarding in a wireless mesh network. In a wireless mesh network using carrier detect multiple access-collision avoidance with backoff, such as mesh networks supporting IEEE 802.11 clients, access points in the mesh are assigned levels according to their distance in hops from the root node of the mesh. Access points in the mesh then generate backoff times proportional to their level in the mesh. This has the effect of prioritizing traffic at those levels close to the mesh root. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051700 | MODIFYING SYSTEM CLOCKS BASED ON PARTICULAR WLAN CHANNEL THAT IS SELECTED TO IMPROVE RF SENSITIVITY OF A RADIO MODULE - Techniques are provided for selecting one of a plurality of clock signals used to drive a bus of a WLAN-enabled device having a WLAN radio module coupled to the bus and designed to operate over a plurality of WLAN channels. A network infrastructure device, such as an access point or port, is provided that comprises a WLAN radio module, a PCI bus coupled to the WLAN radio module, a look up table (LUT) and a processor. The WLAN radio module designed to operate over a plurality of WLAN channels in a first frequency band. The LUT comprises a plurality of entries. Each entry comprises: a particular one of the WLAN channels and a corresponding one of a first clock signal having a first clock frequency and a second clock signal having a second clock frequency that is to be selected. The first clock signal causes interference at the WLAN radio module when operating over a first subset of the WLAN channels, and the second clock signal causes interference at the WLAN radio module when operating over a second subset of the WLAN channels. The processor selects, from the LUT based on the one of the WLAN channels that has been selected for the WLAN radio module to communicate over, either the first clock signal or the second clock signal that is to be used to drive the bus. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051701 | IMS DEREGISTRATION OF A DUAL MODE DEVICE TRIGGERED THROUGH A LEGACY NETWORK - Systems and methods are disclosed that deregister a dual mode device with an IMS network by transmitting a message over a legacy network (e.g., a cellular network). The dual mode device detects a loss of wireless communications with an access network of the IMS network, and transmits a deregister request message to the legacy network for delivery to the IMS network. A network element in the IMS network receives the deregister request message, and updates an IMS registration status of the dual mode device based on the deregister request message to indicate the dual mode device as deregistered. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051702 | ADDRESS STRIPPING IN A METER READING WIRELESS MESH NETWORK AND ASSOCIATED SYSTEM - A meter reading system includes a meter reading wireless mesh network having wireless meter reading nodes in communication with an access point. Each wireless meter reading node has an address associated therewith. The meter reading wireless mesh network is configured to define a given downstream route, from the access point to a given node via successive intermediate nodes, based upon addresses of the successive intermediate nodes and the given node. The respective address at each successive intermediate node is stripped while routing data along the given downstream route from the access point to the given node. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051703 | Mobile router device - A wireless mobile router ( | 03-03-2011 |
20110051704 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR RELAYING SYMBOLS TRANSFERRED BY A SOURCE TO A DESTINATION - The present invention concerns a method for relaying symbols transferred by a source to a destination in a wireless cellular telecommunication network, the symbols being relayed by a relay, the relay receiving symbols. The relay:
| 03-03-2011 |
20110051705 | MIMO AND MU-MIMO OFDM PREAMBLES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure present frame structures to support a plurality of standards, such as the IEEE 802.11 ac in addition to the IEEE 802.11 a/b/n/g. Preamble of the frame structure can be used by a receiver to detect transmission mode of the packet. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051706 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A integrated circuit includes logic configured to support smart-utility-network communication using an integer number of data bits per symbol for 96, 48, 24, 12, and 4 data subcarriers across IFFT sizes of 128, 64, 32, 16, and 8. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051707 | CALL FLOW SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE IN A LEGACY TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operating a network server, such as a mobile application gateway, connect devices on a cellular or carrier network with individual networks, such as enterprise voice and data networks or residential networks. The effects of the present invention are far reaching in terms of transferring effective call control from the cellular network into the control of the individual network, such as the enterprise, and enabling new business models for the purchase of cellular service from a public cellular carrier by an enterprise. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051708 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DEPLOYING EVOLVED NODE B - A method and device for deploying evolved nodes are provided in the present invention, and the method comprises: a MME acquires a connection establishment request from an e Node B, wherein the connection establishment request carries a global identifier of the e Node B; the MME acquires the global identifier, and searches for corresponding e Node B information according to the global identifier, and if the corresponding e Node B information cannot be found, the MME deploys the e Node B. With the present invention, the MME in a mobile communication packet domain evolved system can directly deploy e Node B, which increases the number of e Node B in the mobile communication packet domain evolved system, and satisfies the demand of the mobile communication packet domain evolved system on e Node B. | 03-03-2011 |
20110058535 | Primary user detection - A low complexity primary user detection system is disclosed. Signals are filtered to reduce the number of signals that must be processed. Width and PRI of the signals are used to match a constellation associated with a primary user. If the constellation is matched, communication parameters are adjusted to make way for the primary user. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058536 | WIRELESS NETWORK SELECTION APPARATUS - A wireless network selection apparatus comprises a storage unit, a transmitting unit, a first receiving unit, and a second receiving unit. The storage unit stores first connection setting information to join a first wireless network and second connection setting information to join a second wireless network which is different from the first wireless network. The transmitting unit transmits the first connection setting information or the second connection setting information to an external communication terminal. The first receiving unit receives a request to transmit the first connection setting information transmitted from the transmitting unit. The second receiving unit is provided in the same housing as that in which the first receiving unit is provided and receives a request to transmit the second connection setting information transmitted from the transmitting unit. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058537 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD APPLICABLE THERETO - A mobile electronic device and a communication method applicable thereto. The mobile electronic device includes a microprocessor, a routing IC and a modem unit. The microprocessor is used to connect with at least one first external device via the routing IC. The modem unit is coupled to the microprocessor for connecting with a base station, so that the first external device is enabled to communicate with the base station via the mobile electronic device. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058538 | HAND-HELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD APPLICABLE THERETO - A hand-held electronic device and a communication method applicable thereto. The hand-held electronic device includes a microprocessor and a modem unit. The microprocessor connects the hand-held electronic device with at least one first external device via an ad-hoc network protocol. The modem unit connects with a base station for enabling the first external device to communicate with the base station via the hand-held electronic device. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058539 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND RADIO STATION THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for communicating between a primary station and a secondary station comprising (a) at the secondary station, upon arrival of a data packet to be transmitted to the primary station, buffering said data packet in a buffer, (b) at the secondary station, after the expiration of a time period starting at arrival of the data packet, transmitting to the primary station a request for an uplink transmission resource if a grant of uplink transmission resource is not received during the said time period, (c) at the primary station, granting to the secondary station an uplink transmission resource. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058540 | System and Method for Supporting Extended Protocols in a Wireless Communication System - A system and method is provided for supporting data transfer protocols that extend beyond standard protocols used in conventional data over cable systems. A subscriber station in accordance with the invention determines, during registration, whether a base station with which it communicates is capable of supporting an extended protocol, and if it is, transfers data to the base station in accordance with the extended protocol. Additionally, a base station in accordance with the invention is notified during registration whether or not a subscriber station supports an extended protocol and stores this information. When a request for transmission opportunity is subsequently received from the subscriber station, the base station accesses the stored information to determine if the cable modem supports the extended protocol. If the subscriber station supports the extended protocol, the base station processes data received from the subscriber station during the transmission opportunity in accordance with that protocol. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058541 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE NETWORK SELECTION BY THE HOME OPERATOR OF DUAL USER EQUIPMENT - The invention concerns a method for controlling the network selection by the home operator of dual user equipment ( | 03-10-2011 |
20110058542 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR PAGING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for forwarding a page message to a communication device includes receiving a page message and a list of Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Identities in conjunction therewith. Each of the CSG Identities is indicative of which radio base stations among said plurality of radio base stations the communication device is allowed to access. The method also includes selecting, based on the list of CSG Identities received in conjunction with the received page message, a subset of radio base stations among said plurality of radio base stations and forwarding the page message to each radio base station in the selected subset of radio base stations, whereby the communication device is paged only via radio base stations that the communication device is allowed to access. | 03-10-2011 |
20110064062 | FREQUENCY BAND SETTING APPARATUS AND METHOD, ACCESS POINT, AND FREQUENCY BAND USING METHOD OF ACCESS POINT - A frequency band setting apparatus and method are provided. The frequency band setting apparatus may include a calculation unit and a control unit. The calculation unit may calculate a basic frequency band of each of a plurality of Access Points (APs), and the control unit may divide a frequency band, which is available to the plurality of APs, into each of the calculated basic frequency bands and a common frequency band. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064063 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY GENERATING/CHANGING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) ACCESS INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A method and apparatus for automatically generating/changing Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) access information are provided. The apparatus includes an access information management database for storing pre-registered WLAN access information of a plurality of WLAN Access Points (APs). The apparatus also includes an access information collector for collecting information for WLAN APs being accessible at a current position of the apparatus, and an access information analyzer for analyzing the collected information, and creating a list of the accessible WLAN APs. The apparatus further includes a comparator for comparing the list with the WLAN access information to determine if the WLAN APs match. The apparatus additionally includes an access information automatic changer for automatically changing current WLAN access information according to matched APs. The apparatus includes an access information generator for automatically generating new WLAN access information when no WLAN access information is matched with the APs. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064064 | WIRELESS/LAN ROUTER QUEUING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A queuing method and system for wireless/LAN routers processes and routes an incoming data packet from a wireless mobile network to a destination server. The system uses a wireless transport module to initiate storage of the data packet in a permanent storage device while simultaneously forwarding the data packet to the destination server. A database thread is used to manage the operations being performed on the data packet and for initiating the storage of the data packet in a permanent storage device based on a permanent storage queue. A main thread is used to simultaneously forward the data packet to the destination server. The wireless transport module is adapted to determine whether the data packet has been acknowledged by the destination server and aborting the storage of the data packet in the permanent storage device once acknowledgment from by destination server has been received. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064065 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus performs bi-directional communication with an initiator. The apparatus is allocated an allocation period for data transmission from the initiator. The apparatus includes means for generating a first physical frame including an acknowledgement frame with respect to data received from the initiator, and generating a second physical frame in which a plurality of transmission data frames addressed to the initiator are aggregated. The apparatus also includes means for transmitting the first physical frame at a first transmission rate and the second physical frame at a second transmission rate, during the allocation period. | 03-17-2011 |
20110069685 | SIGNALING-LESS DYNAMIC CALL SETUP AND TEARDOWN BY UTILIZING OBSERVED SESSION STATE INFORMATION - A system and methodology that facilitates signaling-less call setup and teardown by employing observed Quality of Experience (QoE) and resource demands is provided. Moreover, the system provides an environment for supersonic treatment of observed QoE and Quality of Service (QoS) demands for mobile applications. Specifically, a monitoring component is employed to determine session state information associated with a traffic flow, which includes observed QoE and resource demand data. The session state information is stored in a shared memory location and can be analyzed to modify and/or create a network policy for the traffic flow. The network policy is applied to one or more traffic flows to minimize signaling exchanges between a communication network and a mobile station. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069686 | TRAFFIC FORWARDING IN MESH NETWORKS - Prioritizing traffic forwarding in a wireless mesh network. In a wireless mesh network using carrier detect multiple access—collision avoidance with backoff, such as mesh networks supporting IEEE 802.11 clients, access points in the mesh calculate a node rank based on downstream and upstream rank components. Access points in the mesh then generate backoff times inversely proportional to their node rank. This has the effect of prioritizing traffic at nodes that have higher rank. The downstream and upstream rank components take into account the amount of space occupied by downstream and upstream traffic, respectively, and are weighted by their position in the mesh tree. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069687 | Wireless Broadband Deployment - Deployment of wireless broadband and systems for use in providing wireless broadband is described. The system can include a trunk, which can include a root node, optional repeaters, and a main distribution node, the combination which enables wireless MIMO backhaul to a network such as the Internet. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069688 | Short Packet for Use in Beamforming - A method for generating a beamforming training (BFT) unit includes generating a physical layer (PHY) preamble of the BFT unit and generating a first encoding block and a second encoding block using PHY data and MAC data, including at least one of i) using a number of padding bits in a PHY layer of the BFT unit such that the BFT unit consists of the PHY preamble, the first encoding block, and the second encoding block, and ii) generating a MAC protocol data unit (MPDU) having a length such that the BFT unit consists of the PHY preamble, the first encoding block, and the second encoding block. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069689 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION WITH NETWORK CONNECTION - A method and apparatus may be used for peer-to-peer communication. The method and apparatus may allow for network connectivity during the peer-to-peer communication session. The network connectivity may be provided via Scheduled and/or Unscheduled AP Connection times/periods. A station (STA) may be configured to negotiate access point (AP) Connection times/periods with a peer STA for a direct link which may be on a basic service set (BSS) channel or on a non-BSS channel. The STAs may communicate with the AP during the agreed AP Connection times/periods and return to the direct link for peer-to-peer communication. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069690 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR THE PROTECTION OF AD-HOC WIRELESS DEVICE OPERATION - In an embodiment of the invention, a system may include one or more wireless transmitters and a transportable transmitter having at least one processor and at least one storage device. The transportable transmitter may be configured to communicate with the one or more wireless transmitters, store operational data in the storage device, encapsulate the operational data into a message, and transmit the message to establish a geographic protected contour for the wireless transmitter. The wireless transportable transmitter may, after transmitting the message, transmit information from within the geographic protected contour to a receiver outside the geographic protected contour while receiving interference protection on the transmitting frequency within the geographic contour. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069691 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN NETWORK ENVIRONMENT WITH WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS BRIDGED USING RELAY PORTAL - A method of transmitting and receiving data in a network environment with a wired network and a wireless network bridged using a relay portal is provided. The method includes choosing one of a plurality of portals sharing a wired network and a wireless network as a relay portal, and transmitting a data packet to the wired network by setting an identifier of the relay portal as a prioritized receiver of the data packet. | 03-24-2011 |
20110075642 | Configurable contention-based period in mmWave wireless systems - Embodiments of systems and methods for implementing a contention-based period with configurable parameters such as slot size, and minimum and maximum contention windows in a wireless network are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075643 | Apparatus and methods for universal services interface networking - Embodiments of systems and methods for Universal System Interface networking are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075644 | Device, method and system of dual-mode wireless communication - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of dual-mode wireless communication. Some embodiments include a wireless dual-mode transceiver capable of operating at first and second wireless communication modes during first and second time periods, respectively, wherein at the first communication mode the transceiver is capable of performing wireless-local-area-network communications over a wireless-local-area-network link, and wherein at the second communication mode the transceiver is capable of performing wireless video communications over a wireless video communication link. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075645 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A wireless communications system including a mobile station MS and base stations BS | 03-31-2011 |
20110075646 | WIRELESS SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION - A system for wirelessly communicating from a high speed data modem using a first radio transceiver at a first location and a second radio transceiver at a second location preferably includes: (i) a housing (containing the data modem, the first radio transceiver, a radio processor, and a power supply) connected to an outdoor supporting structure, which supports a coaxial cable carrying an RF signal and AC power; (ii) a splitter to split the RF signal from the AC power, wherein the radio processor sends a digital signal to the first radio transceiver, which sends the signal to a first antenna, and wherein the signal is provided from the first antenna to a second antenna coupled to the second radio transceiver at a user device, wherein the system communicates the signal from the second antenna to the second radio transceiver and then to a second radio processor coupled to the user device; and wherein the DC power is provided to the data modem, the first radio transceiver, and the radio processor. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075647 | Method for Sending and Receiving Signaling in a Multiple Carrier Frequency Communication System - The present invention discloses a method for sending signaling and a method for receiving signaling in a multiple carrier frequency communication system. The method for sending signaling comprises: a base station sends control signaling on a primary carrier frequency corresponding to a terminal; the control signaling carries the indication information for indicating the part of control signaling which needs to be decoded of a secondary carrier frequency. The primary carrier frequency is a carrier frequency resource that the terminal must decode all the control signaling. The secondary carrier frequency is a carrier frequency resource on which the terminal can operate determined by the control signaling on the primary carrier frequency of the terminal, and whether the part of the control signaling of the secondary carrier frequency needs to be decoded is indicated by the control signaling of the primary carrier frequency. | 03-31-2011 |
20110080897 | Communications resource management - A communications resource management system. The system includes a first module for prioritizing incoming messages and a second module for steering the messages in response to the prioritization by the first module. The first module assigns a message priority to each message based on a plurality of parameters such as mission mode, message type, and timeliness factor. The second module selects the most optimal communications resource for the message with the highest message priority by assigning a transmitter priority to each communications resource based on a plurality of factors such as estimated message arrival time, availability, and waveform compatibility. The message with the highest message priority is steered to the communications resource with the highest transmitter priority at the moment the message is sent. The first and second modules are each implemented using decision tree logic. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080898 | MILLIMETER-WAVE COMMUNICATION STATION AND METHOD FOR MULTIPLE-ACCESS BEAMFORMING IN A MILLIMETER-WAVE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of a millimeter-wave communication station and method for multiple-access beamforming in a millimeter-wave network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an initiating station performs multiple-access beamforming with one or more responding stations by announcing a number of sector-sweep (SS) slots of a beamforming training (BFT) period and a number of SS frames of each SS slot. One or more SS frames are received from one or more of the responding stations within one of the SS slots of the BFT period. The initiating station transmits one or more SS feedback frames to the responding stations within the one SS slot to indicate an antenna configuration to the responding stations for communication with the initiating station. The responding stations transmit a limited number of SS frames per SS slot based on the number of SS frames announced by the initiating station and transmit any additional SS frames in a next SS slot of the beamforming training period. Each SS frame contains an indication to the initiating station of an antenna configuration for communication with the responding station, | 04-07-2011 |
20110080899 | Method and System for Extending a Mobile Directory Number to a Landline-Based Voice-Over-Packet Network - A mobile station is coupled to a docking station that has a landline connection to a packet-switched network. In response, the mobile station's mobile directory number (MDN) is registered, via the packet-switched network, as being accessible via the docking station. As a result, when a call is placed to the MDN, the call is routed to the docking station via the packet-switched network. Communication devices coupled to the docking station may then be used to answer the call and/or participate in the call. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080900 | Cellphone Wlan Access Point - An integrated cell phone/WLAN AP for providing cell phone functionality and cellular-based data connectivity to a WLAN enabled device. The cell phone AP comprises a WLAN radio, a WLAN AP coupled to the WLAN radio, a cellular radio coupled to the WLAN radio, for communicatively connecting to a cellular system having a cellular-based data service and passing data between the WLAN-enabled device and the cellular system, a cell phone function block coupled to the cellular radio for providing conventional cell phone functionality, and a power supply. | 04-07-2011 |
20110085524 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK TECHNOLOGY AGGREGATION AND BROADCAST - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided for wireless communication in which wireless signal information is received through at least one wireless wide-area-network technology. In addition, data related to the wireless signal information is aggregated. Furthermore, the data is provided to a wireless node through a wireless wide-area-network technology different from the at least one wireless wide-area-network technology. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085525 | LEVERAGING A FEMTOCELL NETWORK FOR PREMISES MANAGEMENT OR MONITORING - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can leverage femtocell network infrastructure in order to facilitate premises management or monitoring. In particular, the architecture can leverage the local presence of a home nodeB (HNB) located at a premises associated with a subscriber in order to aggregate, process and/or distribute various state information that can be collected at the premises. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085526 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK BASED CONTROL OF A SET-TOP BOX DEVICE - An exemplary method includes establishing, by a mobile phone device, a wireless local area network communication channel between the mobile phone device and a set-top box device, providing, by the mobile phone device, a graphical user interface for display on a display screen of the mobile phone device, the graphical user interface configured to facilitate inputting of one or more control commands by a user of the mobile phone device, and controlling, by the mobile phone device, at least one operation of the set-top box device via the wireless local area network communication channel in accordance with the one or more control commands. Corresponding methods and systems are also described. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085527 | CALL DESTINATION NUMBER MAPPING METHODS, DEVICES AND SYSTEMS - A call destination mapping method executes on a mobile communication device. The mobile communication device requests a call action within the device for a first call destination number of a call destination, maps the first call destination number to a second call destination number in accordance with one or more call destination mapping rules stored on the device, and replaces the first call destination number in the call action with the second call destination number. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085528 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING ACCESS POINT FUNCTION IN PORTABLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for providing an Access Point (AP) function of a portable terminal are provided. The apparatus includes an AP function unit for performing the AP function by using the portable terminal in an environment where an AP is not present, and a controller for, if there is a terminal to be connected to the AP, performing connection to the terminal directly without having to perform a process of inputting password information of the AP. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085529 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION USING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for Peer-to-Peer (P2P) connection using a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes detecting a P2P connection attempt of a new terminal not connected to P2P communication, during P2P communication with at least one terminal, determining whether the mobile communication terminal operates as a slave terminal or a group owner in the P2P connection, and when the mobile communication terminal operates as the slave terminal, transmitting a signal indicating that the P2P connection attempt of the new terminal is detected, to a terminal operating as the group owner in the P2P connection. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085530 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK - A system and method for improving digital communication in a wireless mobile ad-hoc network. More specifically, the system includes one or more portable network devices operable to support the seamless operation of a self-initializing, self-healing, adaptive portable network. The portable network devices implement protocols that provide bandwidth management capabilities for use with radios, routers and other wireless network devices. Each portable network device includes at least one wireless transceiver, a processor and control software. The processor and control software are logically coupled to the wireless transceiver to facilitate digital communication via a plurality of communication channels with other network devices. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085531 | Intellegent delivery agent for short message distribution center - A message distribution center (MDC) and Intelligent Delivery Agent are implemented in a wireless Internet gateway interposed between content providers and a wireless carrier to subjectively examine and direct messages via SMTP based on desired rules (e.g., non-peak hours, paying subscribers only, etc.) using standard SMTP Gateway and other well-known protocols. The MDC includes an individual queue for each subscriber, and the provider is informed through conventional SMTP protocol messages that the short message has been accepted. If the carrier has specifically disallowed service for a particular MIN (e.g., in the case of churning), then the content provider is informed through an SMTP interchange that the recipient is invalid. An MDC provides a single mechanism for interacting with subscribers of multiple carriers, regardless of each carrier's underlying infrastructure. For the carrier, an MDC can protect their SS7 network by intelligently throttling messages and configuring message delivery parameters to be more network friendly. An MDC can receive outside a relevant wireless network recipient handset presence information. In the disclosed embodiment, a content provider communicates with the MDC using SMTP protocol messages, and the MDC communicates with wireless carriers preferably using RMI/SMPP techniques. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085532 | SPACE-TIME-POWER SCHEDULING FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A technique is disclosed to schedule frame transmissions in a wireless local area network. The network includes a plurality of stations configured to communicate on the same frequency channel with a plurality of access points. A central controller examines the transmission characteristics between the various stations and access points and identifies frames that may be simultaneously transmitted by a subset of the access points to their intended stations. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085533 | Limited-Use Data Rates in a Wireless Local Area Network - A wireless access point supports data rates and advertises an indication of a minimum data rate for advertisement. Those of the supported data rates that are less than the minimum data rate for advertisement are reserved for limited use. A mobile station that requests to communicate with the wireless access point at one of the one or more supported data rates that are reserved for limited use is informed by the wireless access point how much time communications with the wireless access point at one or more of the one or more supported data rates reserved for limited use will be permitted. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085534 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND A COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication system of the invention comprises a plurality of communication stations decentralized-autonomously construct a network without having a relation between a control station and a station to be controlled under a communication circumstance where a plurality of channels are prepared. In this case, each of the communication stations prepares a plurality of operation modes for activating transmitting and receiving operations, informs the own operation mode, and receives information regarding operation modes of peripheral stations to manage its operation mode of each of the peripheral stations. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085535 | REPORTING TERMINAL CAPABILITIES FOR SUPPORTING SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE - A method for delivering a short message service (SMS) message to an interworking wireless local area network user equipment (UE) begins by registering the UE with an Internet Protocol short message gateway (IP-SM-GW). A capability report is sent from the UE to the IP-SM-GW, the capability report including the capabilities of the UE. A SMS message is transmitted from a short message service center (SMSC) to the IP-SM-GW. The capabilities of the UE are evaluated at the IP-SM-GW to determine whether the UE can receive the SMS message, and the SMS message is delivered to the UE via the IP-SM-GW if the UE has the capabilities to receive the SMS message. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085536 | BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT TERMINAL AND METHOD - A base station for communicating with a first user equipment terminal within a first system band and communicating with a second user equipment terminal within a second system band includes a first reference signal sequence generating unit configured to generate M types of reference signal sequences; a second reference signal sequence generating unit configured to generate N (N>M) types of reference signal sequences; a scheduling unit configured to allocate resource blocks to the first user equipment terminal and the second user equipment terminal; a signal multiplexing unit configured to multiplex the M types of reference signal sequences into the resource block for the first user equipment terminal and multiplex the N types of reference signal sequences into the resource block for the second user equipment terminal; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit signals including the M types of reference signal sequences and the N types of reference signal sequences. | 04-14-2011 |
20110090877 | METHOD AND OPERATION FOR OPERATION BETWEEN WPAN AND WLAN FOR A NETWORK INTERFACE CARD - A wireless network adapter may provide an absence indicator to devices in a first network to alert such devices to a time period when the wireless network adapter is not available in the first network. The wireless network adapter may operate in multiple networks, wherein the multiple networks are time division multiplexed on a same transmission channel. The absence indicator may be provided as a Notice Of Absence (NOA) Information Element (IE). | 04-21-2011 |
20110090878 | Wireless Device With Opportunistic Band Access - A wireless communication network system includes a plurality of nodes. Each node from the plurality of nodes includes a plurality of communication modules. Each module includes a modem and is configured to operate according to a communication protocol. Each communication module is configured to monitor its own communication parameter data and to cooperate with companion modules of a node by sharing communication parameter data, for instance through a coordination unit. Each communication module is further configured to allow, preferably according to a predefined set of rules, communication using a protocol of one communication module by utilizing a band associated with a companion module. The sharing of communication parameter data between modules may be continuous sharing or periodic sharing. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090879 | Method and Apparatus of Providing a Frame Structure for Supporting Different Operational Modes - An approach provides a frame structure for supporting different operational modes. A frame is generated for transmission over a network to a first device and a second device over a first bandwidth and a second bandwidth, respectively. The preamble provides synchronization for operation over the first bandwidth and the second bandwidth. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090880 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UTILIZING MIXED PROTOCOLS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for wireless communications using two different physical layers with a common medium access control layer. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090881 | GATEWAY DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A gateway apparatus | 04-21-2011 |
20110090882 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING RECORDING INFORMATION FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN MULTI BASE STATION MIMO SYSTEM - A PMI combination ratio (PCR) being used for generating a uplink precoding matrix W is transmitted by a base station to a mobile station. Using the PCR, a PMI maximizing transmission performance and PMI | 04-21-2011 |
20110090883 | INFORMATION TERMINAL AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An information terminal includes: a wireless communication section configured to communicate with an outside; a main functional section configured to perform an information processing operation that includes data communication with the outside, performed using the wireless communication section; a monitoring section configured to detect a state of power supply for the main functional section; and a communication control section configured to cause the wireless communication section to transmit data, preliminarily stored in a memory, to the outside when the state detected by the monitoring section corresponds to a state in which the main functional section is not capable of performing data communication using the wireless communication section. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090884 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for transmission/reception of system information in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. An operation of a Base Station (BS) in a broadband wireless communication system includes determining whether to apply a system configuration corresponding to a previous value of a Secondary-Super Frame Header (S-SFH) change count changed according to update of system information and, when applying the system configuration corresponding to the previous value of the S-SFH change count, setting a parameter representing the applied system configuration to a first value and, when applying a system configuration corresponding to a current value of the S-SFH change count, setting the parameter to a second value, and transmitting a Primary-Super Frame Header (P-SFH) including the S-SFH change count and the parameter set to the first value or the second value. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090885 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CENTRALIZED AND COORDINATED INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN A WLAN NETWORK - Method and apparatus for interference mitigation in wireless local area networks (such as WLANs). In one embodiment, a centralized interference measurement and mitigation method is disclosed. The method may involve spectral sensing, beamforming, MIMO, power control, MAC scheduling using a cross-layer approach, and/or broadcast channel precoding, employed towards performance enhancement of WLAN networks in presence of interference. In one variant, different actions at interference mitigation are selected based on the source of the interference (e.g., inter-network or intra-network). | 04-21-2011 |
20110090886 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A PERSONAL NETWORK FOR PROVIDING A CPNS SERVICE - Provided is an apparatus and a method for establishing a Personal Network (PN) by interconnecting a gateway device and various Consumer Electronics (CE) devices through a simple process in order to enable the CEs to receive various services. The method includes performing a physical pairing with surrounding devices by using Near Field Communication (NFC); finding a gateway device, which relays a service from the server, from among the paired devices; selecting a scheme for establishing a PN with the gateway device; and sending a request for connection with a PN according to the selected scheme to the found gateway device. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090887 | Method and Apparatus for Scanning Existing Networks in TVWS - A method and an apparatus for scanning existing networks in TV White Space are disclosed. For scanning existing networks at a station to operate as an unlicensed device in a regulatory domain where a licensed device and the unlicensed device are permitted to operate, the method comprises: receiving a white space map (WSM) comprising information for available channels to be used for the unlicensed device to operate a wireless local area network (WLAN) operation and maximum transmission powers allowed for each of the available channels from an enabling station, wherein the enabling station is a station determining the available channels at its location using its own geographic location identification and a regulatory database access capability; and scanning the existing networks on the available channels identified within the received WSM. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090888 | Wirelessly Communicating Sensor Data to the Internet - A method of wirelessly communicating sensor data includes providing a wireless sensor module that includes a sensor and a transmitting circuit. The transmitting circuit is connected for wirelessly transmitting data derived from the sensor for receipt by a receiver connected to the internet for providing information derived from said sensor on the internet. The method also includes using said sensor and wirelessly transmitting data derived from the sensor. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090889 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station transmits a physical address given to the mobile station to a connection device via a base station when subscribing to a communication system. The connection device previously stores the physical address given to the mobile station and an IP address in a table of the connection device in association with each other, searches the table for the IP address corresponding to the physical address transmitted from the mobile station from the address storage section, generates a header compression rule in accordance with the IP address searched for, and transmits the generated header compression rule to the mobile station via the base station. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090890 | METHOD OF CHANNEL SCANNING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of scanning channels of a white space zone in a wireless local area network is provided. A response frame includes a white space map including information about whether each white space channel in the white space zone is occupied by an incumbent user. Channels of the white space zone are scanned based on the white space map. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090891 | MICROWAVE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND RELATED METHOD OF OPERATION AND NETWORK ARRANGEMENT - A microwave radio communications device is configured to communicate with a selected one of at least first and second base stations of respective first and second cells, the first cell having a greater area of coverage than the second cell. The device is configured to retrieve data from a BSID sent from each base station and serving to discriminate between signals from the said first and second base stations indicating the relative cell coverage. Thereby the device achieves selective registration to one of the base stations responsive to the said discrimination. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090892 | BONDED INTERCONNECTION OF LOCAL NETWORKS - Apparatus and methods relating to bonded interconnection of local communication networks are disclosed. Bonded communication links, including multiple constituent links that have been bonded together, are terminated to enable communications over the bonded links using bandwidth available on the constituent links. A cross-connect function determines whether received communication traffic is to be forwarded to one or more of a local communication network and the terminated bonded links. The received communication traffic is forwarded in accordance with the determination. The local communication networks may include ring networks, linear networks, or both. The bonded links and links between nodes in a local communication network are bonded DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) links in some embodiments. Bonding of DSL links in this manner can be used, for instance, to extend the reach of DSL service without sacrificing bandwidth. | 04-21-2011 |
20110096756 | METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND TRANSCEIVING DEVICE - The invention refers to wireless local area networks (WLAN) consisting of a multitude of transceivers capable of establishing communication with one another (i.e. operating in a peer-to-peer mode) under the control of network coordinator (the so-called “ad hoc” networks). Implies the assignment of the role of the temporary coordinator to a transceiver from among the plurality of transceivers, switching-over other transceivers into the mode of a network client, orientation of antenna beam of a transceiver (switched-over into the client mode) equipped with a direction-agile antenna in the direction of the temporary coordinator of the network and transmission of information to an addressee by a client-transceiver of this network that has got the permission to transmit from the temporary coordinator. A WLAN comprises a multitude of transceivers, one of which serves as a temporary coordinator for said network and at least two of which have a direction-agile antenna and means for the operation of said antenna in the omnidirectional mode, in the directional scanning mode or in the stationary directional mode, an identification means responsive to transmission of a signal, including the transmission of a synchronization signal or identification signal intended for orienting said antenna in the direction of said signal being transmitted. The invention improves the quality and reliability of communication for WLAN users (including mobile users) thus increasing the data transfer rate. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096757 | Method for radio communication in a wireless local area network and transceiving device - Method for radio communication in a wireless local area network and transceiving device refers to wireless local area networks (WLAN) consisting of a multitude of transceiving devices of users ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096758 | METHOD FOR ENHANCING THROUGHPUT OF A WLAN MODULE COLLOCATED WITH A BT SLAVE MODULE, AND ASSOCIATED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MODULE - A method for enhancing throughput of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) module collocated with a Bluetooth (BT) slave module includes: detecting whether timing critical data of the BT slave module exists; and allowing the WLAN module to perform wireless communication when it is detected that no timing critical data of the BT slave module exists. An associated wireless communication apparatus includes: a BT slave module; a WLAN module collocated with the BT slave module; and a controller arranged to control operations of the BT slave module and the WLAN module, wherein the controller detects whether timing critical data of the BT slave module exists, and allows the WLAN module to perform wireless communication when it is detected that no timing critical data of the BT slave module exists. An associated wireless communication module such as the BT slave module is further provided. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096759 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING PERSONALIZED INTERACTION - A system and method for implementing an interactive session between a display equipment and a handheld electronic device is provided. The system comprises a display screen operable to display data/information, a telecommunication network coupled with local area network and world wide web, a smart-IB box capable of sending and receiving data/information, a system server capable of interpreting received messages from Smart-IB and user's handheld communication device, a handheld communication device. The method comprises the steps of detecting a request by a handheld communication device, initiating a user preferred schedule for pushing data/information in response to the request, determining the installation of enabling means to access various options available through enhanced enabling means, receiving and processing the request so made, sorting the request for scheduled data/information, relaying and displaying the scheduled data/information in accordance with preferred schedule. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096760 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION POWER IN WLAN SYSTEM - A transmit power control method of a first station in a wireless LAN (WLAN) system includes: receiving path loss information from an (access point) AP, the path loss information containing a maximum value among path losses between the AP and at least one or more stations included in the WLAN system; controlling a transmit power by using the path loss information; and transmitting a frame according to the controlled transmit power. In said controlling the transmit power by using the path loss information, the transmit power is controlled by using a path loss obtained by adding the maximum value and a path loss between the first station and the AP or by using the path loss between the first station and the AP. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096761 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - There are provided a communication device, a base station, a communication system, and a communication method that make it possible to yield a diversity effect by cooperative relay without involvement of disproportionateness in data received by an eNB even when one of parties has unsuccessfully exchanged data. After received an ACK signal from a repeater | 04-28-2011 |
20110096762 | CLOUD VOIP SYSTEM WITH BYPASS FOR IP MEDIA - The cloud computing VoIP system includes a software as a service (SaaS) site and one or more additional sites. The SaaS site includes a gateway and a call manager and is coupled for communication across an IP network and the PSTN. The call manager includes a media monitoring module, a bypass module, a PSTN control module and a GUI module. The SaaS site handles and controls voice and video calls over the IP network and the PSTN for endpoints at the one or more additional sites. In another embodiment, the cloud computing VoIP system is also coupled to a cellular network and the endpoints include an associated cellular phone. The cloud computing VoIP system also includes a method for falling back to a secondary network, namely the cellular network, when there is insufficient quality on a primary network. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096763 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE PROVIDING PATTERN/FREQUENCY CONTROL FEATURES AND RELATED METHODS - A mobile wireless communications device may include a portable housing, a wireless transceiver carried by the portable housing, and a plurality of antennas also carried by the portable housing. Each antenna may have a different gain pattern at a different respective operating frequency, and the antennas may have different shapes to define different gain patterns at a given operating frequency. The mobile wireless communications device may further include a frequency/pattern diversity controller for controlling the wireless transceiver to preferentially operate with the plurality of antennas. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096764 | PORTABLE TERMINAL FOR ACQUIRING PRODUCT DATA - A portable terminal for the acquisition of product data, for example in a point of sale or in a collection, distribution and/or storage point, includes a coded information reader, a user interface, and an interface for the logical connection with an external control station. Advantageously, the terminal also includes an interface for the wireless connection with cellular devices and/or telephones and/or PDAs and at least one internal management unit for the activation of the interface. The interface allows establishing a wireless connection with a single pre-identified cellular device and/or telephone and/or PDA, i.e., recognized following a recognition procedure. The terminal is then configured as a peripheral device of the pre-identified cellular device. | 04-28-2011 |
20110103353 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A RECEIVER - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises identifying at least one receiver, selecting said at least one receiver by moving an apparatus according to at least one predetermined movement and sending data to said selected at least one receiver. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103354 | DECT Base and DECT Terminal - A digital enhanced cordless telecommunications (DECT) base and a DECT terminal are disclosed. The DECT base includes a housing, a central processing unit (CPU), and a DECT module. The DECT base further includes a high-speed packet access (HSPA) interface module, set inside the housing and connected to the CPU, where the CPU is connected to the DECT module and the HSPA interface module is configured to provide an HSPA card with interfaces to implement wireless communications between the base and the network over the HSPA protocol. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103355 | PACKET GROUPING FOR A CO-EXISTING WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a host processor and a plurality of co-existing wireless technology transceivers coupled to the host processor. The plurality of co-existing wireless technology transceivers share a communication medium using time-multiplexing. A throughput for data transmissions by the plurality of co-existing wireless technology transceivers is based on an algorithm that determines a grouping option for data packets to be transmitted by one of the co-existing wireless technology transceivers, the grouping option providing a highest throughput for a predetermined baseband PHY rate without exceeding a predetermined maximum grouping delay. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103356 | BACK-CHANNELED PACKETED DATA - Consistent with one aspect, location-based mobile-terminal data is processed within or involving the wireless portion of such communication networks, and methods and apparatuses process the location-based mobile-terminal data based on information provided from outside the relationship of the network operator and the user. The location-based mobile-terminal data is extracted and processed by a node in the wireless portion of the communication network based on a specified set of rules. Other sources of location-based information originate from within the communication network itself including, but not limited to, location information regarding the nodes themselves. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103357 | BACK-CHANNELED PACKETED DATA - The disclosure is directed to mobile terminals, their circuits, components, CPU-programming instructions and methods of implementing the mobile terminals so that they behave in accordance with one or more of the above-characterized manners. For example, the mobile terminal used in such a wireless network includes a memory circuit that stores: on behalf of an operator for the communication network, user identity information relating to wireless network subscriber data useful for providing network access; and on behalf of a third party, an executable set of communication rules relevant to a geographic region of service provided by the communication network. The mobile terminal also includes a mobile-terminal processor node which is configured in response to a communication from the wireless-technology equipment, indicating that the current location data for the mobile terminal permits the mobile terminal to alter normal rights for communicating with the user over the network while the mobile terminal is in the geographic region. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103358 | BACK-CHANNELED PACKETED DATA - The disclosure concerns a communication network having a wireless network that provides access of back channel data to third parties. A processor node in the wireless network uses and processes location-based mobile-terminal data as geographically-tagged information sources for processing and analysis by third parties. In some configurations, the processor node receives feedback from the third parties, and/or input from other resources and databases, for adaptively re-processing the data previously provided to the third parties. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103359 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VIDEO COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a method for changing a communication network for video communication, the method including performing, by a User Equipment (UE), video communication through a mobile communication network; searching for whether there is a WLAN currently accessible by the UE at every predetermined interval; displaying the accessible WLAN if one is found; and when the displayed WLAN is selected by a user, changing a communication network for the video communication to perform the video communication through the selected WLAN. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103360 | LOCATION TRACKING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS DEVICE USING WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - Provided are real time location tracking system and method of a wireless device using a wireless LAN AP, the system and method include measuring intensities of APs that are currently detected by the wireless device of which location is to be estimated, collecting ADD, constructing RDLE including locations, a list of APs corresponding to the locations, signal intensities of the APs, and reliabilities of the APs, storing the RDLE, comparing the RDLE with the ADD, and estimating the location of the wireless device, which realizes seamless location tracking technology indoors and outdoors, thereby providing a variety of location tracking services. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103361 | DYNAMIC NETWORKING MODES METHOD AND APPARATUS - A portable electronic device is disclosed. The portable electronic device includes a wireless transceiver, a processor coupled to the wireless transceiver, a memory coupled to the processor and a program stored in the memory and running on the processor. The program provides automatic transitioning between a wireless infrastructure communication mode to an ad-hoc communication mode. The infrastructure mode is used when a request from a mobile device is received to access a communications network. The ad-hoc mode is used when a request from the mobile device is received to access resources on the portable electronic device. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103362 | TRANSMISSION FORMAT SELECTION FOR OPTIMIZING TRANSMISSION OF DELAY SENSITIVE TRAFFIC - A method, scheduler, and processor program product for scheduling transmission of packets from a base station to a mobile station. A data rate control index is received from a mobile station. A transmission format is selected using the received data rate control index. The selected transmission format uses a payload size that is smaller than a largest compatible payload size for another transmission format corresponding to the received data rate control index and that is smaller than a total size of packets waiting to be transmitted. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103363 | ACCESS POINT MULTI-LEVEL TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL BASED ON THE EXCHANGE OF CHARACTERISTICS - A first plurality of characteristics are received from a first client device relating to transmissions received by the first client device from both an access point and a second client device. A second plurality of characteristics are received from the second client device relating to transmissions received by the second client device from both the access point and the first client device. The first plurality of characteristics and the second plurality of characteristics are both assessed. Based on the assessment, a least one of a plurality of customized power levels is selected for transmissions by the access point to the first client device and the second client device. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110342 | Subcarrier permutation to achieve high frequency diversity of OFDMA systems - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of improving subcarrier permutation to achieve high frequency diversity of OFDMA systems in wireless networks, comprising introducing different tone selections for different symbols, such that if a channel has only a few tones in each symbol of a resource unit it can still have sufficient frequency diversity. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110343 | ENHANCING FRAGMENTATION AND DEFRAGMENTATION PROCEDURES IN BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A preemption system enables successful transmission of multiple service data units (SDUs) across a wireless interface. The preemption system addresses out-of-order transmissions of fragments of SDUs, such that the receiver is able to process each successfully. The preemption system enables a higher-priority SDU to simultaneously be transmitted with a lower-priority SDU, so that delays in processing the lower-priority SDU does not negatively affect processing of the higher-priority SDU. The preemption system also addresses non-automatic repeat request medium access controller (non-ARQ MAC) connections that only use hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ), in which the HARQ transmission may cause out-of-order delivery of SDU fragments. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110344 | Communication System for Voice-Over Internet Protocol Using License-Free Frequencies and a Mobile Telephone - In a communication system comprising—at least one mobile telephone ( | 05-12-2011 |
20110110345 | MESSAGE ROUTING IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - Disclosed are methods and apparatuses related to the routing of communications in a wireless mesh network so as to provide improved range, reliability and/or throughput. At least some aspects of the techniques and apparatuses can be implemented in an intermediary node (relay node) on a wireless mesh network. The relay node and other devices on the wireless network may implement a form of multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communication, such as multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO). The devices on the network can communicate in accordance with IEEE standard 802.11. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110346 | SWITCHING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A switching method and apparatus in a broadband wireless communication system is provided. A method of an Advanced Base Station (ABS) for a Multicast Broadcast Service (MBS) in the broadband wireless communication system includes transmitting to an Advanced Mobile Station (AMS) a message including identification information for a primary carrier that provides the MBS among multiple carriers supported by the ABS, switching to the primary carrier with respect to the AMS, and transmitting MBS data through the primary carrier. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110347 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPERATING CELLS IN AN OVERLAY NETWORK INCLUDING MACRO CELLS AND HOME CELLS - A method and system for operating cells in a network where macro cells and home cells coexist are provided. The method includes determining a first set of neighbor macro Base Stations (BSs) located within a predefined reference distance from a new macro BS to be newly installed, determining a second set of neighbor macro BSs having a cell region overlapping a region of a serving cell served by the new macro BS, detecting at least one sector including a contact with the cell region of the new macro BS within a cell region of each of the neighbor macro BSs in the second set, determining a neighbor cell set including the detected at least one sector, generating an initial Neighbor Relation Table (NRT) by mapping information about each of neighbor cells included in the neighbor cell set, IDentifiers (IDs) of neighbor macro BSs serving the neighbor cells, and a Physical Resource Cell IDentifier (PCID) allocated to each of the neighbor macro BSs, and providing the initial NRT to the new macro BS as neighbor BS information. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110348 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PLCP FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) frame in a Very High Throughput (VHT) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system includes generating a MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) to be transmitted to a destination station (STA), generating a PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) by adding a PLCP header, including an L-SIG field containing control information for a legacy STA and a VHT-SIG field containing control information for a VHT STA, to the MPDU, and transmitting the PPDU to the destination STA. A constellation applied to some of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex (OFDM) symbols of the VHT-SIG field is obtained by rotating a constellation applied to an OFDM symbol of the L-SIG field. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110349 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT OPERATION AND CAPABILITY SIGNALING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus provide signaling for very high throughput (VHT) operation in VHT wireless local area networks (WLANs). An access point (AP) may control the operation of VHT wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) in a basic service set (BSS) by sending VHT operation or capabilities information. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110350 | Bearer Processing Method - The present invention provides bearer processing methods, in one bearer processing method, the serving gateway receives a bearer processing message from a mobility management unit, wherein the bearer processing message carries a message source mark for identifying a sending entity of the bearer processing message; the serving gateway acquires the message source mark in the bearer processing message, and judges the sending entity of the bearer processing message according to the message source mark, and performs the bearer processing according to the result of the judgment. In accordance with the present invention, it is possible for the serving gateway to distinguish the sending entity of a message, so as to perform the subsequent related bearer processing. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110351 | CHANNEL ACCESS METHOD FOR VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT (VHT) WIRELESS LOCAL ACCESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND STATION SUPPORTING THE CHANNEL ACCESS METHOD - According to an embodiment of the present invention, a channel access method in a very high throughput (VHT) system using a bonding channel consisting of a plurality of subchannels is provided. Wherein the Method comprises: transmitting a request to send (RTS) frame by one source station or each of a plurality of source stations to a destination station through any subchannel selected from the plurality of subchannels; and in response to the received RTS frame, transmitting a clear to send (CTS) frame by the destination station to one source station selected from the plurality of source stations through the bonding channel. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110352 | Method and System For Redundancy-Based Decoding of Voice Content in a Wireless LAN System - Aspects of a method and system for redundancy-based decoding of voice content in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system are provided. A WLAN receiver may determine whether a decoded portion of a received packet comprises voice content and may select a redundancy-based decoder to decode a remaining portion of the packet when voice content is detected. The redundancy-based decoder may be a Viterbi decoder. The redundancy-based decoder may be selected to decode a determined number of subsequent packets or to decode subsequent packets for a determined amount of time. After decoding the remaining portion of the packet and any subsequent packets, the WLAN receiver may select a standard Viterbi decoder to decode additional received packets. The WLAN receiver may generate at least one signal to select the redundancy-based decoder and the standard Viterbi decoder. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110353 | Multiple input multiple output wireless local area network communications - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transmitter includes a MAC module, a PLCP module, and a PMD module. The Medium Access Control (MAC) module is operably coupled to convert a MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) into a MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) in accordance with a WLAN protocol. The Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) Module is operably coupled to convert the MPDU into a PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) in accordance with the WLAN protocol. The Physical Medium Dependent (PMD) module is operably coupled to convert the PPDU into a plurality of radio frequency (RF) signals in accordance with one of a plurality of operating modes of the WLAN protocol, wherein the plurality of operating modes includes multiple input and multiple output combinations. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110354 | NODE, METHOD, AND SYSTEM FOR HIGH-RATE ACCESS TO PUBLIC NETWORK FROM MOBILE NETWORK - The present invention discloses a node, method and system for high-rate access to a public network from a mobile network, where an enhanced GPRS Support Node (eGSN) is placed in a communications system and transmits information between a NodeB and the public network via a public network interface for communications between the eGSN and the public network and a NodeB interface for communications between the eGSN and the NodeB. By reducing the number of intermediate network elements for the access of a UE to the public network, the network structure is flattened. Thereby, the transmission delay is reduced and the transmission efficiency of the network is effectively increased. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116482 | CENTRALIZED BROADBAND GATEWAY FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a centralized broadband gateway for a wireless communication system, including: a router/gateway module which receives encoded compressed audio/video (A/V) streams and distributes the encoded compressed audio/video A/V streams; multiple audio/video decoders which receive the encoded compressed A/V streams from the a router/gateway module, decode the encoded compressed A/V streams, and output uncompressed A/V streams; and an integrated Wireless High Definition Multimedia Interface (WHDMI) which receives the uncompressed A/V streams from the multiple audio/video decoders and transmits the uncompressed A/V streams wirelessly to media devices, without deploying individual media processors at each media device. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116483 | TCP DATA THROUGHOUT ENHANCEMENT FOR WLAN CLIENTS ON A WIRELESS LAN ROUTER - A server may be bypassed in the context of retransmitting data packets, when such data packets are missing or lost due to interference or some other network error. Decreased throughput and other disadvantages associated with data packet retransmission are avoided by negating the need to transmit retransmission request packets to the server and retransmitting a missing/lost data packet from the server. Instead, retransmission request packets may be sent to a router, and the router may respond by directly retransmitting the missing/lost data packet to the client, where prior to retransmitting the missing/lost data packet, it is determined whether the data packet is a Transport Control Protocol or User Datagram Protocol packet, and proceeding with the retransmitting only if the data packets is a Transport Control Protocol packet. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116484 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION OVER A WHITE SPACE CHANNEL WITHOUT CAUSING INTERFERENCE - A method and an apparatus for providing communication over a white space channel without causing interference are disclosed. The method generates a first request to identify at least one available white space channel, and applies a spreading sequence to the first request to generate a second request. The method applies a modulation to the second request to generate a third request in the time domain, and transmits the third request via a wireless communication to at least one other user. Alternatively, the method receives a request wirelessly, wherein the request comprises a request for availability of at least one white space channel, and applies a demodulation on the request to generate a demodulated request. The method applies a spreading sequence on the demodulated request to generate a de-spread request, and processes the de-spread request by determining availability of at least one white space channel. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116485 | METHODS FOR SUPERFRAME/FRAME OVERHEAD REDUCTION WITHIN OFDMA-BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for tessellating a subframe using maximal-sized bricks. A brick bandwidth and a brick time duration are computed based on the heights and widths of the bursts in the subframe. Bursts within the brick-tessellated subframe are referenced using a brick-based coordinate system in which burst location and size are specified in units of bricks. A method for assembling and disassembling brick-based superframes is also disclosed. Bricked-based superframes are assembled and disassembled using a Superframe Preamble, a Superframe Control Header (SFCH), a Superframe Downlink Map (SDL-MAP), a Superframe Uplink MAP (SUL-MAP) and brick-structured downlink and uplink frames. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116486 | RADIATION IMAGING SYSTEM, METHOD FOR RADIATION IMAGING SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A radiation imaging system comprises: a radiation imaging apparatus; an entry apparatus which is associated with a radiation generator; wherein the entry apparatus is configured, in response to a request received from the radiation imaging apparatus via a close proximity wireless communication connection, to send information to the radiation imaging apparatus via the close proximity wireless communication connection for connecting the radiation imaging apparatus to a wireless LAN; wherein the close proximity wireless communication connection has a communication range shorter than that of a wireless LAN; and a control unit for controlling the radiation generator and the radiation imaging apparatus, which has connected to the wireless LAN based on the information which has been sent from the entry apparatus via the close proximity wireless communication connection. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116487 | CONTROL SIGNALING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Disclosed herein are methods, apparatus, and systems related to control and management signaling. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may exchange control and/or management signaling with a second WTRU via a wireless network. The wireless network may be based on, for example, a technology such as Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11ac or IEEE 802.11ad. The control and/or management signaling may relate to features such as power control, time and/or frequency synchronization, resource allocation, Channel State Information (CSI) feedback, beamforming, link adaptation, multi-channel transmission, Multi-User Multiple Input and Multiple Output (MU-MIMO), WTRU group assignments, or other features. The control and/or management signaling may be performed using Medium Access Control (MAC) frames, and/or other messages. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116488 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MANAGEMENT ACTIONS FOR VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A methods and apparatus may be used in Very High Throughput (VHT) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) management actions. Management action frames such as VHT Action frames may be used to implement VHT features in WLANs. Extensions to 802.11 Action frames may be used to support VHT features and provide backward compatibility. VHT Management Actions may be supported with VHT Action frames and VHT extensions to 802.11 Action frames in various categories such as Direct Link Setup (DLS), Public, Spectrum Management and high throughput (HT). An access point (AP) or a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may indicate VHT capability by way of signaling. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116489 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VHT FREQUENCY REUSE FOR WLANS - An apparatus and method provides very high throughput (VHT) wireless local area network (WLAN) frequency reuse information reports and adjusts operation parameters based on the frequency reuse information reports. | 05-19-2011 |
20110122853 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD FOR RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - A radio communication device C | 05-26-2011 |
20110122854 | Dual transmission for communication networks - A dual transmission network may use a hybrid architecture where two types of links, such as wireless and fixed, function in a parallel manner for communicating control information and data. In at least one example embodiment, an apparatus includes at least two local transceivers and a controller. The controller is connected to control the two local transceivers and configured to establish parallel first and second communication links with a remote terminal via at least one of the local transceivers. The first communication link uses a first physical layer communication protocol and the second communication link uses a second physical layer communication protocol. The second physical layer communication protocol may be different from the first physical layer communication protocol or the first and second transceivers may be configured to operate on different frequencies. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122855 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION OVER A WHITE SPACE CHANNEL WITHOUT CAUSING INTERFERENCE TO DIGITAL TELEVISION SYSTEMS - A method and an apparatus for determining an availability of at least one space channel are disclosed. For example, the method generates a first request to identify at least one available white space channel, and encodes the first request to obtain a second request, wherein the second request comprises one or more bursts of data, wherein each of said bursts of data has a duration less than or equal to a pre-determined maximum signal duration that is based on one or more error tolerance standards associated with a digital television receiver. The method then transmits the second request wirelessly to other devices to solicit a response as to the availability of at least one space channel. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122856 | AUTONOMOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USE - An autonomous wireless system is disclosed. The system comprises a plurality of devices. Each of the plurality of devices includes a wireless interface. At least two devices directly communicate with each other through a direct link between the wireless interfaces of the at least two devices. Methods and apparatus for two or more devices equipped with wireless local area network (WLAN) interface to communicate and exchange selected information are disclosed. Accordingly, a system and method in accordance with the present invention enables a handheld, laptop, smart phone or the like, which is equipped with a WLAN interface, to communicate and exchange business contact, sales brochures, event announcements, presentation materials, alert messages, etc., to other devices that include a WLAN interface. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122857 | AUTONOMOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USE - An autonomous wireless system is disclosed. The system comprises a plurality of devices. Each of the plurality of devices includes a wireless interface. At least two devices directly communicate with each other through a direct link between the wireless interfaces of the at least two devices. Methods and apparatus for two or more devices equipped with wireless local area network (WLAN) interface to communicate and exchange selected information are disclosed. Accordingly, a system and method in accordance with the present invention enables a handheld, laptop, smart phone or the like, which is equipped with a WLAN interface, to communicate and exchange business contact, sales brochures, event announcements, presentation materials, alert messages, etc., to other devices that include a WLAN interface. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122858 | WIRELESS TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER AND MOBILE OBJECT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A concise and low cost mobile object management system which is capable of monitoring a state of a mobile object via a wireless transmitter-receiver having a wireless LAN function is provided. The mobile object management system includes a sensor for acquiring various information of a mobile object, a clock information acquisition unit, a memory unit for storing data, and a wireless LAN transmitter-receiver unit, each controlled by a Central Processing Unit, and transmits wirelessly a state of a measured object on the mobile object, location information, and clock information. By adopting a wireless LAN for the wireless transmitting and receiving function, it is possible to implement a concise and low cost system which is highly versatile and capable of utilizing a most common infrastructure. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122859 | Method for Sending a Paging Message - The present invention discloses a method for sending a paging message applied to a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access system, wherein an anchoring paging controller sends the paging message only to base stations meeting mobility restrictive conditions, or to base stations which belong to a paging group to which a terminal to be paged belongs and meet the mobility restrictive conditions; and the paging message is a paging starting message or a paging stopping message. Using the method in accordance with the present invention, the paging message can be prevented from sending to the base stations which do not meet the restrictive conditions of the terminal, thus reducing the consumption of the system resources. | 05-26-2011 |
20110128943 | WiFi and WiMAX Internetworking - In accordance with some embodiments, a network may enable WiFi and WiMAX internetworking, such that a mobile node may move between the networks. This may be facilitated by assigning the same home agent and home address to a mobile node in both networks during authentication. In one embodiment, the assignment may be done by a server, such as an authentication, authorization, accounting server. A wireless gateway may control access by mobile nodes to the Internet. For example, the wireless gateway may intercept messages from a mobile node that wishes to access an Internet site and the wireless gateway can check whether the node is authorized to access the Internet. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128944 | FEMTO ACCESS POINT AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A femto access point (FAP) for use in a network system and a communication method for the femto access point are provided. A mobile station is wirelessly connected to the FAP. The FAP comprises a storage unit, a sniffer unit, and a process unit. The sniffer unit sniffs a packet of the mobile station. The process unit retrieves an identity (ID) code of the mobile station from the packet and stores the ID code into the storage unit. The process unit further establishes an uplink local area network (LAN) service flow and a downlink LAN service flow of the mobile station. The uplink LAN service flow and the downlink LAN service flow established by the FAP and the mobile station are used to transfer packets within the LAN. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128945 | ANCHOR GATEWAY, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TANGIBLE MACHINE-READABLE MEDIUM THEREOF - An anchor gateway, a communication method and a tangible machine-readable medium are provided. The anchor gateway is for use in a WiMAX network comprising an authentication gateway and a serving base station (BS). After a mobile station (MS) enters the WiMAX network, the anchor gateway will request the authentication gateway and the serving BS according to an identification of the MS to respectively provide authentication key context and medium access control context. Thereby, the network latency, which is made by the MS in handover, will be reduced effectively. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128946 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a radio communication device which includes a communication unit that communicates with a connected radio communication device operating as a master unit, and a control unit that, when a prescribed inquiry packet sent from another radio communication device is received by the communication unit, controls the communication unit to send a response packet containing service information indicating a service with which the radio communication device is compatible to said another radio communication device. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128947 | Method and Apparatus for Sounding Multiple Stations - A plurality of stations to provide sounding feedback in response to a training signal sequence is determined, and a communication frame is generated that includes i) an indication of a request for the plurality of stations to provide sounding feedback corresponding to the training signal sequence, and ii) information indicative of when each of the plurality of stations should transmit sounding feedback, and iii) sounding feedback parameters. The communication frame is transmitted along with the training sequence. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128948 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA - Apparatus and method for random access control in a directional communication system is disclosed. The method includes omni-directionally transmitting start time and duration information associated with data to be transmitted, the duration information indicating a duration of transmission of the data to be transmitted to a target station within a random access period; and directionally transmitting, subsequent to the omni-transmitting, the data to the target station beginning at the start time. Data collision caused by overlapped antenna beams linking remote stations can be prevented and communication can be reliably performed. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128949 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system is disclosed. This system includes a wireless base station placed at an upper section of a communicating zone in a mobile unit such as an aircraft, multiple seat-rows arranged along a longitudinal direction in the communicating zone, and wireless terminals placed at each one of seats of the seat rows. Radio communication is done between the wireless base station and the wireless terminals. The wireless base station is placed on the ceiling at the forefront or at the extreme end of the communicating zone relative to the longitudinal direction of the seat rows. | 06-02-2011 |
20110134894 | INVERSE MULTIPLEXING OVER 802.11 WIRELESS INTERFACES - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, a method and apparatus are disclosed that includes aspects of providing one or more data packets at a media access control-service access point of a transmitting device; dividing the one or more data packets into two or more streams of data packets, wherein the two or more streams of data packets are arranged for transmission on a separate wireless interface of the transmitting device; and transmitting the two or more streams of data packets over a wireless medium via their separate wireless interfaces. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134895 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION TERMINAL, RECEPTION TERMINAL, AND TRANSMISSION METHOD - The transmission terminal in a wireless communication system includes: a communication unit for intermittently transmitting a radio signal; a transmission-side beacon reception unit; a beacon analysis unit for analyzing the received beacon signal; and a transmission output level change unit for estimating an emission time period of a beacon signal to be received by the transmission-side beacon reception unit on the basis of the beacon period information and the beacon reception time information, thereby obtaining an estimated emission time period; wherein the transmission output level change unit instructs the transmission-side communication unit to transmit the radio signal having a raised transmission output level during at least the estimated emission time period, the raised transmission output level being higher than a transmission output level during a time period other than at least the estimated emission time period. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134896 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR UPGRADING AN AIRLINK IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Embodiments of systems and methods for upgrading an airlink in wireless system are described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134897 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTIMEDIA EMERGENCY ACCESS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for distributing multimedia emergency contact information using an access point of a wireless local area network (WLAN) is disclosed. The access point is configured to retrieve service contact information from a lookup table. The method includes receiving a first generic advertisement service (GAS) query from a WLAN device. The first GAS query includes a uniform resource name (URN) identifying at least one of the services. The method includes retrieving contact information for the at least one of the services identified in the first GAS query. The contact information includes a uniform resource identifier (URI). The URI is configured to include session initiation protocol (SIP) URIs, and telephone URIs. The method includes transmitting a GAS query response to the WLAN device. The GAS query response includes the contact information for the at least one of the services identified in the first GAS query. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134898 | Secure Provisioning Methods And Apparatus For Mobile Communication Devices Operating In Wireless Local Area Networks (WLANS) - A wireless local area network (WLAN) includes a plurality of wireless access points (APs) which provide communications for a plurality of mobile communication devices. One of the APs is designated as a provisioning AP and is set to have a substantially smaller RF coverage area than RF coverage areas of the other APs. A mobile device is positioned within the provisioning RF coverage region and associates with the provisioning AP with use of a provisioning service set identifier, for establishing layer-2 communications with the WLAN, and for accessing and operating in a provisioning virtual local area network (VLAN) of the WLAN. While the mobile device is associated with the provisioning AP and operating in the provisioning VLAN, the mobile device receives via the provisioning AP an IP address which is assigned to the mobile device, for establishing layer-3 communications with the WLAN. After the layer-3 communications are established, the mobile device participates in an authentication procedure via the provisioning AP with a provisioning server of the provisioning VLAN. After positive authentication of the mobile device using the authentication procedure, the mobile device participates in a provisioning procedure with the provisioning server via the provisioning AP, for receiving provisioning information from the WLAN for programming in the mobile device. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134899 | ENABLING PHASE TRACKING FOR A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device for enabling phase tracking is described. The communication device includes a processor and instructions stored in memory. The communication device generates a plurality of pilot symbols. The pilot symbols conform to a rank-deficient pilot mapping matrix. The communication device also transmits the plurality of pilot symbols. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134900 | Frame Padding For Wireless Communications - Systems and techniques relating to wireless communications are described. A described technique includes obtaining data for a transmission to a wireless communication device(s), including one or more medium access control (MAC) data units that encapsulate data in a physical (PHY) frame, determining a length of a MAC layer pad based on a number of symbols associated with the PHY frame, including, in response to the length of the MAC layer pad being greater than zero, the MAC layer pad in the PHY frame after the one or more MAC data units, determining a length of a PHY layer pad based on remaining available bits in the PHY frame, including, in response to the length of the PHY layer pad being greater than zero, the PHY layer pad in the frame after the MAC layer pad, and transmitting the PHY frame to the wireless communication device(s). | 06-09-2011 |
20110142014 | REMOTE WIRELESS SERVICE INVOCATION WITH EFFICIENT POWER USE ON TARGET WIRELESS DEVICE - A protocol for operation of wireless devices enables a wireless device to remotely and securely invoke a service on a target wireless device without requiring the user of the target wireless device to take any action and without requiring the target wireless device to use power unnecessarily. Mutual authentication is executed while the target wireless device remains in a low power discoverable mode. The discoverable mode includes discovery windows separated by inactive windows when the radio of the target wireless device is powered down. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142015 | REGISTERING WITH SIP SERVERS FOR IMS USING A FULLY QUALIFIED DOMAIN NAME - A fully qualified domain name may be used to identify a session initiation protocol server with which a client device may connect to IMS services in a network. In one implementation, a network device may receive a request to register a client device for IMS services. The network device may determine a fully qualified domain name corresponding to one or more SIP servers that process SIP signaling packets for the client device and transmit a message initiating resolution of the fully qualified domain name into a plurality of IP addresses. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142016 | AD HOC NETWORKING BASED ON CONTENT AND LOCATION - Methods, program products, and systems for ad hoc networking based on content and location are described. A user of a mobile device can identify another user using another mobile device who is close by, if both users have requested to participate in networking. Common interests and experiences of two or more users located close to each other can be identified from content, including automatically created usage data of the mobile devices. Usage data of a mobile device can be created based on activities performed on the mobile device (e.g., songs downloaded), a trajectory of the mobile device (e.g., places traveled), or other public data available from the mobile device (e.g., pictures shared). Each of the users can be notified that another user having the common interests and experiences is close by. A means of initiating communication can be provided to the users to facilitate communication between the users. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142017 | Differentiated QoS for Wi-Fi clients connected to a cable/DSL network - The preferred method involves segmenting the routable IP address space of a Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) to identify clients requiring differentiated QoS by assigning IP addresses from reserved ranges. The IP addresses are assigned to home clients/the Wi-Fi AP and roaming users based on special DHCP options inserted by the Wi-Fi AP DHCP Proxy software on behalf the Wi-Fi AP and home client devices and roaming devices using the Wi-Fi AP. This creates potentially multiple service classes whereby IP addresses from the reserved ranges are included in traffic classifiers that cause packets to map to service flows which provide for differentiated QoS to the Wi-Fi AP owner, home clients and roaming users on the cable access network. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142018 | System for Voice and/or Data Communication - The subject matter of the invention is a system for speech and/or data communication between a mobile telephone ( | 06-16-2011 |
20110142019 | Seamless Mobility in Wireless Networks - AP's associated with a communication network and any wireless devices desiring contact, operated according to a protocol in which each wireless device selects AP's with which to communicate. A system coordinator causes the AP's to operate so as to guide each wireless device to an AP selected by the system coordinator. This has the effect that, notwithstanding that the protocol involves having the wireless device make the selection of AP, functionally, the AP's make the selection for it. In a 1st technique, multiple AP's share an identifier, with the system coordinator directing one particular AP to respond to the wireless device, thus appearing to wireless devices as a “personal cell”. In a 2nd technique, AP's each maintain identifiers substantially unique to each wireless device, with the system coordinator directing only one particular AP to maintain any particular wireless device's identifier, thus appearing to wireless devices as a “personal AP”. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142020 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING TRAINING SIGNAL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a training signal in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system includes generating one or more first training signals for a first destination station and one or more second training signals for a second destination station by applying a mapping matrix P to a training signal generation sequence, mapping the first training signals and the second training signals to a plurality of antennas according to an antenna mapping matrix, and performing Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) on each of the first training signals and the second training signals mapped to the plurality of antennas and transmitting the training signals through the plurality of antennas. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142021 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - According to one embodiment, a communication apparatus has a transmission/reception module, a WLAN-setting data storage module, a registrar process module, a WOL-setting data storage module, and a WOL-setting data addition module. The transmission/reception module transmits and receives data to and from an external apparatus through wireless communication. The WLAN-setting data storage module stores WLAN-setting data for setting a WLAN function. The registrar process module transmits and receives data to and from the external apparatus via the transmission/reception module on the basis of the data stored in the WLAN-setting data storage module, and registers the external apparatus as an enrollee. The WOL-setting data storage module stores WOL-setting data for setting WOL function with respect to the external apparatus. The WOL-setting data addition module adds the WOL-setting data stored in the WOL-setting data storage module, to the data to be transmitted by the registrar process module to the external apparatus. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142022 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, TELEVISION RECEIVER, AND REPRODUCTION DEVICE - A communication device includes: a wireless communication unit configured to perform data transmission and receiving with another communication device via a wireless network; and a communication control unit electrically connected with the wireless communication unit via a media independent interface (MII) bus and configured to control the wireless communication unit using a management data input-output/management data clock (MDIO/MDC) included in the MII bus. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142023 | WIRELESS TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DEVICE AND METHOD - A wireless device, method, and signal for use in communication of a wireless packet between transmitting device and a wireless receiving device via a plurality of antennas, wherein a signal generator generates wireless packet including a short-preamble sequence used for a first automatic gain control (AGC), a first long-preamble sequence, a signal field used for conveying a length of the wireless packet, an AGC preamble sequence used for a second AGC to be performed after the first AGC, a second long-preamble sequence, and a data field conveying data. The AGC preamble sequence is transmitted in parallel by the plurality of antennas. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142024 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROUTING A WIRELESS CONNECTION IN A HYBRID NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to systems and methods for establishing and/or routing wireless data and/or voice connections across a hybrid network based upon a user's selection or preference. In some embodiments, a method for routing a wireless connection across a hybrid network comprises allowing a user to select a routing preference, routing the wireless connection via a short-haul communications network if the routing preference indicates a short-haul communications network choice, and routing the wireless connection via a cellular network if the routing preference indicates a cellular network choice. In other embodiments, the present invention provides a system and method for learning the user's data, cellular, and/or VoIP access habits in order to optimize the user's experience. In yet other embodiments, the present invention allows carriers to comply with CALEA and E911 rules by identifying the location of hybrid devices within the hybrid network. | 06-16-2011 |
20110149926 | METHOD AND STRUCTURES FOR MOBILITY POLICY IN A WIMAX COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The invention relates to method and structures for mobility policy e.g. in a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access, WiMAX, based communication. According to embodiments, a method and devices for mobility control of a terminal are provided wherein a mobility policy parameter defines the mobility control of the terminal. The mobility policy parameter preferably is part of a mobility policy or subscription record stored for a subscriber of the terminal in a subscriber data base. The mobility policy parameter may include at least one of an indication of mobility restriction, possibly indicating included or excluded cells or areas etc; an indication of fixed access, indicating a fixed base station to which the subscriber has to request access; nomadicity, indicating that no handover is allowed for that particular subscriber; and restricted mobility limited to a group of base stations or areas. Embodiments allow to deploy mobile WiMAX for fixed access applications, enabling reuse of existing technology and further development towards full mobility. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149927 | 802.11 VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT PREAMBLE SIGNALING FIELD WITH LEGACY COMPATIBILITY - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, a method and apparatus are disclosed that includes aspects of a controller configured to create a VHT frame that is arranged to include information relating to a modulation and a coding scheme with which a data portion of the VHT frame is modulated and encoded; and a transmitter configured to transmit the VHT frame to one or more STAs. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149928 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN WWAN AND WLAN IN A MOBILE WIRELESS HOTSPOT DEVICE - An apparatus comprises a first interface module configured to interface with one or more user devices through a wireless local area network (WLAN) connection; a second interface module configured to interface with a wireless communication network through a wireless wide area network (WWAN) connection; and a controller. The controller is configured to detect availability of carrier hotspots; if no carrier hotspot is detected, route traffic to and from the one or more user devices through the WWAN connection; and if a carrier hotspot is detected, route traffic to and from the one or more user devices through the detected carrier hotspot. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149929 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE-ANTENNA COMMUNICATION OF WIRELESS SIGNALS WITH EMBEDDED PILOT SIGNALS - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for wirelessly communicating signals include one or more transmitters configured to generate a plurality of wireless signal for transmission. Each of the wireless signals includes a plurality of pilot signals represented in a plurality of unevenly spaced, in-band subcarriers. Pilot signals of each wireless signal are positioned at subcarriers that are orthogonal in frequency with subcarriers at which pilot signals of all other wireless signals are positioned. According to an embodiment, subcarrier indices each the plurality of pilot signals are determined using a third order or higher order polynomial parameterization of pilot subcarriers in conjunction with a convex optimization algorithm to produce pilot signals having near-optimal channel estimate mean square error (MSE) performance. The wireless signals are simultaneously radiated over a wireless communication channel using a plurality of co-located or distributed antennas. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149930 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREFORE - Different communication parameters are automatically provided in accordance with a setting scheme in communication parameter automatic setting. To do this, a communication parameter provider identifies a communication parameter setting scheme to be used by another communication apparatus as a providing destination of communication parameters, and then selects and provides communication parameters in accordance with the identified setting scheme. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149931 | CONTENTS SUPPLY SYSTEM, A METHOD, A SERVICE SERVER, A STORAGE MEANS, A RELAY METHOD, AN APPLICATION SERVER AND A CELLULAR PHONE FOR MULTI CONNECTED END TERMINAL - Disclosed herein are a system and method for providing content to a plurality of end terminals, a service server, a content relay method, an application server, a content provision method, and a mobile communication terminal. The system includes a plurality of end terminals connected to a mobile communication terminal via a Local Area Network (LAN), and configured to execute content received from an application server, a mobile communication terminal connected to a service server via a mobile communication network, and configured to transfer content between the end terminals and the-service server, the service server connected to the application server, and configured to authenticate the end terminals and the mobile communication terminal and to request content, requested by authenticated end terminals, from the application server, and the terminal application server for providing the content, requested by the end terminals, to the service server. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149932 | ZIGBEE GATEWAY AND MESSAGE IDENTIFICATION METHOD OF THE SAME - A ZigBee gateway includes: an IP network communication unit supporting communications with an IP network; a ZigBee network communication unit supporting communications with a ZigBee network; and a message processing unit generating a forwarding entry containing a service request ID and a transaction sequence ID corresponding to a service request message, when the service request message is received from the IP network, and performing a forwarding operation between the service request message and a response message transmitted from the ZigBee network in response to the service request message, by referring to the forwarding entry. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149933 | Cellular augmented radar/laser detection using local mobile network within cellular network - A radar/laser emission detector is augmented with a cellular communications capability to provide the capability to share emission detection information amongst drivers to give other drivers even more advanced warning. A network of a plurality of cellular augmented radar/laser emission detector devices may be formed, each having the capability to source the location of radar or laser emission detections to others requesting access to such information, and each being warned when within a proximity of a recent radar or laser emission detection reported by at least one of the plurality of hybrid radar/laser detector devices. A local area, mobile area wireless network (MAWN) is formed in a cellular network to share radar/laser detection information among drivers. Mobile Position Centers (MPCs) are provided in ANSI-41 networks and Gateway Mobile Location Centres (GMLCs) (GSM networks), to determine other members that are proximate to a device that is detecting radar emission. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149934 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE DEVICE LOCATION TRACKING USING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Tracking devices are provided that use wireless local area networks to determine location. The tracking devices receive identification data from at least one local are network in the vicinity of the tracking device, and store tracking data that includes the identification data as well as a date and time stamp indicating when the identification data was received. The devices can transmit the tracking data to a server, and the location of the tracking device can be determined using the tracking data. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149935 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE WITH DIVERSITY WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) ANTENNA AND RELATED METHODS - A mobile wireless LAN communications device may include a portable, handheld housing, and a wireless LAN transceiver carried by the housing. A polarization diversity wireless LAN antenna may be included for cooperating with the wireless LAN transceiver to communicate over a wireless LAN. The polarization diversity wireless LAN antenna may include a first antenna element coupled to the wireless LAN transceiver having a first shape and a first polarization, and a second antenna element coupled to the wireless LAN transceiver having a second shape different from the first shape. The second antenna element may also have a second polarization different from the first polarization. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149936 | METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING CLOSELY-SPACED PACKETS IN WLAN DEVICES AND SYSTEMS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) device transmits a header over an air interface, at a first modulation rate. The header may include an indication of a second modulation rate that will be used to transmit a consolidated payload. The device further transmits the consolidated payload at the second modulation rate. The consolidated payload includes multiple data units. In one embodiment, the consolidated payload includes delimiters with validation fields associated with the various data units. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149937 | TECHNIQUE FOR MANAGING WIRELESS NETWORKS - Network connectivity may be managed on a computing device. An identifier of each wireless access point or network that is available at a given location is determined. The identifier determined without the device attempting to connect to any available wireless access point or network at the given location. Each determined identifier is compared to one or more network identifiers that are known to the device. The device connects to an available wireless access point having the identifier that is known and detected. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149938 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING TEMPORAL INFORMATION - An apparatus for providing temporal information may include a processor. The processor may be configured to provide a request for receipt of temporal information associated with a wireless communication access point, and receive a response to the request prior to either or both of authentication of a device providing the request by the wireless communication access point or association of the device with the wireless communication access point in which the response includes the temporal information. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149939 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A NETWORK, A SYSTEM AND A PRIMARY STATION THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a system comprising at least one primary station and at least one secondary station, wherein the primary station comprises communication means for communicating with the secondary station in accordance with a first protocol, wherein the communication means are arranged for communicating with a plurality of further stations in accordance with a further protocol, and wherein the primary station comprises control means for generating a message to be broadcast to the secondary station, said message comprising purposely erroneous information causing the at least one secondary station to remain silent for a predetermined duration. | 06-23-2011 |
20110158207 | System, Method, and Device for Providing Temporary Communication and Calendaring Applications in a Private Network - A communication device ( | 06-30-2011 |
20110158208 | UPDATING AN IGMP MEMBERSHIP REPORT WHEN A WIRELESS CLIENT DEVICE ROAMS ACROSS IP SUBNETS - A network is provided that includes a first WLAN infrastructure device (WID) that defines a first subnet, and a wireless client device (WCD) that is initially associated with the first WID. The WCD associates with a “current” WID when the wireless client device roams from the first subnet to a second subnet defined by the current WID. Upon successful association, the current WID unicasts a first IGMP query message (IGMPQM) to the WCD that has a MAC header including a destination MAC address that is set to a MAC address of the WCD. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158209 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING PRESENCE STATE OF A STATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A method and apparatus for presence state determination at an access point of a station determines whether a station associated with the access point is responsive to the access point to indicate the station is “present” or “not present”. The access point informs a presence server when the station's presence state changes. The presence server does not therefore need to rely on presence handshaking between the presence server and the station. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158210 | DYNAMIC WIRELESS NETWORK APPARATUSES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - Exemplary dynamic wireless network apparatuses, systems, and methods are disclosed. An exemplary system includes a plurality of wireless-network-enabled devices configured to communicate with one another when within wireless transmission range of one another, one of the wireless-network-enabled devices including a gateway to an established network. A wireless-network-enabled device within the wireless-network-enabled devices is configured to exchange telemetry data with one or more of the other wireless-network-enabled devices when located within the wireless transmission range of the one or more of the other wireless-network-enabled devices, and selectively and dynamically perform, based on the exchanged telemetry data, one or more connectivity operations to form a dynamic wireless network configuration. For example, the device may selectively and dynamically establish an upstream connection to one of the one or more of the other wireless-network-enabled devices, based on the exchanged telemetry data, to form a data transmission path between the device and the gateway. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158211 | METHOD AND APPARATUS THAT FACILITATES INTERFERENCE REDUCTION IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Techniques for managing interference in a wireless communication system are disclosed. In one aspect, an estimated interference associated with data transmission over a plurality of subcarriers on an uplink is determined The estimated interference may relate to intermodulation products associated with a parallel transmission over the plurality of subcarriers. Based at least partly on the estimated interference, data received on the downlink can be processed, and subcarriers can be selected for data transmission on the uplink. Additionally, resources can be assigned to a wireless device according to the estimated interference. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158212 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONNECTION METHOD - According to an embodiment, a communication terminal includes a wireless communication unit, a radio signal detection unit, and a control unit. The wireless communication unit performs a wireless communication process with other terminal that transmits a radio signals for requesting the wireless communication between terminals. The radio signal detection unit waits for the radio signals with lower operating power than operating power when the wireless communication unit waits for the radio signals. The control unit activates the wireless communication unit to cause the wireless communication unit to perform a connection process of the wireless communication when the radio signal detection unit detects the radio signal. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158213 | Short message service transceiving server device, short message service transceiving method and computer program storage product thereof - A short message service (SMS) transceiving server device, an SMS transceiving method and a computer program storage product thereof are provided. The SMS transceiving server device comprises a first server unit and a second server unit. The first server device having source information is configured to receive a first user message from a first user device, to assign the source information to the first user message, and to transmit a first SMS with the source information and the first user message to a second user device. When the second user device replies a second SMS with the source information and a second user message in response to the first SMS, the second server unit is configured to receive the second SMS, and to transmit the second user message of the second SMS to the first user device according to the source information. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158214 | Cellular phone in a body of a home/office telephone - This invention is a telephone station for placement in the home or work environment which can send and receive telephone calls over CDMA & GSM communication bands and direct link satellite communication such as Iridium and other similar systems. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158215 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR LINKING EXISTING WI-FI ACCESS POINTS INTO A SINGLE UNIFIED NETWORK - The present invention comprises a system and method for providing a distributed wireless network. In a preferred embodiment, at least one information processor is coupled to and accessible over a communication network, such as the internet. Network bandwidth is provided to a first user of at least two end users for a first fee and to a second user of the at least two end users for a second fee. The bandwidth is provided by at least one network service provider. Further, at least two wireless gateway devices are each respectively operated by the end users, and the wireless gateway devices are configured to provide wireless access to the communication network within a transmission range and to communicate with the at one least information processor. Also, at least two wireless receiving devices are provided that are operable to receive the respective bandwidth from the at least two wireless gateway devices when in transmission range. Preferably, the first user is authorized to use the second bandwidth and the second user is authorized to use the first bandwidth via the wireless devices. Thus a system and method of sharing bandwidth is provided. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158216 | Idle Connection State Power Consumption Reduction In A Wireless Local Area Network Using Beacon Delay Advertisement - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of Improving idle connection state power consumption in wireless local area network (WLAN) system. Beacon transmission delay information is determined by the access points and advertised to the stations via a Beacon Transmission Delay Information Element. In response, the stations adjust their Wake For Beacon Reception time accordingly to wake up at a time much closer to the actual receipt of the Beacon, thereby reducing power consumption due to the reduced time the receive circuits need to be powered on. | 06-30-2011 |
20110158217 | Method and System for Intercommunication between Mobile Terminal and WiMAX Base Station, and Mobile Terminal - A method for intercommunication between a mobile terminal and a WiMAX base station comprises: connecting the mobile terminal with a WiMAX wireless data card via an interface (S | 06-30-2011 |
20110164594 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION - An apparatus and a method for transmitting information in vehicle-to-vehicle communication based on IEEE802.11 standard WLAN, which involves both safety information based on the IEEE802.11p standard and non-safety-related information based on another IEEE802.11 standard being transmitted. The apparatus is equipped with a transmission and/or reception device which has a WLAN chipset. In order to achieve the vehicle-to-vehicle communication with a single piece of hardware, provision is made for the WLAN chipset to be able to be changed over by a control command between a first mode based on the IEEE802.11p standard and a second mode based on another IEEE802.11 standard and for the apparatus to have a control device which changes over the mode of the WLAN chipset using a control command. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164595 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR LOW POWER LOCAL AREA COMMUNICATION USING EVENT SIGNAL CONTROL - Disclosed herein is an apparatus and method for low power local area communication using event signal control. The low power local area communication apparatus includes at least one coordinator and a plurality of network device. The network coordinator transmits a periodic beacon signal based on the preset beacon period of a superframe and a continuous RF event signal, receives a first signal including a Service Set Identifier (SSID) and a second signal including the SSID and an event detection code, and performs the transmission or reception of data when authentication has been completed. Each of the network devices generates and transmits the first and second signals, performs the transmission and reception of data after authentication has been completed, and is thereafter switched to power saving mode or OFF mode. Accordingly, the construction of the system is simplified, and the cost of the system is reduced. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164596 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REGISTER WITH EXTERNAL NETWORKS IN WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - Example methods and apparatus to register with external networks in wireless network environments are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves sending a registration request from the device to a network entity and receiving a registration response at the device. The registration response indicates one or more registration plans. The example method also involves selecting a registration plan from the one or more registration plans and sending registration information associated with the device to the network entity. The registration information is selected based on the selected registration plan. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164597 | Multi-user uplink communications within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communication systems - Within such communication systems, uplink communications from various receiving wireless communication devices (e.g., STAs) to a transmitting wireless communication device (e.g., AP) may occur in any of a number of various dimensions or combinations thereof including MU-MIMO dimension and frequency dimension (asynchronous FDM or synchronous FDM). In accordance with such uplink communications, various considerations such as time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and/or power control (including wireless communication device grouping). When performing uplink asynchronous FDM signaling, power control as grouping is used. When performing uplink synchronous FDM signaling, time synchronization, frequency synchronization, and power control (such as including wireless communication device grouping) is performed. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164598 | UNIVERSAL-SERIAL-BUS-COMPATIBLE APPARATUS - Provided is a USB-compatible apparatus. More particularly, the USB-compatible apparatus integrates a mobile communication module (such as 3G/3.5G/3.75G) and a WLAN module (such as WiFi) into a singular USB apparatus. Inside the body of the USB-compatible apparatus, a routing module is introduced to bridge the mobile communication module and the WLAN module so as to forward the transferred or received data packets therebetween. A plurality of terminal computers can connect to a network via this USB-compatible apparatus since the inside WLAN module provides multiple wireless ports for the terminal computers. The USB-compatible apparatus further has a power-management module for performing arrangement of electric power among the inside modules. The USB-compatible apparatus particularly uses a USB interface to take an external power. Preferably, the apparatus can take power directly from a computer system, or use alternating current or direct current via an adapter. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164599 | Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol Version Six Multihoming Support for Flow Mobility - An apparatus comprising: a local mobility anchor (LMA) configured to maintain a plurality of binding cache entries (BCEs) for two or more active interfaces between a mobile node (MN) and a plurality of mobile access gateways (MAGs) comprising a first MAG and a second MAG, wherein the BCEs comprise a first BCE that corresponds to a home interface between the MN and the first MAG and that comprises a first list of home network prefixes (HNPs), and wherein the BCEs further comprise a second BCE that is linked to the first BCE, that corresponds to a secondary interface between the MN and the second MAG, and that comprises a second list of HNPs. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164600 | WIRELESS SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION - A method of wirelessly communicating from a high speed data modem using a first radio transceiver at a first location and a second radio transceiver at a second location preferably includes: (i) attaching a housing (containing the data modem and the first radio transceiver, a radio processor, and a power supply) to an outdoor supporting structure that supports a coaxial cable carrying an RF signal and AC power; (ii) using a splitter to split the RF signal from the AC power; (iii) transmitting the RF signal to the data modem, and transmitting the AC power to the power supply; (iv) providing a digital signal from the data modem to the radio processor; (v) converting the AC power to DC; (vi) using the DC power to run the data modem, the first radio transceiver, and the radio processor; (vii) communicating the digital signal from the radio processor to the first radio transceiver and then to a first antenna; (viii) transmitting a wireless signal from the first antenna to a second antenna; and (ix) communicating the wireless signal from the second antenna to the second radio transceiver, then to a second radio processor contained in a user device. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164601 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND BASE FOR AN ADVANCED DISPLAY - The present invention relates to a portable communication device equipped with a screen and a random access memory comprising: | 07-07-2011 |
20110164602 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PRESENTING LISTS OF WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK PROFILE INFORMATION - A method for selecting a wireless local area network (“WLAN”) for a wireless device, comprising: generating a first list of WLAN identifiers for a first group of one or more wireless local area networks (“WLANs”) accessible at a first geographic location and storing the first list in the wireless device; generating a second list of WLAN identifiers for a second group of one or more WLANs accessible at a second geographic location and storing the second list in the wireless device; selecting one of the first and second lists as an active list; and, scanning for WLANs identified by the active list to identify an available WLAN for the wireless device. | 07-07-2011 |
20110170524 | LOCATING ELECTROMAGNETIC SIGNAL SOURCES - There is disclosed a method of estimating the location of a plurality of electromagnetic signal sources, comprising: scanning at a first plurality of locations to generate signal source position data, the signal source position data representing estimates of the position of at least one of said signal sources; scanning at a second plurality of locations using a signal detection system to generate signal detection data, the signal detection data relating to signals received at the second plurality of locations from the signal sources; processing the signal source position data in dependence on the signal detection data to correct estimation errors in the signal source position data; and outputting the processed signal source position data. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170525 | METHOD FOR PROTECTING OPPORTUNITY TO TRANSMIT DATA FRAME IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method for guaranteeing a data frame transmit opportunity in a wireless LAN system having three different transmission modes includes: setting a first transmission protection interval based on a lowest transmission mode, when a node of a mode having a lowest transmission rate among the three transmission modes exists in the wireless LAN system, aggregating a data frame to be transmitted within time of the set transmission protection interval, and transmitting the data frame; and setting a second transmission protection interval based on a mode having a highest transmission rate, when only nodes of a mode having a highest transmission rate among the three transmission modes exist, aggregating a data frame to be transmitted within time of the set transmission protection interval, and transmitting the data frame. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170526 | Base stations backhaul network with redundant paths - A high bandwidth, low latency middle-mile, last mile core communications network providing low-cost and high-speed communications among the users of the network. Embodiments of the invention include a number of network access points located at a number of spaced apart sites. At least some of these network access points in the network are in communication with each other via wireless radio links. The network provides backhaul communication between at least one communication switching center and a number of base stations. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170527 | BASE STATION DEVICE - While a clock generated by a built-in clock generator is used as a reference signal for determining a carrier frequency of a transmit signal, carrier frequency synchronization is achieved between base stations. A base station device is configured to perform wireless communication with a terminal device. In the base station device, accuracy of a carrier frequency of an OFDM signal is affected by accuracy of a clock frequency generated by a built-in clock generator | 07-14-2011 |
20110170528 | System and Method for Advertising the Same Service Set Identifier for Different Basic Service Sets - According to one embodiment of the invention, a method comprises advertising services by a first wireless device. The services are provided by different basic service sets, each basic service set having the same service set identifier (SSID). Thereafter, one of the basic service sets is selected. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170529 | WIRELESS LAN SETTING SYSTEM IN AN IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS, AND A WIRELESS LAN SETTING METHOD - A wireless LAN setting system mounted on an image forming apparatus that performs network connection through a wireless LAN and used for performing wireless communication with plural terminals, the wireless LAN setting system including a mode for checking, before setting is performed, existing setting contents (setting items and setting states) presently set. Guide indications are attached to respective setting screens. With the wireless LAN setting system, proper determination is performed and setting operation is correctly performed even if a user (an administrator) does not have professional knowledge. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170530 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONNECTION CONTROL APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION CONTROL METHOD, SERVICE REQUEST METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system, in which a mobile terminal uses a data path that was generated with an ISP network by a base station in a home network to access a NW via the ISP network, includes an authentication means and connection control means in the ISP network. The base station accepts an access request from the mobile terminal and transmits information relating to the base station and the mobile terminal to the connection control means. The authentication means determines based on the information whether a linking service that connects to the home NW without traversing the ISP network can be provided to the mobile terminal, and if the linking service can be provided, notifies this information to the connection control means. Based on this notification, the connection control means requests the base station to generate a data path for providing the linking service, and the base station generates the data path. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170531 | PREFIX ASSIGNING METHOD, PREFIX ASSIGNING SYSTEM AND MOBILE NODE - The present invention discloses a technique to bind home address of a mobile node to prefixes assigned to a mobile node having a plurality of interfaces, and the present invention reduces number of binding update messages and a packet size. According to this technique, length (e.g. 64 bits) of an original prefix P | 07-14-2011 |
20110170532 | DISTRIBUTION OF AN AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IN A MOBILE NETWORK - A mobile terminal is authenticated in a packet transmission mobile network comprising an access network responsible for authenticating said mobile terminal and an access point to said access network. A counter indicating the number of authentication requests already received is managed. At the access network level, an authentication request is received from the mobile terminal. Then the counter is incremented by one. Then the mobile terminal is authenticated, the number indicated by the counter is compared with a threshold value, and, on the basis of that comparison, it is decided whether to authorize the authenticated mobile terminal to assume the role of the access network to authenticate another mobile terminal. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176523 | MANAGING A LOCATION DATABASE FOR NETWORK-BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM - Methods, program products, and systems for managing a location database are described. A server computer can receive location information from location-aware mobile devices (e.g., GPS-enabled devices) located within a communication range of access points of a wireless communications network. The server computer can calculate average geographic locations using the received locations for each access point. Based on the average geographic locations, the server computer can assign the access points to cells of a geographic grid. The server computer can filter the access points in each cell based on popularity, stability, longevity, and freshness of the access point and the received data. When a second mobile device connects to an access point in a cell, the server computer can transmit locations of the access points in the cell and in neighboring cells to the second mobile device such that a location of the second mobile device can be estimated. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176524 | SERVICE DELIVERY TO A CONSUMER ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING A MOBILE COMMUNICATION UNIT FOR ACCESS AND SERVICE CONTROL - The present invention relates to a method for providing connectivity information, regarding a consumer electronic device that is connected to a local network, to an Internet server. The method includes a step of a mobile communication unit retrieving the connectivity information of the consumer electronic device from the local network and then transmitting the connectivity information of the consumer electronic device to the Internet Server via an access network independent from the local network. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176525 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING WHETHER CELL COVERAGE IS DOWNSCALED IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system includes an apparatus capable of detecting whether a cell coverage is downscaled. The wireless communication system receives information used for communication between an evolved NodeB (eNodeB) and a User Equipment (UE) from the eNodeB. The UE performs at least one of pilot signal power checking for checking if a pilot signal power falls within a first reference range, DownLink (DL) Signal-to-Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) checking for checking if an SINR of a DL traffic channel falls within a second reference range, and UpLink (UL) SINR checking for checking if an SINR of an UL traffic channel falls within a third reference range using the received information. The UE also detects whether a cell coverage of a cell to which the eNodeB and the UE belongs is downscaled based on a checking result. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176526 | ADAPTATION OF PORTABLE BASE STATIONS INTO CELLULAR NETWORKS - A method includes modifying at least one communications protocol packet being passed between at least one of a plurality of portable base stations and a core network, such that the core network considers the plurality of portable base stations as a single base station. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176527 | SHARED ANTENNA CONTROL - A scheme for sharing antenna control pins in a wireless communications device implemented on a single CMOS integrated circuit is described. By providing a routing circuit for coupling the antenna control signal to the appropriate transceiver circuitry in a multi-transceiver system, antenna control signals may be efficiently processed using a minimum of pins on the wireless communication device. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176528 | OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) MOBILE CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE AND METHOD - A future mobile terminal converging multiple wireless transmission technologies by utilizing a cost-effective and spectrum-efficient mobile cloud solution by introducing the Virtual Mobile Server (VMS) and Virtual Register and Call Switch (VR/CS) systems and methods based on the innovative open wireless architecture (OWA) technology platform. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176529 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUNDANT CONNECTIVITY AND MULTI-CHANNEL OPERATION OF WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless network includes leaf nodes (such as wireless sensors or other wireless devices) and infrastructure nodes (such as access points). The leaf nodes communicate data messages to the infrastructure nodes. The infrastructure nodes communicate the data messages to gateway infrastructure nodes, which transmit the data messages over a wired network. The leaf nodes may communicate data messages to multiple infrastructure nodes in various ways. For example, the leaf nodes may transmit multiple messages, one at a time, to multiple infrastructure nodes. The leaf nodes may also broadcast a single message to multiple infrastructure nodes. In addition, the leaf nodes may communicate a single message containing a group identifier (such as a multi-cast group address) associated with multiple infrastructure nodes. In this way, communications from the leaf nodes may be more reliable. This may be particularly useful, for example, in networks such as 802.11-based networks. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176530 | CORE NETWORK NODE SELECTION IN RADIOCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS HAVING HOME GATEWAYS - Systems and methods according to these exemplary embodiments provide for improving communications systems which use home gateways or the like. This can be obtained by avoiding potentially frequent inter-MME (intra-MME pool) context transfers. This can then reduce unnecessary or redundant signalling. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176531 | Handling of Local Breakout Traffic in a Home Base Station - The present invention relates to methods and devices that allow for efficient transportation of traffic in conjunction with a home base station ( | 07-21-2011 |
20110182273 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HANDLING VOICE CALLS ON A DUAL-MODE WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - To handle a communication session at a wireless mobile communications device, after receiving an indication of current signal strength of an access point for a wireless local area network (“WLAN”) a signal strength threshold associated with the access point is retrieved. If the communication session is currently carried by a cellular network and the current signal strength exceeds the signal strength threshold, the communication session is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN. A metric is then adjusted based on timing of the switch relative to any switch of the communication session from the WLAN to the cellular network over a preceding time window associated with the access point. Based on the metric, the signal strength threshold associated with the access point is selectively adjusted. If, on the other hand, the communication session is currently carried by the WLAN and the current signal strength is below the signal strength threshold, an attempt is made to switch the communication session from the WLAN to the cellular network and a metric associated with the access point is adjusted based on whether or not the switch failed. Based on this second metric, the signal strength threshold associated with said access point is adjusted. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182274 | Method and Apparatus for a Flexible Peripheral Access Router - The present invention provides a method for a local area network router, that allows communication between a number of remotely located users, and a plurality of peripheral devices connected to the local area network router. Users may access the local area network using wireless devices or the Internet. The peripheral devices, which may include a wide variety of multi-media storage, playback, printing, or other functions, are connected to the router via local interfaces, which communicate with the peripheral devices via established protocols. Each of the peripheral devices is provided with an IP address, which facilitates direct communication of the users with the peripheral devices and permits direct communication with the devices over the Internet. Data packets destined for the IP address of a peripheral device are router through the local interface, which converts the data utilizing compatible communication protocols for the target peripheral device. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182275 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, ROUTER, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a router including a network interface that communicates with a network, a first communication interface that communicates with a mobile communication interface of a wireless communication device through a mobile communication control station, a second communication interface that communicates with a wireless LAN interface of the wireless communication device through a wireless LAN control station, and a conversion unit that converts an origin address of one of data to the network received from the mobile communication interface and data to the network received from the wireless LAN interface into an origin address of another one of the data. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182276 | Methods And Apparatus For Reducing Power Consumption For Mobile Devices Using Broadcast-To-Unicast Message Conversion - Techniques for use in communicating messages to a mobile device operative in a wireless network are described. A communication network receives a broadcast message which includes a protocol type identifier in a protocol type identifier field. The communication network identifies whether the protocol type of the broadcast message matches one of a plurality of protocol types stored in association with an identification of the mobile device. If the protocol type of the broadcast message matches one of the stored protocol types, then the communication network produces, from the broadcast message, a unicast message which includes information from the broadcast message, and causes the unicast message to be sent to the mobile device in the wireless network. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182277 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM OF SPATIAL DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Some demonstrative embodiments of the invention include a method, apparatus for concurrently transmitting data to two or more wireless stations. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182278 | EUI BASED REMOTE DATABASE FOR DYNAMIC DEVICE CONTROL - Systems and methods for controlling one or more appliances are provided. One or more appliances ( | 07-28-2011 |
20110188482 | ENHANCEMENTS TO THE MU-MIMO VHT PREAMBLE TO ENABLE MODE DETECTION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure present a technique for enabling a receiver to detect mode of transmission of a signal based on a common field transmitted to all the receivers. The proposed technique includes frame structure in which information about the transmission mode is transmitted in a first portion of a SIG field to all the receivers. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188483 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A communication terminal captures an image of a device having a local area wireless communication function, displays the image on a screen, and performs local area wireless communications with the device while further displaying data stored in the device on the screen. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188484 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A BLANKET WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK CONTROL PLANE - A method and apparatus for maintaining a connection between a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a blanket wireless local area network (BWLAN) are described. An inter-working function (IWF) entity in a given network access point (NAP) of the BWLAN maintains lists of WTRUs in respective states. Furthermore, the given NAP maintains a list of neighbor NAPs, and operates in accordance with a selected WTRU mobility protocol. The states may include a “not aware” (NA) state in which the given NAP is actually not aware of a particular WTRU, an “active transmit” (AT) state in which the given NAP is actively transmitting to a particular WTRU, and a “neighbor range” (NR) state for WTRUs indicated in an update report from neighbor (URN) message that the given NAP was not aware of. The WTRU mobility protocol may be a push mobility protocol or a poll mobility protocol. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188485 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements for resolving radio resource conflicts occurring in radio networks supporting both local ad-hoc communication and cellular communication. The conflicts are resolved by informing the cellular network about radio resource management restrictions due to the local ad-hoc communication needs and resources that are reserved for local ad-hoc communications. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188486 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and apparatus of controlling a transmit power in a wireless local area network is provided. A wireless device operated in a TV White Space transmits a white space map indicating a list of available channels, and transmits an extended power constraint indicating a plurality of transmission channels and a plurality of maximum transmit powers, wherein the plurality of transmission channels are selected among the list of available channels and each of the plurality of maximum transmit powers corresponds to a maximum transmit power for each of the plurality of transmission channels. Interference can be mitigated between wireless devices operated in the TV White Space. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188487 | WLAN APPARATUS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) apparatus for a WLAN system includes a first medium access protocol (MAC) entity which supports a first frequency band; and a second MAC entity which supports a second frequency band, wherein a MAC management frame for the first frequency band is encapsulated in a MAC management frame for the second frequency band, and transmitted through the second frequency band. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188488 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SERVICE COVERAGE AREA MANAGEMENT - A Wireless Access Point (WAP) of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) infrastructure includes a processor, a radio and a directional antenna. The radio supports communications with a plurality of wireless terminals to gather participatory data, and listens to, but does not participate in transmissions of at least some of the plurality of wireless terminals to collect non-participatory WAP data. Based upon the participatory WAP data and non-participatory WAP data, the processor creates WAP operational reports and provides the WAP operational reports to the WLAN. The WLAN creates directions based thereon and directs the WAP to alter the gain pattern of the directional antenna. | 08-04-2011 |
20110194541 | IP COMMUNICATION ARCHITECTURE BETWEEN THE GROUND AND A VEHICLE - An IP communication architecture between a ground computer connected to a main router and a mobile computer which is located on board a train and which is connected to a mobile router on the train. The architecture comprises at least one infrastructure comprising the base stations equipped with radio communication devices and base routers on the ground which are connected to the infrastructure. Each mobile router comprises:
| 08-11-2011 |
20110194542 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF REQUESTING CHANNEL ACCESS IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and apparatus of requesting a channel access in a wireless local area network is provided. A transmitter transmits a plurality of Request To Send (RTS) frames over a plurality of requesting channels and receives at least one Clear To Send (CTS) frame over at least one responding channel as a response for the plurality of RTS frames. Each of the plurality of RTS frames indicates a bandwidth for the plurality of requesting channels, and the at least one CTS frame indicates a bandwidth for the at least one responding channel. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194543 | ROUTING DEVICE AND SIGNAL TRANSMITTING METHOD FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A routing device and a signal transmitting method for a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) are provided. The device includes: a radio frequency transmitting module, adapted to: generate radio network signals of the WLAN, and adjust the transmit power of the radio network signals according to power indication information; and an antenna module, adapted to transmit the radio network signals according to the adjusted transmit power. The method includes: generating radio network signals of the WLAN, and adjusting the transmit power of the radio network signals according to power indication information; and transmitting the radio network signals according to the adjusted transmit power. Through the routing device and the signal transmitting method, the radio network signals may be transmitted according to different transmit powers. Therefore, the routing device can meet the requirement for portability, fixed installation, and wide coverage. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194544 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONSTRUCTING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT LONG TRAINING FIELD SEQUENCES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for constructing a training sequence as a part of transmission preamble in an effort to minimize (or at least reduce) a peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) at a transmitting node. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194545 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONSTRUCTING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT SHORT TRAINING FIELD SEQUENCES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for constructing a short training field (STF) sequence of a Very High Throughput (VHT) preamble in an effort to reduce a peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR). The constructed STF sequence may feature a specific repetition period. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194546 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUITRY WITH SIMULTANEOUS RECEIVE CAPABILITIES FOR HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Handheld electronic devices are provided that contain wireless communications circuitry. The wireless communications circuitry has simultaneous reception functions that allow the handheld devices to simultaneously receive multiple communications signals in a single communications band. The handheld electronic devices may include cellular telephones with music player functionality or other portable devices. The handheld electronic devices may have local wireless communications capabilities for supporting local wireless links such as WiFi and Bluetooth links. Using the simultaneous reception functions of the wireless communications circuitry, users of the handheld electronic devices can simultaneously receive signals such as WiFi and Bluetooth signals. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194547 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING WLAN SELECTION BY A MOBILE NODE - Apparatus, and an associated method, by which to facilitate selection of a WLAN through which a mobile node communicates. Selection takes into account the geographic positioning of the mobile node. The mobile node ascertains its geographic positioning by monitoring cellular-positioning signals. And, availability of WLANs through which to communicate is ascertained by detecting signals broadcast by the WLANs. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194548 | Method And Apparatus For Cellular Communication Over Data Networks - Cellular signals or other wireless signals/messages are introduced into a building or to an outside location by transmitting packets corresponding to those signals over a data network and low cost cables to designated locations within the data network. Once the designated packets containing the signals reach the destination, they are then broadcast over the air to a terminal capable of receiving the wireless message. In a first embodiment, an in-building gigabit Ethernet network, such as that currently existing presently in many buildings, is used to distribute radio signals indoors. Instead of transmitting the radio signals over the air from a repeater connected to a base station, coded baseband signals generated by the coding processor (e.g., a CDMA Modem Unit) in the base station are packetized and sent over the Ethernet network to radio processing equipment and antennas distributed throughout the building. The radio processing equipment strips the packet headers from the baseband signal packets so those signals can be broadcast via the antennas to one or more mobile terminals. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194549 | Method and System for Improved Communication Network Setup Utilizing Extended Terminals - Aspects of a method and system for improved communication network setup utilizing extended terminals are presented. Aspects of the method may comprise configuring a wireless Ethernet terminal functioning as a client station by a configurator via a network. The configured wireless Ethernet terminal may wirelessly receives information from a wireless station, and communicate the wirelessly received information to at least one of a plurality of wired stations via at least one of a plurality of corresponding wired interfaces. Aspects of the system may comprise a collocated device functioning as a configurator that configures a wireless Ethernet terminal functioning as a client station via a network. The configured wireless Ethernet terminal may wirelessly receives information from a wireless station, and communicate the wirelessly received information to at least one of a plurality of wired stations via at least one of a plurality of corresponding wired interfaces. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194550 | HOME BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A home base station includes a packet process unit configured to process a received data from mobile network to transmit the processed data to a mobile terminal; and an image processor configured to process the received data from the packet process unit by mixing with a received image data from exterior to transmit the mixed data to an image processing apparatus being connected with the home base station. A method for controlling the home base station includes a receiving data from a mobile terminal; and transmitting the received data to a mobile network by mixing with a received image data from a image process unit being connected with the home base station. | 08-11-2011 |
20110200022 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UTILIZING IP-BASED WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS CLIENT LOCATION DATA - A location provision facility communicates with a mobile telecommunications device over an IP-based telecommunications network to obtain information that enables the facility to determine a location of the telecommunications device. The facility and/or the telecommunications device store the determined location. In response to requests from location-based applications for the location of the telecommunications device, the facility can provide the location-based applications with the stored or calculated location. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200023 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A POSITION FIX INDOORS - Whenever a mobile device in a building is within proximity of a RF communication device, the mobile device may be operable to receive location information transmitted, for example by broadcasting it, from a RF communication device. The transmitted location information comprises altitude information of the RF communication device. At least an altitude of the mobile device may be determined based on the received altitude information of the RF communication device. The RF communication device may be located in an elevator car and/or on a particular floor in the building. Whenever the RF communication device is located in the elevator car, the altitude information of the RF communication device may be received by the RF communication device from an elevator controller. In instances when the RF communication device also transmits its latitude/longitude (LAT/LON), the mobile device may be operable to determine a 3-dimentional (3D) location of the mobile device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200024 | PROVIDING GNSS ASSISTANCE DATA VIA A WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - A wireless mobile device, either a WLAN enabled mobile device or a Bluetooth enable device, which is within range of a WLAN access point, is operable to receive GNSS assistance data broadcasted from the WLAN access point. The GNSS assistance data are acquired by the WLAN access point from a reference database coupled to a location server. The broadcast GNSS assistance data comprise ephemeris data, LTO data, location information related to the WLAN access point and/or time information. The WLAN access point receives the acquired GNSS assistance data from the location server over a broadband IP network. The WLAN access point selects available resources for broadcasting the received GNSS assistance data to wireless mobile devices in range. The wireless mobile device receives the broadcast GNSS assistance data to calculate its own location. The calculated location of the wireless mobile device is used to update or refine the reference database. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200025 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus ( | 08-18-2011 |
20110200026 | Apparatus, method, and medium for self-organizing multi-hop wireless access networks - A wireless computer network includes a backbone network including backbone network nodes authenticated to each other and in communication with each other. The wireless computer network also includes a master authenticator node and a proxy authenticator node among the backbone network nodes. When an unauthenticated new node requests authentication to the backbone network and the unauthenticated new node is in communication with at least one of the backbone network nodes, the at least one of the backbone network nodes becoming the proxy authenticator node for the unauthenticated new node and communicates with the master authenticator node to authenticate the unauthenticated new node to the backbone network. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200027 | TWO TIER HI-SPEED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LINK - A method and apparatus for mobile two-tier wireless communication are provided. A wireless communication signal may be received at a mobile communication device from a cellular base station. Data may be recovered from the received wireless communication signal. The data may be transmitted to an IEEE 802.11 user device. A second wireless communication signal may be received from the IEEE 802.11 user device. Data may be recovered from the second wireless communication signal. The data may be transmitted to the cellular base station. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200028 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station device, which allocates one or more subbands of each of an uplink and a downlink to a mobile station device and transmits response information, which indicates whether or not uplink data from the mobile station device has been properly received, to the mobile station device, the base station device includes: a control unit ( | 08-18-2011 |
20110200029 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CLUSTERING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A method and system for identifying cell clusters within a coordinated multiple point wireless transmission network in order to reduce scheduling complexity while optimizing throughout and performance. The network includes a total number of cells served by corresponding base stations. The BSC divides the entire network of cells into clusters of cells and forwards this clustering information to all mobile devices. A cluster of cell candidates is a subset of the total number of cells within the network. The mobile device then provides to a base station controller the identity of a cluster of preferred cells selected from the cluster of cell candidates. The base station controller selects at least one base station located within the cluster of preferred cells to establish communication with the mobile device. A wireless connection is then established between the selected at least one base station and the mobile device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110206022 | QoS WIRELESS NETWORKING FOR HOME ENTERTAINMENT - A layer above the MAC and PHY layers of a wireless network employs a forward error correction (FEC) protocol extension with selective acknowledgement to reduce the likelihood of retries to enhance performance in, for example, home entertainment networking applications. In addition, certain system parameters of the wireless network are controlled so as to either i) align required bandwidth with particular sustainable channel parameters of the wireless network, or ii) modify the channel characteristics. One or more of three mitigation techniques might be employed with the FEC protocol extension to enhance maintenance of radio communication in the wireless network: Physical-layer Rate Adaptation, Dynamic Interference Avoidance, and Media-encoding Layer Adaptation. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206023 | IN-STORE READING SYSTEM - A system and method for providing digital data content to a wireless device. Although a fee is typically charged for access to the digital data content, e.g., electronic books, the system and the method provides controlled access to this content for free while the wireless device is accessing the content in a specified location, e.g., a retail location. A content control server receives a request from the wireless device requesting access to the digital data content. The request is received over a secure connection, preferably a virtual private network (VPN). The content control server monitors how much of the digital data content has been provided to the wireless device, and/or an amount of time the wireless device has been accessing the digital data content. This content control server uses this monitored data to control, throttle, the provision of the digital data content to the wireless device. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206024 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK REQUEST AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING FEEDBACK REQUEST IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a feedback request in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: transmitting feedback request control information to a user equipment (UE), wherein the feedback request control information includes a MIMO (Multi-Input Multi-Output) feedback bitmap indicating at least one MIMO feedback mode to be applied to the UE and a common parameter, and the common parameter comprises a parameter commonly requested for the UE to generate feedback information in the at least one MIMO feedback mode. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206025 | ACCESS POINT WHICH SENDS GEOGRAPHICAL POSITIONING INFORMATION FROM THE ACCESS POINT TO MOBILE TERMINALS AND MOBILE TERMINAL WHICH RECEIVES THE INFORMATION AND ESTIMATES THE POSITION THEREOF BASED ON SAID INFORMATION - The invention relates to an access point ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110206026 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND SIGNAL RECEPTION METHOD - A base station for communicating within a system band including plural basic frequency blocks includes a signal generating unit configured to generate data and control signals; an intermediate signal generating unit configured to generate intermediate signals; a multiplexing unit configured to add one or more subcarriers such that center frequencies of signal bands for the respective basic frequency blocks are placed at predetermined frequency intervals, and multiplex the intermediate signals and data and control signals; and a transmitting unit configured to transmit the multiplexed signals. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206027 | Wireless Communication Systems - A wireless communication method in a system in which subscriber stations are each operable for communication with a base station is provided. The base station is capable of performing simultaneous communications with a plurality of the subscriber stations simultaneously by exchange of packets each conforming with a layered protocol of said system. The packets include a first portion for defining physical layer (PHY) parameters and a second portion for defining media access layer (MAC) parameters. Furthermore, communications between the subscriber stations and the base station are performed wholly or partly through at least one relay station. In this system, the method includes, in the relay station, receiving a plurality of packets from the subscriber stations, detecting the second portion of each of the packets, combining the detected second portions to form a second portion of at least one new packet, and transmitting the new packet to the base station. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206028 | METHOD AND TERMINAL DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING LOCATION INFORMATION IN INTERNET-ORIENTED NETWORKS - A location information (li) which is available in a mobile terminal device (ME-T) and which indicates the geographical location of the terminal device (ME-T) is embedded in messages (m) of a SIP protocol (SIP) which are exchanged between the terminal device (ME-T) and the network (WLAN) during the establishment of a session and/or during a session and/or during the registration of a terminal device (ME-T) in the network (WLAN), e.g. LAN or UMTS, or during request of a service or a function. By advantageously complementing the SIP protocol (session initiation protocol), the location information can be transmitted from a mobile terminal device (ME-T), which optionally has a telephone function, to the network (WLAN) in any signaling state, thereby substantially reducing the economic outlay for implementing the transmission of location information (li) to the network (WLAN). | 08-25-2011 |
20110206029 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The convenience of users is improved for a case in which a network is structured by way of performance of a process of sharing communication parameters with other apparatuses. | 08-25-2011 |
20110211563 | LOCATION TRACKING SYSTEM - This document presents a location tracking system. Transmitter tags are disposed throughout the area where the location tracking is carried out. The transmitter tags are configured to transmit their unique identifiers. A personal radio communication device being tracked detects a unique identifier received from a transmitter tag and transmits the detected unique identifier to a server. The server links a known physical location associated with the unique identifier to an identifier of the personal radio communication device so as to carry out location tracking. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211564 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - The first wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with a first wireless apparatus on a first wireless network. The beacon transmitting unit cyclically transmits a beacon signal to the first wireless apparatus via the first wireless communication unit. The period determiner determines a transmission permission period during which data transmission by the first wireless apparatus is permitted. The notification unit notifies a control signal specifying the transmission permission period to the first wireless apparatus via the beacon signal. The power managing unit performs control so that power supply to the first wireless communication unit is suspended during a suspension period, the suspend period being a period except both the transmission permission period and a transmission timing period of the beacon signal within a whole period. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211565 | MULTI-TIER WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH A SECURE NETWORK DISCOVERY PROTOCOL - An apparatus, system and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of an infrastructure-less wireless home mesh networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, ad hoc wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. A further embodiment includes identification of a wireless home mesh network. Once identified, one or more proprietary messages may be exchanged in a secure manner to establish connections with a home electronics device as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the home network. A home electronics device may wirelessly communicate to route data within one or more nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211566 | MULTI-TIER WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH A SECURE NETWORK DISCOVERY PROTOCOL - An apparatus and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of an infrastructure-less wireless home mesh networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, ad hoc wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. A further embodiment includes identification of a wireless home mesh network. Once identified, one or more proprietary messages may be exchanged in a secure manner to establish connections with a home electronics device as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the home network. A home electronics device may wirelessly communicate to route data within one or more nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211567 | Method, System, and Device for Network Selection - A method, system, and device for network selection are provided. The method for network selection includes the following steps. After network selection is triggered, a network selection list stored in a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) and a network selection list stored in a Mobile Equipment (ME) are read, where the UICC is embedded in the ME and accessible to the ME. Network selection is performed according to the network selection list stored in the UICC and the network selection list stored in the ME. Also, a method for network selection through a network selection policy is added and methods for implementing a type and a data structure of a network selection policy as well as a method for network selection based on a network selection policy are provided, so that network selection can be controlled more flexibly, a terminal can locate a target network faster, and time consumed for the network selection is reduced. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216747 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCURATE CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION THROUGH INTERACTION BETWEEN COMMUNICATION LAYERS AND SUB-LAYERS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Time synchronization in a wireless communication system comprises transmitting a synchronization frame from a transmitter to a receiver over a wireless communication medium. The synchronization frame includes a timestamp indicating the transmitter local time when a symbol at a predefined position of the synchronization frame is placed on the wireless communication medium for transmission. The synchronization frame is received at the receiver which determines a receiving time comprising the receiver local time when said symbol of the synchronization frame was received at the physical layer of the receiver. Time synchronizing is performed by determining a difference between said timestamp and said receiving time, and adjusting the receiver local time based on said difference to time synchronize the receiver with the transmitter. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216748 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless apparatus includes: a module executing communication with a target wireless apparatus in conformity with a first communication standard and a second communication standard having the higher maximum communication rate; a connection unit establishing connection with the target wireless apparatus by transmitting and receiving a frame to and from the target wireless apparatus; a data communication unit executing data communication with the target wireless apparatus; and a communication rate control unit controlling the module, when the connection unit establishes the connection, so that the module executes the communication in conformity with the first communication standard when there is the first wireless apparatus, whereas the module executes the communication in conformity with the second communication standard when there is no first wireless apparatus and controlling the module to execute the communication in conformity with the second communication standard, when the data communication unit executes the data communication. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216749 | BROADBAND NETWORK WITH ENTERPRISE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR RESIDENTIAL AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT - The present invention sets forth a network-centric service distribution architecture that integrates a wireless access system in the residence, SOHO, business or public environment through the use of a local broadband network, such as a Residential-Business Broadband Network (RBN), to the service provider's broadband transport network and to a service provider's broadband packet network. The system includes Media Terminal Adapter is coupled via the RBN to the access port(s) and via the service provider's broadband transport network to the service provider's broadband packet network. The access port is coupled to the Media Terminal Adapter via either a RBN (e.g., a Local Area Network—LAN) or simply via a traditional POTS line interface. The access port receives and sends wireless signals to a plurality of RBN devices, allowing the user to control theses devices remotely from the residence, business, SOHO or public environments. The integration of an RBN to a service provider's broadband packet network allows a subscriber to communicate at home and at the office with one communication device anytime anywhere. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216750 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE SUPPORTING ENHANCED CALL FUNCTIONS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit services voice communications in a WLAN with at least one other wireless device and includes a WLAN interface, a transcoder, and a switch box. The WLAN interface wirelessly communicates with at least one wireless device to receive inbound packetized audio data from the at least one wireless device and to transmit outbound packetized audio data to the at least one wireless device. The transcoder receives the inbound packetized audio data and converts the inbound packetized audio data to inbound Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) WLAN audio data. The WLAN interface also receives outbound PCM WLAN audio data and converts the outbound PCM WLAN audio data to the outbound packetized audio data. The switch box operably couples between the transcoder and a PCM bus, to which an audio COder/DECoder (CODEC) couples. A speaker and a microphone coupled to the audio CODEC. The switch box enables the wireless transceiving integrated circuit to perform call conferencing operations, call forwarding operations, call hold operations, call muting operations, and call waiting operations. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216751 | ARCHITECTURE FOR SIGNAL AND POWER DISTRIBUTION IN WIRELESS DATA NETWORK - An architecture is provided for coupling wireless local area network (WLAN) signals between an internetworking device and a remotely located access point using a transport network. The access point is coupled to the transport network for communicating with the internetworking device. The access point includes a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point and an access point remote converter. The WLAN access point receives wireless local area network signals from wireless computing equipment and converts such signals to local area network compatible signals. The access point remote converter receives the local area network compatible signals from the WLAN access point and converts the signals to transport modulated format signals suitable for transmission over the transport network. The transport network also provides a power signal to power at least some components of the access point. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216752 | MULTI-CARIER CONFIGURATION, ACTIVATION AND SCHEDULING - Embodiments of block acknowledgements request apparatus, systems, and methods are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. An aggregated block of a plurality of data frames is received from an originator transmission, with each data frame including a medium access control (MAC) header. An acknowledgement policy that is solicited by the originator is identified in a quality of service field in at least one of the MAC headers of the received transmission. A single block acknowledgement is transmitted to the originator acknowledging receipt of one or more of the plurality of data frames in the aggregated block of data frames. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216753 | CROSS LAYER SERVICE DISCOVERY FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Service discovery for services on a wireless network is presented. It is determined (e.g., from a received Layer 2 message) that an offering apparatus h made a service available to entities joined to a wireless network. Then in a message, that is available to entities not joined to the network, is placed information about the services and also at least one of location information about the offering apparatus and link metric information about a network path to the offering apparatus. A discovering apparatus reads one or more transmitted messages (from different apparatuses in the same network in different networks), sees the service it wants is available through both, compares the different locations and/or the different link metrics, and based on the comparing chooses which network to join, or with which apparatus on the single network to create a peer link | 09-08-2011 |
20110222514 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD FOR MOBILE TERMINALS IN A CELLULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND EQUIPMENT FOR IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - The present invention relates to a mobility management method for mobile terminals in a cellular wireless communication system. The system comprises a core network and an access network comprising at least one controller, each controller controlling a group of base stations each defining at least one cell, and sets of cells form respective location areas. In the method the cells defined by the base stations controlled by each controller of the access network form a predetermined number of location areas and the belonging of each of the cells to one of the predetermined number of location areas is independent of its geographical location. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222515 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SYNCHRONIZATION BETWEEN GROUPS OF DEVICES - Methods and apparatus related to supporting rapid synchronization between groups of wireless communications devices are described. Described methods and apparatus are well suited for use in peer to peer wireless communications systems in which a plurality of ad hoc peer to peer networks may be formed, each ad hoc network operating with its own notion of time. As two groups of devices, having different notions of time, come within proximity of one another, a wireless communications device of a first group detects the presence of a member of a second group. The wireless device determines that network timing re-synchronization is to be performed by one of the first and second groups and transmits a re-synchronization alert signal on a dedicated resource. Subsequently, the wireless device transmits a timing synchronization signal in accordance with new timing. Intended devices, which detect the alert signal and timing synchronization signal, adjust their internal timing. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222516 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD THEREFOR - According to an embodiment, a information processing apparatus includes a wireless communication unit, a first search unit, and a connection unit. The wireless communication unit performs wireless communication with another apparatus which is utilizable as a wireless base station. The first search unit is configured to: use the wireless communication unit to sequentially transmit, in a second transmission period different from a first transmission period, plural of first identification signals having different center frequencies within a frequency band usable by the wireless communication unit, as an activation request signal for requesting activation of a wireless communication unit included in the another apparatus; repeatedly transmit, in a first repetition period, the first signals in the frequency band; and search for the another apparatus. The connection unit uses the communication unit to establish connection with the another apparatus which is searched for. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222517 | WIRELESS LAN DEVICE AND PROTOCOL EXECUTION METHOD - A wireless LAN device for performing wireless communication with another wireless device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless LAN device includes first and second communication sections which participate in a configuration process using a predetermined protocol. An execution section executes, based on an instruction received at a reception section, the configuration process by use of one of the first and second communication sections in cooperation with the another wireless device. An exclusion section performs, before the configuration process is completed, an exclusion process that excludes the other of the first and second communication sections from continuing to participate in the configuration process. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222518 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PROJECTOR, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system performs ad-hoc mode communication, wherein a first terminal includes an identification information storing section, an IP address storing section, an SSID generating section generating a service set identifier, a beacon signal generating section generating a beacon signal including an SSID, and a priority information updating section updating priority information, and the second terminal includes an SSID acquiring section acquiring the SSID from the beacon signal, memory storing the SSID, an SSID selecting section selecting one SSID based on the priority information, an IP address acquiring section acquiring the IP address of the first terminal from the selected SSID, and a communicating section making a connection to the first terminal by using the acquired IP address. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222519 | Phase Rotating Method and Wireless Local Area Network Device - The present invention discloses a phase rotating method for a wireless local area network (WLAN) device, which utilizes a channel including a plurality of sub-channels. The phase rotating method includes steps of generating a plurality of data sequences corresponding to the plurality of sub-channels, and making the plurality of data sequences with phase rotations according to a plurality of angles corresponding to the plurality of sub-channels. The channel is a non-contiguous channel. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222520 | ADVERTISEMENT OF QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) INFORMATION FOR NETWORK MANAGEMENT TRAFFICE IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - An access point advertises a management frame quality of service (MFQ) policy that defines an access category used for transmitting a first type of management frame. Each mobile station associated with the access point is to prioritize transmission of management frames according to the MFQ policy advertised by the access point, unless a policy configuration request for the mobile station to prioritize transmission of management frames according to a different MFQ policy has been accepted. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222521 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION - A method and User Equipment (UE) for transmitting feedback information are disclosed. The UE feeds back M best subbands to a Base Station (BS). Especially, the UE feeds back indication information indicating a combination of the M best subbands from among combinations each having M subbands produced out of a maximum number of subbands that can be allocated. Hence, coding of the feedback information is simplified. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222522 | Radio Station System for a Wireless Network - A radio station system for a wireless network with at least two access network nodes, wherein a first of the at least two access network node is assigned to the radio station system as an access network node in the wireless network and the radio station system is connected to the first access network node over an active radio link for the transmission of user data. During the existence of the active radio link between a first radio station and the first access network node, a second radio station transmits or exchanges no user data via a radio link with an access network node in the wireless network and at least at times identifies available access network nodes in the wireless network for the radio station system. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222523 | Method of multi-radio interworking in heterogeneous wireless communication networks - A method of multi-radio interworking to provide integrated cellular and WLAN access for a multi-radio device is provided. A serving base station in a cellular network first obtains wireless local area network (WLAN) information and then forward the WLAN information to a serving device such that the serving device is capable to connect with both the cellular network and a WLAN. The WLAN information may comprise scanning information, WLAN QoS information, WLAN layer-3 information, or additional WLAN access point information. The WLAN information is forwarded based on triggering events associated with the, serving base station information, WLAN coverage information, or the serving device information. Based on the received WLAN information, when entering WLAN coverage, the serving device activates its WLAN access to forward traffic from the cellular access network to the WLAN access network. When leaving WLAN coverage, the serving device deactivates its WLAN access to save power consumption. | 09-15-2011 |
20110228749 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING DATA FLOWS OVER MULTIPLE RADIO PROTOCOLS - A method to seamlessly support data flows over multiple networks using different radio protocols is provided. The method may include supporting a data flow over a wireless link using a first radio protocol, enabling a second radio protocol for the data flow, based on one or more parameters, selecting at least one of the first radio protocol or the second radio protocol to support the data flow over the wireless link, while maintaining the data flow over the wireless link, and communicating the data flow over the wireless link using the selected at least one of the first radio protocol or the second radio protocol. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228750 | Extended Local IP Access For A Converged Gateway In A Hybrid Network - The implementation of Local IP Access (LIPA), “Extended” LIPA (ELIPA), and Selected IP Traffic Offload (SIPTO) for the design of a “Converged Gateway” (CGW) are disclosed. The gateway system may provide various features such as femtocell access to local networks, public Internet, and private service provider networks. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228751 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE - A wireless communication apparatus includes a first wireless communicator, a second wireless communicator, and a controller. The first wireless communicator transmits and receives a wireless signal according to a first communication protocol, and scans a notice signal during a predetermined scan term in a first cycle non-integer times at least one of notice signal cycles in the first communication protocol. The second wireless communicator transmits and receives the wireless signal according to a second communication protocol. The controller switches the second wireless communicator to an non-transmission state and the first wireless communicator to a reception state during the scan term. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228752 | System and method to pack cellular systems and WiFi within a TV channel - An inventive system allows GSM as a master signaling and timing system to operate WiFi within a TV channel. GSM system will broadcast system information regularly and GSM unit of the terminal will regularly wake up to check those system information and wakeup messages to keep being associated with G-WiFi base station. WiFi units of the G-WiFi system will be dormant and become active when triggered by GSM counterparts. There is provided a method to partition the TV channel among GSM or CDMA or TD-SCDMA or 1xEVDO and WiFi system. GSM frequencies for uplink and downlink may not have a deterministic relationship and may be assigned dynamically. This method can be applied to other frequency band to allow GSM, WiFi, TD-SCDMA, CDMA, WCDMA etc to share an available spectrum such as the current GSM spectrum, TD-SCDMA spectrum etc. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228753 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING MOBILE DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A computer-implemented method for preventing communication using a mobile communication device is provided. The method includes enabling a motion detection process and detecting with the motion detection process at a first instance the mobile device is in motion. The motion detection process is disabled in response to detecting the mobile device is in motion. An attempted communication is detected via the mobile device, and the motion detection process is re-enabled in response to detecting the attempted communication. The method further includes detecting with the motion detection process at a second instance if the mobile device is in motion. If the mobile device is detected at the second instance in motion, the attempted communication is disabled. If the mobile device is detected at the second instance not in motion, the attempted communication is enabled. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228754 | PACKETIZED AUDIO DATA OPERATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiving integrated circuit includes a WLAN interface, an input buffer, an input buffer controller, and a processor. The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit may also include an output buffer, an output buffer controller, a transcoder, and/or an audio Coder-Decoder (CODEC). The WLAN transceiving integrated circuit is installed in a WLAN device that services voice communications. The input buffer receives packetized audio data from the WLAN interface. When the input buffer satisfies a buffer vacancy threshold, the processor and the input buffer controller cooperatively operate to fill at least a portion of the input buffer with packetized audio data. The processor copies packetized audio data from the input buffer and fills the input buffer with the copied packetized audio data to maintain an audio pattern in the input buffer. The input buffer controller fills the input buffer when the processor is available and after copying/filling is no longer effective. The processor operates to maintain the audio pattern when additional packetized audio data is received by the WLAN interface. These operations are also performed for the output buffer, which receives packetized audio data from the transcoder and writes the packetized audio data to the WLAN interface. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228755 | DIRECT LINK SETUP METHOD IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP (TDLS) WIRELESS NETWORK - According to embodiments of the present invention, there is provided a direct link setup method in a tunneled direct link setup (TDLS) wireless communication system. The method including: an initiator QSTA acquiring medium access control (MAC) address information of a peer quality of service station (QSTA); transmitting a TDLS setup request frame comprising the MAC address information to the peer QSTA; receiving a TDLS setup response frame in response to the TDLS setup request frame to the initiator QSTA from the peer QSTA; and transmitting a TDLS setup confirm frame in response to the TDLS setup response frame to the peer QSTA. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228756 | CQI TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-CELL HSDPA - A CQI transmission power control method is provided for transmitting CQIs of multiple cells is provided for a multi-cell HSDPA system in which multiple cells transmit packet data to a user equipment. A control information transmission method of a user equipment in a wireless communication system supporting multi-cell packet transmission service according to the present invention includes generating control informations indicating channel qualities of different cells; classifying the control informations into two control information groups according to a predetermined rule; compensating the control information groups for securing uniform reception performance at a base station; and transmitting the compensated control information groups to the base station. | 09-22-2011 |
20110235621 | SYNCHRONIZED ACTIVITY BITMAP GENERATION METHOD FOR CO-LOCATED COEXISTENCE (CLC) DEVICES - A mobile communications device is provided. A first radio module communicates with a communications device in compliance with a first protocol. A second radio module communicates with a base station in compliance with a second protocol. A CLC radio manager receives a traffic pattern from the first radio module indicating a first traffic allocation for the first radio module, obtains timing information of the base station, obtains a native reference clock from a clock source, converts values of the traffic pattern into the native reference clock counts, aligns the converted traffic pattern with the timing information of the base station, generates one or more CLC bitmaps for the first radio module by converting the aligned traffic pattern into a plurality of WiMAX frames or sub-frames of the timing information, and transmits the generated CLC bitmaps to the base station to recommend a second traffic allocation of the frames or sub-frames. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235622 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ADJUST RECEIVED SIGNAL - A wireless communication device, a wireless communication system and a method to adjust transmitted signals constellation in a maximum likelihood multiple-input-multiple-output receiver by transmitting an EVM deviation value. The EVM deviation value may be added to a pre-stored error value at the receiver. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235623 | System and Method for Estimating the Probability of Movement of Access Points in a WLAN-based Positioning System - Methods of and systems for estimating the probability of movement of access points in a WLAN-based positioning system are provided. Disclosed are methods to quantify the probability that a particular location estimate of a mobile device made by a Wi-Fi based positioning system is correct to within an arbitrary accuracy. Implementations use observed access point cluster size, age information for access point location determination, and/or the probability that one or more access points detected by the mobile device have relocated based on historic information about the movement of a collection of access points to make the probability determinations. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235624 | Handling Virtual Private Network Connections over a Wireless Local Area Network - A wireless local area network ‘WLAN’ client device has one or more virtual private network ‘VPN’ profiles defined therein. In response to the WLAN client device connecting to a WLAN, a user of the WLAN client device is able to indicate whether to attempt to establish a VPN connection over the WLAN. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235625 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND RELAY STATION USING LOCAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION AND SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD THEREOF - A device and method for providing a communication service using local wireless communication are provided. A communication terminal for servicing wireless communication with a relay station includes a local wireless communication unit for transmitting and receiving an audio signal for a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) service through wireless communication with the relay station, for converting a radio signal received from the relay station into a digital audio signal to output the digital audio signal, and for converting an input digital audio signal into a radio signal to transmit the radio signal to the relay station; and an audio processor for converting the digital audio signal received from the local wireless communication unit into an analog audio signal to output the analog audio signal, and for converting an input analog audio signal into a digital audio signal to deliver the digital audio signal to the local wireless communication unit. By providing a VoIP service using local wireless communication, coverage of the terminal may be expanded, contributing to a reduction in system complexity and power consumption of a communication system providing the VoIP service. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235626 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION IN MULTI-ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting control information by an enhanced Node B (eNB) in a wireless communication system supporting Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) technology is provided, in which at least one parameter required for initial transmission of User Equipment (UE) is transmitted through a Packet Data Control Channel (PDCCH), at least two codewords are received from the UE and then decoded, one of a plurality of indicators, related to an operation of the UE, is determined based on decoding results of at least two codewords, the determined indicator is transmitted through a Physical Hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH), and at least one codeword is received that the UE generates and transmits based on the parameter required for initial transmission of the UE and the indicator related to the operation of the UE. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235627 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC INFORMATION EXCHANGE ON A MESH NETWORK IN A VEHICLE - A method and system for dynamic information exchange on a mesh network in a vehicle. The dynamic information exchange includes determining if a vehicle needs immediate repair. And if so, automatically determining a nearest repair facility and sending a message to the nearest repair facility indicating the vehicle will be arriving shortly. The message also includes a list of parts required to repair the vehicle. The dynamic information exchange on the mesh network also includes information about vehicle movement, including, an accident impact, theft or illness or injury to an operator of the vehicle. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235628 | SIGNALING FORMAT FOR WLANS - A method for wireless communication begins by determining whether legacy devices are within a proximal region of the wireless communication. The method continues, when at least one legacy device is within the proximal region, formatting a frame to include: a legacy preamble; a signal field; an extended preamble; at least one additional signal field; at least one service field; an inter frame gap; and a data field. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235629 | DYNAMIC A-MSDU ENABLING - A dynamic A-MSDU enabling method is disclosed. The method enables the recipient of an aggregate MAC service data unit (A-MSDU) under a block ACK agreement to reject the A-MSDU. The method thus distinguishes between A-MSDU outside of the block ACK agreement, which is mandatory, from A-MSDU under the block ACK agreement, which is optional. The method thus complies with the 802.11n specification while enabling the recipient to intelligently allocate memory during block ACK operations. | 09-29-2011 |
20110243111 | Timing of Uplink Transmissions in a Multi-Carrier Communication System - A terminal with transmitter and receiver operates in a multi-carrier communication system and receives at least two downlink carriers. One or more timing advance commands are received, each associated with a group of one or more uplink carriers, each group being associated with one or more of the received downlink carriers. For each downlink carrier associated with one of the groups of uplink carriers, one is selected as a reference downlink carrier; the reference downlink carrier timing is ascertained; and a transmission time period is ascertained based on the timing of the downlink reference carrier and an offset specified by the timing advance command associated with the group of uplink carriers. The transmission time period comprises a start time and a stop time. Transmission is initiated at an earliest transmission start time of the ascertained transmission time periods and is ceased at a latest ascertained stop time. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243112 | WIRELESS LAN TERMINAL, A WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT AND A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A wireless LAN terminal according to the present invention comprises a communication unit which performs wireless communication with a wireless LAN access point, a wireless parameter request unit which transmits a probe request for requesting wireless parameters used for the wireless communication to the wireless LAN access point via the communication unit and a wireless parameter setup unit which receives a probe response from the wireless LAN access point as a response to the probe request of the wireless parameter request unit via the communication unit and sets up the wireless parameters included in the probe response. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243113 | GATEWAY APPARATUS AND PRESENCE MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - One aspect of the present invention will provide a first gateway apparatus configured to be connectable to a local network and an external network, to obtain presence information of a device apparatus on the local network and to provide the obtained presence information to a presence management apparatus on the external network, the first gateway apparatus comprising, an obtaining unit configured to obtain the presence information of the device apparatus, a transmitter configured to transmit the presence information to the presence management apparatus via the external network, and a receiver configured to receive, from the presence management apparatus, a suppression instruction of the presence information transmission, wherein the transmitte further configured to suppress the transmission of the presence information to the presence management apparatus after the reception of the suppression instruction. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243114 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR ENHANCED WIRELESS ACCESS SIGNALLING IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) ( | 10-06-2011 |
20110243115 | TERMINAL DEVICE, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING TERMINAL DEVICE - A terminal device, a method and an apparatus for configuring the terminal device are disclosed. The method includes: receiving a message sent by a service provider device, where the message includes configuration information about a terminal device; setting up a wireless connection to the terminal device by using a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) technology; and transmitting the configuration information about a terminal device to the terminal device through the wireless connection. The present invention brings the following benefits: receive a message that includes configuration information about a terminal device, and transmit the configuration information to the terminal device according to the message; therefore, the problem of insecurity and complexity involved in the provisioning for configuring the terminal device is resolved, and the configuration information for the terminal device is provisioned securely and simply. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243116 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal that performs wireless communication with other terminal includes an information holding unit that holds a communication channel setting of the wireless communication and information of a communication attribute of the wireless communication, a communication unit that receives the information of the communication attribute held by the other terminal from the other terminal by wireless communication using a communication channel that the communication channel setting held by the information holding unit represents before a logical connection of the wireless communication with the other terminal is established, and a control unit that controls the establishment process of the logical connection with the other terminal based on the information of the communication attribute received by the communication unit. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243117 | BASE STATION AND WIRELESS TERMINAL - A combination-information creating unit creates combination information for determining a maximum number of combinations or a maximum frame length according to a usable radio band and a modulation method and combination possibility information for indicating that a combination of frames is possible. A frame combining unit combines a plurality of frames received from an outside access line, based on the combination information, the combination possibility information, and predetermined packet information. A frame dividing unit divides a combined frame included in a received radio signal into individual frames. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243118 | Conferencing PSTN Gateway Methods And Apparatus To Facilitate Heterogeneous Wireless Network Handovers For Mobile Communication Devices - Techniques for use in a network processing component is for initially establishing, via a gateway, a voice call between a mobile device which operates in a wireless network and a destination device. A first connection leg of the voice call is to be established between the mobile device and a conference room of the gateway. The technique involves sending to the gateway a request message for establishing a second connection leg between the network processing component and the destination device, and then subsequently sending to the gateway a re-routing message for re-routing the second connection leg from the network processing component to the conference room. This causes a voice call having the first and the second connection legs to be initially established between the mobile device and the destination device via the gateway. | 10-06-2011 |
20110249658 | PRESENCE-BASED COMMUNICATION ROUTING SERVICE AND REGULATION OF SAME - Systems, methods, and user interfaces are provided for customized communication routing and regulation thereof. The routing of an incoming communication to a device, wireless or wireline, is based on a routing preference and a presence condition of a mobile device in a home or visited wireless environment served by a confined-coverage access point (AP). The routing preference can be configured for a device that operates in the home or visited wireless environment. The confined-coverage AP can be owned or leased by a subscriber associated with the incoming call or by a third party. Provisioning of routing of incoming call based on a third-party confined-coverage AP can be event-based. Add-on services can be provisioned and configured; screening of incoming call(s) based on screening rule(s) specific to an confined-coverage AP is provided. Customized communication routing to equipment that operates in a confined-coverage area served by a third-party confined-coverage AP can be cancelled. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249659 | CONTENTION FOR WIRELESS ACCESS USING TWO TYPES OF CHANNELS - In order to increase the transmission speed in a wireless network comprising at least a node, the method comprises the following steps:
| 10-13-2011 |
20110249660 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PPDU IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method of transmitting a data block in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes generating a data block used for multi-user transmission, the data block comprising a first control field and a data field for a plurality of users, the first control field indicating multi-user transmission of the data block, the data field comprising a plurality of data units, each data unit comprising a PSDU(PLCP(Physical Layer Convergence Procedure) Service Data Unit) for each user and padding bits which are appended to the PSDU for each user; and transmitting the data block to the plurality of users; wherein the number of the padding bits in each data unit is determined so that lengths of the plurality of data units are same and the number of the padding bits in each data unit is determined by N | 10-13-2011 |
20110249661 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A ROAMING SERVICE BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS AND SYSTEM THEREFOR - A roaming service providing method and a system thereof are provided. The communication network system providing an inter-network roaming service, includes: a packet service network providing a packet based service; a circuit service network providing a circuit based service; and a roaming gateway acquiring and authenticating a service profile of a first terminal in the packet service network when the first terminal requests registration to the circuit switching network, and converting and providing the service profile into a protocol of the circuit service network such that the circuit service network registers the first terminal. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249662 | HOME NETWORK USING WIRELESS MODULE - Methods and apparatus for implementing a home network including a wireless module. In one implementation, a home network includes: two or more host devices, where at least one host device includes a wireless module port, and where the host devices are connected in a local network; and a wireless module connected to the wireless module port of a host device, where the wireless module provides a wireless connection to an external network; where at least one host device is a consumer appliance. | 10-13-2011 |
20110255523 | PROCESS AND SYSTEM FOR CALCULATING DISTANCES BETWEEN WIRELESS NODES - Process and system for calculating distances between wireless nodes. The process includes, in order to determine the RTT between a node to be positioned and a reference node:
| 10-20-2011 |
20110255524 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR WIRELESS ACCESS LOCATION - A device with automatic wireless network access location includes an access table of WIFI hotspots. The device periodically acquires the longitude and latitude of the device by reading data signals travelling between base stations and the device when the device is not in a WIFI network, and verifies if the device enters a first plurality of areas centered at any entries of the access table within a predetermined radius based on the longitude and latitude acquired from the data signals or a location module of the device. Nearby WIFI hotspots are located accordingly. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255525 | Apparatus and Method to Provision Access Point Credentials into Mobile Stations - Some embodiments provide a method that sends information about a wireless communication system access point to a server. The method receives the access point information at the mobile station from the server. The method enables the mobile station to access the wireless communication system through the access point by using the access point information. In some embodiments, the access point information is sent from the server to the mobile station using a short message service (SMS) message. In some embodiments, the access point information includes the SSID and the MAC ID of the access point. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255526 | CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, AND INTERSTATION-COOPERATED COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A cellular mobile communication system, in which a plurality of base stations communicate with mobile stations, provides a retrieval unit, in which each base station retrieves the information regarding the radio communication status of each base station communicating with the predetermined mobile station, a decision unit, which makes a decision as to whether or not to permit interstation-cooperated communication with each base station based on the information, and a determination unit which determines the communication method adopted in the mobile station based on the decision result. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261794 | DATA TRANSMISSION UTILIZING ALTERNATE MEDIA - A data transmission method for transmitting data from a first communication device to a second communication device, a data transmission system and a communication device can be provided. An identification message associated with the data is sent from the first communication device to the second communication device via a first cellular network. The data is transmitted from the first communication device via a first medium, other than the first cellular network, coupled to a server of a service provider of the cellular network, for transmission of the data to the second communication device. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261795 | REDUNDANT CONNECTION OF RADIO NETWORK ELEMENTS TO A CENTRAL STATION - A radio communication system has a central station, at least one slave radio station), a first gateway, and a second gateway. The slave radio station is coupled to the central station by way of a first transfer path using the first gateway and by way of a second transfer path using the second gateway. A method is detailed that provides for transferring data between a slave radio station and a central station of a radio communication system. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261796 | Modem Apparatus for a Modular Wireless Communication System - A modem apparatus for a modular wireless communications system is presented. The modem apparatus is configured to provide wireless network access in accordance with a wireless communications standard such as LTE or UMTS. The modem apparatus comprises a hardware sub-system, a layered software sub-system as well as an interface sub-system. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261797 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device functioning as a wireless LAN access point includes: a first wireless LAN interface; a communication control section configured to carry out, using a first wireless LAN interface, wireless communication with wireless LAN clients on a first frequency ; an external device interface for connection with an external device; and a communication updating section configured to, when an external device having a second wireless LAN interface has been connected to the external device interface, cause the communication control section to carry out, concurrently with the wireless communication with wireless LAN client(s) using the first wireless LAN interface on the first frequency, wireless communication using the second wireless LAN interface with wireless LAN client(s) on a second frequency. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261798 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - An HGW mobile device | 10-27-2011 |
20110261799 | Signal strength guided intra-cell upstream data forwarding - Intra-cell upstream data forwarding is utilized in a wireless network such as a wireless local area network. A network forwarding path is determined based on the signal strength of an access point signal received at client stations within the network, referred to as the OASS. In particular embodiments, a station that is either originating or forwarding a frame inserts its own OASS into the frame before transmitting it and a client station that receives a frame forwards it only if its own OASS exceeds the frame-enclosed OASS, illustratively by at least a predetermined amount. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261800 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING NETWORK MOBILITY BASED ON IDENTIFIER-LOCATOR SEPARATION - A system and method for supporting network mobility based on identifier-locator separation, provides seamless session services to terminals inside the mobile network by enabling a variety of tunnel routers (home tunnel router, visit tunnel router, etc.) on network to store/manage mobile network mapping information for network mobility. The system for supporting network mobility based on identifier-locator separation includes: a mobile router configured to register mobile network identification information in a home tunnel router, and support communication with the home tunnel router, on behalf of mobile network nodes located in a home network; and a home tunnel router configured to support communication with a correspondent node by using tunnel router mapping information, and support communication with the mobile router by using mobile network mapping information. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261801 | High Speed Overlay Mode for Burst Data and Real Time Streaming (Audio) Applications - In a wireless 802.15.4 communication system ( | 10-27-2011 |
20110261802 | Wireless Networks for Vehicles - Vehicles having corresponding methods comprise a media source to provide digital data; a first wireless network station comprising a first transmitter to wirelessly transmit first packets of the digital data; a second wireless network station comprising a first receiver to wirelessly receive the first packets of the digital data; and a media player to reproduce media based on the first packets of the digital data wirelessly received by the second wireless network station. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261803 | HIGH DATA THROUGHPUT WLAN FRAME FORMAT - A frame format for high data throughput wireless local area network transmissions includes a first preamble segment, a second preamble segment, and a variable length data segment. The first preamble segment includes at least one training sequence and a high throughput channel indication. The second preamble segment includes a high data throughput training sequence when the high throughput channel indication is set and includes a null segment when the high data throughput training sequence is not set. | 10-27-2011 |
20110268094 | Systems and methods for uplink multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU MIMO) medium access and error recovery - Embodiments of systems and methods for uplink multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU MIMO) medium access and error recovery are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268095 | Method and Apparatus for Transmitting and Receiving a White Space Map Information in a Wireless Local Area Network System - A method and an apparatus transmitting and receiving a White Space Map information between two stations in a wireless local area network system are disclosed. For transmitting a white space map information from a first station to a second station in a regulatory domain where a licensed device and an unlicensed device are permitted to operate in a wireless local area network (WLAN), the method comprises: obtaining, at the first station, a list of available channels with a first channel granularity and maximum allowed transmission powers of the available channels from a regulatory database; and transmitting, from the first station, one of a beacon frame, a probe response frame and a white space map announcement frame comprising a white space map (WSM) element to the second station such that the second station operates as the unlicensed device using one or more channels having a second channel granularity and located only within the available channels identified by the WSM element, wherein the WSM element comprises a channel number field and a maximum power level field, wherein the channel number field indicates the list of available channels with the first channel granularity and the maximum power level field indicates maximum allowed transmission powers of the available channels. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268096 | DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES CODE POINT MIRRORING FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - The DSCP Mirroring System enables the automatic reuse of the Differentiated Services Code Point header by the user devices that are served by a network to enable delivery of wireless services to the individually identified user wireless devices and manage the various data traffic and classes of data to optimize or guarantee performance, low latency, and/or bandwidth without the overhead of the management of the Differentiated Services Code Point header. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268097 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADAPTIVE SYNCHRONIZATION OF TIMING INFORMATION GENERATED BY INDEPENDENTLY CLOCKED COMMUNICATION NODES - A system and method are provided for adaptive synchronization of timing information provided in communications messages transmitted between independently clocked communication nodes of a wireless communications network. The system and method include measures for collecting timestamps of messages generated by a plurality of the nodes, each timestamp being generated by one of the nodes relative to a local time reference thereof. A pairwise clock error is computed for at least one pair of nodes based upon a plurality of network messages passed therebetween. A global time reference is adaptively established for the timestamps responsive to the pairwise clock error. A plurality of mapping factors are defined each for translating from one local time reference to the global time reference. The mapping factors are selectively applied to corresponding ones of the timestamps. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268098 | Handling a registration timer to provide service continuity in IMS - The invention relates to a method for providing service continuity with respect to a registration of a mobile terminal, UE, at a control server of an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network, while a CS-communication session between the UE and a switching server, MSC, of a circuit-switched, CS, network is established. The control server comprises a registration timer which is used for initiating a termination of the registration of the UE at the IMS network, when the registration timer expires, wherein the control server updates the registration timer in dependence of a control information received from the MSC. The invention further relates to a MSC providing such service. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268099 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention relates to a method for communication between nodes in a wireless network further comprising a router node ( | 11-03-2011 |
20110274093 | Non-Carrier Dependent Femtocell and Related Methods - The methods and devices of the present disclosure may be used to enable non-carrier dependent, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) femtocells for in-service use with one or more mobile handheld devices. The VoIP femtocell generally includes at least one Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver; and program logic that, at least in part, performs a broadcast channel selection protocol and a handheld reselection protocol, so as to enable one or more mobile handheld devices to select the VoIP femtocell for in-service use. In certain embodiments, the broadcast channel selection protocol includes a configuration phase and a broadcast phase. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274094 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING A GEOLOCATION OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - The methods and apparatus described herein are used to perform indoor and urban geolocation positioning. One method of estimating a geolocation of one of a first wireless device or a second wireless device includes receiving, at the first wireless device, a signal from the second wireless device, determining, at the first wireless device, a physical characteristic of the received signal, and determining, at the first wireless device, a region on a map representing a geolocation of the first wireless device or the second wireless device based on the physical characteristic of the received signal, a state transition matrix and a state occupancy vector. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274095 | DEVICE FOR SETTING OF A SERVICE ZONE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICTION NETWORK, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING ZONE-BASED SERVICE USING THE DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION UNIT - Provided are a device for setting a service zone for a predetermined zone-based service provided by a mobile communication system for at least one mobile communication unit to which a mobile communication service is provided by the mobile communication system, the device comprising a local area wireless communication unit, wherein the local area wireless communication unit performs local area wireless communication with the mobile communication unit and the device sets a range in which the local area wireless communication is available as the service zone of the mobile communication unit, a method and a system for providing a zone-based service using the device, and a mobile communication unit for providing the zone-based service. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274096 | HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND EXPANDABLE ANTENNAS THEREOF - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, comprising: a wireless communication device; and an external mechanism; wherein the wireless communication device comprises: a wireless media access controller; an antenna selector, being a switch of a switchable antenna; an antenna connector, connecting the external mechanism; and a built-in antenna; wherein the external mechanism comprises: a support mechanism; and an external antenna supported by the support mechanism. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274097 | DETECTING AND REPORTING PHYSICAL-LAYER CELL IDENTIFIER COLLISIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Physical-Layer Cell Identifier (PCID) collisions may occur in a wireless network when two neighboring evolved Node Bs (eNBs) having different Global Cell Identifiers (GCID) select identical PCIDs. Evolved Node Bs may uniquely identify themselves by transmitting on a broadcast channel, such as a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH), a pattern of bits corresponding to the eNB's GCID. Individual User Equipments (UEs) may recognize the PCID collision by decoding the PBCH payload to identify different GCID-modulated payloads from two eNBs involved in the PCID collision. Alternatively, UEs may detect PCID collisions in the wireless network by monitoring Primary Synchronization Signals (PSS) and Secondary Synchronization Signals (SSS) on the PBCH for identical signals separated by a relatively large time offset. After detecting a PCID collision, the UEs may attempt by best effort to report the PCID collision, may report to a fallback eNB, or the UEs may use special resources on an uplink channel. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274098 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING PAIRING BETWEEN COORDINATOR AND DEVICE IN NETWORK, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING PAIRING BETWEEN DEVICES, NETWORK SYSTEM INCLUDING THE COORDINATOR AND THE DEVICES - Provided are methods and apparatuses for performing pairing. A method of performing pairing between a coordinator that belongs to a predetermined network and a device that does not belong to any network includes: broadcasting a first pairing information indicating that the coordinator is a device to perform pairing, or a beacon comprising the first pairing information; and receiving, from the device, second pairing information indicating that the device is a peer device to perform pairing, wherein the device transmits the second pairing information to the coordinator after the device associates with the predetermined network or while the device associates with the predetermined network. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274099 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting control information by a terminal in a wireless mobile communication system using multiple uplink carriers. The method for transmitting control information comprises: multiplexing a first control information to be assigned to a first uplink control channel and a second control information to be assigned to a second uplink control channel; and transmitting the multiplexed first and second control information via an uplink channel that is allocated to one of the multiple uplink carriers. Here, the first uplink control channel and the second uplink control channel are respectively allocated to different uplink carriers. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274100 | RESERVATION METHOD IN A MESH NETWORK, AND TRANSMISSION METHOD CARRYING OUT SUCH RESERVATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a method for reserving transmission time for transmission between a first mesh station and a second mesh station in a mesh network comprising at least one neighbor station, comprising the following steps: the first mesh station requesting information regarding existing reservations from the second mesh station, —the second mesh station sending an advertisement including its own reservation information as well as reservation information concerning the neighbor station, the first mesh station determining a new reservation based on the received advertisement and on its own reservation information. The invention also relates to a transmission method, carrying out the reservation method herein before described. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274101 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONNECTIONS MANAGEMENT - A management system for controlling a digital subscriber loop telecommunications network identifies radio frequencies used by wireless transmitters in the vicinity of each electrical connection, and controls transmission frequencies carried over the respective digital subscriber loops to prevent transmission on frequencies in which nearby radio transmitters are operating. | 11-10-2011 |
20110280227 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DISCOVER NETWORK CAPABILITIES FOR CONNECTING TO AN ACCESS NETWORK - Example methods and apparatus to discover network capabilities for connecting to an access network are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves sending a request to a first access network of a first network type. The request is addressed to a database and requests network connectivity information for connecting to a second access network of a second network type different from the first network type. The example method also involves receiving a response from the first access network. The response includes the network connectivity information for connecting to the second access network. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280228 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE NETWORK CAPABILITIES FOR CONNECTING TO AN ACCESS NETWORK - Example methods and apparatus to provide network capabilities for connecting to an access network are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves receiving a request at a first access network of a first network type. The request is addressed to a database and requests network connectivity information for connecting a wireless terminal to a second access network of a second network type different from the first network type. The example method also involves sending a response to the wireless terminal via the first access network. The response includes the network connectivity information for connecting the wireless terminal to the second access network. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280229 | ADVERTISEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION OF NOTIFICATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - An Access Point (AP) advertises the availability of notifications, and this advertisement may be received and interpreted by stations (STAs), both by associated STAs and by non-associated STAs. Upon being informed of the availability of the notification message, a STA may take action in order to receive the notification message from the AP. Alternatively, the STA may be able to identify the notification message by analyzing the advertisement. If the contents of the notification message comprise a control message, the STA may act on the control message in a way that influences the STA's behavior. If the contents of the notification message indicate restrictions imposed by the AP, the STA may determine, in view of the restrictions, not to attempt association with the AP. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280230 | Incorporation of a Notification in a Network Name - An Access Point (AP) advertises the availability of notifications, and this advertisement may be received and interpreted by stations (STAs), both by associated STAs and by non-associated STAs. Upon being informed of the availability of the notification message, a STA may be able to identify the notification message by analyzing the advertisement. If the contents of the notification message comprise a control message, the STA may act on the control message in a way that influences the STA's behavior. If the contents of the notification message indicate restrictions imposed by the AP, the STA may determine, in view of the restrictions, not to attempt association with the AP. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280231 | ADVERTISEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION OF NOTIFICATIONS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - An Access Point (AP) advertises the availability of notifications, and this advertisement may be received and interpreted by stations (STAs), both by associated STAs and by non-associated STAs. Upon being informed of the availability of the notification message, a STA may take action in order to receive the notification message from the AP. Alternatively, the STA may be able to identify the notification message by analyzing the advertisement. If the contents of the notification message comprise a control message, the STA may act on the control message in a way that influences the STA's behavior. If the contents of the notification message indicate restrictions imposed by the AP, the STA may determine, in view of the restrictions, not to attempt association with the AP. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280232 | Method of Arranging Packets in a Wireless communication System And Related Device - A method of arranging a packet in a wireless communication system includes a preamble sequence and a data sequence. The preamble sequence includes a legacy training field (L-TF), a legacy signal field (L-SIG), a very high throughput signal field (VHT-SIG), a very high throughput short training field (VHT-STF) and at least one very high throughput long training field (VHT-LTF). The method includes generating a first VHT-SIG field and a second VHT-SIG field according to the VHT-SIG field; and arranging the L-TF field, the L-SIG field, the first VHT-SIG field, the VHT-STF field, one of the at least one VHT-LTF fields, the second VHT-SIG field and the rest of the at least one VHT-LTF fields in a predetermined sequence. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280233 | WI-FI SERVICE METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WI-FI DEVICES - A Wireless-Fidelity (Wi-Fi) service method and system are provided. A beacon message and probe response message may contain a service information field storing device information. Wi-Fi devices can exchange information on supported functions with each other and one Wi-Fi device may identify functions supported by another Wi-Fi device. Hence, a Wi-Fi connection can be set up through automatic provisioning. The method includes receiving, by a first Wi-Fi device in non-Access Point (AP) mode, messages from nearby Wi-Fi devices operating in AP mode, analyzing a service information field of each received message, determining a second Wi-Fi device that is manufactured by the same manufacturer as the first Wi-Fi device and is capable of supporting a requested service, establishing a connection with the second Wi-Fi device through Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) based on automatic provision, and sending data associated with the requested service to the second Wi-Fi device for a Wi-Fi service. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280234 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DIRECT LINK SETUP - Establishing a direct link connection between subscriber stations in a wireless local area network (WLAN) comprises transmitting a direct link setup discovery request from an initiating station to an access point of the WLAN for distribution to one or more other stations, the discovery request including information concerning a capability of the initiating station for a direct link setup, receiving information from a receiving station among the one or more other stations, the received information concerning the capability of the receiving station for a direct link setup, and establishing a direct link connection with the receiving station based on the received information. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280235 | WIRELESS PERIMETER SECURITY DEVICE AND NETWORK USING SAME - A Radio Frequency based security system for providing security for wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN) that allows the creation and maintenance of arbitrarily shaped secure wireless access areas with boundaries around said wireless Local Area Network and prevents access to the said wireless LAN from outside the perimeter of the secure area. The system includes a plurality of perimeter Radio Frequency Sentry Devices (RFSDs) that are employed to establish the boundaries of said secure area around said wireless LAN. The wireless LAN being secured may be an industry standard IEEE 802.11a, 801.11b or 802.11g based wireless LAN or any other wireless LAN that uses packet based communication protocols. The said RFSDs may be stand-alone devices or they may be connected to a wired or wireless Local Area Network. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280236 | RFIC WITH CELLULAR AND RFID FUNCTIONALITY - An integrated circuit (IC) includes a baseband processing module and a radio frequency (RF) section. The baseband processing module is coupled to convert outbound data into amplitude modulation information and phase modulation information when the IC is in a cellular data mode and to convert an outbound radio frequency identification (RFID) signal into RFID amplitude modulation information when the IC is in an RFID mode. The RF section is coupled to generate an outbound RF data signal in accordance with the amplitude modulation information and the phase modulation information when the IC is in the cellular data mode and to generate an outbound RF RFID signal in accordance with the RFID amplitude information when the IC is in the RFID mode. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286437 | Wi-Fi Intelligent Selection Engine - Devices, systems, and methods are disclosed to offload the usage of a cellular network by intelligent selection of broadband network connections such as Wi-Fi access points. A Wi-Fi transceiver on a mobile device is activated when certain conditions are met, such as a time, location, recognition of a radiofrequency (RF) environment, etc. The conditions are correlated with a database of known locations in which a one or more Wi-Fi access points are determined to exist. The Wi-Fi transceiver on the mobile device is activated and commanded to connect to a particular Wi-Fi access point. Dynamic intelligence ensures that the appropriate connection method is used, and minimizes handovers to networks or access points that are unreliable or that are predicted to become inaccessible to the mobile device. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286438 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes an information processing apparatus capable of communicating via the Internet, an image reproducing apparatus for reproducing image data and displaying images reproduced from the image data, and a communication apparatus which is connected to the image reproducing apparatus and is provided with a global IP address. The information processing apparatus includes a communication establishing unit for establishing an IP-communication channel via the Internet linked with the communication apparatus provided with the global IP address, and an image transmitter for transmitting image data to the communication apparatus via the IP-communication channel. The communication apparatus includes an image receiver for receiving the image data transmitted by the image transmitter, and an image relaying unit for relaying the image data received by the image receiver to the image reproducing apparatus. The image reproducing apparatus reproduces the image data relayed by the image relaying unit and displays an image reproduced from the image data. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286439 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING LOCAL SWITCHING - A method and a system for implementing local switching are disclosed. The method includes: after receiving the uplink data sent by a sending MS, determining, according to information carried in the uplink data, information about location of a receiving Mobile Station (MS) that is to receive uplink data; and implementing, according to local switching rules that specify a local switching control mode, local switching for data transmitted between the sending MS and the receiving MS if determining, according to the information about location of the receiving MS and information about location of the sending MS, that the data transmitted between the sending MS and the receiving MS meets local switching conditions. In this way, network transmission resources are saved in the process of transmitting data, transmission delay is shortened, and data transmission efficiency is improved. | 11-24-2011 |
20110292919 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OVER NON-CONTIGUOUS CHANNELS - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of wireless communication over non-contiguous channels. For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit capable of transmitting symbols of a wireless communication packet to a wireless communication device over a plurality of non-contiguous wireless communication channels, wherein the wireless communication unit is to transmit, as part of a preamble of the packet, signaling information defining transmission characteristics over the plurality of non-contiguous channels. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292920 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WI-FI ACCESS TO ELECTRONIC DEVICES IN A PERSONAL AREA NETWORK (PAN) - A system and method for providing Wi-Fi access to electronic devices is disclosed. A plurality of electronic devices in a PAN is provided. A Wi-FI compatible server is associated with each electronic device in the PAN. The Wi-Fi compatible server associated with each electronic device is capable of configuring a HTML data for the associated electronic device. The HTML data associated with each electronic device is then provided to a WLAN device for providing Wi-Fi access to each electronic device in the PAN. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292921 | Multi-Communications-Media Network Device - A network device may include a processor executing higher layer processes including layers of a protocol stack higher than a media access layer, a first physical interface (PHY) coupled to a first communications medium, a second PHY coupled to a second communications medium, and a media access controller (MAC) to execute the media access layer of the protocol stack, the MAC coupled to the higher layer processes, the first PHY, and the second PHY. Media selection logic may select one of the first PHY and the second PHY for communication with a target device designated by a target MAC address provided by the higher layer processes. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292922 | WIRELESS ROUTER, WIRELESS ROUTING METHOD, AND WIRELESS ROUTING SYSTEM - A wireless router is provided, which includes: a wireless Access Point (AP) module, connected to a terminal equipment through a wireless link, and configured to implement wireless access of the terminal equipment; a station (STA) module, connected to a wireless AP in a fixed network through a wireless link, and configured to connect the terminal equipment to the Internet by using the wireless AP in a fixed network; and a wireless modem module, connected to an access device in a mobile network through a wireless link, and configured to connect the terminal equipment to the Internet by using the access device in a mobile network. According to the technical solutions, a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) STA module, an AP module, and a wireless modem chip construct a wireless router to provide not only an AP function but also an STA function. The terminal equipment may be connected to the wireless router, and selects a fixed network hot spot or a wireless modem to access the Internet. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292923 | Method and System for Addressing a Mobile Terminal - Means and methodology for a telecommunication network are pro-vided that allow using an IMEI of mobile terminal as destination or identification instead of the regular IMSI or MSISDN. This capability of the telecommunication network is provided by maintaining a set of coupled pairs of IMEI and IMSI/MSISDN. Operational messages in the telecommunication network having an IMEI address as destination or identification are translated by the appropriate IMSI or MSISDN depending on the message type, from a coupled pair having the same IMEI. Means is provided with a STP capable of maintaining the set of coupled pairs. Further several implementations are provided using the IMEI addressing capability. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292924 | NETWORK PROCESSING NODE AND METHOD FOR MANIPULATING PACKETS - A network processing node (e.g., MGW, MRFP) and method are described herein that can: (1) receive packets on a first heterogeneous link (e.g., wireless link); (2) manipulate the received packets based on known characteristics about a second heterogeneous link (e.g., “Internet” link); and (3) send the manipulated packets on the second heterogeneous link (e.g., “Internet” link). For example, the network processing node can manipulate the received packets by adding redundancy, removing redundancy, frame aggregating (re-packetizing), recovering lost packets and/or re-transmitting packets. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292925 | Network Device For Implementing Access Points And Multiple Client Stations - A wireless network device includes N access point (AP) modules having N BSSID's, where N is an integer greater than 1. The wireless network device includes a control module that communicates with the N AP modules. The control module stores the N BSSID's, a BSSID of an (N+1) | 12-01-2011 |
20110299510 | ANTENNA SHARING FOR RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS IN SAME FREQUENCY BANDS - A wireless device for receiving composite signals is disclosed. The wireless device includes an antenna. The wireless device also includes a first amplifier coupled to the antenna. The wireless device further includes a second amplifier coupled to the antenna. The wireless device also includes a first receiver. The wireless device further includes a second receiver. The wireless device also includes a first switch that couples the first receiver to the output of either the first amplifier or the second amplifier. The wireless device further includes a second switch that couples the second receiver to the output of either the first amplifier or the second amplifier. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299511 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF IMPLEMENTING A RADIO NETWORK IN UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Methods, systems, and devices are disclosed for wireless communication over unlicensed spectrum using a femto cell. In an implementation of the system, a dualmode mobile device adapted to communicate over a licensed frequency spectrum and over an unlicensed frequency spectrum is provided. The dual-mode mobile device detects the presence of a femto cell communicating over an unlicensed spectrum and in response, initiates a communication connection with the unlicensed spectrum femto cell. Subsequently, the connection over a license spectrum may be disconnected upon successful establishment of the connection over the unlicensed spectrum. In yet another implementation, a femto cell communicating over an unlicensed spectrum may be adapted to communicate with a mobile switching center and/or with a voice over IF switch. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299512 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MODE SWITCHING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a communication device including a first communication unit for performing communication by a communication scheme, the communication scheme being for applying voltage from a signal electrode that is in contact with or that is brought into proximity of a human body, generating an electric near field on a human body surface and performing transmission, a second communication unit different from the first communication unit, a switching signal detection unit for detecting, from signals intermittently received by the first communication unit, a mode switching signal for switching the second communication unit from a power save mode to a normal mode, and a switching control unit for switching the second communication unit from the power save mode to the normal mode in a case the mode switching signal is detected by the switching signal detection unit. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299513 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A mobile station apparatus | 12-08-2011 |
20110299514 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME USING CHANNEL BONDING IN WIRELESS LAN - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting a data frame using channel bonding in a wireless local area network in which high throughput (HT) stations and legacy systems coexist. The method includes adding a legacy format physical layer header including information, which indicates that a medium is being used while a frame exchange sequence is performed with respect to the HT format data frame, to the HT format data frame, transmitting the HT format data frame with the physical layer header by using channel bonding, and broadcasting the legacy format CF-End frame through a plurality of channels used in the channel bonding. Accordingly, after a frame exchange sequence is completed, the legacy stations which use channels used in the channel bonding can participate in a fair contention for medium access. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299515 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING WLAN COMMUNICATIONS USING AN ESSID CREATED BASED ON A PREDETERMINED ALGORITHM AND A DOMAIN NAME - One method in a mobile communication device for use in establishing communications between the mobile communication device and a wireless local communication network (WLAN) involves identifying a domain name of the WLAN; performing, in the mobile communication device, a predetermined algorithm with use of the domain name, for creating an extended service set identifier (ESSID) which includes at least a portion of the domain name of the WLAN; and associating with an wireless access point of the WLAN with use of the ESSID for accessing communication services in the WLAN. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299516 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PREVENTING PLURALITY OF STATIONS IN WLAN FROM COLLIDING WITH EACH OTHER WHEN ATTEMPTING TO ACCESS MEDIUM - A method and apparatus for preventing a plurality of stations in a wireless local area network (WLAN) from colliding with each other when accessing a medium are provided. In the method, an access point (AP) determines the transmission capabilities of a plurality of stations in a basic service set (BSS) of the AP, determines the format of control frames or data frames which have a high throughput (HT) format to be used in the BSS of the AP, and notifies the stations of the result of the determination. Therefore, it is possible to adaptively choose and use an optimum method of preventing a plurality of stations in a WLAN from colliding with each other when accessing a medium according to the circumstances in a WLAN by referencing the transmission capabilities of a plurality of stations in the WLAN. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299517 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FACILITATING HIGH THROUGHPUT CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Embodiments include systems and methods for frame tunneling in a wireless communications system comprising digital beam forming. Embodiments comprise a first and second frame control field with the second frame control field comprising a High Throughput Control (HTC) enabling field. If the HTC enabling field is enabled, then an HTC field is sent. | 12-08-2011 |
20110305227 | ACCESS POINT SYSTEMS - Wireless local area networks may be established between devices. Each device may include wireless interfaces. A first device may include an infrastructure interface that supports an interface link with access point equipment on a given channel. The first device may listen for probe requests from a second device on the given channel. The second device may send probe requests on a series of channels in single-channel increments. When the second device sends the probe request on the given channel, the first device may receive the probe request. Each probe request may include an information element. The first device may extract the information element from a received probe request and may compare the extracted information element to a predetermined stored information element. If there is match, an association process may be used to establish a wireless link between the first and second devices. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305228 | BEACON TRANSMISSION TECHNIQUES IN DIRECTIONAL WIRELESS NETWORKS - Techniques for the generation of beacons are disclosed. For instance, embodiments may establish a delay time that is based at least on a directional beacon transmission characteristic of a wireless communications device. In turn, embodiments may determine whether a beacon transmission is received from a remote device during a time period. This time period begins at a start of a beacon interval in a distributed wireless communications network, and has a duration of the delay time. When a beacon transmission is not received from a remote device during the time period, one or more directional beacon transmissions may be sent upon completion of the time period. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305229 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATION CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Provided is an association control method for maximizing a message in message (MIM) function in a WLAN environment. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, when all SINR values of transmission links to two or more first clients associated with the first access point are equal to or more than a predetermined capture threshold, SINR value of a transmission link to a second client associated with the second access point is less than the capture threshold, and at least one of the first clients, referred to as a third client group, can be associated with the second access point, associations are modified so that the third client group is associated with the second access point to enable concurrent transmission. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305230 | WiMAX Integrated Network Server - A Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) integrated network server is disclosed. The WiMAX integrated network server is integrally includes an Access Service Network Gateway (ASN-GW), an Authentication Authorization Accounting (AAA) connected to the ASN-GW, and a Home Agent (HA). The ASN-GW follows the WiMAX standard, manages a mobile station connected to a base station, and provides connection paths connected to a network. The AAA authenticates the mobile station to be connected to the network. The HA provides a Mobile IP service to guarantee the mobility of the mobile station. The WiMAX integrated network server includes a separate data processing unit, which makes it possible to rapidly process data. The WiMAX integrated network server can independently manage communication among the mobile stations connected thereto, separately from an external network. The WiMAX integrated network server does not require additional equipment, which reduces the installation space and costs. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305231 | Communication System for Short Range Reliable Information Transfer - The invention is concerned with providing a wireless transmitting and receiving system such that an information stream may be exchanged in both directions over a relatively short range and with a high level of robustness and tolerance to propagation conditions. Several applications are envisaged, such as a hand-off internet radio system in which the user equipment may resemble a traditional domestic analogue radio set combining features of robustness and high audio quality but able to play audio streams from internet radio stations, talking books and encoded music together with a transmitting command system. Other envisaged applications include robust tracking and location systems, range extension of wireless systems such as WiFi, Bluetooth and a robust video streaming system. The unlicensed low power Instrument Scientific Medical (ISM) and Short Range Devices (SRD) frequency bands are well suited to be used by the invention. The invention matches the baseband bandwidth and number of baseband channels to the propagation conditions of the wireless link, provides low peak to average spectral power density and automatic error correction without synchronisation dependency. These features make the invention extremely tolerant to the high variability in propagation conditions which are commonly experienced in indoor wireless reception. wireless hand-off transmitting and receiving system such that a radio station streamed over the internet may be received wirelessly using a receiver which to the user may resemble a traditional domestic analogue radio set combining features of robustness and high audio quality. A return communication channel provides an automatic means of adapting to changing propagation conditions of the wireless link as well as providing the user with the ability to control the information being received. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305232 | Wireless system protocols for power-efficient implementation of star and mesh wireless networks with local and wide-area coverage - A communication system that allows communication devices to synchronize the transfer of data to allow the devices to wirelessly and efficiently communicate in a star or mesh network. The communication system operates in the presence of other communication systems noise sources using a spread spectrum frequency hopping transmission scheme to efficiently generate adaptive frequency hopping patterns that are unique to the members of the wireless network based on a network identification code. The communication system employs a predictive retrieval of data for transmission from one device storing the data to a requesting device. A communication device transfers communication from a first network to a second network when the device has been moved beyond the range of the first network, where the second network is in communication with at least one other member device of the first network. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305233 | COEXISTENT CHANNEL ACCESS METHOD - According to an embodiment of present invention, a method for transmitting a coexistent data stream, the method including: transmitting coexistent data stream transmission information including transmission power information of a first data stream targeted for a first station and transmission power information of a second data stream targeted for a second station in an environment in which the first station, a legacy station, coexists with a second station, a station supporting a wireless local area network (WLAN) system evolved further than the first station; and transmitting, by an access point (AP), the first and second data streams to the second station and the first station, wherein the AP transmits the first data stream with a higher transmission power level than that of the second data stream according to the coexistent data stream transmission information. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305234 | NETWORK POSITIONING SYSTEM AND TERMINAL POSITIONING DEVICE - A terminal positioning device ( | 12-15-2011 |
20110305235 | FLEXIBLE MOBILE IP FOREIGN AGENT ARCHITECTURE FOR ENABLING CONVERGED SERVICES - A method and apparatus for flexible Mobile IP foreign agent architecture for enabling converged services are described herein. According to one embodiment of the invention, a packet is received over a circuit bound with a converged services domain of a network element. The converged services domain enables forwarding of wired and wireless traffic to a plurality of destination network elements. Upon determining that the circuit is capable of carrying Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) packets, the packet is processed according to an entry in a Mobile IP forwarding information base upon determining that the packet has a corresponding entry in the Mobile IP forwarding information base, and the packet is processed according to a different entry in an IP forwarding information base upon determining that the packet does not have an entry in the Mobile IP forwarding information base. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 12-15-2011 |
20110310863 | Arrangement for controlling access to data network - A soft AP module that is installed in the subscriber device is adapted to assign preselected ports numbers as part of its network address translation process. Those port numbers are registered to be used solely for this purpose, port numbers that are registered to applications that are seldomly used, or port numbers in the range 49152-65535. One or more modules in the service provider's facilities analyze the packets that pass through the service provider's facilities. Each module detects the aforementioned predetermined port numbers in the analyzed packets and thus identifies the network load that is attributed to devices the employ the W | 12-22-2011 |
20110310864 | INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods, devices, and systems for information distribution in a wireless communication system is provided. In one embodiment, a method of information distribution in a wireless communication system comprises receiving an information advertisement signal by a propagator node, wherein said information advertisement signal identifies information available from a distributor node; storing said information advertisement signal by said propagator node in a distributor routing table; and forwarding said information advertisement signal by said propagator node to another propagator node, a selector node, or both. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310865 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ACCESS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION USING PREDICTED LOCATIONS - Example methods and apparatus to access network connectivity information based on predicted future locations of wireless terminals are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves predicting at least one future location of a wireless terminal. The example method also involves requesting at least first and second network connectivity information sets for connecting to at least one access network providing wireless communication coverage at the at least one future location. The first network connectivity information is associated with a first geographic location, and the second network connectivity information is associated with a second geographic location. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310866 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO ACCESS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH PREDICTED TIMES - Example methods and apparatus to access network connectivity information associated with predicted times are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves receiving network connectivity information and an associated start time indicative of a predetermined time commencing a requirement to use the network connectivity information for connecting a wireless terminal to an access network. The example method also involves in response to a time event based on the start time, using the network connectivity information to enable a connection change between the wireless terminal and the access network. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310867 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PREDICT ROUTING TO MAINTAIN CONNECTIVITY OVER A GEOGRAPHIC AREA - Example methods and apparatus to predict routing to maintain connectivity over a geographic area are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves selecting network connection configurations for subsequent connections of a wireless terminal to access networks and generating a listing of network connection locations based on the selected network connection configurations. The example method also involves sending the listing of network connection locations to a geographic navigation program to enable selecting a geographic route based on the network connection locations. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310868 | P-GW/GGSN ISSUED PAGING REQUESTS - Example embodiments presented herein provide a system and method enabling optimized communication in a wireless network, thereby reducing network resource utilization. Example embodiments provide a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) network node or a Gateway General Packet Radio Service Support Node (GGSN) network node to initiate a paging procedure. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310869 | ENHANCING PACKET AGGREGATION PERFORMANCE IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method of communications for a coexisting wireless network including a wireless combination (combo) device communicating via a first wireless network and second wireless network, and a first wireless device on the first network. During an activity interval for the second network (i) a transmit (Tx) time interval is longer in duration than a Tx packet duration and/or (ii) a receive (Rx) time interval is longer in duration than a Rx packet duration to provide remaining time. A frame aggregated packet is used on the first network that includes a plurality of data packets and a dummy packet or spoofing so that the frame aggregated packet is extended in time or indicates an extension sufficient to overlap the Tx time interval or Rx time interval. The combo device transmits or receives an acknowledgement (ACK) on the first network during the activity interval for the second wireless network. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310870 | HYBRID TIME AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN CSI FEEDBACK SCHEME - In a downlink multi-user multiple input multiple output (DL MU-MIMO) system, channel state information (CSI) feedback duration may strongly affect media access control (MAC) efficiency. While a time domain compression may give a significant reduction in feedback duration, the time domain compression may have complexity issues at the station (STA). In particular, for time domain compression, a large complex matrix multiplication may be required at the client to estimate a cyclic prefix (CP) length impulse response, which best models the frequency response of the channel. Embodiments of the invention comprise a hybrid scheme that may reduce the above complexity while maintaining significant compression gains. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310871 | NETWORK TIME RESERVATION CANCELLATION - Methods and systems that support, for example, canceling or trimming reservations of a shared communication medium are described. In one embodiment, a method that adapts a network time reservation in a communication network may include, for example, one or more of the following: transmitting a preamble field; transmitting a legacy signal field; transmitting at least one paired field, each paired field comprising a signal field and a protocol data unit; and generating an interframe gap. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310872 | PUBLIC ACCESS POINT - The invention instantiates a Personal VLAN bridge, using IEEE Std. 802.11 elements. The result is a bridge, referred to as a public access point, that is better suited for implementing public wireless data networks than the IEEE Std. 802.11 architecture. The invention also provides a location-update protocol for updating the forwarding tables of bridges that connect public access points together. The invention further provides a method for more controlled bridging, which is referred to as fine bridging. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310873 | System for transmitting high throughput data between multiple devices - A system for transmitting data directly between a plurality of client network devices in a network having an Access Point (“AP”) device separate from the plurality of client network devices is disclosed. The system may include a first client network device having a first client (“STA”) module and a second client network device of the plurality of client network devices. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310874 | Methods and Apparatus for Overlapping MIMO Physical Sectors - A system for communicating with wireless devices. The systems includes radio groups whose MIMO physical sectors overlap. The MIMO physical sectors communicate using different channels. The MIMO physical sectors overlap to form an area of overlap. Each radio group includes a phased array and radios. Radios are selectively coupled to the phased array. The physical sector of the phase array provides the MIMO physical sector. The phase array operates as a MIMO antenna. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310875 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PRESENTING LISTS OF WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK PROFILE INFORMATION - A method for selecting a wireless local area network (“WLAN”) for a wireless device, comprising: generating a first list of WLAN identifiers for a first group of one or more wireless local area networks (“WLANs”) accessible at a first geographic location and storing the first list in the wireless device; generating a second list of WLAN identifiers for a second group of one or more WLANs accessible at a second geographic location and storing the second list in the wireless device; selecting one of the first and second lists as an active list; and, scanning for WLANs identified by the active list to identify an available WLAN for the wireless device. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310876 | SYSTEM FOR APPLICATION SERVER AUTONOMOUS ACCESS ACROSS DIFFERENT TYPES OF ACCESS TECHNOLOGY NETWORKS - An Application Server Autonomous Access (ASAA) system for providing autonomous access to a wireless infrastructure by devices employing different types of access technology. The system includes a server, having an associated data storage device, for storing at least one policy, and a plurality of subnetworks, coupled to server, for providing access to the server. The plurality of subnetworks employ at least two different types of access technology. A plurality of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) are wirelessly coupled to at least one of the subnetworks. The server monitors the wireless coupling and, depending upon the at least one policy, switches the WTRUs between different ones of the subnetworks. | 12-22-2011 |
20110317673 | Method and Apparatus for Providing IPv6 Link-Layer Adaptation Over a Wireless Channel - A method and apparatus for providing IPv6 link-layer adaptation over a wireless channel are provided. The apparatus is configured to transmit and receive 6LoWPAN frames over a signaling channel of a wireless telecommunication system to provide IPv6 link-layer adaptation over the channel. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317674 | MULTI-CHANNEL COMMUNICATION STATION FOR COMMUNICATING A MULTI-CHANNEL PPDU AND METHODS OF REDUCING COLLISIONS ON SECONDARY CHANNELS IN MULTI-CHANNEL WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of a very-high throughput communication station and method for communicating on a primary channel and up to three or more secondary channels are generally described herein. Short-preamble detection may be performed during a contention window to detect packet transmissions on any one of the secondary channels starting within the contention window. Guard-interval detection is also performed during the contention window to detect a guard interval of a packet transmission on any one of the secondary channels. The short-preamble detection and the guard-interval detection may be performed concurrently during the contention window to determine if any of the secondary channels are busy. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317675 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - The embodiments of the present invention relate to an electronic device and a method of controlling the electronic device. When a mobile terminal enters into or comes out of a network environment including a plurality of electronic devices that may communicate with each other, the electronic device and the method of controlling the electronic device may play contents in association with such an event. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317676 | Block Interleaving Method and Block Interleaver Using the Same - A block interleaving method for interleaving data of a transmitter in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system supports a multi-input multi-output (MIMO) technique for transmitting data via a plurality of spatial streams. The block interleaving method includes when the transmitter transmits a plurality of data through the MIMO technique, determining an order of the plurality of data according to the following equation, | 12-29-2011 |
20110317677 | METHOD FOR MANAGING MOBILITY OF A MOBILE DEVICE WITHIN A NETWORK USING A PROXY MIPV6 PROTOCOL - Method for managing mobility of a mobile device (MS) within a network using a proxy MIPv6 protocol comprising MAG and LMA logical functions, wherein MAG issues a PBU to bind the mobile device (MS) with the LMA, a LMA-time being initialized and maintained within the LMA and the method comprising a relative time synchronization procedure between LMA and all of the MAG connected to it, said procedure providing that each MAG sends a PBU with specific semantics to request the LMA-time, the PBU acknowledgement (PBU-Ack) sent by the LMA including such LMA-time, said LMA-time being further maintained within each MAG, the method further comprising a binding procedure in which all of the MAG insert in each PBU sent a timestamp including the current maintained LMA-time. Upon receipt of a LMA-timestamped PBU from a MAG, the LMA sends a successful PBU-Ack if no other MAG currently binds the mobile device (MS) with the LMA or if the timestamp is newer than the one received from the MAG currently binding the mobile device (MS); an out of date PBU-Ack if the timestamp is not newer than the one received from the MAG currently binding the mobile device (MS). | 12-29-2011 |
20110317678 | Extended Private LAN - A virtual private network is provided across a Provider Link State Bridging (PLSB) network between a first node connected to a private LAN and a second node connected to a roaming device. The roaming device is authenticated. A successful authentication results in a Service Identifier for the VPN being sent to the second node. Connectivity between members of the VPN service instance is maintained as part of the PLSB Link State process for forwarding table maintenance, rather than by any form of explicit signalling. A single Customer Virtual Bridge/Virtual Switch Instance can be located at the first node to provide point-to-point connectivity to each roaming device. A virtual Residential Gateway function can be combined with the Customer Virtual Bridge/Virtual Switch Instance. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317679 | Access Point for Wireless Local Area Network - Embodiments of an access point for an expanded wireless local area network are described and depicted. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317680 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND PROGRAM - Even when a plurality of communication parameter providing devices exist, a communication parameter setting process is enabled. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317681 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, NETWORK LINKAGE METHOD AND PROGRAM THEREOF - A communication network system including a connectionless type communication network and a connection type communication network, wherein a communication device forming the communication network comprises a unit which transfers in-band control information to be exchanged on an in-band of the connectionless type communication network to other communication device through a virtual control link generated on an IP control network for controlling the connection type communication network and exchanges the in-band control information with other communication device, a unit which determines whether to generate a new connection for the connection type communication network based on the in-band control information to be exchanged, and a unit which generates a new connection for the connection type communication network in response to an instruction from the determination unit. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002646 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CALL ROUTING - Systems and methods for call routing are provided. Certain aspects disclose a system and method for call routing, where the call can originate from a hybrid mobile device capable of operating on either the traditional core mobile network or on a voice over Internet Protocol network. Regardless of which network is being accessed, the call can be routed to its intended destination. Other aspects disclose a system for providing a location of a hybrid mobile device. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002647 | Digital Surveillance - In one or more embodiments, one or more methods and/or systems described can perform establishing communication with a wireless access point via a mobile device coupled to a first network; receiving at least one message via the mobile device; determining at least one issue using the at least one message; isolating the at least one issue; and determining at least one resolution to the at least one issue. In one or more embodiments, isolating the at least one issue includes determining a side of a demarcation point that is associated with the at least one issue and/or determining at least one device associated with the at least one issue. For example, the at least one device can include the wireless access point, a network device used in providing communication to the wireless access point via a second network, or a device coupled to the wireless access point. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002648 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Using an extended reordering depth in order to avoid TSN reordering window stalling during a stop-and-wait HARQ-process of a multi-carrier operation in the downlink MAC-ehs protocol and in the uplink MAC-i/is protocol. The extended reordering depth corresponds to a reordering depth that is increased from the 32 sequence numbers obtained by a 6 bits TSN field, and it is based on the TSN of a data unit, and this TSN is indicated only in a header of the data unit. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002649 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, FEMTO-CELL BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A femto-cell base station acquires an IP address of a CS-dedicated relay device from a first management device, connects to the CS-dedicated relay device based on the acquired IP address of the CS-dedicated relay device, and establishes a first IPsec Tunnel between the femto-cell base station and the CS-dedicated relay device. The femto-cell base station also acquires an IP address of a PS-dedicated relay device from a second management device through the first IPsec Tunnel, connects to the PS-dedicated relay device based on the acquired IP address of the PS-dedicated relay device, and establishes a second IPsec Tunnel between the femto-cell base station and the PS-dedicated relay device. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002650 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is applied to a radio communication system having a mobile station and a plurality of base stations each of which communicates by a radio signal with a mobile station that is present in a cell of each of its own base stations. In the radio communication system of the present invention, each of the plurality of base stations has base station side control means that detects an IP address of a base station that is a sender of an interference signal from the radio signal if the radio signal received from a mobile station with which the own base station is communicating contains the interference signal, the IP address having been set to the interference signal. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002651 | Mobile Internet Access Point For Wireless LAN Terminals - A mobile Internet access point is disclosed that connects a wireless LAN terminal to a mobile Internet. The mobile Internet access point includes: a plurality of mobile Internet access units, a wireless LAN access unit, and a converting unit. The mobile Internet access units communicate with one or more base stations, respectively, and are connected to a mobile Internet. The wireless LAN access unit is connected to one or more wireless LAN terminals that can be connected to a wireless LAN and manages connected wireless LAN terminals. The converting unit converts wireless data, received by the wireless LAN access unit, into mobile Internet data following the protocol of the mobile Internet. The converting unit also converts mobile Internet data, received via the plurality of mobile Internet access units, into wireless LAN data following the protocol of the wireless LAN. Therefore, although one of the mobile Internet access units does not work, the remaining mobile Internet access units can continue communicating with the base stations, thereby providing services to the wireless LAN terminal without interruption. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002652 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING THE EFFICIENCY OF PACKET TRANSMISSION IN A MULTI-USER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system utilized in a wireless communication system transmitting and receiving a multi-user packet is disclosed. The communication system includes a transmitter and a plurality of users in communication therewith. The method and system comprise determining a lowest coding scheme for transmitting the packet; and deriving a coding rate for the efficient transmission of the packet from a standard coding rate by de-puncturing bits in the packet. A system and method in accordance with the present invention provides for an efficient utilization of packet length, and improves the reliability by improving SNR, by lowering the MCS, un-puncturing, and/or repetition. More efficient packed data rates are also provided and both Tx and Rx compute parameters independently. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002653 | MOBILE NODE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A technology is disclosed for a mobile device with multiple interfaces to make use of its multiple interfaces capability with Mobile IP. According to this technology, MN (Mobile Node) | 01-05-2012 |
20120002654 | NETWORK AND NODE FOR PROVIDING A SECURE TRANSMISSION OF MOBILE APPLICATION PART MESSAGES - According to the present invention a telecommunication network with a first domain (PLMN-A) comprising at least one mobile application part protocol instance is connected to a gateway node (MSEGA) which is adapted to send and receive mobile application part messages and which is connectable to a second domain. The telecommunication network is remarkable in that the gateway node (MSEGA) is adapted to receive a mobile application part message from the first domain, to convert the received mobile application part message obtaining a secured mobile application part message, and to send the obtained message to the second domain. The gateway node (MSEGA) is further adapted to receive a secured mobile application part message from the second domain, to extract an unsecured mobile application part message from the received secured mobile application part message and to send the extracted message to the first domain. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002655 | Wi-Fi Access Point Device and System - An access point device and system that offers Wi-Fi access and is easily integratable into its environment is provided. The access point device and system is advantageously well suited for integrating operative aspects of a Wi-Fi access point in a wall using, for example, standard switch and outlet boxes and/or standard wall plates. The access point device and system can advantageously be well suited for incorporating a wiring structure such as, for example, a | 01-05-2012 |
20120002656 | Clientless Mobile Subscribers with Seamless Roaming Over Scalable Wide Area Wireless Networks - System and method for seamless roaming over scalable wide area Wireless LAN networks (WAWLAN) with clientless mobile subscribers. A preferred embodiment comprises a wireless gateway (WG) coupled to one or more access points in a wireless network to form a wireless cluster (WC), a network access gateway (NAG) coupled to a wired network, and a switch coupled to the WG and the NAG. Each wireless cluster is a Wireless LAN Network (WLAN) with homogenous or heterogeneous network architecture. The WG detects mobile nodes in a wireless cluster and tracks mobile node location in the wireless cluster. The NAG is an anchor point for mobile nodes in the WAWLAN and maintains a fixed source of information about each mobile node regardless of their mobility. The switch provides connectivity between the NAG and the WG. Seamless roaming across Wireless LAN network boundary by mobile subscribers without requiring special mobility enabling client software. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002657 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system including: a base station apparatus; and a mobile station apparatus, the mobile station apparatus includes: a receiver which receives data signal transmitted from the base station apparatus; a controller which switches a unit of grouping to the data signal and groups the data signal, according to one parameter or a combination of a plurality of parameters out of a type of a channel, a type of modulation scheme and encoding rate, an assigned resource amount, or a number of transmitting antennas of the mobile station apparatus, when an ACK signal or an NACK signal to the data signal is transmitted; and a transmitter which transmits the ACK signal or the NACK signal in each the group, and the base station apparatus includes: a transmitter which transmits the data signal; and a receiver which receives the ACK signal or the NACK signal. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002658 | Signal Encoding Method and Device, Method for Encoding Joint Feedback Signal - A signal encoding method and device and a method for encoding a joint feedback signal are provided. The signal encoding method includes the following steps. When two carriers are configured with multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO), Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request-Acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) signals of the two carriers are combined into a joint feedback signal. The joint feedback signal is mapped into a codeword according to a predetermined mapping relationship between signals and codewords. Therefore, through the method for combining and encoding feedback signals of two carriers for transmission on a code channel in a dual cell (DC)-MIMO mode, bit error ratio (BER) and detection error cost are decreased, power overhead is saved, and a cubic metric (CM) value of the system is not affected, thereby enhancing the performance of the system. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002659 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - To provide a gateway apparatus, a communication control method, and a communication control program, capable of implementing a hard handover between base stations that are controlled by the same base station control apparatus. A gateway apparatus | 01-05-2012 |
20120008603 | CONTENTION BASED PERIOD BEAMFORMING - Contention based period beamforming includes the establishment of synchronized communications between a beamforming initiator and a beamforming responder to precisely define a start time for beamforming training. Synchronization between the beamforming initiator and beamforming responder begins with the sending of control information to the responder so that the start of the beamforming process will be synchronized. With beamforming training synchronized, beamforming is initiated using the sector sweep process. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008604 | ENABLEMENT FOR REALLOCATED BANDWIDTH ENVIRONMENTS - A system for managing the enablement of beaconing in apparatuses operating in reallocated bandwidth corresponding to a geographic area. For example, apparatuses may initially determine whether they desire to operate as beaconing-type apparatuses or non-beaconing-type apparatuses. The apparatuses may then transmit enablement request frames comprising at least apparatus identification information and the previously determined desired beaconing or non-beaconing apparatus type. Apparatuses may then receive enablement request frames that at least designate the apparatuses as first tier beaconing apparatuses, second tier beaconing apparatuses or non-beaconing apparatuses. The apparatuses may then proceed to configure themselves based on the enablement information. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008606 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication system includes a first wireless device, a second wireless device, a determining device and an executing unit. The first wireless device is arranged for receiving a first signal, and the second wireless device is arranged for transmitting a second signal, where the first wireless device and the second wireless device conform to different communication standards, respectively. The determining device may determine a signal quality of the first signal received by the first wireless device, and accordingly generates a determining result. The executing unit refers to the determining result to select a target coexistence mechanism, which is shared by the first and second wireless devices, from a plurality of candidate coexistence mechanisms. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008607 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MAINTAINING A CONNECTION WITH A FIRST NETWORK WHILE PROCESSING COMMUNICATIONS WITH A SECOND NETWORK BY A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention provides a method and device that communicate with a 802.11-class network and processes communications with a Bluetooth network. A passive beacon scan is conducted in a channel of a 802.11-class network through a series of spaced segments, such that the series of spaced segments represent a timeframe of a notional beacon period that would span a continuous period for the 802.11-class network; and data is transmitted from the communication device to the Bluetooth network between two of consecutive segments of the series of spaced segments. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008608 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A SECTORED SERVICE AREA - A access point (AP) during wireless communication with at least one wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), transmits a beacon signal periodically among a plurality of sectors, each sector having its own sector identity, the beacon signal being periodically received at least once in a beacon period and the beacon period comprising a plurality of beacon service periods for all sectors. The AP determines a scheduling value to indicate a number of inactive beacon periods for a first sector to at least one WTRU located in the first sector. The scheduling value is transmitted with the sector identity for the first sector, such that a variable beacon period is established for the first sector, enabling the at least one WTRU located in the first sector to enter a sleep mode for an adjustable period of time. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008609 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR FEEDING BACK AND RECEIVING PRE-CODING CONTROL INDICATION INFORMATION - The present invention relates to the field of wireless network communications, and provides a method and a device for receiving and sending Pre-coding Control Indication (PCI) information in uplink Multiple-Input Multiple Output (MIMO) transmission or uplink Closed Loop Transmit Diversity (CLTD) transmission, so as to solve a problem that the uplink MIMO communication from a terminal to a Base Station (BS) is unable to be realized in the prior art. A BS transmitting method includes carrying a code sequence, which represents PCI information, in a feedback channel of a BS. The beneficial effect of the present invention is: by feeding back the PCI information, the terminal realizes the maximization of a block length supported by an existing channel condition after the uplink MIMO is introduced, so as to improve an uplink transmission rate. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008610 | MIXED MODE PREAMBLE FOR MIMO WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A preamble of a frame for a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication for a first transmit antenna of the MIMO communication includes a legacy preamble portion in accordance with a legacy wireless communication protocol. The preamble of the frame for the MIMO wireless communication for the first transmit antenna also includes a current protocol preamble portion in accordance with a protocol of the MIMO wireless communication. The preamble of a frame for at least a second antenna of the MIMO communication includes a cyclically shifted legacy preamble portion for the frame. The preamble of the frame for the MIMO wireless communication for the second transmit antenna also includes a second current protocol preamble portion in accordance with a protocol of the MIMO wireless communication. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008611 | Method And System For Providing Wireless Service According To Multiple Wireless-Communication Protocols On A Single Radio-Frequency (RF) Carrier - Methods and systems are provided for providing wireless service using multiple protocols on a single radio-frequency (RF) carrier. According to an embodiment, a low-cost Internet base station (LCIB) provides wireless service on an RF carrier using a first wireless-communication protocol and provides wireless service on the RF carrier using a second wireless-communication protocol, where providing wireless service on the RF carrier using the first wireless-communication protocol and providing wireless service on the RF carrier using the second wireless-communication protocol occur at different times. The LCIB may alternate between providing wireless service using the first wireless-communication protocol and providing wireless service using the second wireless-communication protocol. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008612 | Mobile WLAN Gateway - A technique for operating a mobile station as wireless local-area network (WLAN) gateway. The mobile station is provided with a gateway application to control the following operations: activating the WLAN means as a WLAN base station capable of communicating with at least one WLAN terminal over a WLAN network; creating a network identifier for the WLAN base station; assigning an internet protocol address for the at least one WLAN terminal; resolving domain name service (DNS) queries in cooperation with an external DNS service system; assigning at least one port number for each protocol supported by the gateway application; and tunneling internet traffic between the at least one WLAN terminal and an internet host over the broadband connection. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008613 | Feedback Method For Performing A Feedback By Using A Codebook In Mimo System - A feedback method for performing a feedback by using a codebook in Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) system includes receiving, by the mobile station, a MIMO mode type information, generating feedback information by using the codebook selected according to the MIMO mode type information, and transmitting the feedback information to the base station. The codebook includes a SU-MIMO codebook and a MU-MIMO codebook, and the MU-MIMO codebook is formed by extracting codebook elements from the SU-MIMO codebook. As a result, the method maximizes a system throughput simultaneously while effectively reducing an amount of feedback information. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008614 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A wireless communication system of the present invention includes a plurality of cells in each of which a base station apparatus (BS) is provided, the base station apparatuses (BS) being connected to one another via a network, each of the base station apparatuses (BS), including: an interference quantity information storage section ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120008615 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided is a wireless communication technique capable of supporting communication using a single component carrier, and communication using a plurality of component carriers. The communication using the plurality of carriers is characterized by using a different signal sequence in each of the carriers, and using the signal sequences as reference signals. The present invention makes it possible to cope with the communication employing a single component carrier and the wireless communication employing a plurality of the component carriers. Further, PAPR of the reference signals can be made small because there is no possibility that the identical CAZAC sequence is used among the component carriers when a plurality of the component carriers are employed. | 01-12-2012 |
20120014360 | Method And Apparatus For Interference Management In Heterogenous Networks - A method is provided a wireless system for providing small “guard” cells in a heterogeneous network at locations proximate to privately-maintained HeNB (or femto) cells in the heterogeneous network. More particularly, the methodology of the invention addresses the problem of a mobile user in a heterogeneous network located nearby to a privately maintained HeNB cell in the heterogeneous network, and the inherent interference created for the HeNB cell by the necessity of the mobile user having to transmit and receive communications from a distant public macro eNB. By deploying small public “guard” cells in the macro cell proximate to the private HeNB cells, such a public mobile terminal is enabled to communicate with the public small cell at generally lower power than would have been necessary for communication with the distant macro eNB, with a resulting reduction in interference for the nearby HeNB cell. The FL interference between the macro cell and the HeNBs is also mitigated. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014361 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND IDLE STATE OPERATION METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication system and method for operation of the wireless communication system in idle mode is provided to avoid downlink inter-cell interferences. The idle state operation method of a base station for a wireless communication according to the present invention includes setting a first discontinuous transmission cycle and a first transmission transition period; transmitting downlink signals at the first discontinuous transmission cycle within the first transmission transition period; setting a second discontinuous transmission cycle and a second transmission transition period when the first transmission transition period ends; and transmitting the downlink signal at the second discontinuous transmission cycle within the second transmission transition period. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014362 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR SELECTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ROUTE - An effective velocity estimation section | 01-19-2012 |
20120014363 | SIMULTANEOUS WIRELESS SUPPORT IN SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO - A system and method for providing the ability to discover the capabilities of a user's computer to determine whether it is capable of supporting more than one wireless protocol simultaneously is provided. A computing device's capabilities (including, for example, hardware and/or software capabilities) is checked to determine if it supports at least two specific wireless protocols and checking a computing device's capabilities (including, for example, hardware and/or software capabilities) is checked to determine if it supports both wireless protocols simultaneously. The techniques for determining the computing device's compatibility may include comparing lists of protocol requirements to lists of system capabilities and/or generating test signals by the system according to the protocol. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014364 | WLAN TRANSMITTER HAVING HIGH DATA THROUGHPUT - A wireless local area network (WLAN) transmitter includes a baseband processing module and a plurality of radio frequency (RF) transmitters. The processing module selects one of a plurality of modes of operation based on a mode selection signal. The processing module determines a number of transmit streams based on the mode selection signal. The processing of the data further continues by converting encoded data into streams of symbols in accordance with the number of transmit streams and the mode selection signal. A number of the plurality of RF transmitters are enabled based on the mode selection signal to convert a corresponding one of the streams of symbols into a corresponding RF signal such that a corresponding number of RF signals is produced. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014365 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication network includes a radio communication device which is installed in a mobile communication network to carry out radio communication with a mobile terminal, a gateway which relays a communication from the terminal device from the radio communication device to the Internet, and a node which carries out an authentication process in response to a connection request from the mobile terminal. The gateway is installed in the radio communication device or in a carrier network. The node establishes a direct tunnel between the radio communication device and the gateway, so that the mobile terminal is connected to the Internet via the direct tunnel and via the mobile communication network. Thus, it is possible to reduce traffic simply passing through the carrier network. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014366 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT - A method for transmitting a relatively large amount of data and an apparatus supporting the same are proposed. The data transmission method includes constructing a MAC PDU including an Advanced Generic MAC Header (AGMH) with a first length field, a MAC PDU Length Extended Header (MLEH) with a second length field, and payload, and transmitting the MAC PDU to a receiver. The first length field and the second length field are used for calculating a total length of the MAC PDU. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020339 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICE AND WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE THEREOF - A wireless network system and a wireless access point (AP) device and a wireless terminal device thereof are provided. The wireless network system includes at least a wireless AP device and at least a wireless terminal device. Each wireless AP device broadcasts a beacon including a load state content of the wireless AP device. Each wireless terminal device receives beacons of all wireless AP devices, and ranks load states of all wireless AP devices in a load list according to at least CPU utilization rates in the load state contents of all wireless AP devices respectively. When a wireless terminal device intends to establish a connection with one of the wireless AP devices, the wireless terminal devices searches through the load list to select a wireless AP device being in a low load state, and transmits a connection request message to the selected wireless AP device. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020340 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS PASSWORDS - The present disclosure provides an access node for transferring and/or assigning network passwords. The access node includes a first interface for sending and receiving communication of a first type to and from a first node operating in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The access node also includes a second interface for sending and receiving communication of a second type to and from a second node in a mobile network, such as a GSM/GPRS network. The access node further includes a short messaging service (SMS) module for sending and receiving. SMS messages to the second node carrying an OTP allocated. The access node also includes a mechanism to verify a precondition before the OTP is sent to the second node. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020341 | Method for downloading predetermined entertainment content to customers - A method is provided for providing digital entertainment to a customer having a mobile router comprising a first wireless local area network having a customer mobile device coupled thereto. The method comprises: providing a source of the digital entertainment data; coupling the source to the customer mobile device via the router and the first wireless local area network; operating the source with the router such that the source automatically downloads predetermined digital entertainment data to the customer mobile device via the wireless local area network and the router. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020342 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING TERMINAL AND METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND METHOD - The present invention relates to a communication system and method, an information processing terminal and method, and an information processing device and method which enable simple and secure restricted access. When a PDA | 01-26-2012 |
20120020343 | GATEWAY CONNECTION METHOD, GATEWAY CONNECTION CONTROL SYSTEM, AND USER EQUIPMENT - Disclosed is a technique in which when mobile terminal having multiple communication interfaces attaches to an access network, the mobile terminal can connect to a desired PGW quickly in a short time even if a PGW different from the desired PGW is allocated. According to the technique, when a mobile terminal (UE) | 01-26-2012 |
20120020344 | WIRELESS MACRO CELL OVERLAY - Overlaying a Wireless Macro Cell architecture on a Micro Cell network. WLAN MAC Address Translation (WMAT) is used to translate BSSIDs from the BSSID used to initialize a radio in an access node and identify communications between the radio in the access node and a controller, and the BSSID used over the air for Macro Cell operation. WMAT is used for transmit operations, translating the BSSID of outgoing packets to the Macro Cell BSSID prior to wireless transmission. On the receive side, packets undergo WMAT and transmission to the controller if the STN MAC address of the sender is in an ACK table associated with the radio, or the packet is one of a predetermined type. The ACK table is managed by transmit operations, and by control commands from the controller. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020345 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING LIMITED POLICY AND CHARGING CONTROL AND SYSTEM THEREOF - The present invention provides a method and system for implementing limited policy and charging control. The method comprises a PCRF determining whether a visited network where a UE roams supports PCC, and sending a message containing an identifier indicating the limited policy and charging control deployment to an AF. After receiving the message containing the identifier, the AF performs no subscription of the event trigger and/or cancels the subscription of the event trigger based on the identifier. Using the method and system in accordance with the present invention, the AF can be notified more conveniently and accurately of the current policy and charging control deployment situation when the limited policy and charging control is implemented (i.e., when the visited network does not support the PCC). Moreover, the AF may perform the corresponding operations according to the current policy and charging control deployment situation, thereby saving system resources. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020346 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system comprising macro and femto cells in which, during relocation of a mobile device from a source macro/femto cell to a target femto cell, mobile device capability, registration cause, and/or mobile device identity information available at the base station of the source macro/femto cell prior to relocation is made available to the home base station and gateway device of the target femto cell. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020347 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of managing subscriber mobility within a telecommunications system having at least first and second access domains supporting respective different access technologies. Each of the access domains comprises one or more mobility management gateways responsible for mobility management within the access domain. The method comprises receiving at a first subscriber server within said system, an update location request from a mobility management gateway within said first access domain, the first subscriber server being responsible for said first access domain. A common user database is then updated to update a profile of a subscriber to which said update location request relates in order to record said mobility management gateway within said first access domain as a current location of the subscriber. At said common user database, a notification rule set is applied to the subscriber profile to determine whether or not a notification to cancel a location for said subscriber must be sent to a mobility management gateway within said second access domain. If so, then a notification is sent from said common user database to a second subscriber server within said system, the second subscriber server being responsible for said second access domain. The notification is received at said second subscriber server, and a cancel location request sent to said mobility management gateway within said second access domain. A further update of said subscriber profile in the common user database is performed to remove said mobility management gateway within said second access domain as a current location of the subscriber. | 01-26-2012 |
20120026990 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REALIZING NONLOSS TRANSMISSION OF MEDIA STREAM AFTER SWITCHING BETWEEN OPEN CALL AND SECRET CALL - A method for realizing non-loss transmission of media stream after switching between the open call and the secret call, the method includes the steps: after the base station receiving the message of switching from the open call to the secret call from the communication terminal, inserting a special media frame in the media stream and transmitting it to the media gateway; the media gateway judging whether checking the special media frame according to the form of the load-bearing of the media stream's incoming and outgoing or the form of the media's coding decoding, whether detect the special media frame or not, the media gateway transmitting the media stream from the incoming to the outgoing. When the special media frame is detected, deciding to transmit directly or run an PCM adaptation process in 64 kbps/56 kbps according to the form of the coding decoding. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026991 | FEEDBACK SCHEME FOR MU-MIMO - Embodiments of a system and method for managing feedback in a MU-MIMO system. An access point can announce one or more of mobile stations that are to receive downlink information in a first frame. The access point can also send a sounding package to the one or more mobile stations and receive feedback from the one or more mobile stations according to the feedback schedule. The feedback may be based on the reception of the sounding package. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026992 | Energy-Efficient On-The-Fly Wi-Fi Hotspot Using Mobile Devices - One or more mobile devices and a cloud server computing device are utilized to provide Internet access to one or more client computing devices. One of the clients is designated as a Wi-Fi access point. The Wi-Fi access point implements a reverse-infrastructure Wi-Fi mode which tethers available mobile devices and other clients to the access point. The cloud server periodically computes an optimal number of the mobile devices to be used for data striping, and transmits a webpage to a requesting client by striping data associated with the webpage across the optimal number of the mobile devices. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026993 | System-Assisted Wireless Local Area Network Detection - In one or more embodiments, one or more methods and/or systems described can perform determining a position of a mobile device coupled to a first network; determining that the position of the mobile device is within a communications range of at least one wireless access point coupled to a second network; and transmitting a first signal to the mobile device via the first network, where the first signal indicates to apply power or greater power to a transceiver configured to communicate with the at least one wireless access point. In one or more embodiments, the mobile device can include a first transceiver configured to communicate with the first network and a second transceiver configured to communicate with the second network via the at least one wireless access point and can perform receiving the first signal from the first network and applying power or greater power to the second transceiver. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026994 | Classification of Wireless LAN Signals - A system and method for classifying an input signal suspected of being a wireless LAN signal. Bursts are isolated based on an analysis of an average power signal that is derived from the input signal. A correlation-based test is performed to determine if the input signal contains a Barker code typical of DSSS transmissions. Another correlation-based test is performed to determine of the input signal contains a long training sequence typical of OFDM transmissions. The results of the two tests are used to classify the input signal as being DSSS, OFDM or neither. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026995 | Mobile router with lan internet connectivity - A method is provided for operating a mobile router, comprising a wireless local area network transceiver and a wireless wide area network transceiver. The method comprises selectively utilizing the mobile router to establish a wireless Internet connection for a mobile device via said local area network transceiver and a wireless local area network access point when the local area network access point is identified as available by the mobile router and selectively operating the mobile router to access the Internet via the wireless wide area network transceiver when no wireless local area network access point is identified. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026996 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communications device for performing wireless communications includes: a data receiving section for receiving data by wireless communications; a data transmitting section for transmitting data by wireless communications; a mode switching section for switching an operation mode of the communications device between a first mode in which power is supplied to the data transmitting section, and a second mode in which power consumption in at least the data transmitting section is minimized over that in the first mode; and a determination section for determining whether the data receiving section has received designated data. The mode switching section switches the operation mode of the communications device from the second mode to the first mode if, in a state in which the communications device is in the second mode, the determination section has determined that the data receiving section has received the designated data. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026997 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ACCESSING CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of accessing a channel in a wireless local area network is provided. The method includes receiving, by a device, an operation element for setting up or switching at least one channel from an access point (AP), the operation element including a channel type field indicating whether the at least one channel is either a single channel or multiple channels, and the operation element including two channel center frequency segment fields indicating channel center frequency of a primary channel and a secondary channel respectively if the channel type field indicates that the at least one channel is multiple channels, determining whether the primary channel is idle during a first interval, determining whether the secondary channel is idle during a second interval if the primary channel is idle, and transmitting data by using the primary channel and the secondary channel to the AP or at least one station in a basic service set (BSS) if the primary channel and the secondary channel are idle. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026998 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK ELEMENT AND METHOD FOR ANTENNA ARRAY BEAM-FORMING - A network element for a wireless communication system is locatable to couple at least one base station to an antenna array. The network element comprises at least one receiver arranged to receive a radio frequency signal from the at least one base station or the antenna array and modem logic operably coupled to the at least one receiver. The modem logic comprises radio frequency conversion circuitry arranged to down-convert a received radio frequency signal to a baseband signal; analogue-to-digital conversion logic arranged to convert the baseband signal to digitized signals; and beam-form processing logic arranged to perform active beam-forming adjustment on the digitized signals. The modem logic further comprises digital-to-analogue conversion logic arranged to convert the beam-form adjusted digitized signals to analogue signals and radio frequency conversion circuitry arranged to up-convert the analogue signals to a radio frequency radio signal for forwarding to the antenna array or the at least one base station. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026999 | LOCAL AREA BROADCASTING SERVICE SYSTEM AND METHOD, AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSION DEVICE APPLIED THEREIN - Provided is a system and method for a local area broadcast service, and a wireless transmission apparatus applied to them. In the system, contents to be broadcasted in a predetermined local area are transmitted from a broadcast server to a wireless transmission apparatus through a wired network based on an Internet Protocol and the contents are then broadcasted from the wireless transmission apparatus to one or more user terminal devices. Therefore, according to the present invention, a server of a wired network can easily provide particular contents for each particular local area to one or more user terminal devices in the local area. Moreover, it is possible to reduce the load of the server, when the server provides multiple types of contents or provides contents to a plurality of user terminal devices. | 02-02-2012 |
20120027000 | SYMMETRIC TRANSMIT OPPORTUNITTY (TXOP) TRUNCATION - Various embodiments of symmetric transmit opportunity (TXOP) truncation (STT) systems and methods are disclosed. One method embodiment, among others, comprises receiving a frame that truncates a TXOP around a first station, and responsive to receiving the frame, sending a second frame that truncates the TXOP around a second station. Others system and method embodiments are disclosed. | 02-02-2012 |
20120027001 | AD HOC SERVICE PROVIDER'S ABILITY TO PROVIDE SERVICE FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - Exemplary embodiments are directed to devices and methods for supporting a wireless access point for one or more mobile clients. A mobile device may include a first module for supporting access to a network via a first wireless access protocol. The device may further include a second module for supporting a wireless access point for the one or more mobile clients to the network using a second wireless access protocol. | 02-02-2012 |
20120027002 | Method and System for Selecting VPN Connections in Response to Wireless Network Identifiers - A method and system for providing connections from a wireless access point. The wireless access point has multiple VPN tunnels. The access point detects a wireless-network identifier (such as a service set identifier (SSID)) provided by a terminal via an air interface, and the access point uses the wireless-network identifier as a basis to select one of the VPN tunnels. The access point then sends communication from the terminal via the selected VPN tunnel. | 02-02-2012 |
20120033652 | System and Method for Simultaneous Infrastructure and Ad Hoc Networked Communications - A method and a system are disclosed for maintaining a simultaneous communication between a first wireless station and both an access point and a second wireless station. The first and second wireless stations are associated with the access point, or only one of the wireless stations, but not both, is associated with the access point. The first wireless station gains an instance of medium access by using applicable medium access protocols. Once the first wireless station gains an instance of medium access, it transmits frames to the access point on an infrastructure network and to the second wireless station on the same infrastructure network or an ad hoc network. The overall air time must not exceed the maximum air time allowed for the instance of medium access. All transmitted frames must have a user priority mapped to the access category for which the instance of medium access was obtained. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033653 | WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH AUTONOMOUS WI-FI CONTROL BASED ON MOTION OF DEVICE - A wireless mobile communication device may include a Wi-Fi data communication system, an operational condition detection system, and a Wi-Fi activation system. The operational condition detection system may be configured to detect an operational condition of the wireless mobile communication device, other than actuation of a user-operated control. The operational condition may be when a motion sensor senses that the wireless mobile communication device has been substantially motionless. The Wi-Fi activation system may be configured to autonomously turn power on to the Wi-Fi data communication system upon detection of an operational condition of the wireless mobile communication device by the operational condition detection system, other than actuation of a user-operated control. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033654 | WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH AUTONOMOUS WI-FI CONTROL BASED ON LOCATION OF DEVICE - A wireless mobile communication device may include a Wi-Fi data communication system, an operational condition detection system, and a Wi-Fi activation system. The operational condition detection system may include a location sensor. The operational condition detection system may be configured to detect an operational condition of the wireless mobile communication device, other than actuation of a user-operated control, including when the location sensor determines that the wireless mobile communication device is near a Wi-Fi access point. The Wi-Fi activation system may be configured to autonomously turn power on to the Wi-Fi data communication system upon detection of an operational condition of the wireless mobile communication device by the operational condition detection system, other than actuation of a user-operated control, including when the location sensor senses that the wireless mobile communication device is near a Wi-Fi access point. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033655 | DIGITAL CAMERA DEVICE AND GEOGRAPHY TAG OBTAINING METHOD - A digital camera device is located within a wireless local area network (WLAN) which includes a plurality of wireless stations and access points (APs). The digital camera device detects no AP and then detects one wireless station. The digital camera device transmits a disconnection management frame to the detected wireless station by way of pretending to be one of the APs communicating to the detected to the wireless station to notify the detected wireless station to disconnect from the one of the APs. The digital camera device receives a reconnection management frame transmitted by the wireless station to the AP, retrieves a service set identification (SSID) of the AP from the reconnection management frame, and obtains a geography tag according to the retrieved SSID. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033656 | Integrated Bluetooth and Wireless LAN Transmitters Having Simultaneous Bluetooth and Wireless LAN Transmissions - Integrated Bluetooth (BT) and Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) transceivers are described. BT signals and WLAN signals can be transmitted simultaneously with one another. Samples from a BT signal sample stream are injected into a WLAN signal sample stream. According to one exemplary embodiment, a simultaneously transmitted BT signal/WLAN signal can be amplified and coupled onto a pin of an integrated circuit device for transmission. If there is no WLAN signal to be transmitted when a BT signal is to be transmitted, then the BT signal can be processed in a BT section of the transceiver, amplified and coupled to the same pin for transmission. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033657 | NETWORK SYSTEM - The network system includes a controller and a plurality of terminals. The controller sends a first request signal indicative of a response probability to the plurality of the terminals. Upon receiving the first request signal, each terminal sends a first response signal to the controller at the response probability indicated by the first request signal. The controller determines the total number of the terminals on the basis of the number of the received first response signals and the response probability. The controller determines a limited time period on the basis of the total number of the terminals, and sends a second request signal indicative of the limited time period to the terminals. Upon receiving the second request terminal, each terminal randomly selects a waiting time period from time periods not greater than the limited time period, and sends a second response signal to the controller after a lapse of the waiting time period. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033658 | MOBILE TELEPHONE VOIP/CELLULAR SEAMLESS ROAMING SWITCHING CONTROLLER - A nomadic server and a related system provides seamless roaming for a mobile communication device between different types of wireless networks, such as WiFi and cellular networks for voice, data and video communication. Use of the nomadic server enables a combination of WiFi and cellular networks for providing access to cellular phones and make use of the VOIP networks for switching the calls wherever possible. The nomadic server is a telephone communication processing and switching server that will “hold” the present, in-progress telephone communications without dropping, while roaming without losing the present, in-progress communication. For example, a telephone communication can be seamlessly switching between VOIP and cellular telephone networks using the nomadic server. Nomadic server resources interface with the VOIP and cellular network switches to provide the hand-off between networks. This approach enables switching of telephone communications over a VOIP network wherever possible either through WiFi or through cellular networks. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033659 | Apparatus and Method for Moving WCDMA Mobile Station in the Manner of the Least Packet Loss - A method for moving MS in the manner of the least packet loss can be divided into two steps. In the first step, when the MS is still connected to the source CN node and is running the effective loads, the MS prepares the routing information pointing at the target CN node. In the second step, the connection between the source CN node and the RAN node is released, the MS ID, the context data and the mobile information are transmitted to the target CN node. Then, a new connection between the target CN node and the RAN node is established. The step is completed synchronously and rapidly to minimize the packet loss. When establishing a new connection, the routing information transmitted to the MS before is used so that a new CN node is pointed at. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033660 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONNECTION METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM - In order that even a wireless terminal whose an unique ID is not registered in the filter list can use simply the access point without a prior setting task by user, a communication device includes access point means, filtering disabling means, unique ID registration means and filtering enabling means. The access point means connects a wireless terminal with at least one of a lower network and an upper network. The filtering disabling means disables a filtering which prevents connecting with an unregistered wireless terminal whose an unique ID is not registered in a filter list. The unique ID registration means acquires the unique ID of the wireless terminal and registers the acquired unique ID in the filter list, upon a state where the filtering is disabling, if a connection request is received from the wireless terminal. The filtering enabling means enables the filtering after the unique ID of the wireless terminal is registered in the filter list. | 02-09-2012 |
20120039309 | Bandwidth sharing in a distributed wireless client application using inverse multiplexing termination - A system and method for bandwidth sharing in a distributed wireless client application using inverse multiplexing termination. The system includes: a group of collocated client playback devices having wide area network (WAN) and local area network (LAN) connectivity, and a centralized inverse multiplexing (IMUX) server which optimizes shared bandwidth of both the WAN via inverse multiplexing and the LAN using either broadcast or multicast of all virtual multiplexing paths to all other client playback devices of the group of collocated client playback devices. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039310 | LOCATION OF MOBILE NETWORK NODES - The physical position of an unknown node in a network is determined by sending a first sent WiFi signal from one of an unknown node and a first reference node having a known location, and repeating the sent WiFi signal in the other of the unknown node and first reference node with a first reply WiFi signal. A distance is derived between the unknown node and the first reference node from the time of flight of the first sent and first reply WiFi signals. A second WiFi signal is sent from one of the unknown node and a second fixed node having a known location, and repeating the sent second WiFi signal in the other of the unknown node and second reference node with a second reply WiFi signal, and A distance is derived between the unknown node and the second reference node from the time of flight of the second sent and second reply WiFi signals. A physical location of the unknown node is determined based on the derived distances between the unknown node and the first and second reference nodes. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039311 | VOICE CALL DETECTION - Systems and methods for detecting a voice call are described. In one aspect, a data stream is identified and analyzed to determine whether the data stream is associated with a single device. The data stream is further analyzed to determine whether it is actively communicating data packets and to identify a data packet size. Bandwidth for the data stream is reserved if the data stream is associated with a single device, is actively sending data packets, and the data packet size is smaller than a threshold value. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039312 | ENHANCED REGISTRATION MESSAGES IN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEMS - An enhanced Session Initiation Protocol (“SIP”) registration message having extended header information that is used by an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (“IMS”) core to determine the registration status of a mobile device and the physical location of the mobile device. The extended header information includes hardware and subscriber identifiers, such as an International Mobile Equipment Identity (“IMEI”) and International Mobile Subscriber Identity (“IMSI”). The IMS core queries an equipment identity register to validate IMEI/IMSI identifiers in the header to determine whether to deny registration to a mobile device. The IMS core also queries a capability database using an IMEI to determine which location determination techniques are supported by or suitable for the associated mobile device. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039313 | TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SIGNALING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques are described that can be used for efficient mobility management signaling. In some cases, a network can specify an extended timer used for a machine to machine (M2M) type device to communicate with a network. The extended timer can be transmitted in connection with an attachment acceptance message, Location Updating Accept message, Tracking Area Update Accept, or Routing Area Update Accept message. In some cases, a timer can be adjusted using a multiplier in order to increase a period at which communications with the network occur. The network can transmit an indication to change a timer by multiplying the timer with the multiplier. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039314 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SUPPORTING WIRELESS FEMTOCELL CLUSTERS - A method of operating a femtocell network cluster is disclosed. One example method of operating the femtocell network cluster may include certain operations, such as, selecting a master femtocell access point among various femtocell access points operating on the femtocell network cluster and updating a master table to include the master femtocell access point in the master table neighbor list. Other operations may include transmitting the master table to each of the femtocell access points informing them of the identity of the master femtocell access point. The tables may be maintained by all of the femtocell access points operating on the network. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039315 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO DETECT PACKETS OF DIFFERENT FORMATS - A method and system in accordance with the present invention presents a new packet structure and an improved method for detecting the packet. The method and system comprise adding an additional field to the packet structure to allow for a sufficient time to process a very high throughput (VHT) signal field; and enabling the detection of the VHT signal field of the packet structure. The VHT signal field is distinguishable from other signal fields and the VHT signal field allows for a backward compatibility with other devices. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039316 | METHOD OF GENERATING MAP, AND METHOD OF MEASURING LOCATION OF TERMINAL USING THE MAP - A method of generating a map in a wireless network including a target device, at least two peripheral devices, and a terminal is provided. The target device may obtain relative location information of the at least two peripheral devices with respect to the target device, generate a local map of the target device based on the obtained relative location information, and share information associated with the local map of the target device with the at least two peripheral devices. The target device may further generate a reference map with respect to the target device and the at least two peripheral devices using the local map of the target device and local maps of the at least two peripheral devices, and provide, to the terminal, information associated with the reference map. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039317 | METHOD FOR SUPPLYING LOCAL SERVICE USING LOCAL SERVICE INFORMATION SERVER BASED ON DISTRIBUTED NETWORK AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - Provided are a method and apparatus for supplying a local service (LS) using a LS information server that is based on a distributed network. The LS may be supplied to the terminal through at least one of an LS information server, a root server, and a neighboring LS information server. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039318 | RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - A radio base station BTS and a mobile station TIE of the present invention includes a receiving unit | 02-16-2012 |
20120039319 | PLURALITY OF SENSORS COUPLED TO A SERIES OF SWITCHING DEVICES - A plurality of sensors are coupled to switching devices arranged in a series of switching devices. Each switching device has an upstream port and a downstream port. The series of switching devices is formed by coupling the downstream port of each switching device, except a last switching device in the series of switching devices, to the upstream port of a next switching device in the series of switching devices. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039320 | Remotely Reconfigurable Distributed Antenna System and Methods - The present disclosure is a novel utility of a software defined radio (SDR) based Distributed Antenna System (DAS) that is field reconfigurable and support multi-modulation schemes (modulation-independent), multi-carriers, multi-frequency bands and multi-channels. The present disclosure enables a high degree of flexibility to manage, control, enhance, facilitate the usage and performance of a distributed wireless network such as flexible simulcast, automatic traffic load-balancing, network and radio resource optimization, network calibration, autonomous/assisted commissioning, carrier pooling, automatic frequency selection, frequency carrier placement, traffic monitoring, traffic tagging, pilot beacon, etc. As a result, the SDR DAS can increase the efficiency and traffic capacity of the operators' wireless network. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039321 | SIGNALING METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE MULTIPLE ANTENNA COMMUNICATIONS IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS | 02-16-2012 |
20120039322 | TRANSMITTING PARTICULAR CONTROL INFORMATION ON AN UPLINK TRAFFIC CHANNEL ON A REPEATED BASIS - In a communications system, a mobile station receives, from a base station, a downlink control message associated with an indication that particular control information is to be transmitted by the mobile station on an uplink traffic channel on a repeated basis. In response to receiving the downlink control message associated with the indication, the particular control information is transmitted on the uplink traffic channel to a base station on a repeated basis. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039323 | APPARATUS FOR MANAGEMENT OF LOCAL IP ACCESS IN A SEGMENTED MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention introduces a method for managing the route to be used for the user's local device access traffic through the use of intelligent switching performed by the breakout node (eNodeB, home NodeB, or home eNodeB) together with the local access gateway node of the local service domain. Essential information pertaining to performance of this intelligent switching is obtained through the communication of specific tokens using selected channels of communication. A variety of combinations pertaining to the setup, selection and composition of token and channel is possible and described. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039324 | INITIATION OF A MIMO COMMUNICATION - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for initiating a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) communication. The method and apparatus includes processing that begins by transmitting a frame formatted in accordance with a default MIMO active transmitter-receiver antenna configuration to a target receiver. The processing continues by receiving at least one response frame from the target receiver. The processing continues by determining a number of receiver antennas of the target receiver from the at least one response frame. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039325 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR NETWORK SELECTION IN MULTIPLE ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A method and wireless user equipment (UE) device provide the capability to store network information in a database structure on the wireless user equipment device, with the network information containing network entries arranged by radio access technology. Each network entry contains a radio access network (RAN) identification code and a core network (CN) identification code and has a priority within the radio access technology. The UE device determines a currently preferred order of access technologies and selects a network entry according to the currently preferred order of radio access technologies and the priority of network entries within the radio access technologies. | 02-16-2012 |
20120044914 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WI-FI ROAMING - Systems and methods for Wi-Fi roaming. A gateway supports both a local access point (AP) and a virtual AP. The local AP is accessible only to an “owner” of the gateway. The virtual AP (VAP) is accessible to devices associated with the owner of the gateway and to roaming Wi-Fi devices. A datastore conveys information about the roaming Wi-Fi devices to the VAP to permit them to access the VAP without the need for manual configuration of the VAP. A roaming Wi-Fi device may communicate with a gateway via a tunnel to maintain session connectivity during roaming. A session may be initiated on one network, such as a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network, handed off to another network, such as a cellular network or a Wi-Fi network, and then returned to network on which the session was initiated. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044915 | METHOD OF LIMITING USE OF A MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINT NEAR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - To promote network security in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a mobile communication device, which is operable as a mobile wireless access point, may read a WLAN identifier that is known to be used by the WLAN and an indication of a channel on which a wireless access point of the WLAN is known to operate. The device may then monitor the channel for a transmission of the WLAN identifier. The mobile wireless access point may be configured to operate using the selected channel so that the monitoring occurs on the same channel as that on which the mobile wireless access point is operating. The transmission, if detected, may be considered to indicate that the mobile communication device is within the WLAN. Upon detecting the transmission, use of the WLAN identifier by the mobile wireless access point at the mobile communication device may be prevented, e.g. by requiring the mobile wireless access point to use a different WLAN identifier or by disabling the mobile wireless access point. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044916 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a radio base station apparatus capable of transmitting a control signal efficiently even in radio communications using a system band that includes a plurality of component carriers. In the radio base station apparatus, control signals of transport blocks corresponding to the plural component carriers are coded jointly and the coded control signal is assigned to one or plural component carriers to be transmitted. A mobile terminal apparatus receives data from the radio base station apparatus, separates the control signal from the received data and decodes the separated control signal thereby to obtain control information of the transport blocks of the corresponding component carriers. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044917 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ANTENNA ARRAY CONTROL - A wireless communication system comprises a network element ( | 02-23-2012 |
20120044918 | Method and Apparatus for Supporting Class of Service Over Bonded Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Links - Class of service is supported over bonded lines by determining that packets of the same traffic class are to be sent over the same link and sending the packets over the same link without passing the packets through a fragmentation and reassembly layer. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044919 | Wireless Transceivers with Filter Arrangement for WiFi and WiMAX Coexsistence - Embodiments provide WiFi and WiMAX tailored transceiver radio frequency (RF) filtering techniques and configurations to enable coexistence between WiFi and WiMAX transceivers operating in close proximity. In particular, embodiments provide filtering techniques to reject emissions from WiMAX into WiFi, and vice versa. The filtering techniques eliminate the need for additional isolation between WiMAX and WiFi antennas (approximately 50 dB), which is beyond what is achievable in practice. Embodiments can be tailored according to different use cases of the WiFi and WiMAX transceivers (e.g., fixed CPE, portable router, smart phone with tethering). | 02-23-2012 |
20120044920 | Method, System and Terminal for Accessing Packet Data Serving Node - The present invention discloses a method, system and terminal for accessing a Packet Data Serving Node. Said method comprises: directly accessing a service server to register through a WIFI module; receiving returned parameter information; carrying out PPP encapsulation for request information for establishing the PPP link to generate a first data packet; encapsulating said first data packet with one layer of TUNNEL header to generate a second data packet; encapsulating said second data packet with one layer of IP header based on a WIFI link to generate a third data packet and sending said third data packet to a WAG through a WIFI link; said third data packet being used for analyzing and dropping the IP header and TUNNEL header of said third data packet to recover the first data packet after being received by WAG, and recovered first data packet is analyzed by PDSN to establish a link connection. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044921 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL SIGNAL FOR MERGING CARRIERS IN TRANSMISSION - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to a method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a control signal (for example, PDCCH signal) in an asymmetric multicarrier environment. The method for transmitting a control signal for an asymmetric multicarrier in a wireless connection system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: determining the size of a carrier indicator field (CIF) indicating a downlink component carrier (DL CC) by which downlink data is transmitted, on the basis of a maximum value of the number of DL CCs and of the number of uplink component carriers (UL CCs) being managed in a base station; transmitting the CIF on a 1 | 02-23-2012 |
20120044922 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, AND CONTROL METHOD - A radio base station includes a mobile communication system in which a first and second communication area using a carrier in a first and a second frequency band geologically overlap, and includes a radio base station which manages the first and second communication areas. The radio base station includes a determination unit configured to determine whether to perform carrier aggregation, by which a mobile station transmits an uplink signal using the carriers in the first and second frequency band, and a control signal transmission unit configured to transmit a control signal for specifying the carriers in the first and second frequency band when it is determined to perform the carrier aggregation. The mobile station includes a communication unit configured to transmit an uplink signal/receive a downlink signal using the carriers in the first and second frequency bands according to the control signal transmitted by the radio base station. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044923 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A mobile wireless communication system including a wireless communication apparatus and a counterpart wireless communication apparatus is provided, the system establishing wireless communication between the wireless communication apparatus and the counterpart wireless communication apparatus by multiplexing plural channels including at least a traffic channel for transmitting a packet, a control channel for transmitting control information for receiving the packet, and a channel for transmitting information including transmission power control information. The wireless communication apparatus includes a transmission unit that transmits the transmission control information to the counterpart wireless communication apparatus via the channel for transmitting information including transmission power control information at intervals of a prescribed period that is longer than a length of the packet, and transmits the transmission power control information via the control channel when the packet is being transmitted via the traffic channel. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044924 | Synchronizing Wireless Local Area Network Access Points - In a wireless local area network, a first and second access point in which the RF coverage areas overlap are synchronized by positioning a monitor station within the overlap area. The monitor station receives beacon frames from both access points and records the arrival times. A manager in communication with both access points and the monitor station calculates a retardation interval and issues a control command to the second access point to retard transmission of its beacon frame. The retardation interval is calculated such that the contention-free period of the second access point does not overlap the contention-free period of the first access point. The manager may also issue control commands to the first and second access points to adjust their contention-free periods. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044925 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A FRAME IN A WIRELESS RAN SYSTEM - There is provided a method and apparatus for transmitting a frame which is performed by a transmission STA in a WLAN system. The method of transmitting a frame according to the present invention includes generating an MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) to be transmitted to a target station, generating a PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) by attaching a Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) header to the MPDU, and transmitting the PPDU to the target station. The PLCP header comprises a partial Association ID (AID) of the target station. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057571 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NORMALIZING CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK DATA - A method, computer readable medium and apparatus for normalizing cellular communications network data are disclosed. For example, the method collects a data packet from the cellular communications network, modifies a time stamp of the data packet in accordance with a promotion delay time from the time stamp of the data packet to create a normalized data packet and processes the normalized data packet to optimize state machine configurations. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057572 | Transmission Of Multiprotocol Data in a Distributed Antenna System - In a distributed antenna system (DAS) and a local area network (LAN), a common communication infrastructure distributes data from radio-based and Internet-based sources. A radio equipment (RE) of the DAS interfaces to a LAN segment. For the downlink, a gateway maps radio signal data from a radio equipment controller (REC) and data packets from a switch to mixed-data frames using a radio data interface protocol for transmission in the DAS. At the RE, the signal data and data packets are retrieved from the mixed-data frames and provided to the air interface and LAN segment, respectively. For the uplink from the RE, the radio signal data from the air interface and the data packets from the LAN segment are mapped to mixed-data frames and transmitted to the gateway. The gateway retrieves the signal samples and data packets from the mixed-data frames for transfer to the REC and switch, respectively. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057573 | SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) ROUTER - Systems and methods for a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) router are described. In one aspect, the SIP router receives a SIP INVITE for an incoming call to a target mobile subscriber. Responsive to receiving the SIP INVITE, the SIP router identifies, via a Send Routing Information for Short Message (SRI/SM) request to a Home Location Register, a first address of a serving switch in a circuit-switched mobile network; a mobile telephony device associated with the target mobile subscriber is currently location-updated on the serving switch. The SIP router maps the first address to a second address for the serving switch; the second address being a SIP address. Using the SIP address, the SIP router sends the received SIP INVITE to a SIP interface of the serving switch. The serving switch being configured to process the received SIP INVITE and the incoming call to the target mobile subscriber. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057574 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS FOR DEVICES - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate controlling device local internet protocol (IP) access (LIPA) with one or more restricted groups of access points in a visited network. An indicator can be provided by a home network that specifies whether a device registering with a visited network is allowed utilize LIPA in the visited networks. If so, one or more components of the visited network can provide LIPA services to the device, which can include establishing IP flows for device access. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057575 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIMULTANEOUS BEAM TRAINING - Certain aspects of the present disclosure support techniques for simultaneous beam training of multiple pairs of wireless nodes for reduction of training overhead. Each pair of wireless nodes can utilize a different training sequence in order to mitigate interference. In one aspect, different training sequences can be based on different Golay codes with appropriate correlation properties. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057576 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ACCESS TO A PACKET DATA NETWORK - An access point supports communication in a femto cell of a cellular communication network. The access point comprises transceiver circuitry arranged to enable communication with at least one wireless communication unit located within the femto cell, and a signal processing logic module comprising an access point controller interface logic module arranged to enable communication between the access point and an access point controller. The signal processing logic module further comprises a gateway logic module arranged to provide an interface between the at least one wireless communication unit located within the femto cell and a packet data network. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057577 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF COMMUNICATION USING TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP (TDLS) - Systems and methods for improved communications using tunneled direct link setup are described herein. The systems and methods relate to discovery, link setup, channel switching, multicasting, link selection, and quality of service implemented in conjunction with tunneled direct link setup. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057578 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING VALIDITY OF WIFI CONNECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for determining validity of a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) connection in a wireless apparatus is provided. In the method, a query is performed on a specific Domain Name Server (DNS) via a connected Access Point (AP). When a response to the query on the specific DNS is received, a connection to a specific node is attempted via the connected AP. When the connection to the specific node is successful, a valid WiFi connection is determined. The WiFi connection is maintained. Therefore, a WiFi apparatus is allowed to connect to only a valid AP, so that convenience is provided to a user and the WiFi apparatus is prevented from wasting power. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057579 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARING WIRELESS DATA SERVICE - A method of sharing a wireless data service, including receiving, by a first terminal, a wireless data service share request from a second terminal, checking, by the first terminal, available wireless data service remaining amount information, and transmitting, by the first terminal, a response to the wireless data service share request to the second terminal based on the checked wireless data service remaining amount information. Another such sharing method includes requesting, by a second terminal, wireless data service remaining amount information available by a first terminal from the first terminal, transmitting, by the second terminal, a wireless data service share request to the first terminal based on the wireless data service remaining amount information received from the first terminal, and receiving, by the second terminal, a response to the wireless data service share request from the first terminal. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057580 | Method And System For 60 GHZ Antenna Adaptation And User Coordination Based On Base Station Beacons - A first device wirelessly transmits and/or receives swept 60 GHz beacon signals to and/or from other devices. Beacon signals indicate angle of reception and/or relative direction with respect to other devices. Knowing reception angle and/or relative direction enables beamforming of adaptive and/or steered antennas for communication. 60 GHz beacons are swept over one or more angles. Identity information, configuration information, timing information and/or spatial information are communicated via 60 GHz beacons. Control and/or coordination information are transmitted and/or received. Reception angle, relative direction and/or distance between devices are determined based on 60 GHz beacons. Adaptive and/or steered antennas used for communication are initialized and/or undergo beamforming for 60 GHz, based on the angle, direction and/or distance between devices. Devices are mobile and/or stationary. Devices comprise mobile stations, base stations, wireless phones, access points, set-top-boxes, computers, game consoles, video servers, video recorders, video playback devices, residential gateways and internet browsing devices. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057581 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING SENOR NODE IN RFID/USN INFRASTRUCTURE AND GATEWAY SYSTEM USED THEREFOR - A sensor node management system in a Radio Frequency Identification/Ubiquitous Sensing Network (RFID/USN) infrastructure is provided, in which a sensor node has a local ID in a sensor network, a gateway receives, from the sensor node, node information including the local ID and an ID of a home gateway to which the sensor node initially belongs and registers the node information about the sensor node to a location information server, and the location information server registers and manages node information about sensor nodes within an area of the gateway. The location information server generates a global ID using the local ID and the ID of the home gateway, the global ID being recognized as an address of the sensor node by an Internet Protocol (IP) network. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057582 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING WLAN CAPABILITIES Of A DUAL MODE GPRS/WLAN OR UMTS/WLAN WTRU - Method and apparatus for enabling a wireless terminal to communicate the dual-mode capabilities and reporting the interworking capabilities of the two networks with which the wireless terminal have the added capability of obtaining services from either one of the interworking networks. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057583 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO RESTORE ALWAYS-ON CONNECTIVITY DURING NETWORK HANDOVER - A method and apparatus to restore always on connectivity to user equipment, the method having the steps of: monitoring whether the user equipment has transitioned to a network that supports concurrent voice and data; performing, upon the monitoring step detecting the transition, a routing area update; checking whether the user equipment was in a voice call at the time of the transition, and if yes, sending a data packet to the network. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057584 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AVOIDING HANGING PDP CONTEXTS - A method and system for avoiding hanging Packet Data Protocol (PDP) contexts in a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network. A time-out period is included in a request message to create a PDP context. The request message is transmitted from a first GPRS Support Node (GSN) to a second GSN. The second GSN receives the request message and transmits a response message to the first GSN. If the second GSN is unable to create the PDP context within the time-out period, the response message informs the first GSN that creation of the PDP context has been aborted. A Network Service Access Point Identifier (NSAPI) may be included in the response message so that the first GSN may request the second GSN to delete the request for creating the PDP context after a N3-T3 timeout of the first GSN has expired. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057585 | Method and System for Link Adaptation Using Metric Feedback - A method for link adaptation at a base station using metric feedback is disclosed. The method can include the steps of communicating with a mobile station over a communication link having one or more sub-channels and during the communication, receiving from the mobile station a plurality of mutual information per coded bit metrics for a plurality of candidate modulation types per coding layer. The mutual information per coded bit metrics can be based on channel state knowledge of the sub-channels. Also, based on the received information, the operational performance of the mobile station can be predicted in view of one or more transmission parameters and performance factors and one or more of the transmission parameters, including a modulation type selected from one of the plurality of candidate modulation types per coding layer, can be selected based on a transmission condition of the communication link. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057586 | Short Message Service (SMS) Protocol Gateway - A system for communicating short message service messages from a SMS application to a wireless communication device. The system includes a protocol gateway for converting messages from a simple object access protocol (SOAP) to a short message peer-to-peer (SMPP) protocol. By using a SOAP protocol for a portion of communications between the SMS application and the wireless communication device, the system provides communications path in which SMS application is not required to maintain knowledge of the complex SMPP protocol. The system may also include a billing mechanism for charging subscribers for content received by the wireless communication device. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057587 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD IN A ZIGBEE NETWORK, TERMINAL PROCESSOR, AND TERMINAL DEVICE - A data transmission method in a Zigbee network, a terminal processor, and a terminal device are provided. The method includes: receiving, by a connection driving module, through a connection device, data from a Zigbee communication module (S | 03-08-2012 |
20120063427 | CROWD FORMATION BASED ON WIRELESS CONTEXT INFORMATION - Systems and methods are disclosed for forming crowds of users based on wireless contexts of corresponding mobile devices of the users. In general, wireless contexts of mobile devices of a number of users are obtained. For each mobile device, the wireless context of the mobile device includes a wireless Personal Area Network (PAN) context of the mobile device, a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) context of the mobile device, or both. The wireless contexts of the mobile devices of the users are then utilized to form crowds of users. More specifically, in one embodiment, users of mobile devices having sufficiently similar wireless contexts are determined to be in the same crowd of users. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063428 | Interface Switching System, Mobile Node, Proxy Node, and Mobile Management Node - A technology is disclosed for preventing packet and transferring packets to a switched interface with minimal delay, when a mobile node switches a using interface. According to the technology, when a MN | 03-15-2012 |
20120063429 | METHODS AND APPARATUS OF FREQUENCY INTERLEAVING FOR 80 MHz TRANSMISSIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for frequency interleaving for use with 80 MHz transmissions, such as those in the IEEE 802.11ac amendment to the IEEE 802.11 standard. According to certain aspects, frequency interleaving spatial streams for transmissions on channels having widths of about 80 MHz may comprise using an interleaving depth of 26. The number of frequency rotations may be 58 (or 29) for up to four (or up to eight) spatial streams. According to certain aspects, frequency interleaving up to eight (or up to four) spatial streams for transmission on channels having widths of about 80 MHz may comprise performing frequency rotation for each of the spatial streams based on a frequency rotation index=[0 4 2 6 1 5 3 7] (or=[0 2 1 3]). | 03-15-2012 |
20120063430 | NAS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for supporting Non-Access Stratum (NAS) communication between a User Equipment (UE) and a Mobility Management Entity (MME) efficiently by addressing signaling problems occurring between the UE and the MME in a situation where it is necessary for a network node to identify the UE information, from another network node to which the UE has been attached, are provided. The method is implemented with a UE, an MME, and an old MME or an old Serving General Packet Radio Service Support Node (SGSN) to which the UE has been attached before so as to facilitate discovering a best node using the UE information acquired from the old MME or old SGSN during communication between the UE and the network, resulting in a reduction of a communication delay between the UE and network and an improvement of communication efficiency. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063431 | SELECTION OF TRAINING SEQUENCES FOR MULTIPLE-IN MULTIPLE-OUT TRANSMISSIONS - A cellular communication system Multiple-In Multiple-Out, MIMO, transmitter includes a plurality of antennas, a selector that selects training sequences for messages, a generator that generates messages including selected training sequences, and a transmitter that transmits the messages on the plurality of antennas. The selector selects a training sequence for a message from a set of training sequences in response to an associated antenna on which the message is to be transmitted. The set of training sequences is associated with a cell of the MIMO transmitter and includes disjoint subsets of training sequences for each of the plurality of antennas. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063432 | VENDOR NEUTRAL VOIP INTERFACE DEVICES AND COMPATIBLE PORTABLE PHONES - A Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) interface system for enabling communications between a plain old telephone service (POTS) device and a packet data network is disclosed. The VoIP interface system includes a POTS interface configured to communicate POTS voice telephone communications and a powered packet-based interface configured to communicate packet-based voice telephone communications with a host computer system that also provides power. The VoIP interface system also includes a memory system that includes a set of instructions, that direct the host system to prompt the user for a selection from a plurality of VoIP service providers, receive a selection identifying one of the plurality of VoIP service providers, identify profile information associated with the user and the selected one of the VoIP service providers, and populate one or more fields of a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) module based on the profile information when executed. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063433 | PHYSICAL LAYER HEADER WITH ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for utilizing a physical layer (PHY) header comprising an identifier for an access point (AP) or a Basic Service Set (BSS). A station (STA) that is assigned an order in a sequential response sequence may count only frames with PHY headers that contain the correct identifier. A STA may terminate its sequential access procedure when it receives a frame with a PHY header that specifies a different identifier for the AP or BSS that assigned the sequence. In this manner, the STA may prevent partly synchronizing to an overlapping network and avoid accessing the wireless medium at the wrong time. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063434 | System and Method for Dynamic Receive Diversity Allocation - A system and method for dynamic receive diversity allocation. A communications device comprises a first physical layer (PHY) unit, a second PHY unit, a first signal path coupled to a first antenna and to the first PHY unit, a switchable signal path coupled to a second antenna and switchably coupled to the first PHY unit and the second PHY unit, and a switch control unit coupled to the second antenna. The switch control unit dynamically generates a control signal used to switchably couple the second antenna to either the first PHY unit or the second PHY unit. The second antenna may be used to provided a needed transmit or receive antenna or an extra antenna for use in increasing diversity. Switching antennas reduces the total number of antennas and support hardware, such as digital processing hardware, for wireless communications standards having a high ratio of idle to busy time. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063435 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication network that forms an ad-hoc network without the arrangement of a controlling station sets a period that a communication apparatus can utilize with priority and performs isochronous communication in the period as required. When isochronous communication has not been performed or after isochronous communication has finished in the priority utilization period, other communication apparatuses perform arbitrary communication. When another communication is performed in a communication apparatus's own priority utilization period, the start of isochronous communication is temporarily delayed. In an ad-hoc communication environment, data having a real-time characteristic, such as AV content, can be efficiently transmitted through the isochronous communication. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063436 | AGGREGATION AND PROPAGATION OF SENSOR DATA WITHIN NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY MESSAGES IN A TREE-BASED AD HOC NETWORK - In one embodiment, a method comprises attaching, by a mobile router, to an attachment router according to a protocol requiring establishment of a tree topology having a single clusterhead, the attaching by the mobile router based on the mobile router receiving, from the attachment router, an advertisement message specifying an attachment prefix; outputting a second advertisement message specifying availability of a prescribed address prefix used by the mobile router, and further specifying attributes of the mobile router relative to the tree topology; receiving a plurality of sensor data messages from at least one attached sensor host node, each sensor data message specifying at least one sensor data element specifying a detected sensor parameter; aggregating the sensor data elements from the sensor data messages into aggregated sensor data; and generating and outputting a neighbor advertisement message to the attachment router, the neighbor advertisement message specifying the aggregated sensor data. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063437 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING PDN GW SELECTION - A method for supporting PDN GW selection, comprising the following steps of: receiving by an MME a local route optimization service request information; searching by the MME the IP address of a PDN GW which supports local route optimization according to the IP address of a PDN GWh; sending by the MME a bearer request establishment message to the PHN GWh. The method of the present invention can ensure core network equipment to find PDN GW correctly while HeNB system supports local route optimization. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063438 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA BY APPLYING PRECODING MATRIX IN AN OPEN LOOP MIMO SYSTEM - A method for transmitting data by applying a precoding matrix in an open-loop multiple input multiple output (MIMO) system is disclosed. The method comprises selecting a precoding matrix and applying the selected precoding matrix to data during initial transmission; selecting a precoding matrix and applying the selected precoding matrix to data to be retransmitted; and retransmitting the data to which the precoding matrix is applied, wherein an index of the precoding matrix applied to the data is determined based on the times of current retransmission times of the data and index of the precoding matrix applied during initial transmission of the data. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063439 | METHOD OF PERFORMING LINK ADAPTATION PROCEDURE - A method of performing a link adaptation procedure for multi-user transmission in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The method includes receiving a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) feedback request transmitted by an access point (AP) to a plurality of stations, estimating an MCS by considering a spatial stream corresponding to the MCS feedback request transmitted to the other stations, and transmitting an MCS feedback response comprising the estimated MCS to the AP. The link adaptation procedure can be performed by considering a wireless communication environment on a real time basis. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063440 | WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT DEVICE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless LAN access point device, wherein when the wireless LAN access point device receives from a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) client(s) being subordinate to the wireless LAN access point device a request for connection to a predetermined server, the wireless LAN access point device respectively establishes separate communication connections with a side of the wireless LAN client(s) and with a side of the predetermined server, and performs transmission/reception control over data to be transmitted to and received from the wireless LAN client(s) and the predetermined server. | 03-15-2012 |
20120069827 | POWER CONSERVATION IN WIRELESS CLIENT TERMINALS USING PROXY DEVICE - A novel power conservation scheme is provided for conserving power in client terminals by using a proxy server. The client terminal may have a secondary communication interface for short range communications and a primary communication interface for long range communications with an access point for a wireless network. To conserve power, the client terminal may power down its primary communication interface without informing the access point. The access point assumes the primary communication interface is still active. Prior to shutting off its primary communication interface, the client terminal may assign an external proxy device to act as a proxy and monitor its data channel with the access point. The proxy device monitors the data channel(s) for the client terminal via a primary communication interface. If the proxy device detects a data message for the client terminal, it forwards the data message to the client terminal via a secondary communication interface. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069828 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication device includes a first transmitting/receiving unit, a first physical processor, and a first MAC processor. The first transmitting/receiving unit transmits one first wireless signal and receives a second wireless signal by a first wireless communication method using a frequency band with a certain bandwidth. The first physical processor decodes the second wireless signal to obtain a frame and encodes a frame of the first wireless signal to be transmitted. The first MAC processor supplies a control frame generated by embedding a first frame to a MAC header of a second frame to the physical processor as the frame. The first frame is recognizable by the first wireless communication method and a second wireless communication method. The second frame is recognizable by the first wireless communication method but is not recognizable by the second wireless communication method. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069829 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PACING REAL TIME MEDIA TRANSMISSION OVER A BROADBAND CHANNEL USING MICRO BURSTING - A wireless system for streaming media files includes a microburst gateway in which microbursts, comprising groups of buffered packets of the streamed media, are transmitted periodically to a user over a broadband channel over respective window periods, the bursts being transmitted at a higher than an average packet rate associated with the media file. At the start of each fairly long window period of 500 ms, for example, one microburst is sent over the broadband channel, leaving the remainder of the window period available for other users. The window period and a number of packets in the burst within the window period are defined so that the average packet rate is substantially maintained. A corresponding microburst gateway and a method for transmitting the media file are also provided. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069830 | System And Method For Transmitting A Low Density Parity Check Signal - A system and method for transmitting LDPC parameters is provided. In the method, an initial number of OFDM symbols (Nsym_init) is determined for a packet that is based on the number of information bits to be delivered in the packet. An STBC value is also determined. A number of extra symbols (Nsym_ext) value is generated based on the Nsym_init value, wherein a Nsym value is based on said Nsym_init value and said Nsym_ext value. An Nldpc_ext value is determined based on the STBC value and the Nsym_ext value for purposes of determining LDPC parameters associated with the packet. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069831 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND RADIO ACCESS METHOD - To provide a radio base station apparatus, a mobile terminal apparatus and a radio access method that support each of a plurality of mobile communication systems when the plurality of mobile communication systems coexists, the configuration is provided in which in transmission in a mobile communication system having a system band comprised of a plurality of component carriers, the transmission data is subjected to frequency hopping in a single component carrier in a subframe, while being subjected to frequency hopping over mutually different component carriers in prior and subsequent subframes. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069832 | PREEMPTIVE PACKET FOR MAINTAINING CONTIGUITY IN CYCLIC PRIORITIZED MULTIPLE ACCESS (CPMA) CONTENTION-FREE SESSIONS - An access point transmits a preemptive peg packet when it has no data to transmit in order to maintain the contiguity of its transmission timing position with respect to the timing position of other contention-free sessions (CFS) transmitted by other access points in an existing, periodic sequence. The cyclic prioritized multiple access (CDMA) method establishes the transmission timing position of contention-free sessions (CFS) between overlapping first and second wireless LAN cells contending for the same medium. Each cell includes a respective plurality of member stations. If an access point has no traffic, it will transmit a short, preemptive pegging packet and reset its backoff timer. In this manner, no gaps longer than the distributed coordination function (DCF) Interframe Space (DIFS) are left idle. This prevents other stations from using DCF contention to seize the channel, until all access points have completed one contention-free session (CFS) per periodic cycle. | 03-22-2012 |
20120076116 | MODEM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A device for wireless communication, for example a WiMAX gateway, may include a control circuit comprising a wireless transceiver, an enclosure enclosing the control circuit, and a pair of antennas for wirelessly communicating with an external device via the wireless transceiver. The antennas may be mechanically coupled to an outside of the enclosure and electrically coupled to the control circuit, and may be collapsible to a stowed configuration to reduce the size of the device when the device is not in operation, and extendable to an operational configuration in which the antennas are spaced apart and are substantially parallel with each other. An interlock may disable operation of the device when the antennas are in the stowed configuration. The device may include a second antenna and transceiver, for example to provide WiFi connectivity. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076117 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DISCOVER NETWORK CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - Example methods and apparatus to discover network capabilities available via wireless networks are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves discovering first network capabilities by performing an exchange between a wireless terminal and an access point of a wireless local area network. The method also involves comparing the first network capabilities with cached network capabilities and joining the wireless terminal with the access point based on at least a portion of the first network capabilities matching at least a portion of the cached network capabilities. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076118 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PRESENT NETWORK CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - Example methods and apparatus to present network capabilities available via wireless networks are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves discovering a first network that supports a network query protocol and retrieving at least one network service from the first network prior to joining the first network. The at least one retrieved network service is presented. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076119 | Consistent Interpretation Method On Carrier Indication Field and Related Communication Device - A consistent interpretation method on a carrier indication field (CIF) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises building up a first common set of a plurality of component carriers between a mobile station and a base station according to a specific order; and addressing the plurality of component carriers according to the first common set. One CIF value corresponds to one of the plurality component carriers or be left unused. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076120 | Destination Learning and Mobility detection in Transit Network Device in LTE & UMTS Radio Access Networks - A method of learning and identifying two unidirectional GTP-U tunnels corresponding to a user equipment (UE) in a device placed in a LTE network, where the device acts as a transparent proxy intercepting user plane and control plane protocols on the S1 interface, is disclosed. Methods of pairing the two unidirectional tunnels that belong to same UE, when there is no control plane information or when there is Control Plane information, but the NAS portions of the S1 Control that contain bearer IP addresses are encrypted, are disclosed. Control plane and user plane methods for associating GTP-U tunnels and the corresponding bearer plane IP addresses are identified. Additionally, methods for detecting mobility of a UE, as it moves from the coverage area of one E-NodeB to another, are disclosed. Methods for constructing an eNodeB topology map are also disclosed. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076121 | Releasing Connections with Local GW When UE Moves Out of Residential/Enterprise Network Coverage - A method, system and device are provided for managing LIPA and/or SIPTO connection releases when UE moves out of residential/enterprise network coverage in case service continuity is not supported for the LIPA/SIPTO PDN connection(s). To address problems caused by not providing service continuity for LIPA/SIPTO PDN connections, the PDN connection/PDP context created in the HeNB/HNB by the MME/SGSN includes context information related to the UE indicating whether such connection is a LIPA PDN connection PDN connection or not. In addition, each UE may be configured to reconnect or not reconnect to the PDN corresponding to a certain APN or service, depending on how the PDN connection was disconnected by the network. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076122 | Positioning With Wireless Local Area Networks And WLAN-Aided Global Positioning Systems - Accurate position capability can be quickly provided using a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). When associated with a WLAN, a wireless device can quickly determine its relative and/or coordinate position based on information provided by an access point in the WLAN. Before a wireless device disassociates with the access point, the WLAN can periodically provide time, location, and decoded GPS data to the wireless device. In this manner, the wireless device can significantly reduce the time to acquire the necessary GPS satellite data (i.e. on the order of seconds instead of minutes) to determine its coordinate position. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076123 | SIMULTANEOUSLY MULTI-NETWORKED HANDHELD MULTIMEDIA GATEWAYS - A user may simultaneously access sources of multimedia information via multiple wireless networks using a handheld multimedia gateway. A user interface may support the selection of information services that are each provided separate, but possibly overlapping, viewing spaces. Circuitry in the multimedia gateway manages the operation of the multiple wireless communication paths, and enables the display of visual information through two or more display devices. The user may customize the display, the size, and the location within a display of regions in which the information is presented. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076124 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK POWER CONTROL IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for uplink power control in a communication system that includes determining a power control offset for controlling power for traffic to be transmitted by a subscriber station, according to whether a Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest (HARQ) is applied to the traffic, and transmitting the power control offset to the subscriber station. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076125 | OPERATOR CONTROL OF RESOURCES FOR ROAMING SUBSCRIBERS - The present invention relates to a solution for handling visiting subscribers in a visited communication network ( | 03-29-2012 |
20120076126 | METHOD IN WHICH USER EQUIPMENT PERFORMS RANDOM ACCESS IN A CARRIER AGGREGATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present document relates to a method in which user equipment carries out a process for random access to a base station in a carrier aggregation mobile communication system which performs communications using a plurality of component carriers (CCs), and to a terminal device for the method. The user equipment separately manages back-off operations for each of the CCs, and performs a random access preamble transmission using the relevant CC if another usable CC exists, even when a back-off period is being applied to a specific CC, to carry out a random access process in an efficient manner in a carrier aggregation mobile communication system. | 03-29-2012 |
20120082144 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICE IN SERVICE ZONE - A method for providing a service in a service zone comprises: receiving, from an access point, a service set identifier (SSID) or a basic service set identifier (BSSID); when the SSID or the BSSID has been received for a preset time, transmitting, to a server, a message requesting for service identification information corresponding to the received SSID or BSSID; receiving, from the server, the service identification information; and creating an object based on the received service identification information. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082145 | HARQ ACK/NACK TRANSMISSION FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Techniques for sending ACK/NACK information in a multi-carrier wireless communication network are disclosed. In one aspect, a plurality of ACK/NACK transmission techniques are selectively employed by a multi-carrier user equipment (UE) to reduce the number of bits of ACK/NACK information to send and/or increase the number of payload bits available for sending the ACK/NACK information. The ACK/NACK transmission techniques may include an orthogonal sequence reduction technique, a channel selection technique, a spatial bundling technique, a carrier bundling technique, and/or a subframe bundling technique. The ACK/NACK transmission techniques may be prioritized based on the number of carriers on which data transmissions are received, a payload size available for carrying ACK/NACK information, and/or other factors. The multi-carrier UE can utilize different ACK/NACK transmission techniques in connection with different subsets of its configured carriers. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082146 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OFFLOADING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a data packet transported on a backhaul link at a first network element; de-capsulating the data packet; identifying whether the data packet is an upstream data packet; identifying whether the data packet matches an internet protocol (IP) access control list (ACL) or a tunnel endpoint identifier; and offloading the data packet from the backhaul link. In more specific embodiment, the method can include identifying that the data packet does not match the IP ACL or the tunnel endpoint identifier; and communicating the data packet to a second network element. In other examples, the method can include identifying that the data packet is a downstream data packet; identifying a service to be performed for the data packet that cannot be performed at the first network element; and communicating the data packet to a second network element. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082147 | DETERMINING A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL FROM A PLURALITY OF POSSIBLE CHANNEL BANDWIDTHS - In a method of determining an available channel bandwidth in a communication system, wherein the communication system utilizes i) a set of component channels for transmitting data streams and ii) a set of access control channels, and wherein each of at least some of the access control channels partially overlaps, in frequency, at least one of the component channels, whether a primary channel of the access control channels is idle is determined. The primary channel partially overlaps, in frequency, at least a first one of the component channels. That a composite channel includes one or more of the component channels is determined based at least on a determination of whether the primary channel is idle. A signal is caused to be transmitted via the composite channel after determining that the composite channel includes one or more of the component channels. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082148 | System and Method Managing Hotspot Network Access of a Plurality of Devices - There is provided a system and method for managing hotspot network access for a plurality of devices. There is provided a mobile broadband hotspot comprising a processor configured to detect an occurrence of an event, determine a device from the plurality of devices to receive a notification of the event, determine a policy directed to the device, and execute the policy on the mobile broadband hotspot or on the device. Accordingly, by providing notifications of events to appropriate devices of the network, a better user experience is maintained. Moreover, the mobile broadband hotspot may transmit event notification to specific devices that may be affected by the execution of the policy in order to provide a better user experience for the users of those devices. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082149 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION AND DATA USING A PRECODING CODEBOOK FOR MULTICELL COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are a feedback-transmitting method and data-transmitting method, and a method for generating a codebook that can be used in a system such as LTE-A. When multiple base stations operate in a cooperative mode, using a codebook generated according to the present invention, an existing codebook for single cell transmission can be used to generate a codebook for cooperative transmission. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082150 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, METHOD, AND SYSTEM - A gateway receives a predetermined request from a terminal via a network, identifies the type of the terminal, reads a stream or a file, which includes at least one of a video and an audio, from at least one of an equipment connected directly to the gateway and an equipment connected to the gateway via a network, creates conversion information suitable for the type of the terminal, performs conversion for the stream or the file in accordance with the conversion information, and transmits the converted stream or file to the terminal. | 04-05-2012 |
20120087355 | METHODS AND DEVICES TO IMPLEMENT A REDUCED CONTENTION PERIOD TO FACILITATE CHANNEL ACCESS FOR ACCESS TERMINALS OPERATING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Methods and apparatuses are provided for implementing a reduced contention period to facilitate channel access for access terminals. An access point may send a frame to a plurality of access terminals specifying a time period during which at least some of the access terminals are to stop transmitting on a shared transmission channel. The access terminals may receive the transmission and may stop transmitting on the shared transmission channel for the specified time period. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087356 | TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP THROUGH A TUNNEL - One feature provides for a first station initiating a Tunnel Direct Link Setup (TDLS) link with a peer station within a network, by establishing a tunnel with the peer station, and establishing the TDLS link with the second station through the tunnel. The TDLS link may be implemented within the same layer of a protocol stack as the tunnel. Moreover, the network may comprise at least one access point that serves as an intermediary for transmissions between the first station and the peer station. Although the access point may be adapted to block Ethernet encapsulated TDLS frame transmissions having a TDLS Ethertype between the first station and the peer station, the first and peer stations are able to establish a TDLS link by transmitting and receiving TDLS Setup information through the tunnel by encapsulating the TDLS Setup information with, for example, PPP, PPTP, and/or L2TP tunnel schemes. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087357 | System and Method for Supporting Mobile Node Mobility - A system and method for supporting mobile node mobility are provided. A method for delivering a packet to a communications device having a destination address includes retrieving information related to the destination address from a second layer of a local portion of a distributed route information database, where the information includes binding information about the destination address and a care of address for the communications device in a visiting network to which the communications device is connected. The method also includes tunneling the first packet to the care of address. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087358 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENHANCED CONTENTION AVOIDANCE IN MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT WIRELESS NETWORKS - Wireless medium reservation for simultaneous transmission of multiple downlink spatial streams to multiple receiver wireless stations during a multi-user transmit opportunity over a wireless medium, is provided. Such a reservation includes reserving a transmission period for simultaneously transmitting data from a transmitting station to multiple intended receiving stations on multiple downlink spatial streams over a wireless communication medium. Reserving the transmission period includes transmitting a multi-user request-to-send (MU-RTS) frame to the multiple receiving stations, the RTS frame including a receiver address (RA) field comprising compressed addresses for the multiple receiving stations. The MU-RTS frame includes an indication field that indicates the RTS frame as an MU-RTS without altering the RTS frame type/subtype. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087359 | PACKET RADIO NETWORK AND METHOD - A packet radio network provides a facility for communicating internet packets to and/or from a mobile user equipment. In response to a packet data protocol activation request message requesting a common packet data protocol context, a serving support node is operable in combination with a gateway support node to establish a common packet data protocol context in association with a packet communications bearer. The common packet data protocol context is established to communicate internet protocol packets via the packet communications bearer according to an internet protocol version specified by the mobile user equipment for one or more communications sessions. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087360 | PACKET RADIO NETWORK AND METHOD - A packet radio network provides a facility for communicating internet packets to and/or from a mobile user equipment. In response to a packet data protocol activation request message requesting a common packet data protocol context, the serving support node is operable in combination with the gateway support node to establish a common packet data protocol context in association with a common packet communications bearer. The common packet data protocol context is established to communicate internet protocol packets via the common packet communications bearer. The common packet communications bearer is shared with at least one other communications session and is formed by the gateway support node and the serving support node using a common tunnelling protocol bearer. Therefore a packet radio network is provided which can provide a common communications bearer which can be shared between different communications sessions. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087361 | DATA FLOW CONTROL IN WLAN RADIO CONNECTIONS FOR THE IMPAIRMENT OF INTERNET TELEPHONY - In a method for controlling the data flow on a radio link between a WLAN base station and a WLAN mobile station, the data rate on the radio link is reduced for in each case one time period ( | 04-12-2012 |
20120087362 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS NETWORK SELECTION BY MULTI-MODE DEVICES - Systems and methods are provided for wireless network selection by multi-mode devices. A mobile device maintains an indication of any wireless network services currently provided to the mobile device. According to an embodiment of the application, the mobile device automatically scans for both GSM wireless networks and CDMA wireless networks in order to acquire a wireless network that can provide a service that is not currently provided to the mobile device. Therefore, the mobile device avoids partial service or limited service when better service is available. | 04-12-2012 |
20120093140 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) PHASE SHIFTER TRAINING - Aspects of a method and system for wireless local area network (WLAN) phase shifter training are presented. Aspect of the system may enable a receiving station, at which is located a plurality of receiving antennas, to estimate the relative phase at which each of the receiving antennas receives signals from a transmitting station. This process may be referred to as phase shifter training. After determining the relative phase for each of the receiving antennas, the receiving station may process received signals by phase shifting the signals received via each of the receiving antennas in accordance with the relative phase shifts determined during the phase shifter training process. Signals received via a selected one of the receiving antennas may be unshifted. The processed signals may be combined to generate a diversity reception signal. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093141 | PROXIMITY CONTROL USING WIFI CONNECTION - According to an aspect of the disclosure, a controller is disposed at a site and includes a communication device capable of establishing a WIFI network to communicate with a mobile device. The controller is further configured to detect the mobile device establishing or losing a WIFI connection with a WIFI network, alter an operating condition at the site in response to detecting the mobile device establishing the WIFI connection and alter an operating condition at the site in response to detecting the mobile device losing the WIFI connection. A method of proximity control using a WIFI connection includes detecting a mobile device establishing or losing a WIFI connection with a WIFI network, altering an operating condition of a site in response to detecting the mobile device establishing the WIFI connection and altering an operating condition of the site in response to detecting the mobile device losing the WIFI connection. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093142 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROAMING BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for roaming between a mobile node and at least one serving node connected to a network are disclosed. The present application provides a method for roaming between. In the system and method, a first communication is established between the mobile node and one of the serving nodes through a control server, when an Ethernet transceiver is used by the mobile node. Ethernet is used for communications between the mobile node and the control server, and a wireless communication technology for communications between the control server and the serving node. The control server also translates communications between Ethernet and the wireless communication technology. In the system and method, a second communication is established between the mobile node and one of the serving nodes with the wireless communication technology, when a wireless communication technology transceiver is used by the mobile node. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093143 | METHOD, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION - A method, equipment and system for implementing coordinated multi-point transmission are provided for resolving the problem that there exists phase noise in the signals received by a User Equipment (UE) end in coordinated multi-point transmission. The method for implementing coordinated multi-point transmission includes: obtaining phase differences between the current service cell and other coordinated cells by calculating channel cross-covariance matrixes between the current service cell and other coordinated cells in a coordinated multi-point transmission system ( | 04-19-2012 |
20120099566 | WIRELESS DOCKING WITH OUT-OF-BAND INITIATION - Example method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to enable out-of-band communications to be used in out-of-band initialization methods for simplified configuring of an in-band wireless docking environment for wireless devices. An example embodiment of the invention includes composing a wireless configuration for a plurality of devices in an in-band short-range wireless docking environment, by using out-of-band connections from a mobile device to the plurality of devices to send in-band short-range communication connection parameters including a timer value related to an expected completion time of a connection handover to in-band short-range communication. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099567 | USING ENCAPSULATION TO ENABLE 802.1 BRIDGING ACROSS 802.11 LINKS - In an example embodiment, packet encapsulation is employed to facilitate bridging between bridge ports that do not reflect frames (such as 802.1 compatible bridge ports) and bridge ports that do reflect frames (such as 802.11 compatible clients). Packets from a wireless access point may be sent twice, once with a predefined multicast address for processing by 802.11 clients contained in bridges, and once with the original destination address. In particular embodiments, additional means may be employed to minimize the circumstances where packets are duplicated. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099568 | FACILITATING DISTRIBUTED CHANNEL ACCESS FOR TRANSMISSIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Methods and apparatuses are provided for facilitating distributed transmissions among a plurality of access terminals for a transmission sequence. An access point may assign a predecessor transmitter device for each of a plurality of access terminals, and may transmit to each access terminal an instruction to follow a respective preceding transmission by the predecessor transmitter. An access terminal may receive the transmission including the instruction, and may monitor for and detect the preceding transmission. The access terminal may then transmit a transmission after the completion of an interframe space that may follow the detected preceding transmission. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099569 | Femtocell Configuration - A method and apparatus for configuring a first cellular base station such as a femtocell to operate in a digital cellular telecommunications network includes: placing the first cellular base station in the digital cellular telecommunications network; detecting with a radio receiver at least one second operating cellular base station within the digital cellular telecommunications network; demodulating a first transmission of the at least one second cellular base station transmitter to obtain a first data stream; predictively modifying the first data stream to create a modified first data stream; correlating at least one periodic portion of the modified first data stream to form an enhanced data signal; decoding the enhanced data signal to obtain information; and configuring the first cellular base station with the information. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099570 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD - A total of n signal processing circuits respectively constituted by independent circuit blocks process signals at the Data Link and Physical Layers. The signal processing circuits are associated with respective n groups of M/n subcarriers each, to process signals at the Data Link and Physical Layers. For example, the signal processing circuit independently processes signals of the subcarrier group at the Data Link and Physical Layers, the signal processing circuit independently processes signals of the subcarrier group at the Data Link and Physical Layers, and so on. The signal processing circuit independently processes signals of the subcarrier group at the Data Link and Physical Layers. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099571 | GENERIC MULTISERVICE NETWORK CENTRE FOR CREATING AND ORCHESTRATING NETWORK APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES - The present invention relates to a digital telecommunications system for creating, integrating, grouping, managing, deploying, activating and orchestrating mobile, fixed, IP, converged and next generation services and networks. Said system is called MULTI-SERVICE NETWORK CENTER ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099572 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING OPERATION OF COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile communication device includes a mobile communication interface that can perform data communication through a mobile communication network and a wireless LAN interface that can selectably operates as a station or an access point to perform wireless communication. A mobile communication device can perform control in a station mode of causing the wireless LAN interface to operate as a station and control in an access-point mode of relaying communication packets through the mobile communication interface and the wireless LAN interface so the wireless LAN interface operates as an access point. The mobile communication device autonomously switches an operation mode between the station mode and the access-point mode in accordance with a communication environment. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099573 | Roaming in Communications System - The present solution relates to providing a call service in a communication system, where in response to recognizing a predetermined event related to a user terminal (UEA), it is checked ( | 04-26-2012 |
20120099574 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM AND RELAY METHOD USING SAME - A communication device including a wireless local area network (LAN) interface and a wired LAN interface with a plurality of wired ports. The communication device obtains a media access control (MAC) address of a terminal connected to a wired port to relay communication between the terminal and a wireless device via the wireless LAN interface and the wired LAN interface by establishing an independent connection between the terminal and the wireless device using this MAC address. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099575 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMPLEX COMMUNICATION - A complex communication apparatus transmits/receives voice information with other complex communication apparatuses through a set voice channel. The complex communication apparatus broadcasts a signaling packet expressing a destination identifier representing a desired communication type of one-to-one communication, group communication, and broadcast communication with other complex communication apparatuses and information of the set voice channel and performs voice communication with a complex communication apparatus corresponding to a destination identifier of other complex communication apparatuses, having received the signaling packet. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099576 | PARALLEL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD, AND SYSTEM - An access point in a wireless network communicates with multiple mobile stations simultaneously using spatial-division multiple access. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099577 | Methods and Arrangements in a Telecommunications Network - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in a base station and a user equipment for determining an uplink transmission timing correction for communication in a telecommunication system in which aggregation of component carriers is applied. The base station receives a signal from the user equipment on a uplink (UL) component carrier and measures the arrival time of the signal. A timing correction of the UL transmission timing based on the arrival time of the signal is determined. Thereupon the base station determines for which of the uplink component carriers used by the user equipment the timing correction is valid. The timing correction and the validity information is sent to the user equipment. The user equipment adjusts the UL transmission timing for each UL component carrier the timing correction is valid for. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099578 | MOBILE STATION, POSITION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS, HOME BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A system includes a subscription storage that stores an APN for identifying a home base station and the service class available for a UE as subscription information, in correspondence with a mobile terminal identifier for identifying UE; a positional information update request receiver for receiving a positional information update request of UE | 04-26-2012 |
20120099579 | ZIGBEE GATEWAY AND IP SERVICE SERVER INTERWORKING WITH ZIGBEE GATEWAY THROUGH IP NETWORK - A Zigbee gateway connected to a Zigbee node by a Zigbee network and connected to an IP service server through an IP network includes a primitive transport layer module and a Zigbee network layer module. The primitive transport layer module of the Zigbee gateway extracts first data from a first primitive frame packet transferred through the IP network from the IP service server. The Zigbee network layer module receives the first data from the primitive transport layer module and transfers the first data to a Zigbee node. The IP service server interworking with the Zigbee gateway through the IP network includes a primitive transport layer module and a Zigbee application layer module. The primitive transport layer module of the IP service server extracts first data from a first primitive frame packet transferred through the IP network from the Zigbee gateway. The Zigbee application layer module receives the first data from the primitive transport layer module. | 04-26-2012 |
20120106523 | PACKET FORWARDING FUNCTION OF A MOBILITY SWITCH DEPLOYED AS ROUTED SMLT (RSMLT) NODE - A method, apparatus and computer program product for providing Routed Split Multi Link Trunking (RSMLT) for Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) tunnels is presented. A first and second network switch learn data associated with each other, wherein the first network switch and the second network switch operate concurrently. The first network switch terminates a WLAN Tunnel. The data is synchronized between the first network switch and the second network switch, wherein the data includes MAC Addresses, Internet Protocol (IP) interface addresses, Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) associations, WLAN tunnel assignments and Network switch Internet Protocol (IP) addresses. Load sharing of tunnel data packets is performed by the first and the second network switch. Tunnel control packets received by the second network switch are forwarded to the first network switch over an Inter Switch Trunk (IST). | 05-03-2012 |
20120106524 | TUNABLE POWER AMPLIFIER USING LAMINATE MEMS CAPACITORS - For use in a wireless network, a tunable power amplifier circuit includes a power amplifier transistor and a plurality of laminate MEMS (microelectromechanical system) capacitors coupled to the power amplifier transistor. The laminate MEMS capacitors are arranged in a tunable matching network and configured to provide a matching impedance for the power amplifier transistor. In some embodiments, the laminate MEMS capacitors are arranged in a binary array. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106525 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE HAVING A SINGLE BLUETOOTH / WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ANTENNA AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A mobile wireless communications device includes a wireless local area network (WLAN) radio configured to generate a WLAN transmit signal, and a Bluetooth radio configured to generate a Bluetooth transmit signal. A circulator is coupled downstream of an antenna. A transmit path couples the WLAN radio and the Bluetooth radio to the circulator such that the WLAN radio and the Bluetooth radio are capable of transmitting simultaneously. In addition, a receive path also couples the WLAN radio and the Bluetooth radio to the circulator such that the WLAN radio and the Bluetooth radio are capable of receiving simultaneously. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106526 | SWITCH MODULE - A switching module can route packets between a network fabric and a local network, both of which form a closed network such as a vehicular network. The switching module provides local network management functions, and handles packet transfers between the local network and the network fabric. The switching module uses network information, which can include information about packet content type and network topology, to determine a packet's priority, and an appropriate switching protocol to use for processing and routing packets. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106527 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF SHARING SETTING INFORMATION - A communication device configured to enable a setting process, performed with another communication device, for sharing setting information including information for settings of wireless communication to another communication device. The communication device includes a wireless LAN interface, a first wired connector, and an execution module that controls wireless communication with the another communication device and performs the first communication device's operation of the setting process when a second wired connector of the another communication device is connected to the first wired connector. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106528 | UNIFIED PROTOCOL STACK FOR COLOCATED WIRELESS TRANSCEIVERS - A system and method for accessing a wireless network via unified protocol stack. In one embodiment a wireless networking system includes a wireless device. The wireless device includes a first wireless transceiver, a second wireless transceiver, a processor, and a unified protocol stack. The first wireless transceiver is configured for communication via a first wireless network. The second wireless transceiver is configured for communication via a second wireless network. The unified protocol stack includes first protocols defined for accessing the first wireless network and second protocols defined for accessing the second wireless network. The unified protocol stack includes instructions that cause the processor to access the first wireless network via the first wireless transceiver using one of the second protocols. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106529 | Transmitting Data Between Nodes of a Wireless Network - In one embodiment, setting, by a first node, a settable data rate for a first part of a data frame, the data frame also having a second part having a defined second data rate, and transmitting, by the node, the first part at the set data rate and the second part at the second data rate, the first part including at least a portion of a payload of the data frame and the second part including an identifier based on the set data rate. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106530 | Multicarrier Radio Receiver and Method for Receiving Multiple Carriers - A radio receiver receives multiple radio frequency (RF) carriers where each RF carrier corresponds to a logical entity or object used in multi-carrier communications called a cell. A receiving radio node receives signals on serving cells, including a serving cell on a primary carrier and a serving cell on a secondary carrier, and on neighboring cells, including a neighboring cell on the primary carrier and a neighboring cell on the secondary carrier. Initially, a power delay profile is calculated for each of the serving cells and the neighboring cells. An association is determined between at least one cell on the primary carrier and at least one cell on the secondary carrier based on the calculated power delay profiles. The association is then later used in performing interference cancellation in the radio node. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106531 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING DESTINATION STATIONS IN WLAN SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT - A method of indicating destination stations, performed by an access point (AP), in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system supporting multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is provided. The method includes transmitting a sounding request frame to the plurality of destination stations to transmit a sounding frame used for channel estimation between the AP and each destination station, receiving the sounding frame in response to the sounding frame request from each station, and transmitting a first data frame spatially multiplexed with respect to the plurality of destination stations by performing channel estimation on the basis of the sounding frame, wherein the sounding request frame comprises a group identifier (ID) indicating the plurality of destination stations. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106532 | ASSOCIATION UPDATE MESSAGE AND METHOD FOR UPDATING ASSOCIATIONS IN A MESH NETWORK - An association update message for mesh networks according to the IEEE 802.11s standard provides the ability to include a plurality of associations in an association update message and thus ensure simultaneous updating of a plurality of associations of representative nodes with respect to the proxy nodes (proxy mesh stations) thereof. A threatened inconsistency in an association update in conventional systems, which provides for only one transmission of an association update message per association update, is thereby eliminated. The proxy information field has an identification field with a plurality of identification fields. The identification fields advantageously allow variable structuring of the proxy information fields, that is, dependent on the information transmitted, which also provides the ability to prevent redundant information in the proxy information fields. | 05-03-2012 |
20120113964 | REMOTE PARTICIPATION IN A LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) BASED MEDIA AGGREGATION NETWORK - Systems and methods relating to a Media Collection Aggregation System (MCAS) are provided. In one embodiment, a number of nodes are connected over a Local Area Network (LAN) to provide an ad-hoc MCAS network. At least some of the nodes in the MCAS network share locally stored media collections, or select subsets thereof, with the other nodes in the MCAS network. Each node in the MCAS network selects and aggregates one or more of the shared media collections to provide an aggregate media collection for that node. One of the nodes in the MCAS network is a proxy node that provides a proxy service that enables remote participation in the MCAS network. In one embodiment, the proxy node enables one or more remote nodes to passively and/or actively participate in the MCAS network. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113965 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING A WI-FI HOTSPOT FOR OFFLOADING WIRELESS TRAFFIC - A method and apparatus for locating a Wi-Fi hotspot for offloading wireless traffic from a cellular network are disclosed. For example, the method obtains network traffic data for the second type of wireless access network for a geographical area, and obtains a list of sectors in the geographical area. The method selects at least one sector from the list of sectors to be relieved, and determines a geographical range for the at least one sector. The method then obtains at least one hotspot of the first type of wireless access network within the geographical range, wherein the at least one hotspot is a potential location for offloading the wireless traffic from the second type of wireless access network. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113966 | METHOD TO MAINTAIN NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION (NAT) BINDING - A method to maintain Network Address Translation (NAT) binding is provided in the present invention, comprising a mobile terminal proactively initiating a connection request for establishing a link to a computing device via a wireless network, an edge NAT router connected to the wireless network, and other routers; the edge NAT router mapping a source address of a data packet from the mobile terminal to the source address of the edge NAT router, and mapping a destination address of the data packet from the computing device to the destination address of the mobile terminal, and maintaining the two address mapping relationships for a first time interval; the computing device sending a heartbeat packet to the mobile terminal according to a second time interval smaller than the first time interval, so a Time To Live (TTL) set value progressively decreases to 0 as the heartbeat packet reaches the edge NAT router, wherein the heartbeat packet sent by the computing device is used to maintain the mapping relationships of the addresses for the edge NAT router, thereby maintaining the link from the mobile terminal to the computing device, such that the heartbeat packet will not be sent down to the handheld device, thereby reducing as much consumption of the battery life and wireless air-interface resources as possible. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113967 | Frequency-Hopping Method for LTE Aperiodic Sounding Reference Signals - Methods and apparatus are provided to enable aperiodic sounding reference signaling including frequency hopping through the use of additional RRC configuration. The methods can require little or no additional L1 overhead to support narrowband frequency hopping for aperiodic sounding transmissions. In some embodiments, an approach is provided for extending an LTE periodic sounding reference signal methodology to include aperiodic sounding. One benefit of the proposed technique is that it enables each UE to perform aperiodic channel sounding in sounding subframes, using a frequency-hopping pattern, in which the sounding bandwidth of the UE can be narrowed appropriately to match its link capability. Additional benefits of the new approach include better resource utilization, lower signaling overhead, faster channel information update rates, and lower blocking probabilities. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113968 | MULTIPLE ACCESS METHOD AND SYSTEM OF TERMINAL IN EVOVLED PACKET SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a multiple access method and a multiple access system of terminal in Evolved Packet System (EPS). The multiple access method of terminal in EPS comprises the following steps that: a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) sends a first multiple access capability indication to a terminal, wherein the first multiple access capability indication denotes that the P-GW supports a multiple access; the terminal performs the multiple access according to the multiple access capability indication of the P-GW. The present invention avoids the waste of network resource and improves the experience of users. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113969 | PORTABLE ROUTER DEVICE - A portable router device for relaying a packet exchanged between a wide area network (WAN) and a local are network (LAN) device includes a WAN communication unit for connecting and communicating with the WAN, a LAN communication unit for connecting and communicating with the LAN device, and an application data converter for converting application data included in the packet transmitted from the WAN to the LAN device. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113970 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME - In a communication apparatus capable of communicating concurrently with a first network and with a second network different from the first network, the address of another communication apparatus in the second network is detected, whether the detected address is in use in the first network is confirmed and, when data is transmitted to the detected address in a case where it is confirmed that the detected address is in use, stores the fact that data will be transmitted to the second network. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113971 | EFFICIENT WLAN DISCOVERY AND ASSOCIATION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for discovering and associating with WLAN using Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS) frames. A mobile device may identify a WLAN access point associated with a location of the mobile device. The mobile device may transmit a Request to Send (RTS) frame to the access point and receive a CTS frame from the access point. The mobile device may determine that the access point is within range of the mobile device based on the received CTS frame. Some embodiments may provide for transmitting an association request frame to the access point in response to the received CTS frame. The association request frame may be transmitted to the access point in a time period associated with the CTS frame. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113972 | REMOTE RADIO DATA TRANSMISSION OVER ETHERNET - The invention discloses a method for transmitting data between a radio equipment (RE) and a radio equipment control (REC) of a radio base station via Ethernet. The method comprises in adaptive physical layer, adapting data frames complying with a remote radio protocol to Ethernet data frames that are suitable for transmission over Ethernet physical layer, and transmitting the adapted Ethernet data frames over the Ethernet physical layer. | 05-10-2012 |
20120120929 | TECHNIQUES FOR AUTONOMOUS WIRELES NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE ASSISTED LOCATION RESOLUTION - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method to resolve a location of nodes operating in a wireless network, comprising using a wireless network infrastructure of the wireless network to determine the location of the nodes by each location aware node distributing location information within the wireless network such that each node may learn its location directly from the infrastructure of the network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120930 | VEHICLE NETWORK SYSTEM INTERCONNECTING WITH A HOME NETWORK - The present invention provides a vehicle network system interconnected with a home network that includes a vehicle information collection unit and a wireless transceiver unit. The vehicle information collection unit detects accident information or management information of a vehicle and the wireless transceiver unit transmits information detected by the vehicle information collection unit to the home network via a wireless communication network and is configured to receive a response signal from the home network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120931 | EFFICIENT GROUP ID MANAGEMENT FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANS) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for efficiently managing overloaded group IDs for groups of stations (STAs) receiving simultaneous transmission in a multiuser multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) scheme. In this manner, overloading for some of the groups may allow flexibility at an access point (AP) to trade off between support for more STA combinations and power savings. As disclosed herein, the group ID management scheme may be flexible enough to support APs with both overloaded and non-overloaded groups and APs with only non-overloaded groups. This scheme also achieves these benefits for overloading with a low overhead. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120932 | MESSAGE-SENDING METHOD AND SERVING GPRS SUPPORT NODE - The present invention provides a message sending method and a serving GPRS support node. The method includes: when the SGSN, to which user equipment is connected, switches from a first SGSN to a second SGSN, the first SGSN sending to the second SGSN a message carrying context information of the user equipment, wherein the context information includes the gateway type of packet data network to which the user equipment is connected. The present invention achieves the effects that the new SGSN can acquire the gateway type of the packet data network PDN and correctly select the type of the interface in use according to the gateway type. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120933 | METHOD FOR ENHANCED RADIO RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK - A method for enabling a mobile terminal to access a wireless local area network, the method including: receiving, at the mobile terminal, a first set of data from a WLAN (wireless local area network) login server module of a public land mobile network, wherein the first set of data is related to authentication information required by the wireless local area network for granting access to the mobile terminal; storing, by a WLAN login client module of the mobile terminal, a second set of data related to the authentication information required by the wireless local area network within a subscriber identity module of the mobile terminal; and upon access to the wireless local area network being requested by the mobile terminal, transmitting, by the WLAN login client module, the authentication information from the mobile terminal to the wireless local area network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120934 | METHOD FOR TETHERING NETWORK CONNECTION, METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO NETWORK, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION GROUP APPLYING THE SAME - A method for tethering a network connection, a method for connecting a terminal included in a wireless communication group to an external network is provided. The method includes receiving routing information from a first terminal having an external network tethering function for connecting a second terminal in the wireless communication group with the external network through the first terminal; updating a pre-stored routing table according to the received routing information; and allowing the second terminal of the wireless communication group to use the external network through the first terminal with the updated routing table. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120935 | PACKET PROCESSING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Various packet processing systems and methods are disclosed. One method embodiment, among others, comprises providing a legacy long training symbol (LTS), and inserting subcarriers in the legacy LTS to form an extended LTS (ELTS). | 05-17-2012 |
20120120936 | MAINTAINING NETWORK AVAILABILITY FOR WIRELESS CLIENTS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - In an example embodiment, there is described herein a technique that provides network availability to wireless clients (e.g., wireless clients running mission critical applications such as voice applications or medical devices) when a portions of a network is unavailable, such as when performing an image upgrade. One or more access points are switched to a standalone mode of operation, for example an AP that can operate using HREAP (Hybrid Remote Edge Access Point) mode, for maintaining network availability while a portion of the network is unavailable. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120937 | RECEIVING AN IDENTIFIER OF A MOBILE STATION IN A PACKET-SWITCHED WIRELESS NETWORK - A packet-switched wireless communications network includes a radio network controller that receives, from a mobile station, a mobile station identifier over a wireless link. The radio network controller provides packet-switched services without providing circuit-switched services. A session is established, based on the mobile station identifier, between the radio network controller and a packet data service node that provides an interface to a packet-switched network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120938 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RESOLVING WIRELESS SIGNAL COMPONENTS - Methods and apparatus enabling a wireless network to generate data that can be used by a receiver (e.g., UE) to resolve the contributions of individual transmitters, such as to determine its location without resort to external devices such as GPS satellites. In one embodiment, the wireless network comprises a single frequency network (SFN), and a unique base station identifier is embedded within the data, and encoded in a manner which allows the UE to calculate path characteristics (such as path latency, and Direction of Arrival) to triangulate its position. In one variant, the data encoding comprises weighting frames of data from different base stations using an orthogonal matrix. Advantageously, the encoding and embedded identifier are also transparent to legacy UE, thereby allowing for implementation with no infrastructure or UE modifications other than software. Network and user apparatus implementing these methodologies, and methods of doing business, are also disclosed. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120939 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONVEYING TRAFFIC IN A PROXY MOBILE IP SYSTEM - A method and a device for conveying traffic by a network element comprising a first router instance and a second router instance are provided, wherein the traffic is conveyed between the first router instance and a network via a mobility anchor; and wherein the traffic is directly conveyed between the second router instance and the network. Furthermore, a communication system is suggested comprising said device. | 05-17-2012 |
20120127973 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SENDING ACKNOWLEDGMENTS THROUGH CONTROL CHANNELS TO PREVENT UNNECESSARY RETRANSMISSION IN A LIMITED BANDWIDTH WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for increasing throughput during a file sharing operation including a mobile device are provided. Throughput can be increased by reducing the number of times packets are retransmitted due to ACK signals being delayed due to the lossy nature of over-the-air transmissions. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127974 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTION OF A GATEWAY OF A LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A provided apparatus is caused to direct establishment of a connection of the apparatus with a core network via a wide area radio access network (RAN), where the core network is coupled to an external network. The apparatus is also caused to select or receive selection of a local area network that is coupled to the same or different external network via one or more local gateways (L-GWs). The apparatus is caused to request selection of a L-GW of the one or more L-GWs from the core network via the wide area RAN, and in response, receive an identity of a selected L-GW. Further, the apparatus is caused to direct contact with the selected L-GW based on the identity, and establishment of a connection of the apparatus with the selected L-GW. The apparatus may thereby be connected to the external network via the local area network and selected L-GW. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127975 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY PROVISIONING A FEMTOCELL - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a femtocell having a controller operable to establish communications with a gateway and transmit authentication information to the gateway. The gateway transmits the authentication information and a gateway identifier to a remote server to authenticate the femtocell. The controller is also operable to detect enablement of services responsive to the remote server identifying a subscriber account according to the gateway identifier, and the remote server authenticating the femtocell by comparing the authentication information to information retrieved from the subscriber account. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127976 | RADIO FREQUENCY IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED OPERATING METHODS - A method of operating a radio frequency identification (RFID) system is provided. The method interrogates RFID tags with an RFID reader and provides at least some of the collected tag data to a mobile device that is unable to communicate with RFID tags using the over-the-air interface. In some situations, the RFID system obtains the current location of the mobile device and determines the location of a target tag relative to the current location of the mobile device. Locating the target tag in this manner involves the interrogation of a reference tag located at the mobile device, along with the target tag, using one RFID reader. The position of the target tag relative to the reference tag is calculated in response to the tag response signals obtained from the target and reference tags. Moreover, location of the target tag can be independently determined relative to the location of a mobile reader, by using a reference tag attached to a fixed reader or to the mobile reader. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127977 | SYNCHRONIZATION OF TIME IN A MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORK - Methods and systems are disclosed herein for synchronizing network time in a mobile ad-hoc network (MANET). Each node in the MANET may be synchronized with all of its neighbors for effective communications. More specifically, a local timing reference may be adjusted according to measured errors in incoming control packets so that time slotted transmissions can be scheduled without collisions with other nodes. The method and system is a low overhead protocol that only requires a small amount of data attached to each scheduled transmission avoiding the requirement for separate messaging. This may reduce the overhead of maintaining the MANET providing additional efficiency and robustness. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127978 | RANGE EXTENSION TECHNIQUES FOR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Techniques for extending transmission range in a WLAN are described. In an aspect, a receiving station determines the frequency error between a transmitting station and the receiving station based on one or more initial packet transmissions and corrects this frequency error for subsequent packet transmissions received from the transmitting station. The residual frequency error is small after correcting for the frequency error and allows the receiving station to perform coherent accumulation/integration over a longer time interval to detect for a packet transmission. The longer coherent accumulation interval improves detection performance, especially at low SNRs for extended transmission range. The techniques may be used whenever the receiving station knows the identity of the transmitting station, e.g., if the subsequent packet transmissions are scheduled. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127979 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HARDWARE ACCELERATION IN A HYBRID WIRED/WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Aspects of the invention may be found in a system and method for hardware acceleration in a hybrid wired/wireless local area network. In according with various embodiments of the invention, hardware acceleration may comprise creating at least one policy to be distributed among one or more of a plurality of access point groups. At least one policy may be associated with a particular one of the access point groups. The associated policy may be identified and distributed to one or more access points in an access point group. The distribution of the policy may be conditioned on the occurrence of an event. An identified policy may be distributed to a particular access point group upon occurrence of the event. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127980 | Wireless Network Notification, Messaging and Access Device - Disclosed is the transmission of data other than an identification of the wireless network (non-network id data) in a network identification field (NIF) of a wireless frame. The wireless transmitting device (Tx) may generate a wireless frame according to a network protocol and place a representation of the data in the NIF of the frame. The Tx may insert in the frame an indication that the data is non-network id data and transmit the frame over a wireless network according to the network protocol. The indication may be provided by the values of one or more fields of the frame. The receiving device may recognize that the NIF contains non-network id data and may extract the data from the NIF. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127981 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING PACKETS ON A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Provided are a method and an apparatus for transmitting a packet in a wireless local area network (LAN), the method including determining whether a packet, which does not expire during the current transmission opportunity (TXOP) but will expire before a next TXOP is secured, exists or not based on a time-to-live (TTL) of the packet; if it is determined that the packet does not expire during an expansion of the current TXOP, expanding the current TXOP; and transmitting the packet to a receiving station. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127982 | ACCESS POINT AND METHOD FOR AGGREGATE MPDU (A-MPDU) AND POWER-SAVE MULTI-POLL (PSMP) OPERATION - Embodiments of wireless devices and methods for aggregate MPDU (A-MPDU) communications in an IEEE 802.11n network are generally described herein. Two or more A-MPDU subframes are aggregated to form an A-MPDU. In some embodiments, an access point (AP) that is configured for power-save multi-poll (PSMP) operation transmits a PSMP burst comprising a PSMP sequence of two or more A-MPDUs to a plurality of mobile stations (STA) during a downlink phase of the PSMP sequence. During PSMP operation, the AP is to receive a PSMP sequence of two or more A-MPDUs from the STAs during an uplink phase of the PSMP sequence. | 05-24-2012 |
20120134345 | Systems and Methods of Supporting Emergency Communications - Systems and methods for supporting E911 for VoIP mobile communications are provided. A mobile station formats a call setup message by including particular information in a header portion of the call setup message that is used by the wireless network to select an appropriate PSAP and route the call to the appropriate PSAP. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134346 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM NETWORK EQUIPMENT WITH BROADCAST-BASED BACKHAUL NETWORK INTERFACE AND NEXT GENERATION AIR INTERFACE - Network equipment of a wireless communication system comprises a backhaul interface for communicating with a broadcast-based backhaul network and an air interface for communicating with a plurality of mobiles. The network equipment is configured to serve as a proxy on the broadcast-based backhaul network for at least a given one of the mobiles that communicates with the network equipment over the air interface, by determining an IP address for the given mobile and sending a broadcast message over the broadcast-based backhaul network advertising itself as the proxy in association with the IP address. The network equipment may comprise at least a portion of a base station of the wireless communication system. The broadcast-based backhaul network may comprise a local area network that operates in accordance with an Ethernet protocol, and the air interface may comprise an LTE air interface or a WiMAX air interface. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134347 | ROUTING METHOD FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS AND WIRELESS MESH NETWORK SYSTEM USING THE SAME - In the wireless mesh network including a sender, a receiver, and a plurality of access points disposed between the sender and the receiver, available transmission paths between the sender and the receiver are determined; transmission expected values are calculated for the transmission paths; and a transmission path having a minimum transmission expected value is set as an actual transmission path. The transmission expected value is a sum of expected transmission counts, which is a reciprocal of multiplication of forward transmission success rate and backward transmission success rate of a communication link between the nodes disposed on the transmission paths. When an access point can transmit a packet concurrently with another access point, the expected transmitted count is reduced by half. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134348 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING POSITION OF SENSOR NODE IN LOCATION SERVICE BASED SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for determining a position of a sensor node in a location service based system are provided. An operation method of a Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) Location Platform (SLP) for determining a position of a sensor node in a location service based system includes receiving a position determination request for a sensor node from an SUPL agent, interworking with a Location Registration Server (LRS) and acquiring routing information of the sensor node, sending a position determination start request for the sensor node to a gateway mapped to the sensor node using the acquired routing information, and interworking with the gateway and determining the position of the sensor node. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134349 | DEVICE DISCOVERY METHOD AND APPARATUS OF WI-FI P2P DEVICE - A device discovery method and apparatus of a Wi-Fi Peer-to-Peer (P2P) device for improving connection compatibility with legacy devices are provided. The method includes receiving a command for executing a modified P2P device discovery mode, configuring the Wi-Fi P2P device as a group owner autonomously, entering a group owner receive mode in which a probe request can be received, and discovering an external device which transmits the probe request. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134350 | System, Computer Program Product And Method For Accessing A Local Network Of Electronic Devices - A method of managing electronic devices includes providing a main server including software for managing network resources from a single point of administration, receiving at the main server wireless data packets from a plurality of wireless electronic devices, and determining a registered device among the plurality of wireless electronic devices. The registered device is then wirelessly connecting to the main server to create a wireless local area network (LAN), and is managed using the software. The registered device may be an appliance, an environmental control device, or an entertainment device and the LAN may be a home or office LAN. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134351 | Short Messaging Service Over 3GPP Long Term Evolution - The application relates to SMS over LTE radio access. Several alternatives are already known, such as specified in 3GPP TS 24.247 which supports text messaging capabilities and 3GPP 23.204 which supports all existing SMS capabilities through SMS encapsulation in IP. Furthermore, 3GPP 23.272 which relates to SMS in CS fallback. A further technique is known as Generic Access Network which is under study in 3GPP 23.879 relating to CS domain services over evolved PS access and in Voice Over LTE VOLGA. The present application provides a solution for handling messages between legacy networks in the form of circuit-switched networks and IP network architecture in the form of an IP Multimedia Subsystem IMS while minimizing the efforts needed for system integration by maximal reuse of existing functionalities. This is achieved by an entity ( | 05-31-2012 |
20120140748 | END POINT CONTROL METHOD - A method is provided for enabling wireless switches to discover wireless lighting/appliance fixtures in a mesh network across layered subnets of a wireless personal area network (WPAN) via a software pairing sequence agent (PSA) incorporated within one of the wireless switches and each of the lighting/appliance fixtures. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140749 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A SUBSCRIBER'S ZONE INFORMATION - Systems and methods for delivering customized content to wireless service subscribers are disclosed. According to the disclosed embodiments, wireless access points can be grouped into various zones. Some of all of these zones can be further associated with predefined service types or other customized attributes. When a wireless subscriber connects to an access point in a given zone, the subscriber can be provided with content and/or services based on the zone to which he is connected. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140750 | Device, method and related device for obtaining service content for personal network equipment - The present disclosure relates to a device and a method for a personal network equipment to obtain content, as well as related devices. In the technical solution of the present disclosure, the requests for the same content from multiple personal network equipments in the same WPAN within the set period of time are combined into a single request, the content is correspondingly sent one time according to the combined single request, and the requested content is distributed to each of the personal network equipments, such that the corresponding content only needs to be sent one time rather than multiple times when the multiple personal network equipments in the WPAN request the same content, thereby saving the transmission resources significantly. Since the same requests are processed in the set period of time, the real-time requirement for the personal network equipment to obtain content is basically not affected while the transmission resources are saved. Furthermore, the request processing unit provided in the present disclosure may be located either at a personal network gateway or at a system side, which provides a flexible choice for specific applications and thus has great practicality. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140751 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FRAME SEQUENCE NUMBER, NODE B AND SERVICE RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting a frame sequence number and a node B and a serving radio network controller, which method comprises: a node B receiving a protocol data unit from a carrier and de-multiplexing the protocol data unit into media access control data streams; the node B inserting a carrier symbol into a carrier indicator field of an enhanced-dedicated transport channel data frame and generating a frame sequence number for every the enhanced-dedicated transport channel data frame transmitted on the carrier; and the node B transmitting the media access control data streams to a serving radio network controller SRNC by using the enhanced-dedicated transport channel data frame. By virtue of the present invention it achieves that the SRNC is capable of obtaining the information regarding network layer data transmission in dual-carrier situation so as to detect the loss of data frames. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140752 | VEHICLE MOBILE GATWAY FOR CONTROLLING CHARGING OF ELECTRICVEHICLE USING MOBILE TERMINAL, ELECTRIC VEHICLE HAVING THE SAME, ANDMETHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHARGING OF ELECTRIC VEHICLE USING MOBILETERMINAL - Disclosed are a system and method allowing a user to control charging of an electric vehicle by using a mobile terminal in a remote area without the help of a charge station or a power management center. An electric vehicle controlled to be charged by using a mobile terminal includes: an electric vehicle main body; a battery unit installed in the electric vehicle main body and storing power upon receiving it from a charge station; and a vehicle mobile gateway installed in the electric vehicle main body and including a wireless communication unit performing radio communication with a mobile terminal and a battery unit controller electrically connected to the wireless communication unit to exchange data so as to allow the mobile terminal to control charging of the battery unit in a remote area and a calculation processing device to control the battery unit. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140753 | METHOD FOR CHANNEL SOUNDING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A channel sounding method in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The method, performed by a transmitter, includes transmitting a null data packet announcement (NDPA) frame to a receiver to initiate a channel sounding procedure; transmitting a null data packet (NDP) to the receiver and receiving a feedback frame. The feedback frame includes a plurality of segment frames and a channel feedback report. The channel feedback report is split into a plurality of feedback segments. Each of the plurality of feedback segments is respectively included in each of the plurality of segment frames. The each of the plurality of segment frames includes a first-segment subfield indicating whether the each of the plurality of feedback segment included is a first segment and a remaining-segment subfield indicating the number of remaining feedback segments. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140754 | METHOD FOR DIRECTIONAL ASSOCIATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product operable in a wireless communication system are provided in which an access probe is generated for transmission to a wireless node. A first signal is generated for transmission to the wireless node. The first signal includes information corresponding to a first preferred beam pattern from the wireless node to the apparatus. A second signal is received from the wireless node including information corresponding to a second preferred beam pattern from the apparatus to the wireless node. The second preferred beam pattern is determined based on the access probe. The apparatus communicates with the wireless node using at least one of the first preferred beam pattern or the second preferred beam pattern. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140755 | WIRELESS LAN DATA RATE ADAPTATION - A WLAN communication system and algorithm that adaptively changes the data transmission rate of a communication channel based on changing channel conditions. The WLAN communication system or algorithm has two modes being a searching mode and a transmission mode. Furthermore, the WLAN communication system or algorithm incorporates an additive increase, multiplicative decrease (AIMD) function into the rate adaptation algorithm. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140756 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION BETWEEN NETWORK MANAGEMENT ENTITIES OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and wireless communication system may be used for transferring management information. An access point (AP) may transmit a management information base (MIB) information request including a category field and an action details field to a wireless transmit/receive (WTRU). In response to receiving the information request, the WTRU may determine whether or not to provide management information to the AP. When the WTRU provides management information to the AP, the WTRU may compile management information stored in a MIB located in the WTRU and transmit a MIB information report to the AP. The MIB may list a plurality of tables containing information associated with radio resource management (RRM) and at least one table containing physical layer measurements. The AP may include a MIB for storing MIB information of the WTRU. The AP may transmit the stored MIB information of the WTRU in response to a request. | 06-07-2012 |
20120147862 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC FILTERING OF DEVICE POINT INFORMATION AS A FUNCTION OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINT LOCATION - In an embodiment, information relating to a plurality of wireless access points, a plurality of building zone controllers, and a plurality of zones is received into a building management system (BMS) server. Each wireless access point is associated with a particular zone that includes a particular group of building zone controllers. Data relating to a wireless access point with which the personal communication device is in communication is received into the BMS server from a personal communication device. The BMS server automatically transmits to the personal communication device information relating to a plurality of devices located in a first zone. The first zone is associated with the wireless access point with which the personal communication device is in communication. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147863 | METHOD OF VALIDATING 1X PACKET AVAILABILITY IN A VEHICLE TELEMATICS UNIT - A method of communicating with a telematics-equipped vehicle includes receiving a circuit-switched telephone call at a central facility from a telematics-equipped vehicle via a wireless carrier system that is in local communication with the telematics-equipped vehicle; determining during the circuit-switched telephone call that a separate packet-data communication session between the telematics-equipped vehicle and the central facility is desired; identifying the wireless carrier system that is in local communication with the telematics-equipped vehicle; querying the identified wireless carrier system from the central facility to determine whether the telematics-equipped vehicle is authorized to establish a packet-data communication session using the identified wireless carrier system; if so, obtaining an Internet protocol (IP) address from the identified wireless carrier system; and commencing the exchange of data between the telematics-equipped vehicle and the central facility using the obtained IP address. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147864 | Synchronous Data Transmission in Hybrid Communication Networks for Transportation Safety Systems - A hybrid communication network for a transportation safety system includes a wired network including a set of fixed nodes. Each fixed node includes a wired interface for connecting the fixed node to the wired network and at least one wireless interface. The set of fixed nodes further includes a head node at a first end of the wired network connected to a controller, a terminal node at a second end of the wired network, and a set of relay nodes arranged between the head node and the terminal node. A wireless network includes a set of mobile nodes and a set of fixed nodes connected to the wired network. Each mobile node includes at least one of the wireless interfaces, and each mobile node is arranged in a moveable car. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147865 | VIDEO CACHING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Video caching in a wireless communication network includes determining | 06-14-2012 |
20120147866 | FRAME FORMAT TECHNIQUES FOR NON-RESOLVABLE LONG TRAINING FIELDS IN WIRESLESS NETWORKS - An embodiment of the present invention provides non-resolvable long training field (LTF) formatting methods used in wireless networks, comprising defining the non-resolvable LTF frame format so that a transmission of VHT-SIG-B is aligned for all users, thereby requiring that a VHT-LTF portion of a packet be of a same duration for all users. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147867 | SERVERLESS MULTICAST VOICE ENHANCED BARCODE SCANNER ARCHITECTURE - A mobile device is described that includes a control for activating a function of the mobile device. The function includes a Push-to-Talk function and/or a Push-to-Scan function of the mobile device. A processor executes the function when the control is activated. A transceiver is coupled to the processor. The transceiver is capable of communicating with at least one networked device over a local area network using voice over internet protocol (VoIP). A memory is coupled to the processor for storing instructions to execute the function by the processor. The processor executes the Push-to-Talk function in a first mode of operation and the Push-to-Scan function in a second mode of operation. The mobile device is part of a system that is also described. The system consists of a VoIP Push-to-Talk infrastructure, either server based or serverless. The mobile device described provides Push-to-Scan functionality over the existing VoIP infrastructure. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147868 | Methods and Apparatus for Process Control with Improved Communication Links - The invention provides, in some aspects, an improved control network (or portion thereof) that includes a plurality of nodes, each associated with respective control devices (e.g., controllers, actuators, sensors, etc.). Each of the nodes also includes one or more radios supporting wireless communications pathways with one or more of the other nodes, which pathways together form at least part of a mesh network. At least a first one of the nodes wirelessly transmits information simultaneously, or substantially simultaneously, over at least two pathways formed in a mesh network to a second one of the nodes. The radio(s) of the first node, according to related aspects of the invention, sends that information wirelessly at different frequencies along each of those pathways. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147869 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING RESETS DURING HANDOVERS IN A SINGLE FREQUENCY DUAL CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method, apparatus, and computer program product can provide for procedures at an access terminal for handling the delivery of packets from the MAC entity to the RLC entity, with an aim to reduce the occurrence of RLC resets that might otherwise be caused by out-of-order processing of control packets following a serving cell change. In one example, a MAC entity may insert an identifier into a packet delivered up to the RLC entity, to indicate whether the packet arrived from the current primary serving cell. In another example, a serving cell change procedure may include steps to flush a queue at the MAC entity and kill any running reordering release timers. In these ways potential problems caused by out-of-order control packets can be reduced or avoided. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147870 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A WLAN TERMINAL AND A HUMAN INTERFACE DEVICE - The exemplary embodiments of the present invention relate to a method and apparatuses corresponding to a WLAN terminal and a wireless human interface device (HID), for enabling communication between the WLAN terminal and HID. According to the method, the WLAN terminal can receive data frames directly from the HID and these frames are compliant with the WLAN standard protocol. The frames are received even if the WLAN terminal is associated with an AP and the HID does not support infrastructure mode. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147871 | Wireless Network System - A wireless network system provided with a setting change instruction unit transmitting setting change instructions to all of the client systems based on a setting change request of the wireless network from a single client system and a wireless communication control system side setting content update unit updating the wireless network setting content in the wireless communication control system in synchronization with the processing of the setting change instruction unit. Each of the client systems is provided with a setting change instruction reception unit receiving a setting change instruction from the setting change instruction unit and a client system side setting content update unit updating the wireless network setting content in the client system based on the setting change instruction received by the setting change instruction reception unit. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147872 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REMOTELY ACCESSING - The invention provides a method and system for remotely accessing. A mobility management device receives a remote access requesting message sent by User Equipment (UE), determines whether the UE possesses right for accessing a home network under the control of a home base station according to contents in the remote access requesting message, when determining the UE possesses the right, selects a GateWay (GW) device. Technical scheme of the invention enables a subscriber to remotely access a home network, even if the subscriber is not in the home network. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147873 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR SYNCHRONIZING SUBORDINATE CARRIER CELL - Disclosed are a method and a terminal for synchronizing a subordinate carrier cell, which method comprises the following steps of: after a terminal receives an activation uplink subordinate carrier order from a service node B, the terminal, with the current time as a reference, carrying out synchronization in a cell in an activation set of the enhanced dedicated channel of the subordinate carrier under a non-service node B at a first time point after having carried out delay according to an acquired subordinate carrier activation processing offset time period. The present technical solution reduces the time delay required by synchronization and inter-cell interference and enables the cell capacity and coverage to be unaffected. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147874 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION USING NETWORK ENFORCED, MOBILE IMPLEMENTED POLICY - Route optimization is based on a network enforced, and mobile implemented, policy. A communication session between a mobile device and an access router is established. First and second IP addresses to be assigned to the mobile device are received by the mobile device via the established communication session, as is a set of rules. The mobile device evaluates at least one parameter of the communication session against the set of rules to determine which of the IP addresses to use to communicate with an external device, and proceeds to communicate with the external device using the selected IP address based upon the evaluation result. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147875 | Base Station Controlling Apparatus and Communication System - A base station controlling apparatus | 06-14-2012 |
20120147876 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155442 | Method and System for Efficient Homeless MPLS Micro-Mobility - A method performed by a network element for providing micro-mobility in a network to a mobile node including the steps of receiving a registration request message at the mobility anchor point from an access router that is currently coupled to the mobile node, wherein the registration request message includes an endpoint identifier of the mobile node and a local care-of address of the mobile node, establishing a label switch path (LSP) between the mobility anchor point and the access router, storing the endpoint identifier in a binding entry along with the local care-of address, a regional care-of address, the label switch path and an egress interface, advertising the endpoint identifier with associated regional or local care-of address of the mobile node, and forwarding data packets, received at the mobility anchor point from a corresponding node that have the regional or local care-of address, to the mobile node using the LSP. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155443 | MILLIMETER-WAVE COMMUNICATION STATION AND METHODS FOR STATION AND INFORMATION DISCOVERY IN A MILLIMETER-WAVE BASIC SERVICE SET - Embodiments of a millimeter-wave communication station and methods for station and information discovery in a millimeter-wave (mmW) basic-service set (BSS) are generally described herein. In some embodiments, a station-capability information element (IE) may be transmitted to a central coordinator of the BSS during association to provide station-capability information to the central coordinator. An information-request action frame may be transmitted to either discover or request information about the one or more other mmW stations. An information-response action frame may be from the target station that includes the requested information. Accordingly, mmW devices of the BSS may be able to discover each other and exchange station-capability information so that devices can communicate directly. A simplified and unified frame-format scheme for both station and information discovery suitable for use in a mmW WPAN or in a mmW WLAN is thus provided. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155444 | METHOD FOR ELIMINATING INTERFERENCE IN A RECEIVER, AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS - A method for eliminating interference in a receiver (RX) includes: obtaining Bluetooth (BT) information and wireless local area network (Wireless LAN, WLAN) information by performing detection on at least one RX signal, wherein the RX signal is received through an antenna of the RX, and the RX signal includes components of both a BT signal and a WLAN signal that are respectively emitted from at least one transmitter (TX); and performing maximum likelihood (ML) joint detection on frequency representatives of the RX signal according to the BT information and the WLAN information and according to a predetermined library, in order to extract at least one of a reproduced version of the BT signal and a reproduced version of the WLAN signal. An associated apparatus is also provided. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155445 | MOBILE PHONE/DOCKING STATION CALL CONTINUITY - A mobile device establishes a first network connection via a first communication interface when the mobile device is in a first docking status with a docking station. The mobile device sends Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) traffic associated with a VoIP call via the first network connection, and activates a second network connection via a second communication interface when the mobile device is in the first docking status, where the second network connection is different than the first network connection. The mobile device re-directs the VoIP traffic via the previously activated second network connection based on a change in docking status of the mobile device with the docking station to a second docking status. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155446 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system includes: a plurality of mobile terminals; a plurality of transceivers, each of the transceivers performing wireless communication with a mobile terminal; a plurality of baseband processors which modulates data to be transmitted to one of the transceivers and demodulates data received from one of the transceivers; a switch which switches the connection of the transceivers and the baseband processors; and a controller which calculates an operation rate of the transceivers and the baseband processors, respectively, continues or stops a power supply for driving the transceivers and the baseband processors in accordance with a calculation result of the operation rate, and controls the switch to reconnect the transceivers coupled to one of the baseband processor of which the power supply has been stopped to another baseband processor of which the power supply is continued. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155447 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MODULATION-CODING SCHEME SET IN VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for designing Modulation-Coding Scheme (MSC) set fields in a transmission frame of Very High Throughput (VHT) wireless systems. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155448 | Vehicular mobile router method - A vehicle, comprises a vehicle network bus and a mobile router. The mobile router comprises a local area network interface comprising a first wireless transceiver of a first predetermined type to provide a link to first a local area network and a wide area network interface comprising a second wireless transceiver of a second predetermined type to provide a link to a wide area network. One of the wide area network interface and the local area network interface is selectively operable to establish a wireless communication link with a network management system comprising a communication server. The router further comprises an application executable by at least one processor to selectively acquire predetermined data from the vehicle network bus. The communication agent is operable to upload the predetermined data to the network management system. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155449 | Mobile router network providing remote emissions testing - A network is provided comprising a network management system, a third party server, and a plurality of mobile routers. The network management system comprises at least one server; and a link to a wide area network. Each mobile router is disposed in a corresponding one vehicle of a plurality of vehicles and each mobile router is operable to selectively communicate with the network management system. The network management system is operable to selectively communicate with each mobile router and the third party server. The router comprises an application executable to selectively acquire predetermined data comprising vehicle emission data; and a communication agent operable to upload the predetermined data to the network management system. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155450 | Mobile router network - A network is provided comprising a network management system, and a plurality of mobile routers. The network management system comprises at least one server and a link to a wide area network. Each mobile router is disposed in a corresponding one vehicle of a plurality of vehicles and is operable to selectively communicate with the network management system. The network management system selectively communicates with each mobile router. Each mobile router comprises: a local area network interface to provide a link to first a local area network comprising a first client device; a wide area network interface to provide a link to the wide area network; at least one processor to control operation of the router. The wide area network interface is operable to establish communication link with the network management system. An application executable by the at least one processor selectively acquires predetermined data. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155451 | WIRELESS LAN DEVICE - The present invention provides a LAN device | 06-21-2012 |
20120163352 | FIELD OPTIMIZED, CONFIGURABLE WIRELESS FIRE SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for setting up a fire alarm system. The method includes the steps of coupling a user interface to a wireless fire detection system having a wireless gateway and a plurality of wireless fire detectors, receiving a selection through the user interface of a wireless transmission parameter used in transmitting messages between the wireless gateway and the plurality of wireless fire detectors, determining a latency time value associated with use of the received selection of the wireless transmission parameter in the transmission of messages between the wireless gateway and the plurality of fire detectors, displaying the calculated latency time value on the user interface and changing an operating mode of the plurality of wireless fire detection devices in accordance with the received selection. In addition to latency, the fire alarm system may receive a selection and determine the battery life and sensor/output device capacity that is possible and display these parameters for the benefit of a user. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163353 | REVERSE PROTOCOL FOR LOW LATENCY WIRELESS APPLICATIONS - Embodiments of a system and method for communicating according to an IEEE 802.11 standard or a WiGig specification. The method includes identifying a message that requires a response from another station in less than a threshold amount of time, and that the other station cannot likely respond to within a point coordination function (PCF) interframe sequence (PIFS). The message also includes setting a reverse direction (RD) response time field in a header of an MPDU corresponding to the message to a value indicating that a response from the other station is not required within a short interframe sequence (SIFS). | 06-28-2012 |
20120163354 | SINGLE MPDU FRAME SIGNALING - Embodiments of systems and methods for providing single MPDU frame signaling are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163355 | COGNITIVE RADIO COOPERATIVE SPECTRUM SENSING METHOD AND FUSION CENTER PERFORMING COGNITIVE RADIO COOPERATIVE SPECTRUM SENSING - Provided are a cognitive radio (CR) cooperative spectrum sensing method and a fusion center (FC) performing CR cooperative spectrum sensing. The CR cooperative spectrum sensing method includes receiving, at an FC, local spectrum sensing information about a predetermined frequency band from each of N secondary users (SUs) in a predetermined zone, determining, at the FC, the optimum number of SUs for determining whether the predetermined frequency band is being used by a primary user (PU) on the basis of the received local spectrum sensing information, and performing cooperative spectrum sensing on the basis of local spectrum sensing information received from the optimum number of SUs in the predetermined zone. The method is implemented by the FC. Accordingly, the method and FC find how many SUs are needed to determine that a frequency of a PU is being used in a corresponding-channel situation, thereby enabling efficient communication. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163356 | IMPLICIT BEAMFORMING USING PARTIAL CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - A method for communication includes, in a first communication station, receiving from a second communication station via multiple antennas an input signal having a spectrum that occupies an initial set of spectral bins. An extended set of the spectral bins, which includes the initial set and one or more additional spectral bins, is defined. Based on the received input signal, respective beam steering matrices are computed for the spectral bins in the extended set, including the additional spectral bins. The output signal is generated over the extended set of the spectral bins, including the additional spectral bins, using the respective beam steering matrices. The output signal is transmitted from the first communication station via the multiple antennas. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163357 | METHOD OF RETRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PACKETS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Provided is a method of retransmitting and receiving a packet in heterogeneous network environment. A terminal and a relay base station receive a packet transmitted from a macro base station, and the relay base station informs the terminal of whether the packet is successively received or not. When the packet fails to be received, the terminal is configured to receive the erroneous packet again from at least one of the macro base station and the relay base station. The macro base station and the relay base station may be configured to retransmit the packet through joint processing JP) transmission, and the terminal may be configured to receive the JP transmission. Thus, the method allows the m optimization of a HARQ process and scheduling scheme to efficiently utilize a relay and radio resources, thereby leading to a maximum capacity and quality of wireless network. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163358 | END DEVICE AND ROUTING METHOD FOR THE END DEVICE IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A routing method in a wireless communication network, and more particularly, a method of efficiently routing an end device included in the wireless communication network is provided. The wireless communication network may provide data communications using multiple communication devices, and the communication devices may be defined by standards such as ZigBee, and IEEE 802.15.4. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163359 | BODY COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL BRIDGE, BRIDGE APPARATUS, AND OPERATING METHOD OF BRIDGE APPARATUS - A human body communication system is disclosed, which includes a plurality of intra-body communication apparatuses, a plurality of extra-body communication apparatuses, a bridge apparatus, and an access point. The bridge apparatus manages connections between the intra-body communication apparatuses and the extra-body communication apparatuses, and performs packet exchange. The access point performs packet exchange between a plurality of bridge apparatuses. The bridge apparatus performs negotiation with communication apparatuses to set up a connection, and manages a path based on the connection setup. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163360 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING ACCESS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for supporting access for a multi user to perform communication through a multi node by efficiently using a multi channel in a communication system of a multi user environment having the multi node, in which bands usable by STAs that intend to access an access point are searched in a multi channel; a transmission band for packet transmission is determined in the searched usable bands; and access to the access point is supported through the determined transmission band, and the transmission band is determined by performing ad-hoc through an ad-hoc media access control (MAC) protocol in the searched usable bands. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163361 | Vehicle with mobile router - A vehicle, comprises a vehicle network bus and a mobile router. The mobile router comprises a local area network interface comprising a first wireless transceiver of a first predetermined type to provide a link to first a local area network and a wide area network interface comprising a second wireless transceiver of a second predetermined type to provide a link to a wide area network. One of the wide area network interface and the local area network interface is selectively operable to establish a wireless communication link with a network management system comprising a communication server. The router further comprises an application executable by the at least one processor to selectively acquire predetermined data from the vehicle network bus. The communication agent is operable to upload the predetermined data to the network management system. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163362 | PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BASED ON WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a network interworking system and method. That is, a header size is minimized through a fragment of an IPv4 packet based IP packet and a header compression and it is implemented such that the IPv4 is loaded in an IEEE 802.15.4 MAC/PHY packet having a small payload, so that it is possible to efficiently transmit an IPv4 packet by using an IEEE 802.15.4 based WPAN. Further, various applications can be executed using the IPv4 while using an IEEE 802.15.4 technology, which is a low power communication technology, in a mobile device. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163363 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MINIMIZING SIGNAL INTERFERENCE BETWEEN BROADCASTING SIGNALS AND COMMUNICATION SIGNALS WITHIN LOCAL AREA AND APPARATUS APPLIED TO THE SAME - Disclosed is a system and a method for minimizing signal interference for a broadcasting and communication convergence section within a local area, and an apparatus applied to the same. The system has a construction of mounting a plurality of multi RF (Radio Frequency) channels within a local area wireless communication apparatus located in a local area and minimizing signal interference between mutually adjacent RF channels within the local area wireless communication apparatus in a standard for providing a broadcasting and communication convergence service. Accordingly, it is possible to remove the mutual channel effects affecting a communication signal without signal interference for adjacent channels due to a broadcasting signal and it is not necessary to enhance a filtering characteristic for the adjacent channels of a chipset, which corresponds to a broadcasting and communication convergence standard structure in a local area, so that there is an advantage of reducing network investment costs. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170556 | COEXISTENCE MECHANISM FOR COLLOCATED WLAN AND WWAN COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Wireless radio devices that communicate in close proximity to each other typically suffer from interference. Such interference between collocated wireless radio devices can lead to degradation in performance of one or both of the wireless radio devices. Functionality can be implemented to coordinate communications of collocated WLAN and WWAN devices to minimize interference between the WLAN device and the WWAN device. The WLAN device can determine a WLAN communication time interval associated with the WLAN device for performing WLAN communication operations and a WWAN communication time interval associated with the WWAN device for performing WWAN communication operations. In response to determining that the WLAN communication time interval is in progress, WLAN communication operations can be performed at the WLAN device. In response to determining that the WLAN communication time interval is not in progress, the WLAN device can delay performing the WLAN communication operations. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170557 | COEXISTENCE MECHANISM FOR COLLOCATED WLAN AND WWAN COMMUNICATION DEVICES - Wireless radio devices that communicate in close proximity to each other typically suffer from interference. Such interference between collocated wireless radio devices can lead to degradation in performance of one or both of the wireless radio devices. Functionality can be implemented to coordinate communications of collocated WLAN and WWAN devices to minimize interference between the WLAN device and the WWAN device. The WWAN device can determine a WWAN communication time interval associated with the WWAN device for performing WWAN communication operations and a WLAN communication time interval associated with the WLAN device for performing WLAN communication operations. In response to determining that the WWAN communication time interval is in progress, WWAN communication operations can be performed at the WWAN device. In response to determining that the WWAN communication time interval is not in progress, the WWAN device can delay performing the WWAN communication operations. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170558 | Method and System for Wireless Access Point Radios Integrated in a Cable - A wireless access point (AP) radio may be integrated in a cable. The cable may comprise one or more other integrated wireless AP radios. The cable may be communicatively coupled to a wireless controller and the wireless AP radio may receive power from the wireless controller via the cable. Feature information and/or configuration parameter settings may be received by the wireless AP radio from the wireless controller via the cable. The wireless AP radio may provide wireless communication services such as wireless access to a wired network for one or more client devices, based on the feature information and/or the configuration parameter settings. When one or more adjacent wireless AP radios in the cable become non-operational, the wireless AP radio may increase its transmission power to increase its coverage for covering at least a portion of coverage area associated with the one or more non-operational adjacent wireless AP radios. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170559 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OUT-OF-BAND DELIVERY OF WIRELESS NETWORK CREDENTIALS - At a server, a user account established by a user of an AP hosting device is associated with information sufficient to permit a CLIENT to join a WLAN of which the AP is a part. The CLIENT is provided, via an OOB network different from the WLAN, the information sufficient to permit the CLIENT to join the WLAN of which the AP is a part, which information may include a unique identifier for the AP hosting device and information indicative of a network key for the WLAN (e.g., a secret key associated with the AP hosting device, a network key for the WLAN, or information that permits generation of the network key for the WLAN). Thereafter, the CLIENT may use the subject information to join the WLAN of which the AP is a part. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170560 | METHOD OF ESTIMATING LOCATION OF MOBILE DEVICE IN TRANSPORTATION USING WiFi - A method for estimating a location of a mobile device located in means of transportation is provided. The method includes: developing a first database by linking ID information of the means of transportation with ID information of an access point (AP) installed in the means of transportation, the AP being a mobile AP allowing access to a wireless WAN through WiFi; developing a second database by linking ID information of the means of transportation with service information of the means of transportation, the service information including route and timetable information; acquiring WiFi reception information generated by the mobile device equipped with a WiFi module, the WiFi reception information including ID information of an AP transmitting a WiFi signal; extracting the ID information of the means of transportation in which the mobile device is located using the acquired WiFi reception information and the first database; and estimating a location of the mobile device using the extracted ID information of the means of transportation and the second database. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170561 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication system includes a first wireless apparatus, a second wireless, a profile determining apparatus and a priority determining apparatus. The first wireless apparatus transmits a first signal, and the second wireless apparatus transmits a second signal, where the first wireless apparatus and the second wireless apparatus conform to different communication standards, respectively. The profile determining apparatus couples the first wireless apparatus and generates a profile signal according to a profile of first wireless apparatus. The priority determining apparatus couples the first and the second wireless apparatuses, according to the profile applied to determine a transmission priority. Wherein, the wireless communication system bases on the transmission priority to determine the first wireless apparatus or the second wireless apparatus in a signal transfer coexistence mechanism to transfer signals. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170562 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Communication stations in a network each transmit a beacon signal that includes network information. The beacon signal sets a state in which a reception operation is performed, before and after the transmission of the beacon signal. The reception operation occurs during access control, so as to avoid collision with communication timings of packets from another communication station, by detecting signals transmitted from other communication stations. States set in the communication stations are transitioned between a transmission state and a reception state based on a fluctuating volume of transmission and reception data. Data accumulations at transmitting communication stations and delays at receiving communication stations are reduced, and low latency data transfer is achieved using minimal levels of transmission and reception operations. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170563 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING THROUGHPUT OF 5 MHZ WLAN TRANSMISSIONS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for improving a transmission throughput of communications based on IEEE 802.11af physical (PHY) layer in television white space (TVWS) spectrum. In one aspect, a transmission preamble with a Legacy Signal (L-SIG) field is constructed, wherein the L-SIG field comprises a code indicating duration of a cyclic prefix (CP) of a packet following the preamble. The transmissions can be performed using 5 MHz bandwidth of the TVWS spectrum. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170564 | FRAME FORMATION METHOD HAVING IMPROVED COMMUNICATION EFFICIENCY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR IN-BODY MEDICAL DEVICE - Disclosed herein is a method of forming communication frames. The communication frames each include a PHY header, a MAC header and a payload. The method includes forming the PHY header so that the PHY header includes information configured to support synchronization with a reception unit and information indicative of the start and overall size of the frame; forming the MAC header so that the MAC header includes information indicative of the type of frame, information configured to be used to check for the sequence of the frame and perform flow control, flag information, information indicative of the size of the data block, source and destination information, and information configured to be used to check the header of the frame for an error and correct the error; and forming the payload so that each of a plurality of data blocks includes information configured to perform error check and correction. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170565 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE FRAME TRANSMISSION FOR SUPPORTING MU-MIMO - A method of transmitting multiple frames in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system supporting multi user-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) is provided. The method comprises transmitting a first frame and a second frame consecutively to a first station (STA) and transmitting a third frame and a fourth frame consecutively to a second STA, wherein a transmission start time of the first frame and a transmission start time of the third frame are aligned to each other, and wherein a transmission start time of the second frame and a transmission start time of the fourth frame are aligned to each other. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170566 | COEXISTENCE MECHANISM FOR WIMAX AND IEEE 802.11 - A network device includes a first communication module and a second communication module. The first communication module communicates with a first device using a first wireless communication standard. The first communication module receives data from the first device during a first time period and transmits data to the first device during a second time period. The second communication module communicates with a second device using a second wireless communication standard. The second communication module receives a block of packets from the second device during the first time period. The second communication module transmits an acknowledgement to the second device during the second time period when the block of the packets is received. | 07-05-2012 |
20120177016 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING WIRELESS NETWORK CONTROLLER - Devices, systems and methods of selecting a station of a wireless network to perform the role of the wireless network controller or control point. The station may receive a request to check the capabilities of the station in order to select the wireless network controller wherein the request includes sending station capabilities values. The station checks the station capabilities by comparing the station self capabilities values with the sending station capabilities values in descending capabilities priority order and if the station capability value is higher than the sending station capability value then the station may selects the station with the highest capability value as the wireless network controller. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177017 | TRANSMISSION RULES WITHIN A TXOP FOR WIDER BANDWIDTH OPERATION - A method of communicating in a wireless network comprises controlling a bandwidth or a transmission mask of a PPDU transmitted by a transmitting STA to a receiving STA within a TXOP based on bandwidth information in at least one preceding frame within the TXOP. The method and associated devices allow a control of TXOP bandwidth or transmission mask where devices capable of both dynamic and static bandwidth operation may be present within the network. The preceding frame may include a non-HT frame of a non-HT duplicate frame exchange, such as a non-HT duplicate RTS/CTS exchange or a BAR/BA exchange, where the bandwidth or the transmission mask would be controlled by being limited to be less than or equal to a bandwidth of the non-HT frame. The preceding frame may include a preceding PPDU, where the bandwidth or the transmission mask would be limited to be less than or equal to a bandwidth of the preceding PPDU. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177018 | PROTOCOL FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a low-overhead method for communicating Channel State Information (CSI) feedback in Very High Throughput (VHT) wireless communications systems. The present disclosure also provides packet formats for Null Data Packet Announcement (NDPA), CSI Poll and CSI feedback. In some cases, the CSI feedback may be too large to be carried in a single Media Access Control (MAC) protocol data unit (MPDU) or a Physical Layer (PHY) protocol data unit (PPDU), and a proposed protocol for CSI feedback segmentation can be then utilized. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177019 | Cyclic Shift Delay Techniques For WLAN Multi-Radio Devices - The present disclosure includes systems and techniques relating to wireless local area network devices. A described technique includes configuring separate radio pathways, which are operable for either contiguous or non-contiguous frequency transmissions, to collectively produce a composite signal in a contiguous frequency mode; generating, via first and second radio pathways, first and second frequency segments of the composite signal in accordance with a segment bandwidth, the second frequency segment being contiguous with the first frequency segment in a frequency domain; applying, via the first and second radio pathways, first and second cyclic shift delay (CSD) phase shifts to the first and second frequency segments to produce first and second output signals, respectively. The first and second CSD phase shifts are equivalent to CSD phase shifts that correspond to a contiguous non-composite signal having a single frequency segment. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177020 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE HAVING NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTION AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING CONNECTION MODE BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND ACCESS POINT - An electronic device having network connection function includes a receiving unit and a control unit, where the electronic device and an access point support a plurality of connection modes. The receiving unit is utilized for receiving a signal from the access point. The control unit is utilized for selecting a specific connection mode from the plurality of connection modes according to a determination result generated by determining whether the signal satisfies a predetermined condition, and starting to connect to the access point by using the specific connection mode, where a data rate of the specific connection mode is not a highest data rate among that of the plurality of connection modes. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177021 | Communication and Information Systems and Methods - A system, method, and device provide a remote communications platform. In one embodiment, an information and communication transmission system includes a communication device and a router. The router is connected to the communication device. In addition, the router is able to communicate with a WiFi capable device and/or an Ethernet capable device. The communication device communicates with a transmission receiver. The information and communication transmission system also includes a power supply. The power supply provides power to the communication device and the router. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177022 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD OF SHARING SETTING INFORMATION - A wireless local area network (LAN) system that includes first and second devices that performing a sharing operation of sharing setting information for establishing a wireless LAN connection. The first device includes a first notification module that notifies a ready status for the sharing operation between the first device and the second device prior to performing the sharing operation, and a first instruction receiving module that receives an instruction for performing the sharing operation in cooperation with the second device after the notifying by the first notification module. The second device includes a second notification module that notifies a ready status for the sharing operation between the first device and the second device prior to performing the sharing operation, and a second instruction receiving module that receives an instruction for performing the sharing operation in cooperation with the first device after the notifying by the second notification module. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177023 | Wireless Protocol Converter - Methods and apparatuses for interfacing between broadband wireless communication systems and Local Area Network (LAN) systems are disclosed herein. For instance, the method can include receiving wireless data formatted according to the LAN protocol. The LAN-formatted data can be converted to a broadband wireless communication protocol (e.g., a wide area network, a cellular telephone communication network, a broadband satellite communication network, or a combination thereof) to generate broadband protocol data. Further, the broadband protocol data can be transmitted to one or more wireless devices. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177024 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS PREVENTING COMMUNICATION INTERFERENCE - A game apparatus according to a preferred embodiment includes a first wireless communication module and a second wireless communication module. The first wireless communication module performs communication utilizing Bluetooth protocols, whereas the second wireless communication module performs communication utilizing IEEE protocols. The first radio communication module and the second radio module have a common reference communication cycle, and each communicates in communication cycles of an integral multiple of the reference communication cycle. A control unit sets offset time between the start time of a communication by the first wireless communication module until the start time of a communication by the second wireless communication module. In so doing, the control unit monitors the communication load of the first wireless communication module and sets the offset time based on a monitored result. | 07-12-2012 |
20120182978 | System and Method For Managing Routers and Communication Interfaces On A Computing Device - An apparatus and method are described for managing router and communication interfaces. For example, one embodiment of a method implemented on a computing device having a plurality of communication interfaces comprises: receiving a plurality of router advertisement packets indicating a preference level of each of a plurality of routers, each of the plurality of routers reachable through one of the communication interfaces on the computing device; designating one of the communication interfaces as a primary interface and the remainder of the communication interfaces as scoped interfaces; specifying a primary router for the primary interface based on a preference level associated with the primary router, the primary router selected from a group of all of the routers reachable through the primary interface; and specifying a default router for each of the scoped interfaces based on a preference level of each default router, each default router selected from a group of all of the routers reachable through its scoped interface. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182979 | PERFORMANCE IN A DUAL BSS ENVIRONMENT - An integrated circuit includes logic configured to adjust an original service time of a first Wi-Fi Basic Service Set connection (“BSS”), out of a plurality of BSSs configured to be associated with a communication device, to an adjusted service time based on an unsuccessful acknowledgement transmission or reception in a previous service time on the first BSS. At least one of the plurality of BSSs is supportive of a peer-to-peer connection. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182980 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SAVING POWER BY USING SIGNAL FIELD OF PREAMBLE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for power saving at mobile stations in Very High Throughput (VHT) systems using signal field bits of a preamble with a limited transmission overhead. The present disclosure proposes a method of indicating to a destination through a preamble cyclic redundancy check (CRC) checksum that the destination may be the intended destination of a transmission packet. The present disclosure also proposes a method of indicating to a destination through a preamble CRC that the destination may not be the intended destination of a transmission packet. In this case, decoding of the received packet can be terminated in order to save power at a receiving device. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182981 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZATION - A terminal which is compatible with another terminal and is capable of performing data synchronization without a separate server, and a synchronization method using the same is disclosed. The terminal may directly connect to another terminal and receive data therefrom. The received data is synchronized with the terminal. If the received data does not suit the playback environment of the terminal, a playback tool or conversion tool may be received from a server. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182982 | ACCESS POINT WITH SIMULTANEOUS DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION OF INDEPENDENT DATA FOR MULTIPLE CLIENT STATIONS - A wireless network device includes modulation modules, each configured to receive a data stream and modulate the data stream to generate a modulated data stream. A matrix module generates a multiplexing matrix based on channel conditions between the wireless network device and each of a plurality of client stations, and applies the multiplexing matrix to each of the modulated data streams to generate multiplexed data streams. The wireless network device also includes summing modules, each configured to sum at least two of the multiplexed data streams to generate a transmit data stream. A first transmitter transmits a first one of the transmit data streams during a downlink transmission period to a first one of the client stations. A second transmitter transmits a second one of the transmit data streams to a second one of the client stations while the first transmitter transmits the first one of the transmit data streams. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182983 | METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING CLOSELY-SPACED PACKETS IN WLAN DEVICES AND SYSTEMS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) device transmits a header over an air interface, at a first modulation rate. The header may include an indication of a second modulation rate that will be used to transmit a consolidated payload. The device further transmits the consolidated payload at the second modulation rate. The consolidated payload includes multiple data units. In one embodiment, the consolidated payload includes delimiters with validation fields associated with the various data units. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182984 | NETWORK ALLOCATION - Included are embodiments for network allocation. More specifically, one embodiment of a method includes receiving, at a first communications device, without a prior RTS signal being sent, a first clear to send (CTS) signal from a second communications device, addressed to the first communications device, the CTS signal indicating a data exchange duration and sending a second CTS signal, from the first communications device, to the second communications device. | 07-19-2012 |
20120188990 | Method for aggregating media access control addresses using a summary media access control address(es) - In frame switched communication networks, information is forwarded from a source to a destination based on a destination address. In IEEE 802 networks these addresses are called Media Access Control (MAC) addresses. MAC addresses identify the source and destination station of each frame, however typically don't contain any subfields which identify the physical or logical location (or subnetwork) of the station. Such an address can be called a flat address. The entities of networks using IEEE 802 MAC addresses don't have methods for aggregating MAC addresses or for forwarding frames based on aggregates rather than station MAC addresses. The use of station MAC addresses for frame forwarding limits the scaling, lowers the efficiency, reduces the security and raises the cost of these networks. The method described here solves the MAC address aggregation problem by using a summary MAC address to represent an aggregate of summarized MAC addresses. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188991 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Controlling An Access Point Mode Of Operation For A Mobile Terminal - Techniques for use in controlling an access point mode of operation of a mobile terminal are described. Initially, the mobile terminal operates in the access point mode of operation for communication with one or more other mobile terminals. While operating in the access point mode, the mobile terminal receives, from the one or more other mobile terminals, network information comprising one or more network identifiers which identify one or more wireless networks within coverage of the one or more other mobile terminals. The mobile terminal disables the access point mode of operation in response to identifying that at least one of the received network identifiers corresponds to a predetermined wireless network or predetermined type of wireless network. In one example, the mobile terminal is operative in accordance with IEEE 802.11, the received network identifiers comprise service set identifiers (SSIDs), and the predetermined wireless network is an enterprise network. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188992 | INTERFERENCE CONTROL SYSTEM FOR SIMULTANEOUSLY SUPPORTING LOW POWER COMMUNICATION AND HIGH SPECTRAL EFFICIENT COMMUNICATION - Provided are a method and apparatus for controlling signal interference between networks in a personal area network. In one embodiment, an interference control apparatus may include: a cooperation determining unit configured to determine whether to perform a wireless cooperation with a neighboring mobile hub that manages a neighboring sensor node, based on a magnitude of an interference signal from the neighboring sensor node; a transmitter configured to transmit, to the neighboring mobile hub via a first communication link, first information received from a target sensor node; a receiver configured to receive the first information from the target sensor node via a second communication link, and to receive second information from the neighboring mobile hub via the first communication link; and a decoding unit configured to perform wireless cooperative multi-user decoding based on the first information and the second information. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188993 | Managed Access Point Protocol - Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating deployment and configuration of managed access points in hierarchical wireless network systems. An embodiment of the invention facilitates deployment and configuration of conventional, substantially autonomous access points operating in connection with a central management node, such as a server or appliance. In another embodiment, the present invention facilitates deployment and configuration of light-weight access points in a hierarchical wireless network system. In one embodiment, the present invention also provides a streamlined encryption key exchange protocol adapted to hierarchical wireless network system architectures. | 07-26-2012 |
20120195294 | MANAGING ACCESS GATEWAYS - Systems and methods for the management of communications related to telecommunications-based devices are provided. Gateway computing devices corresponding to a radio communication network can modify the static provisioning of communication network access gateway to telecommunications-based devices accessing the wireless communication network. The modification of the static provisioning of gateway devices is based on subscription information associated with the requesting telecommunications-based device or based on general network policies that can be dynamically updated. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195295 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFICATION OF MOBILE DEVICE USERS IN AN AREA OF A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - A method and system for determining that a first mobile communication device that is part of a designated group is in a proximate location to a second mobile communication device that is part of such designated group, by comparing an identifier or a MAC address of an access point that is detected by the first device with an identifier or MAC address of an access point that is detected by the second device. If both devices detect a presence of a same access point, as is indicated by the MAC addresses of the access point, a signal is sent to at least one of the devices to indicate that the devices are in proximate locations. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195296 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - According to embodiments, a wireless communication apparatus supports at least a second wireless communication scheme between a first, wireless communication scheme and the second wireless communication scheme. The first wireless communication scheme requires that a wireless medium is determined to be busy when a reception level is equal to or greater than a minimum reception sensitivity level of physical scheme. The apparatus includes a first processing unit and a second processing unit. The first processing unit is configured to set a value lower than a maximum transmission power of the first wireless communication scheme, for a maximum transmission power of the second wireless communication scheme and set a value greater than the minimum reception sensitivity level, of the physical scheme, for a carrier sense level, when the second wireless communication scheme is used. The second processing unit is configured to carry out carrier sense using the carrier sense level. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195297 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ANTENNA OF INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a plurality of connectors, a plurality of amplifiers and a plurality of amplifier controllers. The plurality of amplifiers amplify outputs from a plurality of antennas connected to the plurality of connectors, respectively. The plurality of amplifier controllers control gains of the plurality of amplifiers, respectively. Each of the plurality of amplifier controllers comprises a determination module, a notification module and a gain adjustment module. The determination module determines a reception status of a corresponding one of the plurality of antennas. The notification module notifies one or more other amplifier controllers of the reception status determined by the determination module. The gain adjustment module adjusts a gain of the corresponding one of the plurality of amplifiers based on the reception status notified from the one or more other amplifier controllers. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195298 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO AVOID IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to avoid in-device coexistence interference in a user equipment (UE) that is equipped with a first radio based on LTE radio technology or LTE-Advance radio technology, and a second radio based on an alternate radio technology. In one embodiment, the method comprises including an assistant information in a UE Capability Information message sent to an evolved node B (eNB) for in-device coexistence interference avoidance. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195299 | METHODS FOR SUPPORTING USER EQUIPMENT ACCESSING LOCAL IP SERVICES AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - Methods and apparatus are provided for supporting Local IP Access (LIPA) services to a User Equipment (UE). A network node receives a request for accessing a PDN which is identified by an APN of a service access point, from the UE. The network node determines whether the UE is permitted to access LIPA services via a CSG base station based on LIPA accessibility information. The network node determines whether requirements for connecting the UE to the LIPA services are met based on the LIPA accessibility information and device capabilities of a serving base station of the UE, when the UE is permitted to access the LIPA services. The LIPA services are activated for the UE, when the requirements for connecting the UE to the LIPA services are met. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195300 | PROCEDURE FOR WIRELESS NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - There is provided a procedure for wireless network management and a station supporting the procedure. In the procedure, non-AP station which wants to us a traffic filter service (TFS) transmits a TFS request message including one or more TFS request elements for defining information about the requesting traffic filters to an access point (AP). And, the non-AP station receives, from the AP in response to the first TFS request message, a TFS response message including one or more TFS response elements for defining information about the status of the requesting traffic filters. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195301 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING, TRANSMITTING, AND RECEIVING A DATA FRAME IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a technique relating to a method and apparatus for generating, transmitting, and receiving a data frame having a newly proposed format in a wireless communication system. According to the technique, the method for generating a data frame in a wireless communication system comprises the following steps: generating at least one first subframe; generating at least one second subframe; and generating a data frame including the first and second subframes, wherein the first and second subframes include length information of a MAC protocol data unit (MPDU) contained in the first and second subframes, and the length information of the MPDU contained in the second subframe is zero. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195302 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING DATA IN A MIMO SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transceiving data. A method in which a transmitting terminal transmits data to a receiving terminal in a MIMO system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the following steps: generating a data field containing the data; generating a signal field containing information on the data field; generating a data frame containing the data field and the signal field; and transmitting the data frame to the receiving terminal. According to the present invention, an end of the frame being transmitted is accurately notified to the receiving terminal in a communication system in which the frame is transmitted using MIMO, thereby decoding the frame in a more efficient manner at the receiving terminal. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201232 | Network Identification and Display Based on Local Information - A telecommunication device configured to build a list of cells of a telecommunication network that are associated with a specific network type is described herein. The list of cells may be stored locally on the telecommunication device. Also, the telecommunication device may be configured to determine that the cells are associated with the specific network type based on a data connection and to continue displaying an indicator associated with the specific network type despite interruption or completion of the data connection. Additionally, the list of cells may be built by a cloud service and provided to the telecommunication device. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201233 | Method of Handling Ownership Transfer and Related Communication - A method of handling ownership transfer in owner transfer procedure in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system includes a server, at least one personal network gateway and at least one personal network entity. The method includes sending an owner change notification message from the server to the at least one personal network gateway, and sending the owner change notification message from the at least one personal network gateway to the at least one personal network entity. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201234 | BLUETOOTH AND WLAN COEXISTENCE ARCHITECTURE HAVING A SHARED LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER - A radio frequency front-end includes a first path, second path, and third path each coupled between an antenna and a transceiver. The first path is configured to convey WLAN signals from the transceiver to the antenna for transmission. The second path is configured to convey received Bluetooth signals and received WLAN signals from the antenna to the transceiver. The third path is configured to convey Bluetooth signals from the transceiver to the antenna for transmission when a WLAN link is active and not in a power save state, and is configured to convey received Bluetooth signals from the antenna to the transceiver, and Bluetooth signals from the transceiver to the antenna for transmission, when the WLAN link is either inactive or in the power save state. | 08-09-2012 |
20120207139 | MULTI-COMMUNICATION MODE PACKET ROUTING MECHANISM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The transmission range of a network communication device can be extended by enabling transition between legacy and non-legacy communication protocols. A communication device can receive a packet in a legacy packet format from a host device via a legacy network interface. In response to determining that the packet received via the legacy network interface is to be transmitted using one of a plurality of non-legacy communication protocols, a processing path within the communication device in accordance with which to process the packet for transmission using the non-legacy communication protocol is determined. The packet in the legacy packet format is reformatted to yield a target packet in a non-legacy packet format based, at least in part, on the non-legacy communication protocol. The target packet is provided to the destination network device in accordance with the non-legacy communication protocol. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207140 | METHOD FOR GENERATING AND TRANSMITTING FRAME IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING THE SAME - A channel sounding method in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The method, performed by a transmitter, includes transmitting a null data packet announcement (NDPA) frame to a receiver to initiate a channel sounding procedure; transmitting a null data packet (NDP) to the receiver and receiving a feedback frame. The feedback frame includes a plurality of segment frames and a channel feedback report. The channel feedback report is split into a plurality of feedback segments. Each of the plurality of feedback segments is respectively included in each of the plurality of segment frames. The each of the plurality of segment frames includes a first-segment subfield indicating whether the each of the plurality of feedback segment included is a first segment and a remaining-segment subfield indicating the number of remaining feedback segments. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207141 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PLUG AND PLAY, NETWORKABLE ISO 18000-7 CONNECTIVITY - A device may comprise a Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface and a wireless interface operable to communicate in accordance with the ISO 18000-7 standard. The device may be operable to receive a command via the USB interface and transmit the command via the wireless interface. The device may be operable to receive data via the wireless interface and transmit the data via the USB interface. A form factor of the USB device may be such that it can be plugged directly into a USB port without any external cabling between the USB device and said USB port. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207142 | MOBILE ROUTER NETWORK SYSTEM - A networked mobile router system comprises a plurality of mobile routers; and a main server operable to track and monitor the plurality of mobile routers. Each mobile router is initially configured to communicate with the main server and is operable to establish first communication with the main server to register with the main server to upload configuration information from each the mobile router to the main server. The main server is operable in response to each mobile router registering with the main server to assign each mobile router with a predetermined group. Each mobile router is operable to establish a second communication with the main server. The main server is operable in response to each mobile router second communication to reassign each mobile router to communicate with at least one group server assigned to communicate with the predetermined group. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207143 | QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR WLAN AND BLUETOOTH COMBINATIONS - A hybrid device includes both an IEEE-802.11e type WLAN client station (QAP) and a BLUETOOTH piconet unit interconnected such that the BLUETOOTH transmissions are scheduled to occur according to a transmission opportunity (TXOP) that was granted by a quality of service (QoS) access point (QAP) in a basic service set (BSS). Requests for BLUETOOTH traffic are handled by the associated QSTA which generates an add traffic service (ADDTS) to the QAP. | 08-16-2012 |
20120213211 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT MAC ADDRESS PRIVACY - The present disclosure describes techniques for using varying MAC addresses to provide wireless access point MAC address privacy. A wireless access point may be configured to generate a random (or pseudo-random) MAC address to use on a wireless-side interface (and SSID broadcast), rather than using the burned-in MAC address. The wireless access point may be further configured to periodically change the wireless-side MAC address with a newly generated one whenever user-configurable triggering conditions are satisfied. As a result, a MAC address learned by a wi-fi sniffing device becomes obsolete shortly after being learned and cannot be used to correlate the actual location of the access point with the MAC address for any significant period of time. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213212 | LIFE STREAMING - A system and method for analyzing, summarizing, and transmitting life experiences captured using a life recorder is described. A life recorder is a recording device that continuously captures life experiences, including unanticipated life experiences, in video and/or audio recordings. In some embodiments, the video and/or audio recordings generated by a life recorder are automatically summarized, indexed, and stored for future use. By indexing and storing life recordings, a life recorder may search for and acquire life recordings generated by itself or another life recorder, thereby allowing life experiences to be shared minutes or even years later. In some embodiments, recordings generated by a life recorder may be analyzed in real-time and automatically pushed to one or more target devices. The ability to automatically and instantaneously push life recordings as live feeds to one or more target devices allows friends and family to experience one's life experience in real-time. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213213 | METHOD OF PAIRING COMPUTER AND WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method of pairing a computer and a wireless electronic device includes the following steps. Firstly, a predetermined media access control address is received. A service set identifier of a wireless local network is established according to the predetermined media access control address. At least one packet is received. Then, a judging step is performed to judge whether the media access control address of the first packet matches the service set identifier. Afterwards, a response packet is transmitted to the wireless electronic device. By recording the media access control address of the wireless electronic device, the wireless electronic device to be paired can be accurately paired with the computer. It is more time-saving by using the pairing method of the present invention because the time period of selecting a to-be-paired wireless electronic device is not necessary. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213214 | DATA TRANSMISSION COEXISTENCE WITHIN TELEVISION WHITE SPACE CHANNELS - Methods, systems, and/or devices are provided that permit data transmissions over unused television channels. An unused channel within a television broadcast frequency spectrum is first identified. A downclocked waveform (for data transmission) is then generated by applying a factor to a clock that causes a waveform bandwidth to be reduced from a first bandwidth to a second bandwidth, wherein the second bandwidth of the downclocked waveform is less than a channel bandwidth for the identified unused channel. The downclocked waveform may then be configured so that it coexists with a larger waveform having a third bandwidth that is greater than the channel bandwidth. The downclocked waveform is then wirelessly transmitted from the transmitter device over the identified unused channel. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213215 | MOBILE STATION TRAFFIC ROUTING - Devices, networks and methods relating to routing gateway traffic in a mesh network for wireless access. A mesh network has multiple nodes in at least one gateway node through which all incoming and outgoing data traffic pass through. The nodes provide wireless access to wireless and user devices, each of which is associated with anode in the mesh network. Each gateway node contains a record detailing which nodes are providing wireless access to which wireless end user device and which nodes are associated with which end user devices. This record of each end user device's location is periodically updated as the gateway node periodically receives data from the nodes which detail the device is being serviced by which node. Any incoming data traffic destined for an end user device is encapsulated and routed to the proper node servicing that end user device. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213216 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHOD - A telecommunications system for communicating internet packet data in accordance with a first internet protocol (IPV6) via a packet radio network operable in accordance a second internet protocol (IPV4). The system comprises a user equipment operable to request a bearer for communicating internet protocol data according to the second internet protocol (IPV4) to and from a gateway support node of the packet radio network. The gateway support node is operable to establish a tunnelling protocol bearer for communicating the internet packet data to and from the user equipment across the packet radio network. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to form an address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (IPv6). The address includes an interface identifier having a tunnel end identifier of the tunnelling protocol bearer which ends at the gateway support node of the packet radio network. The internet packet data is communicated to and from a correspondent node via the gateway support node and the established bearer using internet protocol address which is compatible with the first internet protocol (Ipv6). | 08-23-2012 |
20120218978 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A wireless LAN system comprises a wireless LAN access point for communicating wirelessly with a wireless LAN terminal, and a LED light bulb using a LED device as a light source. The wireless LAN access point is embedded in the LED light bulb. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218979 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) TRANSMISSION AND FOR COEXISTENCE OF WLAN AND ANOTHER TYPE OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSION AND METHODS THEREOF - An embodiment of a system for the coexistence of a wireless local area network (WLAN) and another type of wireless transmission is provided. A WLAN module in a power saving mode is configured to transmit a polling request (PS-Poll) at a supported rate higher than any basic rate in order to obtain buffered data from an access point (AP) when the coexisting wireless transmission module is operating. The supported rate is encoded in a supported rate set announced by the AP, and the basic rate is encoded in a basic rate set announced by the AP, and the PS-Poll is a polling request relating to a power saving mode of operation. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218980 | Synchronized UWB piconets for SOP (Simultaneously Operating Piconet) performance - Synchronized UWB piconets for SOP (Simultaneously Operating Piconet) performance. A common backbone (either wired or wireless) is employed that provides a common CLK (clock signal) to all of the various PNCs (piconet coordinators) of various piconets that may operate within a sufficiently close region such that interference could undesirably occur. By providing a very reliable CLK signal from a common backbone to all of the PNCs of the various piconets operating within a substantially close proximity to one another, very precise synchronization may be ensured for all of the communications performed therein. The various piconets may then even operate using TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)—whose performance would be substantially compromised without effective synchronization. In addition, combined TFC (time frequency code) and TDMA may also be employed to support the communications therein thereby providing even another degree of orthogonality that provided by TDMA alone. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218981 | METHOD FOR CHANNEL SOUNDING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A channel sounding method in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The method, performed by a transmitter, includes transmitting a null data packet announcement (NDPA) frame to a receiver to initiate a channel sounding procedure; transmitting a null data packet (NDP) to the receiver and receiving a feedback frame. The feedback frame includes a plurality of segment frames and a channel feedback report. The channel feedback report is split into a plurality of feedback segments. Each of the plurality of feedback segments is respectively included in each of the plurality of segment frames. The each of the plurality of segment frames includes a first-segment subfield indicating whether the each of the plurality of feedback segment included is a first segment and a remaining-segment subfield indicating the number of remaining feedback segments. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218982 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING A MIMO PACKET IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) packet by a transmitter in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The method includes: generating a MIMO packet including at least one spatial stream set transmitted respectively to at least one receiver, wherein each spatial stream set is encoded on the basis of one of two encoding schemes; transmitting first control information including a MIMO indicator and a first modulation and coding scheme (MCS) field, wherein the MIMO indicator indicates whether the MIMO packet is for single user (SU)-MIMO or multi user (MU)-MIMO, and the first MCS field indicates an MCS used for the MIMO packet if the MIMO packet is for SU-MIMO transmission, and indicates an encoding scheme applied for each of the spatial stream sets if the MIMO packet is for MU-MIMO transmission; and transmitting the MIMO packet to at least one receiver. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218983 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME IN WLAN SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a data frame in a wireless local area network is provided. The method includes TXOP the step of: obtaining a transmission opportunity (TXOP) indicating a time interval during which a transmitter has a right to transmit at least one data frame and an available bandwidth for the TXOP and sequentially transmitting a plurality of data frames to at least one receiver during the TXOP, wherein a bandwidth of a subsequent data frame of the plurality of data frames is same to or narrower than a bandwidth of a preceding data frame of the plurality of data frames which is last previously transmitted before the subsequent data frame. | 08-30-2012 |
20120224566 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RE-USING IPSEC TUNNEL IN CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT - A method for re-using an existing IPSec tunnel for multiple services. The IPSec tunnel is established from customer premises equipment to the core network to support licensed frequency communications, such as a femtocell. UMA communication using unlicensed frequencies may be carried out by re-using the IPSec tunnel to securely route UMA communications from a UMA device to a UNC within the core network via the customer premises equipment. The network determines whether to redirect UMA communications through an existing IPSec tunnel by determining whether a newly established second IPSec tunnel for UMA communications originates from an access point collocated with a femtocell that has an existing IPSec tunnel. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224567 | MOBILE PHONE AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING CALLS - A mobile phone includes a mobile communication module and a wireless communication module. The mobile communication module registers with a session initiation protocol (SIP) server by a first Internet protocol (IP) address and a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) account over a mobile communication network, and enters a suspension mode when the mobile communication module has no communication. The wireless communication module registers with the SIP server by use of a second IP address and the VoIP account over a wireless communication network, and enters a suspension mode when the wireless communication module has no communication. The wireless communication module receives an SIP invite from the SIP server over the wireless communication network and wakes up the mobile communication module when a remote phone calls the mobile phone. The mobile communication module transmits an SIP response to the SIP server over the mobile communication network after being waked up. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224568 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZING NODE TRANSMISSIONS IN A NETWORK - A method and apparatus are described for synchronizing a network. A plurality of existing nodes in the network may transmit beacons in accordance with a round-robin scheduling sequence. A new joining node may receive a beacon from a specific one of the existing nodes during a beacon interval, and transmit a join beacon frame during the beacon interval after waiting a random period of time. The specific existing node may receive the join beacon frame and transmit a notification to the other existing nodes in the network indicating that a new node is joining the network. Alternatively, the existing nodes may transmit a primary synchronization sequence (PSS) and a secondary synchronization sequence (SSS). After a new node receives the PSS and SSS from a specific one of the existing nodes, the new node may generate a random access channel (RACH) preamble indicating that it desires to join the network. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224569 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE, ELECTRONIC APPARATUS, AND METHODS FOR DETERMINING AND UPDATING ACCESS POINT - A wireless communications device includes an intent value storage configured to store therein an intent value indicating a level of intention to serve as an access point specified based on a certain criterion; a power supply status information storage configured to store therein a piece of power supply status information indicating whether power is supplied to the wireless communications device from an alternating-current power supply; and an access point determination unit configured to determine, between the wireless communications device and another wireless communications device forming the wireless network, one of the wireless communications devices as the access point. The determination unit is configured to acquire the intent value and the piece of power supply status information of the another wireless communications device, and determine the access point based on both of the intent values and both of the pieces of power supply status information. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224570 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WLAN SYSTEM - A method of transmitting data in a WLAN system using a transmission frequency band including a plurality of frequency blocks includes generating a transmission information field, including at least one of information for timing acquisition of a frame, channel estimation information, and information for demodulation and decoding of the data, generating a plurality of transformed transmission information fields by multiplying the transmission information field by a transform sequence, and transmitting the plurality of transformed transmission information fields through the plurality of respective frequency blocks. The transform sequence comprises a plurality of transform values, and the plurality of transformed transmission information fields is generated by multiplying transmission information field by each of a plurality of transform values. | 09-06-2012 |
20120230304 | NETWORK ACCESS AND A MOBILE STATION CONFIGURED FOR THE SAME - A method for network access and a mobile station configured for the same is described. In one embodiment, there is provided a method for network access on a mobile station comprising: scanning for Wi-Fi networks; receiving responses from available wireless access points (APs) of the Wi-Fi networks; selecting a Wi-Fi network in accordance with past connectivity data associated with the Wi-Fi networks of the available APs; and attempting to connect to the selected Wi-Fi network. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230305 | WI-FI NETWORK ACCESS AND A MOBILE TERMINAL CONFIGURED FOR THE SAME - A method for network access and a mobile station configured for the same is described. In one embodiment, there is provided a method for Wi-Fi network access on a mobile station comprising: scanning for wireless access points (APs) of a Wi-Fi network; receiving responses from available APs of the Wi-Fi network; selecting an AP in accordance with past connectivity data associated with the available APs; and attempting to connect or switch to the Wi-Fi network using the selected AP. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230306 | PACKETIZATION TIME SETTING SYSTEM FOR VOICE SIGNALS AND SETTING METHOD THEREOF - In a method for setting a packetization time of client device, simple network management protocol (SNMP) trap signals are transmitted from the client device to an element management system (EMS) to inquire a client capacity usage of each available worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WIMAX) channel. The client capacity usage is send from the base station that communicates with the EMS. A voice signal packetization time of the client device is set by comparing the client capacity usage with a predetermined threshold. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230307 | ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS LAN - A wireless access device in a local area network (LAN) having a plurality of transceivers. Each transceiver has a directional antenna positioned in a substantially circular array to communicate signals with a plurality of stations in a corresponding sector. Each sector defines a portion of a coverage area surrounding the wireless access device. The wireless access device has a network interface to a data network, and an array controller to control communication of data between the stations and the transceivers, and between the transceivers and the network interface. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230308 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication apparatus including a communication unit capable of wireless communication with another wireless communication apparatus, a determination unit for determining whether the communication unit is in proximity to the other wireless communication apparatus, and a control unit for performing, in a case the communication unit is determined to be in proximity to the other wireless communication apparatus, a connection procedure between the communication unit and the other wireless communication apparatus. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230309 | Method and Apparatus for Wireless Communications in a Process Control or Monitoring Environment - A method in a communication device that implements a communication stack to wirelessly communicate with a remote device according to a general purpose wireless communication protocol, where the remote device operates in a process control environment, includes receiving a request from a software module to establish a wireless communication link with the remote device, establishing a direct connection between the software module and the communication stack, where the direct connection is free of intermediate services, and communicating process data between the software module and the remote device in accordance with an industrial automation protocol over the wireless communication link, where the wireless communication link utilizes the general purpose wireless communication protocol. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230310 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WLAN FOR SIGNALING DEFERRAL MANAGEMENT MESSAGES - A deferral management method is implemented in a wireless local area network (WLAN) including an access point (AP) and a plurality of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs). The AP sends a deferral management capabilities request message to the WTRUs to determine the deferral management capabilities of the WTRUs. In response, each of the WTRUs sends a deferral management capabilities indicator message to the AP. The AP may also send a deferral management parameter set message to the WTRUs to indicate values for setting deferral management parameters. In response, each of the WTRUs may optionally send a deferral management parameter set execution confirmation message to the AP. The WTRUs may also set the values of various deferral management parameters in accordance with a certain rule specified in a deferral management rule message sent by the AP. Optionally, the WTRUs may respond to the AP with a deferral management rule execution confirmation message. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230311 | TECHNIQUES FOR SPATIAL REUSE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORKS BASED ON VIRTUAL TIME DIVISIONAL MULTIPLE ACCESS - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising configuring a transceiver for special reuse using a virtual time division multiple access (TDMA) technique in a wireless personal area network that allows additional non-interfering transceivers to perform concurrent transmissions with said transceiver. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230312 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHOD - A communication device that includes an authentication unit that authenticates a wireless communication device depending on whether a predetermined authentication condition is satisfied, and a relay unit that relays communication performed by the wireless communication device when the authentication unit successfully authenticates the wireless communication device, comprising: an information transmission and reception unit receiving connected-terminal information, which includes identification information identifying the wireless communication device whose communication is being relayed, held by other communication devices; a recording unit recording the received connected-terminal information; a judging unit judging, when a connection request is received from the wireless communication device, whether the identification information identifying the wireless communication device is included in the recorded connected-terminal information; and a permitting unit permitting relaying of communication performed by the wireless communication device when the identification information of the wireless communication device is included in the recorded connected-terminal information. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230313 | System and Method of Passive and Active Scanning of WLAN-Enabled Access Points to Estimate Position of a WLAN Positioning Device - Systems and methods of passive and active scanning of WLAN-enabled access points to estimate position of a WLAN positioning device. A device estimates the position of itself. The device includes a WLAN radio module for receiving WLAN signals, extraction logic for extracting information from said received WLAN signals to identify the WLAN APs, and logic to cooperate with a WLAN-based positioning system. The WLAN radio module includes a phase for active scanning of WLAN APs in range of said device and a phase of passive scanning of WLAN APs in range of said device, and the passive scanning phase scans only a pre-determined and selected subset of WLAN channels. Under certain embodiments, the WLAN radio module includes a passive scanning phase that simultaneously scans multiple WLAN channels. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230314 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AIR INTERFACE APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PARTICIPATING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A game device is provided with a processor and an air interface apparatus. In a wireless communication environment such as that of IEEE802.11, a CPU of the air interface apparatus selects, in a search process, an SSID that includes at least in a portion thereof a predetermined pattern. Network information including the selected SSID is retained in a memory unit as a BSS list registering wireless networks that are targets for connection. The processor refers to the BSS list and determines a wireless network to participate in. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230315 | WIRELESS SYNCHRONIZATION OF DATA AND SOFTWARE COMPONENTS OVER A WIRELESS NETWORK COMPATIBLE TO IEEE802.11 STANDARD(S) FOR MOBILE DEVICES - Wireless synchronization of data and software components over IEEE802.11 standard(s) are herein disclosed and enabled. An information apparatus, which includes a wireless communication unit compatible with IEEE802.11, may access a wireless local area network (WLAN). To setup the wireless synchronization, the user connects the information apparatus to a wireless output device over a wired connection (e.g., USB) and selects the wireless output device. Information associated with the wireless output device is saved in the mobile information apparatus for enabling wireless synchronization. Next, the user connects the mobile information apparatus to the WLAN, and, depending on the availability of the wireless output device in the network, the information apparatus may lock a wireless connection to the wireless output device for wireless synchronization. A client application in the mobile information apparatus and output controller software in the wireless output device may be required to facilitate the wireless synchronization over the WLAN. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230316 | DIRECT LINK SETUP PROCEDURE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - Provided are a Tunneled Direct Link Setup (TDLS) establishment procedure for a TDLS initiator and a station supporting the establishment procedure. In the establishment procedure, a requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup request frame via an access point (AP) to an intended peer Non-AP QSTA. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA receives a TDLS setup response frame via the AP from the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup request frame. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup confirm frame via the AP to the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup response frame. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230317 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A RESPONSE REQUEST FRAME AND A RESPONSE FRAME IN A MULTI-USER BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for efficient transmission of a request frame such as an RTS/CTS frame and a response frame in response to the request frame in a multi-user based wireless communication system. The method of the present invention comprises: a process where wireless terminals transmit a response frame at their own response frame transmission time through a request frame that contains information about a plurality of wireless terminals and information about the response frame transmission time of the respective wireless terminals; a process where the respective wireless terminals transmit a response frame according to a token scheme such that the response frame is transmitted to a final access point; and a process where only a representative wireless terminal selected depending on a given wireless environment receives the response frame. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230318 | Method and System for Determining and Optimizing Throughput of Short Range Wireless Network - Methods and systems for determining and optimizing a throughput of a short range wireless network are provided. The method mainly includes acquiring respective time parameters in a contention access period based on information transmission characteristics of the short range wireless network; and computing and optimizing the throughput of the short range wireless network based on the respective time parameters. These time parameters are determined based on a non-persistent Carrier Sense Multiple Access CSMA mechanism. Therefore, the present invention employs a non-persistent CSMA mechanism to analyze the CAP of a short range wireless network and thus simplifies complexity in determining the network throughput and the analysis process of network optimization. As such, accurate throughput parameters of the standard network of the short range wireless network may be obtained, the network performance may be optimized and the performance of the short range wireless network is improved. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230319 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONTROL PROGRAM - In order to stop a receive operation without stopping the communication operation of an external communication device while suppressing the effects on the reception of signals from the communication device as much as possible, a communication device includes: a transmission unit for transmitting a first signal during a specified time interval to an external communication device provided with a stop transmission function; and a reception unit which is provided with a stop reception function for stopping reception, and receives a second signal transmitted by the external communication device. The communication device also includes a stop transmission request unit which includes in the first signal stop transmission request information for requesting the stopping of the transmission of the second signal to the external communication device; and a stop reception unit which stops the receive operation of the reception unit after the first signal including the stop transmission request information is transmitted. | 09-13-2012 |
20120236835 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RECORDING A GEOGRAPHICAL LOCATION FROM A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for recording a geographical location from a docked mobile communication device that includes detecting a mobile communication device communicatively coupled to a docking device; and detecting that the mobile communication device is communicatively uncoupled from the docking device. Afterwards, the geographical location of the mobile communication device is recorded and stored in memory upon detecting that the mobile communication device has communicatively uncoupled from the docking device. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236836 | MODE STEERING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Mode steering in a wireless communication network includes configuring a list of neighboring access points and their operational modes. If an operational mode of a requesting mobile device can not be supported by the access point, denying the association. If an operational mode of a requesting mobile device matches a highest operational mode of the access point, allowing the association. If the operational mode of the mobile device is not the same as the highest operational mode of the access point, and if any neighboring access point has an available operational mode matching that of the mobile device, denying the association, so as to steer the requesting mobile device to the matching neighboring access point. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236837 | INVERSE MULTIPLEXING OVER 802.11 WIRELESS INTERFACES - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, a method and apparatus are disclosed that includes aspects of providing one or more data packets at a media access control-service access point of a transmitting device; dividing the one or more data packets into two or more streams of data packets, wherein the two or more streams of data packets are arranged for transmission on a separate wireless interface of the transmitting device; and transmitting the two or more streams of data packets over a wireless medium via their separate wireless interfaces. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236838 | DUAL MODE OPERATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided is dual mode operation by a communicating device in wireless network. The communicating device selects a radio frequency (RF) channel and a physical layer type. The communicating device processes signals received via the selected RF channel based on the selected physical layer type. The communicating device may determine whether a beacon frame has been detected base on the signals that were received via the selected RF channel and processed based on the selected physical layer type. When a frame is not detected, the communicating device may determine a signal energy level for the received signals. The communicating device may establish an association with an existing network based on detection of the beacon frame or the communicating device may transmit an originating beacon frame based on the determined signal energy level. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236839 | ENHANCED INFORMATION SERVICES USING DEVICES IN SHORT-RANGE WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method is implemented by an access terminal associated with a wireless network. The method includes identifying content stored within a paired device in a short-range wireless network, initiating a voice session, over a wireless carrier network, with an information services provider, and initiating a data session, over the wireless carrier network, with a mobile user content server associated with the information services provider. The method also includes uploading a portion of the content stored within the paired device to the mobile user content server based on the initiated voice connection. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236840 | METHOD FOR PROTECTING DATA IN A MU-MIMO BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for protecting MU-MIMO (Multi User-Multiple Input Multiple Output) data through a multi-RTS/CTS frame exchange in a MU-MIMO based wireless communication system. The method of the present invention comprises: a process where an indicator for VHT data protection is added to an RTS frame, using the structure of an RTS/CTS frame for an existing legacy terminal during the multi RTS/CTS frame exchange; a process where an access point designates and then transmits the duration period of the RTS frame while transmitting the RTS frame; and a process where wireless terminals up to the (n-1)th terminal designate the duration period of the CTS frame as ‘0’ and send the designated duration period, while only the n-th wireless terminal designates NAV for data protection. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243517 | WIDE AREA NETWORK (WAN) AND LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) COMMUNICATIONS FOR A FIXED WIRELESS CPE - An outdoor broadband unit includes a wide area network (WAN) side device, and a local area network (LAN) side device. The LAN side device provides a first stay alive communication to the WAN side device, and the WAN side device performs a soft reset based on the stay alive communication. The LAN side device also receives, based on the stay alive communication, a soft reset result from the WAN side device, and determines, based on the soft reset result, whether the soft reset of the WAN side device is successful or unsuccessful. The LAN side device further provides a second stay alive communication to the WAN side device when the soft reset of the WAN side device is successful. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243518 | WIRELESS INTERNET-PROTOCOL PHONES FOR WIND POWER PLANT SERVICE - Communications systems and methods for a wind power plant having a plurality of wind turbines. The communications system may include a data communications network configured to provide connectivity between the wind turbines and a wireless access point coupled with the data communications network. The communications method may include wirelessly communicating signals between a mobile communications device and a wireless access point coupled with a data communications network providing connectivity between the wind turbines. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243519 | SOLVING A HIDDEN NODE PROBLEM DUE TO TRANSMISSION POWER IMBALANCE - The present invention discloses an apparatus, a method and a computer program for resolving a hidden node problem in relation to handshake message transferring e.g. in WLAN networks. In one embodiment of the invention, the apparatus receiving a Clear to Send (CTS) message repeats the message after a Short Interframe Space (SIFS) time period. Stations not directly hearing the original CTS due to a low power are able to receive the repeated CTS and defer their transmissions accordingly. In another embodiment, the apparatus receiving the CTS message indicates in its Ready to Send (RTS) message that the CTS sender station has a low transmitting power. With this knowledge, the other present stations can defer their transmissions until they are sure that the data transfer between the first two stations having the RTS-CTS messaging has not been initiated or is already completed. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243520 | LOCATION-BASED ASSOCIATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - In one implementation, a region descriptor associated with a communications access point and a location descriptor are accessed at a client. The client determines that a location described by the location descriptor is included within a region described by the region descriptor. The client then requests association with the communications access point in response to the determining. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243521 | GATEWAY DEVICE - A gateway device includes a local area network (LAN) interface including a plurality of LAN ports, and a processor connected to the LAN interface. The gateway device communicates with an Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4) network and at least two Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) networks. All the plurality of LAN ports are classified into a plurality of port groups corresponding to the at least two IPv6 networks. When an IPv6 user device is connected to any one of the plurality of LAN ports, the processor identifies the LAN port connected to the IPv6 user device, and enables the IPv6 user device to communicate with the IPv6 network corresponding to the port group which includes the LAN port connected to the IPv6 user device. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243522 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243523 | WLAN DATA RATE ADAPTION METHOD - A method of communication between a transmitter and a receiver over a channel is provided. The transmitter is capable of transmitting packets with multiple data rates, each of which adapts to a respective channel condition with regards to the performance of the communication. The method comprises the steps of at the level of the transmitter: upon detection of a disappearance of deterioration of the channel condition, transmitting packets with a data rate selected from a group of stable data rates that are stably used before the disappearance of the deterioration but larger than the last data rate before disappearance of the deterioration. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243524 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INVESTIGATING WIFI DISPLAY SERVICE IN A WIFI DIRECT NETWORK - A method and device for discovering a WiFi display service in a Wi-Fi direct (WFD) network, the method includes: generating a service discovery request frame for discovering a service supported by a second WFD device in the WFD network; transmitting the service discovery request frame to the second WFD device; and receiving a service discovery response frame from the second WFD device in response to the service discovery request frame, wherein the service discovery request frame and the service discovery response frame are generated by using a generic advertising service (GAS) initial request frame of 802.11u and a GAS initial response frame of 802.11u, respectively. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250664 | Method to avoid collision in a synchronised wireless network - A distributed method for collision-free Beacon-enabled multi-hop IEEE 802.15.4 networking is presented. The method is compatible with the IEEE 802.15.4 standard. It can support a collision-free cluster-tree network for N-to-one data gathering applications or peer-to-peer applications. The beacon schedule and superframe structure arrangement are distributed, which are decided by each device itself based on the GTS allocated by its parent. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250665 | Method and system for maintaining concurrent membership in multiple networks from a single wireless modem - Method and system for maintaining concurrent membership in multiple networks from a single wireless modem on a wireless networking device. The device time-multiplexes between the networks according to time slots allocated to each network that are shorter than the membership timeout period for the other network. Moreover, whenever the device switches between the networks, the device resets the modem and rejoins the other network using configuration information stored in a nonvolatile memory when the network being rejoined was previously quit. Each network remains unaware of the device's membership in the other network and regards the absence of transmission from the device during the time slot allocated to the other network as a temporary loss of radio contact rather than a membership termination event. The invention enables a single-modem wireless networking device to maintain concurrent ZigBee sessions on a smart energy network and a home automation network. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250666 | Dual band wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver - Dual band wireless local area network (WLAN) transceiver. A wireless communication device includes at least two different transceivers (or radios) therein to effectuate communications with other wireless communication devices using at least two respective frequency bands. Each of these two transceivers may have different respective circuitry (e.g., each may have a different respective power amplifier (PA) and/or other circuitry components). Coordination is made regarding when certain components of one transceiver turn on and operate when another transceiver may be transmitting or receiving communications. For example, the turn on of a PA and/or other circuitry components (e.g., such as components using or requiring high current) within one transceiver can be coordinated as to minimize deleterious effects regarding the operation of another transceiver. Moreover, latency existent within each of the respective transceiver chains within the wireless communication device (e.g., including baseband and radio portions) is accounted for regarding their respective concurrent operation. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250667 | Phone Terminal, Communication Device, and Terminal Maintenance Method - According to one embodiment, a phone terminal is connected to a network system. The network system includes a DHCP server. The phone terminal includes a repeater hub, an acquisition module, an assignment module and a communication module. The repeater hub includes a network port connected to the network system, and a port connected to an electronic device. The acquisition module acquires a first IP address for the phone terminal and a second IP address for the electronic device from the DHCP server. The assignment module assigns, in response to an IP address assignment request from the electronic device, the second IP address to the electronic device as a request source. The communication module communicates with the electronic device using the first IP address and the IP address assigned to the electronic device. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250668 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CONTROL FIELD AND MODULATION CODING SCHEME INFORMATION - Systems, method and apparatus of managing wireless communication are described herein. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250669 | OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) MOBILE CLOUD INFRASTRUCTURE AND METHOD - A future mobile terminal converging multiple wireless transmission technologies by utilizing a cost-effective and spectrum-efficient mobile cloud solution by introducing the Virtual Mobile Server (VMS) and Virtual Register and Call Switch (VR/CS) systems and methods based on the innovative open wireless architecture (OWA) technology platform. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250670 | NATIVE MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL SUPPORT FOR BEAMFORMING - Apparatuses, systems, and methods that enable native MAC support of beamforming are contemplated. An embodiment may comprise a mobile computing device, such as a laptop, with wireless communications capabilities, such as an integrated wireless networking card. The networking card of the laptop may transmit and receive various types of frame data using one or more beamforming techniques. Upon establishing a link with another wireless device, the laptop may sense that the link quality is degrading. Instead of having to reestablish a new link using dedicated BF frames and the conventional BF protocol, embodiments described herein may instead transmit beamforming information in various types of frames which enable the wireless communication devices to adjust the beamforming parameters in a more efficient manner. For example, the devices may include beamforming information in control frames and data frames and transmit the frames in a sweeping sector fashion. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257603 | Network Access Point Management - Network access point management includes: connecting to a network access point with a first controller device implemented by at least one processor; transmitting an updated configuration for the network access point from the first controller device to the network access point; transmitting a new value for a configuration version value stored by the network access point to the network access point; and transmitting the new value for the configuration version value stored by the network access point from the first controller device to each controller device in a group of controller devices to which the first controller device belongs. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257604 | TRANSMITTING POSITIONING INFORMATION VIA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system for providing positioning information within a wireless communication signal. An example process may start by positioning resources being activated in an apparatus. Activation of the positioning resources may occur automatically, in response to user interaction, etc. The apparatus may then engage in a discovery process via wireless communication in order to identify other apparatuses within communication range that are enabled to transmit positioning information. Upon discovering another apparatus, the apparatus may interact with the other apparatus in order to determine a location for the other apparatus. For example, the apparatus may transmit one or more messages comprising a request for positioning information from the other apparatus, and may in turn receive one or more messages from the other apparatus comprising positioning information. The apparatus may then utilize the positioning information to determine its position (e.g., relative to the other apparatus). | 10-11-2012 |
20120257605 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for communicating Channel State Information (CSI) feedback. In some aspects, the CSI feedback is communicated in a very high throughput (VHT) wireless communications system. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257606 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CONTROL FIELD AND MODULATION CODING SCHEME INFORMATION - Systems, method and apparatus of managing wireless communication are described herein. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257607 | MOBILE ROUTER NETWORK WITH RATE LIMITING - A method of operating a mobile router network in one embodiment comprises: providing a plurality of wireless mobile routers, each of the mobile routers comprises a wireless wide area network interface to access a cellular network, and each mobile router is operable to upload data and to download data via the cellular network; providing at least one server coupleable to the plurality of wireless mobile routers via the cellular network; operating each mobile router to determine, on an ongoing basis during a predetermined period, its corresponding accumulated quantity of downloaded data; and operating each mobile router to control its download data rate based on its corresponding the accumulated quantity of downloaded data. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257608 | ROUTING TABLE LOOKOUP ALGORITHM EMPLOYING SEARCH KEY HAVING DESTINATION ADDRESS AND INTERFACE COMPONENT - A routing table lookup algorithm is described that, for a first outbound packet, performs a first route lookup into the routing table with a first search key that includes the first packet's destination address and a first network interface identifier, and, for a second outbound packet, performs a second route lookup into the routing table with a second search key that includes the second outbound packet's destination address but does not include any network interface identifier. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257609 | MULTI-MODE WLAN/PAN MAC - Multi-mode WLAN/PAN MAC. A novel solution is presented in which a MAC (Medium Access Controller) is implemented that includes multiple functionality types. This MAC may include functionality supporting communication according to one or more of the IEEE 802.11 WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) related standards and also to one or more of the standards generated by the IEEE 802.15.3 PAN (Personal Area Network) working group. By providing this dual functionality of a multi-mode WLAN/PAN MAC, a communication device may adaptively change the manner in which it communicates with other communication devices. For example, in an effort to maximize throughput and overall efficiency of communication within a communication system, certain of the various devices may change from using the WLAN related standards to using the PAN related standards, and vice versa, based on any one or more of a variety of operational parameters including system configuration. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257610 | MOBILE WLAN GATEWAY - A technique for operating a mobile station as wireless local-area network [“WLAN”] gate-way. A gateway application sets up ( | 10-11-2012 |
20120257611 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING ACCESS TO A HOME, OR OTHER PUBLIC NETWORK - An apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating home, or other public network access by a wireless device. The access is made in order to access public-network services by the wireless device when connecting to the public network by way of another network. Access availability by way of 802.1x-capable wireless local area networks, if any, is determined A listing is made of networks through which connections are able to be made. And, if operator policy permits, a public-network access attempter attempts to make communication connections by way of non-802.1x-capable wireless local area networks, if any. Identification is made of network access availability, and such identified network access is displayed to provide a user of the wireless device with an opportunity to select in what manner to connect to the public network. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257612 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY TRUNCATION - A method and device for communicating in a contention-based communication network. According to an embodiment, the method includes obtaining, by a transmitter, an access to a channel during a transmission opportunity (TXOP) and transmitting, by the transmitter, a contention free (CF)-End frame to truncate the TXOP if the transmitter has no more data that the transmitter can send that fits within the TXOP, wherein the CF-End frame includes a duration field indicating a time required to complete the truncation of the TXOP. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257613 | Maintaining Network Services Across Multiple Physical Interfaces - In one embodiment, the present invention includes an apparatus having a central processing unit (CPU) to execute instructions, a hub coupled to the CPU, and multiple physical devices coupled to the hub. The physical devices may each correspond to a different network communication protocol, and may each include a physical unit to forward packets to the hub while the system is in a low power mode. The hub may remain enabled during the low power mode and may include media access control functionality for handling incoming packets of different physical devices. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263154 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR GENERATING AND JOINING SHARED EXPERIENCE - A method for implementing shared experiences using mobile computing devices comprises capturing an image of a trigger along with background information associated with the trigger in a video frame using a video camera built into a first mobile computing device equipped with a display screen and a wireless communication module; identifying characteristics information of the trigger and the associated background information; transmitting the characteristics information of the trigger and the associated background information to a server computing device connected to a network using wireless communication; receiving an augmented reality corresponding to the characteristics information of the trigger and the associated background information from the server computing device; and presenting the augmented reality on the display screen of the first mobile computing device, wherein the augmented reality associated with the first mobile computing device is shared and time synchronized with an augmented reality previously transmitted by the server computing device to a second mobile computing device. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263155 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Efficiently Scanning For Wireless Networks Based On Application Type - A mobile communication device invokes a first application or a second application. When the first application is invoked, the mobile device scans to search for one or more WLANs identified in a first subset of WLAN profiles. When the second application is invoked, the mobile device scans to search for one or more WLANs identified in a second subset of WLAN profiles. The first application may be a messaging application, such as a personal information manager (PIM) application, which may utilize WLANs having external network connectivity. The second application may be a streaming media application, which may utilize WLAN appliances having no external network connectivity. Alternatively, the second application may be a conference meeting application or military application which may utilize ad hoc networks having no external network connectivity. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263156 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING VARIOUS TRANSMISSION MODES FOR WLAN SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for generating 40+40 MHz and 40+40+40+40 MHz transmission modes for IEEE 802.11 wireless communications systems using Very High Throughput (VHT) waveforms with application to Television White Space (TVWS) spectrum. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263157 | Downclocking and/or adaptive sub-carriers for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Downclocking and/or adaptive sub-carriers for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Communication device operation within a wireless local area network (WLAN/WiFi) is effectuated in the frequency spectra typically associated with television broadcast channels. Operation is made on a secondary non-interfering basis to such television broadcast channels. Any desired channel bandwidth (e.g., 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz, etc.) may be employed. Adaptation with respect to the number of data sub-carriers within different respective packets may be made in accordance with two or more respective operational modes. For example, modification of the number of data sub-carriers in different respective packets may be made to increase the signal bandwidth from a first band was to a second bandwidth. Also, appropriate frequency down-clocking of a first channel bandwidth may be performed to generate the desired channel bandwidth to be employed within an available television broadcast channel bandwidth. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263158 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL AND TRAINING SYMBOLS IN MULTI-USER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for transmitting control and training symbols to improve transmission efficiency in a multi-user wireless communication system. The method for transmitting the control and training symbols in the multi-user wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: determining whether a required transmission rate of each data can be satisfied through channel estimation in each of terminals when different data are simultaneously transmitted to each of the terminals; and transmitting a data frame to each of the terminals, the data frame being composed to discriminate the control and training symbols in each of the terminals using a combination of time, frequency, and code area when the required transmission rate of each data is not satisfied according to the determined result. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263159 | MOBILE ROUTER WITH PRIORITY RATE LIMITING - An embodiment of a mobile router, comprises: a wireless wide area network interface to access a cellular network; a local area network interface to provide access to devices for transfer of data; priority information associated with predetermined types of download data; data rate information associated with the priority information; first apparatus to determine the priority of download data via the wide area network interface; second apparatus to determine if data is being transferred via the local area network interface; and third apparatus to control the data rate for the download data based on the priority information, the data rate configuration information, and whether data is being transferred via the local area network interface. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263160 | METHOD FOR SENDING/ RECEIVING DATA IN A WIRELESS PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN WHICH THERE IS SIMULTANEOUS COMMUNICATION WITH VARIOUS TERMINALS - A method and apparatus for transmitting a frame to at least one receiver in a wireless communication system is provided. The apparatus determines at least one data length in accordance with each receiver based on a number of symbol for the frame to be transmitted, determines a maximum data length among the at least one data length, and determines a length of the frame in time domain based on the maximum data length. The apparatus generates the frame in accordance with the length of the frame, the frame including a first signal field and at least one second signal field. The first signal field indicates the length of the frame and each second signal field indicates each data length. | 10-18-2012 |
20120269182 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GLOBAL ANCHOR REGISTRATION - A user equipment (UE) attaches to a first access network, intending to access a packet data network (PDN) via a telecommunications system, and is assigned a PDN System Architecture Evolution (SAE) Gateway (GW). The identity of the PDN SAE GW is registered so that, if the UE attaches to another access network, triggering a new attach procedure, the identity is retrieved. A determination is then made whether the previously-assigned PDN SAE GW may be used for the present communications and, if so, it is reassigned. The identity of the PDN SAE GW is registered in an anchor node, which is in a preferred embodiment a Home Subscriber Server (HSS). If the previously-assigned PDN SAE GW cannot be used, or if the PDN SAE GW must be changed, then the communication is reassigned to a new PDN SAE GW. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269183 | METHOD FOR REPORTING CHANNEL INFORMATION BASED ON LINK ADAPTATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND THE APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for reporting channel information in a wireless local area network system is provided. The method includes receiving a data block for requesting a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) feedback from a requesting station, the data block including a data field and a stream indicator indicating a number of at least one spatial stream in the data field; determining, the MCS feedback based on the data block; and, transmitting the MCS feedback to the requesting station, the MCS feedback including a recommended MCS and a recommended stream indicator indicating a number of at least one recommended spatial stream. The number of the at least one recommended spatial stream in the MCS feedback is equal or less than the number of the at least one spatial stream in the data block. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269184 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication apparatus is provided which includes a recognition unit configured to recognize a service of communication using a packet to which a first priority higher than a second priority is set, provided by an external apparatus; a generation unit configured to generate a packet to be transmitted to the external apparatus and to which the first priority is set, in a case that the service is recognized by the recognition unit, and a transmission unit configured to transmit the packet generated by the generation unit for establishing a connection with the external apparatus, wherein the generation unit generates a packet to be transmitted to the external apparatus and to which the second priority is set, in a case that the recognition unit does not recognize a service of communication using a packet to which the first priority is set. | 10-25-2012 |
20120275442 | DYNAMIC PROVISIONING OF MOBILE DEVICE PROFILES IN A ROAMING NETWORK - Systems and methods for cost-effective phone calls and dynamic provisioning of mobile profiles within a roaming environment are presented herein. A platform component stores multiple profiles for a mobile device and can dynamically reroute incoming phone calls to another profile using a database of stored profiles and a rerouting component. The phone call is rerouted from a first identity of a mobile device that is associated with a first network, to a second identity that corresponds to the second network that the mobile device is roaming in enables the mobile subscribers to bypass the high charges associated with roaming. Furthermore, a roaming platform component can perform location updates on a mobile device, thereby updating the identity of the mobile device's SIM card to ensure that the mobile device has an identity profile that corresponds to a visited network in which the mobile device is roaming. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275443 | EFFICIENT CREATION OF WLAN CONNECTIONS - A method for communication includes receiving at a wireless access point (AP) a directed probe request from a client specifying a service set identifier (SSID) for which the AP was not configured prior to receiving the directed probe request. In reply to the directed probe request, the AP transmits a probe response to the client using the specified SSID. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275444 | PUSH-TO-MULTIMEDIA METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION - The various embodiments herein provide a Push-to-Multimedia (PTM) method and system for sharing multimedia information between users of a cellular network. The method comprising installing a PTM application on at least one user device, connecting the at least one user device to a Push-To-Multimedia server through a network interface, registering the at least one user device in the Push-To-Multimedia server, an authentication server for authenticating the at least one user device, verifying the at least one user devices in a Group and List Management Server, selecting at least one target user, creating a PTM connection file, connecting the PTM connection file to the PTM server by a verification headers, sending a connection request to the at least one target users and creating a real time multimedia connection on receiving a confirmation from the at least one target user. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275445 | VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A vehicle communication system is disclosed, for use on e.g. trains, ferries and busses. The system includes an internal local area network (LAN) arranged within the vehicle; at least one antenna for wireless communication with external wide area networks (WAN) outside the vehicle; and a data communication router for providing data communication between said internal LAN and said external WANs. The data communication router includes a plurality of modems for communication with said external WANs, a subscriber identity module (SIM) pool including a plurality of SIMs, and a controller capable of periodically assigning SIMs within said SIM pool to any one of said modems. Hereby, a very efficient use of the modems and SIMs is obtained, leading to a less costly system and a more efficient communication. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275446 | 802.11 VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT PREAMBLE SIGNALING FIELD WITH LEGACY COMPATIBILITY - In accordance with various aspects of the disclosure, a method and apparatus are disclosed that includes aspects of a controller configured to create a VHT frame that is arranged to include information relating to a modulation and a coding scheme with which a data portion of the VHT frame is modulated and encoded; and a transmitter configured to transmit the VHT frame to one or more STAs. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275447 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSPORTING DATA ACROSS AN AIR INTERFACE USING REDUCED ADDRESS HEADERS - Systems and methods are disclosed for transporting data across an air interface using a blending of protocol layers to achieve reduced bandwidth. Advantage is taken of the fact that the extra overhead from, for example, the Ethernet protocol is addressing information pertaining to the destination of the packet. This destination information (for example, the Ethernet address) can be stripped from the transmission prior to the air interface and recreated after the air interface. In one embodiment, the concepts of a proper Layer 2 CS are merged on top of the 802.16 protocol and still retain the benefits of a Layer 2 transparent bridged service layer to the network layer. In one embodiment, the MAC address of the destination is used for the air interface and the Ethernet address is recreated and added on the far side of the air interface. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281685 | HANDLING MULTIPLE VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VOIP) CALLS VIA A SINGLE BEARER - A device receives a first request to establish a bearer with a first UE associated with a LTE device, where the first request includes first parameters associated with the first UE. The device also determines that the LTE device does not have the bearer established, and provides a new bearer request, with the first parameters, to a wireless network in order to establish the bearer with the LTE device at a first data rate. The device further receives a second request to establish another bearer with a second UE associated with the LTE device, where the second request includes second parameters associated with the second UE. The device determines that the LTE device has the bearer established, and provides a modify bearer request, with the second parameters, to the wireless network in order to modify the bearer with the LTE device to a second data rate. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281686 | LOCATIVE SOCIAL NETWORKING USING A MOBILE DEVICE - Technologies are generally described for providing a locative social networking service utilizing wireless access point. In some examples, a method performed under control of a mobile device may include connecting to a wireless local area network, finding at least one other mobile device connected to the wireless local area network and satisfying a predetermined condition, and for each found mobile device, requesting a public user profile associated with the found mobile device, in response to the request, receiving the public user profile associated with the found mobile device, and for each found mobile device from which an associated public user profile is received, transmitting to the found mobile device a public user profile associated with the mobile device. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281687 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present invention is applied to a base station for periodically transmitting a transmission signal to a terminal. The base station includes: a transmitter/receiver that receives a reception signal; a noise verifier that outputs information regarding a generation time and a generation period of the noise that is periodically generated if the reception signal includes the noise; and a transmission timing determiner that determines setting a transmission period of the transmission signal to the same period as the generation period of the noise based on the information regarding the generation time and the generation period of the noise that is output from the noise verifier and shifting a start position of the transmission period by a predetermined time from an arbitrary generation time of the noise, wherein the transmitter/receiver transmits the transmission signal to the terminal at transmission timing of the transmission signal determined by the transmission timing determiner. | 11-08-2012 |
20120287914 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS SERVICE TO A COLLECTIVE OF REMOTE UNITS BY A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A wireless local area network (WLAN) provides wireless service to a collective comprising multiple remote units (RUs) by use of a collective association identifier (AID) assigned to, and shared by, the multiple RUs. The WLAN then uses the collective association identifier AID to identify transmissions of common data to the multiple remote units. Furthermore, the WLAN provides for a serving AP to store, for the collective as a whole, shared data rather than individually storing such data in association with each remote unit (RU) in the collective. The WLAN further provides for RUs to establish a link with their serving AP in order to exchange data sourced by, or intended for, their associated non-RF service provider, and for the AP then to establish a separate AP-to-service provider link to exchange the data, rather than the RU being required to establish an end-to-end link with the service provider. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287915 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A wireless device of transmitting a data frame in a WLAN is provided. The wireless device includes: a MAC unit generating a data frame; a PHY unit transmitting a wireless signal of the data frame; and a processor being operably coupled to the MAC unit and the PHY unit and controlling a set of TXVECTOR parameters. The processor is configured for: generating the data frame, the data frame including a data field having a service field and a very high throughput signal information (VHT-SIG-B); and transmitting a wireless signal of the data frame via a operating channel bandwidth. The data field is scrambled with a scrambling sequence, the scrambling sequence is generated based on a initial scrambling sequence and a generator polynomial. The service field is determined based on the set of TXVECTOR parameters, the TXVECTOR parameters including an control information for the service field. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287916 | DATA DEFINITION APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - An apparatus and a system, as well as a method and article, may operate to send a selected data type without self-definition information to a receiver if a state capable of interpreting the selected data type has been maintained by the receiver, and to send the selected data type with the self-definition information to the receiver if the state capable of interpreting the selected data type has not been maintained by the receiver. | 11-15-2012 |
20120294293 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS ACCESS SELECTION - An wireless access selection capability is disclosed. In at least some embodiments, the wireless access selection capability enables a wireless user terminal to determine, via interaction with a mobility network (e.g., a 3G cellular network, a 4G cellular network, and the like), whether to remain connected via the mobility network or to connect via a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). The interaction may be in the form of two queries initiated by the wireless user terminal, including a first query for determining whether the wireless user terminal should perform a scan for identifying WLANs available for providing wireless access to the wireless user terminal and a second for determining whether the wireless user terminal should switch from being connected to the mobility network to being connected to an identified WLAN identified during a scan initiated by the wireless user terminal. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294294 | Preamble Designs for Sub-1GHz Frequency Bands - A system including a first preamble generator module configured to generate a first preamble for a first packet, which is a single-user packet. The first preamble includes a first short training field, a first long training field, a first signal field, and a second signal field. A second preamble generator module generates a second preamble for a second packet, which is a multi-user packet formatted as a multi-user packet or a single-user packet formatted as a multi-user packet. The second preamble is longer than the first preamble. The second preamble includes a second short training field, a second long training field, a third signal field, and a fourth signal field. A modulation module modulates at least one of the first signal field and the second signal field of the first preamble differently than at least one of the third signal field and the fourth signal field of the second preamble. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294295 | DUAL PACKET CONFIGURATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A dual packet configuration for wireless communications including a first portion that is modulated according to a serial modulation and a second portion that is modulated according to a parallel modulation. The serial modulation may be DSSS whereas the parallel modulation may be OFDM. The first portion may include a header, which may further include an OFDM mode bit and a length field indicating the duration the second portion. The first portion may be in accordance with 802.11b to enable dual mode devices to coexist and communicate in the same area as standard 802.11b devices. The dual mode devices can communicate at different or higher data rates without interruption from the 802.11b devices. The packet configuration may include an OFDM signal symbol which further includes a data rate section and a data count section. In this manner, data rates the same as or similar to the 802.11a data rates may be specified between dual mode devices. The first and second portions may be based on the same or different clock fundamentals. For OFDM, the number of subcarriers, pilot tones and guard interval samples may be modified independently or in combination to achieve various embodiments. Also, data subcarriers may be discarded and replaced with pilot tones for transmission. The receiver regenerates the discarded data based on received data, such as using ECC techniques. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294296 | PREAMBLE CONFIGURING METHOD IN THE WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, AND A METHOD FOR A FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION - A method of configuring a preamble of a downlink frame for synchronization in data frame transmission of a 60 GHz a wireless local area network system, the method comprising arranging a short preamble having a plurality of repetitive S symbols, and an IS symbol, and arranging a long preamble having a long cyclic prefix (CP) and a plurality of L symbols for frame synchronization and symbol timing by performing auto-correlation according to the length of window of the auto-correlation. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294297 | METHOD, ACCESS POINT AND TERMINAL FOR SELECTING CHANNEL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method for selecting a channel for an access point (AP) in a Wireless Local Are Network (WLAN). The method includes the AP receiving network conditions of APs within the sensing range of a terminal sent by the terminal, and the AP selecting a channel based on the received network conditions. By forwarding the network conditions of other APs which can be detected by the terminal, the method of the present invention enables an AP to select a channel from the view of a terminal to avoid conflicts at the terminal, thereby improving the available bandwidth of the terminal, and giving a better experience to users. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294298 | METHOD FOR ENABLING INTEROPERABILITY BETWEEN DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS CONFORMING TO DIFFERENT STANDARDS - Mechanisms, in a transmission channel shared by 802.11 systems and HIPERLAN/2 systems are provided to prevent 802.11 terminals from transmitting during time periods allocated to HIPERLAN, so that a single channel can be shared between the two standards. In a particular embodiment, a “super frame” format is used where HIPERLAN transmissions are offered the highest level of protection possible within 802.11, which is needed within the 802.11 Contention Free Period (CFP). | 11-22-2012 |
20120300756 | Maintaining point of presence for clients roaming within a layer 2 domain - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a packet from a source wireless device at a second switch, the source wireless device previously associated with a first switch and roamed to and associated with the second switch, wherein a point of presence for the source wireless device is maintained at the first switch, inserting into the packet a direction indicator, and forwarding the packet from the second switch to the first switch, the direction indicator identifying the packet as being transmitted towards the point of presence for the source wireless device to prevent a forwarding loop. An apparatus is also disclosed. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300757 | FEMTOCELL, FEMTOCELL GATEWAY AND ACCESS REJECTION METHOD THEREOF - A femtocell, a femtocell gateway and an access rejection method thereof are provided. A wireless network system comprises a wireless device, a plurality of the femtocells, the femtocell gateway and a core network server. The wireless device has a Subscriber Identification and the core network server stores a Closed Subscribers Group Identification of the femtocells. The femtocell gateway receives an access rejection message corresponding to the Subscriber Identification of the wireless device from the core network server, and transmits the access rejection message to the femtocells. Each femtocell records the Subscriber Identification in a rejection list thereof, and it is capable of adding/deleting Subscriber Identifications in its rejection list. When each femtocell receives the Subscriber | 11-29-2012 |
20120300758 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION REQUEST MESSAGES OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for coordinating information request messages over an ad-hoc mesh network. A module receives at least one request to transmit one or more information request messages over an ad-hoc mesh network. The module determines context information associated with at least a portion of the ad-hoc mesh network, one or more nodes within the at least a portion of the ad-hoc mesh network, or a combination thereof. The module then determines to transmit the one or more information request messages over the ad-hoc mesh network based, at least in part, on the context information. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300759 | OPERATING BAND SUPPORT FOR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - In Wireless Local Area Network, WLAN, systems, an access point supports access using one or more frequency bands. A WLAN device transmits a query to a WLAN access point prior to association of the WLAN device with the WLAN access point, requesting an indication of one or more frequency bands used by the WLAN access point to support access. The WLAN access point receives the query from the wireless device using one of the one or more frequency bands and transmits to the wireless device an indication of the one or more frequency bands in response. A relative priority of frequency bands may be provided in order to guide the WLAN device in choosing a preferred frequency band. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300760 | Method of Enhancing Zone-Based Service - A method of enhancing a zone-based service for a personal network entity (PNE) is disclosed. The method comprises sending PNE related information to a personal network gateway (PN-GW); and receiving specific information from the person network gateway; wherein, the specific information is provided based on the PNE related information. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300761 | WIRELESS SIGNAL TRANSCEIVER WITH AUTOMATIC MODE CHANGE, AND METHOD - A wireless signal transceiver receiving and storing predefined wireless network identifiers and a scan mode program for enabling either an active or passive scan mode. In the active scan mode, the transceiver repeatedly transmits probe request messages until the transceiver receives a probe response message from the network (successful active scan) or until a predetermined criterion terminates the active scan (failed active scan). In the passive scan mode, the transceiver does not send anything but waits for a received network identifier from one or more wireless networks. The transceiver enables the active scan mode in response to a successful active scan or to a reception of a wireless network identifier that matches at least one of the predefined identifiers stored in memory. The transceiver enables the passive scan mode in response to a failed active scan. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300762 | RAPID LOCAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method of operating a wireless communication device includes transmitting a query to a wireless network. The query requests information about a type of Internet Protocol (IP) address assignment in use on the wireless network. The method also includes receiving a reply from the wireless network, wherein the reply includes the information about the type of IP address assignment in use on the wireless network. The method further includes determining an IP address for the wireless communication device, including: only in response to the information about the type of IP address assignment in use on the wireless network, as set forth in the reply, indicating that dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is in use by the wireless network, transmitting a DHCP discovery message to the wireless network in order to determine the IP address for the wireless communication device. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300763 | WLAN NETWORK INFORMATION CACHING - A WLAN client device maintains a history of profile—location associations. An association links a profile stored in the client device with a location in the vicinity of which the client device was connected to a wireless local area network matching the profile. While in a vicinity of a certain location, the client device may scan for wireless local area networks in a manner that takes into account records of the history that include the certain location. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300764 | METHOD OF RELAYING AN ELECTRONIC MESSAGE TO A HANDHELD ELECTRONIC DEVICE BEYOND THE COVERAGE AREA OF A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of transmitting an electronic message to a handheld electronic device that is outside the coverage area of a wireless network having at least one Access Point. The method includes: attempting to wirelessly transmit the electronic message from the network to the handheld electronic device through the wireless access point; wirelessly transmitting the electronic message from the wireless access point to a peer handheld electronic device that is within communication range of the access point; and wirelessly transmitting the electronic message from the peer handheld electronic device to the handheld electronic device when the peer handheld electronic device is within communication range of the handheld electronic device. | 11-29-2012 |
20120307813 | Methods for Routing of Calls in Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem Centralized Services Networks and Related Gateway Mobile Switching Centres (GMSC) and Home Location Registers (HLR) - Methods for routing a call involving an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem Centralized Services (ICS) subscriber accessing an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network using a circuit switched (CS) access network are provided. The method includes receiving an incoming call request for a user at a gateway Mobile Switching Centre (GMSC); accessing a Location Register storing information relating to the user to determine if the user is an ICS subscriber; and generating and forwarding a SIP INVITE message to the IMS to establish the call if it is determined that the user is an ICS subscriber. Related Gateway Mobile Switching Centres (GMSCs) and Home Location Registers (HLR) are also provided herein. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307814 | Polling using B-ACK for occasional back-channel traffic in VoWIFI applications - Polling using B-ACK for occasional back-channel traffic in VoWIFI applications. Within wireless communication systems having a relatively asymmetric channel (e.g., relative more downstream traffic than upstream), certain upstream communications (e.g., acknowledgments (ACKs) and/or block acknowledgments (B-ACKs)) include indication therein (e.g., piggybacked therein) that a given downstream located communication device desires/needs to make upstream communication. In some instances, specificity is also provided therein to indicate the type of information to be transmitted upstream. Such a communication protocol mitigates (or eliminates) contention between upstream and downstream traffic in an environment with significantly more downstream traffic (e.g., such as ongoing downstream traffic that may include streaming video). A coordinating device (e.g., access point (AP)) may employ such upstream provided indicia to coordinate upstream and downstream communications within the wireless communication system in a non-contentious manner that does not deleteriously affect ongoing downstream traffic. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307815 | Wireless Communication System and Device For Coupling A Base Station and Mobile Stations - A wireless communication system comprising first and second transceivers. The first transceiver communicate with a base station, wherein the base station communicates with the first transceiver and a plurality of other wireless communication devices according to a wide area wireless communication protocol. The second transceiver is coupled to the first transceiver and communicates with a first mobile station, wherein the second transceiver communicates with the first mobile station according to a local area wireless communication protocol. The first transceiver receives from the base station a first downlink signal intended for the first mobile station and transmits the first downlink signal to the second transceiver. The second transceiver re-transmits the first downlink signal to the first mobile station as a second downlink signal according to the local area wireless communication protocol. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307816 | Wireless routing device - The disclosure discloses a wireless routing device. The device include: a wideband wireless access module configured to implement wireless access of wideband data; an embedded operating system software module, embedded in the wideband wireless access module, configured to enable a user to access a wireless local area network (WLAN), and to forward the wideband data received from the wideband wireless access module to a WLAN communication module; the wireless local area network communication module is configured to receive the wideband data and to enable users in the WLAN to share the wideband data; and a power supply module configured to supply power for the wideband wireless access module and the wireless local area network communication module. The disclosure adequately utilizes the hardware resources of the wideband wireless access module, and saves a hardware of an independent Access Point (AP) Router processor module so that the hardware structure is simpler, the power consumption is lower during the normal standby and operation, and meanwhile the lasting time of the battery mode is longer, and the portability and the mobility of the wireless route product are improved. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307817 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING 802.11 WLANS IN TV WHITE SPACE - A method and apparatus for using 802.11 Wireless LANs in TV white space are provided that additionally allows coexistence with non-802.11 devices in the same spectrum space. The method and apparatus extend concepts used in traditional 802.11 applications in the MAC and PHY layers so that WLANs can function over TV white space channels. The method and apparatus also facilitates coexistence of non 802.11 devices and existence with other 802.11 applications by extending the Enhanced Distributed Channel Access mechanism used to provide quality of service. An OFDM system with fixed subcarrier spacing is suggested to accommodate spectrum characteristics (variable center frequency and channel bandwidth) of the TVWS. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314692 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITIZING FEMTO NODE COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatuses are provided that include providing switching functionality at a low power base station to allow the low power base station to route communications related to mobile devices and a local area network (LAN) over one or more broadband connections. In this configuration, the low power base station communicates over the one or more broadband connections without traversing the LAN, and can thus implement quality-of-service (QoS) or other parameters for connections from various devices and the LAN. In addition, the low power base station can provide additional switching to route communications between the mobile devices and LAN devices using local internet protocol access. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314693 | Method and System of Operating a Hotspot Application in a Wireless Device - Embodiments for processing client traffic in a wireless device operated in hotspot mode are provided. Embodiments enable downlink and uplink client traffic flows within the wireless device that reduce the load on the application processor (AP) of the wireless device. In an embodiment, client traffic flows bypass the AP entirely allowing the AP to enter a power saving mode during hotspot sessions. This results in increased battery lifetime and reduced power consumption of the wireless device. In addition, the hotspot session quality is improved by the reduced latency resulting from bypassing the AP. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314694 | Method of Back-off Procedure Setup in a Wireless Communication System - A method of back-off procedure setup in a wireless communication system, comprising initiating an enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA) transmit opportunity (TXOP) for transmission by a primary access category (AC), sharing the EDCA TXOP with at least a secondary AC, determining whether an initial frame of the primary AC is successfully transmitted, determining whether one or more frames of one of the at least a secondary AC are successfully transmitted during the EDCA TXOP, determining whether to invoke a point coordination function inter-frame space (PIFS) recovery procedure for the secondary AC if the one or more frames of the secondary AC are not successfully transmitted during the EDCA TXOP, setting a contention window of the secondary AC by an enhanced distributed channel access function (EDCAF) of the secondary AC, and setting a back-off timer of the secondary AC after the end of the EDCA TXOP. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314695 | Efficient Transmission for Low Data Rate WLAN - A network interface device utilizes a physical layer (PHY) protocol data unit (PPDU) maximum duration such that, (A) when operating in a first mode of operation, a data unit (i) defined by a protocol in a layer above a PHY protocol in a protocol stack and (ii) having a maximum length defined by the protocol above the PHY protocol will fit entirely within a single PPDU at a lowest possible data rate in the first mode of operation, and (B) when operating in a second mode of operation, the data unit (i) defined by the protocol in the layer above the PHY protocol and (ii) having the maximum length defined by the protocol above the PHY protocol will not fit entirely within a single PPDU at a lowest possible data rate in the second mode of operation. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314696 | Efficient Transmission for Low Data Rate WLAN - It is determined whether basic service set (BSS) information has changed, and when it is determined that BSS information has changed, one or more first BSS information elements (IEs) that include at least some of the BSS information that has changed are generated. A shortened beacon frame is generated that (i) includes the one or more first BSS IEs, and (ii) omits one or more second BSS IEs that correspond to BSS information that has not changed. The beacon frame is transmitted. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314697 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACK TRANSMISSION IN A WLAN - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for acknowledgement (ACK) transmission in a WLAN. A station receives a plurality of data frames from a plurality of other stations and then transmits an ACK for the plurality of data frames to the plurality of stations. The ACK is a multi-user (MU) block ACK frame which includes a plurality of block ACKs for the plurality of stations. One block ACK includes at least one ACK for at least one data frame that is received from one station. | 12-13-2012 |
20120320886 | PHONE SUPPORTING MODE CONVERSION - A mechanism for a wireless device to obtain access to network connectivity through a WAN-enabled device. The wireless device may use peer-to-peer communication to request the WAN-enabled device enter a mode in which it serves as an access point to its WAN. The wireless device may then associate with the WAN-enabled device in its role as an access point to access connectivity services. Such a capability may be used, for example, to allow a wireless computing device to gain access to the Internet through a smartphone or other device that has Internet access, and can also be configured to communicate in accordance with the Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct standards. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320887 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - The claimed subject matter provides a method for wireless communications. The method includes transmitting, by a first node in a wireless network, a first preamble. The method also includes detecting, in parallel with transmitting the first preamble, a transmission of a second preamble. A second node in the wireless network transmits the second preamble. Additionally, the method includes determining a later start between the transmission of the first preamble and the transmission of the second preamble. The method further includes terminating transmission of the first preamble the determining indicates that the transmission of the first preamble started after the transmission of the second preamble. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320888 | MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION DETERMINATION - A wireless connection between a mobile device and an IP-based wireless telecommunications network is established when the mobile device registers with a network controller (NC) through an access point (AP). When a geographical position is needed for the mobile device (e.g., a 911 call), messages are exchanged between the NC and a serving mobile location center (SMLC), where the SMLC retrieves information from a database that is used to identify the geographic position of the mobile device. The database can store a variety of information related to mobile devices such as: last known position, IP address, MAC address, a mobile or subscriber identifier (such as an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)), last CGI, etc. The geographical position is communicated back to the NC, which can then forward the position information to a switch for processing such as for 911 calls. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320889 | LOW BANDWIDTH PHY FOR WLAN - A method includes generating first and second preambles for first and second data units corresponding to first and second PHY modes, respectively. Generating the first preamble includes generating a first STF, LTF, and SIG field. The first SIG field includes an OFDM symbol modulated according to a first modulation technique. The OFDM symbol begins a first time interval, and ends a second time interval, after the first LTF begins. Generating the second preamble includes generating a second STF and LTF. The second STF has a greater duration, and different repeating sequence, than the first STF. The second LTF includes a second OFDM symbol modulated according to a second modulation technique, and at least partially occupying a location beginning a third time interval, and ending a fourth time interval, after the second LTF begins. The third and fourth time intervals are equal to the first and second time intervals, respectively. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320890 | LOW BANDWIDTH PHY FOR WLAN - A method, in a communication system utilizing channels for transmitting first PHY mode data units, includes generating first and second data units conforming to first and second PHY modes, respectively, causing the first data unit to be transmitted via a channel, determining a frequency band for transmitting the second data unit, and causing the second data unit to be transmitted via the frequency band. Generating the first and second data units includes generating first and second series of OFDM symbols, respectively. At least a portion of the second OFDM symbols includes more upper-edge than lower-edge guard tones, or vice versa. The frequency band has a bandwidth equal to the channel bandwidth divided by n≧2, and either a lowest or highest sub-band of one or more channels is excluded from the frequency band when the second OFDM symbols include more upper-edge or more lower-edge guard tones, respectively. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320891 | VALET MODE APPLICATION - An application for use with a wireless device comprising a touch screen display is provided. The application comprises a valet mode application stored by the wireless device. The valet mode application is executable by the wireless device to provide control for a mobile router valet mode, the mobile router disposed within a vehicle. The valet application program is executable by the wireless device to produce a predetermined image on the touch screen display. The valet application program is executable such that touching the image is utilized to activate and deactivate a valet mode operation in the mobile router. The valet mode operating in the mobile router such that when the vehicle exceeds one or more predetermined conditions, the mobile router provides a notification to the wireless device. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320892 | MOBILE ROUTER NETWORK WITH VALET MODE FUNCTION - A mobile router comprises: a valet mode program to provide valet mode functionality in a vehicle in which the mobile router is disposed; a processor operable to execute the valet mode program; a predetermined distance limit; and a predetermined speed limit. The mobile router responds to externally generated commands from a predetermined source to activate or deactivate the valet mode. The processor is operable to determine if the predetermined distance limit is exceeded from the location of the vehicle when the valet mode is activated; and the processor is operable to determine if the vehicle exceeds the predetermined speed limit when the valet mode is activated. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320893 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A MOBILE DEVICE AND UNIVERSAL PLUG AND PLAY DEVICES - The present invention provides methods and devices for enabling communication between a mobile device and Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) devices. In one embodiment, a communication gateway includes a home base station for receiving a data communication request from a mobile device associated with a radio network, where the data communication request indicates type of communication. The communication gateway also includes a mediation entity for signalling an UPnP router that the data communication request is associated with an UPnP type communication. Moreover, the communication gateway includes an UPnP router for providing data communication from the mobile device to one or more UPnP devices connected to the UPnP router. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320894 | Concurrent Communicating of Multimedia Information in a Multistandard Wireless Communication System - Methods and systems for communicating information in a network are disclosed herein and may include receiving, at a mobile terminal, a first media signal via a first downlink communication path. A second media signal may be simultaneously received at the mobile terminal via a second downlink communication path. The first media signal and the second media signal may comprise the same media content. The first media signal received via the first downlink communication path and the second media signal received via the second downlink communication path may be selected in the mobile terminal for processing. The selection may be based on at least one downlink channel condition indicator corresponding to the first media signal or the second media signal. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320895 | On-Demand Flight Data Service - A flight data service subscription system allows personnel to subscribe to flight data services using an electronic devices such as a multifunctional display (MFD) onboard an aircraft. The MFD is used to select regional areas of coverage and generate requests for subscriptions to flight data services. Flight data application software running on the MFD manages flight data and the subscription requests. A server operated by a flight data service provider receives the subscription requests from the MFD and dispatches flight data responsive to the requests for the selected region. A wireless local area network on the ground transfers flight data and subscription requests between the MFD and the flight data subscription server. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320896 | METHOD FOR SENDING/RECEIVING DATA IN A WIRELESS PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN WHICH THERE IS SIMULTANEOUS COMMUNICATION WITH VARIOUS TERMINALS - A method and apparatus for transmitting a frame to at least one receiver in a wireless communication system is provided. The apparatus determines at least one data length in accordance with each receiver based on a number of symbol for the frame to be transmitted, determines a maximum data length among the at least one data length, and determines a length of the frame in time domain based on the maximum data length. The apparatus generates the frame in accordance with the length of the frame, the frame including a first signal field and at least one second signal field. The first signal field indicates the length of the frame and each second signal field indicates each data length. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320897 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA DISTRIBUTION IN VHF/UHF BANDS - Whitespace devices can use unused television frequencies for transmission and reception of WiFi OFDM signals. Three contiguous bands, such as former channels 2, 3, and 4, may be bonded together to define a whitespace band. In order to fit a WiFi OFDM signal into this whitespace band, a whitespace device compresses the bandwidth of each WiFi OFDM signal using a specific spectrum mask. Very low transmission power is needed for the modified WiFi OFDM signals, eliminating the need for high power amplifiers and most of the WiFi OFDM designs such as PHY and MAC can be reused with minor modifications. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320898 | METHOD OF SELECTING ANTENNAS AND TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTI-INPUT MULTI-OUTPUT WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - In a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) system, a method is provided for selecting at least one antenna from a plurality of antennas and transmitting a data frame from a station to an access point via the selected antenna or antennas. A method for transmitting data from a plurality of stations to an access point in the MIMO WLAN system includes detecting a channel status of a channel from the access point to each transmitting antenna of the station, selecting at least one transmitting antenna from among the station's transmitting antennas based on the detected channel status, and transmitting a data frame from the station to the access point via the selected transmitting antenna or antennas. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320899 | Routing Call To UMA-Capable Terminals Using A Geographic Number - Method of routing a call made to a fixed telephone number of a UMA-subscriber in a mobile telecommunications network comprising a first and a second switching node and a location server. Location information of said UMA-subscriber is acquired, wherein said location information comprises a location area code or a combination of location area code and cell identifier associated with a serving BSC or a serving GANC. The call is connected to the UMA-subscriber when the location area code or combination of location area code and cell identifier is associated with one of a group of GANCs, or connected to an alternative destination, such as a voicemail service, if the location area code or combination of location area code and cell identifier is not associated with said one of a group of GANCs. | 12-20-2012 |
20120327919 | FIXED DETERMINISTIC POST-BACKOFF FOR CYCLIC PRIORITIZED MULTIPLE ACCESS (CPMA) CONTENTION-FREE SESSIONS - A cyclic prioritized multiple access method is disclosed which includes Fixed Deterministic Post-Backoff. Fixed deterministic post-backoff reduces conflicts between access points of overlapping cells. Contention-free sessions can be generated, one from each overlapping cell. Each active access point engages in a fixed deterministic post-backoff. A fixed deterministic backoff delay (Bkoff times a fixed number of idle time slots) is used by all access points, with the value of Bkoff being greater than the number of overlapping cells. The Bkoff should be large enough to enable the traffic that needs to be accommodated by the channel. Each access point has a backoff timer that is counted down using the shortest interframe space possible. A contention-free session is initiated when the backoff timer expires, and it is then reset to the value of Bkoff to start a new cycle. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327920 | METHODS TO ENHANCE COEXISTENCE WITH LOW ENERGY WIRELESS NETWORKS - Disclosed implementations address the coexistence problem of wireless local area network (WLAN) and Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) technologies on the same device. For example, an apparatus includes a WLAN controller configured to cause a wireless transceiver module to send and receive packets over a wireless medium. A second controller is coupled to the WLAN controller and also configured to cause the wireless transceiver module to send and receive packet. The second controller informs the WLAN controller that the second controller is going to cause an advertising packet to be transmitted by the wireless transceiver module. The WLAN controller responds by causing a first protection packet to be transmitted by the wireless transceiver module, said first protection packet causes all wireless devices receiving the protection packet to inhibit use of the wireless medium during a timer period which includes the advertising packet. Other embodiments are disclosed as well. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327921 | DEVICE FOR PROVIDING RADIOFREQUENCY SIGNAL CONNECTIONS - What is disclosed is a device for providing radiofrequency signal connections for users, wherein the device comprises a plurality of access points which transmit or receive radiofrequency signals in different predetermined radiofrequency bands and are each connected via a transmission and reception signal path to at least one shared transmitting and receiving antenna, filter means being provided in the transmission and reception signal paths respectively and isolating the radiofrequency bands sufficiently from one another and from predetermined mobile radio frequency bands. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327922 | POSITIONING DEVICE AND POSITIONING METHOD - A positioning device for measuring a position includes a WLAN positioning calculation unit that performs first positioning, based on first radio waves from access points; a satellite positioning unit that performs second positioning, based on second radio waves from satellites; a positioning result determination unit that determines whether a positioning result by the WLAN positioning calculation unit exists within a predetermined range from position information or a measured position, based on the position information to be obtained during the second positioning by the satellite positioning unit or the measured position by the satellite positioning unit; and a positioning result adoption determination unit that determines whether the positioning result is adopted, based on a determined result by the positioning result determination unit. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327923 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SERVICE COVERAGE AREA MANAGEMENT - A wireless station within a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) includes a processor, a radio and a directional antenna. The radio gathers participatory data based on communications involving the wireless station and non-participatory data based on communications the wireless station listens to, but does not participate in. The processor produces an operational report based on the participatory data and the non-participatory data and provides the operational report to the WLAN. The processor further alters a gain vector of the directional antenna based on instructions received from the WLAN in response to the operational report. | 12-27-2012 |
20130003708 | CONTINUOUS CACHE SERVICE IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - A technique for transmitting an object to a mobile device is provided. In response to the mobile device moving from a first area serviced by a first cache to a second area serviced by a second cache, the first cache transmits the object stored in the first cache to the second cache. The first cache transmits instructions to the second cache that cause the second cache to forward the object to the mobile device in the second area. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003709 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH MULTIPLE TRANSCEIVERS - A mobile wireless communication device has multiple 802.11 transceivers. A first transceiver maintains a first 802.11 communication link in accordance with the 802.11 communication specification. A second transceiver maintains, simultaneously to the first transceiver maintaining the first 802.11 communication link, a second 802.11 communication link in accordance with the 802.11 communication specification. The first transceiver comprises first physical layer electronics for executing the physical layer functions of the first 802.11 communication link. The second transceiver comprises second physical layer electronics for executing the physical layer functions of the second 802.11 communication link. The electronics are implemented such that no portion of the first physical layer electronics forms a portion of the second physical layer electronics when the links are being simultaneously maintained. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003710 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF TRANSPORT MODE NOTIFICATION ON A MULTI-MODE HANDHELD COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communications device includes multiple data transceivers, each configured for communication via a respective communication transport mode. The communication device has one or more data packets which are associated with one of the communication transport modes. The handheld communication device transmits or receives the data packet(s) via the data transceiver that is configured for communication with the corresponding communication transport mode. A user-indication of the communication transport mode of the data packet(s) is provided in accordance with the data transceiver that communicates the data packet(s). The user indication is provided on a per-data packet basis, substantially contemporaneously with the communication of the data packet(s) via the one data transceiver. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010773 | DUAL WiFi APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS INTERNET AND WIRELESS INTERNET SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A dual wireless fidelity (WiFi) apparatus for wireless Internet that may perform installation, maintenance, management, or the like of a WiFi access point (AP) by using a mobile communication relay system more efficiently, and a wireless Internet system using the dual WiFi apparatus for wireless Internet. The dual WiFi apparatus includes: a signal inputting unit comprising a plurality of input ports for inputting a plurality of mobile communication signals, respectively, and an input port for inputting an Ethernet signal; a signal converting unit for converting the inputted Ethernet signal into a plurality of WiFi signals; a signal coupling unit for coupling the plurality of inputted mobile communication signals to the plurality of WiFi signals converted by the signal converting unit, respectively; and a signal outputting unit for outputting a plurality of coupled signals coupled by the signal coupling unit through a plurality of output ports, respectively. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010774 | SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION METHODS AND APPARATUS - Methods and apparatus for use in a wireless system are described where initiation of packet transmission is constrained in accordance to control actual packet transmission in a manner that reduces contention and possible collisions beyond that provided by lower layer resource contention mechanisms, e.g., 802.11 carrier sensing and/or transmission back-off timing mechanisms. Through higher level, e.g., MAC constraints, on packet transmission initiation, an air interface which employs carrier sensing can be used and controlled in a manner which reduces collisions and interference in applications where small packets, e.g., packets which can be transmitted in a fraction of the maximum permitted transmission time. The methods allow small packets in such systems to be transmitted on a periodic or semi-periodic basis in many cases. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010775 | THROUGHPUT ENHANCEMENT BY ACKNOWLEDGMENT SUPPRESSION - Systems and methods for improving data transmission rates in communication networks are disclosed. In an 802.11 wireless communication network, where a source node of the wireless network transmits TCP data to a destination node of the wireless network, the destination node does not transmit TCP acknowledgments (ACKs) for the TCP data if 802.11 ACKs indicate that the destination node received the TCP data. If a source outside the wireless network transmits TCP data to the destination node within the wireless network through an intermediate device, such as an access point, the destination node suppresses transmitting TCP ACKs. The intermediate device transmits TCP ACKs as proxy for the destination node to the source. The intermediate device also suppresses TCP ACKs where a source node within the wireless network sends the TCP data to a destination node outside of the wireless network. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010776 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO IMPLEMENT VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) PHONES - Methods and apparatus to implement voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) phones are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes detecting removal of a first user-replaceable network interface from a first port of a phone, the first network interface to communicate with a gateway using a first VOIP; detecting insertion of a second user-replaceable network interface into the first port of the phone, the second network interface to communicate with the gateway using a second VOIP, the second VOIP being different from the first VOIP; receiving a driver for the second network interface via a second port defined in the housing of the phone, the driver to enable the second network interface to communicate with the gateway using the second VOIP, the driver being received after a boot procedure to initialize the phone; and initializing the second network interface based on the driver. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010777 | MULTI-HOP WIRELESS BACKHAUL NETWORK AND METHOD - Some embodiments of the invention provide an implementation for a multi-hop wireless backhaul network. These embodiments can advantageously be deployed in dense urban areas and/or co-located with wireless access nodes, such as base-stations of a cellular wireless communication system. Preferably wireless links between constituent network nodes are set-up hierarchically. A basic result of this is that peer-to-peer (child-to-child) communication is generally prohibited and circuits are forced to conform to a topology. The multi-hop wireless backhaul network may be used to carry delay sensitive, high-density last mile circuit traffic over Non-Line-Of-Sight (NLOS) broadband radio links. Moreover, some embodiments of the invention provide a method of path-healing for re-routing of circuit traffic from circuits that have experienced catastrophic failures. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010778 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PREDICTING SERVICE DROP IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A mobile wireless device for use in a wireless network, wherein the wireless network includes regular access points and border access points. The border access points are those access points situated at the edge of the campus or other physical facility associated with the wireless network and they define the edge of the coverage area of the wireless network. The mobile wireless device predicts a possible drop of an active service due to loss of coverage by recognizing when it has connected with a border access point. A warning is output to the user of the mobile wireless device. The mobile wireless device may further recognize if it is located on the exterior side of the border access point away from the interior of the wireless network. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010779 | Method and system for bridging and routing offload in a multiport wireless system - Aspects of a method and system for bridging and routing offload in a multiport wireless system are presented. Various aspects of the system may include a wireless network interface subsystem that enables transcoding of at least a portion of a data packet received by the wireless network interface subsystem. The wireless network interface subsystem may enable transfer of the transcoded portion of the data packet from the wireless network interface subsystem to a wired network interface subsystem that is communicatively coupled thereto. The transcoded portion of the data packet may be compliant with a format utilized by the wired network interface subsystem. | 01-10-2013 |
20130016708 | Wireless Network System, Method of Controlling the System, and Wireless Network Relay DeviceAANM Haba; YoshifumiAACI Nagoya-shiAACO JPAAGP Haba; Yoshifumi Nagoya-shi JP - A wireless network system includes first and second network relay devices, with the first relay device having first wireless communication setup information pre-set thereto and including a first communication I/F part and a first wireless communication setup information transmission part for sending first wireless communication setup information to the second wireless relay device if the first and second relay devices are enabled to communicate with each other, and with the second relay device including: a second communication I/F part; a first wireless communication setup information reception part for receiving the first wireless communication setup information via the second communication I/F part; and a first wireless communication part for performing wireless communication with a client by using the received first wireless communication setup information. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016709 | INITIATION OF A MIMO COMMUNICATION - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for initiating a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) communication. The method and apparatus includes processing that begins by transmitting a frame formatted in accordance with a default MIMO active transmitter-receiver antenna configuration to a target receiver. The processing continues by receiving at least one response frame from the target receiver. The processing continues by determining a number of receiver antennas of the target receiver from the at least one response frame. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016710 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAMAANM Shinohara; MasahitoAACI TokyoAACO JPAAGP Shinohara; Masahito Tokyo JP - Provided is a communication system which easily connects in accordance with a communication state of a communication device, a communication terminal, a communication terminal, a communication device, a communication system, a communication control method and a communication control program. | 01-17-2013 |
20130022030 | Systems and methods for determining a network relationship between mobile devices - Described are a system and method for determining a network relationship between a mobile device and a contact stored in the mobile device. A mobile device is associated with a network. A request is transmitted from the mobile device for a set of contact devices in a contact list of the mobile device that are in the network. A set of contact devices is generated that includes at least one contact device identified as being at the network. A contact element is modified that corresponds to the identified contact device to indicate that the identified contact is in the network. | 01-24-2013 |
20130022031 | Relayed Content Distribution and Data Collection Using Vehicles - Technologies for relaying digital content and collecting data using vehicles, and an access point associated with a vehicle or structure are provided. A stationary AP is associated with a stationary vehicle structure. A content distribution portal receives a content package including metadata and content segments from a content provider via the Internet. The content distribution portal sends the content package to the stationary AP via the Internet. A mobile AP is mounted on or in a vehicle and is associated with a display device mounted on the vehicle. The stationary AP wirelessly sends the content package to the mobile AP using a P2P protocol when a wireless connection is established between the stationary and mobile APs. After receiving the entire content package, the mobile AP presents the content segments on the display device mounted on the vehicle in a manner specified by the metadata. | 01-24-2013 |
20130022032 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING IN A NETWORK - Systems, methods, and devices to enable compressed media access control headers and frame check sequences for wireless local area network (WLAN) systems are described herein. In one aspect, the header information in data packets sent between devices is compressed so as to reduce the amount of overhead required to transmit payload data in a data packet. | 01-24-2013 |
20130022033 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR ACCESS CONTROL OF NETWORK SERVICE - The present invention relates to a method and terminal for access control of a network service. The method is implemented by a terminal with capabilities of accessing a wireless local area network and mobile network. The method includes: a route establishing step, in which the terminal obtains a local Internet Protocol (IP) address allocated by a wireless local area network and a remote IP address allocated by a core network packet domain device, establishes Internet service route options corresponding to the local IP address and packet domain service route options corresponding to the remote IP address; a route matching step, in which the terminal matches the service route options according to a destination address of an original service message; and a message encapsulating and transmitting step, in which the terminal encapsulates the original service message according to the matched service route options and transmits the encapsulated service data message. | 01-24-2013 |
20130022034 | Enhanced 2-Wire and 3-Wire WLAN Bluetooth Coexistence Solution - Methods and systems for enhanced 2-wire and 3-wire WLAN Bluetooth coexistence solution may include determining whether adaptive frequency hopping is active in a Bluetooth communication device. If the adaptive frequency hopping is active, handshaking with a collocated non-Bluetooth communication device may be disabled. The collocated non-Bluetooth communication device may be a wireless local area network communication device. If the adaptive frequency hopping is inactive, handshaking with the collocated non-Bluetooth communication device may be enabled. If the adaptive frequency hopping is inactive, the Bluetooth communication device may initiate handshaking prior to transmitting data. If the adaptive frequency hopping is inactive, the Bluetooth communication device may also respond to the handshaking initiated by the collocated non-Bluetooth communication device. The handshaking may be executed via a 2-wire Bluetooth/WLAN coexistence interface or a 3-wire Bluetooth/WLAN coexistence interface. | 01-24-2013 |
20130028243 | FACILITATING CHANNEL SOUNDING FOR MULTIPLE INPUT AND MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) TRANSMISSIONS - Methods and apparatuses are provided for facilitating channel sounding for multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) transmissions between an access terminal and an access point. According to one feature, the access point may transmit a data frame to an access terminal using a plurality of spatial streams and a plurality of antennas. The access terminal may transmit an acknowledgement frame back to the access point, where the acknowledgement frame is transmitted as both a sounding signal and as to acknowledge receipt of the data frame. According to another feature, the access point may transmit a data frame and a matrix request frame to an access terminal. The access terminal may determine channel matrix information, and may send the channel matrix information together with an acknowledgement frame back to the access point. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028244 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE MITIGATION OF NOISE INTERFERENCE - A method and system for adaptive mitigation of noise interference in a receiver. In one embodiment of the invention, the receiver determines the type of the dominant noise interference among one or more noise interferences. The receiver determines or optimizes the estimation and averaging process of the noise covariance matrix based on the type of the dominant noise interference in one embodiment of the invention. This allows dynamic selection and adaptation of the noise estimate covariance matrix based on the noise type in one embodiment of the invention. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028245 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION FOR A DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The disclosure recites a system and method of identifying location data for a server device managing communications for a wireless network. The method comprises: obtaining location data for the server device; identifying a location for the server device by analyzing at least the location data; updating data in the server device with the location; identifying a communication transmission range for the location for the server device; and configuring communications generated by the server device to conform to the communication transmission range. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028246 | WLAN-BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM - A technique to provide a WLAN-based positioning system to determine a location of a mobile wireless receiving device. A single access point is used to generate a plurality of beacons, in which each beacon of the plurality of beacons has a unique identifier. Each beacon is then transmitted in a different direction from other beacons. When the receiving device receives at least one of the transmitted beacons, signal strength or some other signal parameter is obtained from the at least one received beacon. The received signal parameter is used to determine the location of the mobile receiving device. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028247 | Method for Transmitting a Packet via Heterogeneous Networks - A method of transmitting a packet via heterogeneous networks, for a transmitter and a receiver using the heterogeneous networks comprising a first network and a second network is disclosed. The method comprises the transmitter transmitting the packet to the receiver via the first network and the second network, to improve robustness of the transmission of the packet; and the transmitter stopping transmitting the packet via the second network after the packet is transmitted successfully via the first network, or stopping transmitting the packet via the first network after the packet is transmitted successfully via the second network; wherein the first network and the second network are of different types or with different characteristics. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028248 | DATABASE UPDATE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING A pCell - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a database update method and apparatus for locating a pCell. An embodiment of the present invention provides a database update apparatus for locating a pCell, comprising: a database storing grid cells that are sorted by pCell ID; a DB collection unit collecting log data for a WLAN signal from a mobile communication terminal which performs communication using the WLAN signal; an information extraction unit extracting a WLAN parameter from the log data of the WLAN signal; and a DB update unit updating the grid cells by matching and storing the information based on the extracted WLAN parameter in the corresponding grid cell. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the data-based information for AP locations and its application to the determination of a location can enhance the location performance. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028249 | Adaptive Scheduling - A communication device arranged to communicate data with another device at a given time instant according to either a first communication protocol or a second communication protocol, the communication device being constrained to transmit data according to the first communication protocol during a transmission window of predetermined duration that commences at a predetermined time instant and being arranged to, in dependence on a data communication according to the second communication protocol to be made by the communication device during that transmission window, select a time instant in that same transmission window for commencing a data transmission according to the first communication protocol. | 01-31-2013 |
20130034090 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS INFORMATION - Methods, systems and apparatus are provided for distributing wireless local area network (WLAN) access information to a wireless communication device based on a current coverage area that the wireless communication device is located in. A location services server can determine, based on a current location of the wireless communication device, a current coverage area of the wireless communication device, and transmit information identifying the current coverage area to a directory services server. Based on the current coverage area, the public safety directory services server can determine relevant WLAN access information for the current coverage area, and transmit a message to the wireless communication device that includes the relevant WLAN access information. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034091 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING PPDU IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method for transmitting a physical protocol data unit Time (PPDU) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) is provide. The method includes generating a PPDU frame comprising a signal field and a data field and transmitting the PPDU frame, in which a transmission bandwidth for transmitting the signal field is fixed, but a transmission bandwidth for transmitting the data field is variable. | 02-07-2013 |
20130039352 | CONFIGURING A WIRELESS NETWORK INTERFACE TO PROVIDE A NETWORK SERVICE - A wireless network interface of an apparatus is configured to operate in an infrastructure client mode if at least one predetermined wireless access point is detected via the wireless network interface. Otherwise, the wireless network interface is configured to operate in an infrastructure access point mode. A network service of the apparatus is provided via the configured wireless network interface. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039353 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SEAMLESS WiFi NETWORK TRANSITIONS - An apparatus, a method and a computer program product for seamless transition between WiFi networks (including in particular WiFi Internet networks) includes within a mobile communication apparatus a mobility layer that is tunneled to a mobility server within a network infrastructure. The mobile communications apparatus includes a wireless network capability, a global positioning system capability, an internal network protocol address and a routing capability. The apparatus, the method and the computer program product also provide that the mobility layer is programmed to sequentially and automatically tunnel to the mobility server at an available geographically defined WiFi network access location predicated upon a global positioning system determined position of the mobile communication apparatus. Embodiments also provide seamless transitions between WiFi networks and cellular networks. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039354 | Method and Apparatus for Transmission Protocol Uplink Channel Selection - First and second wireless transmission protocol uplink channels are available for use by a wireless device in transmitting data to a network. In various examples, the device selects between the first and second wireless transmission protocol uplink channels according to various different criteria. Examples include selecting between the first and second wireless transmission protocol uplink channels according to the type of data to be transmitted and according to the identity of the device, and various combinations of these. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039355 | RADIO MODULES IN A MODULAR WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - A plurality of different radio modules is provided for a wireless network access device to provide a modular, configurable and performance scalable wireless network. The radio modules include a radio board having a size and shape with a common form factor for the wireless network access device. A radio board connector mates with any one of multiple connectors on the wireless network access device. The radio board connector includes an electrical interface that conforms to a predefined interface on the wireless network access device. The radio board includes a radio board processor that communicates with a wireless network access device controller as a single radio instance for the radio module. The radio board includes a radio chain to communicate radio signals with corresponding antennas. The radio chain, antennas, and radio board processor operate in accordance with one of a plurality of different radio module types. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039356 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal may include a storage unit that stores an identifier of the proxy terminal in the wireless network, a wireless communication unit that performs wireless communication with another wireless communication terminal, an event receiving unit that receives a predetermined event, a processing unit that starts a participation setup process of causing the non-participating terminal that has wirelessly transmitted a participation setup process request for the wireless network to participate in the wireless network when a participation request for the wireless network and the participation setup process request for the wireless network are received after the event is received by the event receiving unit, and a control unit that causes the wireless communication unit to wirelessly transmit the event request of requesting the proxy terminal corresponding to the identifier stored in the storage unit to receive the event when a new participation request is received during a time. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039357 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM WITH AD HOC WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNCTION - In a communication control apparatus wirelessly communicable with a plurality of wireless communication units respectively installed in a plurality of vehicles, a first determiner determines at least one wireless communication unit in a number of wireless communication units in the plurality of wireless communication units as a first enabling unit that enables wireless communications with the communication control apparatus if information transmitted from the at least one wireless communication unit is second type information including a piece of vehicle information that includes at least the identifier of the corresponding vehicle. A second determiner determines a wireless communication unit in the remaining one or more wireless communication units as a second enabling unit, which enables wireless communications with the communication control apparatus, if information transmitted from the wireless communication unit is not included in the information transmitted from the first enabling unit. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039358 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device constitutes a wireless network which includes plural wireless communication devices and which is for performing communications between the plural wireless communication devices. The wireless communication device has a base station index based on which the wireless communication device functions as a base station of the wireless network. The base station index expresses a degree to which the wireless communication device functions as the base station. The wireless communication device includes a base station transfer unit configured to perform a transfer process of transferring a function of the base station of the wireless network from a first wireless communication device functioning as the base station of the wireless network already formed to a second wireless communication device that is newly joining the wireless network, when the base station index of the second wireless communication device is higher than that of the first wireless communication device. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044738 | PHOTO KIOSK WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM DESIGN - A photo kiosk wireless transmission system includes a mobile device and a data processing device. The mobile device includes an application program embedded therein and the data processing device includes a corresponding application program, so that transmission of multimedia data can be carried out between the mobile device and the data processing device through the corresponding application programs. To carry out the transmission, a Wi-Fi transmission device included in the mobile device and a Wi-Fi reception device included in the data processing device must be activated. As such, the multimedia data contained in the mobile device can be transmitted to the data processing device to allow the data processing device to carry out processing of the multimedia data (such as printing, storage, or uploading through the Internet to a community interaction platform), thereby improving convenience of use through changing the process and path of the known technology of multimedia data uploading. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044739 | CONCURRENT CONTROL METHOD FOR A COMMUNICATION DEVICE EMBEDDED WITH WI-FI DIRECT - A concurrent control method for a communication device embedded with Wi-Fi Direct includes dynamically adjusting a target beacon transmission time (TBTT) of a Wi-Fi Direct connection according to a time difference between the TBTT of the communication device and a nearest TBTT of a wireless local area network access point (WLAN AP) and whether a channel for the Wi-Fi Direct connection and a channel for the WLAN connection are different. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044740 | Method and Gateway for Transmission of Router Advertisement - Methods and Gateways (GWs) are provided for efficiently sending a router advertisement message to a User Equipment (UE). The GW comprises an interface, a processor, and an instructions repository that stores instructions that when executed by the processor cause the later to determine the UE is in idle mode, and responsive thereto, to delay a transmission of the router advertisement message to the UE until the UE transitions from the idle mode to an active mode. This is achieved by delaying a paging of the UE. In another embodiment, a method and GW is provided. The GW's processor detects a router advertisement message needs to be sent to the UE, determines the UE is in idle mode and delays a paging of the UE until detecting the UE transitions from the idle mode into an active mode, when the router advertisement message is sent to the UE. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044741 | Redirecting of data traffic between wan and lan - A method and apparatus for redirecting data traffic, the method includes exchanging user data over a wireless connection with a destination identified by an Internet Protocol address using a wide area bearer, receiving, over the wide area bearer, an off-loading indication message including address information of at least one local access server, exchanging signalling messages including information regarding one or more available local access networks with the at least one local access server specified in the off-loading indication message, selecting a local access network based at least part on information exchanged with the at least one local access server and on information regarding wireless signal coverage activating a supplementary wireless local area bearer based at least part on information regarding one or more available local access networks received from the at least one local access server, and routing new connection opening requests to the supplementary wireless local area bearer. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044742 | SIGNAL FIELD DESIGN FOR WLAN - A method of generating packets for transmission in a wireless communication system. The method comprises generating a data packet and generating a null data packet. Generating the data packet includes generating a data packet signal (SIG) field including a first data packet SIG subfield indicating a first physical layer (PHY) parameter to a receiving device. Generating the data packet also includes generating a data field. Furthermore, generating the null data packet includes generating a null data packet SIG field. The null data packet SIG field includes a first null data packet SIG subfield indicating a second PHY parameter to a receiving device. The data packet SIG field excludes any SIG subfield indicating the second PHY parameter to a receiving device, and (ii) the null data packet SIG field excludes any SIG subfield indicating the first PHY parameter to a receiving device. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044743 | SIGNAL FIELD DESIGN FOR WLAN - A method of generating packets for transmission in a wireless communication system, wherein each packet includes a SIG field that includes a first SIG subfield, includes generating a data packet and a null data packet. Generating the data packet includes generating information bits of the first SIG subfield of the data packet and generating the data portion of the data packet. The information bits of the first SIG subfield of the data packet indicate, to a receiving device, a length corresponding to a data portion of the data packet. Generating the null data packet includes generating information bits of the first SIG subfield of the null data packet. The information bits of the first SIG subfield of the null data packet indicate, to a receiving device, a first physical layer (PHY) parameter value associated with the null data packet. The first PHY parameter value is not a length value. | 02-21-2013 |
20130051375 | PASSIVE RF DEVICES THAT COMMUNICATE USING A WIRELESS NETWORK PROTOCOL - Passive RF devices are disclosed that communicate using a wireless network protocol. The device includes an antenna operable to receive a radio frequency (RF) signal from a RF source that transmits the RF signal based on a wireless network protocol. The device further includes circuitry operable to derive power from the RF signal. With the power derived from the RF signal, the circuitry is further operable to read data from a memory, to encode the data based on the wireless network protocol, and to modulate the RF signal to include the encoded data. The antenna is further operable to transmit the modulated RF signal based on the wireless network protocol for reception by the RF source or another passive RF device. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051376 | HYBRID BROADCAST PACKET REPLICATION FOR VIRTUAL LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A system for hybrid broadcast packet replication for virtual local area networks includes a switch operable to receive a packet with an associated VLAN identifier and replicate the packet. A VLAN bit mask is included in the switch to filter the target destinations for the sending the replicated packets. The mask has a first level that provides to the switch an indication of a VLAN group where a radio of an AP has an associated client device. The mask has a second level where the mask provides to the switch an indication of a WLAN where a radio of an AP has an associated client device. The mask can have a third level where the mask provides to the switch an indication of a list of VLANs in use by each WLAN. The switch can then send those replicated packets filtered through the mask on to target devices of the identified VLAN. | 02-28-2013 |
20130058319 | Network Processor - The present invention discloses a network processor for a broadband gateway. The network processor includes a host processor; a plurality of networking interfaces, corresponding to a plurality of networking technologies, respectively; and a network address translation (NAT) engine, for accelerating packet processing from a first networking interface to a second networking interface. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058320 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - An input unit inputs input data. A priority determination unit determines priority of the data input by the input unit. A speed control unit sets the communication speed of the wireless communication of the data to be output from an output unit according to the priority of the data determined by the priority determination unit, and also, when input of the data is not detected, sets the communication speed of the wireless communication of the data to be output from the output unit to be lower than the communication speed when the input of the data is detected. The output unit outputs output data by the wireless communication at the set communication speed. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058321 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, DISTRIBUTION DATA PROCESSING METHOD, AND DISTRIBUTION DATA PROCESSING PROGRAM - An electronic coupon is distributed from a management server to a mobile device via the Internet, communication setting data defining a communication condition and effectiveness of this electronic coupon is transmitted to a shop apparatus. When the mobile device enters a range in which near field communication with the shop apparatus is possible, communication between the mobile device and the shop apparatus is established based on the communication condition. Further, when it is determined that the electronic coupon held by the mobile device is effective for this shop apparatus, the mobile device is notified of a presence of a shop associated with the held electronic coupon in the vicinity. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064233 | Transceiver Station for Forming a Telecommunications Network Node and Associated Telecommunications Method - A transceiver station is provided for forming a telecommunications network node. The station includes at least two transceiver radio modules and a control module. Each transceiver module is adapted to operate alternatingly as a subscriber station and as a base station, as a function of commands from the control module. The control module is adapted to determine a modification of the state of the network and to dynamically control at least one change in the operation of at least one transceiver module, from subscriber station to base station or vice versa, as a function of at least the determined modification. The control module is adapted so that the number of subscriber stations connected to a base station is at most equal to 1. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064234 | HARDWARE-BASED PACKET ADDRESS PARSING FOR PACKET RECEPTION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - An apparatus comprises a network physical layer and an activity sensor for sensing a packet and activating the network physical layer from shutdown. The network physical layer decodes a PHY header portion and a media access control header portion of a packet header. A MAC has a fixed hardware media access plane implementing IEEE 802.11 series MAC functionality and couples to a microprocessor. A MAC address parser receives the MAC header portion of the packet, for processing the MAC header portion of the packet, and for activating the MAC from a shutdown in response to recognizing a MAC address within the MAC header portion of the packet, such that the MAC is not activated if the MAC parser does not recognize the MAC address, wherein the MAC is operable, after activation, to perform MAC functionality without the microprocessor and to provide data from the packet to the microprocessor. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064235 | Turbo Modes for BAN-based Communications - A first device is adapted to communicate with a second device using a protocol standard. The devices exchange security and connection setup frames using a preamble format and a header format defined in the protocol standard. The connection setup frames specify a modified protocol using a truncated preamble, a shortened header, or both. The devices configure their transceivers to transmit and receive frames formatted based on the modified protocol. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064236 | Control of Quality of Service in Overlapping Basic Service Sets in Wireless Local Area Networks - Access priority for wireless devices located in an area in which radiofrequency (RF) coverage areas of a first wireless access point and a second wireless access point overlap is controlled by coordinating operation of the first wireless access point and the second wireless access point. The wireless devices access a common RF channel via a collision sense multiple access/collision avoidance mechanism. The probability of accessing the RF channel may be varied by adjusting the length of interframe spacings and the length of contention windows. The length of the interframe spacings and the length of the contention windows associated with the first access point and associated with the second access point are configured such that the probability of wireless devices associated with the first wireless access point accessing the RF channel is greater than the probability of wireless devices associated with the second wireless access point accessing the RF channel. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064237 | Wireless Communication System, Cluster Head Equipment (CHE) Installed In Wireless Communication System, And Wireless Communication Method - Disclosed is a wireless communication system and the like that can avoid interference even if a plurality of networks coexist. The wireless communication system includes a primary user, cluster head equipment, and a secondary user. The cluster head equipment is for providing a local area network to a cluster region containing the abovementioned primary user. Also, the cluster head equipment contains: an acquisition means that acquires one or both—of information regarding the primary user and information regarding a primary signal—and the like; and a transmission means that transmits information to the secondary user. Then, using this wireless communication system, the secondary user performs cognitive wireless communication or the like on the basis of the information received from the transmission means of the cluster head equipment. | 03-14-2013 |
20130070737 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CALLS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, receiving a request for a voice call at a mobile switching center server, transmitting a mapping query from the mobile switching center server to a database in response to the request for the voice call, route the request from the mobile switching center server to an internet protocol multimedia subsystem for facilitating establishing the voice call when the mapping query is successful in obtaining an internet protocol address for establishing the voice call with a recipient communication device, and routing the request from the mobile switching center server to a second server for facilitating establishing the voice call without routing the request to the internet protocol multimedia subsystem when the mapping query is not successful in obtaining the internet protocol address. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070738 | DISCOVERING NETWORK INFORMATION AVAILABLE VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - Network information may be discoverable without requiring a connection to that network. For example, Access Network Query Protocol (“ANQP”) may allow a device to discover information about a network prior to the device associating with that network. In other words, ANQP allows a network terminal to request additional network information prior to establishing network capability. The additional network information that may be discoverable includes network latency, cellular capabilities, hotspot capabilities, mobility capabilities, neighbor reports, station identification, and multiple hotspot session identification. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070739 | DISCOVERING NETWORK INFORMATION AVAILABLE VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - Network information may be discoverable without requiring a connection to that network. For example, Access Network Query Protocol (“ANQP”) may allow a device to discover information about a network prior to the device associating with that network. In other words, ANQP allows a network terminal to request additional network information prior to establishing network capability. The additional network information that may be discoverable includes network latency, cellular capabilities, hotspot capabilities, mobility capabilities, neighbor reports, station identification, and multiple hotspot session identification. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070740 | REMOTE ACCESS TO A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE OVER A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A method and arrangement is provided which allows a PC or other client device to be used to communicate with third parties through a mobile communication device when a user and the mobile communication device are not in the vicinity of one another. The arrangement allows the user to control operation of the mobile communication device over a WLAN so that the user can send or receive messages such as voice and text messages to a remote party from the client device through the mobile communication device over the WLAN and the mobile communication network employed by the mobile device. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070741 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCHEDULING TRANSMISSIONS FOR ANTENNA ARRAYS - Embodiments of the claimed subject matter provide a method and apparatus for scheduling transmissions for an antenna array. One embodiment of the method includes scheduling a subset of a plurality of packets for concurrent transmission over an air interface to a corresponding subset of a plurality of wireless-enabled terminals. The subset is selected based on information indicating locations of the subset of the plurality of wireless-enabled terminals. This embodiment of the method also includes concurrently transmitting the subset of the plurality of packets using a plurality of antennas. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070742 | Shared backhaul link for multiple wireless systems - Systems and methods are presented for effectively utilizing a Backhaul link shared by two or more wireless system Operators, such that data rates from multiple Core Network data sources to the shared Backhaul link, and data rates from multiple sets of Subscriber Stations to the shared Backhaul link, are controlled so that a combined downlink rate substantially does not exceed a predetermined Backhaul data rate, and a combined uplink rate substantially does not exceed a predetermined Backhaul data rate, thereby preventing an overloading of the shared Backhaul link. Further, communication rates of different data sets within the downstream and upstream, respectively, are dynamically altered to provide best overall service within the downstream and upstream, respectively, while not overloading the shared Backhaul link. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070743 | Sharing of radio resources between a backhaul link and a radio access network - Systems and methods are presented for effectively sharing a plurality of radio transceiver chains between a Backhaul link and a Radio Access Network (RAN), in which there is a wireless Base Station (BS) with some number of radio transceiver chains, the system initially allocates such chains between the Backhaul link and the RAN according to some criterion, the system dynamically monitors the performance of the Backhaul link and RAN to detect any deficiencies in desired levels of performance, and the system then reallocates the radio transceiver chains between the Backhaul link and the RAN in a manner calculated to help achieve the desired levels of performance. Optionally and in various embodiments, the digital signals to and from the Backhaul link, or to and from the RAN, may be MIMO signals, MRC signals, MMSE signals, or ML signals. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070744 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SECURITY OF A NETWORK CONNECTION - A terminal includes: a frame management unit to manage medium access control (MAC) frame information; an access time management unit to record time according to the terminal communicating with a wireless access point (AP); a conversion performing unit to modify the frame information based on the time; and a management storage unit to store the modified frame information. A method for providing security includes: at a mobile terminal, delivering mobile frame information to and requesting AP frame information from a wireless AP; at the wireless AP, delivering the AP frame information to and requesting modified mobile frame information from the mobile terminal; at the mobile terminal, delivering the modified mobile frame information to and requesting the modified AP frame information from the wireless AP; and at the wireless AP, delivering the modified AP information. A wireless AP manages modified MAC frame information. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070745 | COMMUNICATING DATA FRAMES ACROSS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS THAT USE INCOMPATIBLE NETWORK ROUTING PROTOCOLS - A communication method operates to seamlessly transmit internet protocol (IP) data frames, such as IPv6 data frames, over a communication network that uses a non-IP network routing protocol, i.e., a communication network that implements a network routing protocol other than, or that is incompatible with an IP network routing protocol, such as the WirelessHART protocol. This communication method enables, for example, field devices or other intelligent devices within a process plant network that uses a non-IP communication network to perform messaging of IP data frames generated at or to be received by internet protocol enabled devices either within the process plant network or outside of the process plant network. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070746 | TRANSMISSION METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DATA COMPRESSION - A wireless communication network includes a network device and a terminal device. The network device sends a first message indicating a data compression algorithm supported by the network device, receives a second message identifying a data compression algorithm supported by the terminal device, and sends a third message to the terminal device upon receiving the second message, the third message identifying a negotiated data compression algorithm. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070747 | Modified Preamble Structure for IEEE 802.11A Extensions to Allow for Coexistence and Interoperability Between 802.11A Devices and Higher Data Rate, MIMO or Otherwise Extended Devices - A modified preamble is used by extended devices that operate at higher rates, MIMO or other extensions relative to strict 802.11a-compliant devices. The extended devices might use multiple antenna techniques (MIMO), where multiple data streams are multiplexed spatially and/or multi-channel techniques, where an extended transmitter transmits using more than one 802.11a channel at a time. Such extensions to IEEE 802.11a can exist in extended devices. The modified preamble is usable for signaling, to legacy devices as well as extended devices, to indicate capabilities and to cause legacy devices or extended devices to defer to other devices such that the common communication channel is not subject to unnecessary interference. The modified preamble is also usable for obtaining MIMO channel estimates and/or multi-channel estimates. The modified preamble preferably includes properties that facilitate detection of conventional and/or extended modes (“mode detection”) and provides some level of coexistence with legacy IEEE 802.11a devices. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070748 | EFFICIENT GROUP ID MANAGEMENT FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANs) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for efficiently managing groups of stations (STAs) receiving simultaneous transmissions in a multiuser multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) scheme. One example method generally includes; for a first apparatus in a number of groups of apparatuses, allocating a first spatial stream position for each of at least one first group in the number of the groups; and transmitting a first unicast message to the first apparatus, wherein the first unicast message comprises an indication of the allocated spatial stream position for each of the at least one first group and, for each group in the number of the groups, an indication of a membership status, in the group, of the first apparatus. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077609 | AUDIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHODS USING PERSONAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - According to one aspect, a communications system is disclosed. In one embodiment, the communications system includes a managed communications module that is executable on a personal communications device. The managed communications module is operative to, when executed by a processor, receive input data associated with sound from a user of the personal communications device and to cause the personal communications device to send audio output data including the input data over a local wireless network link. A management module that is executable on a management computer is operative to, when executed by a processor, receive the audio output data and to perform at least one audio data processing function to generate processed audio data. The management module is also operative to, when executed, cause the management computer to send the processed audio data to the managed communications module over the local wireless network link. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077610 | Smart meter media access control (MAC) for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Smart meter media access control (MAC) for single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Different types of wireless communication devices may be implemented within various wireless communication systems. Some of these devices may be implemented to communicate sensing and/or measurement to one or more other devices. For example, certain devices may be implemented to perform monitoring associated with any of a number of services provided by service providers (e.g., electricity, natural gas, water, Internet access, telephone service, and/or any other service). In accordance with such sensing and/or measurement related applications, a given device need not necessarily be awake or at a fully operative state at all times. Appropriate coordination, scheduling, communication medium access, etc. among potentially many implemented devices ensures effective communication and gathering of such sensing and/or measurement related data (e.g., using one or more service period (SP) announcements, various communication medium access options, etc.). | 03-28-2013 |
20130077611 | Tunneled Direct Link Setup Systems And Methods With Consistent Link Information Maintenance - A method includes directly receiving, at a first station, a signal transmitted from a second station. Each of the first and second stations respectively includes a link status indicator that indicates whether a direct link exists between the first and second stations. The signal was transmitted based on the link status indicator of the second station indicating that a direct link does exist between the first and second stations. Responsive to the link status indicator of the first station indicating that a direct link does not exist between the first station and the second station, the signal is dropped, and a teardown signal is transmitted from the first station to the second station. Responsive to the teardown signal, the link status indicator of the second station is to be changed, by the second station, to indicate that a direct link does not exist between the first and second stations. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077612 | POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION - A microwave communication system may include subscriber stations in communication with a base station. The stations may include time duplex circuitry normally found in wireless local area networks (WLANs). Signals normally routed through antennas associated with such circuitry instead are routed through circuitry to perforin frequency conversion to and from microwave communications frequencies, for communications over microwave links between the subscriber stations and the base station. In some embodiments the wireless circuitry is configured for multiple input multiple output (MIMO) operation with one antenna port dedicated for transmission of data and one antenna port dedicated to reception of data. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077613 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING EFFICIENT OPERATION OF MULTIPLE MODES IN A WLAN SYSTEM - A method and apparatus that applies medium access control (MAC) transmission opportunity (TXOP) protection for multiple mode operation in a WLAN system. In particular, MAC mechanisms are defined to support multiple mode CTS frames, and multiple mode CF-End frames sent by the AP, each in a format appropriate for the corresponding mode which may also apply to a single mode. MAC mechanisms permit truncation of TXOP duration for releasing the unused portion of the TXOP when no further data for transmission is available. Release of unused protected TXOP is possible for both protected AP transmissions and STA transmissions. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077614 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR LOCAL ROUTING AUTHORIZATION - A method includes: respectively initiating a local routing authorization request to a first local routing policy entity and a second local routing policy entity according to service flow information of a first mobile station, so as to enable the first local routing policy entity to perform local routing authorization for the first mobile station and enable the second local routing policy entity to perform local routing authorization for the second mobile station; and when a local routing authorization result of the first mobile station and a local routing authorization result of the second mobile station are both success, transmitting, through local routing, a service flow corresponding to the service flow information of the first mobile station and a service flow corresponding to the service flow information of the second mobile station. | 03-28-2013 |
20130083782 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR A SCALABLE NETWORK WITH EFFICIENT LINK UTILIZATION - In some embodiments, an apparatus comprises a core network node configured to be operatively coupled to a set of network nodes. The core network node is configured to receive a broadcast signal from a network node from the set of network nodes, which is originated from a host device operatively coupled to the network node. The broadcast signal is sent via a tunnel from the network node to the core network node, such that other network nodes that are not included in the tunnel do not receive the broadcast signal. The core network node is configured to retrieve control information associated with the broadcast signal without sending another broadcast signal, and then send the control information to the network node. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083783 | Multi-RAT Carrier Aggregation for Integrated WWAN-WLAN Operation - Systems and methods for Multi-Radio Access Technology (RAT) Carrier Aggregation (MRCA) wireless wide area network (WWAN) assisted wireless local area network (WLAN) discovery, association, and flow switching are disclosed. One system comprises a control signaling module in a wireless device that includes a WWAN radio integrated with a WLAN radio. The control signaling module is configured to communicate WWAN control signaling and WLAN control signaling via a WWAN radio connection of the wireless device. A dynamic flow mapping module is configured to form a flow-mapping table to dynamically map service flows between the WWAN radio and the WLAN radio in the wireless device. A flow routing module is configured to route data packets to one of the WWAN radio and the WLAN radio in the wireless device based on the flow-mapping table to transmit and receive the data packets via the wireless device. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083784 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SERVICE - A method and apparatus for providing a service in a service providing device are provided. The method includes receiving, from a terminal, information about a wireless transmitter/receiver whose vicinity the terminal is located within; determining a differentiated service to be provided to the terminal according to the received information about the wireless transmitter/receiver; and providing the determined differentiated service to the terminal. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083785 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVISIONING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES BETWEEN AN ACCESS POINT AND A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND PROVIDING MISSING INFORMATION NOTIFICATION - A method and system for selectively provisioning connections between an access point, which supports telecommunications services over an IP network, and a carrier network includes a network connection and a telephone connector suitable for connecting to a landline telephone, a cordless telephone, or a mobile device. The access point sends a provisioning request, which includes identifying information such as a subscriber identifier and a MAC address, to a network controller. The network controller attempts to find a geographic, street, or other address associated with the connection to be provisioned. If an address is not found, the network controller rejects the connection and sends a missing information notification to the access point. After receiving the missing information notification, the access point controls a user indicator to provide error information. | 04-04-2013 |
20130089080 | DATA MERGING FOR BLUETOOTH DEVICES - A method for performance in a device having a first processing system for providing the functionality of the upper layers of a Bluetooth stack and a Bluetooth Controller for providing the functionality of the lower layers of the Bluetooth stack, the first processing system and the Bluetooth Controller being connected by a Host Controller Interface (HCI), the method including the steps of generating L2CAP packets in the L2CAP layer of the Bluetooth stack in the first processing system corresponding to an Asynchronous Connectionless (ACL) link, transmitting those L2CAP packets through the Bluetooth stack to the Bluetooth Controller via the HCI, inserting data generated in a second processing system into the L2CAP packets in the Bluetooth Controller, and transmitting the L2CAP packets over the ACL link. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089081 | Method and System for Advertising Channel Load - The present disclosure discloses a network device and method for advertising channel load. The disclosed network device aggregates a number of clients that are associated with the network device on a specific wireless communication channel, and advertises the aggregated number to a client on the specific wireless communication channel. Further, the network device can receive aggregated load information on the specific wireless communication channel from another management network device, and further aggregates the load information across multiple wireless networks operating on the same wireless communication channel and coupled to different management network devices. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089082 | Method for Configuring an Access Scheme - A method is provided for configuring temporal parameters of an access scheme synchronized with other access schemes in a wireless mesh network based IEEE 802.11s specifications. In conventional access schemes an unsuitable choice of parameters at different neighboring mesh stations, especially an unsuitable choice of different DTIM intervals at the different neighboring mesh stations, will lead to overlapping reservations in some intervals. Thus, a method for setting a DTIM interval of a mesh station is provided, whereby a joining mesh station determines a DTIM interval of at least one mesh station of the wireless mesh network, and whereby the joining mesh station sets its own DTIM interval to the same DTIM interval, to a multiple of the DTIM interval, or to a fraction of the DTIM interval of at least one mesh station of the wireless mesh network, wherein the factor and the divisor are positive integers. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089083 | Intelligent Backhaul Controller - A intelligent backhaul system is disclosed to manage and control multiple intelligent backhaul radios within a geographic zone. The intelligent backhaul system includes multiple intelligent backhaul radios (IBRs) that are able to function in both obstructed and unobstructed line of sight propagation conditions, one or more intelligent backhaul controllers (IBCs) connecting the IBRs with other network elements, and an intelligent backhaul management system (IBMS). The IBMS may include a private and/or public server and/or agents in one or more IBRs or IBCs. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089084 | LAN Based Wireless Communications System - A method of routing calls from a mobile unit to a destination location can include registering the mobile unit with a wireless adjunct, wherein the wireless adjunct is in communication with a switching unit and a packet based network and is operable to receive data from the switching unit and place the data, in packetized form, on the packet based network. The method can further include responding to a call setup request from the mobile unit and querying a subscriber database to determine if the mobile unit is a resident or a guest. If the mobile unit is a resident, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through the switching unit to a first destination location. If the mobile unit is a guest, communications data can be routed from the mobile unit through an RF source to a second destination location. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089085 | WIRELESS TRANSMISSION OF CONTENT SIMULTANEOUSLY ACCESSIBLE TO MULTIPLE USERS USING WI-FI INFRASTRUCTURE - Disclosed are methods and devices for wireless transmission of content using Wi-Fi infrastructure to multiple user-devices devices that does not require maintaining a Wi-Fi session with each user-device. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094484 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR FILTERING LIST IN WIRELESS REQUEST - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments of the invention are disclosed to improve the discovery of wireless networks. In example embodiments of the invention, a method comprises: transmitting a wireless message including a list of one or more wireless devices, from which a response is not desired; and receiving zero or more responses from one or more other wireless devices that are not on the list. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094485 | COMBINATORIAL MOBILE HOTSPOT DEVICE AND NETWORK SERVICE PROVISION METHOD THEREOF, NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE AND WIRELESS SERVICE POWER SUPPLY DEVICE - This invention discloses a combinatorial mobile hotspot device, a network service provision method thereof, a network access device and a wireless service power supply device. The network access device has a mobile internet access ability to provide an external host machine connecting to a wide area network through the network access device when the network access device is selectively and electrically coupled to the external host machine. A mobile hotspot device is formed while the network access device is electrically coupled to the wireless service power supply device. The wireless service power supply device supplies the power to the network access device. Further, by a wireless local network transceiver, a plurality of electronic devices in the hotspot covering region are able to connect to wide area network through the wireless access point service provided by the network access device. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094486 | Wireless Network Virtualization For Wireless Local Area Networks - An access point of a wireless network including: a controller for emulating a first virtual access point of a first service provider and a second virtual access point of second service provider; a transceiver port for communicating control signals to clients of the first and service providers to limit the uplink air-time of the clients; and a connection port for linking the first and second service providers to a backhaul. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094487 | Method and System for Information Transmission - The present invention discloses a method and system for information transmission. Said method includes: an Evolved Packet Data Gateway (ePDG) notifying a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) entity of the location information of a User Equipment (UE); the PCRF entity sending the location information of the UE to a Broadband Policy Control Function (BPCF) entity. The method and system provided by the present invention solve the problem that the BPCF in a fixed network can not initiate an S9* session to the PCRF entity. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094488 | METHOD FOR CHANNEL SOUNDING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A channel sounding method in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system and an apparatus supporting the same are provided. A method of performing a sounding operation by an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) includes: generating a beamforming report (BR) poll frame including a sounding sequence; transmitting the BR poll frame to a station (STA); and selectively performing transmission beamforming on the station according to whether or not the BR frame is received from the station before a predetermined timeout. Transmission of an erroneous BR frame in case that a beam receiver fails to receive an null data packet announcement (NDPA) and an null data packet (NDP) is eliminated and a degradation of transmission efficiency is prevented. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094489 | PRIVACY CONTROL FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - According to various embodiments, a computer-implemented method is disclosed that includes receiving, at a wireless adaptor of a device, a wireless data packet from an access point (AP), wherein the wireless data packet includes a Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) of the AP; changing the BSSID of the received data packet by a processor or hardware to produce a modified wireless data packet; and transmitting the modified wireless data packet to an application on the device. | 04-18-2013 |
20130100943 | DETECTING THE PRESENCE OF A PREAMBLE IN A RECEIVED WIRELESS SIGNAL - Embodiments for processing signals are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method includes providing a plurality of cyclically shifted versions of a known sequence. The method also includes receiving a plurality of delayed versions of a received sequence of a packet. The method also includes correlating the plurality of the delayed versions of the received sequence with the plurality of cyclically shifted versions of the known sequence. The method also includes detecting a preamble of the packet based on the outcome of a described decision statistic computed using the received and known sequences. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100944 | Wireless Connection Management Procedure - An apparatus comprising a connection manager in a user equipment (UE) configured to communicate with a cellular network via a cellular interface and with a short range wireless access network via a short range wireless access interface, wherein the connection manager is configured to enable the short range wireless access interface when a data connection request is detected and disable the short range wireless access interface when no more data connection requests are detected after expiration of a pre-determined time, and wherein the data connection request is at least partially delivered via the cellular interface while the short range wireless access interface is being set up and data connection is switched to the short range wireless access interface after completing short range wireless access interface setup. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100945 | REDUCED INTERFRAME SPACING IN A WIRELESS TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - Providing wireless transmission, where in a first transmission mode, transmitting a plurality of frames using a first interframe spacing interval. When in a second transmission mode, transmitting the plurality of frames using a second interframe spacing interval, wherein the second interframe spacing is less than the first interframe spacing. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100946 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNCTION-EQUIPPED ELECTRONIC DEVICE - In an electronic device in which an electronic component (e.g., an encoder) including an operation body is mounted on a circuit board and a process corresponding to an input operation of the operation body is performed by a control section, a wireless communication processing section and a matching circuit which are provided on the circuit board are connected to each other via a transmission line, and in order to cause a mounting member (a mounting plate and an outer casing) of the electronic component, which is made of metal and is ungrounded, to operate as an antenna, a predetermined position (a leg piece) in the mounting plate and the matching circuit are connected to each other via a transmission line to cause the predetermined position to serve as a power supply section. Thus, a wireless communication function-equipped electronic device for which a dedicated antenna is unnecessary is obtained. | 04-25-2013 |
20130107868 | MITIGATING IMPACT OF POWER IMBALANCE ON REMOTE DATA RATE IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK | 05-02-2013 |
20130107869 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UTILIZING MIXED PROTOCOLS | 05-02-2013 |
20130114582 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK DEVICE PROTOCOL TRANSLATION - A wireless mesh network system includes a first wireless mesh network device supporting a first wireless mesh network device protocol. An application supporting a second wireless mesh network device protocol is executed, and a driver translates between the application's second wireless mesh network device protocol and the first wireless mesh network device protocol such that the application can exchange data with the first wireless mesh network device. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114583 | IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE (IDC) - A method for in-device coexistence interference avoidance (IDC) is described. An IDC assistance information message is received from a wireless communication device. Long Term Evolution (LTE) uplink inactivity periods for the wireless communication device are aligned with Wi-Fi beacon periods. An IDC configuration message is generated. The IDC configuration message is sent to the wireless communication device. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114584 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A BRIDGE CONNECTION AMONG WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - A method for establishing a bridge connection among wireless access points is disclosed. A sharing group comprises multiple wireless access points (APs) within a specific distance. When a main wireless AP of the sharing group is enabled to connect to a destination website, the main wireless AP sends the data of the destination website and a test request to all wireless APs joining the sharing group. Each wireless AP individually tests connection spends to the destination website and reports to the ma establish a bridge connection in wireless AP. Accordingly, electronic device of users use the main wireless AP to a preferred wireless AP of the sharing group which has the fastest connection speed and connect to the destination website via the internet service provider used by the preferred wireless AP. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114585 | WiFi APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS INTERNET AND WIRELESS INTERNET SYSTEM USING THE SAME - The WiFi apparatus for wireless Internet includes: a signal inputting unit including a plurality of input ports for inputting a plurality of mobile communication signals, respectively, and an input port for inputting an Ethernet signal; a signal converting unit for converting the inputted Ethernet signal into a plurality of WiFi signals; a signal coupling unit for coupling the plurality of inputted mobile communication signals to the plurality of WiFi signals converted by the signal converting unit, respectively; a signal outputting unit for outputting a plurality of coupled signals coupled by the signal coupling unit through a plurality of output ports, respectively; and a coupler for allowing each of signals outputted from the signal outputting unit to be split with different phase differences and to be outputted. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114586 | Method and Apparatus for Receiving Multi-Band Information in a WLAN System - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for receiving multi-band information in a WLAN system. The method for receiving multi-band information by a first station (STA), operating as an unlicensed device, within an available channel which is not used by a licensed device in a white space band of a WLAN system according to one aspect of the present invention comprises: allowing the first station to receive, from a second station, information about a first band and a second band through the first band that is currently being communicated with the first and second stations; and allowing the first station to communication with the second station through the second band, wherein the first station and the second station are multi-band stations that support the first band and the second band. | 05-09-2013 |
20130121321 | VLAN TAGGING IN WLANS - A wireless access point is operable to tag packets received from mobile clients. For example, a VLAN tag or Layer-3 tunnel tag for a packet is determined based at least in-part on a mapping between a mobile client and tag maintained by the access point. In one embodiment the access point uses Association IDs (“AIDs”) to uniquely identify mobile clients in the BSS. Hence, the mapping is between AIDs and VLAN tags/Layer-3 tunnel tags. The mapping may be generated by snooping authentication related communications or from information maintained by a switch, such as a MAC address to tag mapping. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121322 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING DATA CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND A CORE NETWORK OVER AN IP ACCESS NETWORK, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATIN SYSTEM - A method and wireless communication device are provided that establish data connectivity between the wireless communication device and a core network over an IP access network. The wireless communication device receives a request to establish data connectivity over an IP access network and provides required connectivity parameters for establishing the data connectivity requested. The wireless communication device then sends a message to initiate an authentication procedure with the core network over the IP access network, receives an authentication request message and sends a response to the authentication request message, the response including the required connectivity parameters when the IP access network is determined to be a trusted IP access network. The wireless communication device uses a data connection between the core network and IP access network established with the required connectivity parameters and after the authentication procedure is completed for communication between the wireless communication device and the core network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121323 | Method for Receiving Frames in a Wireless Local Area Network - First and second frames are received by a wireless receiver. Modulation symbols in the first frame are determined and stored. If a cyclic redundancy check failure is determined for the first frame, the frame is not passed to medium access control. Modulation symbols in the second frame are determined and stored and a correlation factor is computed between the at least two modulation symbols from the first frame and the at least two modulation symbols from the second frame. If the receiver determines that the correlation factor exceeds a predefined threshold, it performs maximum ratio combining for modulation symbols from the first frame and modulation symbols from the second frame in order to obtain a combined frame. The combined frame is demodulated and cyclic redundancy check success is determined for the combined frame. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121324 | DATA CACHING AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. An edge caching mechanism is provided within a basestation to perform caching of data at the edge of the mobile data network. The edge caching mechanism analyzes historical usage data that indicates historical accesses to the basestation. Data patterns in the historical usage data may be used to define cache load criteria and to optionally define cache flush criteria. This architecture allows caching of data at the edge of a mobile data network within the infrastructure of an existing mobile data network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121325 | Caching Network Discovery Responses in Wireless Networks - Network information may be discoverable without requiring a connection to that network. For example, Access Network Query Protocol (“ANQP”) may allow a device to discover information about a network prior to the device associating with that network. The network discovery information may be stored in a cache memory for future associations with the same network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121326 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY UPDATING AND COMMUNICATING WITHIN FLEXIBLE NETWORKS - A software-based application dynamically updates user lists and enables communication between various network communication devices within a wireless network. The software-based application automatically builds and maintains a list of available users associated with the network communication devices in real-time, without reliance on a centralized server for authentication. Various types of communication, between network communication devices of the wireless network including text-based messaging, audio and video communication and file transfer are performed. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121327 | WIRELESS LAN ARRAY - A wireless access device in a local area network (LAN) having a plurality of transceivers. Each transceiver has a directional antenna positioned in a substantially circular array to communicate signals with a plurality of stations in a corresponding sector. Each sector defines a portion of a coverage area surrounding the wireless access device. The wireless access device has a network interface to a data network, and an array controller to control communication of data between the stations and the transceivers, and between the transceivers and the network interface. The array controller is configured to modify channel assignments so as to minimize channel interference dynamically. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121328 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT ARRAY - A system of at least one wireless access device in a local area network (LAN) having a plurality of transceivers. Each transceiver has a directional antenna positioned in a substantially circular array to communicate signals with a plurality of stations in a corresponding sector. Each sector defines a portion of a coverage area surrounding the wireless access device. The wireless access device has a network interface to a data network, and an array controller to control communication of data between the stations and the transceivers, and between the transceivers and the network interface. The array controller is configured to modify channel assignments so as to minimize channel interference dynamically. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121329 | Method And System For Achieving Enhanced Quality And Higher Throughput For Collocated IEEE 802.11B/G And Bluetooth Devices In Coexistent Operation - Disclosed are various embodiments for providing wireless communication. A Bluetooth (BT) communication protocol and a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) communication protocol are enabled in a station. A WLAN fragmentation threshold utilized by the WLAN communication protocol is modified based on a WLAN modulation rate and an HV3 frame duration that is utilized by the BT communication protocol. | 05-16-2013 |
20130128873 | METHOD FOR CORRELATING CONNECTION INFORMATION WITH MOBILE DEVICE IDENTITY - A method comprising establishing a first control connection between a home node and a home node gateway having a first control connection identity, establishing a second control connection between the home node gateway and a mobility management device having a second control connection identity, communicating network traffic sent between the home node and the mobility management device on behalf of a mobile device using the first control connection and the second control connection, receiving a mobile device identifier included in a control message sent from the mobility management device using the second control connection in response to an entity type indication sent to the mobility management device from the home node gateway, the mobile device identifier uniquely identifying the mobile device, and correlating the mobile device identifier with a context including the first control connection identity and the second control connection identity. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128874 | INCREASE COMMUNICATION BANDWIDTH FOR A PROCESSING SYSTEM VIA USE OF A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION ADAPTERS - A method of increasing communication bandwidth for a processing system. The method can include communicatively linking the processing system to a wide area network (WAN) via a first communication adapter to establish a first communication channel over which the processing system communicates. The method further can include communicatively linking a second communication adapter to the WAN to establish a second communication channel over which the processing system communicates. The method also can include simultaneously communicating information between the processing system and at least one server over both the first communication channel and the second communication channel. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128875 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING WIRELESS NETWORK BY SHARING COMMUNICATION, AND WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE - A method for switching access points of a wireless network via sharing communications is disclosed. A host computer and a client computer are connected to a first wireless network by a first communication system. The host computer determines a communication quality to the first wireless network. If the communication quality falls below a predetermined value, the host computer connects to a second wireless network to shift to a sharing communication mode to connect the client computer to the second wireless network. The host computer that has shifted to the sharing communication mode then connects to the client computer by a second communication system to connect the client to the second wireless network. | 05-23-2013 |
20130136114 | Deactivating Existing Bearer/Context For Emergency Bearer Establishment - A user equipment UE with an active connection (radio or logical) with a wireless network needs to establish an emergency service. The UE unilaterally deactivates an active session or context with the wireless network, and thereafter sends to the wireless network signaling to establish the emergency service, in which the signaling specifically identifies the service as an emergency service. In one embodiment (FIG. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136115 | Radio Access Technology Selection - There is provided a method, including detecting, by a user terminal connected to a public land mobile net-work, PLMN, via a first radio access technology and having requested a circuit switched fallback service procedure, that a network controlled radio access technology change related to the circuit switched fallback service procedure is not performed; and selecting a second radio access technology to be applied on the basis of stored information, wherein the second radio access technology to be applied is capable to provide circuit switched services and the stored information associates at least one PLMN with at least one radio access technology. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136116 | MULTIPATH OVERLAY NETWORK AND ITS MULTIPATH MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided. The apparatus, which is a first node, sends a join request to a second node to route communication associated with a third node to the first node. The join request includes a first node identifier associated with the first node. The first node receives from the second node a join response comprising a second node identifier associated with the second node. The first node sends a setup request to the third node, the setup request comprising the second node identifier. The first node receives a communication with the first node identifier from the second node, the communication originating from the third node. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136117 | WIRELESS BRIDGING IN A HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A hybrid device can be configured to use WLAN communication links for bridging network traffic between any pair of network devices in a hybrid communication network, irrespective of whether the bridged network devices support WLAN communication. The hybrid device receives a first data frame in a first frame format for transmission to a destination device. The hybrid device accesses its hybrid forwarding tables and identifies a transmit interface from which to transmit the first data frame for transmission to the destination device. If the transmit interface is a WLAN interface, WLAN forwarding tables associated with the WLAN transmit interface are accessed to identify a receiving WLAN device to which the first data frame should be transmitted. The WLAN transmit interface converts the first data frame into a second data frame in a WLAN frame format and transmits the second data frame to the receiving WLAN device. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142181 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF OPERATION FOR A REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM - A remote control system includes a first network configured for communication via a first format. The first network includes a router configured to receive packetized remote control codes transmitted to the router in the first format. The remote control system further includes a second network configured for communication via a set of second formats. The second network includes a translator communicatively coupled to the router via a network link The translator is configured to receive the packetized remote control codes from the router in the first format and translate the remote control codes from the first format to a set of second formats. The second network further includes a blaster communicatively coupled to the translator. The blaster is configured to received the packetized remote control codes in the set of second formats and transmit the packetized remote control codes in the set of second formats to a set of consumer-electronic devices. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142182 | MOBILITY IN MULTI-DEVICE MULTI-HOMED DEPLOYMENTS - Systems and methods for providing identity management and mobility management are disclosed. The management scheme provides mobility in multi-device and multi-homed deployments. A collection of three identities, a device identity, a link layer identity, and a user identity, can be used to provide mobility for a number of devices under different use scenarios. In one embodiment, a method is disclosed for receiving messages from a mobile device at a mobility gateway, the messages including identifiers such as a user identifier, a link layer identifier, and a device identifier where identifiers are stored or retained at the mobility gateway. When a subsequent network attach request is received including one or more identifiers, a reconnection can occur, based on a result of comparing the stored identifiers with the received one or more identifiers. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142183 | CLUSTER-BASED DERIVATION OF ANTENNA TILTS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems, methods, and apparatus for cluster-based optimization of antenna tilts in a wireless network are presented herein. A screening component can receive information indicating wireless conditions of respective wireless access points of a geographical region, select, based on a performance criterion, an access point of the respective wireless access points, and group the access point and an other access point of the respective wireless access points into a representation of a cluster of access points. Further, an optimization component can derive antenna tilt values for respective access points of the cluster of the access points in response to a simulation of an application of the antenna tilt values to the respective access points. Furthermore, an implementation component can direct the antenna tilt values to respective components of the respective access points. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142184 | Subsequent association identifier (AID) update within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Subsequent association identifier (AID) update within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Even while a given communication device maintains continuous association within a given communication system, a unique identifier associated with that particular communication device may be updated. For example, considering and implementation including an access point (AP) and a number of wireless stations (STAs), even while at least some of the STAs remain in association with the AP, the respective unique identifiers associated with one or more of those STAs may be updated (e.g., the respective AID values associated with one or more of those STAs may be updated). For example, after an initial assignment of unique identifiers associated with a group of respective communication devices within the communication network, the unique identifier associated with one or more of those respective communication devices may be updated or changed after the initial assignment. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142185 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AFFECTING POWER CONTROL IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method device and system are provided for managing a wireless local area network comprising a plurality of station units (STAs), where each of the plurality of station units is adapted to wirelessly communicate with one or more access points. The method device and system comprises affecting power control over air time request packets transmitted by respective station units from among the plurality of STAs towards one of the one or more access points, so that all air time request packets are received at said access point at substantially the same Signal to Noise Ratio (“SNR”), and wherein said power control does not affect packets carrying payload data that proceeds the air time request packets transmitted by the respective station units. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142186 | WIRELESS NETWORK AND ACCESS POINT FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments related to Wireless Networks and access points for a Wireless Network are described and depicted. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142187 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SCANNING A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FREQUENCY BAND - Device, system, and method of scanning a wireless communication frequency band. Some embodiments may include scanning a set of channels of a wireless communication frequency band to detect a wireless area network, the scanning including setting a scanning duration to a duration of a beacon interval, scanning a channel of the set of channels for the scanning duration, if a packet is detected over the channel, monitoring the channel for up to a predefined time period, which is longer than the scanning duration, to receive a beacon frame; if no beacon frame is received over the channel, scanning another channel of the set of channels for the scanning duration; and if, after scanning all channels of the set of channels, no beacon frame is received, increasing the scanning duration and repeating the scanning using the increased scanning duration. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142188 | WIRELESS NETWORK HOST IN SILENT MODE - An access point that implements operating modes in which beacons may be selectively disabled. Beacons may be disabled when no device is actively associated through the access point. Beacons may be enabled in response to one or more triggers, which may include events such as a client forming an association through the access point following a probe request message identifying the access point. In addition, active beaconing may be triggered by user input or may occur during periodic brief intervals that allow client devices to discover the network identifier for the access point. Selective control of beaconing may lead to more effective wireless communication, particularly in areas where users congregate with computers implementing soft APs for personal networks. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142189 | DIRECT LINK SETUP PROCEDURE IN TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP WIRELESS NETWORK AND STATION SUPPORTING THE PROCEDURE - Provided are a Tunneled Direct Link Setup (TDLS) establishment procedure for a TDLS initiator and a station supporting the establishment procedure. In the establishment procedure, a requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup request frame via an access point (AP) to an intended peer Non-AP QSTA. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA receives a TDLS setup response frame via the AP from the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup request frame. And, the requesting Non-AP QSTA transmits a TDLS setup confirm frame via the AP to the intended peer station in response to the TDLS setup response frame. | 06-06-2013 |
20130148640 | Mechanism for Controlling Data Transmission in Fragmentation Transmission Mode - There is provided a mechanism for controlling a transmission of data in a fragmentation transmission mode. When fragments are transmitted in a fragmentation transmission mode, it is determined whether the fragment frame is received successfully or whether an acknowledgment message for confirming a successful transmission of the fragment frame is received. In case the acknowledgment for the successful transmission of the one fragment frame is not received, or the fragment is frame is not successfully received, the fragmentation transmission mode is maintained and a retransmission of the fragment frame is initiated. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148641 | TECHNIQUES TO ACHIEVE ZERO ROAMING TIME FOR WORKGROUP BRIDGE DEVICES - Techniques are provided for providing seamless wireless communication services to client devices associated with an roaming workgroup bridge device to enable wireless communications between the client devices and a network using a first radio transceiver unit in communication with a first root access point device that provides connectivity to the network. The workgroup bridge device scans a frequency band to detect a second wireless root access point device using a second radio transceiver unit. Signal strength values of signals received by the first radio transceiver unit are compared to a threshold signal strength value. When the signal strength of the received signals is below the threshold, communication services are provided to the client devices using the second radio transceiver unit in communication with the second root access point device. Communications between the client devices and the first root access point device are then terminated. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148642 | ENHANCED DISCOVERY PROCEDURES IN PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANS) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally provide methods and apparatus for enhanced discovery procedures in peer-to-peer (P2P) wireless local area networks (WLANs). With these procedures, discovery duration may be decreased, battery power consumption may be reduced during discovery, provided services may be ascertained during the device discovery phase without performing a separate service discovery phase, and/or the discovery range may be extended in an effort to discover a greater number of devices. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148643 | ENHANCED DISCOVERY PROCEDURES IN PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANS) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally provide methods and apparatus for enhanced discovery procedures in peer-to-peer (P2P) wireless local area networks (WLANs). With these procedures, discovery duration may be decreased, battery power consumption may be reduced during discovery, provided services may be ascertained during the device discovery phase without performing a separate service discovery phase, and/or the discovery range may be extended in an effort to discover a greater number of devices. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148644 | System and Method for Preambles in a Wireless Communications Network - A method for transmitting a frame includes generating an omni portion of the frame, the omni portion including a non-beamformed long training field and a signal field, the non-beamformed long training field including channel estimation information used to decode the signal field, the non-beamformed long training field configured to be transmitted through one of multiple antennas and multiple streams. The method also includes generating a multi-stream portion of the frame, the multi-stream portion including a data field and a multi-stream long training field, the multi-stream long training field including station-specific decoding information for station-specific data in the data field. The method further includes applying a beamforming indicator to the signal field of the omni portion, and transmitting the frame. | 06-13-2013 |
20130156018 | MINIMALISTIC LTE MAINTENANCE TIMING ADVANCE METHOD - A method that implements a timing advance for an uplink communication from a user equipment (UE) comprises: selecting at least one subframe; reducing a duration of at least one selected symbol of each of the at least one subframe to generate at least one reduced duration subframe; replacing a remaining portion of payload data of each of the at least one selected symbol with a pre-selected replacement value; by-passing each of the at least one selected symbol during pre-transmission processing of the at least one reduced duration subframe; processing any remaining symbols of the at least one reduced duration subframe, such that a processing time of the remaining symbols of the at least one reduced duration subframe is reduced by at least the value of the timing advance; and transmitting the at least one reduced duration subframe via the uplink communication to the base station. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156019 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNLICENSED BAND OPERATION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in order to enable operation of both cellular and WLAN on a shared unlicensed band. In this regard, a method is provided that includes causing a primary transmission mode period of operation, a secondary transmission mode period of operation, and an idle mode period of operation on an unlicensed frequency band to be transmitted to a mobile terminal. The method further includes receiving an interfered ratio report from the mobile terminal. The method also includes causing the mobile terminal to be classified as at least one of a primary user or a secondary user based on the interfered ratio report. The method also includes causing the classification to be transmitted to the mobile terminal. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156020 | KEY STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL IN A BREAKOUT COMPONENT AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A breakout component in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. These services may require the use of keys. Keys are stored and retrieved from a non-volatile key storage in a way that assures subsystems that need the keys have access to the keys. The keys retrieved from the non-volatile key storage are stored in a shared memory in the requesting subsystem, which allows any applications that requires access to the keys to directly access the keys in the shared memory. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156021 | Large-Scale Antenna Method And Apparatus Of Wireless Communication With Suppression Of Intercell Interference - Methods are provided for mitigating interference due to pilot contamination in a cellular network in which there is reuse of pilot signals. In embodiments, forward-link signals are precoded, using knowledge of slow-fading coefficients, to mitigate the interference. In embodiments, interference in reverse-link signals destined for a given base station is mitigated by linearly combining reverse-link signals destined for the given base station and for other base stations of the network, using knowledge of slow-fading coefficients. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156022 | Digital Surveillance - A method includes establishing a first communication path from an access point to a service assurance platform via a first network. The access point is configured to provide a wireless local area network. The method includes establishing a second communication path from the access point to the service assurance platform via a mobile device coupled to a second network. The second communication path is distinct from the first communication path. The method includes initiating transmission of a message from the access point to the service assurance platform via the mobile device. The message is associated with an issue detected by a device coupled to the wireless local area network. | 06-20-2013 |
20130163574 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISABLING AN ILLEGAL DEVICE IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method for an enabler entity to indicate an event to a manager entity includes transmitting, from the enabler entity to the manager entity, an event indication message indicating an event in a device served by the enabler entity. The enabler entity enables communication between the device and the manager entity and the manager entity exchanges information required for coexistence between enabler entities comprising the enabler entity. The event indication message includes type information indicating that the event indication message is for indicating that a specific device is detected by the device, the specific device operating on a frequency not permitted to the specific device. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163575 | CONTENTION BASED CHANNEL OCCUPYING METHOD IN WIRELESS NETWORK USING A PLURALITY OF CHANNELS - Disclosed is a contention based channel occupying method in a wireless network using a plurality of channels, including: acquiring, by terminals that are incapable of transmitting a data frame through primary contention, occupation channel information from a terminal that transmits the data frame through the primary contention; verifying, by the terminals, an occupiable channel based on the occupation channel information; and performing, by the terminals, secondary contention in the occupiable channel. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163576 | Communication Devices and Methods for Sending a Message - According to one embodiment, a communication device is described comprising a determining circuit configured to determine a measure based on the time necessary for the transmission of a message from the communication device to at least one other communication device, a comparing circuit configured to compare the determined measure with a predetermined threshold, a controller configured to decide whether the message should be sent using a collision protection mechanism based on the result of the comparison, a message generating circuit configured to generate the message and a transmitter configured to send the message in accordance with the decision. | 06-27-2013 |
20130170481 | LOAD MONITORING SYSTEMS, NODES, AND RELATED METHODS - Load monitoring systems, nodes, and related methods are disclosed. According to an aspect, a load monitoring system includes multiple load monitoring nodes. Each node is in communication with a power measurement input and is configured to capture load data at the respective power measurement input. The system includes a network communications device configured to receive the captured load data from each of the load monitoring nodes and to communicate the captured load data to a remote computing device. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170482 | WI-FI DIRECT CONNECTION METHOD - A Wireless-Fidelity (Wi-Fi) Direct connection method is provided. The method includes, when a Wi-Fi-Direct connection is requested, performing a device discovery to display a device discovery result and generating a target peer list from Peer-to-Peer (P2P) devices in the displayed device discovery result, performing a provision discovery of a Personal Identification Number (PIN) connection type with the P2P devices within the target peer list, after inputting a PIN, transmitting a PIN check query request message to the P2P devices within the target peer list, and receiving a PIN check query response message from each of the P2P devices within the target peer list, and identifying a status code of each received PIN check query request message establishing the Wi-Fi Direct connection when the status code corresponds to a success. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170483 | COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING METHOD, COMMUNICATING APPARATUS, AND MANAGING APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS - When a plurality of managing apparatuses which manage communication parameters exists, there is a case where the wrong communication parameters are set into a communicating apparatus. When the communication parameters are set between the managing apparatus which manages the communication parameters and the communicating apparatus, if a plurality of managing apparatuses in a setting state of the communication parameters into the communicating apparatus is detected, the managing apparatus in the setting state is notified that the plurality of managing apparatuses in the setting state exists. Whether or not the setting of the communication parameters is continued is discriminated, thereby continuing or stopping the setting of the communication parameters. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170484 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DISCRIMINATING POSITIONING ERROR USING WIRELESS LAN SIGNAL - Apparatus for determining a positioning error includes: database for storing grid cells separated by each pCell ID and WLAN environment information matched to grid cells; information receiving unit for receiving terminal WLAN environment information from mobile communication terminal; identification information checking unit for checking AP identification information included in terminal WLAN environment information; triangulating unit for calculating triangulation coordinate value by performing triangulation with AP position estimation information corresponding to AP identification information; grid cell positioning unit for selecting one or more grid cells corresponding to AP identification information and calculating grid cell coordinate value based on coordinate value corresponding to grid cell selected; and error determining unit for comparing triangulation coordinate value and grid cell coordinate value and determining whether there is positioning error in any one of triangulation coordinate value and grid cell coordinate value. | 07-04-2013 |
20130176998 | Mechanism For Coexistence Between Wireless Networks - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments there is at least a method performed with an apparatus of a wireless communication network including sensing information regarding at least one coexisting network, and sending the information in a header of a media access control frame to a network node of the wireless communication network. In addition, in accordance with the embodiments, there is at least a method performed with an apparatus of a wireless communication network including receiving sensing information regarding at least one coexisting network in a header of a media access control frame from at least one device of the wireless communication network, determining, using at least the sensing information, occupancy information regarding one or more coexisting networks of the wireless communication network, and sending the occupancy information to one or more devices of the wireless communication network. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176999 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An example communication system includes: a search communication apparatus which searches for another communication apparatus; and a search subject communication apparatus which is searched for by the search communication apparatus. The search communication apparatus includes a search request transmitter which transmits a search request signal. The search subject communication apparatus includes: a search request receiver which receives the search request signal transmitted from the search communication apparatus; and a search response transmitter which transmits a search response signal which is a response to the search request signal received by the search request receiver, to the search communication apparatus. The search communication apparatus further includes a search response receiver which receives the search response signal transmitted from the search subject communication apparatus. The search request transmitter transmits information indicating a transmission enabled period in which the search response transmitter can transmit the search response signal. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177000 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOW-OVERHEAD WIRELESS BEACONS HAVING COMPRESSED NETWORK IDENTIFIERS - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating a compressed beacon are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network. includes creating a shortened network identifier having a first length from a full network identifier having a second length. The first length is shorter than the second length. The method further includes generating a compressed beacon including the shortened network identifier. The method further includes transmitting, at an access point, the compressed beacon. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177001 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOW-OVERHEAD WIRELESS BEACON TIMING - Systems, methods, and devices for communicating a compressed beacon are described herein. In some aspects, a method of communicating in a wireless network includes transmitting, at an access point, a full beacon at a first multiple of a beacon interval. The method further includes transmitting a compressed beacon at each beacon interval that is not the first multiple of the beacon interval. Another method of communicating in a wireless network includes receiving, at a wireless device, a full beacon at a first multiple of a beacon interval. The method further includes receiving a compressed beacon at a beacon interval that is not the first multiple of the beacon interval. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177002 | Systems and Methods for AP Discovery with FILS Beacon - A method and apparatus are disclosed for supporting access point (AP) discovery by a handset/station (STA) using a fast initial link setup (FILS) discovery frame. An embodiment method includes transmitting a plurality of FILS discovery frames at faster time intervals than designated for transmitting standard AP beacons, wherein the FILS discovery frames have a smaller size than standard AP beacons. An embodiment apparatus includes a processor and a computer readable storage medium storing programming for execution by the processor, the programming including instructions to broadcast a standard AP beacon for advertising a basic service set (BSS) repeatedly at subsequent time intervals, and broadcast a FILS discovery frame for advertising the BSS repeatedly at faster subsequent time intervals than for the standard AP beacon, wherein the FILS discovery frame has a smaller size than the standard AP beacon. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177003 | System And Method To Communicate Targeted Information - A method for targeted advertising is disclosed. The method includes accessing at least one piece of demographic information associated with a user of a portable device, selecting an advertisement to be delivered to the user based at least in part on the demographic information, and initiating communication of a version of the advertisement configured for presentation at the portable device. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177004 | INFORMATION BIT PADDING SCHEMES FOR WLAN - In a method for generating a data unit, a signal field is generated to include a first subfield having one of: a length indication to indicate a number of bytes in a data portion of the data unit, or a duration indication to indicate a number of OFDM symbols in the data portion of the data unit and a second subfield to indicate whether the first subfield includes the length indication or the duration indication. When the first subfield includes the length indication, one or more padding bits are added to a set of information bits according to a first padding scheme. When the first subfield includes the duration indication, one or more padding bits are added to the set of information bits to according to a second padding scheme. Padded information bits are encoded, and the data unit is generated to included the encoded information bits. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177005 | System and Method For Providing Integrated Voice And Data Services Utilizing Wired Cordless Access With Unlicensed/Unregulated Spectrum - Integrated voice and data services are provided that utilize wired cordless access with unlicensed/unregulated connectivity sources. A digital cordless telephone operates over unlicensed/unregulated spectrum in conjunction with one or more wireless access points (WAPs) that are installed in homes, businesses, entertainment venues, and the like. The WAPs are connected to a communications service provider's broadband packet data network. A user may use the device when they are in range of another wireless access point in a public or private building that also is connected to their communications service provider's broadband packet data network. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177006 | LOCATION AND STATE INFORMATION PROVIDING/INQUIRING SYSTEM USING NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION, LOG INFORMATION PROVIDING/INQUIRING SYSTEM AND METHOD, SERVICE SERVER AND CUSTOMER TERMINAL, LOCATION AND STATE PROVIDING/INQUIRING METHOD - A location and state information providing/inquiring system using WLAN/WPAN communication, log information providing/inquiring system, service server, customer terminal, location and state information providing/inquiring method, and log information providing/inquiring method are disclosed. System for providing/inquiring location and state information by using WLAN/WPAN communication includes: mobile terminal including WLAN/WPAN communication module for acquiring and transmitting identification information of one or more WLAN/WPAN communication modules of one or more adjacent other terminals; service server for storing identification information of subscriber terminals, receiving identification information of WLAN/WPAN communication modules from mobile terminal, and transmitting list of service subscribers; and positioning server for positioning subscriber terminals of service subscribers, and if one or more service subscribers are selected by mobile terminal based on list received from service server, transmitting location and state information of terminals corresponding to service subscribers selected to mobile terminal. | 07-11-2013 |
20130177007 | Method and Apparatus of Transmitting a White Space Map Information in a Wireless Local Area Network System - A method of transmitting a White Space Map information in a wireless local area network system (WLAN) is disclosed. A method of transmitting a white space map information from a first station to a second station in a regulatory domain where a licensed device and an unlicensed device are permitted to operate together in a wireless local area network (WLAN) comprises transmitting, from the first station, one of a beacon frame, a probe response frame and a white space map announcement frame comprising a white space map (WSM) element comprising information for first available channels, which are available for the unlicensed device, to the second station, wherein the WSM element comprises a device type field indicating which device type the list of the fist available channels is for. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182693 | Enabling a Mobile Broadband Hotspot by an Auxiliary Radio - There is provided a method of enabling a mobile broadband hotspot by an auxiliary radio. By utilizing a commonly available auxiliary radio, such as a Bluetooth radio, hotspot connectivity using a primary radio, such as Wi-Fi, can be readily enabled. Accordingly, device connections, guest access, and device disconnections can be easily requested on demand from a mobile broadband hotspot. Additionally, the mobile broadband hotspot may be configured to enable or disable connections using a predetermined schedule. The pre-determined schedule may provide Internet access only when necessary, such as during scheduled device updates. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182694 | Femtocell/WLAN Communication Device - An Femtocell/WLAN communication device, comprising a Femtocell module for cellular wireless communications, the Femtocell module having an input for receiving a first electrical input signal and an output for outputting a first electrical output signal, a WLAN module for WLAN communications, the WLAN module having an input for receiving a second electrical input signal and an output for outputting a second electrical output signal, an optical interface having a first conversion path connected to the output of the Femtocell module, a second conversion path connected to the output of the WLAN module, a third conversion path connected to the input of the Femtocell module, and a fourth conversion path connected to the input of the WLAN module, and a common port for receiving the first optical input signal and the second optical input signal, and for outputting the first optical output signal and the second optical output signal. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182695 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK LINK BETWEEN PORTABLE TERMINALS - A method of connecting a plurality of portable terminal over a wireless local area network (WLAN), the method including: a user selecting at least one contact from a contact list displayed on a screen of a first portable terminal, transmitting, from the first portable terminal to an external server over a cellular network, connection information necessary for establishing a WLAN link to the first portable terminal; pushing the connection information from the external server to a second portable terminal corresponding to the selected contact; a user pressing a connection authentication button on a selection menu displayed on the second portable terminal, and establishing the WLAN link to the first portable terminal from the second portable terminal by using the connection information. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182696 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING BY USING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The present invention provides a wireless local area network WLAN and a method for communicating by using the WLAN, which includes at least one radio module and an access controller. The radio module converts a first air interface wireless signal from a station into a first baseband signal, and bears the first baseband signal on an Ethernet and sends the first baseband signal to the access controller. The access controller processes the first baseband signal to generate first service data, and forwards the first service data. The access controller further receives second service data, processes the second service data to generate a second baseband signal, and bears the second baseband signal on the Ethernet and sends the second baseband signal to the at least one radio module. The present invention can increase the efficiency and utilization rate of a spectrum. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182697 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING ACCESS POINT INFORMATION - In a non-limiting and exemplary embodiment, a method is provided for arranging wireless communications, comprising: establishing, by an apparatus, a connection with an access point, detecting location of the access point, detecting accuracy of the detected location of the access point, and in response to detecting the detected location of the access point to be more accurate than an earlier stored location of the access point, updating the detected location to a location database of the apparatus. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188624 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING NEIGHBOR CELLS OF SMALL CELL BASE STATION - When a first synchronization signals are measured to search neighbor cells, at least one of (i) a mute control of a second synchronization signal of the small cell base station and transmission of the second synchronization signal with the mute control to a downlink, and (ii) a downlink scheduling restriction of PDSCH data is performed. When PBCH information is acquired to search neighbor cells having the same frequency, PDSCH data are not transmitted to designated RBs of a downlink subframe by restricting downlink scheduling. At this time, when acquiring PDSCH and PDCCH information and measuring RSRP and RSRQ, it is possible not to transmit the PDSCH data to all the RBs of a downlink subframe by restricting downlink scheduling. In this way, muting and scheduling during downlink transmission can be controlled by measuring the amount of interference of the small cell base station. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188625 | VLAN POOLING ENHANCEMENT - The present disclosure discloses a network device and/or method for enhanced VLAN pooling assignments in a wireless network. The disclosed network device receives a message from a wireless client in the wireless network. The network device identifies a virtual local area network (VLAN) based at least on a size of the VLAN and a number of active wireless clients associated with the VLAN. Next, the network device assigns the wireless client to the identified VLAN. In some embodiments, the network device assigns a wireless client to a VLAN if the radio between the number of active wireless clients and the size of the VLAN does not exceed a predetermined value. In some embodiments, the network device assigns a wireless client to a previously assigned VLAN or a VLAN corresponding to an identified home network device, if the wireless client is a roaming client. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188626 | DYNAMIC DATA RETRIEVAL IN A WLAN POSITIONING SYSTEM - A WLAN positioning system for calculating the geographic location of a mobile device minimizes the amount of data retrieved from a remote access point location server by dynamically switching between public fetching operations and private fetching operations in response to one or more parameters including, for example, whether the mobile device is in motion, the data retrieval history of the mobile device, and/or the capacity and utilization of local memory provided within the mobile device. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188627 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for allowing a terminal to transmit/receive data using a multi user-multi input multi output (MU-MIMO) scheme in a communication system, the method including: receiving group information of terminals capable of transmitting/receiving data using the MU-MIMO scheme from an access point (AP); transmitting the group information of the terminals and group information of candidate terminals capable of transmitting/receiving data using the MU-MIMO based on the group information of the terminals to the candidate terminals, respectively; and transmitting/receiving data to/from the candidate terminals using the MU-MIMO scheme in response to the group information of the candidate terminals. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188628 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SCANNING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A scanning method in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The scanning method includes transmitting by a station a probe request frame via a channel, and receiving by the station a probe response frame from a target access point (AP) to respond to the probe request frame. The probe request frame includes at least one of information regarding a response reception time and preference information regarding the target AP. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188629 | ASSOCIATION OF WIRELESS DETECTOR WITH AN IMAGING APPARATUS - A method for directing image data to a dental treatment site wherein a sensor controller is positioned near a programmed radio-frequency identification device at the dental treatment site. A command entry configures the sensor controller to encode and transmit image data content for delivery to a receiving address, according to information obtained from the radio-frequency identification device. A digital sensor that is associated with the sensor controller is positioned in proximity to a subject. Image data is acquired from the digital sensor and transmitted from the sensor controller to a wireless access point, and from the wireless access point to a host computer at the receiving address. The acquired transmitted image data is stored in a computer-accessible electronic memory. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188630 | METHOD OF LINK ADAPTATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method of link adaptation in a wireless local area network is provided. The method includes requesting, by a requester, modulation and coding scheme (MCS) feedback to a plurality of responders, by transmitting a MCS request (MRQ) indicator, and, receiving, by the requester, feedback frames from each of the plurality of responders, wherein each of the feedback frame comprises MCS feedback (MFB) information. | 07-25-2013 |
20130195088 | MOBILE HOTSPOT DEVICE AND BATTERY - A mobile hotspot device may be used to interface one or more host computing devices with a wireless wide area network. The mobile hotspot device is powered by a high-capacity lithium ion (Li-Ion) cylindrical battery pack(s) and has a small, pen-like form factor. Use of the Li-Ion cylindrical battery pack(s) improves mobile hotspot device talk time over prismatic battery cell technology, as well as avoids premature device/modem shutdown experienced when a prismatic battery cell is proximate to a printed circuit assembly of the mobile hotspot device. Additionally still, Li-Ion cylindrical battery pack(s) avoid negatively impacting volume capacity of the mobile hotspot device. Further still, use of the Li-Ion cylindrical battery pack(s) allows for unique, interactive information display, as well as evolutionary mobile hotspot device design and form factors. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195089 | SUPER LONG RANGE (SLR) DEVICES AND LOW RATE ENABLER (LRE) DEVICES - A method includes generating, at a low rate enabler (LRE) device, a packet including a preamble having a legacy portion and a super long range (SLR) portion. The legacy portion includes at least one bit to indicate a presence of the SLR portion to at least one SLR-compatible device. The method also includes transmitting the packet to a plurality of devices includes the at least one SLR-compatible device. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195090 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes a sharing unit configured to share a communication parameter for wireless communication with another communication apparatus with the another communication apparatus, a connection unit configured to connect to the another communication apparatus using the communication parameter shared by the sharing unit, a communication unit configured to, after connection with the another apparatus by the connection unit, communicate with the another communication apparatus by utilizing a predetermined function, and a control unit configured to control the communication parameter shared by the sharing unit according to a result of communication by the communication unit utilizing the predetermined function. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195091 | WIRELESS BRIDGE DEVICE - Techniques are described for connecting devices that use the ANT wireless protocol to other devices or networks that use the Wi-Fi wireless protocol. In one example, a network device is disclosed that comprises a processor configured to receive ANT data from a sensor, encapsulate the ANT data in a Wi-Fi packet, and transmit the Wi-Fi packet directly to a wireless access point without using an intermediate computing device. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195092 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GENERATING PREAMBLE SYMBOLS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for transmitting an 802.11ah packet is provided. A training field sequence is generated using control circuitry. A preamble for a packet is generated using the control circuitry. The preamble includes a training field symbol which includes the training field sequence. A portion of the training field sequence is within a plurality of guard tones of the training field symbol. The preamble is transmitted using transmit circuitry. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195093 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device may establish a first type of connection by using a first wireless channel. The wireless communication device may establish the second type of connection by using a second wireless channel. In a specific case where one of the first type of connection with the first device and the second type of connection with the second device is to be established under a situation in which the other has been established, the wireless communication device may determine at least one of a value of the first wireless channel and a value of the second wireless channel such that the value of the first wireless channel is identical to the value of the second wireless channel. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195094 | Wireless Local Area Network (LAN) System - A situation is circumvented where wireless communication becomes impossible in a wireless LAN system under the influence of a blocking object, noise caused by an electromagnetic wave, or the like. A wireless LAN system comprises: a relay which can communicate with an external system; a master which can communicate with the relay; and a plurality of slaves which can wirelessly communicate with the master, the plurality of slaves including a first group and a second group, the first group comprising an alternative slave having a function of transmitting, when a portion of the slaves cannot receive a synchronization signal from the master, an information signal received from the master to the portion of slaves, and the second group comprising non-alternative slaves and not having the function of transmitting the information signal to the portion of slaves. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195095 | Wireless Social Networking - A first device may communicate by joining a wireless mesh network that includes at least one wireless device configured to operate a wireless routing protocol, discovering a group of other wireless devices configured to participate in the wireless mesh network, and accessing an interest metric for a second wireless device in the group of other wireless devices. The interest metric is based in part on a network topology from the wireless mesh network. The interest metric is related to an interest threshold and it is determined whether relating the interest metric to the interest threshold supports enabling messaging communications. If so, messaging communications may be enabled. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195096 | Method and Apparatus for Scanning Existing Networks in TVWS - A method and an apparatus for scanning existing networks in TV White Space are disclosed. For scanning existing networks at a station to operate as an unlicensed device in a regulatory domain where a licensed device and the unlicensed device are permitted to operate, the method comprises: receiving a white space map (WSM) comprising information for available channels to be used for the unlicensed device to operate a wireless local area network (WLAN) operation and maximum transmission powers allowed for each of the available channels from an enabling station, wherein the enabling station is a station determining the available channels at its location using its own geographic location identification and a regulatory database access capability; and scanning the existing networks on the available channels identified within the received WSM. | 08-01-2013 |
20130201978 | Method and System for Partitioning Wireless Local Area Network - The present disclosure discloses a method and system for partitioning WLAN in order to separate network traffic from different WLANs. Specifically, a network device receives a packet from a client connected to a first network device on an access network. The network device then determines that the received packet is associated with a VLAN that is pre-configured on the first network device based on the access network to which the client is connected. Furthermore, the network device transmits the packet to a MAC layer switching device, which is not configured with the VLAN that is pre-configured on the network device. The packet includes one of a DHCP discovery message, an ARP request message, a unicast message, a multicast message, and a broadcast message. The unicast message will be transmitted to the second network device on the pre-configured VLAN prior to being transmitted to another network device outside the pre-configured VLAN. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201979 | Method and System for Partitioning Wireless Local Area Network - The present disclosure discloses a method and system for partitioning WLAN in order to separate network traffic from different WLANs. Specifically, a network device receives a packet from a client connected to a first network device on an access network. The network device then determines that the received packet is associated with a VLAN that is pre-configured on the first network device based on the access network to which the client is connected. Furthermore, the network device transmits the packet to a MAC layer switching device, which is not configured with the VLAN that is pre-configured on the network device. The packet includes one of a DHCP discovery message, an ARP request message, a unicast message, a multicast message, and a broadcast message. The unicast message will be transmitted to the second network device on the pre-configured VLAN prior to being transmitted to another network device outside the pre-configured VLAN. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201980 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING STATIONS TO CONNECT TO WIRELESS HOTSPOTS USING NON-UNICODE SERVICE SET IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for enabling stations to connect to wireless hotspots using non-Unicode service set identification information. A WiFi™ wireless router or other access point can broadcast beacon information to smart phones or other stations within wireless range of that device. In existing access point implementations, the character set in which the access point broadcasts this information, including a service set identification indicating the connection services available from the access point, are assumed to be encoded in Unicode format, specifically, UTF-8 format. While English-language options are properly displayed, character sets and/or languages which are not encoded in Unicode (UTF-8) format are translated into unintelligible characters using this approach. According to embodiments, access point hardware can be configured to broadcast the type of character set encoding in the beacon information itself, for instance, in existing SSID information elements, vendor-specific information elements, and/or other locations in the beacon data. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201981 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - After the end of the Wi-Fi Direct Connection, it is necessary to perform a resetting control by the user to reuse the network that was used before the Wi-Fi Direct Connection. A wireless communication device includes a memory unit that stores a communication setting information, and a communication control unit that controls a wireless communication in accordance with the communication setting information. When the first wireless communication switches to the second wireless communication, the communication control unit stores the communication setting information of the first wireless communication and ends the first wireless communication. After that, when the second wireless communication is turned off, the communication control unit controls the first wireless communication in accordance with the communication setting information of the first wireless communication. | 08-08-2013 |
20130208712 | DISASTER PREVENTION SYSTEM BASED ON WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND METHOD FOR THE SAME - A method of operating a disaster prevention system by a disaster prevention center is provided. The method includes: receiving a disaster situation generation report message including disaster information from a user equipment via an access point (AP); generating disaster response information based on the disaster information; and transmitting a disaster broadcasting message including the disaster response information to the disaster prevention center through the AP. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208713 | DYNAMICALLY ENABLED WI-FI - The described implementations provide devices, systems, and methods that offload the usage of a cellular network using dynamic selection of broadband network connections such as wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) access points. A Wi-Fi transceiver on a mobile device may be activated when certain conditions (e.g., trigger events) are met. These conditions may include when, for instance, a cellular signal is dropped to 2G, weak or no cellular coverage is detected, a data use limit has been reached, an associated device is in domestic or international roaming or a particular location, and/or an associated device is in a saved private network area. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208714 | Wireless Social Networking - A first device may communicate by joining a wireless mesh network that includes at least one wireless device configured to operate a wireless routing protocol, discovering a group of other wireless devices configured to participate in the wireless mesh network, and accessing an interest metric for a second wireless device in the group of other wireless devices. The interest metric is based in part on a network topology from the wireless mesh network. The interest metric is related to an interest threshold and it is determined whether relating the interest metric to the interest threshold supports enabling messaging communications. If so, messaging communications may be enabled. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208715 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING A DATA FRAME IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a data frame by a transmitter in a WLAN system is provided. The method includes generating a data block including at least one data units respectively transmitted through at least one or more spatial streams to at least one receiver, transmitting first control information to the at least one receiver, transmitting second control information to each receiver, and transmitting the data block to the at least one receiver. The first control information includes a length indicator for the data block, a MIMO indicator indicating whether the data block is for SU-MIMO or MU-MIMO, and a spatial stream indication field including information about the number of the spatial streams. The second control information includes a FEC coding field indicating an encoding scheme applied to the data unit and an MCS field indicating an MCS applied to the data unit. | 08-15-2013 |
20130215876 | MANAGING ANTENNAS ON AN ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Embodiments include a method for managing connections to one or more antennas in a wireless network. In one embodiment, a method includes receiving antenna information at a wireless controller from an antenna. Configuration information is accessed from a database coupled to the wireless controller, where this information includes suitable antenna characteristics for use with the wireless network. The received antenna information and the configuration information are compared, and instructions are provided to cause the antenna to be connected to or disconnected from the wireless network based on the comparison between the antenna information and the configuration information. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215877 | WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICE, WIRELESS TERMINAL, PROGRAM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a wireless access device including a wireless transmitter/receiver configured to receive a wireless signal including a network identifier, and a setting processing part configured to extract the network identifier from the wireless signal received by the wireless transmitter/receiver and to set a logical network identified by the network identifier. | 08-22-2013 |
20130223419 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR POWER SAVING ENHANCEMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments enable power saving in network environments. An example embodiment comprises: transmitting by a first wireless device to a second wireless device, a first message indicating an awake state with availability to receive wireless messages from the second wireless device, the first message including a threshold value for acceptance by the first device of buffered data in the second device; and receiving by the first wireless device, an immediate acknowledgement message from the second wireless device, if the buffered data in the second device satisfies the threshold value or receiving by the first wireless device, a delayed acknowledgement message from the second wireless device, if the buffered data in the second device does not satisfy the threshold value. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223420 | WAKE-UP BROADCAST INCLUDING NETWORK INFORMATION IN COMMON DESIGNATION AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKING - A data communication device includes both a two-way communications component having a first receiver and transmitter, and a second receiver. The second receiver activates the two-way communications component from a dormant state upon receipt by the second receiver of a wake-up broadcast that includes a wake-up identifier of the data communication device. A method of providing information via the second receiver—which information is auxiliary to the wake-up of the two-way communications component—includes transmitting a wake-up broadcast capable of being received by the second receiver. The wake-up broadcast includes a data construct including a wake-up identifier and the auxiliary information. The wake-up identifier may or may not be a wake-up identifier of the data communication device. Nevertheless, the auxiliary information is received and recorded by the data communication device via the second receiver with the two-way communications component remaining in the dormant state. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223421 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ACCESS POINT NAMES FOR TRUSTED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for supporting multiple access point names for trusted wireless local area network (LAN.) In one method, the method includes receiving a packet at a mobile access gateway from a UE operating in a trusted wireless LAN, determining at the mobile access gateway an access point name (APN) associated with the received packet, and analyzing a binding update list (BUL) table to identify an IP address of the UE used by the determined APN. The method further includes modifying a source IP address of the received packet to the IP address of the UE used by the determined APN, and transmitting the packet to a home network associated with the APN. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223422 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OPTIMIZING WIRELESS TRANSMISSION DATA RATES - One aspect of the disclosure provides a method for wireless communication. The method includes sending a modulation and coding scheme request to an access point. The modulation and coding scheme request is sent using a first physical layer preamble frame. The modulation and coding scheme request includes an identifier associated with the access point. The method further includes receiving at a station a modulation and coding scheme feedback response from the access point in response to sending the modulation and coding scheme request. The modulation and coding scheme feedback response is received as a second physical layer preamble frame. In addition, the method includes determining a modulation and coding scheme based on the modulation and coding scheme feedback response. Moreover, the method includes transmitting data to the access point using the identified modulation and coding scheme. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223423 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING PRIORITY OF CONNECTION WITH A WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS POINT - A terminal and method for performing wireless communication to determine priority of a wireless connection to an access point (AP), including scanning APs within a receivable range of the terminal to collect air log information; one or more of classifying the APs within the receivable range according to Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI), determining a number of terminals connected to the APs in the receivable range, or determining a number of terminals connectable to a corresponding AP for the APs in the receivable range, and determining an order of priority to connect the terminal to at least one AP within the receivable range, based the connection status of the AP, the classification according to RSSI, the number of terminals connected to the APs, or a number of terminals connectable to the APs. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223424 | MANAGEMENT METHODS AND RELATED ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND MACHINE-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUMS USING THE SAME - Management methods for use in an electronic device are provided. The electronic device includes a network connection unit for connecting to a network through a first access point (AP). First, a preferred AP list is provided, wherein the preferred AP list records a plurality of APs and connection records corresponding thereto. Then, the first AP is sequentially selected from the plurality of APs of the preferred AP list to connect to the network, wherein each of the plurality of APs is sequentially selected as the first AP based on the corresponding connection record of the selected AP. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223425 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACTIVELY DETERMINING COMMUNICATION LINK IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for determining a communication link in a client node of a communication system are provided. In the method, access network information and channel state information for at least one host node are determined. Link state information for each host node is determined using the access network information and the channel state information for the corresponding host node. One of the at least one host node is determined with consideration of the link state information for each of the at least one host node. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223426 | WIRELESS PROTOCOL CONVERTER - Methods, apparatuses, and systems for interfacing between a broadband wireless communication system and a Local Area Network (LAN) system are disclosed herein. For instance, the method can include converting first data formatted according to a broadband communication protocol, from a transceiver, to a local area network (LAN) protocol to generate LAN formatted data. The method can also include converting second data formatted according to the LAN protocol, from a computing device, to the broadband communication protocol to generate broadband-formatted data. Further, the method can includes transmitting the LAN-formatted data to the computing device and the broadband-formatted data to the transceiver. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223427 | CHANNEL SOUNDING METHOD IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method for a channel sounding in a wireless local area network is provided. The method includes transmitting a null data packet announcement (NDPA) frame, to a plurality of receivers, the NDPA frame requesting a channel statement information feedback and announcing that a null data packet (NDP) frame is to be transmitted; transmitting the NDP frame being a basis of channel estimation for the plurality of receivers; receiving a first feedback frame from a first receiver among the plurality of receivers, transmitting a feedback poll frame to a second receiver; and, receiving a second feedback frame from the second receiver, the second feedback frame including second channel state information estimated by the second receiver. If the first receiver fails to perform the channel estimation, the first feedback frame is a null feedback frame. The null feedback frame is a feedback frame not including channel state information. | 08-29-2013 |
20130230034 | Extending A Local Area Network - A local area network system that includes a residential gateway in wired communication with a remote service provider and multiple set top boxes in wired communication with the residential gateway. Each set top box includes a network extender having a wired connection to a residential gateway of a local area network, a media player in communication with the network extender, and at least one wireless transceiver in communication with the network extender. The media player includes a computing processor executing instructions to format a signal received from the network extender for use by a media device. Each set top box is configured as an access point for a local area network of the residential gateway. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230035 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BEACON INFORMATION PROVISIONING, TRANSMISSIONS AND PROTOCOL ENHANCEMENTS - A method for beacon information provisioning, transmissions and protocol enhancements includes defining multiple level beacons based on the attributes of beacon information fields/elements. A short beacon may be used in addition to a primary beacon in space-time block code (STBC) modes, non-STBC modes and in multiple bandwidth modes. The short beacons may also be used for Fast Initial Link Setup (FILS) and to extend system coverage range. Beacon transmissions may use adaptive modulation and coding set/scheme (MCS). | 09-05-2013 |
20130230036 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR PRE-ASSOCIATION DISCOVERY IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Wireless transmit and receive units (WTRUs) and methods for pre-association discovery (PAD) are disclosed. The methods may include obtaining an IP address to communicate with a wireless local area network (WLAN) before associating with the WLAN for the purpose of performing PAD. The methods may include communicating with a remote information server (IS) by sending messages to the WLAN using an L2 address and receiving responses from the IS through the WLAN. The methods may include receiving a message including a source IP address from an unassociated WTRU and restricting the use of the source IP address by the unassociated WTRU. The methods may include receiving a PAD request from a WTRU and relaying messages between the WTRU and a remote IS for PAD information exchange. The WTRU may not have an IP address for use with the WLAN and the WTRU may not be associated with the WLAN. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230037 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP NETWORK FOR IP COMMUNICATION IN MOBILE TERMINAL - Methods and apparatus are provided for setting up a network for IP communication between mobile terminals. A first mobile terminal determines a second mobile terminal that will communicate with the first mobile terminal. The first mobile terminal generates a network setup message including network setup information of the second mobile terminal. The network setup message is sent from the first mobile terminal to the second mobile terminal. The first mobile terminal IP communicates with the second mobile terminal, which performs network setup based on the network setup information received from the first mobile terminal. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230038 | HIGH SPEED MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL AND DIRECT LINK PROTOCOL - Techniques for MAC processing for efficient use of high throughput systems that may be backward compatible with various types of legacy systems are disclosed. In one aspect, a data frame is formed comprising a common portion for transmission in a format receivable by various stations, such as access points and remote stations. The data frame also comprises a dedicated portion, formatted for transmission to a specified remote station. In another aspect, the common portion is unsteered, and the dedicated portion is steered. In another aspect, an access point schedules an allocation in response to a data indication included in a common portion of a data frame transmitted from one remote station to another. In another aspect, a first station transmits a reference to a second station, which measures the reference and generates feedback therefrom. | 09-05-2013 |
20130235859 | 802.11 PHY HASHED SSID - An access point (AP) hashes its SSID/BSSID according to a hashing function H and transmits wirelessly the hashed SSID/BSSID within a physical layer frame/packet to a user station (STA). The hashed SSID/BSSID uniquely identifies the AP. In one embodiment, the hashed SSID/BSSID is transmitted within a SIGNAL field of a preamble with the frame/packet. Upon receipt, the user station recovers the hashed SSID/BSSID and compares it to an expected hashed SSID/BSSID (calculated using the same hashing function H and a desired SSID/BSSID). In response to the comparison, the user station performs one or more actions. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235860 | DUAL INTERPRETATION OF A LENGTH FIELD OF A SIGNAL UNIT - A method includes receiving, at a first wireless device from a second wireless device, a signal (SIG) unit including a length field and an aggregation field. The length field is interpreted as a number of symbols in response to determining that the aggregation field has a first value. The length field is interpreted as a number of bytes in response to determining that the aggregation field has a second value. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235861 | WLAN SYSTEM SCANNING AND SELECTION - Techniques for performing WLAN system scanning and selection are described. A terminal performs multiple iterations of scan to detect for WLAN systems. A scan list containing at least one WLAN system to detect for is initially determined For each scan iteration, a scan type may be selected from among the supported scan types. The selected scan type may indicate passive scan or active scan, frequency channels to scan, etc. A scan may be performed based on the selected scan type. Signal strength measurements are obtained for access points received during the scan and used to identify detected access points. After all scan iterations are completed, candidates access points are identified based on the scan results, e.g., based on the signal strength measurements for the detected access points and a detection threshold. The best candidate access point may be selected for association by the terminal | 09-12-2013 |
20130235862 | IPV6 ADDRESS MANAGEMENT METHOD AND GATEWAY PERFORMING THE SAME - A management method for an IPv6 address for use in a gateway is provided. The method includes receiving a packet including an IPv6 address, extracting a MAC address from the IPv6 address of the packet, generating a compressed address by inserting a previously defined bit sequence into the MAC address, and storing the compressed address and the IPv6 address in a mapping table. The packet is received from a WPAN (Wireless Personal Area Network) node. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235863 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF MANAGING PERIPHERAL WIRELESS LAN RADIO SIGNAL FOR POSITIONING SERVICE - The present disclosure relates to providing a positioning service by managing a plurality of peripheral wireless LAN signals. The positioning service system collects peripheral wireless LAN radio signals by scanning peripheral access points (APs), stores AP information of each of peripheral wireless LAN radio signals in each lattice cell of a database. When a positioning request signal is received from a terminal, a positioning server of the positioning service extracts AP identification information from included in the peripheral wireless LAN radio signal received from the terminal. By using the extracted AP identification information, the positioning server selects from the database the corresponding lattice cell matching to the stored AP identification information of each of the peripheral wireless LAN radio signals pre-stored. And the positioning server estimates location information of the selected corresponding lattice cell as location information for the terminal. | 09-12-2013 |
20130242962 | STORAGE DEVICE WITH WIRELESS ROUTER FUNCTION - A storage device with wireless router function includes a main module having a base board, and a network connector. A USB controller, a memory and a router chip are located on the base board. One end of the base board is equipped with a first connector. The USB controller, the memory and the first connector are coupled with the router chip. The storage device performs a data storage function via electrically plugging the first connector to an electronic product and accessing data in the memory. The network connector is electrically connected to the router chip of the base board. The network connector is capable of being further connected to a local area network via a wire link so as to make the storage device perform a wireless router function through the router chip providing a wireless LAN to wirelessly connect the electronic product with an internet. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242963 | CONSTRUCTING VERY HIGH THROUGHPUT LONG TRAINING FIELD SEQUENCES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for constructing a long training field (LTF) sequence in a preamble to reduce a peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) at a transmitter. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242964 | WLAN Discovery and Notification - A wireless local area network (WLAN) management procedure for a telecommunication device is disclosed. A WLAN management entity is operable to detect a communication event associated with a voice call, a video call, or a data transfer session, and then determine a current state of a cellular network. When the current state of the cellular network is deemed problematic, is otherwise unavailable, and/or when an alternative, higher-throughput WLAN is available, the WLAN management entity identifies available WLANs for enabling the corresponding communication. Subsequently, the WLAN management entity generates a notification, presenting an option for selecting an available WLAN, based in part on the current state of the cellular network. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242965 | System and Method of Offloading Traffic to a Wireless Local Area Network - Methods and apparatus for offloading traffic from a cellular network to a wireless local area network (WLAN) are described. One example method generally includes receiving, from a serving base station, a request to measure one or more WLAN access points (APs), determining one or more metrics for the WLAN APs, comparing the metrics for the WLAN APs to a threshold, and reporting metrics for at least a first AP of the WLAN APs if the metrics for the first AP exceed the threshold. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242966 | INITIATING ACCESS TERMINAL COMMUNICATION BASED ON ACCESS POINT LOADING - An access point is identified for providing service for an access terminal. In some aspects, the identification of an access point is based on loading at one or more access points. In some implementations, an access terminal selects a cell (e.g., the cell that provides maximum throughput) based on the cell load at one or more cells. In some implementations, load estimation is based on information acquired by an access terminal from nearby access points. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242967 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, CONNECTION DEVICE, AND CONNECTION DEVICE DESIGNATION METHOD FOR DESIGNATING CONNECTION DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO CONNECT TO - A communication apparatus is provided that includes: a receiving unit that receives communication parameter for connecting to a first base station via a second base station; a connecting unit that connects to the first base station based on the received communication parameter; and an authentication unit that performs authenticated process with the first base station based on the received communication parameter. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242968 | PHYSICAL LAYER DATA UNIT FORMAT - A beamforming training (BFT) data unit for transmission via a communication channel in a wireless personal area network is generated, and in particular, is for transmitting beamforming training information. A physical layer header and first BFT data are encoded using block encoding to generate a first block. Second BFT data are encoded using block encoding to generate a second block. The BFT data unit is generated with a fixed-length payload, such that the BFT data unit includes only i) a preamble, ii) the first block, and iii) the second block. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242969 | PORTABLE DEVICE THAT OPERATES AS A MULTI-PROTOCOL GATEWAY COMMUNICATIONS GATEWAY TO A WIRELESS NETWORK - A portable gateway device with a wireless local area network communications component capable of Wi-Fi or Bluetooth communications, a cellular wireless communications component capable of 3GPP LTE or LTE advanced communications, and a WiMAX communications component capable of WiMAX communications, and an identification module storing network authentication information for accessing a telecommunications network. The portable gateway device is configured such that the WLAN communications component enables Wi-Fi or Bluetooth communications at the same time the cellular wireless communications component enables LTE or LTE Advanced communications. The portable gateway device is also configured such the WLAN communications component enables Wi-Fi or Bluetooth communications at the same time the WiMAX communications component enables WiMAX communications. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242970 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250930 | Reducing Risk of Cross Commissioning in a Radio Network - A refrigerated container system is described that includes a wireless personal area network (WPAN) including a plurality of wireless sensor nodes and a coordinator node through which the sensors provide sensor data to a controller for the refrigerated container system. The wireless sensors and the coordinator incorporate a variety of features that ensure efficient utilization of battery life by preventing unintended pairing of sensors with other WPANs and excessive sensor signal processing arising from door chatter. Finally, pairing is performed without pressing a button on the wireless door sensor. Instead, the sensor's magnetic reed switch is enlisted to detect swiping of a magnet by a user to enter a pairing mode. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250931 | LIMITING WIRELESS DISCOVERY RANGE - Systems and methods of limiting wireless discovery range are described. A transmitting device may limit wireless discovery range by adjusting one or more transmission attributes of a discovery message, measuring inter-device distance based on range determination messages, or any combination thereof. A receiving device may limit wireless discovery range based on one or more attributes of a received discovery message, measuring inter-device distance based on range determination messages, or any combination thereof. Discovery messages may include a range adaptation bit indicating whether range adaptation is to be performed. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250932 | APPARATUS FOR MANAGING NETWORK ZONE HAVING PLURALITY OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS, METHOD OF CONNECTING MOBILE TERMINAL TO WIRELESS ACCESS POINT BY THE APPARATUS, AND THE MOBILE TERMINAL - Provided are an apparatus for managing a network zone having a plurality of wireless access points (APs), a method of connecting a mobile terminal to an AP by the apparatus, and the mobile terminal. The apparatus for managing a network zone having a plurality of wireless APS includes a group manager configured to classify the plurality of wireless APs into a plurality of AP groups based on AP device information on the APs belonging to the network zone. Each of the plurality of AP groups can cover the entire network zone. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250933 | MANAGING DEVICES WITHIN A VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A network node module within a vehicle operates to manage devices coupled to a vehicular communication network of the vehicle based on a use mode defining rights and privileges for operating in the vehicular communication network. Upon being configured in accordance with a particular use mode of a set of use modes, the network node module can identify a device coupled to the vehicular communication network and enable the device to operate within the vehicular communication network in accordance with the use mode. The network node module is securely reconfigurable to any use mode in the set of use modes. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250934 | RAPID LOCAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A wireless client device includes a receiver and a connection module. The receiver is configured to receive, on a wireless medium of a wireless network, a management frame that is periodically transmitted on the wireless medium. The management frame includes an address assignment indication that indicates which address assignment types are employed by the wireless network. The connection module is configured to, in response to the address assignment indication indicating that a dynamic address assignment type is employed by the wireless network, configure a network-layer address for the wireless client device according to a dynamic address assignment protocol. The connection module is configured to, in response to the address assignment indication indicating that the dynamic address assignment type is not employed by the wireless network, configure the network-layer address for the wireless client device according to a link-local address assignment protocol. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250935 | DYNAMIC EQAM DISCOVERY IN M-CMTS ARCHITECTURE - In one example, an Edge Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (EQAM) communicates EQAM information to a Modular Cable Modem Termination System (M-CMTS) core using a routing protocol that is configured on a packet switched network coupling the EQAM to the M-CMTS core. The EQAM generates a routing message according to the routing protocol and inserts EQAM information, such as a description of a modulated channel extending from the EQAM, the service-group information, etc., into the routing message. The EQAM then floods the EQAM information over at least portions of a routing domain by transmitting the routing message to an adjacent intermediary device. | 09-26-2013 |
20130259015 | CONTROL METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATING SYSTEM, WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATING SYSTEM - A wireless communicating system includes a plurality of wireless terminals having an Ad-hoc communication function and a wireless base station. The wireless base station allows one of the plurality of wireless terminals which requests the same data to a local station to directly receive the data from the local station and allows the other wireless terminal among a plurality of wireless terminals to receive the data from the one wireless terminal by the Ad-hoc communication function of the one wireless terminal. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259016 | COEXISTENCE OF WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS WITH OTHER WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless device includes a wireless transceiver configured to transmit to and receive from nodes in a wireless sensor network (WSN) and control logic coupled to the first wireless transceiver. The wireless transceiver transmits a wireless packet to a node in the WSN based on the transmission coinciding with a break in transmissions for a second wireless network. Based on the wireless transceiver being configured to transmit the wireless packets utilizing time synchronized channel hopping, slot frames for packet transmissions in the WSN are time offset so as not to coincide with transmissions made on the second wireless network. Based on the wireless transceiver being configured to transmit the packets utilizing coordinated sampled listening, wake up sequence transmissions for the WSN are time offset so as not to coincide with the transmissions made on the second wireless network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259017 | Physical Layer Frame Format for WLAN - In a method for generating a data unit conforming to a first communication protocol, a first field and a second field to be included in a preamble of the data unit are generated. The first field includes a first set of one or more information bits that indicate a duration of the data unit and is formatted such that the first field allows a receiver device that conforms to a second communication protocol to determine the duration of the data unit. The second field includes a second set of one or more information bits that indicate to a receiver device that conforms to the first communication protocol that the data unit conforms to the first communication protocol. The first field and the second field are modulated using a modulation scheme specified for a field corresponding to the first field and the second field, respectively, by the second communication protocol. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259018 | Devices, Systems, and/or Methods for Managing Wireless Networks - A method includes receiving a beacon message at a wireless network device. The beacon message is followed by a beacon time interval. The method further includes receiving a thin beacon message during the beacon time interval. The thin beacon message is followed by a thin beacon time interval that is shorter than the beacon time interval. The thin beacon time interval includes a contention-free period, a contention period, or a combination thereof. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259019 | MULTI-MODE WLAN/PAN MAC - A novel solution is presented in which a MAC (Medium Access Controller) is implemented that includes multiple functionality types. This MAC may include functionality supporting communication according to one or more of the IEEE 802.11 WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) related standards and also to one or more of the standards generated by the IEEE 802.15.3 PAN (Personal Area Network) working group. By providing this dual functionality of a multi-mode WLAN/PAN MAC, a communication device may adaptively change the manner in which it communicates with other communication devices. For example, in an effort to maximize throughput and overall efficiency of communication within a communication system, certain of the various devices may change from using the WLAN related standards to using the PAN related standards, and vice versa, based on any one or more of a variety of operational parameters including system configuration. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259020 | PROFILE BASED PASSIVE NETWORK SWITCHING - Profile-based passive network switching of wireless mobile devices comprises receiving at a wireless access point a device specific identifier beacon transmitted from a mobile device and extracting a device specific identifier from the beacon. The access point then transmits the device specific identifier and access point provider information to a networked server configured with presence network switching software for determining network switching requirements based on the transmitted device specific identifier. The access point then receives mobile device network switching data from the server for processing. The access point then transmits local wireless network authentication and connection information from the access point to the mobile device to facilitate activating a wireless network connection between the mobile device and the access point at which point the access point starts processing wireless communication from the mobile device over the local wireless network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259021 | HIGH-THROUGHPUT (HT) RECEIVING STATION AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A RATE FOR CONTROL RESPONSE FRAMES IN NON-HT FORMAT - Embodiments of a high-throughput (HT) receiving station and method for determining a rate for response frames in non-HT format are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. The rate may be a non-HT basic rate that is a highest of a basic rate set that is less than or equal to a non-HT reference rate that is selected based on a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) of a received spatial stream. | 10-03-2013 |
20130265997 | MOBILE GATEWAY FOR FIXED MOBILE CONVERGENCE OF DATA SERVICE OVER AN ENTERPRISE WLAN - A system and a method for providing a mobile data service to a mobile device over a fixed wireless data network wherein the system comprises an enterprise Mobile Signaling Gateway coupled to a Public Land Mobile Network, an enterprise Mobile Access Controller resident within the fixed wireless data network. The system further comprises an enterprise Mobile User-plane Aggregator coupled to 1) the Public Land Mobile Network, 2) the fixed wireless data network and the enterprise Mobile Signaling Gateway. The enterprise Mobile Signaling Gateway at least establishes an IP tunnel to the enterprise Mobile Access Controller, determines whether a mobile device coupled to the Public Land Mobile Network is registered, directs the establishment of multiple IP tunnels between the mobile device and the network elements of the system, and directs pathways for communicating user-plane and control-plane data between trusted or untrusted transport networks. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265998 | AUTOMATIC ATTACHMENT AND DETACHMENT FOR HUB AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES - A network ( | 10-10-2013 |
20130265999 | AUTOMATIC ATTACHMENT AND DETACHMENT FOR HUB AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES - A network ( | 10-10-2013 |
20130266000 | REPORTING POWER DISRUPTIONS OF MACHINE-TO-MACHINE DEVICES - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe device, methods, computer-readable media and system configurations for communication of notifications of unexpected power disruptions of machine-to-machine (“M2M”) devices among network entities. In various embodiments, an M2M device may be configured to detect an unexpected power disruption and notify a wireless network access node of the detected unexpected power disruption. In various embodiments a wireless network access node may be configured to receive a notification of an unexpected power disruption of an M2M device and communicate, to a plurality of M2M devices, a notification of the unexpected power disruption. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 10-10-2013 |
20130272282 | TONE SCALING PARAMETERS IN SUB-1 GHZ NETWORKS - Systems and methods of controlling characteristics of messages in sub-1 GHz networks (e.g., IEEE 802.11ah networks) are disclosed. One or more data structures indicating tone scaling parameters may be stored at or accessible to transmitters and receivers. The data structures may be organized based on a frame format, a wireless network bandwidth, and/or the number of spatial streams in use at the wireless network. Information stored in the data structures may be used in generation and processing of messages communicated via the sub-1 GHz network. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272283 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR OPERATING A RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE - According to an aspect of this disclosure, a radio communication device is provided comprising a first transceiver configured to transmit and receive signals in accordance with a Cellular Wide Area radio communication technology; a second transceiver configured to transmit and receive signals in accordance with a Short Range radio communication technology or a Metropolitan Area System radio communication technology; a first processor configured to control the first transceiver; and a second processor configured to control the second transceiver wherein the first processor is configured to control the first transceiver to transmit signals in accordance with a predefined transmitting schedule, wherein the first processor is further configured to control the first transceiver to omit transmitting signals within at least one of a time period and a frequency band provided for signal transmission of the first transceiver in accordance with the predefined transmitting schedule. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272284 | MEMORY DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD OF THE SAME - According to one embodiment, a memory device includes a nonvolatile semiconductor memory, a control unit and a wireless communication unit. The control unit controls the nonvolatile semiconductor memory. The wireless communication unit includes a wireless communication function and is controlled by the control unit. The control unit includes a first control mode to control the wireless communication unit in accordance with set information when a control command to control the wireless communication unit is not received within a predetermined time. The control unit includes a second control mode to control the wireless communication unit in accordance with the control command when the control command is received within the predetermined time. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272285 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT AND NETWORK PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION IN DENSE WIFI NETWORKS - A method of managing Wi-Fi access points using a Wi-Fi network manager is disclosed. Measurement data is received from a plurality of Wi-Fi access points via a control interface. Optimized adjustments to one or more Wi-Fi parameters associated with one or more of the plurality of access points are searched based at least in part on a set of network optimization goals and the measurement data received from the plurality of access points. At least some of the optimized adjustments to the one or more Wi-Fi parameters are transmitted to the one or more of the plurality of access points using the control interface. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272286 | Architecture For Content And Host-Centric Information Dissemination In Delay-Tolerant MANETs - An architecture to enable delay tolerant content-centric and host-centric communications in MANETs comprised of smart phones is disclosed. This architecture allows cross network communications and Internet sharing, assuming that at least one of the smart phones has internet connectivity. The architecture includes a routing mechanism for content-centric communications, as well as routing algorithms for host-centric communications. In one embodiment, a combination of OLSR and a modified variant of PRoPHET is used to create preferred routing paths for content-centric communication. In another embodiment, variations of store and forward, such as binary spray and wait, are used for host-centric communications. These communications between mobile devices utilize wireless communications, such as IEEE802.11. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272287 | System and Method for ANDSF Enhancement with ANQP Server Capability - System and method embodiments are provided for extending Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) with Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP) server capability. An embodiment method for network discovery and selection (NDS) includes receiving, at an ANQP proxy, query for network discovery information from a user equipment (UE), forwarding the query to an ANDSF including an indication for a service provider associated with a domain of users, receiving information associated with the service provider from the ANDSF, and forwarding the information associated with the service provider to the UE. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272288 | TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The disclosure claims a transmission method and device in WLAN, wherein the method includes: a transmitting STA or a receiving STA performing channel detection and/or channel scanning on a channel of the first channel set and/or the second channel set; if the result of the detection and/or scanning satisfies a preset condition, the transmitting STA and the receiving STA exchanging a reservation message on the channel of the first channel set or the second channel set, wherein the reservation message is configured to reserve a channel of the second channel set for transmission; the transmitting STA transmits a data frame to the receiving STA on the reserved channel of the second channel set; and after receiving the data frame, the receiving STA transmits acknowledgement information of the data frame on the channel of the first channel set or the second channel set. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272289 | Wireless Local Area Network, Station, and Access Point and Methods for Accessing Thereof - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for accessing a wireless local area network, a station, and an access point. The method includes: receiving, by a station, a beacon or a probe response from an access point, where the beacon or the probe response carries configuration version information; and executing, by the station, a GAS query according to the configuration version information carried in the beacon or the probe response. In the embodiments of the present invention, the access point sends the configuration version information to the station, so that the station executes the GAS query according to the configuration version information, thereby improving access efficiency. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272290 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR CENTRALIZED 802.1X AUTHENTICATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for centralized 802.1X authentication in a wireless local area network, and the method includes: receiving, by the access point, an EAP authentication start message from the UE, where a destination address of the EAP authentication start message is a MAC address corresponding to an air interface of the access point, and its source address is a MAC address of the UE; modifying the destination address of the EAP authentication start message to be a multicast address of a port access entity or a MAC address of the authentication entity; and forwarding the EAP authentication start message whose destination address is modified. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272291 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST USING MULTIPLE RECEIVER-COORDINATED TRANSMITTERS - A method and a receiving device, the method receiving an indication of pending data from an access network, the pending data including a sequence number for every unit of the pending data; and sending transmission instructions to a first transmitter within the access network, the transmission instructions including a range of sequence numbers desired by the receiving device and an error correction and coding scheme to be used by the first transmitter. Further, a receiving device having a processor; and a communications subsystem, wherein the processor and communications subsystem cooperate to receive a first stream from a first transmitter; receive a second stream from a second transmitter; and soft combine the first stream and the second stream at the receiving device. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272292 | MULTI-COMMUNICATIONS-MEDIA NETWORK DEVICE - A network device may include a processor executing higher layer processes including layers of a protocol stack higher than a media access layer, a first physical interface (PHY) and a second PHY coupled respectively to first and second communications media. A media access controller (MAC) may execute the media access layer of the protocol stack. An association table may list a plurality of known destination MAC addresses, an association between each known destination MAC address and one of the first and second PHYs, and at least one association between pairs of known MAC addresses that are collocated, each pair of known MAC addresses including a MAC address associated with the first PHY and a MAC address associated with the second PHY. Media selection logic may select one of the first and second PHYs for communication with a device designated by a target MAC address provided by the higher layer processes. | 10-17-2013 |
20130279487 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY - Configurations are described for maintaining a continuity and quality of wireless signal connection between a mobile device and systems accessible through the internet. In particular, configurations are disclosed to address the challenge of a mobile device that moves through a physical environment wherein the best wireless connectivity performance is achieved by switching between available connection sources and constantly evaluating a primary connection with other available connections that may be switched in to become a new primary connection. The mobile device may be self-propelled or carried by some other mobilizing means. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279488 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOCAL-AREA-NETWORK-ASSISTED LOCATION DETERMINATION - Wi-Fi-based location determination methods may include receiving location information and/or identifier information regarding a Wi-Fi hot spot, at a database. The methods may include transmitting the location information and/or identifier information regarding the Wi-Fi hot spot, from the database to a positioning receiver. Related systems are also described. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279489 | System and Method for Basic Service Set Association - In one embodiment, a method for associating in a basic service set (BSS) includes receiving, by a first node, a first packet from a second node and determining whether association is pursued in accordance with a first traffic type accepted by the first node and the first packet including a second traffic type accepted by the second node or in accordance with a first device type of the first node and the first packet including a second device type of the second node. The method also includes attaching the first node to the second node when association is pursued. | 10-24-2013 |
20130287010 | Dynamic Beacon Rates and Fixed Ad Hoc Modes in Ad Hoc Networks - Systems and methods for dynamic beacon rates and fixed ad hoc modes in ad hoc networks in accordance with embodiments of the invention are disclosed. In one embodiment of the invention, an ad hoc wireless network includes a plurality of peers configured to form an ad hoc network, wherein the plurality of peers are configured to transmit and receive beacon frames, wherein one or more of the plurality of peers is configured to be fixed in a host mode, wherein one or more of the plurality of peers is configured to be fixed in a client mode, wherein the one or more peers in host mode are configured to transmit beacon frames, where the beacon frames identify an ad hoc wireless network, and wherein a peer not connected to an ad hoc wireless network does not transmit beacon frames when in client mode. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287011 | DISTANCE MEASUREMENT AND ALARM METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a distance measurement and alarm method and apparatus. The method includes: sending pairing request information for establishing a connection with a receiving terminal; after the receiving terminal is paired with, calculating a current distance to the receiving terminal; comparing the current distance with a preset distance threshold, and if the current distance exceeds the distance threshold, displaying distance prompt information. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287012 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING PROXIMITY DATA PATH SETUP - A method and apparatus are described for maintaining communications over a bearer when at least one of two wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) transition to idle mode. In one case, a direct WTRU-to-WTRU bearer may be released in response to a first one of the WTRUs transitioning to idle mode. A second one of the WTRUs may send a first of a plurality of packets to the first WTRU via a default packet data network (PDN) connection or a default bearer towards the PDN connection. The first packet may have a destination Internet protocol (IP) address of the second WTRU and trigger paging to the first WTRU. The first WTRU may transition to connected mode in response to the paging. Other cases may release a portion of a bearer, rather than the entire bearer. A method and apparatus for initiating proximity service bearer establishment is also described. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287013 | METHOD AND APPARATUS PREVENTING PLURALITY OF STATIONS IN WLAN FROM COLLIDING WITH EACH OTHER WHEN ATTEMPTING TO ACCESS MEDIUM - A method and apparatus for preventing a plurality of stations in a wireless local area network (WLAN) from colliding with each other when accessing a medium are provided. In the method, an access point (AP) determines the transmission capabilities of a plurality of stations in a basic service set (BSS) of the AP, determines the format of control frames or data frames which have a high throughput (HT) format to be used in the BSS of the AP, and notifies the stations of the result of the determination. Therefore, it is possible to adaptively choose and use an optimum method of preventing a plurality of stations in a WLAN from colliding with each other when accessing a medium according to the circumstances in a WLAN by referencing the transmission capabilities of a plurality of stations in the WLAN. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287014 | DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS VIA INTERLOCK BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS IN RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting and receiving data via a first base station supporting a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second base station supporting a second RAT in a radio access system supporting a multi-radio access technology, and the method may include performing a network (re)entry procedure with the first base station; receiving control information required for an access to the second base station located in the vicinity of the first base station from the first base station; performing a scanning procedure for at least one second base station located in the vicinity of the first base station; receiving an instruction message instructing an access to the second base station from the first base station; and performing an access procedure with the second base station. | 10-31-2013 |
20130294425 | FEMTOCELL SYNCHRONIZATION ENHANCEMENTS USING ACCESS PROBES FROM COOPERATING MOBILES - Femtocell synchronization is disclosed, in which a femtocell transmits a request over an out-of-band (OOB) link to a proximate mobile device for synchronization assistance. In response to the request, the mobile device transmits an access probe to a serving macro base station. The femtocell detects the access probe and uses aiding information to decode the access probe to determine the timing and/or frequency information. The femtocell uses this timing and/or frequency information for its synchronization. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294426 | PROVIDING CONNECTIVITY TO END DEVICES USING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES - An end device operates as an access point to setup communication with a wireless station. Once the communication has been setup, the end device exchanges data packets with the wireless station while operating as an access point. The end device and the wireless station are included in a WLAN network according to IEEE 802.11 standards. Operation as an access point enables the end device to communicate with a large number of wireless stations. Such communication can be the basis for implementation of various management applications on wireless stations. In an embodiment, the end point includes a blood pressure sensor, and transmits (while operating as an access point) blood pressure measurements to a mobile phone operating as a wireless station. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294427 | Method And Apparatus For Signaling Sequence Root - A first access node of a first network utilizes code sequences, assigned to different user devices, to distinguish at least acknowledgements received in parallel or sequentially from those user devices. The first access node determines from received signaling that a root sequence of the code sequences is in use by a second access node of a second network, then changes that root sequence of the code sequences assigned to the different user devices. In certain examples the access nodes are WLAN access points APs and the acknowledgements are received in response to a group probe/poll. In various embodiments the first AP monitors its neighbors' group probes/polls to learn the root sequences/basic service sets in use in those neighbor networks, or the AP's own stations monitor and send the information in neighbor reports. This latter option can be initiated by the stations themselves, or by the AP. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294428 | MAC HEADER BASED TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A transceiver of an apparatus supports communication with at least one additional apparatus. A processing module processes at least a portion of media access control (MAC) header content of a MAC frame within a signal received via the at least one transceiver or generated internally. In particular, the MAC header content, and optionally the MAC payload content, is processed based on a filter and classification agreement between the apparatus and the at least one additional apparatus to classify the MAC frame. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294429 | FILTER AND CLASSIFICATION AGREEMENT FOR MAC HEADER BASED TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A transceiver of an apparatus supports communication with at least one additional apparatus. A baseband processing module indicates that first frame classification information includes at least a portion of MAC header content of a MAC frame via a filter and classification agreement included in the communication between the apparatus and the at least one additional apparatus. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294430 | COMMUNICATION-PATH CONTROL PROGRAM AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - A computer-readable recording medium has stored therein a communication-path control program causing a computer to execute a process which includes detecting a device capable of wireless communication out of a connecting device to be a destination of wireless communication to connect to a network and a storage medium that performs wireless communication; when having detected the connecting device, connecting to the connecting device; when having detected the storage medium in a state where the computer is connected to the connecting device, determining whether a certain application is running on the computer; and when the certain application is not running, disconnecting from the connecting device and connecting to the storage medium. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294431 | EFFICIENT MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) HEADER - A medium access control (MAC) frame having a short MAC header with at least two address fields and an indicator field that indicates it is a short MAC header is provided. The indicator field may indicate a presence of a third or fourth address field in the short MAC header. The indication may be a one, two, or any number of bits indicator. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294432 | DIRECT MODE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION ATTACHING METHOD THEREOF - A direct-mode communication system comprises a first client direct-mode communication apparatus and a backhaul network. The first client direct-mode communication apparatus transmits a register signal to the backhaul network to register with the backhaul network. After the first client direct-mode communication apparatus is registered, the backhaul network determines a location relationship between the first client direct-mode communication apparatus and a second client direct-mode communication apparatus, and transmits a wi-fi connection signal to the first client direct-mode communication apparatus according to the location relationship. The first client direct-mode communication apparatus creates a wi-fi direct-mode communication connection with the second client direct-mode communication apparatus according to the wi-fi connection signal. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294433 | DIRECT MODE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION ATTACHING METHOD THEREOF - A direct-mode communication system includes a first client direct-mode communication apparatus and a first backhaul network. The first client direct-mode communication apparatus transmits a proximity notification request to a second backhaul network via the first backhaul network so that the second backhaul network returns a proximity notification acknowledgement (ACK) signal. The first backhaul network receives a piece of first client location information and a piece of second client location information from the first direct-mode communication apparatus and the second backhaul network respectively, and determines a location relationship accordingly. The first backhaul network transmits a Wi-Fi connection signal to the first client direct-mode communication apparatus according to the location relationship. The first client direct-mode communication apparatus establishes a direct-mode communication connection with a second client direct-mode communication apparatus according to the Wi-Fi connection signal. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294434 | METHOD FOR CONNECTIONLESS MESSAGING, MACHINE-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method for connectionless messaging, a machine-readable storage medium, and a communication terminal are provided. A method for connectionless messaging between a first communication terminal and a second communication terminal includes: discovering a second communication terminal located in proximity to the first communication terminal; receiving first user input data; generating a message including the first user input data; and transmitting the generated message to the second communication terminal without a connection between the first communication terminal and the second communication terminal. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294435 | Method of Handling Service Group Ownership Transfer in a Communication System and Related Communication Device - A method of transferring ownership of a service group (SG) for a communication system comprising a converged personal network service (CPNS) server is disclosed. The service group comprises a first plurality of personal network elements (PNEs), and the method comprises the CPNS server receiving an owner transfer request from a first PNE of the service group; and the CPNS server selecting a second PNE from the first plurality of PNEs of the service group, to transfer the ownership of the service group from the first PNE to the second PNE. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294436 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSCEIVING A CONTACT VERIFICATION SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present document related to a method and apparatus for transceiving a signal capable of verifying the validity of an available channel in a wireless communication system. According to the present invention, a scheme for transceiving available channel information, a scheme for requesting/responding to a channel validity inquiry, and a scheme for transceiving a contact verification signal are provided, and accordingly, a scheme for supporting the accurate and efficient operation of an unlicensed device while protecting a licensed device in a whitespace band is provided. | 11-07-2013 |
20130301624 | SELECTIVELY DIRECTING MEDIA FEEDS TO A SET OF TARGET USER EQUIPMENTS - In an embodiment, a given UE joins a local group communication session between a group of UEs, establishes itself as a director, obtains media feeds captured by media capturing UEs in the group of UEs and transmits a selected subset of the media feeds to a server for transmission to target UEs. In another embodiment, the server receives the media feeds itself and sends the media feeds to a director UE. The director UE indicates a selection of the subset of the media feeds to the server, and the server transmits the selected subset of media feeds to the target UEs. Accordingly, a local director UE can direct the subset to the target UEs by controlling which media feeds are sent to the server, or a remote director UE can direct the subset to the target UEs by controlling which media feeds the server sends to the target UEs. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301625 | AGGREGATION OF INFORMATION UNITS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The present application relates to a method for transmitting information from a wireless access point to one or more wireless stations. The method comprises aggregating a plurality of information units of compatible types, such as MAC protocol data units (MPDUs) or acknowledgements into a single data frame, modulating the single data frame and transmitting the modulated data frame containing the plurality of information units to the one or more wireless stations. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301626 | METHODS, CIRCUITS, DEVICES, SYSTEMS AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER EXECUTABLE CODE FOR FACILITATING ACCESS TO A CONTENT SOURCE THROUGH A WIRELESS MOBILE NETWORK - Disclosed are methods, circuits, devices, systems and associated computer executable code for providing facilitating communication between a mobile device application and a content source accessible through a mobile communication network having one or more wireless access points. There is disclosed a start of Service Accelerator (“SOSA”) functionally associate with a wireless access point of the mobile communication network, where the SOSA includes: (1) one or more data stream sniffers adapted to detect and extract start of service sequence (SOSS) data associated with a first Mobile Device Application initiating start of service with a given content source; (2) a Data Request Routing & Handshake Cache (DRRHC) adapted to store Network SOSS Entities associated with the given content source; and (3) a Route Request and Handshake Responder (RRHR) adapted to respond to Application SOSS Entities from a second Mobile Device Application which is initiating start of service with the given content source using Network SOSS Entities stored on said DRRHC. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301627 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WI-FI ROAMING - Systems and methods for Wi-Fi roaming. A gateway supports both a local access point (AP) and a virtual AP. The local AP is accessible only to an “owner” of the gateway. The virtual AP (VAP) is accessible to devices associated with the owner of the gateway and to roaming Wi-Fi devices. A datastore conveys information about the roaming Wi-Fi devices to the VAP to permit them to access the VAP without the need for manual configuration of the VAP. A roaming Wi-Fi device may communicate with a gateway via a tunnel to maintain session connectivity during roaming. A session may be initiated on one network, such as a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network, handed off to another network, such as a cellular network or a Wi-Fi network, and then returned to the network on which the session was initiated. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301628 | HIGH PERFORMANCE WIRELESS NETWORKS USING DISTRIBUTED CONTROL AND SWITCH-STACK PARADIGM - The invention describes a method of routing voice and data traffic within a hierarchical node-based mesh network. The steps include storing data as individual data packets, then including in each data packet a destination node of the data packet. Thereafter, sending the data from the data packet's source node to the source node's parent node and processing the data by the parent node. Finally, identifying the destination node of the data and sending the data from the parent node toward the destination node. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301629 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION, AND A PROGRAM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In wireless communication with another communication apparatus in a predetermined wireless network, overhead information defined in a media access control layer is divided into a header of information necessary for the common access control and a header of information necessary for each payload. Address information is added to the header of information necessary for the common access control to transmit the generated header attached to the transmission data. For example, in a case of forming a physical burst in which a plurality of data payloads are combined into one, a frame structure is provided without useless repetition of address information. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301630 | LOCAL INFORMATION DELIVERY SYSTEM - A sensing device senses a frame of a data link layer transmitted from the wireless LAN interface of a mobile phone without establishing connection with the mobile phone, detects equipment identification information of the mobile phone from the frame, and transmits the detected equipment identification information to a server device. The server device then selects delivery data based on identification information of the sensing device that has detected the equipment identifier, and transmits the selected delivery data via a mobile phone network to the mobile phone corresponding to the equipment identification information. | 11-14-2013 |
20130308617 | Continuous Virtual Private Local Area Network (LAN) Service (VPLS) Over Wireline and Wireless Networks - A mechanism is provided for enabling virtual private local area network (LAN) service (VPLS) service within a base station (NodeB/eNodeB). A wireless signal is received from a mobile device. The wireless signal is converted into one or more internet protocol (IP) packets. A VPLS virtual private network (VPN) multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) label is constructed in a header of each IP packet. An egress router is identified for the IP packets. A MPLS label of the egress router is constructed for MPLS routing. The MPLS label is added on top of the VPLS VPN MPLS label in the header of each IP packet. The one or more IP packets are then forwarded to at least one other router within a MPLS network. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308618 | DRIVING HYBRID LOCATION SERVICES FROM WLAN STATIONS USING ACCESS POINTS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) positioning system is disclosed that allows the WLAN system to determine the location attributes of a client device operating in a power save mode, operating on a different channel than the WLAN's access points, and/or operating in an ad-hoc mode. The client device periodically performs scanning operations during which beacon frames broadcast by a selected AP(s) can be received. The client device parses information embedded in the beacon frames, and in response thereto selectively initiates ranging operations to determine its location attributes. After determining its location attributes, the client devices sends the location attributes back to the selected AP(s). | 11-21-2013 |
20130308619 | LIGHTING INSTRUMENT HAVING WIRELESS NETWORK SHARING FUNCTION - A light instrument having wireless network sharing function includes a decorative light and a wireless network access point disposed within a base of the decorative light. Therefore, the decorative light not only can provide function of illumination, but internet for electronic apparatus having WIFI equipment when the wireless network access point is electrically connected to a modem. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308620 | EVOLVED HYBRID INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) ARCHITECTURE - A method, apparatus, and computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The method generally includes registering a UE with an internet protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) server for one or more native services and non-native services, wherein the UE comprises a modem processor and an application processor. The IMS server may comprise an RTP stack, wherein a portion of the RTP stack resides on the MP and a portion on the AP. A data packet may be received having an identifier of one of the native or non-native services. The data packet may be received from a WWAN or IWLAN. The data packet may be forwarded to the MP or to the AP based on the identifier. According to aspects, the data packet is forwarded to the MP if the identifier indicates an audio service and to the AP if the data packet indicates a video service. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308621 | DIRECTED WI-FI NETWORK IN A VENUE INTEGRATING COMMUNICATIONS OF A CENTRAL CONCERT CONTROLLER WITH PORTABLE INTERACTIVE DEVICES - Communications between a central concert controller and portable interactive devices of audience members in a venue are integrated through a Wi-Fi network providing coverage of the venue. A multi-megabit traffic exchange without loss of data is achieved. Both omnidirectional and highly directional radios utilize a single frequency in order to provide a signal to areas that are not in a line of sight of a single Wi-Fi source. Each directional radio includes a backhaul transceiver. Users are sent images such as streaming videos by a video jockey, and may upload content to the central system. A server within the system controls interactions of user devices. Each user device may be assigned a unique ID number. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308622 | SYSTEM FOR ON-DEMAND ACCESS TO LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A roaming company makes payments to an aggregator of independent WLAN operators in exchange for providing Internet access services to subscribers of the roaming company. Independent WLAN operator accounts are maintained at the aggregation company. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315218 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR EXTENDING COVERAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for coverage expansion in a wireless communication system. This disclosure discloses a wireless device operating in a wireless communication system, the wireless device comprising a transceiver transmitting and receiving a wireless signal and a processor operating in operative connection with the transceiver, wherein the processor sets power boosting adjustable in an RF capability range within an SIG field. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315219 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF INDICATING BANDWIDTH IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The phase rotation relates to an apparatus and method of indicating a bandwidth in a wireless communication system. This disclosure discloses a wireless device comprising a transmission transmitting and receiving a wireless signal and a processor operating in operative connection with the transmission, wherein the processor generates a PPDU (physical protocol data unit) to which a phase rotation application is selectively applied depending on a case of bandwidth indication or a case of no bandwidth indication. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315220 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A NETWORK, A SYSTEM AND A PRIMARY STATION THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a system comprising at least one primary station and at least one secondary station, wherein the primary station comprises communication means for communicating with the secondary station in accordance with a first protocol, wherein the communication means are arranged for communicating with a plurality of further stations in accordance with a further protocol, and wherein the primary station comprises control means for generating a message to be broadcast to the secondary station, said message comprising purposely erroneous information causing the at least one secondary station to remain silent for a predetermined duration. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING ANTENNA CAPABILITY INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for exchanging antenna capability information between a transmitting station (STA) and a receiving STA in a wireless communication system may include an antenna capability information element (IE) that includes information regarding the capability of the transmitting STA. The antenna capability IE may be transmitted from the transmitting STA to the receiving STA prior to data transmission between the transmitting STA and the receiving STA. When used in a wireless local area network, the antenna capability IE may be transmitted as part of a management frame, control frame, or data frame. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315222 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system performs data transmission using spatially multiplexed streams from a first terminal including N antennas to a second terminal including M antennas (N and M are integers larger than or equal to 2 and N>M). | 11-28-2013 |
20130315223 | RSVP/SBM BASED UP-STREAM SESSION SETUP, MODIFICATION, AND TEARDOWN FOR QOS-DRIVEN WIRELESS LANS - A method and system is disclosed for setting up, modifying and tearing down an up-stream communication session in a basic service set (BSS) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), so that the communication session has a defined Quality of Service (QoS). Regarding setting up an up-stream communication session, a first Path message and a first Resv message (Path/Resv message) of a RSVP protocol are detected at a designated subnet bandwidth manager (DSBM) in a station having a point coordinator (PC). The first Resv message originates from a RSVP agent of a host outside the BSS, and is a request for setting up an up-stream session between a source non-PC station in the BSS and the PC station. A QoS parameter set and a classifier from the first Path/Resv message for the session are extracted at the DSBM. | 11-28-2013 |
20130322415 | LOCATION TRACKING FOR MOBILE TERMINALS AND RELATED COMPONENTS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS - A location tracking for mobile terminals is disclosed. Related components, systems, and methods are also disclosed herein. For example, the systems disclosed herein can provide location information to mobile terminals that may not be able to receive otherwise global positioning system (GPS) information from the GPS satellites, such as, for example, when the mobile terminal is not within line of sight of the GSP satellites. The location information may be provided through a service set identifier (SSID) signal. Providing location information may make location based services, such as emergency (E911) services, for example, possible based on the location information. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322416 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CONCURRENT SERVICE - An electronic device and a method for providing a concurrent service are provided. The electronic device for providing the concurrent service includes a first communication unit for transceiving signals of a first frequency band, a second communication unit for transceiving signals of a second frequency band, an input unit for determining a function to execute for each of a plurality of counterpart devices by detecting a user input, a memory for storing frequency band information corresponding to the function to execute, and a processor for determining frequency bands for communicating with the counterpart devices based on frequency band information corresponding to the determined function, and controlling the first communication unit and the second communication unit to communicate with a corresponding counterpart devices according to the determined frequency band at the same time. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322417 | System and Method for Hardware Sharing - A method of transceiving data includes providing a wireless transceiver chip that supports multiple wireless standards for transceiving data packets, wherein a first wireless standard comprises a first modulation and demodulation scheme, and wherein a second wireless standard comprises a second modulation and demodulation scheme, and wherein the first modulation and demodulation scheme is incompatible with the second modulation and demodulation scheme; activating only one PHY layer of the wireless transceiver chip during the transceiving of the data packets; using a MAC layer of the wireless transceiver chip to specify whether the first or second wireless standard is to be used for a given transceiving of the data packets; and the PHY layer receiving instructions from the MAC layer regarding which wireless standard is to be used for the transceiving of the data packets using hardware that is shared by the PHY layer corresponding to both wireless standards. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322418 | DEVICE CONFIGURATION IN A HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORK - An access point selector can implement functionality for selecting an access point that should establish a communication link with a client device attempting to join a communication network. The access point selector can receive notifications from access points, in response to the client device's button being activated. Information in the received notifications can be analyzed and one of the access points (that transmitted the notifications) can be selected to establish the communication link with the client device. In some embodiments, prior to selecting an access point that should establish the communication link with the client device, the access point selector can attempt to identify a designated access point (DAP) in the communication network. The access point selector may execute operations for selecting the access point only if the DAP cannot be identified in the communication network. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322419 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONNECTIONS FOR NETWORKS USED BY A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The disclosure relates to a system and method for managing a profile list for connections to networks for a communication device. The method comprises: maintaining a list of profiles of network connections for the communication device for presentation on a display of the communication device, the list of profiles representing connections to the networks; upon detection of a connection for the communication device to a network, determining whether the connection is in the list of profiles and if the connection is not in the list, establishing a temporary profile with a time condition for the connection and adding the temporary profile to the list of profiles; and removing the temporary profile from the list of profiles when at least the time condition is not satisfied. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322420 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322421 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 12-05-2013 |
20130329712 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING DURING AN ASSOCIATION BEAMFORMING TRAINING (A-BFT) PERIOD - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of communicating during an Association-Beamforming-Training (A-BFT). For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit to communicate a beacon frame during a beacon transmission interval (BTI), the beacon frame including a responder address field including a responder address representing one or more client devices, which are allowed to transmit during an A-BFT period following the BTI. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329713 | PROCESS METHOD ABOUT THE SERVICE CONNECTION BETWEEN THE WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND USER TERMINAL - A method for processing a service connection between a user terminal and a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) is provided. A WLAN interactive network includes at least a WLAN user terminal, a WLAN access unit, a service control unit and a user information storage unit. The method includes setting flags that represent the attached or detached status of the service connection between the user terminal and the WLAN in the WLAN user terminal and the service control unit respectively; and establishing or canceling the connection between the user terminal and the network through the interaction between the WLAN user terminal and the WLAN, meanwhile modifying the corresponding flags. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329714 | HOME NETWORKING WITH INTEGRATED CELLULAR COMMUNICATION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be an intermediate gateway. The intermediate gateway may receive a first Internet protocol (IP) packet of a first data flow for transmission to a device, determine a first quality of a cellular communication link established with the device and a second quality of at least one local area communication link established with the device, attach a header to the first IP packet when the second quality is closer to a quality requirement of the first IP packet than the first quality, the header being used to tunnel the first IP packet to the device via the at least one local area communication link, and transmit the first IP packet to the device via the at least one local area communication link based on at least the first and second qualities. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329715 | Methods, Apparatuses and Computer Program Products for Configuration of Signaling Radio Bearers - Methods, corresponding apparatuses, and computer program products for configuring one or more signaling radio bearers are disclosed. A method comprises sending a configuration request for configuring one or more signaling radio bearers to a local area access point by which a user equipment is connected to a wide area base station, wherein the one or more signaling radio bearers are used for communication between the user equipment and the wide area base station. The method also comprises receiving configuration information with respect to the one or more signaling radio bearers from the local area access point. The method additionally comprises sending the configuration information with respect to the one or more signaling radio bearers to the user equipment via a radio resource control message. With the claimed inventions, the wide area base station is capable of efficiently configuring the signaling radio bearers for use between the wide area base station and the user equipment via the local area access point. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329716 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329717 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329718 | Techniques for Flexible and Efficient Beamforming - Training data for a first training session is generated to include a first data unit, the first data unit having a field that specifies a first number of beamforming training data units that can be communicated during a second training session to occur after the first training session. The training data including the first data unit is transmitted to a second device during the first training session. A second data unit received from the second device is processed to determine whether a request for the second device to participate in the second training session was accepted by the second device based on a first field of the second data unit. In response to determining that the request to participate in the second training session was accepted by the second device, the first number of beamforming training data units are transmitted during the second training session. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336304 | TERMINAL SYSTEM AND FLEXIBLE TERMINAL - A including a first terminal and a second terminal that are configured to be coupled to each other over a local area wireless communication network, wherein the second terminal senses the amount of transformation of the second terminal and displays different information according to the amount of transformation of the second terminal. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336305 | PERSISTENT LOGICAL DATA TUNNELS - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods, computer-readable media and system configurations for data delivery among wireless machine-to-machine (“M2M”) and/or machine-type-communication (“MTC”) devices. A method may include receiving, from a plurality of wireless devices (e.g., user equipment or subscriber unit devices), a plurality of uplink data packets, and routing uplink data packets from a subset of the plurality of wireless devices into a logical data tunnel leading to an access gateway. The logical data tunnel may be persistent across sessions of the subset of the plurality of wireless devices. Additionally or alternatively, a method may include incorporating an M2M/MTC payload into data for establishing a connection between a wireless device and a radio access network (“RAN”), so that the wireless device may thereafter enter into an idle mode. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336306 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BASED ON CONTROLLING RECEIVE CHAIN IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method of communication based on a receive chain control, performed by a receiver, in a wireless local area network is provided. The method includes: receiving a frame from a transmitter, the frame indicating a multi receive chain operation, activating at least one receive chain, each receive chain processing a received signal transmitted through each spatial stream, and receiving at least one data field from the transmitter through the at least one activated receive chain. | 12-19-2013 |
20130343364 | Proximity Detection - Disclosed are various embodiments of a wireless access point. An 802.11 probe request frame is obtained from a wireless device in a wireless access point. Identifying information about the wireless device is extracted from the 802.11 probe request frame. The identifying information and an access point identifier corresponding to the wireless access point to at least one server via a network, from which location and/or proximity to the wireless access point can be determined. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343365 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION AMONG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for synchronization of integrated circuits (ICs) within a wireless network. In one embodiment, a serial time protocol (STP) is disclosed for use within a wireless device of a wireless network. The disclosed STP provides a common protocol for communicating precision time information from one time-transmitter IC to another time-receiver IC within a wireless device. In one exemplary implementation, a time-transmitter and a time-receiver are implemented within the firmware of a wireless device. Various schemes utilizing the disclosed STP for time synchronization are also described. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343366 | PHY LAYER PARAMETERS FOR BODY AREA NETWORK (BAN) DEVICES - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a transceiver with a physical (PHY) layer. The PHY layer is configured for body area network (BAN) operations in a limited multipath environment based on a constant symbol rate for BAN packet transmissions and based on M-ary PSK, differential M-ary PSK or rotated differential M-ary PSK modulation. The PHY layer is configured to transmit and receive data in a frequency band selected from the group consisting of: 402-405 MHz, 420-450 MHz, 863-870 MHz, 902-928 MHz, 950-956 MHz, 2360-2400 MHz, and 2400-2483.5 MHz. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343367 | Managed Access Point Protocol - Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating deployment and configuration of managed access points in hierarchical wireless network systems. An embodiment of the invention facilitates deployment and configuration of conventional, substantially autonomous access points operating in connection with a central management node, such as a server or appliance. In another embodiment, the present invention facilitates deployment and configuration of light-weight access points in a hierarchical wireless network system. In one embodiment, the present invention also provides a streamlined encryption key exchange protocol adapted to hierarchical wireless network system architectures. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343368 | DATA COLLECTION DEVICE HAVING DYNAMIC ACCESS TO MULTIPLE WIRELESS NETWORKS - There is set forth herein a method of providing network connectivity. The method can include introducing a new communication device within a communication range of a portable data collection device, the new communication device comprising a dynamic access module enabling the new communication device to receive data packets from the portable data collection device and route payload data of the data packets to an access point. In one aspect the new communication device can receive data packets from the portable data collection device and route payload data of the data packets to the access point if the new communication device determines that it is in range of both of said access point and the portable data collection device. There is set forth herein a system having a dynamic access module. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343369 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system is disclosed. The system performs data transmission from a first terminal including N antennas to a second terminal including M antennas using spatially multiplexed streams (N and M are integers larger than or equal to 2). | 12-26-2013 |
20130343370 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus ( | 12-26-2013 |
20140003404 | Determining Suitability of an Access Network | 01-02-2014 |
20140003405 | Determining Availability of an Access Network | 01-02-2014 |
20140003406 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING AN AWAKE STATE OF A STATION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003407 | METHOD FOR WIFI ASSOCIATION AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF | 01-02-2014 |
20140003408 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK SELECTION IN OVERLAPPING NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS | 01-02-2014 |
20140003409 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A CLIENT DEVICE AND A WIRELESS PERIPHERAL UNIT | 01-02-2014 |
20140003410 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RANGING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-02-2014 |
20140003411 | REPORTING TERMINAL CAPABILITIES FOR SUPPORTING SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE | 01-02-2014 |
20140003412 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONTENTION WINDOW IN WIMEDIA WIRELESS NETWORK | 01-02-2014 |
20140010219 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CHANNEL SCANNING FOR MULTIROLE DEVICE - Systems and methods for channel scanning for multirole device are disclosed. One implementation relates to a method for servicing functions by a multirole device. The method comprises dividing a channel scan over a plurality of channels into a plurality of channel scan time periods, and repeatedly time division multiplexing a time period for the servicing of one of a station (STA) function and an access point (AP) function, a time period for the servicing of the other of the STA function and the AP function, and a channel scan time period for each of the plurality of channel scan time periods. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010220 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING WIRELESS DOCKEES TO FIND AND DOCK WITH A WIRELESS DOCKING HOST BEING USED BY ANOTHER DOCKEE - Various aspects of the present disclosure enable a dockee that establishes docking with a wireless docking host that manages a docking environment to gather information about the wireless docking host, including docking host information and one or more wireless peripheral devices managed by the wireless docking host. The dockee may then store the results of the functionality information. In one aspect of the disclosed approach, the dockee may advertise the functionality information of the wireless docking host to other dockees. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010221 | CONFIGURABLE HOST INTERFACE USING MULTI-RADIO DEVICE AND ARCHITECTURE FOR WLAN OFFLOAD - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. A multi-radio device controls wireless communications by identifying one or more connection points between radio(s) of the multi-radio device and an operating system executing on a host device, analyzing a policy relating to the multi-radio device, and exposing, to the operating system, a subset of the connection points based on the policy. A modem manages a connection to an applications processor (AP) by virtualizing physical communication interfaces at the modem, providing a single Internet protocol (IP) interface representing the virtualized physical communication interfaces to a high level operating system (HLOS) at the AP, detecting a physical communication interface connected to the modem, and determining whether to expose the detected physical communication interface to the HLOS as a standalone virtualized physical communication interface, or hide the detected physical communication interface as part of an existing virtualized physical communication interface. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010222 | System and Method for Subscription and Policy Provisioning - Wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) access points (APs) can advertise their support of both OMA-DM and SOAP-XML protocols by including protocol capability information in a broadcast or probe response message. The protocol capability information can include an OSU method list subfield that indicates that the Wi-Fi AP supports both OMA-DM and SOAP-XML protocols. The broadcast message may be an Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP) message, a beacon message, or some other generic advertisement services (GAS) message. Wi-Fi APs can also specify which WLAN type is preferred by a network operator by including a WLAN access type indication in a broadcast or probe response message. The WLAN access type indication may specify that a network operator prefers a passpoint, non-passpoint, vendor specific WLAN. The WLAN access type indication may be included in an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) management object (MO). | 01-09-2014 |
20140010223 | FAST INITIAL LINK SETUP DISCOVERY FRAMES - A method for use in a wireless station includes receiving a fast initial link setup discovery (FD) frame from an access point (AP) between instances of a full beacon frame and determining whether to associate with the AP based on the received FD frame. The FD frame includes FD frame contents and a FD frame control field. The FD frame control field includes a service set identifier (SSID) length field, corresponding to a length of a variable length SSID field in the FD frame contents; and any one or more of: a capability presence indicator, an access network options presence indicator, a security presence indicator, an AP configuration change count presence indicator, or an AP next target beacon transmission time presence indicator. Each of the presence indicators is used to indicate whether a corresponding field is present in the FD frame contents. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010224 | SCHEMES FOR PROVIDING PRIVATE WIRELESS NETWORK - Technologies are generally described for providing private wireless local area networks. In some examples, a method performed under control of a mobile operating server may include determining a first location of an end device, determining a first access point configured to provide a wireless local area network around the first location of the end device and instructing the first access point to provide the end device with a first private wireless local area network. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010225 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING A DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE - A distributed wireless network system includes a mobile unit capable of communicating over a Wi-Fi connection, a server that is coupled to and accessible over a global communication network, a first and a second Wi-Fi access point. The mobile unit and the first Wi-Fi access point are operated by a first user and the second Wi-Fi access point is operated by a second user. The server is configured to store user data of at least the first and the second user. The user data includes at least personal authenticity data of the user being allocated to a user login and a database of shared Wi-Fi access points. Upon transmission of identification data, the user login of the first user is transmitted to the server. It is then checked whether for this user login corresponding user data is stored at the server and whether the second Wi-Fi access point is in the list of shared Wi-Fi access points. If the checks are successful, access data from the server is transmitted to the mobile unit. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010226 | PREEMPTIVE PACKET FOR MAINTAINING CONTIGUITY IN CYCLIC PRIORITIZED MULTIPLE ACCESS (CPMA) CONTENTION-FREE SESSIONS - An access point transmits a preemptive peg packet when it has no data to transmit in order to maintain the contiguity of its transmission timing position with respect to the timing position of other contention-free sessions (CFS) transmitted by other access points in an existing, periodic sequence. The cyclic prioritized multiple access (CPMA) method establishes the transmission timing position of contention-free sessions (CFS) between overlapping first and second wireless LAN cells contending for the same medium. Each cell includes a respective plurality of member stations. If an access point has no traffic, it will transmit a short, preemptive pegging packet and reset its backoff timer. In this manner, no gaps longer than the distributed coordination function (DCF) Interframe Space (DIPS) are left idle. This prevents other stations from using DCF contention to seize the channel, until all access points have completed one contention-free session (CFS) per periodic cycle. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016627 | PRIVATE LINE AUTOMATIC RINGDOWN-LIKE CONNECTION FOR A MOBILE DEVICE - Providing a private connection for a mobile device in a wireless local area network includes a mobile device operable to associate to a home wireless local area network (WLAN), request a temporary digital extension from the WLAN, receive an assigned temporary digital extension from the WLAN, register with the WLAN using the temporary digital extension, and initiate a call from the temporary digital extension to a target extension. In addition, an in-store server is operable to register the temporary digital extension, recognize the temporary digital extension in the initiated call, establish the call to the target extension, and route the call between the temporary digital extension and the target extension. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016628 | WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE TRANSACTION PROTOCOL - A mobile device may retrieve service information about a network prior to associating with the network. Utilizing an advertisement protocol to transmit service query messages, a mobile device may receive service query responses from a network that identify the services available prior to establishing network capability (i.e., prior to the exchange of any authentication parameters between the device and the network as well prior to the establishment of a recognized session between the device and the network. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016629 | SYSTEM, POLICY NODES, AND METHODS TO PERFORM POLICY PROVISIONING OF TRAFFIC OFFLOADED AT A FIXED BROADBAND NETWORK - A system, policy nodes, and methods are described herein for establishing a policy session (e.g., IP-CAN session) for a user equipment between a first policy node (e.g., BPCF) which is associated with a fixed broadband access network (e.g., non- | 01-16-2014 |
20140016630 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device including an electric charger configured to perform a power supply operation with another device located at a shorter distance than a coverage distance of wireless communication by a first communication system, the power supply operation including providing a power supply to, or receiving a power supply from, the another device. The communication device starts preparation for wireless communication by a second communication system, which has a larger coverage distance than the coverage distance of wireless communication by the first communication system, when a currently-active power supply operation is interrupted during selection of the first communication system for wireless communication with the another device. The communication device then starts wireless communication by the second communication system, in place of the first communication system, based on the preparation for wireless communication by the second communication system. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016631 | BASE STATION DEVICE, DATA TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, AND DATA TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - A base station device receives an acquisition request for data from a first terminal and transmits, to the first terminal, data associated with the acquisition request. At this point, while the base station device is in the process of transmitting the requested data to the first terminal by using a first transmission line, the base station device receives, from a second terminal, an acquisition request for data that is the same as the requested data. In such a case, the base station device transmits, to both the first terminal and the second terminal by using the first transmission line, data that has not been transmitted to the first terminal to which the requested data is being transmitted among the requested data and transmits, to the second terminal by using a second transmission line, data that has been transmitted to the first terminal among the requested data. | 01-16-2014 |
20140023059 | MECHANISMS FOR ROAMING BETWEEN 3GPP OPERATORS AND WLAN SERVICE PROVIDERS - Embodiments describe methods, apparatuses and logic for a user equipment (UE) to connect to an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) based on credentials from a UE's home third generation partnership project (3GPP) network. In some embodiments, the UE may receive selection policy parameters from the WLAN including a network access identifier (NAI) realm. The UE may also receive selection policy parameters from the 3GPP network. The UE may compare the selection policy parameters of the WLAN with the selection policy parameters of the 3GPP network and discover roaming relationships between service providers and the relative priorities of different networks, and create a network list based on the comparison. The UE may then associate with an AP of the WLAN based on the prioritized network list. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023060 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORKING CONSUMER DEVICES - Systems and methods for enrolling nodes into an ad hoc network associated with a multi-roomed structure. Nodes within the ad hoc network comprise a communication module configured to communicate with the ad hoc network using at least one of room-limited communications and room-transparent communications. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023061 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a communication apparatus on a network where communication apparatuses perform direct communication with each other, a network management apparatus for managing the network based on message information transmitted and received on the network is determined. When the communication apparatus itself is determined as the network management apparatus, the apparatus collects information indicating device capabilities from other communication apparatuses. On the other hand, the communication apparatus receives information indicating device capabilities from another communication apparatus when the other communication apparatus is determined as the network management apparatus. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023062 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN DLS WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for receiving data in a wireless local area network. The method includes establishing, by a destination station (STA), a direct link between a requesting STA and the destination STA; establishing, by the requesting STA, a relay link between the requesting STA and the destination STA; receiving, by the destination STA, data from the requesting STA through the direct link; and receiving, by the destination STA, the data from a relay STA of the relay link. | 01-23-2014 |
20140029596 | AUTONOMOUS DISCOVERY FOR ENHANCED WIFI DEVICES - Techniques for discovering one or more nodes in a communication system are provided. A node may receive one or more discovery messages during a first occurrence of a periodic discovery interval. The node may determine a duration of a subsequent occurrence of the periodic discovery interval based on the one or more received discovery messages. The node may adjust the duration for the subsequent occurrence of the periodic discovery interval based on the determined duration. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029597 | POWER EFFICIENT PS-POLL - A IEEE 802.11 Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system of an access point (AP) and one or more stations (STAB) reduces power consumption and increases battery life of power efficient low power STAB by decreasing the amount of time that a power efficient low power STA remains in an awake state. After indicating power efficient low power operation during association with an AP supporting such operation, the power efficient low power STA may enter the doze state from the time that the power efficient low power STA sends a PS-Poll until the power efficient low power STA receives the buffered DATA frame from the AP. While implementing the power efficient PS-Poll method, the AP can send the buffered DATA frame to the STA SIFS after the AP sends an ACK to the received PS-Poll from the STA. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029598 | OUTDOOR WIRELESS MODEM AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - Disclosure herein is related to an outdoor wireless modem and a signal processing method thereof. The outdoor wireless modem is particularly disposed in the midst of and bridging a local-area network and a wide-area network established by a mobile communication network. One of the objectives of the invention is to provide a solution replacing the present last mile connection. According to one of the embodiments, main circuit of the outdoor wireless modem includes a radio-frequency module and a baseband module. The baseband module includes at least two processing circuits for respectively processing the signals over the mobile communication network and the packets over the local-area network. The processing circuits are packaged into one module according to the design. Further in one embodiment, a bandwidth integration unit is introduced to the modem. The bandwidth integration unit serves to achieve load balance and bandwidth integration. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029599 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR USING A BEAM-FORMING NETWORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH MAXIMAL-RATIO-COMBINING TECHNIQUES - Various methods and systems for (i) combining the capabilities of beam-forming networks together with the benefit of using maximal-ratio-combining techniques, and (ii) selecting receiving directions for wireless data packets in conjunction with beam-forming networks. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029600 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING TRAFFIC INDICATOR MAP IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for generating a traffic indicator map in a wireless communication system, as described below, and the method comprises the following steps: dividing into at least one group a virtual bitmap comprising displayed values of association IDs (AIDs) of stations that are coupled to an access point; saving a first portion, which includes a first display value but does not include a first AID for receiving data from the access point, in a virtual bitmap of each of the divided groups as an offset value in a bitmap control field, the first portion including a first display value but not including a first AID for receiving data from the access point; setting a second portion from the virtual bitmap of each of the divided groups as a partial virtual bitmap field, the second portion being the portion excluding the first portion; and generating the traffic indicator map including the bitmap control field and the partial virtual bitmap field for each of the divided groups. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029601 | ESTABLISHMENT OF AD-HOC NETWORKS BETWEEN MULTIPLE DEVICES - A method of configuring an ad-hoc wireless network between an authenticator and a plurality of wireless devices seeking authentication includes assigning a wireless device as the authenticator and receiving a first setup message transmitted from a first device seeking authentication to the authenticator and initiating a first handshake process between the authenticator and the first device seeking authentication. The method also includes receiving a second setup message transmitted from a second device seeking authentication to the authenticator. The second setup message is received by the authenticator prior to completion of the first handshake process. The method further includes initiating a second handshake process between the authenticator and the second device seeking authentication. The second handshake process is initiated prior to completion of the first handshake process. Moreover, the method includes completing the first handshake process and completing the second handshake process. | 01-30-2014 |
20140036892 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UNIVERSAL WIRELESS DISTRIBUTION - Systems and methods are disclosed to provide a bridge for a wireless distribution system compatible with legacy equipment, including the use of a bridge device having two WLAN modules, with the first WLAN module associating with one or more stations and the second WLAN module configured to associating with a legacy access point. Frames received by the first WLAN module are forwarded to the second WLAN module for transmission and frames received by the second WLAN module are forwarded to the first WLAN module for transmission on the basis of address information in the frames. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036893 | System and Method for Enforcing Uplink Wireless Medium Usage in Wireless Networks - The present disclosure discloses a method and network device for enforcing uplink airtime fairness in wireless local area networks. The disclosed network device receives usage limits associated with transmissions from one or more client devices. The client devices transmit packets to the network device via one or more uplink wireless mediums. The disclosed network device further collects wireless medium usage times associated with the client devices, and calculates a size for transmission windows corresponding to the client devices based on the wireless medium usage times and the usage limits. The transmission windows can be TCP advertisement windows whose size determines a rate of transmissions permitted over the wireless medium. Then, the disclosed network device sets the transmission window to the calculated size. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036894 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK-BASED POSITION LOCATING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - The location of one or more mobile nodes in a wireless local area network (WLAN) is determined. Nodes in the WLAN include respective ping drivers to generate ping event values related to transmit count stamps and receive count stamps for wireless messages exchanged between the nodes. Each wireless message is associated with a transmit offset corresponding to an expected transmit time. A sorting module groups the ping event values and produces a difference between the respective receive count stamps and the transmit count stamps for each wireless message. Based on the sorted ping event values, the sorting module generates transmit offset values relating to the transmit offsets. A space-time calibration unit generates, from the sorted differences and the transmit offset values, a clock rate solution and a location solution for at least one of the nodes in the WLAN. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036895 | Wireless Communication Signaling For Aggregate Data Units - Systems and techniques relating to wireless communications are described. A described technique includes obtaining data for a transmission to a wireless communication device. The wireless communication device can be configured to process incoming transmissions based on an aggregate data unit format that specifies signaling for aggregating multiple medium access control (MAC) data units. The technique includes, in a physical (PHY) frame, an aggregate data unit that is based on the data and the aggregate data unit format, the aggregate data unit including a single MAC data unit. The technique includes, in the PHY frame, an indication to signal that the MAC data unit in the aggregate data unit is singular and to cause the wireless communication device to accept the aggregate data unit without a corresponding block acknowledgement agreement. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036896 | WIRELESS/LAN ROUTER QUEUING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A queuing method and system for wireless/LAN routers processes and routes an incoming data packet from a wireless mobile network to a destination server. The system uses a wireless transport module to initiate storage of the data packet in a permanent storage device while simultaneously forwarding the data packet to the destination server. A database thread is used to manage the operations being performed on the data packet and for initiating the storage of the data packet in a permanent storage device based on a permanent storage queue. A main thread is used to simultaneously forward the data packet to the destination server. The wireless transport module is adapted to determine whether the data packet has been acknowledged by the destination server and aborting the storage of the data packet in the permanent storage device once acknowledgment from by destination server has been received. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036897 | METHODS CIRCUITS DEVICES SYSTEMS AND ASSOCIATED COMPUTER EXECUTABLE CODE FOR PROVIDING DATA CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE COMMUNICATIVELY COUPLED TO A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND A THIRD PARTY DATA SOURCE - Disclosed are methods, circuits, devices, systems, and associated computer executable code for providing data connectivity between a mobile communication device communicatively coupled to a mobile communication network and a third party data source. There may be provided a Dynamic Application Data Router (DADR) functionally associated with a wireless access point of a mobile communications network. The DADR may include one or more wireless access point interface circuits adapted to interface with circuits of the wireless access point and to facilitate data communication between said DADR and a mobile device communicatively coupled to the wireless Access Point. The DADR may also include an application data routing module adapted to route upstream application data generated by an application running on the mobile device to a target application engine through a DADR associated gateway. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036898 | DIRECT DATA COMMUNICATION IN INFRASTRUCTURE MODE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In an infrastructure wireless network, a direct data communication mechanism can be implemented for wireless network devices in a common basic service set (BSS) to directly exchange data frames, without transmitting the data frames via an access point. Each of the wireless network devices in the BSS can receive connection information that indicates whether data frames can be directly transmitted to each of the wireless network devices in the BSS. A source wireless network device can determine whether the data frames can be directly transmitted to a destination wireless network device based on analyzing the connection information. If the data frames can be directly transmitted, the source wireless network device can directly transmit the data frames to the destination WLAN device without having to transmit the data frames to the access point, which may improve transmission efficiency. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036899 | WIRELESS LAN COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A wireless local area network (WLAN) communication method and apparatus are provided. The WLAN communication method includes allowing a receiving station to receive a multi input multi output (MIMO) frame, allowing the receiving station to determine whether the MIMO frame is erroneous and whether the MIMO frame is destined for the receiving station, allowing the receiving station to generate a single input single output (SISO) acknowledgement (ACK) frame if the MIMO frame is not erroneous and is destined for the receiving station, and allowing the receiving station to transmit the SISO ACK frame to a sending station that has transmitted the MIMO frame. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036900 | Interacting Method for UE Fast Selecting Mobile Communication Network to Access in a Wlan Interworking Network - An interacting method for WLAN UE selecting a mobile communication network to access in WLAN is disclosed. The method includes: a WLAN UE judges whether the identity information of the WLAN AN exists in the WLAN identity information stored when mobile connection with the WLAN AN is established, if so, the network selection information corresponding to the identity of the WLAN stored will be sent to the WLAN AN, otherwise, a pre-configured mobile communication network with highest priority is regarded as network selection information to be sent to the WLAN AN; the WLAN AN identifies the mobile communication network to access according to the network selection information carried in Authentication Request, and connects the WLAN UE to the selected network to implement authentication. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036901 | MOBILE IP HOME AGENT DISCOVERY - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate Mobile IP home agent (HA) discovery in a wireless communication system. Discovery of a HA for Mobile IP can be conducted as described herein for a mobile terminal located on a network wherein movement of the terminal is managed by a network-based mobility protocol. For example, various aspects described herein can be utilized for discovery of a HA located in a 3GPP network from 3GPP and/or non-3GPP access. Further, various aspects described herein can be utilized to discover a gateway acting as mobility anchor for a network mobility protocol utilized by the network. As additionally described herein, HA discovery can be conducted in connection with DNS query formation and communication, network attach and/or re-attach procedures, Neighbor Discovery signaling, and/or other procedures. | 02-06-2014 |
20140044111 | Frame Chaining for Bridged Traffic - A system chains data frames in a communication network. A frame burst including a plurality of frames is received. A destination address and priority of the plurality of frames are compared. The frames having a matching destination address and priority are grouped. The grouped frames are sent together for transmitting. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044112 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR BEAMFORMING REPORTS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Logic of an access point may transmit a null data packet for beamforming training and transmit a beamforming report poll to the first station on a user list before receiving a transmission from the first station on the user list. Logic may wait for a timeout period to determine whether the first station on the user list will respond to the null data packet prior to transmitting the beamforming report poll. Logic may receive from the first station an indication that the first station is a slow beamforming report responder. Logic may reorder the user list to position a fast beamforming responder as the first station. And logic of the station may determine that the station is unable to complete and transmit the report so the logic may wait to transmit the beamforming report in response to a subsequent beamforming report poll frame. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044113 | SETTING METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS POINTS, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A setting method for connecting to wireless network access points, and an electronic device are applied to connect a network video surveillance device such as a network camera, a network video server or a network video recorder to wireless network access points. A first electronic device is set to operate in an access point mode. A second electronic device is connected to the first electronic device wirelessly, and setting information of a target access point is sent to the first electronic device by the second electronic device. After the first electronic device obtains the setting information, the first electronic device is switched to operate in a client mode instead of the access point mode. The first electronic device is connected to the target access point according to the setting information. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044114 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONNECTING SERVICE, ACCORDING TO USER INTENTION - A method and an apparatus for connecting a service, according to a user's intention are provided. The method includes determining at least one file to be transmitted through a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) Direct connection, selecting, by device discovery, a peer terminal to receive the at least one file, transmitting, to the peer terminal, a first frame including file attribute information about the at least one file, before the Wi-Fi Direct connection is established with the peer terminal, and receiving, from the peer terminal, a second frame, including information indicating whether the Wi-Fi Direct connection to the peer terminal is accepted or rejected. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044115 | PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus may be used for peer-to-peer communications. A first non-AP STA may transmit a request to another non-AP STA. The request may include information regarding an application. The first non-AP STA may receive a response from the other non-AP STA. The response may include information regarding the application. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044116 | BASE STATION SUBSYSTEM MULTIPLEXER WITH SUPPORT FOR LOCAL SWITCHING - In one embodiment, a wireless system comprises a host MSC/VLR of a public land mobile network (PLMN) and a plurality of base station subsystems (BSSs). Each BSS includes a respective base station controller (BSC) and one or more base transceiver stations (BTSs). The wireless system further comprises a virtual base station controller (VBSC) communicatively coupled to the plurality of BSSs and the host MSC/VLR. The VBSC appears, from the perspective of the host MSCNLR, to be a base station controller for the BTSs in the plurality of BSSs. The VBSC and at least some of the BSSs include functionality for locally switching calls in the BSSs. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044117 | SINGLE MPDU FRAME SIGNALING - Embodiments of systems and methods for providing single MPDU frame signaling are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044118 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING A SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and device for an access point to transmit a signal in a wireless communication system. A method for an access point to transmit a synchronization signal includes: generating a frame for synchronizing a timer of a station connected to an access point; and transmitting the frame for synchronization. The frame for synchronization may be transmitted before/after all Target Beacon Transmission Times. | 02-13-2014 |
20140050208 | APN IP MANAGEMENT - In one embodiment, a WLAN gateway (WGW) receives a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) request from a WLAN controller for an IP address of a user equipment (UE). In one embodiment, DHCP server within the WGW assigns a local IP (LIP) address to the UE from a pool of local IP addresses maintained by the DHCP server. The WGW communicates the UE LIP address to the WLAN controller, wherein the UE LIP address is used by the WLAN controller to identify traffic to/from the UE while the UE is communicatively coupled to the WLAN and exchange the DE traffic between WGW and WLAN controller. In one embodiment, the WGW is configured to perform network address translation between the UE LIP and an external IP address assigned by one or more networks of the mobile network operator (MNO) to allow the UE to reach the network(s) in addition to the Internet. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050209 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR JOINT ASSOCIATION AND ADDRESS PROVISIONING - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus receiving or storing an indicator relating to an access point, the indicator indicating whether the first access point supports joint association and address provisioning. The apparatus is configured to transmit a request for joint association and address provisioning toward the access point, and to receive from the access point a response to the request for joint association and address provisioning. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050210 | System and Method for Positioning - Embodiments of the invention include a method for creating probe requests. The method is used when positioning is required. A short probe request is constructed with SSID set to GPS SSID_NAME. Another method continues after a short probe response is received. It is determined if a SSID of the probe response matches the SSID of the short probe request. If it does send an ACK. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050211 | Beamforming feedback frame formats within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Beamforming feedback frame formats within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A transmitting wireless communication device (TX) transmits a sounding frame to one or more receiving wireless communication devices (RXs) using one or more antennae and one or more clusters. Any antenna/cluster combination may be employed in communications between TXs and RXs. The one or more RXs receive/process the sounding frame to determine a type of beamforming feedback frame to be provided to the TX. Any one of a variety of beamforming feedback frame types and a types of information may be contained within a respective beamforming feedback frame including various characteristics of the respective communication channel between the TX and each of the various RXs. A common beamforming feedback frame format may be supported and employed by all such wireless communication devices (e.g., TX and RXs) when performing MU-MIMO operation such as in accordance with IEEE 802.11ac/VHT. | 02-20-2014 |
20140056290 | Multi-Operator Wireless Networking - Multi-operator networking techniques are provided for allowing two or more operators to share a wireless local area network (WLAN). In particular, mobile access gateway functionality is integrated in a wireless network controller of a WLAN that is accessible to first and second operators. Operator-specific tunnels are created through the network for each of the first and second operators that link a core network of each of the first and second operators with an associated client device. Packets are then forwarded between the core networks of the first and second operators and their associated client devices via the operator-specific tunnels. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056291 | COMMUNICATION SERVER - A communication server at least includes a processing unit; a radio frequency (RF) unit connected to the processing unit; a network address conversion unit connected to the processing unit; a connection unit connected to the processing unit; and a display unit connected to the processing unit. It can be connected to the Internet network, the household phone, the mobile phone and the Internet phone for the use of communication so that a plurality of users can share the same communication server without any need of other communication equipments, thus achieving purposes of being easy to install, reduced set-up costs, enhanced communication efficiency, lowered call costs and reduce in the waste of resources. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056292 | High Bandwidth Open Wired Network - An open network suitable for a mobile platform that contains a plurality of host and peripheral devices. Within the network, a central server communicates with at least one switch. In turn, a plurality of network devices communicate with the switch. In turn, a plurality of host devices connect to network devices. Thus, each of the plurality of peripheral devices communicates with one of the host devices. Moreover, the mobile platform may be an aircraft including a control panel to control the network. Additionally, a CoreNet and the in flight entertainment and cabin services subsystem may be in communication with the network. Additionally, the network may include a satellite transceiver/data router. In one embodiment, the peripherals use Bluetooth protocol devices to communicate with host devices on a virtual local area network within the network. The virtual network controls the security and quality of service of the network that interconnects the host, and other, devices. | 02-27-2014 |
20140056293 | PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION IN AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORK - For a peer-to-peer call in an ad hoc wireless network, a wireless device performs discovery of a target wireless device, performs authentication of the target wireless device and generates a session key (e.g., using a pre-shared key or a certificate provisioned on the wireless device), forms an ad hoc wireless network with the target wireless device, and communicates peer-to-peer with the target wireless device via the ad hoc wireless network. The wireless device may perform discovery with a list of identifiers for wireless devices designated to communicate with this wireless device. The wireless device may derive a service set identifier (SSID) used to identify the ad hoc wireless network based on its user-specific identifier (e.g., its phone number) and/or a user-specific identifier for the target wireless device. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 02-27-2014 |
20140064258 | Information Handling System Proximity-Based Wireless Interface Connectivity - An information handling system communicates through plural wireless interfaces with plural external wireless devices by automatically selecting associated external wireless devices based upon the proximity of the information handling system to the devices. Positioning of wireless devices is stored in memory to allow a wireless transceiver of the information handling system to power down until within range of a wireless device of interest. For example, an information handling system interfaced with a WLAN through a wireless access point retrieves a wireless device map with wireless devices of one or more work zones located in the WLAN area, each work zone having a set of one or more wireless peripherals in connectivity stations. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064259 | METHOD OF MANAGING CONTEXT TABLE FOR COMPRESSION OF IPV6 HEADER BASED ON CONTEXT IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A method of managing a context table for the compression of an IPv6 header based on a context in a wireless mesh network includes: determining, by a boundary router for coupling an external network and a Low-power and Lossy Network (LLN), a score by taking information on the traffic of a packet transmitted by an external host into consideration; assigning, by the boundary router, a Context ID (CID) to the prefix of the packet based on the determined score and registering the CID with a context table: and sending, by the boundary router, the packet of context registered with the context table to all nodes of the LLN. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064260 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND ARTICLE FOR WIRELESS DEVICES TO DISCOVER AND CONNECT TO OTHER DEVICES - Methods and systems are disclosed for a first wireless device to select a wireless network connection to a second wireless device. The wireless network may be a wireless local area network (WLAN), such as a Wi-Fi network. To make its selection, the first wireless device detects a beacon signal transmitted from the second wireless device. The beacon signal including a media access control (MAC) address. The first device then applies a set of programmable rules to at least a portion of the MAC address, and selects the second wireless device based on the application of the rules. The rules may also/alternatively be applied to parameters, for example, sensory inputs, such as time and date, temperature, light intensity or user actions (e.g., screen swipes, button pushes), that are immediate or recorded in a database, whereby certain patterns are matched in order to make the selection. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064261 | METHODS FOR MAC FRAME EXTENSIBILITY AND FRAME SPECIFIC MAC HEADER DESIGN FOR WLAN SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus are provided for processing a Class-3 MAC Data frame. The Class-3 MAC Data frame may include a Type field, a Subtype field, and a Class-3 MAC Data frame-specific MAC subheader that includes a basic service set identifier (BSSID) field, an association identifier (AID) field, and a direction indicator. A station (STA) may determine the intended recipient of the Class-3 MAC Data frame based on the BSSID field, the AID field, and the direction indicator. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064262 | Apparatus and Method for Processing a Physical Layer Convergence Protocol Header - Apparatus and method for processing a physical layer protocol convergence (PLCP) header. In one embodiment, a wireless device includes a PLCP header processor. The PLCP header processor is configured to: process a physical layer header, process a check value based on the physical layer header, and process an error correction code based on the physical layer header and the check value. A concatenation of the physical layer header, check value, and error correction code the PLCP header processor is configured to process consists of a number of information bits that is an integer multiple of a number of information bits per symbol used to encode the PLCP header. | 03-06-2014 |
20140071967 | NEXT GENERATION NETWORK SERVICES FOR 3G/4G MOBILE DATA OFFLOAD IN A NETWORK OF SHARED PROTECTED/LOCKED WI-FI ACCESS POINTS - In some implementations, a Wi-Fi access point that is secured using WEP, WPA or WPA2 or other protection method(s) is further mapped, located and seamlessly accessed through a key that is preshared (PSK) by the Wi-Fi access point through a cloud based application over the Internet, thus a mobile device can access the Internet via the Wi-Fi access point using the PSK without the operator of the mobile device entering the PSK. The PSK is transmitted in encrypted form to the mobile device via a 3G/4G network. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071968 | DATA STREAM DIVISION TO INCREASE DATA TRANSMISSION RATES - A method and system for matching bandwidth is provided. The method includes receiving by a first interface device, data. The data is divided into a plurality of data packets and stored within an internal buffer. A first data packet is transmitted to a first communication device communicatively coupled to the first interface device. The first data packet is transmitted from the first communication device to a second interface device via a first communication network. A second data packet is transmitted to a second communication device communicatively coupled to the first interface device. The second data packet is transmitted from the second communication device to the second interface device via a second communication network associated with the second communication device. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071969 | Method and Apparatus for Establishing and Using PDN Connections - A method is described of establishing and/or using a plurality of packet data network connections between a user equipment and a 3GPP core network via a gateway node in a non-3GPP access network, comprising using a different device identifier for each packet data network connection of the plurality, or at least for each packet data network connection of the plurality that is associated with the same IP address, to distinguish between the packet data network connections of the plurality or to allow such a distinction to be made, wherein the device identifier used to distinguish between the packet data network connections of the plurality is a device identifier associated with the user equipment, or a device identifier associated with the gateway node in the non-3GPP access network, or a combination of these. The device identifier may be a MAC address. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071970 | SHARING PROTECTED/LOCKED WI-FI ACCESS POINTS - In some implementations, a Wi-Fi access point that is secured using WEP, WPA or WPA2 or other protection method(s) is further mapped, located and seamlessly accessed through a key that is preshared (PSK) by the Wi-Fi access point through a cloud based application over the Internet, thus a mobile device can access the Internet via the Wi-Fi access point using the PSK without the operator of the mobile device entering the PSK. The PSK is transmitted in encrypted form to the mobile device via a 3G/4G network. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071971 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD - A wireless base station includes a processor configured to detect whether a device that is a final destination of packets is a wireless device or a wired device, aggregate payloads in unit of byte, which are included in the packets comply with a TCP, so as to become a maximum length of data unit which is allowed for the data link layer in an wireless LAN, when a condition is satisfied in which the device is detected to be the wireless device, form a payload complying with a protocol of the data link layer in a wireless network based on the aggregated payloads when the condition is satisfied, and configure a packet that includes the formed payload complying with the protocol when the condition is satisfied and configure packets that include the payloads complying with the TCP when the condition is not satisfied. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071972 | Telecommunications System and Method - A telecommunications system communicates data packets to and from a mobile terminal in accordance with a mobile internet protocol. The system includes a packet radio network having a first radio access interface and a gateway support node and includes a wireless access network having a second radio access interface and a home agent. The mobile terminal is arranged to connect to one of the packet radio network or the wireless access network and, when connected, to detect which of the packet radio network and the wireless access network the mobile terminal has connected. Upon detection that the mobile terminal is attached to the packet radio network, the mobile terminal and the home agent are arranged so that data packets are transmitted to and from the mobile terminal via the gateway support node in preference to the home agent. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071973 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FIRST DATA STREAMS VIA RESPECTIVE TRANSMITTERS TO MULTIPLE CLIENTS STATIONS DURING A SAME PERIOD AND SUCCESSIVELY TRANSMITTING SECOND DATA STREAMS - An access point including a first transmitter and a second transmitter. The first transmitter is configured to (i) during a first window, transmit a first data stream to a first client station, and (ii) during a second window, transmit a second data stream to a second client station. The second transmitter is configured to: during the first window and while the first transmitter transmits the first data stream to the first client station, transmit a third data stream to a third client station; during a first portion of the second window and while the first transmitter is transmitting the second data stream to the second client station, refrain from transmitting a fourth data stream to a fourth client station; and subsequent to the first transmitter completing the transmission of the second data stream and during a second portion of the second window, transmit the fourth data stream to the fourth client station. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071974 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - An apparatus includes an input unit, an information generating unit, and a communication unit. The input unit is configured to receive an input gesture from a user. The information generating unit is configured to generate first information based on the input gesture. The communication unit configured to transmit the first information to another apparatus, receive second information from the another apparatus, and operate the apparatus as an access point of a network or to connect the apparatus to an access point created by the other apparatus based on the first information and the second information. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071975 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL - A network communication system has: a terminal performing communication through a wireless LAN; and a controller. The terminal retains flow SSID information indicating a correspondence relationship between each flow and SSID. When initiating communication of a new flow, the terminal transmits an allocation request to the controller. The allocation request requests for determination of an SSID to be used. In response to the allocation request, the controller determines an allocated SSID to be used regarding the new flow and notifies the terminal of allocation information indicating a correspondence relationship between the new flow and the allocated SSID. In accordance with the allocation information, the terminal registers the correspondence relationship between the new flow and the allocated SSID on the flow SSID information. The terminal refers to the flow SSID information and uses the allocated SSID corresponding to the new flow to connect to an access point of the wireless LAN. | 03-13-2014 |
20140079042 | Radio Frequency Interference Shield - Examples provide various systems and method associated with intercepting radio frequency interference. In various examples, a wireless integrated circuit module comprises radio frequency connectors. An RF interference shield covers the RF connectors to intercept and ground interference. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079043 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK SCAN PARAMETERS FOR A NETWORK CONNECTION - A system and method for controlling aspects of network communications from a device to a network are provided. In particular, a method of initiating scans for a network by a communication device for a communication network is provided. The method comprises: monitoring for a first condition relating to a network scan for the communication network; and when the first condition relates to a receipt of at least one request to initiate the network scan and when at least the first condition is satisfied, identifying a first parameter for the network scan and configuring and initiating the network scan at the communication device for the communication network implementing the first parameter. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079044 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PUSHING INFORMATION BASED ON WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for pushing information based on a wireless local area network. The method includes: generating a push information indication message, where the push information indication message includes index information of one or more pieces of push information, where the index information includes at least one of a sequence number, an information digest, a category number, and a category name of the push information; broadcasting the push information indication message; and sending the push information. With the present invention, information may be pushed on wireless local area networks that are widely used at present, such as a WiFi network. Especially, in places such as scenic spots, shopping malls, and exhibition halls, WiFi networks can be used to introduce related information to users, instead of making explanations or presentations manually. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079045 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING INTER-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A device and method for performing inter-device communication are disclosed. An inter-device communication method of a first device includes searching for a second device supporting inter-device communication, receiving network information from the searched second device, and determining that one of the first and second devices is a group owner based on the received network information of the second device and network information of the first device. The network information includes at least one selected from among type information indicating a server device or a client device, network support information, network necessity information, and network setting information. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079046 | Backoff Method and Device Used For Wireless Communication System - An apparatus, method, and system to provide a backoff method and device used for a lower priority access category AC. The method includes: when the lower priority AC and another AC in a same station STA obtain a transmission opportunity TXOP at the same time and an internal collision occurs, detecting a TXOP sharing state of the lower priority AC; and executing backoff of the lower priority AC according to the detected TXOP sharing state. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079047 | MOBILE NODE AND COMMUNCIATION CONTROL METHOD - A technology is disclosed for a mobile device with multiple interfaces to make use of its multiple interfaces capability with Mobile IP. According to this technology, MN (Mobile Node) | 03-20-2014 |
20140079048 | PREAMBLE EXTENSIONS - Systems and/or methods for communication generate a plurality of spatial streams. Each of the spatial streams comprises a plurality of symbols. At least a portion of a training sequence is distributed across a first symbol in a first one of the spatial streams and a second symbol in a second one of the spatial streams. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079049 | SENDING USER PLANE TRAFFIC IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for sending user plane traffic via a node located between a base station and a Serving Gateway in a mobile telecommunications network. The base station receives a message containing tunneling protocol information identifying the Serving Gateway. It sends a second message towards the node, the second message including tunneling protocol information identifying the base station and the Serving Gateway. The base station receives a third message from the node, the third message including tunneling protocol information for the base station to use towards the node, and tunneling protocol information for the Serving Gateway to use towards the node. A fourth message is sent, which includes tunneling protocol information for the Serving Gateway to use towards the node. User plane traffic can then be sent between the base station and the Serving Gateway via the node. | 03-20-2014 |
20140086225 | SCHEMES FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Technologies are generally described for providing wireless communications. In some examples, a method performed under control of a mobile operating server may include determining whether there is an authenticated wireless access point around a mobile device, if there is no authenticated wireless access point, determining whether there is a non-authenticated wireless access point whose capacity is over a predetermined value around the mobile device and if there is a non-authenticated wireless access point whose capacity is over the predetermined value, instructing the mobile device to connect to a wireless local area network provided by the non-authenticated wireless access point. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086226 | TRANSPORT OF CONTROL PROTOCOL FOR TRUSTED WLAN (TWAN) OFFLOAD - Certain aspects of the present disclosure generally relate to wireless communications and, more particularly, to methods and apparatus for utilizing a control protocol to establish multiple packet data network (PDN) connections through a trusted wide area network (TWAN). Techniques are provided for expanding mobile network capacity by offloading traffic from wireless wide area networks (WWAN) to other types of networks, including wireless local area networks (WLAN). | 03-27-2014 |
20140086227 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REVERSE DIRECTION PROTOCOL TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention relate to communication technologies, in particular, to a method and an apparatus for protocol transmission in a wireless local area network. A method for transmitting multi-userdata in a reverse direction protocol according to an embodiment of the present invention includes: within a transmission opportunity (TXOP) of a first station, if the TXOP is not over after the first station finishes sending data to an access point (AP), obtaining, by the AP, the TXOP, where the obtaining, by the AP, the TXOP is implemented through granting a remaining part of the TXOP to the access point AP by the first station as a reverse direction protocol initiator; and within the TXOP, sending, by the AP, second data to at least two stations, where the at least two stations include the first station. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086228 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME USING CHANNEL BONDING IN WIRELESS LAN - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting a data frame using channel bonding in a wireless local area network in which high throughput (HT) stations and legacy systems coexist. The method includes adding a legacy format physical layer header including information, which indicates that a medium is being used while a frame exchange sequence is performed with respect to the HT format data frame, to the HT format data frame, transmitting the HT format data frame with the physical layer header by using channel bonding, and broadcasting the legacy format CF-End frame through a plurality of channels used in the channel bonding. Accordingly, after a frame exchange sequence is completed, the legacy stations which use channels used in the channel bonding can participate in a fair contention for medium access. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086229 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A demodulation section demodulates a received signal. A decoding section decodes an output from the demodulation section. A buffer temporarily stores a portion of the received signal. A header analyzing section gives the buffer timing at which demodulation and decoding of a payload of the received signal are initiated, on the basis of a result of combination of a plurality of header sequences included in a header of the received signal and results of processing of the demodulation section and the decoding section. An improved SNR is achieved by means of combination of the plurality of header sequences, so that an iterative decoding count used for decoding the header become smaller. | 03-27-2014 |
20140092884 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR A COMMON CONTROL PROTOCOL FOR WIRED AND WIRELESS NODES - In some embodiments, an apparatus comprises of a control module implemented in at least one of a memory or a processing device that is configured to receive, via a network and from a wireless access point or an access network node, a control packet defined based on a control protocol. The control packet is associated with at least one control function of the wireless access point or access network node. The control module is configured to determine a status of an access network node based on the control packet from the access network node. The control module is configured to send via the network, a response to the access network node based on the status of the access network node. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092885 | DISCOVERY AND OPERATION OF HYBRID WIRELESS WIDE AREA AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Technology for setting up a Device to Device (D2D) communication channel between mobile wireless devices is disclosed. The technology includes identifying a first user equipment and a second user equipment located within a proximity; receiving network assisted proximity discovery information at one of the first UE and the second UE from an evolved packet core (EPC) operating on a third generation partnership practice (3GPP) wireless wide area network (WWAN); and setting up a device to device (D2D) communication between the first UE and the second UE based on the network assisted proximity discovery information received from the EPC. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092886 | ANDSF POLICIES FOR WLAN AND PLMN SELECTION - In embodiments, a user equipment (UE) may be able to identify one or more access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) policies which the UE can use to select a wireless local area network (WLAN) and/or a WLAN access point (AP) to which the UE should connect. The UE may then be able to use the identified ANDSF policy or policies to select the WLAN and/or WLAN AP prior to selection, by the UE, of a WLAN public land mobile network (PLMN) to which the UE should connect. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092887 | TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA BASED ON MULTIPATH - Methods, apparatuses and systems for transmitting and receiving data based on multipath for transmitting data based on multipath include: establishing WiMAX connection-based multiple paths between a first device and a second device; transmitting data frames in a data queue in the multiple paths; obtaining the quality condition of the multiple paths; and based on the quality condition, adjusting the transmission of the data frames in the data queue in the multiple paths. According to one aspect, there is provided a method for receiving data based on multipath, which includes: establishing WiMAX connection-based multiple paths between a first device and a second device; receiving a plurality of data frames in the multiple paths; processing the received plurality of data frames based on quality condition of the multiple paths. There are further provided corresponding apparatuses and systems. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092888 | MOBILE WLAN GATEWAY - A technique for operating a mobile station as wireless local-area network [“WLAN”] gateway. The mobile station is provided with a gateway application to control the following operations: activating ( | 04-03-2014 |
20140092889 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Location-Aware Wi-Fi Access - Methods and systems for providing location-aware WiFi access for a portable device include receiving, at a mobile communication device, locations and ranges for a set of one or more WiFi access points from a location provider system. The mobile communication device uses the locations and ranges to determine whether to power on a WiFi transceiver, and to determine for which WiFi access points to scan if the WiFi transceiver is powered on. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092890 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SIMULTANEOUS DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICE OVER HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Disclosed are a device and a method for providing simultaneous data transmission service based on heterogeneous networks. A transmission device of system for simultaneous data transmission service system is configured to (i) divide data into two or more partial data, (ii) insert virtual network access information into each of the divided two or more partial data, and (iii) then transmit the divided two or more partial data to a reception device over two or more networks in a heterogeneous network. When a problem occurrence is identified in a first network of the two or more networks, the transmission device is configured to switch the first network to another second network of the two or more networks to transmit the divided two or more partial data intended to be transmitted over the first network. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092891 | SYSTEM AND METHOD PROVIDING INTEROPERABILITY BETWEEN CELLULAR AND OTHER WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method and corresponding apparatus for providing a cellular subscriber with access to a WLAN are provided. They involve identifying a multimode mobile terminal, which corresponds to the subscriber and the WLAN from an access request. Based on the identification, the WLAN is authorized to provide the mobile terminal with access. The mobile terminal is then provided with access to the WLAN as a cellular subscriber and enables interoperability between the two networks. For example, the subscriber does not have to supply a credit card to pay for WLAN access directly. Instead, the subscriber pays a cellular network provider, and, in turn, the cellular network provider pays a WLAN provider for the access. | 04-03-2014 |
20140098802 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF FAST WIRELESS OUTPUT DEVICE ACTIVATION IN A MESH NETWORK SYSTEM - Systems and methods of fast wireless output device activation in a mesh network system are provided. Methods can include a parent device receiving data from a child device, the parent device determining if the data received from the child device requires an output, and if so, the parent device activating an output device associated with the parent device. In some methods, the parent device need not wait for instructions from a control panel or gateway before activating the output device. Accordingly, the latency time to activate the output device can be reduced. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098803 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A portable apparatus for use in a wireless mesh network includes a radio configured to transmit and receive signals to one or more network nodes coupled to a machine. The portable apparatus also includes a communication interface coupled to the radio, the communication interface being configured to be coupled to a computing device comprising a processor coupled to an input interface. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098804 | System and Method for Association of Transitory WiFi Users - Embodiments are provided for identifying transitory WiFi users and providing a differential treatment of such users in terms of delaying associating steps between user stations (STAs) and an access point (AP). A transitory user refers to a user or user device that connects to a WiFi AP but does not run applications that require association or assigning IP addresses, such as short-term or temporary connected WiFi users that are on the move. In an embodiment, a STA connects to an AP. Upon the STA indicating its transitory behavior to the AP or the AP detecting criteria of transitory behavior of the STA, the STA obtains a delay time value from the AP. The STA then delays sending an association request to the AP, or alternatively, the AP delays handling the association request from the STA in accordance with the delay time value. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098805 | DIRECT MODE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION ATTACHING METHOD THEREOF - A direct-mode communication system comprises a first client direct-mode communication apparatus and a backhaul network. The first client direct-mode communication apparatus transmits a register signal to the backhaul network to register with the backhaul network. After the first client direct-mode communication apparatus is registered, the backhaul network determines a location relationship between the first client direct-mode communication apparatus and a second client direct-mode communication apparatus. The backhaul network transmits a piece of wi-fi connection information to the first client direct-mode communication apparatus according to the location relationship. The first client direct-mode communication apparatus creates a wi-fi direct-mode communication connection with the second client direct-mode communication apparatus according to the piece of wi-fi connection information. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098806 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN A VEHICLE - A system, for a vehicle, including a first wireless client station implemented in the vehicle, a wireless access point implemented in the vehicle, and a controller implemented in the vehicle. The first wireless client station is configured to transmit a first packet. The first packet includes a first command to control an operation of the vehicle. The wireless access point is configured to receive the first packet and transmit the first packet. The controller is configured to receive the first packet from the wireless access point and to control the operation of the vehicle in accordance with the first command included within the first packet. | 04-10-2014 |
20140105195 | DETECTING NEIGHBORING ACCESS POINTS IN A NETWORK - An electronic device, e.g., a mobile device, having access to a wireless network roams from one access point (AP) to another using access point detection based on location and learning. A learning scheme may modify a list of nearby access points determined based on location to identify neighboring access points where roaming is possible. The identified neighboring access points where roaming is possible may be ordered based on roaming history, such as the frequency of the roams to a particular AP. The roaming history may be maintained on a per client basis or aggregated across all clients using an AP. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105196 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING ASSOCIATION IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for maintaining association in a WLAN system are disclosed. The method for performing association by a station (STA) in a wireless LAN (WLAN) system includes: transmitting an association request frame from the station (STA) to an access point (AP); and receiving an association response frame from the access point (AP) in response to the association request frame. If the association request is accepted by the access point (AP), the association response frame includes information regarding an association comeback time. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105197 | LOCATION AWARE BACKGROUND ACCESS POINT SCANNING FOR WLAN - Respective distances between a communication device and a plurality of wireless local area network (WLAN) access points are determined. One of the plurality of WLAN access points with which the communication device is to associate is selected based on the determined distances. A background scanning process is initiated based on determined distances. The background scanning process includes at least selecting one of the plurality of WLAN access points with which the communication device is to associate based on the determined respective distances by evaluating the plurality of WLAN access points in an order based on the determined respective distances. If it is determined that a WLAN access point is acceptable, evaluation of the plurality of WLAN access points is stopped before all of the plurality of WLAN access points have been evaluated. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105198 | Simultaneously Maintaining Bluetooth and 802.11 Connections to Increase Data Throughput - A device for wirelessly communicating between one or more mobile communication devices over a wireless network. A primary mobile communication device is configured to establish one or more connections to one or more secondary mobile communication devices. The primary mobile communication device is further configured to establish a first connection and a second connection to at least one of the secondary mobile communication devices. The first connection is a Bluetooth (BT) connection and the second connection is a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) connection. The primary mobile device is also configured to establish a third connection to another secondary mobile communication device wherein the third connection is a WiFi connection. Additionally, the primary mobile communication device is configured to simultaneously maintain the BT connection and the WiFi connections during the bi-directional transmission of data between the primary mobile communication device and the secondary mobile communication devices. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105199 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC DIALING ACCESS POINTS - A method and an apparatus for automatic dialing access point, which relate to the field of communications technologies, may implement automatic dialing, and improve correctness of acquired APN information. In the solution provided in embodiments of the present invention, APN information corresponding to information in a SIM card is detected, and automatic dialing is performed according to the detected APN information corresponding to the information in the SIM card; APN information corresponding to preset board software is detected, and automatic dialing is performed according to the detected APN information corresponding to the preset board software; and automatic dialing is performed according to preset APN information. The solution provided in the embodiments of the present invention is applicable when automatic dialing access point is performed. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105200 | METHOD OF PERFORMING LINK ADAPTATION PROCEDURE - A method and apparatus for communicating in a wireless local area network are discussed. According to an embodiment, the method includes a method of communicating in a wireless local area network, the method comprising: receiving, by a mobile station, a first physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) transmitted by an access point (AP) via multi-user multiple input/multiple output (MU MIMO) transmission to a plurality of mobile stations, the first PPDU including a first feedback sequence identifier that includes a specific value identifying the plurality of stations, determining, by the mobile station, that the mobile station belongs to one of the plurality of stations indicated by the first feedback sequence identifier; if it is determined that the mobile station belongs to one of the plurality of stations, estimating a MIMO channel based on the first PPDU; and transmitting, by the mobile station, a second PPDU to the AP. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105201 | METHOD FOR GRANTING A TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM THAT USES A COMBINED CHANNEL CONSTITUTED BY A PLURALITY OF SUBCHANNELS, AND STATION SUPPORTING THE METHOD - According to one embodiment, a method for granting a transmission opportunity in a wireless local area network includes: transmitting a transmission opportunity (TXOP) granting frame to grant a TXOP to a plurality of target stations; and receiving a frame from each of the plurality of target stations that has acquired the TXOP upon receiving the TXOP granting frame. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105202 | Encoding system and method for a transmitter in wireless communications - Method and system encodes a signal according to a code rate that includes a ratio of uncoded bits to coded bits. An outer encoder encodes the signal into code words. An interleaver converts the code words into a byte sequence for wireless transmission. An inner encoder executes a convolutional code to generate an encoded signal. The encoded signal is transmitted over a plurality of subcarriers associated with a wide bandwidth channel having a spectral efficiency associated with the code rate. The outer encoder includes a Reed-Solomon encoder having a rate that increases the code rate of uncoded bits to coded bits. | 04-17-2014 |
20140112319 | Methods, Systems, and Computer Program Products for Constraining a Data Exchange Requested in a Communication - Methods and systems are described for constraining a data exchange requested in a communication. Exchanging, via a network according to a first communication protocol from a second communications agent to a first communications agent, a constraint notification identifying the construction constraint. In response to exchanging the constraint notification, exchanging, via the network from the first communications agent to the second communications agent, a data object request constrained, based on the construction constraint, to identify a data object in a second data store of the second execution environment including the second communications agent. Exchanging, via the network from the second communications agent to the first communications agent, a data object response, constrained based on the construction constraint, that identifies the data object. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112320 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN DEVICES OF DIFFERENT WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORKS - A portable communication device operating of a first WWAN can receive an identifier from a WLAN access point indicating that one or more devices operating on a second WWAN are in the vicinity of the WLAN access point. In response, the portable communication device invokes an interference mitigation process while the identifier indicates that devices operating on the second WWAN are present. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112321 | ATTENDANT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - An attendant communications system may include one or more fixed location call stations and a mobile call station. The attendant communications system may further include one or more receive stations and a network configured to connect the fixed location call stations, mobile call station, and receive stations. The mobile call station may receive a user input and connect to a fixed location call station. A communications feature may then be provided to a receive station and the fixed location call station connected to the mobile call station. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112322 | INCREASING ACCESS POINT THROUGHPUT BY EXCEEDING A-MPDU BUFFER SIZE LIMITATION IN A 802.11 COMPLIANT STATION - An 802.11-compliant device for high throughput is disclosed. A plurality of TCP packets received in a buffer for transmission are stored. The plurality of TCP packets can be aggregated as A-MSDU sub-frames to form a A-MSDU frame in accordance with an IEEE 802.11 standard. Additionally, a plurality of A-MSDU frames can be aggregated as A-MPDU sub-frames to form a A-MPDU frame. The A-MPDU frame is compliant with a number of allowable sub-frames and a maximum size in accordance with an 802.11 standard. The A-MPDU frame is sent for transmission as an IEEE 802.11 packet. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112323 | METHODS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATIONS, AND SYSTEM FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DISCOVERY AND ADVERTISEMENT - Embodiments of a user station (STA) and methods for device-to-device discovery and advertisement through broadcast beacon signals are generally described herein. In some embodiments, group information, including a list of STAs in an advertising group, is transmitted in a beacon. A STA may transmit a request to join the advertising group. The request may be transmitted to an upchain STA, the upchain STA being determined based on inspection of the list of STAs of the advertising group. After receiving a response to the request, the STA may periodically broadcast the beacon and the STA may transmit acknowledgements to the upchain STA upon receiving beacons from the upchain STA. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112324 | WI-FI P2P COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) device and Wi-Fi peer-to-peer (P2P) method of communication which minimizes degradation of performance of a Wi-Fi Station mode operation is provided. A terminal device includes a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) module which is connected to an access point (AP) and operates in a Wi-Fi station mode. A controller controls the Wi-Fi module to interrupt the connection to the AP when a Wi-Fi peer-to-peer (P2P) function is executed, and iterates an operation of resuming the connection to the AP after a search operation is performed through each channel while a plurality of channels are sequentially selected. When an external device to perform P2P communication is found in the search operation, the controller controls the Wi-Fi module to perform a listen operation of receiving a signal transmitted from the external device and transmitting a response. Thus, the terminal device can search for a desired external device with which a Wi-Fi P2P connection is established while minimizing the performance degradation of the Wi-Fi station mode. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112325 | System and Method for Efficient Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP) Discovery of Multiple Access Points (APs) - An extension to the Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP) protocol allows stations (STAs) to discover multiple APs via a single ANQP request/response exchange. A STA can send a single ANQP request message to request information for multiple APs, e.g., two or more neighboring APs. The receiving AP may retrieve discovery information for one or more neighboring APs, and send an AP response message including the retrieved discovery information to the requesting STA. The ANQP request message identify the multiple APs for which discovery information is sought, and may specify which information is being requested for that corresponding AP. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112326 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A method for controlling a communication apparatus includes connecting to a first network formed by an access point, establishing communication with an information processing apparatus on the first network by using a first application, determining whether the information processing apparatus is operating as the access point forming the first network, detecting a transition of the first application to a background, and performing control to disconnect from the first network after it is determined that the information processing apparatus is operating as the access point and after the transition of the first application to the background is detected. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112327 | System and Method for Efficient Communications System Scanning - A method for wireless communications includes generating a composed query for obtaining information about a subset of neighboring stations of a responding station which satisfy the composed query, the composed query including a logical combination of attributes and values, and transmitting the composed query to the responding station. The method also includes receiving the information. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112328 | Method for Automatically Accessing Wi-Fi Network and Terminal - The present disclosure provides a method for automatically accessing a Wi-Fi network. The method for accessing a Wi-Fi network includes: obtaining, by a terminal, a current mobile network location identifier of the terminal; determining, by the terminal, whether the current mobile network location identifier of the terminal is stored in a Wi-Fi access location list, where the Wi-Fi access location list is used to store a related identifier corresponding to a region that provides Wi-Fi wireless signal access; and when the terminal determines that the current mobile network location identifier of the terminal is stored in the Wi-Fi access location list, putting a Wi-Fi access module in an enabled state, and starting a Wi-Fi network searching and connection process. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112329 | Method and System for Facilitating Wireless Communication Via Alternate Communication Pathway - A mobile device system and related method are disclosed by which the device is able to communicate wirelessly not only via a Wide Area Network (WAN) link but also via an alternate link such as a Wi-Fi link. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving a command from a remote server, via the WAN link, to establish a Wi-Fi link when possible. The method further includes, upon establishing the Wi-Fi link, sending a message for receipt by the server indicating that the Wi-Fi link has been established, and receiving software update information from the server, the information being communicated to the mobile device via the Wi-Fi link. Further, the method includes one or both of (1) sending an acknowledgement for receipt by the server indicating that the information has been received and (2) receiving an instruction from the server that communications via the Wi-Fi link be ended. | 04-24-2014 |
20140119353 | MULTIPLE ACCESS POINT NAME AND IP SERVICE CONNECTIVITY - A mobile device may communicate through multiple access point names (APNs) through wireless local area network (WLAN) protocols. The APNs are data routes that may be accessible to a device through other non-WLAN networks (e.g. cellular), but can be accessed with a WLAN device through WLAN protocols. A sub network access protocol (SNAP) header may be modified and used for routing traffic. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119354 | Home Virtual Local Area Network Identification for Roaming Mobile Clients - The present disclosure discloses a method and network device for home VLAN identification for roaming mobile clients. Specifically, the disclosed method and system detects that the mobile client has roamed away from a first network to a second network, maintains a mapping between a virtual local area network (VLAN) corresponding to the mobile client and a tunnel corresponding to a foreign agent in the second network, and forwards packets to or from the mobile client on the VLAN based on the mapping between the VLAN and the tunnel via which the packets are received. Therefore, the disclosed method and system allows for identification of home VLANs for roaming mobile clients without merging VLAN policy configurations at the home agent and the foreign agent. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119355 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A TWO-WAY IP COMMUNICATION CHANNEL IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for establishing a communication channel between a local server and a remote server includes: i) transmitting, from the local server to a terminal, the IP address of the remote server and a communication port of the local server; ii) transmitting the IP address of the terminal from the terminal to the local server; iii) transmitting, from the local server to the terminal, a request to connect to the remote server, including the IP addresses of the remote server and the terminal, an identifier of the local server; and the communication port; iv) transmitting, from the local server to the remote server, the IP address of the terminal, an identifier of the local server, and the communication port; and v) combining, at the remote server, the identifier of the local server and the IP address of the terminal to ascertain an IP address of the local server. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119356 | NFC SERVER AND NFC SERVICE METHOD OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES USING WIFI DIRECT - In a near-field communication (NFC) service method of communication devices using WIFI Direct, each of the communication devices connects to an NFC server through a wireless network. Information of the communication devices is registered to the NFC server, and a service authorization of each of the communication devices is set according to an NFC service rule. A member register list is generated according to the service authorizations of the communication devices. When the communication device has been registered in the member register list, the communication devices are grouped into the communication group according to the service authorizations of the communication devices, so as to accomplish device authorization of the communication devices in the NFC server. A WIFI Direct connection is then established between any two of the communication devices in the communication group to perform a WIFI service for each of the communication devices. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119357 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION OF WIRELESS DEVICES IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - Methods, devices, and computer program products for synchronization of wireless devices in a peer-to-peer network are described herein. In one aspect, a method for synchronizing a wireless communication apparatus is provided. The method includes receiving, at the wireless communication apparatus, one or more messages including one or more received time values. The method further includes updating a time value of a clock signal of the wireless communication apparatus to a value derived from the received time values in response to determining that a magnitude of a difference between the time value and the derived time value is greater than a threshold. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119358 | Service Packet Forwarding and Processing Method and System, and Access Point AP - Embodiments of the present invention provide a service packet forwarding and processing method and system, and an access point AP. Change information of a packet forwarding path of a mobile terminal STA is obtained. A path update packet is sent to a forwarding device according to the change information of the packet forwarding path of the STA, so that the forwarding device performs update processing on the forwarding path of the STA according to the path update packet. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119359 | Interference Control - Interference Control Methods and apparatuses for controlling interference are disclosed. Cooperation between at least two access nodes may be initiated in response to an indication of interference affecting wireless communications by access nodes. At least one local access node can be determined for discontinued wireless communications, where after at least a part of wireless communications of the at least one local access node is discontinued. | 05-01-2014 |
20140126559 | IN-PLACE A-MSDU AGGREGATION FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A sub-frame is generated for each MSDU to be aggregated in an A-MSDU and the sub-frame is stored in place in memory. For each sub-frame, an MSDU descriptor identifying the memory location of the sub-frame is stored in a queue. When a transmit opportunity for an MPDU arises, a DMA engine sequentially transfers the components of sub-frames stored in memory to a PHY layer using a list or other sequence of DMA descriptors obtained from at least a subset of the MSDU descriptors. Thus, these MSDU descriptors allow the aggregation of A-MSDUs to be initiated while the MSDUs are in place in the same memory in which they were initially stored. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126560 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ROUTING HOME AREA NETWORK (HAN) MESSAGES - Embodiments of the disclosure can provide systems and methods for routing home area network (HAN) messages. In one embodiment, a system can be provided. The system can include at least one memory that stores computer-executable instructions; at least one processor configured to access the at least one memory, wherein the at least one processor is configured to execute the computer-executable instructions. The computer-executable instructions can receive, by the at least one processor, an instruction for a HAN gateway; send the instruction to a transmission agent for routing to the HAN gateway; and transmit, by the transmission agent, the instruction to the HAN gateway. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126561 | WORK GROUP BRIDGE NOMADIC ROAMING - In an example embodiment, an 802.11 or Ethernet work-group local area network (WG-LAN) is assigned a global name. The WG-LAN name is bound to a local virtual local area network identifier (VLAN-ID) in parent access points (APs). A path update protocol is employed to synchronize the WG-LAN/VLAN-ID bindings in a work-group bridge with the bindings of its' parent AP. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126562 | BASE-STATION-TO-BASE-STATION GATEWAY AND RELATED DEVICES, METHODS, AND SYSTEMS - The present disclosure relates to a base-station-to-base-station (BS-BS) gateway in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) cellular communication network and methods of operation thereof. In one embodiment, the BS-BS gateway receives information from a first base station which includes a hostname and a network address of the first base station. The BS-BS gateway then stores a mapping between the hostname and the network address. Thereafter, in one embodiment, the BS-BS gateway enables a second base station to address messages to the first base station using the hostname of the first base station. In this manner, changes in the network address of the first base station will not affect the ability of the second base station to address messages to the first base station. In some embodiments, the first base station is a low-power base station (LP-BS) and the second base station is a high-power base station (HP-BS). | 05-08-2014 |
20140126563 | System and Method for Common Attributes in HESSID and the Associated Queries - Mobile stations can query independent basic service set (BSS) parameters of a group of Access Points (APs) by setting a Pre-Association Message Exchange BSSID Independent (PAME-BI) bit during Wi-Fi discovery. The PAME-BI bit may be included in a Generic Advertisement Service (GAS) request to indicate that an Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP) request carried by the GAS request is querying both independent and dependent BSS parameters. In some embodiments, the PAME-BI bit is included as a field in the ANQP query, rather than the GAS request message. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126564 | NETWORK APPARATUS AND NETWORK SHARING METHOD - A network apparatus and a network sharing method are provided. The network apparatus includes a connecting port that can connect to a computer directly. The network apparatus automatically captures wireless network connection information stored in the computer via the connecting port, sets up a wireless network environment, so that the network apparatus acts as an external network card and makes the computer connect to the network via the network apparatus. Meanwhile, the network apparatus acts as a wireless base station and shares the network with other computer. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126565 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND PROGRAM - Even when a plurality of communication parameter providing devices exist, a communication parameter setting process is enabled. | 05-08-2014 |
20140133476 | METHODS, DEVICES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS PROVIDING FOR RAN BASED LGW SELECTION - The present invention proposes methods, devices and computer program products in relation to enhancements for providing for RAN based LGW selection. Two basic options for the RAN based improved solution are presented for scenarios in which HeNB sends a list of the available LGW addresses/identities and the APNs supported by the different LGWs. According to option 1, if more than one LGW can support a given APN, then the H(e)NB only sends the address of the preferred LGW (e.g., based on local network topology) for the given APN. According to option 2, the HeNB sends priority value (s) with the addresses of the LGWs (for the LGWs only (irrespective of supported APNs) or for (only) the APNs supported by each LGW. Then, the MME/SGSN may consider this priority value (s) at the LGW selection. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140331 | SCHEMES FOR CONNECTING TO WIRELESS NETWORK - Technologies are generally described for connecting to a wireless local area network. In some examples, a method performed under control of an end device may include transmitting a probe request frame including a fake device identifier for the end device to an access point, receiving a probe response frame including information regarding the access point from the access point, determining whether the access point is an authenticated access point based at least in part on the information regarding the access point, and transmitting a connection request including an authentic device identifier for the end device to the access point. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140332 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO A LOCAL AREA COMMUNICATION IN A PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for connecting to a local area communication resource in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes receiving access point connection-related information and automatic connection support-related information from a plurality of access points, identifying at least one access point capable of supporting automatic connection among the plurality of access points based on the automatic connection support-related information, receiving connection information from an information server connected to the at least one access point, selecting one access point from the at least one access points based on Base Station Subsystem (BSS) link information included in the access point connection-related information with respect to the at least one access point, Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) information, and link information of an external network included in the connection information, and performing a local area communication with the selected access point. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140333 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING A FRAME USING A MULTIPLE PHYSICAL LAYER IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting a frame, which is performed by a transmission station in a wireless LAN system that supports frame transmission and reception on the basis of a first physical layer and a second physical layer. The method comprises the steps of: transmitting a request-to-send (RTS) to a reception station through the first physical layer of the transmission station; receiving, by the reception station, a first clear-to-send (CTS) frame transmitted through the first physical layer of the reception station in response to the RTS frame; and transmitting a second CTS frame through the second physical layer of the transmission station, then transmitting a data frame through the first physical layer of the transmission station. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140334 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF ESTABLISHING INTERFACE IN A LOCAL NETWORK - Disclosed is an apparatus and a method of establishing an interface between entities in a local network. A stand-alone local H(e)NB network has a structure in which one or more H(e)NBs are separated from one or more L-GWs in order to support mobility of a user equipment. The one or more H(e)NBs or the one or more L-GWs provide an information management device with information necessary for establishing an interface and receive information necessary for establishing the interface with a target entity as a response to the provision of the information. The one or more H(e)NBs or the one or more L-GWs establish the interface with the target entity based on the received information. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140335 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK COORDINATED DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - A WLAN coordinated data transmission method, system, and relevant device are disclosed. The WLAN coordinated data transmission method includes: detecting, by an offloading scheduling controller, whether the number of MAC SDUs buffered in a MAC SDU queue of a mobile communication module exceeds a preset threshold, and, if so, packing a part of the MAC SDUs into a MAC PDU, and sending the MAC PDU to a coordination mode management module through an interface of the mobile communication module; sending, by the coordination mode management module, the MAC PDU containing the packed part of the MAC SDUs through an LLC protocol layer to a WLAN module for transmission; and packing, by the offloading scheduling controller, a remaining part of the MAC SDUs buffered in the MAC SDU queue into a MAC PDU, and transmitting the MAC PDU through the mobile communication module. | 05-22-2014 |
20140146800 | METHOD FOR OPERATING WIRELESS NETWORK, RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING THE SAME RECORDED THEREON, AND MOBILE TERMINAL USING THE SAME - There are provided a method for operating a wireless network performed in a mobile terminal wirelessly connected to a base station using a mobile network, the method including, receiving access point (AP) group information including at least one access point (AP) present within a predetermined distance from a location of the mobile terminal, from the base station, determining a first AP included in the AP group information if a wireless communications request is determined by applications driven in the mobile terminal, and performing a wireless communications connection according to the wireless communications request using the mobile network if it is determined that a connection between the first AP and the mobile terminal is invalid. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146801 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING FEMTOCELL SERVICE CAPABILITIES FOR SERVICES - Techniques for supporting utilization of femtocell service capabilities for services are disclosed. A network device may be configured to implement a femto services gateway. The femto services gateway may reside in a femtocell and provide application programming interfaces (APIs) to services to enable applications implementing the services to make use of functionalities of femtocell service capabilities. The APIs may be a subset of or an extended set of Open Service Access Parlay or Parlay-X APIs. The services may be either femtocell-hosted, mobile APIs network operator core network-hosted, or Internet-hosted. The femtocell service capabilities may include a framework service capability feature (SCF), a call control SCF, a user interaction SCF, a mobility SCF, a terminal capability SCF, a data session control SCF, a connectivity manager SCF, an account management SCF, a charging management SCF, a policy management SCF, a presence and availability management SCF, or a multimedia messaging SCF. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146802 | Communication System and Method - A method of controlling a connection between a user terminal and an access node connected to a communication network is provided. The user terminal establishes a data connection with the access node, periodically generates a message at predetermined intervals and transmits the periodic message to at least one network node via the access node over the communication network. Responses to the periodic messages are received from the at least one network node. The responses are analysed to determine whether to terminate the connection to the access node, and in the case that the connection to the access node should be terminated, a disconnect message is transmitted to the access node from the user terminal. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146803 | NETWORK BROADCAST METHOD USING UNICAST AND RELAY NODE - A network broadcast method using a MAC unicast and an MPR node allows a source node to transmit a data packet to at least one MPR node which is located within one-hop distance from the source node and allows the at least one MPR node to transmit the data packet to each next-ranked MPR nodes. At least one normal node, which is not an MPR node while being located within one-hop distance from the source node, receives the data packet of the source node, which is transferred from the source node to an MPR node or transferred between MPR nodes through overhearing. Although the source node and MPR nodes are in a hidden-node relationship, collision is prevented, thereby minimizing data packet loss to improve the transmission reliability, and enabling the data packet of the source node to be reliably broadcasted on a network. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146804 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR OFFERING DATABASE ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, to a method and device for offering database access. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method in which a first station (STA) accesses a database (DB) through a second STA includes the steps of: receiving a beacon or enabling signal in a first STA, operating as a dependent STA, from a second STA, operating as an enabling STA; operating a link setup of the second STA; and accessing the DB through a link with the second STA. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146805 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS BASED ON ASSOCIATION MECHANISM IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of communicating between an access point (AP) and a station (STA) in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system is provided. The method includes receiving an association request (AREQ) frame requesting an association, from a STA, the AREQ frame comprising a common association response (C-ARSP) indicator indicating whether the STA has been received common association information for the association between the STA and the AP, determining an association response (ARSP) type for the STA based on the C-ARSP indicator and performing an association response for the ARSP type to the STA. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146806 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR USER EQUIPMENT TO ACCESS EVOLVED PACKET CORE NETWORK - A method for a user equipment UE to access an evolved packet core network EPC includes: receiving, by an EPC access gateway connecting a wireless local area network WLAN to an EPC, a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP request from the UE; and obtaining, by the EPC access gateway, subscription data of the UE according to a media access control MAC address of the UE in the DHCP request, and performing EPC access processing for the UE according to the obtained subscription data, where the obtaining subscription data of the UE according to a MAC address of the UE includes: obtaining the subscription data of the UE according to the MAC address of the UE and the MAC address of the UE and the subscription data of the UE that are correspondingly stored by a network device in an access authentication process. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146807 | TRANSMITTING DATA OVER A PLURALITY OF DIFFERENT NETWORKS - A method for transmitting data from a mobile communication device to a remote server across a wireless network is described. The method comprising the following steps. Data is transmitted from an application executing on the mobile communication device using a standard reliable communication protocol. Prior to transmitting the data across the wireless network, receipt of the data is acknowledged, thereby simulating, to the application, receipt of the data by the remote server. Data is transmitted from the mobile communication device to the remote server using an intermediary communication protocol. A mobile communication device and a system implementing the method are also described. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146808 | POWER EFFICIENT TUNNELED DIRECT LINK SETUP APPARATUS, SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Apparatus, systems, and methods disclosed herein operate to provide wireless communication between personal mobile communication (PMC) devices. An emulated wireless access point (AP) at a first PMC device (PMC1) establishes a first tunneled direct link setup (TDLS) session between a first station module (STA1) incorporated into the PMC1 and a second station module (STA2) incorporated into a second PMC device (PMC2). Following establishment of the TDLS session, the wireless AP is allowed to sleep; and most infrastructure management duties are handled by the STA1 during the session. PMC device battery charge may be conserved as a result. The emulated wireless AP may also establish a second TDLS link to a third station module (STA3) incorporated into a third PMC device (PMC3). The STA1 may then bridge data traffic flow between the STA2 and the STA3. Such bridging operation may enable communication between two PMC devices otherwise unable to decode data received from the other. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146809 | Identifier assignment method and device in wireless local area network - The disclosure discloses an identifier assignment method in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), which includes: a group identifier is set for a non-Access Point Station (STA). The method further includes: in a process during which the STA associates or reassociates to an Access Point (AP), a terminal identifier is assigned to the associated or reassociated STA or a terminal identifier and a group identifier are assigned to the associated or reassociated STA. The disclosure also discloses an identifier assignment device in a WLAN for implementing the terminal access method. The terminal identifier is significantly expanded through the setting of the group identifier, so that a unique identifier can be assigned to the STA accessing to the AP without identifier repetition of the STA. Meanwhile, the grouping of the STA also facilitates the scheduling and management of the STA in a group. The disclosure ensures that sufficient STAs can access to the AP and a different identifier can be assigned to each STA. | 05-29-2014 |
20140153555 | Techniques for Roaming Between Heterogeneous Wireless Networks - Examples are disclosed for roaming between heterogeneous wireless networks. In some examples, an authorization request for user equipment (UE) to access a visited wireless local area network (WLAN) may be received via a first protocol. The authorization request may be interworked by an authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) interworking function (AIF) to enable the UE to be authenticated and authorized for access to the visited WLAN via information exchanged between a visited AAA server and a home AAA server. The visited home AAA server may be associated with different types of wireless networks to include wireless wide area networks (WWANs) or with a different WLAN. Interworking by the AIF may include translating the authentication request received via the first protocol to a second protocol to allow for the exchange of information between the visited AAA server and the home AAA server. Other examples are described and claimed. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153556 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN WWAN AND WLAN IN A MOBILE WIRELESS HOTSPOT - An apparatus comprises a first interface module configured to interface with one or more user devices through a wireless local area network (WLAN) connection; a second interface module configured to interface with a wireless communication network through a wireless wide area network (WWAN) connection; and a controller. The controller is configured to detect availability of carrier hotspots; if no carrier hotspot is detected, route traffic to and from the one or more user devices through the WWAN connection; and if a carrier hotspot is detected, route traffic to and from the one or more user devices through the detected carrier hotspot. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153557 | WI-FI DIRECT CONNECTION METHOD USING ACCESS POINT AND DEVICE HAVING WI-FI DIRECT CONNECTION FUNCTION - A Wi-Fi Direct connection method for a plurality of devices and a device having a Wi-Fi Direct connection function are disclosed. The Wi-Fi Direct connection method including connecting the plurality of devices through an access point (AP) for communication, making a request through a first device to a second device from among the plurality of devices through the AP to perform a Wi-Fi Direct connection, changing the state of the second device into a standby mode for the Wi-Fi Direct connection in a response to the request for the Wi-Fi Direct connection, performing provisioning discovery by the first device after making the request for the Wi-Fi Direct connection and exchanging a provisioning method with the second device; and accepting the Wi-Fi Direct connection in response to the second device receiving the provisioning discovery request from the first device which has requested the Wi-Fi Direct connection. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153558 | PHY LAYER OPTIONS FOR BODY AREA NETWORK (BAN) DEVICES - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a transceiver with a physical (PHY) layer. The PHY layer is configured for body area network (BAN) operations in a limited multipath environment using M-ary PSK, differential M-ary PSK or rotated differential M-ary PSK. Also, the PHY layer uses a constant symbol rate for BAN packet transmissions. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153559 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A GATEWAY NODE - A method for selecting a gateway node for a terminal which connects to its registered domain via an access domain and, in a predetermined scenario, an intermediate domain, the access domain having an associated domain name system arranged to return an address of a gateway node based on a domain name system query. The method includes using a first part of such a query to identify the registered domain of the terminal to the domain name system and a second part of the query to indicate to the domain name system that it should use a predetermined mapping to return the address of a gateway node based on the query, the predetermined mapping being one which returns an address of a gateway node either in the registered domain or in an intermediate domain based on the registered domain identified in the query and on the access domain. | 06-05-2014 |
20140161113 | Location-Based Wi-Fi Radio Activation And Deactivation For Mobile Devices - Concepts and technologies are described herein for location-based WI-FI radio activation and deactivation for mobile devices. According to one aspect disclosed herein, a WI-FI connection management system can detect that a mobile device is within a coverage area provided by a WI-FI network. The WI-FI connection management system can also generate a trigger to instruct the mobile device to activate a WI-FI radio of the mobile device and connect to the WI-FI network. The WI-FI connection management system can also send the trigger to the mobile device. | 06-12-2014 |
20140169348 | TRANSMITTER WARM-UP USING DUMMY FRAME GENERATION - An electronic device includes a medium access controller (MAC) to generate frames and transmitter circuitry to convert the frames to radio-frequency (RF) analog signals for transmission. The MAC is to initiate frame generation at a time that precedes initiation of RF analog signal transmission by a specified time period. In a first mode, the MAC is to generate a dummy frame during a first portion of the specified time period and to initiate generation of a transmit frame during a subsequent second portion of the specified time period. Also in the first mode, the transmitter circuitry is to convert the dummy frame into a first analog signal, discard the first analog signal, convert the transmit frame into a second analog signal, and transmit the second analog signal. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169349 | EXTENDED CONNECTIVITY BASED ON WIRELESS PATHS BETWEEN STATIONS OF A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A wireless station in a WLAN generates a first set of data elements for sending to a final destination. The wireless station forms a first Internet Protocol (IP) packet with a header portion and a payload portion. The header portion specifies an IP address of a neighbor access point (AP) as the next hop destination. The payload portion of the IP packet includes an IP address of the final destination to indicate that the data elements are to be delivered to the final destination. The wireless station transmits the IP packet to the neighbor AP according to the IP address of the neighbor AP. Extended connectivity based on wireless paths between stations of a wireless local area network (WLAN) is thus provided. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169350 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING IDENTITY OF WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for determining an identity of a WLAN system occupying a channel, using information within a signal field or time synchronization between target channels. For this, the present invention includes a preamble detecting unit configured to detect a preamble in each channel; a channel information obtaining unit configured to obtain reference time information when the preamble is detected in each channel, or to obtain signal field information in each channel using the detected preamble; and an identity determining unit configured to determine an identity of a WLAN system occupying each channel by comparing the reference time information obtained in each channel, or by comparing the signal field information obtained in each channel. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169351 | MOBILE NETWORK OPERATOR MULTIHOMING AND ENTERPRISE VPN SOLUTION - The disclosed embodiments support mobility internal and external to enterprise networks. Service providers provide mobility by providing Home Agent functionality corresponding to each Enterprise network. In this manner, mobility may be provided to Mobile Nodes both internal and external to their enterprise networks. Moreover, data packets may be transmitted by Mobile Nodes to Correspondent Nodes, whether they are within their enterprise network, the Service Provider network, or the Internet. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169352 | Method and System for Wireless local area network Proximity Recognition - A method and system for proximity detection, recognition and classification of a wireless local area network (WLAN) enabled device without a WLAN infrastructure. The proximity recognition system monitors WLAN communications at one or more known locations. The proximity of a transmitter is sensed by examining receive signal strength as the mobile device engages in a sequence of protocol data unit exchanges requesting WLAN association. An identifier of the mobile device may be provided in this association request. Association requests may be periodic or may be prompted by a specific response from the WLAN proximity recognition device which may operate on one or a plurality of WLAN channels. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169353 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING RADIO INTERFACES - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus, comprising a receiver configured to receive from a second apparatus over a first radio interface a first message comprising a registration request, a transmitter configured to transmit a second message to the second apparatus over the first radio interface, the second message comprising an acknowledgement of the registration request, and a processor configured to reserve an interface identifier for the second apparatus, wherein the processor is configured to not allow the reserved interface identifier to be used by further nodes over at least one further radio interface. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169354 | Access Control Method for WiFi Device and WiFi Device - An access control method for a wireless fidelity (WiFi) device and a WiFi device. The method includes: receiving, at a user layer of the WiFi device, an access request for accessing the WiFi device based on a service set identifier (SSID), where the access request includes a request for accessing a management interface web user interface (WEBUI) of the WiFi device; determining, at the user layer of the WiFi device, whether a tag of the received access request is the same as one of tags that are preset for SSIDs forbidden to access the WiFi device; if the determination result is positive, rejecting the access request; if the determination result is negative, accepting the access request. In this way, access control of a WiFi device can be implemented in a simple manner. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169355 | MULTI-TIER WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH A SECURE NETWORK DISCOVERY PROTOCOL - An apparatus and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of an infrastructure-less wireless home mesh networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, ad hoc wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. A further embodiment includes identification of a wireless home mesh network. Once identified, one or more proprietary messages may be exchanged in a secure manner to establish connections with a home electronics device as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the home network. A home electronics device may wirelessly communicate to route data within one or more nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169356 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME IN WLAN SYSTEM - A station and method for transmitting a data frame in a wireless local area network are provided. The method includes obtaining, by the station, a transmission opportunity (TXOP) for a bandwidth, the TXOP indicating an interval of time when the station has a right to exchange frame sequences; selecting, by the station, a transmit bandwidth parameter of a non-initial data unit of a plurality of data units from available bandwidth parameters, wherein the available bandwidth parameters include a first available bandwidth parameter which is same as a transmit bandwidth parameter of a preceding data unit of the plurality of data units and a second available bandwidth parameter which is narrower than a transmit bandwidth parameter of the preceding data unit; and transmitting, by the station during the TXOP, the non-initial data unit according to the transmit bandwidth parameter of the non-initial data unit. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169357 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME IN WLAN SYSTEM - A method and station for receiving a data frame in a wireless local area network are provided. The method includes receiving, from a transmitter which has obtained a transmission opportunity (TXOP) for a bandwidth, a first data unit of a plurality of data units during the TXOP, the TXOP indicating an interval of time when the transmitter has a right to exchange frame sequences; and after receiving the first data unit, further receiving, from the transmitter, a second data unit of the plurality of data units during the TXOP, wherein a transmit bandwidth of the second data unit is selected from available bandwidths, wherein the available bandwidths include a first available bandwidth which is same as a transmit bandwidth of the first data unit and a second available bandwidth which is narrower than the transmit bandwidth of the first data unit. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169358 | Tracking And Messaging Based On Prior SSIDs Received - Wireless hand-held devices, such as cellular phones, with a second network capability, such as 802.11 network connectivity are used in the disclosed technology. These devices detect surrounding SSIDs (service side identification) transmitted from 802.11 networks, send the SSIDs to a server via the cellular connection, and receive back a message to be displayed. The message sent is dependent upon prior SSIDs detected and/or prior messages already sent. In embodiments, wireless transmitters which transmit SSIDs are of varying power, such that a stronger signal is detected in a broader area, and a weaker signal in a smaller area within the broader area. As such, locations and even paths of travel may be determined. | 06-19-2014 |
20140177610 | Ethernet Media Converter Supporting High-Speed Wireless Access Points - Disclosed are method and system for Ethernet media conversion supporting high-speed wireless access points. The method includes receiving at each of a plurality of input-side Ethernet modules in a media converter, a plurality of input data streams at a first data rate. In the media converter each of the plurality of input data streams may be aggregated into an output data stream at a second data rate. The output data stream may then be transmitted at the second data rate from an output-side Ethernet module in the media converter. Each of the input data streams may be received from an Ethernet switch, and the output data stream may be transmitted to a wireless access point. In one exemplary implementation, each of the input-side Ethernet modules may include a 1 G PHY, while the output-side Ethernet module may include one or both of a 2.5 G PHY and a 4 G PHY. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177611 | ACCESS POINTS TO PROVIDE EVENT NOTIFICATIONS - An access point is to provide a wireless beacon packet via a wireless communication. The wireless beacon packet is to include an event notification in response to an indication of a need for the event notification. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177612 | SCALABLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SERVICE DISCOVERY - Some embodiments described herein include apparatuses and methods to send a first message from a first wireless communication station during service discovery to discover a service supported by a second wireless communication station. The first wireless communication may also send a second message to the second wireless communication station if the first wireless communication station receives a response message from the second wireless communication station indicating that the service included in the first message is supported by the second wireless communication station. The second message may include more information about the service than the first message. The first message may be sent before a wireless connection is established between the first and second wireless communication stations. Other embodiments including additional apparatuses and methods are described. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177613 | RESILIENT PEER NETWORK WITH 802.11 TECHNOLOGY - A Wi-Fi Direct Group Owner stores network parameters needed for proper operation of a peer-to-peer network. These include the network name and identifier, the power save schedule, the security settings, MAC address of all of the group members, etc. To reduce the need for a single Group Owner, this information is distributed. As each new device is added to the network, all of these parameters are passed via IEEE 802.11 data packets from the device acting as the Group Owner to the new peer device. This way, the new peer device has all of the information about the group at the time that it joins. Any device in the Resilient Peer Network can temporarily take on the role of a traditional Wi-Fi Direct Group Owner (admission control). Selection of which peer will act as a Group Owner will depend on a user action or network event. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177614 | BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT SELECTION RULES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for selecting a type of block acknowledgement. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177615 | METHOD FOR SCANNING A WIRELESS FIDELITY (WI-FI) DIRECT DEVICE AND TERMINAL DEVICE FOR THE SAME - A method and a terminal device for scanning a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) direct device in a terminal device are described. The method includes: activating a Wi-Fi direct operation; scanning Wi-Fi direct devices within range to obtain device information; determining, with a processor, whether connection is available or non-available with each of the scanned Wi-Fi direct devices by analyzing the device information for each of the scanned Wi-Fi direct devices; and displaying the available Wi-Fi direct devices. Accordingly, a user may distinguish the available devices from the non-available devices. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177616 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SPACE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A space division multiple access (SDMA) method is provided. The method may be performed by a station (STA), in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. The method includes overhearing a third transmission response message transmitted by an access point (AP), and determining whether to access a channel on the basis of criteria information included in the third transmission response message. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177617 | TWO TIER HI-SPEED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION LINK - A method and apparatus for mobile two-tier wireless communication are provided. A wireless communication signal may be received at a mobile communication device from a cellular base station. Data may be recovered from the received wireless communication signal. The data may be transmitted to an IEEE 802.11 user device. A second wireless communication signal may be received from the IEEE 802.11 user device. Data may be recovered from the second wireless communication signal. The data may be transmitted to the cellular base station. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177618 | BASE STATION INITIATED PROXIMITY SERVICE DISCOVERY AND CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT - The normal roles of wireless stations and wireless access points in initiating the establishment of wireless connections may be reversed without the need for changes in the network interfaces for either the station or access point device. This capability may be used to allow wireless devices acting as access points, but on which service clients operate, to initiate the establishment of a connection with a station, on which a wireless service provider operates. Discovery of services between wireless devices can be provided prior to establishing a connection between the devices. A service client device providing access point functionality may broadcast an invitation for service advertisements and then receive service advertisements from relevant service providers acting as wireless stations. An information element may be included as part of periodically broadcast administrative messages to wirelessly convey an invitation for service advertisements. In response to a service advertisement, the access point may send to the wireless station an invitation to connect, prompting the wireless station to begin to establish a connection according to a wireless communication protocol. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185597 | SECURE ON-LINE SIGNUP AND PROVISIONING OF WIRELESS DEVICES - Embodiments of a mobile device and method for secure online sign-up and provisioning of credentials for Wi-Fi hotspots are generally described herein. In some embodiments, provisioning occurs using a service set identifier (SSID) to associate with a hotspot and retrieve a virtual LAN (VLAN) identifier. The VLAN identifier is used to complete the signup and provisioning process. In some embodiments, a hotspot may implement a primary SSID and a dependent SSID. The mobile device associates with the hotspot using the dependent SSID to perform the secure online signup and provisioning process. Once credentials are obtained using the signup and provisioning process, the device can connect to the hotspot using the primary SSID and the already provisioned credentials. The provisioned credentials may include certificates, username/password, or SIM-type credentials. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185598 | BROADCAST BASED DISCOVERY OF WI-FI NETWORKS, DEVICES AND SERVICES - Embodiments reduce the time and energy expended to establish an initial link to a network. Some embodiments use either active or passive scans to discover available access points and then use a broadcast or multicast Generic Advertisement Service (GAS) Request message to identify access points providing requested services. Other embodiments use a broadcast or multicast GAS Request message to identify access points or mobile devices providing requested services without first scanning for access points. Only access points or mobile devices providing requested services need to respond to the GAS request message. Duplicate messages received by multiple access points coupled to the same network can be filtered so only one message is received and responded to. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185599 | USING PROXIMATE ACCESS POINTS TO ENSURE FAST WI-FI NETWORK DISCOVERY AND RECONNECTION WITH REDUCED POWER CONSUMPTION - One embodiment of the present invention provides a portable device, which is configured to join a known Wi-Fi network. While the device is not associated with a known access point, the device scans for access points at a scanning frequency wherein information about known access points has been stored in a database in the device. During this scanning process, the device determines whether the device is proximate to a known access point and the device sets the device's scanning frequency based on whether the device is proximate to a known access point. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185600 | MOBILE ROUTER CAPABLE OF AUTOMATICALLY DETECTING NETWORK CONNECTION MODE AND PERFORMING NETWORK CONNECTION SETTING, AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention is to provide a mobile router, which can connect with a network transmission device capable of wired or wireless networking (e.g., a modem provided by a network service provider, a wireless LAN access point, or a mobile communication access point) in a corresponding one of at least three network connection modes based on a wired Ethernet, a wireless Local Area Network and a wireless Wide Area Network, so as to transmit a network packet from a terminal device (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a mobile phone) to the Internet or vice versa through the network transmission device. The mobile router can automatically detect an applicable network connection mode and automatically apply network connection settings stored in a corresponding profile. If no such corresponding profile exists, the mobile router can automatically store the network connection settings manually input by the user as a profile. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185601 | Radio Over Ethernet for Radio Access Network and Cloud-RAN - An architecture for transporting radio samples, compressed samples or pre-processed radio samples in symbol form across a communication network, including a packet switched network such as Ethernet. Further, the conversion of the radio samples from streaming data to a packetized format can also be performed. Processing of radio samples can be performed in a centralized location, where the centralized location can service multiple radio heads that are located across a large geographical area. This centralized processing can be referred to as Cloud-RAN. The radio heads can also perform pre-processing to reduce effective data rates across the communication network. Further, one or more of the components of the communication network can perform timing synchronization utilizing, for example, Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE) and/or IEEE 1588. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185602 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - According to an instruction for starting processing for connecting to another communication apparatus, a communication apparatus prompts a user to select whether the communication apparatus joins an existing network or establishes a new network, searches another communication apparatus establishing the existing network when the user selects to join the existing network, searches another communication apparatus not establishing the existing network when the user selects to establish the new network, and then connects to the another searched communication apparatus. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185603 | Systems and Methods for Accessing a Network - System and method embodiments are provided for accessing a wireless network. The embodiments enable establishing and releasing session resources in a wireless local area network (WLAN) corresponding to packet data network (PDN) connections in a 3 GPP enhanced packet core (EPC). In an embodiment, a method in a network component for establishing a control channel with a user equipment (UE) includes setting up, by the network component, a link layer channel, sending, by the network component, an identifier of the link layer channel to the UE; and communicating, by the network component, with the UE over the link layer channel using a WLAN control protocol (WLCP), wherein the WLAN comprises a trusted WLAN Access Network (TWAN). | 07-03-2014 |
20140185604 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING CONNECTION TO WIRELESS ACCESS POINT AND MOBILE TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method and mobile terminal manage a connection to a wireless access point. The method includes searching for a designated wireless access point registered in a preset connection designation list by use of a Wi-Fi module. The method also includes establishing, when a designated wireless access point is found, a connection to the found designated wireless access point. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185605 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING CHANNEL SCANNING TIME BY SHARING CHANNEL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A method and apparatus for scanning a channel in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system may be disclosed including, extracting at least one target channel from among a plurality of channels present in at least one frequency band, based on channel scanning record information, generating a basic service set (BSS) existing information element (IE) including at least one BSS existing channel bitmap indicating information associated with a channel in which at least one access point (AP) exists, based on channel information received from at least one neighboring station (STA), determining a scanning rank of the at least one target channel, using the BSS existing channel IE, and identifying a target AP through scanning the at least one target channel, based on the scanning rank. | 07-03-2014 |
20140192791 | REAL TIME ANALYTICS DRIVEN DECISIONING OF EDGE DEVICES IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - Embodiments of the invention provide a method, system and computer program product for real-time analytics driven decisioning of edge devices in a WSN. In an embodiment of the invention, a method for real-time analytics driven decisioning of edge devices in a WSN is provided. The method includes establishing a communicative connection by a controller with sensors in a geographically proximate WSN and aggregating data received from the sensors. The method also includes triggering an action in the controller based upon the aggregated data. Finally, the method includes propagating the aggregated data to a different controller communicatively coupled to other sensors of a different WSN geographically proximate to the different controller. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192792 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICES AND CONTROL DEVICE WITH WIRELESS NETWORK FUNCTION - The present invention discloses a method for controlling wireless network devices, which includes the following steps: a control device with a wireless network function is utilized to scan several access-point (AP) mode wireless network devices. One of the AP mode wireless network devices is selected as a master AP according to the scanning result. The at least one AP mode wireless network device other than the selected one is set to a client mode. The at least one wireless network device set to the client mode builds a connection to the control device with a wireless network function through the master AP. The present invention also discloses a control device with a wireless network function. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192793 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HIERARCHICAL TIME SOURCE USAGE IN NEAR-ME AREA NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SYNCHRONIZATION - Methods, devices, and computer program products for hierarchical time source usage in near-me area network discovery and synchronization are described herein. In one aspect, a method for determining a discovery period using a hierarchy of external timing sources is provided. The method includes receiving an external timing signal from one or more external timing sources, and then using a hierarchy of external timing sources to determine which external timing source to use. The method further provides determining an offset from that external timing source, and using the external timing source and the offset to determine a discovery interval, in which to attempt to locate a near-me area network (NAN), such as a Social-WiFi network. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192794 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REGISTER WITH EXTERNAL NETWORKS IN WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - Example methods and apparatus to register a device at a wireless local area network are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves receiving a registration request from the device, and sending a response to the device in response to the registration request, the response including one or more registration plans associated with registering the device for network access via the wireless local area network. The example method also involves receiving registration information from the device, the registration information associated with one of the one or more registration plans selected by the device. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192795 | Secure wireless network-based activation for table-side information and point-of-sale devices - A new table-side device is seamlessly and securely integrated to an existing (primary) Wi-Fi network within an operating environment at a restaurant location. The location includes a data management server (DMS) for managing the local operations of devices operating there. The device being installed at the location is auto-configured into the primary Wi-Fi network by being provided with a default Wi-Fi profile that only enables the device to be activated on an activation Wi-Fi network also available at the location. Once the device activates to the Wi-Fi activation network, it requests activation onto the primary Wi-Fi network from a cloud-based data center. The data center requests an activation password from the local DMS. The local DMS generates an activation bundle, which is then returned and eventually instantiated on the device to complete the activation. Once activated, the device updates its Wi-Fi profile to now executed on the primary Wi-Fi network. | 07-10-2014 |
20140198780 | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND APPARATUSES TO ENABLE SHORT FRAMES - Generally, embodiments to enable short frames are described herein. Embodiments may comprise logic such as hardware and/or code to reduce the size of a packet by determining a short frame, transmitting the short frame, communicating that the frame is a short frame and interpreting the short frame at the receiving device. Embodiments may determine and transmit and/or receive and interpret short frames. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198781 | METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION AND LOCAL NETWORK ENTITY - The invention relates to a method for data transmission with a local network, the local network comprising a plurality of local network entities for connecting mobile entities to the local network and at least one local network entity for connecting the local network to a data network. The method comprises receiving, by a first local network entity of the local network entities of the local network, a data packet, the network address of the first mobile entity on the basis of the data packet, determining, by the first local network entity on the basis of the network address of the first mobile entity, the second local network entity, via which the first mobile entity is connected to the local network, and forwarding, by the first local network entity, the data comprised by the data packet to the first mobile entity via the second local network entity. | 07-17-2014 |
20140204924 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING A DISCOVERY PROCEDURE - The present invention is directed to a method and an apparatus for use in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the present invention is directed to a method of performing a discovery procedure for a ProSe and an apparatus therefore, in which the method comprises: scanning one or more Wireless Local Area Network Access Points (WLAN APs); transmitting a scan result for the one or more WLAN APs to a cellular network entity; and initiating the discovery procedure for the ProSe, if the discovery procedure for the ProSe is allowed by the cellular network entity as a response to the scan result. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204925 | INFORMATION PROVIDING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROVIDING APPARATUS, AND INFORMATION PROVIDING METHOD - An information providing system according to an embodiment includes a wireless LAN communication unit, a notification information storage unit, a terminal position acquisition unit, and a notification unit. The notification information storage unit stores notification information corresponding to the wireless LAN communication unit. The terminal position acquisition unit acquires position information indicating a position of a wireless terminal. The notification unit notifies a wireless terminal positioned in a communication area of the wireless LAN communication unit and not communicating with the wireless LAN communication unit of the notification information via a wireless WAN base station. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204926 | INFORMATION PROVIDING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROVIDING APPARATUS AND INFORMATION PROVIDING METHOD - The information providing system according to the embodiment includes a wireless LAN access point and an information providing apparatus. The wireless LAN access point detects a wireless terminal existing in a wireless LAN communication area to transmit the detection information to the information providing apparatus. The information providing apparatus determines either the wireless LAN access point or a wireless WAN base station, on the basis of information on a user of a wireless terminal specified according to the detection information and/or the information on an installation location of the wireless LAN access point, as a communication medium that notifies the notification information. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204927 | DETERMINING TO USE MULTI-RAN INTERWORKING BY CORRELATING DIFFERENT RAN IDENTIFIERS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide a method for confirming identity of a user equipment (UE) registered in both a wireless local area network (WLAN) and WWAN. A method is provided for wireless communications by a base station (BS). The method generally includes establishing communications with a first UE, wherein the UE is identified by a first set of one or more identifiers in a wide area wireless network (WWAN) and by a second set of one or more identifiers in a wide local area network (WLAN), and determining, based on the first and second set of identifiers, a UE connected to the WWAN and WLAN is the first UE | 07-24-2014 |
20140204928 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INITIAL SIGNAL ACQUISITION IN MULTIPATH FADING CHANNEL CONDITIONS - An apparatus and method for performing initial signal acquisition in a receiver of a millimeter wave wireless communication system. The apparatus comprises receiving a millimeter-wave signal including complementary sequences at the receiver; cross-correlating the received signal related to the received complementary sequences with respective predefined complementary sequences, wherein the received complementary sequences include a first type of complementary sequences and a second type of complementary sequences; performing a signal sequence detection by auto-correlating the cross-correlated first type of complementary sequences and comparing the auto-correlated results to an energy dependent threshold; and upon detection of the signal sequence, performing a timing synchronization to synchronize a start frame delimiter (SFD), wherein the timing synchronization includes in part a search for a peak in the cross-correlated first type of complementary sequences using a SFD search threshold. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204929 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT SELECTION OF USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus are provided for controlling Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) selection in a wireless communication system. Information on a limitation of managed objects, indicating whether to allow reception of a WLAN selection policy from a roaming network, is received. It is determined whether a User Equipment (UE) exists in the roaming network. It is determined whether to receive the WLAN selection policy from the roaming network based on the information on the limitation of the managed objects, when the UE exists in the roaming network. The WLAN selection policy is received from the roaming network, when it is determined that the WLAN selection policy is to be received from the roaming network. A WLAN is selected according to a policy set for the UE, when it is determined that the WLAN selection policy is not to be received from the roaming network. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204930 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIME SYNCHRONISATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless media distribution system is provided comprising an access point ( | 07-24-2014 |
20140204931 | TECHNIQUES FOR UPDATE PROCEDURE SIGNALING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques are described that can be used for efficient mobility management signaling. In some cases, a network can specify an extended timer used for a machine to machine (M2M) type device to communicate with a network. The extended timer can be transmitted in connection with an attachment acceptance message, Location Updating Accept message, Tracking Area Update Accept, or Routing Area Update Accept message. In some cases, a timer can be adjusted using a multiplier in order to increase a period at which communications with the network occur. The network can transmit an indication to change a timer by multiplying the timer with the multiplier. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204932 | SUPPORTING EMERGENCY CALLS ON A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Several methods are provided for communicating emergency call capability information between a station and an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network. The methods include advertising by the AP of its emergency call capabilities and announcing by the station of its emergency call capabilities. The AP can advertise its emergency call capabilities in a beacon frame, a probe response frame, a reassociation response frame, or a reauthentication response frame. The station can announce its emergency call capabilities in an association request frame, a reassociation request frame, an authentication request frame, or a reauthentication request frame. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204933 | NEIGHBOR SCANNING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - An access point includes a transmitter configured to transmit signals, a receiver configured to receive signals, and a timing information device. The timing information device is configured to receive a timing information request from a station associated to the access point, receive timing information for a beacon signal sent by a second access point, and report the timing information to the station. The timing information includes a time difference relative to a known reference time for transmission of the beacon signal and the time difference is an offset in timing units. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204934 | SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING TO WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS WHILE IN MOTION TO SEND AND RECEIVE GPS DATA AND OTHER INFORMATION TO A WEB PORTAL OR SOFTWARE APPLICATION - A process for detecting and connecting a GPS-enabled device to available in-range wireless local area networks (WLANs), particularly while the device is in motion. Once connected, the GPS enabled device sends and receives data and other information from a web service or software application. The process includes detecting relative movement speed of the GPS device and repeatedly attempts connections with new WLAN access points when in motion, particularly in excess of five miles per hour and/or twenty-five miles per hour. | 07-24-2014 |
20140211771 | WIRELESS MODEM HAVING TRANSMISSION POWER MANAGEMENT MODES - A wireless modem is disclosed. In one aspect, the modem includes at least one wireless interface configured to wirelessly communicate data according to a wireless communication standard. The wireless interface is further configured to use a transmission power to transmit the data. The modem also includes a controller configured to determine a type of power source for the wireless modem and select a transmission power level of the wireless interface based at least partially on the determined power source. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211772 | MULTI-WAN DEVICE AND METHOD OF UPDATING ROUTING TABLE - A multi-WAN interface device includes a first WAN interface, a second WAN interface, an application module, a detection module, a register module, an updating module and a routing table. The first WAN interface connects to a first network and the second WAN interface connects a second network. The application module applies the first network and the second network for a mobile IP home address and a care-of-address. The detection module detects whether it is necessary for switching between the first network and the second network. The register module registers the care-of-address to the home agent. The updating module updates the default routing table of the first network. A method for the multi-WAN interface device updating the routing table is also provided. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211773 | VEHICLE WIRELESS ROUTER - A vehicle wireless router includes a printed circuit board, a cigarette lighter port, a central processing unit, a network module and an antenna unit. The printed circuit board is electrically connected to the cigarette lighter port, the central processing unit, the network module and the antenna unit. The cigarette lighter port is plugged into a vehicle charger socket of a vehicle. The vehicle wireless router receives power from the vehicle through the vehicle charger socket and the cigarette lighter port. The central processing unit receives power through the cigarette lighter port. The central processing unit is configured to start the network module after the central processing unit is power-on. Therefore, a wireless network is shared by the vehicle wireless router through the network module and the antenna unit. An electronic device in the vehicle can be connected to the Internet through the vehicle wireless router. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211774 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD OF COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus forms a new network for executing a first communication service according to a partner apparatus for the first communication service in a case where the communication apparatus starts the first communication service while the communication apparatus and a partner apparatus for a second communication service are executing the second communication service. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211775 | LARGER DELAY SPREAD SUPPORT FOR WIFI BANDS - Aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques that may help address the effects of larger delay spreads in WiFi bands. Methods and apparatus are provided that perform wireless communications utilizing varying cyclic prefix lengths, varying repetition intervals, and varying symbol durations to ameliorate the effects of large delay spreads. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211776 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK TO BE ACCESSED BY A USER EQUIPMENT WITHIN A CELL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for selecting a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) within a cell to be accessed by a User Equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes performing, when a request for information regarding wireless LAN Access Points (APs) within the cell is received, a search for the wireless LAN APs and transmitting a report indicating a search result to a serving Evolved Node B (ENB); receiving, from the serving ENB, updated information on wireless LAN APs based on report indicating the search result; determining whether to perform a re-search for the wireless LAN APs based on the updated information on the wireless LAN APs; and performing, in response to determination to perform the re-search for the wireless LAN APs, the re-search and selecting APs to be accessed based on a result of the re-search. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211777 | WIRELESS CONNECTION SELECTION AND SETUP - A method for facilitating communication between a wireless client and a network is disclosed. The method comprises communicating information between the wireless client and the network prior to associating the wireless client to the network. The information can be related to setup features or services. | 07-31-2014 |
20140219260 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for communicating between mobile devices. In one embodiment, the method comprises launching an application on a first mobile device, joining a wireless mesh network with the first mobile device being a node in the wireless mesh network in response to launching the application, discovering one or more other mobile devices that are active in the wireless mesh network using a discovery protocol, receiving profile information from each of the one or more other mobile devices, and displaying a visual directory of participants associated with the one or more other mobile devices active in the wireless mesh network. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219261 | OPERATOR-ASSISTED DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) DISCOVERY - A method and system for operator-assisted device-to-device (D2D) discovery is disclosed, which method may be executed as instructions on a machine, where the instructions are included on at least one computer readable medium. The method can include a transmission station in an operator network receiving a request for data service from a requesting wireless device. The transmission station can identify a serving wireless device to provide the data service for the requesting wireless device. The transmission station can transmit a device discovery message to the requesting wireless device and the serving wireless device. The device discovery message provides a device discovery period for communication via an ad-hoc, D2D network between the requesting wireless device and the serving wireless device. The ad-hoc, D2D network provides for device-to-device communication. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219262 | WIRELESS NETWORK AREA LIMITING METHOD AND SYSTEM BASED ON NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION - Disclosed are a wireless network area limiting method and a wireless network area limiting system based on NFC. The wireless network area limiting method includes a step of adopting a plurality of first NFC hot spot sensors to seamlessly define a limited area having any shape; a step of periodically generating and transmitting an area secret key by a first central control part respectively connected to the plurality of first NFC hot spot sensors; and a step of conducting handshake with the first central control part by a WLAN user equipment, which has a NFC function and is located in the limited area, based on the area secret key received by the WLAN user equipment, so that the first central control part establishes area-limited network communications in the limited area. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219263 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION OF ACCESS POINT SELECTION - A method for providing information of access point (AP) selection in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, the method including receiving from candidate APs the AP selection information including channel correlation information for other stations associated with the candidate APs; and selecting one AP from candidate APs according to the channel correlation information corresponding to the candidate APs. Accordingly, a gain of multi-user multiple input multiple output (MIMO) can be increased, and an AP suitable for a terminal can be selected. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219264 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMPROMISE GREENFIELD PREAMBLES FOR 802.11N - Aspects of the invention described herein may enable a greenfield access mode in IEEE 802.11n WLAN systems in comparison to an alternative approach that may not provide greenfield access. The utilization of greenfield access may reduce the portion of time required to transmit data due to overhead comprising preamble fields and header fields. This may enable higher data throughput rates to be achieved. This may further enable more robust transmission of data by enabling comparable data rates to be maintained while reducing the coding rate of encoded transmitted data. The reduction of the coding rate may enable comparable data rates to be maintained for transmission via RF channels characterized by lower SNR while still achieving desired target levels of packet error rates. In another aspect of the invention, mixed mode access may be achieved while reducing the portion of time required for transmitting data due to overhead. | 08-07-2014 |
20140233544 | PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK ("PLMN") DISCOVERY COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A mobile device may retrieve information about a network prior to associating with the network. For example, the information may be related to a public land mobile network (“PLMN”) and compatibility with Extensible Authentication Protocols (“EAPs”). | 08-21-2014 |
20140233545 | ESTABLISHING SECURE CONNECTION BETWEEN MOBILE COMPUTING DEVICE AND WIRELESS HUB USING SECURITY CREDENTIALS OBTAINED FROM REMOTE SECURITY CREDENTIAL SERVER - A mobile computing device includes a first wireless local area network adapter; a wireless wide area network adapter configured to connect to a remote security credential server across a wireless wide area network; an optical scanner or a near field radio communication adapter. The mobile computing device is configured to obtain information regarding security credentials from at least one of an optical scan of an optical tag and a near field radio communication exchange with a near field radio communication tag; obtain the security credentials from the remote security credential server across the wireless wide area network by providing the information regarding the security credentials to the remote security credential server which responds with the security credentials; and use the security credentials to establish a secure wireless network connection between the first wireless local area network adapter and a second wireless local area network adapter of a wireless hub. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233546 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING A PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION - Systems and methods are presented for connecting related applications over a peer-to-peer wireless connection using a wireless interface module that minimizes the requirements for an application to initiate a wireless connection with another device. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233547 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS CONNECTIONS - Systems and methods are described herein for connecting related applications over a peer-to-peer network wireless connection using layer | 08-21-2014 |
20140233548 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING A WIRELESS NETWORK COMPRISING A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM (DAS) - A method and a system are provided for reducing collisions created between endpoints in a wireless local area network environment incorporated with a distributed antenna system (DAS), wherein the DAS comprises a plurality of station units (STUs) each adapted to communicate wirelessly with one or more wireless stations, and at least one access point unit (APU) connected to the plurality of STUs and adapted to communicate with a respective access point. The method comprises: at a first STU belonging to the plurality of STUs, receiving a first signal transmitted wirelessly; conveying the first signal towards the APU; and at the APU, adapting the conveyed signal to be transmitted to the access point associated with the APU, and in response to receiving the first signal, conveying a return signal towards at least two STUs belonging to the plurality of STUs. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233549 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND WI-FI P2P CONNECTION METHOD THEREOF - An electronic apparatus for Wi-Fi Peer-to-Peer (P2P) communication and a method thereof is provided. The electronic apparatus includes a Wi-Fi module configured to perform Wi-Fi communication, and a controller configured to control the Wi-Fi module to sequentially select a plurality of channels, and then control the Wi-Fi module to perform a scan operation through each of the plurality of channels, if in response to a Wi-Fi P2P function is being executed. Further, while the scan operation is being performed, the controller controls the Wi-Fi module to determine a connection channel with an external device which will perform Wi-Fi P2P communication based on a number of probe response packets received through each of the plurality of channels. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233550 | LOCATION DETERMINATION - Method and apparatus for location determination by a wireless communication device is disclosed. The method includes a wireless communication device at least formatting a message defined to trigger initiation of a timing measurement exchange; sending the message to trigger initiation of the timing measurement exchange; monitoring a timing measurement exchange between a plurality of access points as part of the timing measurement exchange initiated in response to the message; and determining a location of the wireless communication device based on the timing measurement exchange. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233551 | ACKNOWLEDGEMENT (ACK) TYPE INDICATION AND DEFERRAL TIME DETERMINATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for indicating a type of response for acknowledging a protocol data unit. One example method for wireless communications by a first apparatus generally includes transmitting a physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) protocol data unit (PPDU) to a second apparatus and setting at least one bit in a PLCP header of the PPDU to indicate a type of response expected from the second apparatus responsive to the transmitted PPDU. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233552 | TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, TRANSMITTING METHOD AND RECEIVING METHOD THAT WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATE WITH EACH OTHER USING PLURALITY OF ANTENNAS - An acquiring unit acquires a channel matrix, which has elements representing the channel characteristics between a plurality of antennas at a transmitting side and a plurality of antennas at a receiving side, respectively. A first derivation unit derives not only a singular value matrix that is a diagonal matrix where singular values are arranged, by subjecting the channel matrix to the singular value decomposition, but also a weight matrix which is a unitary matrix corresponding to the singular value matrix. A second derivation unit derives the degree of difference between the singular values arranged in the singular value matrix. A determining unit determines whether or not the degree of difference lies within a predetermined range. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233553 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and an apparatus for transmitting an acknowledgement frame in a wireless local area network. The method includes: generating an acknowledgement frame for a send frame, where the acknowledgement frame includes a short acknowledgement frame, and the short acknowledgement frame includes an STF, an LTF, and a SIG; and sending the acknowledgement frame. In the embodiments of the present invention, the short acknowledgement frame may not include a data unit, so that a size of the acknowledgement frame is reduced and an overhead of the acknowledgement frame is cut down, thereby improving interaction efficiency of the acknowledgement frame. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233554 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - It is to realize a network management system excellent in its reliability which can prevent a wrong connection when a field wireless management station having a redundant structure is installed, and can make a backbone network redundant so as to improve a trouble resistance. | 08-21-2014 |
20140241330 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO PROVIDE RELEVANT LOCAL SERVICE OVER WI-FI - This invention provides method and system for a person to get accurate information about service providers in vicinity to serve real time needs. A user can get information services needed in day-to-day life, which includes but is not limited to house hold, emergency, entertainment etc. The Service Providers are within few km/miles so that User's needs are served when needed. This invention uses Wi-Fi (or future advanced technologies which enhance the wireless reach) technology for implementing this invention without any mobile operators involvement. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241331 | WI-FI DIRECT-BASED MESSAGE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Disclosed is a message communication method of transmitting and receiving a certain message, independently of any network, without privacy invasion issues. The method includes generating vendor specific data on the basis of input information, adding the generated vendor specific data to a P2P information element of a probe request frame, and transmitting the probe request frame to another message communication apparatus. Thus, an apparatus conforming to a Wi-Fi Direct standard may transmit/receive a certain message to/from another terminal independently of a use region, a use environment, and a network of a large telecommunication vendor, without privacy invasion issues. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241332 | System and Method for Indicating and Acquiring Information of an Access Point - A method for operating a transmitting device includes generating a configuration index (CI) information element (IE), the CI IE including a CI value and an indicator of a completeness of a configuration information included with the CI IE, wherein the completeness of the configuration information included with the CI IE is one of complete information and simplified information, and placing the CI IE in a frame. The method also includes transmitting the frame. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241333 | METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION IN VISITED NETWORK IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system is disclosed. More particularly, access network selection scheme in visited network in a wireless communication system are disclosed. A method for selecting a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) access network by a user equipment (UE) in a visited network may comprise: determining, by the UE, if a selected WLAN access network in the visited network is available; updating, by the UE, a WLAN selection policy with a list of excluded WLAN access network, if the selected WLAN access network in the visited network is not available; and re-determining, by the UE, if there is an available WLAN access network in the visited network based on the updated WLAN selection policy. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241334 | Systems, Methods, Devices and Arrangements for Emergency Call Services - A variety of methods, systems, devices and arrangements are implemented for emergency call centers. According to one such method, a location database is populated from a plurality of endpoint devices. The location database determines locations for nodes in a data transmission route from information received from the endpoint devices. Emergency calls using these nodes are located using the populated database. | 08-28-2014 |
20140247819 | Autonomous Adaptation of Discovery Packet Transmission Frequency - According to one or more embodiments of the present disclosure, a method for autonomously adapting a discovery packet (DP) transmission frequency comprises: calculating, by an electronic processor of a device of a plurality of devices in a system, a DP transmission cycle “N”, wherein the calculating further comprises: broadcasting, by the device, its own observed device number in a DP; decoding, by the electronic processor of the device, an observed device number from DPs of each detectable device of the plurality of devices in the system; computing, by the electronic processor of the device, a final observed device number for the system wherein the final observed device number is a maximum (“M”) of its own observed device number and all decoded observed device numbers from DPs of the detectable devices; and based on the computed maximum (“M”), determining, by the electronic processor of the device, the DP transmission cycle “N”. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247820 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTIVE ATTENUATION OF PREAMBLE RECEPTION IN CO-LOCATED WI FI ACCESS POINTS - A method and system for attenuating a received preamble in an IEEE | 09-04-2014 |
20140247821 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, NODE, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - Each of the nodes counts the number of other nodes located in a communication area of the node among nodes in a multi-hop network, and determines the number of times to retransmit a frame based on the counted number of the other nodes. Each of the nodes transmits a frame to a destination node, and repeats retransmission of the frame the determined number of times until receiving a response to the transmitted frame. Subsequently, each of the nodes changes a route to the destination node to another route when it does not receive the response after repeating the retransmissions the determined number of times. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247822 | DYNAMIC RANGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ACCESS POINT - The claimed subject matter provides for systems and/or methods for a dynamic range wireless access point to initiate deliberate and/or selective communications with one or more wireless devices over a short range radio path. One embodiment of an access point system comprises a processor that transfers one or more wireless devices to a long range radio path once a transition condition has been met. In another embodiment, an access point system may affect transactions between user/customer's smart devices and a commercial place of business where the access point system and the smart devices initiate communications when the smart devices are deliberately placed within the proximity of the access point antenna and/or the smart devices are brought within the vicinity of the access point antenna such as by passing through the entrance or exit to the place of business. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247823 | TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY LOCATING BY NETWORK CONNECTION AND SELECTIVELY DELIVERING CALLS TO MOBILE CLIENT DEVICES - A communication system for an organization having multiple sites uses a dual-mode device capable of both cell phone communication and telephone communication on a local area network (LAN). IP LANS are established at organization sites such that a temporary IP address is assigned to a dual-mode device that logs onto an organization LAN, and the IP address is associated at a PSTN-connected server on the LAN with the cell phone number of the communication device. The IP server notifies a PSTN-connected routing server when a device logs on to a LAN, and also provides a destination number for the IP server. Cell calls directed to the device are then redirected to the IP server and directed to the device connected to the LAN. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247824 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING UPLINK SIGNAL IN WLAN SYSTEM - Provided are a method and device for processing an uplink (UL) signal in a WLAN system. An access point (AP) receives a request to send (RTS) frame from one station (STA) among a plurality of STAs, transmits a group identifier (ID) of a group to which STAs for performing UL multi user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) transmission together with the one STA, among group IDs of a group to which the one STA belongs, and receives UL signals from the STAs which perform the UL MU-MIMO transmission such that the received UL signals are processed. | 09-04-2014 |
20140254574 | FIREWALL ACCESS FOR INBOUND VOIP CALLS - A method and a system for providing firewall access to inbound calls in a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication session. The server, after receiving a message for an incoming call, sends a PUSH alert notification to the destination device via a cellular network which lacks firewalls to stimulate creation of a new pin hole through the firewall by a renewed registration from the destination device of a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) application. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254575 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PEER-2-PEER WI-FI RANGING USING NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION - According to some aspects, a method includes communicating a request from a first device to a second device using near field communication (NFC). The request includes a preferred mode of wireless local area network (Wi-Fi) operation and state information of the first device. The method further includes receiving a reply at the first device, sent from the second device, including acceptance of the preferred mode of Wi-Fi operation. The method further includes communicating wireless information to establish the Wi-Fi communication link from the first device to the second device. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254576 | Method and Apparatus for Offloading Packet Traffic From LTE Network to WLAN Using DPI - A mobile network configuration is able to offload packet flows based on identification (“ID”) rules to a wireless network using a deep packet inspection (“DPI”) function. After activating DPI function located in a packet data network gateway (“PDN-GW”), every packet flow passing through the PDN-GW is monitored, detected, and analyzed based on a set of predefined ID rules. Upon identifying a packet flow for a predefined network application, the packet flow is offloaded from a long term evolution (“LTE”) network to a wireless local area network (“WLAN”) or Wi-Fi network. To reduce traffic loading on the LTE network, the PDN-GW sends binding updates containing offloading information associated with the packet flow to user equipment (“UE”) for offloading implementation. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254577 | Method for Wireless Easy Connect - A consumer appliance or product having a Wi-Fi embedded device may be connected to a wireless local area network (WLAN) without users having to change networks on their “personal device” e.g., personal computer, tablet computer, smart phone, etc., or having to access the Wi-Fi embedded device in any way, e.g., transparent setup and connection to the user. A specially transmitted data packet, beacon, or other broadcast packet from a client connected to wireless local area network (WLAN) may be used to send an encrypted equivalent of a last stage Wi-Fi protected setup (WPS) transfer that provides network commissioning information to the Wi-Fi embedded device so that it may automatically connect to the WLAN. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254578 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system performs data transmission using spatially multiplexed streams from a first terminal including N antennas to a second terminal including M antennas (N and M are integers larger than or equal to 2 and N>M). | 09-11-2014 |
20140254579 | INTRA-PREMISES CONTENT AND EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - Traffic and signaling is routed between a set of networked femto access points (APs) and devices served there from, and content and equipment that is part of a network functionally coupled to the set of networked femto APs is managed. Networked equipment spans a network deployed within the coverage area spanned by the set of femto APs. A routing platform functionally couples the networked equipment and the femto AP to enable content manipulation amongst a mobile device and the equipment. Routing platform also affords remote control of the networked equipment. Delivery of advertisement and monetary incentive(s) can be provided through the routing platform to the equipment. Routing platform further provides security features related to operation of specific equipment and wireless services supplied via the routing platform. | 09-11-2014 |
20140269643 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR GEO-FENCING - Certain implementations of the disclosed technology may include systems, methods, and computer-readable media for wireless geo-fencing. According to an example implementation, a method is provided that may include receiving a set of network identification addresses for a plurality of wireless access points (AP) associated with at least one geo-fence, generating filter coefficients based on the received set of network identification addresses, receiving a network identification address for an in-range wireless access point, generating a test representation of the received network identification address, and determining whether the test representation corresponds a potential member of the received set of network identification addresses associated with the at least one geo-fence. If the test representation corresponds a potential member of the received set of network identification addresses, the method may determine if the received network identification address for the in-range wireless access point is an actual member of the geo-fence. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269644 | ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RATE MODIFICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Embodiments determine that interference between two radio transmissions is causing, or has the potential to cause, a network device to fail to receive acknowledgement packets. In response to such a determination, the embodiments lower an acknowledgement packet transmission bit rate to increase the likelihood that an acknowledgement packet can be successfully received, thereby avoiding needless retransmission of packets that have been successfully received. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269645 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SYNCHRONIZATION - Examples disclosed herein may relate to wireless access point synchronization for use in mobile device position estimation. In an aspect, one-way synchronization packets may be exchanged among neighboring access points, and individual access points may adjust a local dock based at least in part on time reference indicators received in synchronization packets. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269646 | WiFi Direct Connection Using Machine-Readable Labels - Systems and methods are disclosed for a first WiFi Direct device to receive a machine-readable label from a second WiFi Direct device to provide information on the P2P WiFi capability of the second WiFi Direct device to aid the two devices in establishing a WiFi Direct connection. The machine-readable label may include the display of a QR code by the second WiFi Direct device to the first WiFi Direct device. The information on the WiFi capability of the second WiFi Direct device may include the identity of the listen channel, the operating channel, whether the device is a P2P group owner or not (e.g., a P2P client device), and other service and/or configuration information. Because the first WiFi Direct device knows whether the second WiFi Direct device is a group owner or not, the first WiFi Direct device may take the appropriate connection to establish the WiFi Direct connection. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269647 | TECHNIQUE FOR IMPLEMENTING A LATENCY SENSITIVE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL IN A WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A wireless mesh network is configured to implement a latency-sensitive communication protocol in order to facilitate data communications between devices coupled to that network and configured to communicate with one another based on that protocol. Specifically, a node within the wireless mesh network receives a continuous stream of data that includes an N-bit sequence from an upstream device coupled to the wireless mesh network. The node transmits the N-bit sequence to a downstream node within the wireless mesh network. The downstream node re-creates the continuous stream of bits based on the received N-bit sequence, and then transmits the re-created continuous stream of bits to another device coupled to the wireless mesh network. By operating in conjunction with one another, the nodes within the wireless mesh network facilitate communication between the devices coupled to wireless mesh network according to the latency-sensitive communication protocol. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269648 | Distributed Network Layer Mobility for Unified Access Networks - The present disclosure discloses a method and network device providing distributed network layer mobility for unified access networks. The method eliminates the need for a secure tunnel between a home network device and a foreign network device when a client roams from the home network device to the foreign network device. The disclosed network device receives an association request from a client device in a wireless network; identifies a first wireless virtual local area network (VLAN) that the client device is assigned to; and, allows traffic to or from the client device to be transmitted via the network device on the first wireless VLAN, wherein traffic on at least a second wireless VLAN is transmitted via the network device and segregated from the traffic on the first wireless VLAN. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269649 | INTEGRATED PERSONAL HOTSPOT AND CAR CHARGING ADAPTER DEVICE - A personal hotspot and charging adapter device is provided that integrates aspects of a personal hotspot device and a charging adapter device, such as that which can be utilized in conjunction with a power jack, e.g., a cigarette lighter receptacle within a vehicle or similar power supply. Such a personal hotspot and charging adapter device is capable of providing connectivity between a host computing device and a data network, such as the Internet, via, e.g., a wireless local area network (WLAN) connection between the host computing device and the personal hotspot and charging adapter device, and a wireless wide area network (WWAN) connection between the personal hotspot and charging adapter device and service provider, where the personal hotspot aspect of the personal hotspot and charging adapter device may be powered without a need for extra cabling or inconvenient installation in the vehicle. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269650 | DEVICES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS IMPLEMENTING A FRONT END PARTITION OF A WIRELESS MODEM - This disclosure provides systems, methods, and apparatus for implementing a front-end partition of a wireless modems. In one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus is provided. The wireless communication apparatus includes a wireless local area network modem including a first chip including a first portion of the wireless local area network modem configured to process signals and a second chip including a second portion of the wireless local area network modem. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a wide area network modem. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a combining circuit configured to combine the signals processed by the first portion and a transmission line configured to transmit the combined signals to the second chip and the wide area network modem. The wireless communication apparatus further includes a data modem including interference cancellation circuitry configured to cancel interference between the wireless local area network modem and the wide area network modem. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269651 | MEDIA DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ECOSYSTEM SETUP - Embodiments relate generally to electrical and electronic hardware, computer software, wired and wireless network communications, and portable and wearable media devices. Media devices may include a plurality of RF transceivers and an audio system. The RF transceivers and/or audio system may be used to wirelessly communicate between media devices and allow configuration and other data to be wirelessly transmitted from one media device to another media device. A user device may be used to Bluetooth® (BT) pair with a media device and to install a configuration on the media device. Other media devices may be configured using the configuration without breaking the BT pairing and without the other media device having to BT pair with the user device. Each media device may include at least one antenna and may include an antenna that is de-tunable. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269652 | AUTOMATIC SELECTION OF COORDINATING FUNCTIONALITY IN A HYBRID COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A hybrid device can be configured to execute operations to select singleton coordinating functionality in a hybrid communication network. In one embodiment, a single master device (e.g., a hybrid device configured as both a registrar and a central access point (CAP)) can be selected. The hybrid device can transmit search messages to detect an existing master device and/or to identify other hybrid devices contending to become the master device. The hybrid device with the preferred device identifier is selected as the master device. In another embodiment, operations for selecting the coordinating functionality are split into two independent stages—a CAP selection stage and a registrar selection stage. In the CAP selection stage, the hybrid device with a preferred device weight (or a preferred device weight and a preferred device identifier) is configured as the CAP. In the registrar selection stage, similar operations can be executed to select the registrar. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269653 | Techniques for Roaming between Wireless Local Area Networks Belonging to a Social Network - Examples are disclosed for roaming between wireless local area networks (WLANs) belonging to a social network. In some examples, configuration information for a WLAN may be received for setting up the WLAN for a social network. The social network may have one or more roaming members. Information about the roaming members and one or more policies for the roaming members to connect to the WLAN may also be received. For these examples, the configuration information, roaming member information and the one or more policies may be maintained at a server for a service provider related to the WLAN. Other examples are described and claimed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269654 | Techniques for Selecting an Access Point for Wireless Network Discovery - Examples are disclosed for selecting an access point for network discovery by a mobile device. In some examples, a mobile device may scan access points belonging to one or more extended service sets (ESSs) belonging to one or more networks. The one or more networks may have advertisement servers capable of providing a generic advertising service (GAS) to the mobile device. The mobile device may select a single access point from among each of the ESSs to relay messages to advertisement servers of the one or more networks for the advertisement servers to provide the GAS to the mobile device. Other examples are described and claimed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269655 | Dynamic Rate Control In WiFi Systems - A wireless device is configured to switch data rates to account for temporary channel conditions or device configuration errors. Pre-selected data rates, more likely to achieve maximum goodput, are stored in a data rate table. The data rate table contains candidate data rates for each pre-selected data rate in the data rate table. When probe transmissions using the preselected data rates fail, dynamic rate probing is utilized to determine a possible cause and extent of the problem. The dynamic rate probing scheme transmits probe transmissions using the candidate data rates and tracks success or failure of these probe transmissions. An analysis of the probe transmissions is used to indicate a possible cause and/or extent of the problematic condition and to determine whether there is a need to reconfigure the data rates in the data rate table. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269656 | MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT AND MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) TRANSMISSION METHOD AND SYSTEM IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - Provided is a data transmission method and system in a wireless local area network (WLAN) supporting a multi-user multiple-input and multiple-output (MU-MIMO), the method including determining a type of a first frame to be transmitted to at least one reception terminal, setting, based on a result of the determining, user identification (ID) information indicating an order of the at least one reception terminal, transmitting the first frame to the at least one reception terminal corresponding to the user ID information, receiving, from the at least one reception terminal, a second frame corresponding to the first frame, extracting, based on the received second frame, a beamforming parameter of the at least one reception terminal, and transmitting, to a physical (PHY) layer, the user ID information and the beamforming parameter corresponding to the at least one reception terminal. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269657 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FRIEND DISCOVERY - A nearby friend discovery method is provided, including: generating, by an electronic device, an access point (AP) list identifying one or more access points (APs), the AP list being generated based on the strength of signals received from the access points; transmitting the AP list from the electronic device to a server; receiving, by the electronic device from the server, a nearby friend list, the nearby friend list including an indication of one or more users who are located within a signal range of at least one of the access points identified in the AP list and who have previously exchanged one or more communications with a user of the electronic device; and displaying the nearby friend list. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269658 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SHARING CONTEXT INFORMATION IN A NEIGHBOR AWARE NETWORK - Systems and methods share context information on a neighbor aware network. In one aspect, a context providing device receives a plurality of responses to a discovery query from a context consuming device, and tailors services it offers to the context consuming device based on the responses. In another aspect, a context providing device indicates in its response to a discovery query which services or local context information it can provide to the context consuming device, and also a cost associated with providing the service or the local context information. In some aspects, the cost is in units of monetary currency. In other aspects, the cost is in units of user interface display made available to an entity associated with the context providing device in exchange for the services or local context information offered to the context consuming device. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269659 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEGMENTATION OF MODULATION CODING SCHEME - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for segmentation of modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for data transmission. A frame with a header and a data unit can be generated, wherein a field of the frame indicates the data unit being split into segments associated with different MCSs. Further, a frame with a plurality of symbols can be generated, each symbol comprises one or more data units, wherein one or more fields in the one or more data units of that symbol indicate MCS of another symbol of the plurality of symbols immediately following that symbol. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269660 | USING A CONTROL PANEL AS A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - A method for providing wireless access to one or more wireless devices using an automation system control panel is described. In one embodiment, a communication link is established between an automation system control panel and one or more automation components. Settings are applied to configure the automation system control panel for use as a wireless access point providing two-way communication with one or more electronic devices. Applying settings includes receiving input directly at a graphical user interface of the automation system control panel, the graphical user interface further providing access to control the one or more automation components. The automation system control panel is wirelessly connected to one or more electronic devices via a wireless access point interface using the settings applied at the graphical user interface. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269661 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM - If a network having the same SSID as but a different BSSID from those of a network that has been established by a first communication apparatus is detected, the network established by the first communication apparatus is terminated and the first communication apparatus participates in the detected network. This makes it possible for the first communication apparatus and another communication apparatus to participate in the same network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269662 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS CONTROLLED BY CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS - A centralized wireless local area network access controller includes a memory that stores instructions, and a processor that executes the instructions. The instructions cause the centralized wireless local area network access controller to perform a process. The process includes receiving, via a cellular network, information from a dual mode mobile device within range of a wireless local area network. The process also includes confirming that the dual mode mobile device can communicate via the wireless local area network. The process also includes sending instructions for the dual mode mobile device to communicate via the wireless local area network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140286321 | METHOD OF ASSOCIATING A CLIENT WITH AN ACCESS POINT IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method of associating a client with an access point in a wireless local area network. The access point broadcasts a beacon announcing the existence of the access point. The beacon comprises a field which has a list of client identifiers of acceptable clients from which the access point will accept an association request. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286322 | BASE STATIONS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES, AND METHODS FOR ASSISTING A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE IN CONNECTING TO AN ACCESS POINT (AP) WHEN CAMPED ON OR CONNECTED TO A BASE STATION - A base station providing a cellular access service in a cell coverage includes a wireless module and a controller module. The wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a mobile communication device using a telecommunication technology. The controller module determines one or more Access Points (APs) providing a Short Range Wireless (SRW) service in the cell coverage, selects one or more APs from the determined APs, and sends access information of the selected APs to the mobile communication device | 09-25-2014 |
20140286323 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND CONNECTING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless network system and a connecting method thereof are provided. The wireless network system includes a Wi-Fi apparatus and a communication apparatus. The Wi-Fi apparatus provides a Service Set Identifier (SSID). The SSID includes a first identifier value and a second identifier value, and the second identifier value is derived from the first identifier value by a hash function. After searching the SSID of the Wi-Fi apparatus, the communication apparatus determines that a value derived from the first identifier value of the SSID by the hash function is equal to the second identifier value, and then establishes a Wi-Fi authenticating connection with the Wi-Fi apparatus according to a connection password. The Wi-Fi apparatus establishes a data transmission connection with the communication apparatus after determining that the communication apparatus is legal according to the Wi-Fi authenticating connection. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286324 | METHOD AND/OR SYSTEM FOR PASSIVE LOCATION ESTIMATION - Described are a system and method for a first wireless access point to compute timing parameters of neighboring access points based, at least in part, on beacon signals transmitted the neighboring access points. The first wireless access point may the broadcast the computed timing parameters to mobile devices. A mobile device having received the computed timing parameters may then compute an estimate of its location based, at least in part, on subsequently acquired beacon signals transmitted from the first access point and/or neighboring access points. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286325 | VEHICLE NETWORK TRANSMISSION METHOD AND TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A vehicle network transmission method and a vehicle network transmission system are provided. The vehicle network transmission method comprises the following steps. A first transmission device transmits a data signal to a second transmission device. It is determined whether the second transmission device is located in a target area. If the second transmission device is located in the target area, then a geographic location of the first transmission device is retrieved and a transmission region of the first transmission device is calculated. It is determined whether all of the third transmission devices adjacent to the second transmission device in the target area are located in the transmission region. If all of the third transmission devices adjacent to the second transmission device in the target area are located in the transmission region, then the second transmission device does not continue forwarding the data signal. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286326 | LOCATION-SPECIFIC WLAN INFORMATION PROVISION METHOD IN CELL OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data communication method of a terminal of a mobile communication system is provided. The data communication method includes transmitting a first message including location-related information of the terminal to a base station, receiving a second message including a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Access Point (AP) list corresponding to the location-related information of the terminal, and scanning, if the WLAN AP list includes at least one WLAN AP, for WLAN APs included in the WLAN AP list. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286327 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - Methods and devices for transmitting or receiving data in a wireless local area network are provided. The method in one embodiment includes transmitting, by a transmitter, a first long training field (LTF) to a receiver; transmitting, by the transmitter, a very high throughput (VHT)-SIG-A field to the receiver; transmitting, by a transmitter, a second LTF for multiple input multiple output (MIMO) channel estimation to the receiver; transmitting, by the transmitter, a VHT-SIG-B field to the receiver; and transmitting, by the transmitter, a data field to the receiver, wherein the first LTF, the VHT-SIG-A field, the second LTF, the VHT-SIG-B field and the data field are sequentially transmitted, and wherein the second LTF and the data field are mapped to at least one spatial stream based on a mapping matrix but the first LTF and the VHT SIG-A field are not mapped to the at least one spatial stream. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286328 | WLAN HOME NETWORKING WITH MULTI-ROOM DVR DIRECT LINK - A method includes operating a communication system ( | 09-25-2014 |
20140293977 | CACHE BASED ZIGBEE NETWORK DISCOVERY METHOD - The present description relates to a cache based ZigBee network discovery method. A first service profile that specifies a service selected by a user is generated, and it is determined whether previously stored ZigBee network related information includes information about a service providing network that provides the service specified by the first service profile. A first network discovery procedure is performed when it is determined that the previously stored ZigBee network related information does not include the information about the service providing network, and a second network discovery procedure is carried out when it is determined that the previously stored ZigBee network related information includes at least one piece of information about the service providing network. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293978 | System and Method for Pre-Association Discovery - A method for operating a seeker device includes generating a first seeker truncated hash output from a sought service name, and generating a second seeker truncated hash output from the sought service name, wherein the first seeker truncated hash output and the second seeker truncated hash output are uncorrelated. The method also includes transmitting a first request message including the first seeker truncated hash output, and receiving a first response message from an advertiser device, the first response message including a second advertiser truncated hash output generated from an advertised service name, wherein the first seeker truncated hash output matches a first advertiser truncated hash output generated from the advertised service name. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293979 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELF ORGANIZING NETWORKS - A method for running a Self Organizing Network (SON) module in a communication network provides an open Application Programming Interface (API) for a SON framework and executes the SON module. The SON module accesses the functionality of the SON framework using the API. The SON module may be built by a developer other than a SON system provider and may be loaded into the SON framework by an operator other than a SON system provider. The SON module may be implemented as a state machine. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293980 | Communication Device - A communication device may receive first information from a terminal device in a case where a first communication link is established via a first type of interface between the communication device and the terminal device. The communication device may determine whether a communication via a second type of interface between the communication device and the terminal device is performable, establish a second communication link via the first type of interface between the communication device and the terminal device, and perform a two-way communication of second information with the terminal device by using the second communication link in a case where it is determined that the communication via the second type of interface is performable. The communication device may not perform the two-way communication of the second information with the terminal device in a case where it is determined that the communication is not performable. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293981 | System and Method for Wireless Network Selection - In one embodiment, a method for wireless network selection includes obtaining, by a user equipment (UE) from a visitor access network discovery and selection function (V-ANDSF) server, a visitor policy and creating a wireless local area network (WLAN) priority list in accordance with the visitor policy, a home policy, and a priority indicator. The method also includes selecting a WLAN from the priority list as a selected network. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293982 | TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION SUPPORT - Techniques for wireless network discovery and selection support are described. In one embodiment, for example, an evolved packet core (EPC) node may comprise a processor circuit to implement an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) according to a management object that includes a branch comprising one or more policies to select a wireless local area network (WLAN), the processing circuitry to receive capabilities information and location information for a user equipment (UE) and determine access network information for the UE based on the capabilities information and the location information. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293983 | WAP SUPPORTING COMPLEMENTARY SUBNETS IN A WLAN - A wireless access point (WAP) including: a station set identifier and a subnet controller. The station set identifier is configured to identify at least one set of at least two station nodes among the plurality of station nodes and complementary communication options for each station in the at least one set which facilitate concurrent communications between the WAP and the stations in the set. The subnet controller is configured both to generate subnets equal in number to a number of stations in at least one set, and for each subnet an associated beacon channel discrete from the beacon channels of other subnets, together with any required aggregate channels matching each station's identified communication option and an associated medium access control, and further to control transmission of data from the WAP to the at least two station nodes concurrently on the associated subnets. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293984 | ENHANCING PACKET AGGREGATION PERFORMANCE IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless combination (combo) device is coupled to an antenna for communicating via a first wireless network over a first band. A packet aggregator is coupled to the first wireless transceiver configures a frame aggregated packet for at least a portion of activities on the first wireless network. The frame aggregated packet includes a plurality of data packets and a dummy packet or spoofing so that said frame aggregated packet is extended in time or indicates an extension sufficient to overlap a Tx time interval or Rx time interval for communications occurring over a second wireless network. The first wireless network and said second wireless network are overlapping networks. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293985 | MESSAGING SERVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless device for providing a message service is disclosed, along with a computer readable medium. The wireless device may be capable of sending messages via a packet switched WLAN base station in a first mode, or via an SMS base station that is independent of the packet switched base station, in a second mode. A message client on the wireless device determines whether a recipient's wireless device corresponds to a subscriber of a service for receiving the outgoing message via a packet switched bearer. The wireless device sends, via a WLAN transceiver, if the recipient's wireless device corresponds to a subscriber of the service, the outgoing message to the recipient's wireless device in the first mode. Alternatively, if the recipient's wireless device does not correspond to a subscriber of the service, the outgoing message is sent by a cellular transmitter via the SMS base station in the second mode. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293986 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROUTING A WIRELESS CONNECTION IN A HYBRID NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to systems and methods for establishing and/or routing wireless data and/or voice connections across a hybrid network based upon a user's selection or preference. In some embodiments, a method for routing a wireless connection across a hybrid network comprises allowing a user to select a routing preference, routing the wireless connection via a short-haul communications network if the routing preference indicates a short-haul communications network choice, and routing the wireless connection via a cellular network if the routing preference indicates a cellular network choice. In other embodiments, the present invention provides a system and method for learning the user's data, cellular, and/or VoIP access habits in order to optimize the user's experience. In yet other embodiments, the present invention allows carriers to comply with CALEA and E911 rules by identifying the location of hybrid devices within the hybrid network. | 10-02-2014 |
20140301378 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY PROTOCOL IN A WLAN - A method for implementing neighbor discovery protocol in a wireless local area network (WLAN) and an access point (AP). In the method, the AP prestores the logic group of each wireless client associated to the AP, determines the logic group of a neighbor discovery protocol related message when the message is received by the AP, and transmits the neighbor discovery protocol related message to at least one wireless client included in the logic group of the message via a unicast mode, respectively, according to prestored information relating to the logic group of each wireless client associated to the AP. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301379 | WIRELESS RFID NETWORKING SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments of the present invention include a wireless access point that acquires and processes radio frequency identification (RFID) information. The wireless access point may be coupled to a network of RFID readers over a wireless network. The RFID readers may read a plurality of RFID tags and transmit information to one or more readers. The readers may, in turn, transmit the RFID information to a wireless access point. The wireless access point may include a middleware layer for performing a variety of RFID data processing functions. In one embodiment, the wireless RFID reader network may be used to improve positioning of readers and tags, and may include a GPS system or position assisted GPS system at the reader and/or tag level. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301380 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, PROGRAM, INFORMATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a communication apparatus | 10-09-2014 |
20140301381 | GENERIC CLIENT FOR COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A wireless communication device can include a processor to operate multiple virtual network interfaces that communicate simultaneously over a common wireless physical interface with different wireless networks. A first virtual network interface can be an infrastructure virtual interface to communicate over a first infrastructure network, and a second virtual network interfaces can be an ad-hoc interface to communicate over a second ad-hoc network. Another virtual network interfaces can be a Station (STA) infrastructure interface to communicate with an Access Point (AP) over a first infrastructure wireless network, and another virtual network interface can be a AP infrastructure interface to communicate with a STA over a second infrastructure wireless network. Another virtual network interface can be a Wireless Distribution System (WDS) interface to allow the AP infrastructure interface to communicate with another Access Point. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301382 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISABLING TRANSMISSION OF A PACKET WITH AGGREGATED DATA FROM MULTIPLE PACKETS HAVING AN ADDRESS FOR A GROUP OF NETWORK DEVICES - A first network device including a first module, a control module, an aggregation module, a format module and an interface. The first module relates multiple addresses of a group of network devices to a first address. The control module determines whether both first packet and second packets have the first address. The aggregation module, in response to determining that the first and second packets have the first address, concatenate the first and second packets to provide aggregated data. The format module adds a header to the aggregated data to generate a third packet for a second network device. The interface, based on whether transmission to the second network device is enabled for the third packet, transmits the third packet to the second network device. The first module disables transmission of the third packet if a timer expires or a leave message is received from the second network device. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301383 | METHOD AND APAPRATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A FRAME IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for transmitting a frame in a wireless LAN system. An access point (AP) receives a single orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol from each of a plurality of stations (STA) and a single-tone request to send (sRTS) frame through a single subcarrier, selects STAs for performing uplink (UL) multiuser (MU)-multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission, and transmits to the plurality of STAs a single-tone clear to send (sCTS) frame allocated to the same subcarrier as a subcarrier to which the sRTS frames received from the selected STAs are allocated. | 10-09-2014 |
20140307721 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DELIVERING PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK SERVICE AND BROADBAND INTERNET ACCESS - Apparatus and methods are disclosed for delivering Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Broadband Internet access and Private Data services using Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) over an Ethernet based transport network though a private fixed wireless network. An embodiment of the invention utilizes a Class 4/5 soft switch connected to a private fixed wireless network designed and constructed to deliver near toll quality PSTN, Broadband Internet and Private Data services to a Subscriber. Specifically, a combination of known managed routers, switches, Analog Telephone Adapters (ATA), Integrated Access Devices (IAD), and fixed wireless equipment based on IEEE 802.11x standards may be interconnected with a Class 4/5 soft switch. The resulting network may be uniquely configured to utilize redundant automatic failover backbone connectivity to access points (AP) within the private fixed wireless network. Additionally, the network may utilize TCP/IP prioritization standards throughout the private fixed wireless network to consistently deliver near toll grade quality Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP). | 10-16-2014 |
20140307722 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING BEAMFORMING REPORT FRAME FOR TRANSMIT BEAMFORMING - A method of transmitting a beamforming report frame for transmit beamforming is provided. The method may include acquiring, by a receiver, data of a signal transmitted by a transmitter, selecting either media access control (MAC) software or MAC hardware, to assign a sequence number based on a type of the data, and assigning a sequence number to the management frame based on the data, using either the MAC software or MAC hardware that is selected. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307723 | PERSONAL AREA NETWORK APPARATUS - A portable endpoint device comprises a first virtual device and a second virtual device integrated in a same single unit and configured such that the first virtual device and the second virtual device are configured to allow communication therewith as virtually different physical devices despite being integrated in the same single unit. In operation, the device is configured to receive a first signal from another endpoint device to indicate the availability of the another endpoint device for attachment; send, to the another endpoint device a second signal utilizing first scheduling-related information, the second signal including a first one of a plurality of identifiers for unique identification in association with the portable endpoint device; receive, from the another endpoint device a third signal that is sent in response to the second signal; and receive, from the another endpoint device data utilizing a second one of the identifiers for identification in association with the portable endpoint device. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307724 | Multi-Vehicle Shared Communications Network and Bandwidth - Methods and systems for a vehicle system that include accessing the bandwidth of a wireless communication system whose bandwidth may be available for use by a vehicle. The vehicle receives permission from the wireless communication system that has access to bandwidth to utilize the bandwidth. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307725 | ACCESS POINT AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - An access point and a method for connecting wireless communication thereof are provided. The method includes, if a connecting device is connected to the access point, registering information of the connecting device, if the connecting device transmits a first signal in response to a beacon message of the access point after having been disconnected from the access point and connected to a host device, determining whether the connecting device is already registered using the first signal, and, if it is determined that the connecting device is already registered, connecting to the host device via the wireless communication connection. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307726 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING FRAME IN WLAN SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a frame in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system is provided. The method includes receiving, by a first station, information about an association identifier (AID) from an access point, the AID identifying the first station in the WLAN system; transmitting, by the first station, a Direct Link Setup (DLS) request frame to a second station to request a setup for a direct link with the second station, the DLS request frame including the AID of the first station; receiving, by the first station, a DLS response frame from the second station in response to the DLS request frame, the DLS response frame including an AID of the second station; and transmitting, by the first station, a Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) to the second station or the access point. | 10-16-2014 |
20140314058 | Optimizing device service availability and usage in a wireless personal network - The proposed embodiment provides a method and system for automatically optimizing services in a network. The method includes receiving parameters associated with services of one or more devices in the network, prioritizing the parameters associated with the services in accordance to a plurality of rules, and selecting an optimized service associated with the devices based on the assigned priorities of the parameters associated with the services. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314059 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING PEER-TO-PEER APPLICATIONS OVER A WIRELESS LAN, AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING A CONNECTION BETWEEN THE PEER-TO-PEER APPLICATIONS OVER THE WIRELESS LAN, AND WIRELESS LAN-BASED PEER TERMINAL - A method for connecting peer-to-peer applications over a wireless LAN comprises the steps of: a peer terminal extracting application information from the peer-to-peer applications; the peer terminal generating service start information from the extracted application information; during a predetermined waiting time, the peer terminal determining whether or not at least one other peer terminal corresponding to the service start information exists; and setting the terminal having the highest leader pseudo-measurement as a leader terminal and setting the other terminals as member terminals based on a leader pseudo-measurement included in the service start information and a leader pseudo-measurement received from the or each other peer terminal when at least one other peer terminal corresponding to the service start information exists. Therefore, the present invention has the effect of being able to automatically and quickly connect the peer-to-peer applications over the wireless LAN. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314060 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT AGGREGATION SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) SYSTEM - Provided is a method and apparatus for efficient aggregation scheduling in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, the apparatus including a delay setting unit to set a required delay time for each access category (AC), a storing unit to store a traffic identification (TID) of a packet in a queue of a corresponding AC when the packet arrives, a delay time calculator to calculate a maximum delay time predicted when the packet arriving at the queue is configured to be an A-MPDU and the configured A-MPDU is transmitted, and an A-MPDU configuring unit to compare the calculated maximum delay time and the required delay time, and configure a corresponding A-MPDU when the calculated maximum delay time is greater than the required delay time. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314061 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WI-FI DATA TRANSMISSION - A system for networking Wi-Fi Access Points in a Distributed Antenna System includes a plurality of Digital Access Units (DAUs). The plurality of DAUs are coupled and operable to route signals between the plurality of DAUs. The system also includes a plurality of Digital Remote Units (DRUs) coupled to the plurality of DAUs and operable to transport signals between DRUs and DAUs and a plurality of DAU ports and DRU ports. The system further includes a Framer/Deframer, wherein the cellular payload data is separated from the IP data and a network switch. The IP data from a plurality of DAU and DRU ports are buffered and routed to a plurality of DAU and DRU ports. Furthermore, the system includes a plurality of Wi-Fi access points coupled via a mesh network to Wi-Fi access points connected to a plurality of DRUs. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314062 | Aquatic-Based Automation Systems - Described are hardware, software and related control systems using a mesh network in an environment that incorporates aquatic vessels such as pools, spas and fountains. The system uses fully wireless and semi-wireless devices in conjunction with various components within the aquatic system. Integrated hardware-based and software-based solutions are also present for the improved maintenance, monitoring and operation of home-based systems with aquatic vessels. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314063 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTIMATING CHANNEL BASED ON SIGNAL FIELD CHANNEL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) SYSTEM - Provided is a method of estimating a channel based on signal field channel information in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, the method including acquiring a first complex storage value based on training field channel information, acquiring a second storage value based on the signal field channel information, setting a first signal and a second signal based on the first complex storage value and the second complex storage value, and generating an output signal based on the first signal and the second signal. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314064 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA UNIT IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for transmitting a data unit in a wireless local area network system, according to one embodiment. The method comprises transmitting a signal field, transmitting a first data symbol for a first data field, and transmitting a second data symbol for a second data field. The signal field, the first data symbol, and the second data symbol are transmitted through a 1 MHz channel bandwidth having a band of 1 GHz or less. Two pilot tones are inserted to each of the first data symbol and the second data symbol. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314065 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SEARCHING FOR SUPPORTED SERVICE THROUGH WIFI DIRECT NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and device that may determine a service provided by a WiFi device to be connected before connecting a WiFi direct network. According to at least one embodiment of the present invention, if a service for an owner device of a wireless communication group is discovered for in the process of discovering for a service for the wireless communication group, there is the advantage that is possible to more conveniently perform the service discovery process by obtaining supported service information on each device belonging to the group. In addition, if there is a currently unavailable service in the process of discovering for the service for the wireless communication group, there is the advantage that it is possible to provide information highly necessary for a user to determine network establishment by further providing information on the unavailable service. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321444 | WIRELESS LOCAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS FROM WAN FALLBACK - A method, a mobile device, and a wireless system provide wireless local communication systems and methods from Wide Area Network (WAN) fallback allowing proximate users to maintain connectivity therebetween while WAN connectivity is lost. The wireless local communication systems and methods leverage access point credentials for the WAN to set up local wireless communication amongst the mobile devices when WAN connectivity is lost or when commanded to do so. Local mobile device users can maintain communication such as in a talkgroup while WAN connectivity is disrupted or undesired. The systems and methods include an algorithm where a first mobile device identifies the loss of WAN connectivity and becomes a WAN access point for other proximate mobile devices which share common preconfigured credentials. Subsequent mobile devices which detect the loss of WAN connectivity can associate with the AP thereby maintaining local communication using local wireless connectivity techniques. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321445 | Overlaying Virtual Broadcast Domains On An Underlying Physical Network - Operations include determining that a subset of devices, from a plurality of devices, are executing a same application, located in a same geographical location, or correspond to a same user. Responsive to the determining operation, a group with the subset of devices is created and communication between the devices is supported. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321446 | CONNECTION INFORMATION CONTROL METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREFOR - A method and an apparatus for controlling connection information stored in an electronic device is provided. The method includes determining connection information, for at least one local-area wireless communication device, stored in the electronic device, selecting the connection information, for the at least one local-area wireless communication device, to be transmitted to a counterpart electronic device, and transmitting the connection information to the counterpart electronic device. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321447 | X2 SETUP AND ROUTING AT AN X2-GATEWAY - An access point may perform a method for X2 communication set up in a wireless communication network. The method may include discovering a neighbor node at an access point, optionally in response to detecting a new neighbor node, or an address parameter change at a neighbor node. The method may further include transmitting to an X2 gateway (X2-GW), a registration message comprising an address of the neighbor node for X2 communication. The registration message may include at least two addresses of the at least one neighbor node, the two addresses corresponding to addresses at a higher protocol layer and a lower protocol layer, for example a transport network layer (TNL) address and radio network layer (RNL) address of the at least one neighbor node. The access point may further receive an acknowledgement message from the X2-GW for the registration message. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321448 | DETECTION AND REPORTING OF KEEPALIVE MESSAGES FOR OPTIMIZATION OF KEEPALIVE TRAFFIC IN A MOBILE NETWORK - Detection of network transactions or keepalives for maintaining long lived connections are disclosed. A keepalive detector can detect keepalive traffic based on keepalive parameters determined from an analysis of socket level network communication log data that record data transfer events including data sent from mobile applications or clients on a mobile device and data received by the mobile applications or clients on the mobile device, timing characteristics, protocol types, etc. Various statistical analyses can be performed on the network communication data to detect keepalives, taking into account variability in intervals of the data transfer events and sizes of data sent and received on each event. The keepalive detector can also detect keepalives from stream data on a mobile device by analyzing socket level communication messages including timing characteristics and amount of data transferred to detect keepalives and report keepalives using a data structure. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321449 | Data Communications Method, Apparatus, and System - A data communications method, apparatus, and system are provided. The method includes: sending an association request message to an access point; receiving an association response message sent by the access point, where the association response message includes an association identifier; generating a data frame, where a format of the data frame is a simplified frame format, and a frame header of the data frame includes a source address and a destination address, where the length of the source address is shorter than the length of a Media Access Control (MAC) address, and the source address includes the association identifier, the association identifier and a multicast unicast indicator, the association identifier and a data type, or the association identifier, the data type, and the multicast unicast indicator; and sending the data frame to the access point. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328334 | PROVISIONING A WIRELESS DEVICE FOR SECURE COMMUNICATION USING AN ACCESS POINT DESIGNED WITH PUSH-BUTTON MODE OF WPS (WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP) - A wireless device is provisioned according to WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) push button mode. The wireless device receives an electronic signal from a provisioning agent external to the wireless device, the electronic signal indicating to the wireless device that the wireless device is to start WPS provisioning procedures. A user presses a push button on an AP to which the wireless device is to be connected. On receipt of the electronic signal, the wireless device enrolls in a wireless network, of which the AP is a part, by communicating with the access point in accordance with push button mode of WPS. The technique enables a wireless device to be provisioned without a user requiring to press any button on the wireless device. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328335 | BEAM CHANGE AND SMOOTHING IN MIXED MODE WLAN SYSTEMS - A first wireless communication device including a physical layer device configured to generate a data packet having a mixed mode preamble. The mixed mode preamble includes a first portion to be transmitted omnidirectionally via a single stream, and a second portion to be transmitted in a beamformed manner. The mixed mode preamble includes a signal field corresponding to information about the data packet. The signal field includes a first sub-field that indicates a number of streams of the second portion and a second sub-field indicating, based on the first sub-field, whether to perform a beam change between the first portion and the second portion or whether to perform channel smoothing on the second portion. A transceiver is configured to transmit, from the first wireless communication device to a second wireless communication device, the data packet having the mixed mode preamble. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328336 | DEVICE, METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR COMMUNICATION ON A ZIGBEE NETWORK - In a zigbee network, reliable communications are provided by maintaining messages transmitted from a device in a message queue in the device. If no successful acknowledgement is received for a transmitted message, the message is re-transmitted when the message queue executes. Messages are deleted from the queue when the message is successfully transmitted or when a maximum number of re-tries has been exhausted. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328337 | PORTABLE INFORMATION TERMINAL PORTABLE INFORMATION SYSTEM AND COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREON PORTABLE INFORMATION TERMINAL CONTROL PROGRAM - When a portable information terminal operates in an unused state, a predetermined access point is searched for. As a result, when the predetermined access point is detected, a connection to the predetermined access point is established, and a predetermined data communication process is performed. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328338 | ROUTE INFORMATION EXCHANGE METHOD, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM STORING ROUTE INFORMATION EXCHANGE PROGRAM - Upon receiving a routing control message from another communication terminal (B | 11-06-2014 |
20140334463 | TRILATERATION PROCESSING - Embodiments of the invention address how trilateration processes are affected by physical placement and sub-optimal selection of peer devices (PDs) used to obtain a location of a mobile computing device. Embodiments of the invention describe processes for selecting nearest PDs over further PDs, as received signal strength indicator (RSSI) measurements are more reliable—i.e., said “nearest PDs” provide more accurate distance measurements while improving the probability of finding more intersection points. Embodiments of the invention further describe selecting a physical spread of PDs to help increase the number of intersection points while helping distinction/resolution of the location of the mobile device in both the ‘x’ (longitude) and the ‘y’ (latitude) directions. Embodiments of the invention further enhance trilateration processes by utilizing dampening values for calculated location poll data. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334464 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SETTING UP AN APPLICATION SERVICE PLATFORM (ASP) PEER TO PEER (P2P) GROUP - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of setting up an Application Service Platform (ASP) Peer-to-Peer (P2P) persistent group. For example, an apparatus may include a first ASP to communicate with a second ASP to setup one or more ASP-P2P groups over a wireless communication link, the first ASP is to form each ASP-P2P group only as an ASP-P2P persistent group extendable over a plurality of distinct sessions, the first ASP is to store credentials of the ASP-P2P persistent group for use during the sessions. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334465 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PAGING BASED ON LOCATION INFORMATION OF A USER EQUIPMENT IN A CONVERGENCE NETWORK OF A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for paging based on location information of a user equipment connected to a first communication system in a convergence network of a plurality of communication systems. A method for paging based on location information of a user equipment connected to a first communication system in a convergence network of a plurality of communication systems includes receiving, from a interworking entity of the second communication system, the location information of the user equipment which is in an idle mode with the second communication system; transmitting, to a first cell of the second communication system, a paging request message, wherein the first cell is selected from among a plurality of cells in a tracking area of the second communication system based on the location information. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334466 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR ENSURING PROXIMITY OF WIFI COMMUNICATION DEVICES - The systems, methods and apparatuses described herein provide an apparatus configured for ensuring proximity of a communication partner. In one aspect, the apparatus may comprise a communication port and a processor. The processor may be configured to send a request to and receive a response from the communication partner via the communication port using modulated signals, measure a time period between sending and receiving using timings of modulated signals' symbols, and receive a secondary value from the communication partner. The secondary value may be verified to include at least a portion of the request and a portion of the response, and may have been sent with authenticating data to authenticate it. The time period may be compared with a predefined threshold calculated based on a predefined maximum allowed distance to the communication partner. In another aspect, an apparatus may be configured to ensure its proximity to a communication partner. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334467 | Multi-Tenant Virtual Access Point - Access Point Resources Virtualization - A method and system for virtualization of access points are disclosed. Portions of memory resources associated with a respective wireless access point can be subleased to various business entities, according to certain embodiments. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334468 | Cloud-based Site-to-Site Virtual Private Network - A method and system for virtualization of access points are disclosed. According to certain embodiments, access points at virtual private networks can act as soft VPN gateways. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334469 | Cloud-based WLAN Layer 3 Mobility Control - A method and system for virtualization of access points are disclosed. According to certain embodiments, in order to support L3 mobility in WLANS that use cloud-based controllers, methods including predicting client roaming range, and employing a roaming anchor AP are used. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334470 | Fast Path to Capture Network Data to Disk Storage - A method and system for virtualization of access points are disclosed. According to certain embodiments, after the access point network processor captures the packets and stores the data on the direct memory access (DMA), the access point's OS is designed to call an access point kernel-space driver to directly transfer the data from DMA to the access point's hard disk and thus bypasses the access point's OS File System. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334471 | Cloud Controller Mobility Domain - A method and system for virtualization of access points are disclosed. According to certain embodiments, separate wireless mobility domains can be used to manage access points. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334472 | Network Access Method, Interface Device, and Mobile Network Access Device - A network access method, an interface device, and a mobile network access device are provided. The interface device may specifically include: a first network port, a first processor, and a first universal serial bus (USB) interface, where the first USB interface is connected to the mobile network access device; the first network port is connected to a wired wide area network; and the first processor includes a detection unit and an instruction unit, where the detection unit is configured to detect whether the wired wide area network is available and the instruction unit is configured to send, when the detection unit detects that the wired wide area network is available, first network access instruction information to the mobile network access device by using the first USB interface. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334473 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK THROUGH USE OF TRANSMIT BEAMFORMING - In a method for reducing interference in a first wireless communication network and a second wireless communication network, a first access point (AP) device of the first wireless communication network coordinates with a second AP device of the second wireless communication network with respect to utilizing transmit beamforming at the first AP device and transmit beamforming at the second AP device for the purpose of reducing interference in the first wireless communication network and the second wireless communication network. Based on coordinating with the second AP device, the first AP device uses a beamforming matrix to transmit, via a multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) communication channel, to one or more first stations in the first wireless communication network for mitigating interference between the first wireless communication network and the second wireless communication network. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334474 | ARCHITECTURE FOR SIGNAL AND POWER DISTRIBUTION IN WIRELESS DATA NETWORK - An architecture is provided for coupling wireless local area network (WLAN) signals between an internetworking device and a remotely located access point using a transport network. The access point is coupled to the transport network for communicating with the internetworking device. The access point includes a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point and an access point remote converter. The WLAN access point receives wireless local area network signals from wireless computing equipment and converts such signals to local area network compatible signals. The access point remote converter receives the local area network compatible signals from the WLAN access point and converts the signals to transport modulated format signals suitable for transmission over the transport network. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334475 | Association Update Message and Method for Updating Associations in a Mesh Network - An association update message for mesh networks according to the IEEE 802.11s standard provides the ability to include a plurality of associations in an association update message and thus ensure simultaneous updating of a plurality of associations of representative nodes with respect to the proxy nodes (proxy mesh stations) thereof. A threatened inconsistency in an association update in conventional systems, which provides for only one transmission of an association update message per association update, is thereby eliminated. The proxy information field has an identification field with a plurality of identification fields. The identification fields advantageously allow variable structuring of the proxy information fields, that is, dependent on the information transmitted, which also provides the ability to prevent redundant information in the proxy information fields. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334476 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A wireless device of transmitting a data frame in a WLAN is provided. The wireless device includes: a MAC unit generating a data frame; a PHY unit transmitting a wireless signal of the data frame; and a processor being operably coupled to the MAC unit and the PHY unit and controlling a set of TXVECTOR parameters. The processor is configured for: generating the data frame, the data frame including a data field having a service field and a very high throughput signal information (VHT-SIG-B); and transmitting a wireless signal of the data frame via a operating channel bandwidth. The data field is scrambled with a scrambling sequence, the scrambling sequence is generated based on a initial scrambling sequence and a generator polynomial. The service field is determined based on the set of TXVECTOR parameters, the TXVECTOR parameters including an control information for the service field. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341197 | CASING APPARATUS HAVING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FUNCTION FOR MOBILE TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a casing apparatus having the wireless communication function for a mobile terminal, comprising a casing apparatus body, and an antenna, a communication PCBA, and a battery supplying power to the communication PCBA that are arranged in the casing apparatus body; the communication PCBA is integrated with a digital communication module and a WIFI communication module, and the antenna and the battery are respectively connected to the communication PCBA. The casing apparatus according to the present invention transmits a WIFI signal from a tablet computer through the antenna to the WIFI communication module for processing, then transmits the processed signal to the digital communication module for modulation, and finally radiates the modulated signal through the antenna to access a wireless communication network. In this way, the WIFI signal from the tablet computer gets to access the network, thereby realizing the wireless access to the network even though there is no WIFI hotspot available. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341198 | Method and Apparatus for Building Wi-Fi Radio Map - The present invention is related to method and device for building Wi-Fi radio map. Especially, it is related to device and method for building Wi-Fi radio map that is used to position locating service that utilizes Wi-Fi fingerprints that many, unspecified mobile terminals collect and provide. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341199 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING SERVICE IN SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKING SYSTEM - A method and device for processing a service in a mobile communication system based on SDN technology are provided. The method of controlling access caches in a communication network includes receiving information about contents requested by a user equipment (UE) connected to a first base station. The method also includes transmitting a forwarding request that requests to control at least one switch in order for an access cache that has the contents and that interworks with a second eNB to transfer the contents to the first eNB. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341200 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR REDUCING SIGNAL INTERFERENCE IN A HIGHLY DENSE WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT - An apparatus for reducing signal interference in a highly dense wireless environment has a listener module, a response module, and a tracking module. The listener module receives, at a network access point affiliated with a collection of network SSIDs, an association request from a mobile device, the association request having a foreign network SSID. The response module sends an association response to the mobile device accepting the association request in response to receiving the association request, the response having a connection identifier. The tracking module updates the collection of one or more network SSIDs affiliated with the network access point with the foreign network SSID. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341201 | Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device - Hybrid location determination for wireless communication device. Various services that may be used by a wireless communication device within a particular location may be referred to as location based services (LBS). As such, means by which the location of a wireless communication device that may use such available services, within such a locale, is made by using more than one type of location determination approach. For example, a wireless communication device includes communication capability (e.g., RX and TX) in accordance with a first communication protocol (e.g., Bluetooth) and also includes a communication capability (e.g., RX only) in accordance with a second communication protocol (e.g., WiFi/WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)). The RX capability is operative to assist in location determination for the wireless communication device based on knowledge of at least one wireless communication device that communicates with the wireless communication device. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341202 | Communication Over A Wireless Connection - Data transmission over a wireless connection is improved by determining whether packets include a packet containing an end of a data frame, and if the packets are determined to include such a packet, transmitting the packets together over the wireless connection. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341203 | Trusted Non-3GPP Access Network Element, and Method for Accessing Mobile Network and De-Attachment - A trusted non-3GPP access network element and a method for accessing a mobile network and detachment are disclosed. The method for accessing a mobile network includes: a TNAN network element receives an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) authentication success message or an EAP authentication success triggering message, and then establishes a session with a packet data network gateway (P-GW) of a mobile network; and the TNAN network element receives an IP address request message from user equipment and then allocates an IP address consistent with the packet data network (PDN) type requested by the user equipment to the user equipment. | 11-20-2014 |
20140348147 | POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT FOR WIRELESS NETWORK TOPOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION METHOD THEREOF - A power outlet control device for a wireless network topology has a power input interface unit, a power switch control unit, a wireless network interface unit, a central process unit, a memory unit, and a power output unit. The power input interface unit connects with an outer power source. The power switch control unit distributes and controls the power from the input interface unit. The power output unit further outputs power to an outer system and control the power of the outer system. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348148 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAM IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND DEVICE SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for receiving a frame that is carried out by a station (STA) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. The method comprises receiving the frame from an access point (AP). The frame comprises a medium access control (MAC) header. The MAC header comprises a transmitter address (TA) field and a receiver address (RA) field. The RA field comprises identification information that is set on the basis of an association identifier (AID), which is allocated when the STA is associated with the AP. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348149 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR USING A BEAM-FORMING NETWORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH SPATIALLY MULTIPLEXED WIRELESS SIGNALS - Various methods and systems for combining the capabilities of beam-forming networks together with the benefit of using spatially multiplexed wireless signals. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348150 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A wireless communication network that forms an ad-hoc network without the arrangement of a controlling station sets a period that a communication apparatus can utilize with priority and performs isochronous communication in the period as required. When isochronous communication has not been performed or after isochronous communication has finished in the priority utilization period, other communication apparatuses perform arbitrary communication. When another communication is performed in a communication apparatus's own priority utilization period, the start of isochronous communication is temporarily delayed. In an ad-hoc communication environment, data having a real-time characteristic, such as AV content, can be efficiently transmitted through the isochronous communication. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348151 | Intelligent Delivery Agent for Short Message Distribution Center - A message distribution center (MDC) and Intelligent Delivery Agent are implemented in a wireless Internet gateway interposed between content providers and a wireless carrier to subjectively examine and direct messages via SMTP based on desired rules (e.g., non-peak hours, paying subscribers only, etc.) using standard SMTP Gateway and other well-known protocols. The MDC includes an individual queue for each subscriber, and the provider is informed through conventional SMTP protocol messages that the short message has been accepted. If the carrier has specifically disallowed service for a particular MIN (e.g., in the case of churning), then the content provider is informed through an SMTP interchange that the recipient is invalid. An MDC provides a single mechanism for interacting with subscribers of multiple carriers, regardless of each carrier's underlying infrastructure. For the carrier, an MDC can protect their SS7 network by intelligently throttling messages and configuring message delivery parameters to be more network friendly. An MDC can receive outside a relevant wireless network recipient handset presence information. In the disclosed embodiment, a content provider communicates with the MDC using SMTP protocol messages, and the MDC communicates with wireless carriers preferably using RMI/SMPP techniques. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348152 | TERMINAL AND A MANAGER FOR DISCOVERING AND ACCESSING LOCAL SERVICES VIA WIFI HOTSPOTS - A local service manager (LSM) for discovering and accessing local services via hotspots (HS | 11-27-2014 |
20140348153 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SEAMLESS WiFi NETWORK TRANSITIONS - An apparatus and system for seamless transition between WiFi networks (including in particular WiFi Internet networks) includes within a mobile communication apparatus a mobility layer that is tunneled to a mobility server within a network infrastructure. The mobile communications apparatus includes a wireless network capability, a global positioning system capability, an internal network protocol address and a routing capability. The apparatus and system also provide that the mobility layer is programmed to sequentially and automatically tunnel to the mobility server at an available geographically defined WiFi network access location predicated upon a global positioning system determined position of the mobile communication apparatus. Embodiments also provide seamless transitions between WiFi networks and cellular networks. | 11-27-2014 |
20140355578 | Wireless Access Points Providing Hybrid 802.11 and Scheduled Priority Access Communications - Wireless access points providing hybrid 802.11 and scheduled priority access communications are provided herein. An exemplary wireless access point may be configured to communicate with a set of standard access clients using an 802.11 mode of communication during standard access phases, as well as communicate with a set of priority access clients during priority access phases, when the wireless access point is not communicating with the set of standard access clients, using a priority mode of communication. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355579 | CONVENIENT USE OF PUSH BUTTON MODE OF WPS (WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP) FOR PROVISIONING WIRELESS DEVICES - An access point (AP) in accordance with an aspect of the present disclosure provides a convenient approach to provision wireless devices. In an embodiment, the AP initiates push button mode of WPS procedures with a wireless device, in response to receiving of a provisioning request from the wireless device, without requiring a WPS push button signal locally. The AP thereafter operates to complete provisioning of the wireless device. According to yet another aspect of the present disclosure, a wireless device may also participate in push button mode of WPS, without requiring a push button signal locally. In an embodiment, a wireless device automatically transmits a request for provisioning. An AP within the transmission range, responds back with a command to initiate push button mode of WPS procedures. The wireless device communicates with the AP to complete provisioning. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355580 | METHOD OF CHANGING THE OPERATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK NODES - In a wireless network node, the MAC protocol is implemented through an extended finite state machine executed by the node. The operation of the wireless network node is changed by establishing a wireless connection between the present wireless network node and a remote wireless network node. One or more data packets containing a coded extended finite state machine corresponding to a specific MAC protocol are sent through the wireless connection from the remote wireless network node to the present wireless network node. An activation command from the remote wireless network node to the present wireless network node is sent through the wireless connection for activating the specific MAC protocol. This may be done during normal operation of the present wireless network node. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355581 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A COMMON INTERFACE FOR MULTIPLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS - A method includes receiving data from multiple wireless field devices using multiple wireless communication protocols. The method also includes normalizing the data from the wireless field devices using one or more templates associated with the wireless field devices. The method further includes transmitting the normalized data in a unified format. The method could also include generating the one or more templates using device description (DD) files associated with the wireless field devices. Each template may provide, for one wireless field device or type of wireless field device, (i) an indication of a type of data provided by the wireless field device or type of wireless field device, (ii) a range of data provided by the wireless field device or type of wireless field device, and (iii) how to normalize data from the wireless field device or type of wireless field device into the unified format. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355582 | BLE SCATTERNET SYSTEM AND METHOD - A BLE network includes a first piconet (A) including a first master scanner ( | 12-04-2014 |
20140355583 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATING METHOD AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEM UTILIZING THE WIRELESS COMMUNICATING METHOD - A wireless communicating method for building direct communication between a first electronic device and a second electronic device. The wireless communicating method comprises: (a) controlling the first electronic device and the second electronic device to exchange communicating information of each other, wherein the communicating information comprises first password information, and comprises at least one of first IP information and first service information; and (b) after the step (a), confirming the first password information. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355584 | Wireless Access Points Providing Hybrid 802.11 and Scheduled Priority Access Communications - Wireless access points providing hybrid 802.11 and scheduled priority access communications are provided herein. An exemplary wireless access point may be configured to communicate with a set of standard access clients using an 802.11 mode of communication during standard access phases, as well as communicate with a set of priority access clients during priority access phases, when the wireless access point is not communicating with the set of standard access clients, using a priority mode of communication. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355585 | TECHNIQUES ENABLING USE OF A WI-FI DIRECT SERVICES (WFDS) APPLICATION SERVICES PLATFORM (ASP) FOR LAYER 2 SERVICES - Techniques are disclosed for using a WI-FI Direct Services (WFDS) Application Services Platform (ASP) for Layer 2 services, by extending a definition of a session in WFDS to include non-IP sessions as well. Techniques are further disclosed for operating an application services platform coordination protocol (ASP-CP) directly over a media access control (MAC) layer. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355586 | Short Message Service (SMS) Over SGs - A short message service (SMS) over SGs solution comprising an SGs application part (SGsAP) gateway. The SGsAP gateway is positioned between a mobile management entity (MME) on a long term evolution (LTE) network and a short message service center (SMSC)/home location register (HLR) on a circuit-switched (CS) network to permit SMS messages to be passed between the two domains. The SGsAP gateway performs centralized routing to home public land mobile networks (HPLMN) on the circuit-switched (CS) domain. An SGs interface is used to route messages between an SGsAP gateway and a mobile management entity (MME) on a long term evolution (LTE) network. The inventive solution does not require CS networks to support an SGs interface. In accordance with the principles of the present invention, a mobile management entity (MME) need only maintain a single SCTP association to a SGsAP gateway. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355587 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICE AND WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM WITH THE SAME - There is provided a configuration in an access point managed by a management device for dealing with a situation in which management by the management device is no longer possible. An access point | 12-04-2014 |
20140355588 | HOME APPLIANCE AND HOME NETWORK SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A home network system has a home appliance, a portable terminal to receive a control command associated with the home appliance, and an access point to allow the home appliance or the portable terminal to be connected to a wide area network (WAN), wherein the access point notifies the home appliance of the connection of the portable terminal if the portable terminal connects to the access point, so that the home application detects that a user returns home and performs a certain operation as a user connects to the access point when returning home. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355589 | FEEDBACK METHOD FOR ACTIVE SCANNING OF USER TERMINAL, AND ACCESS POINT - Embodiments of the present invention provide a feedback method for active scanning of a user terminal and an access point, and relate to the field of communications, where a timer is set in the access point, and after the timer reaches preset time, buffered probe response message can be cleared, thereby further reducing an overhead of channel resources. The feedback method includes: receiving a probe request message from a user terminal, where the probe request message includes scanning time preset by the user terminal; generating and buffering a probe response message of the probe request message; setting and starting a timer corresponding to the user terminal according to the received scanning time preset by the user terminal; and clearing the buffered probe response message after determining that the timer reaches the preset scanning time and the probe response message is not sent to the user terminal. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355590 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING PACKET DATA NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for encoding streaming data according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step of dividing a forward error correction (FEC) source block into one or more FEC sub-blocks; a first encoding step of FEC encoding said one or more FEC sub-blocks; a second encoding step of encoding said FEC source block; and a step of generating third encoded data including first encoded data encoded in the first encoding step and second encoded data encoded in the second encoding step. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a streaming service can be smoothly provided to multiple users in various environments or in a communication environment that varies according to movement or changes in a communication state. Further, a plurality of pieces of parity information can be transmitted to provide a streaming service which is capable of high reliability data recovery. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355591 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK IN WIRELESS METROPOLITAN AREA NETWORK AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method for configuring a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) within a Wireless Metropolitan Area Network (WMAN) and a wireless communication system supporting the same are provided. A dual-mode terminal is used as a relay for relaying between the WMAN and the WLAN and the relay divides a total service period into a WMAN period and a WLAN period. For the WMAN period, the relay accesses the WMAN and implements a WMAN service and for the WLAN period, it accesses the WLAN and implements a WLAN service. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355592 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS DEVICE DETECTION, RECOGNITION AND VISIT PROFILING - Described are various embodiments of a system and method in which device-identifying data can be used to uniquely recognize and optionally track and report on device activity at one or more Wi-Fi locations by way of the creation and management of a device and/or visit profile uniquely associated with such devices and stored in a network accessible knowledge base. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355593 | AP Response Method, AP Discovery Method, AP and Terminal - An access point (AP) response method including receiving, by an AP, a probe request message and allowing to a probe response message to be returned to the terminal when a roaming agreement is signed. According to this invention, only an AP instead of all APs on a network needs to return the probe response message to the terminal, a same network roaming agreement is signed between the network in which the AP is located and a network in which the terminal is located. Therefore, network resources are saved. In addition, it avoids that the terminal processes the probe response message returned by the AP for which the network roaming agreement is not signed, thereby reducing time for discovering the AP by the terminal, and increasing a network access speed of the terminal accordingly. | 12-04-2014 |
20140362835 | System and Method for Cloud Synchronizing Known Networks - A system and method synchronizes network data for a device registered to a user. The network data includes a list of a plurality of known wireless networks and authentication data associated with each of the known wireless networks. The method includes establishing a connection to a server of a synchronization network. The method includes transmitting identification data to the server. The identification data indicates the network data corresponding to the user to which the device is registered. The method includes receiving the list of known wireless networks from the server via the synchronization network. The method includes receiving a secure file including the authentication data from the server via the synchronization network. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362836 | INVITING DEVICES TO JOIN A MESH NETWORK - An apparatus, method, and program product are disclosed for inviting devices to join a mesh network. A network interface is accessible by a processor and a memory stores machine readable code executable by the processor. The machine readable code includes a network module configured to establish a mesh network via the network interface. The mesh network includes one or more electronic devices. The machine readable code includes a proximity module configured to detect a first electronic device within close proximity to a second electronic device. The first electronic device is not connected to the mesh network and the second electronic device is connected to the mesh network. The machine readable code includes an invitation module configured to send mesh network connection information to the first electronic device from the second electronic device in response to determining the first electronic device is within close proximity to the second electronic device. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362837 | ANTENNA COUPLER FOR NEAR FIELD WIRELESS DOCKING - Described herein are techniques related to one or more systems, apparatuses, methods, etc. for a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) based wireless docking station arrangement. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362838 | TECHNIQUES FOR SIMULTANEOUS TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING OF PACKETS IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Examples are disclosed for simultaneous transmitting and receiving packets in a wireless local access network (WLAN). In some examples, a source node in the WLAN may transmit a packet to a destination node in the WLAN and may receive an implicit acknowledgement (ACK) packet from the destination node. The source node may stop transmitting a remaining portion of the packet if the implicit ACK packet is not received within a defined time interval or if a dummy/packet payload for the implicit ACK packet is not successfully decoded. Also, the destination node may or may not include a data payload in an implicit ACK packet sent responsive to receiving the packet from the source node. Other examples are described and claimed. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362839 | CORDLESS TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT, CORDLESS TELEPHONE SYSTEM, AND CORDLESS TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION METHOD - Cordless telephone equipment includes a portable unit and a base unit. The base unit includes: a portable unit control section controlling a communication protocol with the portable unit through a wireless interface wirelessly connecting with the non-IP terminal type portable unit; a wireless LAN interface section transmitting and receiving packet data to and from a wireless IP terminal and wireless LAN access point; a wireless LAN bridge control section forwarding the received packet data to the wireless IP terminal, or the wireless LAN access point, or within the base unit in accordance with a destination address of the packet data received through the wireless LAN interface section; and a base unit control section processing the packet data received from the wireless IP terminal and forwarded within the base unit, as data received from a portable unit under control of the base unit. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362840 | Inter-AP coordination and synchronization within wireless communications - Coordination and synchronization is performed between two or more wireless network managers (e.g., access points (APs)). A first wireless network manager supports first communications with first other wireless communication devices, and a second wireless network manager supports second communications with those first and/or second other wirelessly case devices. The first and second wireless network managers also support communications with one another to coordinate the first and second communications supported with the first and/or second other wireless communication devices. Examples of coordination include selection of which other wireless communication devices are serviced or in communication with which of the first and second wireless network managers, selection of operational parameters (e.g., modulation coding set (MCS), beamforming, frequency band assignment, channel assignment, scheduling information, transmit power, etc.) for the first and second wireless communication devices, synchronization to a common clock (e.g., using timing synchronization function (TSF)). | 12-11-2014 |
20140362841 | Communication Device - A communication device may perform judging whether a specific wireless setting value for establishing the wireless connection with a specific access point is to be received from the specific access point or from a terminal device different from the specific access point. The communication device may receive the specific wireless setting value from the specific access point in a case where it is judged that the specific wireless setting value is to be received from the specific access point. The communication device may receive the specific wireless setting value from the terminal device in a case where it is judged that the specific wireless setting value is to be received from the terminal device. The communication device may establish the wireless connection with the specific access point by using the specific wireless setting value. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362842 | Fast Initial Link Setup Communication Device and Method - The present invention provides Fast Initial Link Setup communication device and method, wherein, the device comprises: a service processing module which generates a Beacon frame which physical frame header comprises a first identification information field and/or a physical layer convergence procedure service data unit comprises a second identification information field, and the value of the first identification information field is a first value and/or the value of the second identification information field is a second value, which indicates that a Fast Initial Link Setup function is supported, and sends the Beacon frame; and/or receives an initial link setup first message, and the value of the first identification information field in the physical frame header of the initial link setup first message is a first value and/or the value of the second identification information field in the physical layer convergence procedure service data unit is a second value, which indicates that the above function is supported; and a wireless transceiver module which interacts data frame with the said communication devices which support the said Fast Initial Link Setup function. The present invention solves the compatibility problem that an STA that does not support the FILS function enters a WLAN network which supports the FILS function and an STA that supports the FILS function enters a WLAN that does not support the FILS function. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362843 | System and Method for Collision Resolution - A method embodiment includes receiving, by a network device, collided first and second transmissions, signaling a retransmission request to a first source of the collided first transmission, receiving a retransmitted first transmission, and recovering the collided second transmission using the collided first and second transmissions and the retransmitted first transmission. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362844 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Random access operation is performed under a communication environment in which a plurality of communication modes having different transmission rate coexist with small overhead. A high-grade communication station spoofs information of a packet length and a rate in a decoding portion so that a value of (packet length)/(rate) corresponds to a duration where the communication is hoped to be stopped. The other station receiving the spoofed information receives the rest of the packet with the designated rate during the interval designated by the value of (packet length)/(rate). In this case, the packet length and the rate are not those of actually transmitted packet so that this packet is discarded. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362845 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING A FRAME IN A WIRELESS RAN SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are described for transmitting data. The method includes generating, by an access point (AP), a Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) including a signal field and a data field, and transmitting, by the AP, the PPDU to a station. The signal field includes a reception target indicator and an identifier field. The reception target indicator indicates whether a target of the PPDU is the AP or the station. The identifier field includes a local AP identifier identifying the AP when the reception target indicator indicates that the target of the PPDU is the station. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362846 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING TO ESTABLISH MULTI-PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING TRAFFIC ENGINEERING TUNNEL - A method for determining to establish a multi-protocol label switching traffic engineering tunnel. A first PE receives an IGP notification message including information of a Mesh Group to which a second PE belongs and role information of the second PE released by the second PE. Then, it determines, according to information of Mesh Groups to which the two belong, whether the two belong to a same Mesh Group. After determining that the two belong to the same Mesh Group, the first PE determines, according to role information of the two, whether to establish the MPLS TE tunnel to the second PE. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362847 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION REQUEST MESSAGES OVER AN AD-HOC MESH NETWORK - An approach is provided for coordinating information request messages over an ad-hoc mesh network. A module receives at least one request to transmit one or more information request messages over an ad-hoc mesh network. The module determines context information associated with at least a portion of the ad-hoc mesh network, one or more nodes within the at least a portion of the ad-hoc mesh network, or a combination thereof. The module then determines to transmit the one or more information request messages over the ad-hoc mesh network based, at least in part, on the context information. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362848 | Intelligent Heterogeneous, Mobile, Ad-Hoc Communication Network - The present invention relates to a Mobile Ad Hoc Network that possesses sufficient intelligence to handle a collection of devices that differ in terms of features either inherent to the device or the environment in which they operate. The different features inherent to the device may consist of different hardware and software technologies (e.g., combination of RF for transmission ability, processing ability, power supply, and interfaces). The different features of the environment may consist of any telemetry data measuring the state of the environment, as well as information regarding the MANet such as the density of devices in the vicinity of a device. Various applications are considered. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369329 | LTE AND EXTERNAL WIFI BANDWIDTH AGGREGATION - Techniques for aggregating wireless communications are provided. These techniques include a method for aggregating wireless communications traffic in a femtocell. The method includes receiving at a femtocell a stream of data packets for a mobile device from a wireless router, selecting a transmission mode for sending data packets of the stream of data packets from the femtocell to the mobile device. The first transmission mode includes transmitting the data packets from the stream via a Long Term Evolution (LTE) interface of the femtocell. The second transmission mode includes transmitting the data packets from the stream via a WiFi interface of the wireless router. The third transmission mode includes transmitting a first portion of the data packets to the mobile device via the LTE interface and routing a second portion of the data packets to the wireless router for transmission to the mobile device via the WiFi interface. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369330 | Assisted Device Discovery - An electronic device may communicate according to a first communication standard and a second communication standard. The first communication standard may have a longer communication range than the second communication standard. The electronic device may send a capability indication through the first communication standard. The capability indication may indicate the electronic device is capable of communicating according to the second communication standard with a shorter communication range than the first communication standard. The electronic device may discover a second electronic device capable of communicating according to the second communication standard and positioned outside of a non-extended communication range of the second communication standard. Upon discovery, the electronic device may communicate with the second electronic device at an extended range of the second communication standard even though the second electronic device is positioned outside the non-extended communication range of the first electronic | 12-18-2014 |
20140369331 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus operating as an access point on a network receives a signal transmitted by a communication apparatus on the network, transfers the signal to another communication apparatus on the network, and transmits, in response to a request signal, a response signal containing function information of the communication apparatus operating as the access point to a transmission source communication apparatus of the request signal on the network, which has transmitted the request signal. The communication apparatus controls transfer so that the transmission source communication apparatus of the request signal receives no response signal from a communication apparatus other than the communication apparatus operating as the access point on the network. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369332 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ROUTER AND COMMUNICATIONS METHOD THEREOF - A wireless local area network (WLAN) router may include: a controlling unit selecting a temporary relay terminal among good communications terminals and performing controlling to request that the selected temporary relay terminal perform a WLAN temporary relay, in the case in which support target terminals outside of a WLAN good communications area are present; a WLAN communications unit performing WLAN communications with communications-enabled terminals depending on the controlling of the controlling unit to collect information required for selecting the temporary relay terminal from the communications-enabled terminals and provide the collected information to the controlling unit; and a local area communications unit requesting that the temporal relay terminal perform the WLAN temporal relay of the support target terminals depending on the controlling of the controlling unit. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369333 | OFDMA communications for multiple capability wireless communication devices - A communication device's processor generates an OFDMA packet that includes different information for different recipient devices. The processor transmits, via a communication interface, different portions of the OFDMA packet via different channels. Initially, the processor transmits a first at least one field of the OFDMA packet intended for a first recipient device via the first channel. Then, the processor transmits a second at least one field of the OFDMA packet intended for the first recipient device via the first channel while simultaneously transmitting at least one other field of the OFDMA packet intended for a second recipient device via a second channel. This staggered transmission of different portions of the OFDMA packet via different channels allows a recipient device to classify different portions of the OFDMA packet and to determine which portions are intended for that recipient device. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369334 | Method and Apparatus for Protecting a Miner - An apparatus for protecting a miner from injury by a machine in a mine includes an explosion-proof housing. The apparatus includes a proximity sensing portion disposed in the explosion-proof housing having a magnetic field source which produces a magnetic field that is used to sense a location of the miner relative to the machine. The apparatus includes a wireless communication portion disposed in the explosion-proof housing through which the magnetic field produced by the magnetic field source is changed remotely and wirelessly from outside the explosion-proof housing. A method for protecting a miner from injury by a machine. A system for protecting a miner from injury by a machine in a mine. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369335 | METHOD AND A NETWORK NODE FOR CONNECTING A USER DEVICE TO A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and a network node ( | 12-18-2014 |
20140369336 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED UPDATING OF A SELF ORGANIZING NETWORK - The present disclosure presents a method and an apparatus for distributed updating of a self organizing network. For example, the disclosure presents a method for transmitting, via a transmitting component at a base station, a portion of data collected at the base station to a network entity, wherein the data collected at the base station is received by the base station from one or more user equipments (UE) in communication with one or more base stations, wherein the base station is one of the one or more base stations, receiving feedback, from the network entity, associated with one or more network parameters of the base station, wherein the feedback received from the network entity is determined at the network entity at least based on the portion of data transmitted from the one or more base stations to the network entity, and updating the one or more network parameters at the base station based on the feedback received from the network entity and local information at the base station. As such, distributed updating of a self organizing network may be achieved. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369337 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE CHANNEL SCANNING WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - An access point device that is adapted to a wireless network and a wired network is disclosed. The access point includes a transceiver to receive wireless frames from a plurality of wireless devices of the wireless network, respectively, and at least one component to process information extracted from the wireless frames and to control channel scanning based upon at least one of an amount of wireless device traffic and a type of call. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369338 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING RESPONSIVENESS IN EXCHANGING FRAMES IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method and system for improving responsiveness in exchanging management and control frames in a wireless local area network are disclosed. An initiator sends a frame (action frame, management frame, CSI frame, control frame, or data frame) to a responder. Upon correctly receiving the frame, the responder sends a response frame to the initiator instead of directly sending an acknowledgement (ACK) packet. The responder preferably accesses the wireless medium to send the response frame in a short inter-frame spacing (SIFS). With this scheme, a long delay associated with having to contend for the wireless medium to send the response frame is avoided and therefore, the responsiveness and timeliness of the feedback mechanism is significantly enhanced. The response frame may be piggybacked on or aggregated with another packet. | 12-18-2014 |
20140376528 | CONFIGURATION CONNECTION DEVICE - In one embodiment, a connection device couples a mobile device having a touch-sensitive display screen to a component of home automation system. The connection device couples a wired serial communication interface of the mobile device to a wired serial communication interface of the component. The mobile device executes a configuration application (app), whose a user interface is displayed on the touch-sensitive display screen. Using the user interface, a user may configure the component to join a Wi-Fi network, as well as configure more advanced settings of the component. Similarly, in response to further input on the user interface, the configuration app on the mobile device may send additional control commands via the connection device, or the Wi-Fi network, to the component, to configure additional settings of the component. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376529 | LOCATION AWARE SELF-LOCATING ACCESS POINT - A location aware, self-locating access point can provide a wireless link through a wireless network to a wireless device. If the wireless link bandwidth is less than a target bandwidth for the wireless device, then the location aware, self-locating access point can move itself to a new operating location that provides an increased wireless link bandwidth. If a second wireless device is added to the wireless network, then the new operating location is selected to provide an increased link bandwidth for both wireless devices. In one embodiment, the wireless devices in the wireless network can be prioritized so that the new operating location increases the wireless link bandwidth for the wireless device with a higher priority. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376530 | EFFICIENT NETWORK LAYER FOR IPv6 PROTOCOL - An electronic device may include a network interface that may enable the electronic device to wirelessly couple the electronic device to other electronic devices. The electronic device may also include a processor that may determine at least one data path to the other electronic devices using a Routing Information Protocol-Next Generation (RIPng) routing mechanism. After identifying at least one data path to the other electronic devices, the processor may determine whether the identified data path(s) is secure using a Datagram Transport Layer Security (DTLS) protocol. If the identified data path(s) is determined to be secure, the processor may send Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) data packets to the other electronic devices via the secure data path(s). | 12-25-2014 |
20140376531 | WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION METHOD, WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION APPARATUS AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless local area network (LAN) connection method includes the steps of transmitting connection information composed of identifier information, encryption type information, and encryption information for connection to a wireless LAN access point disposed in a given area from a position information transmission apparatus capable of transmitting position information corresponding to a given position using a wireless communication protocol other than wireless LAN protocol; receiving the connection information for connection to the wireless LAN access point by a connection apparatus; and connecting the connection apparatus to the wireless LAN access point using the received connection information. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376532 | System and Method for a CSMA-CA Half Window Scheme - Embodiments are provided for implementing a CSMA-CA half window scheme in 802.11 networks or other suitable wireless networks that could benefit from such scheme. The half window scheme improves a back-off time calculation by adding a probability prediction factor. The back-off time is part of a delay time in accessing a wireless transmission medium by a station (STA). The probability prediction factor is used to adjust a contention widow (CW) used to calculate the back-off time, based on the STA's medium access probability. The STA splits the CW into two at least half windows and then chooses one of the windows according to the window's information gain for the probability prediction. The selected window is used to select a random number for the back-off time. The improved back-off time calculation reduces contention between STAs in accessing the medium. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376533 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to an embodiment, a wireless communication unit includes a media access control (MAC) unit. The MAC unit includes a clock unit, an acquisition unit and a calculation unit. The clock unit includes a register which stores periodically counted-up first time information. The acquisition unit acquires a statistic for reception quality information on the received packet. The calculation unit normalizes the second time information, weights the normalized second time information using a time weight based on the statistic, and calculates a time correction value for correcting the first time information, using the weighted and normalized second time information. The time weight increases with increasing link stability indicated by the statistic. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376534 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING SIGNAL QUALITY IN A WIFI NETWORK - A system and method are provided for a WiFi network including multiple access points, each access point including an antenna having a plurality of modes corresponding to a plurality of radiation patterns, respectively, or an antenna system including a plurality of antennas having a plurality of modes corresponding to a plurality of radiation patterns, respectively, and a processor implemented with an algorithm. The algorithm is a computer program having instructions for performing steps to optimize signal quality for multiple devices linked to the WiFi network. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376535 | WIRELESS SIGNAL TRANSMITTING METHOD AND WIRELESS APPARATUS - Interference in preamble signals and pilot signals in cooperative transmission using interference suppressing technology is avoided. A wireless apparatus for transmitting a wireless signal on which directivity control has been performed to stations in a wireless system including at least one wireless apparatus is provided with a known signal generating unit which generates a known signal to be added to the wireless signal, a weighting processing unit which performs weighting on the known signal generated by the known signal generating unit, and a wireless processing unit which transmits the known signal on which the weighting has been performed by the weighting processing unit. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376536 | DEVICE ACCESS METHOD, ACCESS POINT AND ACCESS DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a device access method, an access point, and an access device. The method includes: generating, by an access point, a broadcast frame, where the broadcast frame includes a feature identifier of an access device; and sending, by the access point, the broadcast frame, so that the access device that receives the broadcast frame and corresponds to the feature identifier in the broadcast frame accesses the access point. The present invention may be adopted to resolve a problem that numerous conflicts occur when numerous terminals simultaneously access a network, so that the terminals can successfully access the network. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376537 | DETERMINING TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS FOR TRANSMITTING BEACON FRAMES - A method includes dynamically determining transmission parameters for transmission of beacon frames corresponding to a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) supported by an access point. The transmission parameters being based on zero or more client devices connected to the WLAN or monitored data indicative of a load at the access point. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376538 | PORTABLE SYSTEM FOR INSTITUTIONAL TELEPHONE SERVICE PROVISION - One exemplary embodiment provides a device comprising: a connection panel configured to accept a removable connection to a telephone of a controlled access residential institution; a network router connected to the connection panel and configured to connect to a remote network; and an access and security module connected to the network router and configured to control access by the telephone to telephone services provided by accessing a remote call processing center via the remote network. The connection panel, the network router, and access and security module can be at least partially enclosed within a portable enclosure. The device may further comprise a power distribution unit within the enclosure and connected to provide power to the network router and to the access and security module. | 12-25-2014 |
20150009975 | INTERNET PROTOCOL INTERFACE SELECTION FOR ROUTING DATA TRAFFIC - A technology for a user equipment (UE) that is operable to select an internet protocol (IP) interface in a communications network is disclosed. Local policy information and access network selection information can be received from an Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) operating on a server in an evolved packet core (EPC). At least one IP interface on which to route an IP flow using inter access point name routing policies (IARP) can be determined prior to implementing other routing policies. The IP flow from the UE on at least one IP interface selected can be routed using the IARP. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009976 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION WITH AN ACCESS NETWORK BASED UPON ACCESS NETWORK INTERWORKING INFORMATION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for supplementing the ANDSF discovery information with access network interworking information that identifies access networks and indicates whether the respective access networks support either interworking with a core network or standalone operation. In the context of a method, Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) discovery information may be accessed. The ANDSF discovery information includes access network interworking information identifying one or more access networks and indicating whether the respective access networks support interworking with a core network or standalone operation. The method also causes a connection to be established with a respective access network in accordance with the ANDSF discovery information. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009977 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING THE MOBILITY OF A MOBILE NETWORK - A system and a method are provided for managing the mobility of mobile networks in a Proxy Mobile IP domain. The method makes it possible to configure a host mobile terminal (MH) to which mobile devices LFN can be connected so that it operates in Mobile Router (MR) mode. The method applies a prefix division to the Home Network Prefix (HNP) assigned by the PMIP MH protocol in order to extract Mobile Node Prefix (MNP) sub-prefixes for configuring the addresses of the LFNs. This method does not entail any modification to the PMIPv6 protocol. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009978 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA UNIT IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for transmitting a data unit performed by a transmitter in a wireless LAN system. The method comprises: generating a data unit, wherein the data unit includes a data field which contains data to be transmitted by a transmitter; generating at least one data symbol for the data field; and transmitting the at least one data symbol, wherein two pilot tones are inserted into each data symbol, and pilot values and scrambling values are applied to the pilot tones. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009979 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PPDU IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method and device for receiving a data block in a wireless communication system, the method performed by a receiver. The method includes: receiving a physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) from a transmitter over an operating channel, the PPDU including a signal field, a Very High Throughput-Signal-A (VHT-SIG-A) field, a Very High Throughput-Signal-B (VHT-SIG-B) field and a padded data block, generating a first data block by removing zero or more physical padding bits from the padded data block in a physical layer; and generating a second data block by removing zero or more Medium Access Control (MAC) padding bits from the first data block in a MAC layer. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009980 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR WIDE LOCAL AREA NETWORK POWER AMPLIFIERS - Apparatus and methods for wide local area network (WLAN) power amplifiers are provided. In certain configurations, a WLAN power amplifier system includes a WLAN power amplifier, an output impedance matching network, and an envelope tracker. The WLAN power amplifier includes an input that receives a WLAN signal having a fundamental frequency and an output that generates an amplified WLAN signal for transmission over an antenna. The output impedance matching network is electrically connected to the output of the WLAN power amplifier, and can provide a load line impedance between 10Ω and 35Ω at the fundamental frequency. The envelope tracker receives an envelope of the WLAN signal, and controls a voltage level of a power supply of the WLAN power amplifier based on the envelope signal. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009981 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION USING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for Peer-to-Peer (P2P) connection using a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes detecting a P2P connection attempt of a new terminal not connected to P2P communication, during P2P communication with at least one terminal, determining whether the mobile communication terminal operates as a slave terminal or a group owner in the P2P connection, and when the mobile communication terminal operates as the slave terminal, transmitting a signal indicating that the P2P connection attempt of the new terminal is detected, to a terminal operating as the group owner in the P2P connection. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009982 | METHOD OF LIMITING USE OF A MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINT NEAR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - To promote network security in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a mobile communication device, which is operable as a mobile wireless access point, may read a WLAN identifier that is known to be used by the WLAN and an indication of a channel on which a wireless access point of the WLAN is known to operate. The device may then monitor the channel for a transmission of the WLAN identifier. The mobile wireless access point may be configured to operate using the selected channel so that the monitoring occurs on the same channel as that on which the mobile wireless access point is operating. The transmission, if detected, may be considered to indicate that the mobile communication device is within the WLAN. Upon detecting the transmission, use of the WLAN identifier by the mobile wireless access point at the mobile communication device may be prevented, e.g. by requiring the mobile wireless access point to use a different WLAN identifier or by disabling the mobile wireless access point. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016435 | Hybrid Contention Mechanism for WLANs - Techniques are presented herein for providing hybrid contention mechanisms for a wireless medium. A first wireless device (e.g., a wireless access point) that serves a plurality of second wireless devices (e.g., client devices) in a wireless network, groups the plurality of second wireless devices into sets based on commonality of the second wireless devices in terms of one or more of: power requirements and throughput requirements. A time interval on a wireless channel during which the second wireless devices may contend for usage of the wireless medium is partitioned into a plurality of disjoint or overlapping contention periods. Each set of second wireless devices is assigned to a corresponding one of the plurality of contention periods such that only second wireless devices in each set contend for access to the wireless channel during the corresponding contention period assigned to that set. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016436 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a wireless unit and a MAC processor. The wireless unit transmits a beacon via a wireless communication. The MAC processor controls a period at which the beacon is transmitted. The MAC processor includes a determination unit and a controller. The determination unit determines that a process of connection to a terminal starts upon receiving a response signal to the beacon to output a start signal upon receiving a response signal to the beacon. The controller transmits the beacon at a first period before the start signal is output and switches the period of transmission of the beacon from the first period to a second period when the start signal is output. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016437 | CONTENTION CONTROL MECHANISM - Methods, systems, and devices are described for enhanced network utilization between an access point and a number of wireless stations. A station (STA), following a transmit opportunity (TXOP), may determine a utilization of the TXOP. Based on the determination, the STA may adjust a delay time for a subsequent transmission. The adjustment of the delay time may include increasing an initial contention window (CW), increasing a backoff value, and/or increasing a number of backoffs for TXOPs following an underutilized TXOP. The increased delay time may result in, on average, increased backoff times in such situations. The delay time may be reduced to a minimum delay time following a certain number of TXOPs that more fully utilize the TXOP. Utilization of the TXOP may be determined based on an amount of time used for the TXOP relative to a TXOP limit that may be set by an access point. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016438 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUS CO-CHANNEL ACCESS OF NEIGHBORING ACCESS POINTS - A system and method for overriding Carrier-Sense-Multiple-Access/Collision-Avoidance (CSMA/CA) and virtual carrier sense, without harming the traffic that occupies the channel is described herein. Further provided herein are measurements and qualifying criteria for performing the aforementioned channel sharing. The system and method may be based, for example, on opportunistic spatial isolation of nodes from each other and selectively implementing ultra-fast link adaptation. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016439 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE TERMINAL TO ACCESS THE NETWORK THROUGH CELL PHONE - A method for a mobile terminal to access a network through a cell phone is provided. The mobile terminal may be connected to a network enabled cell phone via a WIFI (wireless fidelity) connection mode, and the network enabled cell phone may serve as a gateway router. TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/internet protocol) operating principle having element information, such as source address, source port, protocol, destination address and destination port in a data packet, may be processed when a data packet arrives at a network layer of a network enabled cell phone. A Hash table may be dynamically established for searching a network connection, and NAT (network address translation) treatment may be carried out to a data packet, thus, an associated mobile terminal may simultaneously access the network with the network enabled cell phone by the external network IP address of the network enabled cell phone. Because the two devices may share an IP address to access the network, all the network flow may be generated at the gateway cell phone, thus, avoiding cost of other devices. Furthermore, a Hash table may be dynamically established for the data packet in the present invention, which may accelerate search speed of a data packet and processing speed. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016440 | System and method of transmitting a message to a wireless limited node - Methods are provided for transmitting and receiving a message to or form a wireless limited node ( | 01-15-2015 |
20150016441 | AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION SUB-SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for automatically configuring a distributed antenna system are provided. A configuration sub-system of the distributed antenna system can identify signal parameters for downlink signals received from one or more base stations via inputs of a unit in the distributed antenna system. The configuration sub-system can automatically determine a configuration plan for the distributed antenna system based on the automatically identified signal parameters. The configuration plan specifies how to combine subsets of the downlink signals for routing to remote antenna units of the distributed antenna system. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016442 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO SUPPORT DATA APPLICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOMING, MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method includes receiving a request to bind a port to a requesting application and determining whether an open application is bound to the port. The method further includes binding the requesting application to the port when the open application is not bound to the port. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016443 | EFFICIENT NETWORK LAYER FOR IPv6 PROTOCOL - An electronic device may include a network interface that may enable the electronic device to wirelessly couple the electronic device to other electronic devices. The electronic device may also include a processor that may determine at least one data path to the other electronic devices using a Routing Information Protocol—Next Generation (RIPng) routing mechanism. After identifying at least one data path to the other electronic devices, the processor may determine whether the identified data path(s) is secure using a Datagram Transport Layer Security (DTLS) protocol. If the identified data path(s) is determined to be secure, the processor may send Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) data packets to the other electronic devices via the secure data path(s). | 01-15-2015 |
20150023334 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus identifies an access point with which the communication apparatus can perform wireless communication and transmits information indicating the identified access point to a communication partner apparatus by way of the wireless communication. In response to this, an access point designated by the communication partner apparatus is registered as a relay access point. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023335 | PHYSICAL LAYER DESIGN FOR UPLINK (UL) MULTIUSER MULTIPLE-INPUT, MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) SYSTEMS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide methods and apparatus for uplink (UL) multiuser multiple-input, multiple-output (MU-MIMO) transmissions in a High Efficiency WLAN (HEW) system. One example method generally includes generating a packet having a preamble portion and transmitting the packet. The preamble portion typically includes a long training field (LTF); a first signal (SIG) field subsequent to the LTF; one or more other LTFs located subsequent to the first SIG field; and at least one second SIG field, wherein all SIG fields in the preamble portion, other than the first SIG field, are subsequent to the one or more other LTFs. Another example method generally includes receiving, from an apparatus, a packet having a preamble portion comprising tone-interleaved LTFs; and performing frequency offset adjustment on the packet based on the tone-interleaved LTFs. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023336 | COMMUNICATING A HEADLESS ONBOARDEE DEVICE LOCAL WIRELESS NETWORK SCAN TO AN ONBOARDER DEVICE VIA A PEER-TO-PEER PROTOCOL TO ASSIST AN ONBOARDING PROCESS - The disclosure relates to wireless communications. An aspect receives, by an onboarder device, a list of local wireless network scan results from an onboardee device, selects a local wireless network on the list of local wireless network scan results, and sends an indication of the selected local wireless network to the onboardee device, wherein the onboardee device attempts to connect to the selected local wireless network. An aspect scans, by an onboardee device, for available local wireless networks, creates a list of local wireless network scan results based on the scanning, sends, by the first device, the list of local wireless network scan results to an onboarder device, wherein the onboarder device selects a local wireless network on the list of local wireless network scan results, and receives an indication of the selected local wireless network from the onboarder device. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023337 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SELECTIVELY ABORTING RECEPTION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PACKETS - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of selectively aborting reception of wireless communication packets. For example, a receiver may at least partially process a portion of a wireless communication packet, to determine based on the portion of the communication packet whether the packet is intended to be received by the receiver and, if the packet is not intended to be received by the receiver, to abort processing of a remainder of the communication packet by one or more components of a physical layer of the receiver. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023338 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT WITH WILDCARD SSID RESPONSE ENABLING ASSOCIATION BY CLIENT DEVICE REQUESTING ANY SSID AND SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A wireless access point includes an antenna, a connection port providing wired communications with a network, one or more processors, and a storage device having software stored therein. When executed by the one or more processors the software causes the wireless access point to respond to a probe from a client device requesting a specific service set identifier according to a wildcard service set identifier response in order to facilitate wireless association of the client device with the wireless access point regardless of the specific service set identifier requested by the client device, and to provide the client device with wireless access to the network. In this way, the client device is enabled to associate with the wireless access point and receive access to the network without a specific service set identifier requested by the client device being preprogrammed into the wireless access point. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023339 | Efficient Communication for Devices of a Home Network - Systems and methods are provided for efficient communication through a fabric network of devices in a home environment or similar environment. For example, an electronic device may efficiently control communication to balance power and reliability concerns, may efficiently communicate messages to certain preferred networks by analyzing Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) packet headers that use an Extended Unique Local Address (EULA), may efficiently communicate software updates and status reports throughout a fabric network, and/or may easily and efficiently join a fabric network. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023340 | Method for Transmitting Frames in a Wireless Local Area Network - On the case of receiving data frame from a station, the method of the present invention instructs the repeater to replace the content of the receiver address field by the address of the bridge when receiving the frame transmitted from the station, and then forwards the frames to the bridge. On the case of receiving a data frame transmitted from the bridge, the repeater can replace the content of transmitter address field by the address of the repeater itself, and then forwards the data frame to the station. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023341 | Wireless Local Area Network Discovery and Selection Method, Device, and System, and Terminal - The present disclosure provide a wireless local area network discovery and selection method, device, and system, and a terminal. The method includes sending a registration request to a wireless local area network discovery and selection device when packet switched data is initiated to a cellular network. A notification message sent by the wireless local area network discovery and selection device is received. The notification message is sent when the wireless local area network discovery. The selection device determines that a wireless local area network needs to be used to offload the packet switched data in the cellular network. The notification message carries access parameter information. | 01-22-2015 |
20150030012 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A display control device for communicating with an information terminal, the display control device including: a communication unit; a communication control unit which causes the communication unit to perform first communication in a local area network including the display control device and the information terminal, the first communication being communication between the display control device and the information terminal via a relay device; and a connection information obtainment unit which obtains, from the information terminal through the first communication, connection information necessary for establishment of second communication that is direct communication between the display control device and the information terminal, in which when the connection information obtainment unit obtains the connection information, the communication control unit causes the communication unit to break off the first communication and start the second communication using the obtained connection information. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030013 | INTEGRATED INFORMATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To provide an integrated information communication system without using dedicated lines or the Internet, ensuring communication speed, communication quality, communication trouble countermeasures in a unified manner, wherein security and reliability in communication is ensured. The system is comprised of an access control apparatus for connecting a plurality of computer communication networks or information communication equipment to each, and a relay device for networking the aforementioned access control apparatus, the system having functions for performing routing by transferring information by a unified address system, and is configured such that the aforementioned plurality of computer communication networks or information communication equipment can perform communications in an interactive manner. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030014 | LINKING EXISTING WI FI ACCESS POINTS INTO UNIFIED NETWORK - A plurality of users are associated with a system having at least one information processor coupled to a communication network. Multiple wireless access points to the communication network are provided; and multiple of the users associated with the system are provided access to the communication network via the access points. | 01-29-2015 |
20150036670 | METHOD OF EFFICIENCY IMPROVEMENT FOR CONTROL FRAMES IN 802.11ah - Systems and methods are presented that a STA that has not set up a target wake time (TWT) schedule with an AP to use a control frame without incurring the overhead of the Next TWT field in order to determine AP changes or to sync with the AP's time synchronization function without receiving a beacon. In an embodiment, the configuration may include using one bit in a frame control (FC) field of a control frame to indicate a presence of a Next TWT field, such that the Next TWT field is optionally present in the control frame and contains the next target wake time value for an intended recipient of the control frame. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036671 | CORDLESS TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT AND CORDLESS TELEPHONE SYSTEM - Disclosed is cordless telephone equipment allowing various kinds of data stored in a mobile telephone to be stored in a cordless handset in a state usable therein, without provision of a new device thereto. A handset transfer-data conversion section that executes a predetermined conversion process according to a type of handset transfer-data stored in a storage section. Specifically, the handset transfer-data conversion section converts an audio format of ringtone data according to a use CODEC of a cordless handset. In addition, the handset transfer-data conversion section converts an image size of wallpaper data into a size reproducible in the cordless handset. Further, the handset transfer-data conversion section converts an image size of image data of the other party included in telephone directory data into a size reproducible in the cordless handset. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036672 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING WIRELESS ACCESS USING APPLICATION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more specifically, to a method and an apparatus for processing a non-access stratum (NAS) signaling request. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the method for enabling a terminal to perform the NAS signaling process in a wireless communication system comprises the steps of: receiving a first message comprising information for indicating network failure from a network node of a first network; starting a timer related to network selection; and selecting a second network among the network candidates except for the first network when the timer related to network selection is operated. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036673 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING MULTI-DESTINATION TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for communicating multi-destination traffic are provided. One aspect of this disclosure provides a method of wireless communication. The method includes generating two media access control protocol data unit (MPDU) sub-frames, the A-MPDU sub-frames each comprising a different receiver address, generating an aggregated media access control protocol data unit (A-MPDU) frame comprising the two A-MPDU sub-frames, the A-MPDU signaling two different acknowledgement policies associated with the two different receiver addresses; and transmitting the A-MPDU frame. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036674 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING A SPATIAL STREAM FOR MU - MIMO IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a spatial stream for multi user (MU)-multiple input multiple output (MIMO) in a wireless local area network system and a transmitter for performing the method are provided. The method includes transmitting, to a receiver, a management frame including group information to assign or change a position of a plurality of spatial streams corresponding to each of a plurality of groups, and transmitting, to the receiver, a frame including at least one spatial stream, wherein the group information includes a plurality of group indicators and a plurality of spatial stream (SS) indicators, each of the plurality of group indicators indicating whether the receiver is a member of each of the plurality of groups, each of the plurality of SS indicators indicating a position of the plurality of spatial streams corresponding to each of the plurality of groups. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043553 | CONFIGURING A SECURE NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE DEVICE - In an embodiment, a user equipment (UE), establishes a local connection (e.g., USB, Bluetooth, etc.) to a network infrastructure device (e.g., a network switch or router) that is not yet configured for operation on a communications network. The UE obtains, while connected to the network infrastructure device over the local connection, device-identifying information (e.g., a location of the UE, a pre-provisioned identifier for the network infrastructure device, etc.) by which the network infrastructure device can be distinguished from other network infrastructure devices of the same type. The UE loads a configuration installation file that is specially configured for the network infrastructure device based on the obtained device-identifying information. The UE executes the configuration installation file over the local connection to configure the network infrastructure device for operation on the communications network. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043554 | MANAGEMENT OF INTERFACES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods, systems, and apparatuses are described for managing interfaces for wireless communications. In one method, at least one active interface of a user equipment (UE) may be used for the wireless communications. While using the at least one active interface, a need for increased bandwidth for the wireless communications may be detected. Based at least in part upon detecting the need for increased bandwidth, at least one additional interface of the UE may be activated for use in the wireless communications. More than one of the active interfaces of the UE may be simultaneously used for the wireless communications, and may be used independent of network coordination of the active interfaces. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043555 | UNIFIED DEVICE FOR ADJACENT AND NON-ADJACENT CHANNELS FOR PROCESSING PHYSICAL LAYER PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - A unified device for adjacent and non-adjacent channels/carriers for processing Physical layer Protocol Data Units (PPDUs) includes a dual-use configuration capable of processing either 80+80 Megahertz (MHz) PPDUs with a single spatial stream (160/80+80 MHz 1×1) or 80 MHz PPDUs with two spatial streams (80 MHz 2×2). | 02-12-2015 |
20150043556 | Enabling Communication Between Wireless Devices - A hybrid wireless network, method, and plant for enabling communication between wireless devices are provided herein. An exemplary embodiment provides a hybrid wireless network for enabling communication between wireless devices. The hybrid wireless network includes a gateway that is enabled with a wireless sensor network protocol and a Wi-Fi protocol, wherein the hybrid sensor network enables communication between a wireless handheld device and a plurality of wireless transmitters using the wireless sensor network protocol and the Wi-Fi protocol. The wireless handheld device and at least a portion of the plurality of wireless transmitters are enabled with the wireless sensor network protocol and the Wi-Fi protocol. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043557 | Methods and Devices for Accessing a Wireless Local Area Network - A method in a mobile station comprises searching for WLANs with a WLAN module implemented in the mobile station; communicating information about the WLANs found in the previous step to an administration unit configured to provide WLAN access data for a plurality of WLANs; receiving WLAN access data for at least one of the WLANs for which information was sent to the administration unit in the previous step; and accessing one of the WLANs using the WLAN access data provided by the administration unit. The mobile station communicates with the administration unit via a cellular communications network operated by a mobile network operator (MNO). The MNO can remotely manage the WLAN access data available on the mobile station with the administration unit and to which available WLANs the mobile station can attach. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043558 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ACCESS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and an apparatus for accessing a channel in a wireless LAN system. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for performing channel access by a station (STA) of a wireless communication system comprises: a step of receiving, from an access point (AP), information about the time window which does not allow channel access of a traffic indication map (TIM) mode STA; and a step of performing channel access based on the time window. In the event that the STA is a non-TIM mode STA, the channel access is performed in the time window. In the event that the STA is a TIM mode STA, the channel access is performed in the time interval indicated by the TIM, excluding the time window. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043559 | METHOD FOR INTEGRATING NETWORK SUBSCRIBERS INTO AN AD-HOC NETWORK AND AN ASSOCIATED AD-HOC NETWORK - A method for integrating network subscribers into a time-synchronized ad-hoc network forms individual clusters in each case of regionally adjacent network subscribers and implements a time synchronization of the network subscribers within each cluster. Following this, a network subscriber at the periphery of each cluster is selected in order to identify at least one network subscriber to be integrated into the respective cluster. Finally, the subscribers of the respective cluster are time-synchronized with every identified network subscriber. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043560 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF IMPROVING MEASUREMENT REPORTING INVOLVING WLAN IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses are disclosed for improving measurement reporting involving WLAN for a UE in a wireless communication system. The method includes triggering a transmission of a measurement report involving WLAN due to all of at least one condition being fulfilled, wherein the at least one condition includes a first condition related to WLAN load. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043561 | WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a method and a terminal for accessing a wireless network, a Wi-Fi access network node, and an authentication server. The method includes: sending, by a client on a terminal, registration information of a user to an authentication server, where the registration information includes a terminal identifier and/or a user identifier that is not entered by the user; and sending, by the client, a connection request to the Wi-Fi access network node, where the connection request includes the terminal identifier and/or the user identifier that is not entered by the user, so that the Wi-Fi access network node controls, according to the authentication information and the connection request, whether the terminal accesses the Wi-Fi access network node. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043562 | WIRELESS NETWORK DISCOVERY METHOD AND APPARATUS - In a wireless network discovery operation, before a WiFi station sends a network probe request in a WiFi network to request for network information it needs to connect to an access point, it first listens to communications on a current channel of the WiFi network for a preset period of time. When the WiFi station receives on the current channel a network probe request message sent by another WiFi station, it further delays sending the first network probe request by a second time period, in anticipation of some signals from the access point. If during the second time period a network discovery message from the access point, such as a probe response or a beacon message, is detected and that message contains the network information needed, the WiFi station cancels the sending of its probe request. Otherwise, the WiFi station sends its probe request after the second time period expires. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043563 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING AN ACCESS POINT - A method and apparatus for discovering an access point, where the method includes: sending, by a station, a detection request message to an access point, where the detection request message carries filter condition information that includes transmission service quality of service (QoS) requirement information, and where the transmission service QoS requirement information is used by the access point to determine whether the filter condition is satisfied, and receiving, by the station, a detection response message sent by the access point when the access point determines that the filter condition is satisfied. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043564 | PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK ACCESS METHOD, WLAN ACCESS SYSTEM AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention discloses a packet-switched network access method, a WLAN access system and a user equipment. The packet-switched network access method includes: receiving indication information sent by a user equipment attached to a WLAN or sent by an HSS/AAA, where the indication information is used to indicate whether the user equipment is capable of providing information of accessing a PS network; and determining, according to the indication information, whether establishing a PDN connection after authentication is successful or after a layer 3 message sent by the user equipment is received, so that the user equipment accesses a PS network by using the WLAN. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043565 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication system transmitting information to a communication terminal moving through a spot wireless area. In an integrated base station, an external information communication section controls communication with a server. A contents memory section stores contents received from the server. A wireless LAN communication section communicates with the communication terminal. A control section establishes connection with the communication terminal using a first connection not requiring an authentication procedure for connection with the communication terminal, or using a second connection requiring the authentication procedure for connection with the communication terminal. An access control (restriction) section permits access from the communication terminal to the contents memory section and prohibits access to the server when a type of connection with the communication terminal is the first connection, and permits access from the communication terminal to the contents memory section and to the server in the case of the second connection. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043566 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING ASSOCIATION BETWEEN STATION AND ACCESS POINT, AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for establishing an association between a STA and an AP, and the method includes: sending, by the STA, an association request frame to the AP, where the association request frame includes a service type element, and the service type element is used for indicating a sensor service type, an offloading service type, or a hybrid service type to which the STA belongs, where the sensor service type includes a first sensor service or a second sensor service, and the offloading service type includes a first offloading service or a second offloading service; and receiving, by the STA, an association response frame sent by the AP, where the association response frame is generated by the AP after determining, according to the service type element, a service type to which the STA belongs. | 02-12-2015 |
20150049746 | OPERATING M-PHY BASED COMMUNICATIONS OVER MASS STORAGE-BASED INTERFACES, AND RELATED CONNECTORS, SYSTEMS AND METHODS - M-PHY communications are provided over a mass storage-based interface. Related connectors, systems, and methods are also disclosed. In particular, embodiments of the present disclosure take the M-PHY standard compliant signals and direct them through a memory card compliant connector so as to allow two M-PHY standard compliant devices having memory card based connectors to communicate. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049747 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING GATEWAY ADDRESS - This application relates to wireless communication technologies, and more particularly, to a method, a apparatus and a system for transmitting a gateway address, which are used to solve the problem in the prior art that a DeNB is incapable of assisting an MME in selecting an SGW/PGW for a mobile relay node (RN). The method for transmitting a gateway address in an embodiment of this application comprises: a base station determining, when determining an access device to be a mobile RN, a gateway IP address of a mobility anchor serving as a gateway of the mobile RN; and sending the determined gateway IP address to a mobility management entity (MME) corresponding to the mobile RN. In the embodiment of this application, the DeNB is capable of assisting the MME in selecting a suitable mobility anchor for the mobile RN as the SGW/PGW, thereby guaranteeing normal work of the mobile RN. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049748 | Methods and Devices for OTA Management of Mobile Stations - A method for providing cellular network subscription data from an administration server to a mobile station that includes a secure element, such as a SIM or a UICC, and is configured to communicate via a cellular communications network. The method comprises the steps in the mobile station: attaching to a WLAN with a WLAN module implemented in the mobile station; establishing a communication link between the mobile station and the administration server via the WLAN the mobile station has attached to; and downloading cellular network subscription data from the administration server via the WLAN to the mobile station and storing the same within the secure element of the mobile station such that with the cellular network subscription data the mobile station can attach to a corresponding cellular communications network. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049749 | TRUST INDICATION FOR WLAN ACCESS NETWORKS - It is provided a method, comprising providing a non 3GPP network access to a user equipment (S | 02-19-2015 |
20150049750 | REMOTELY CONTROLLING ASPECTS OF POOLS AND SPAS - Systems and methods of (remotely) controlling aspects of pools and spas and of modifying water contained therein are detailed. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) standard may be employed to facilitate formation of networks including networking devices associated with controllers of pool and spa equipment. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049751 | NETWORK-CODED MULTIPLE ACCESS - Systems and methods described herein include a first wireless local area network (“WLAN”) system that jointly exploits physical-layer network coding (“PNC”) and multiuser decoding (“MUD”) to boost system throughput. This multiple access mode is referred to as Network-Coded Multiple Access (“NCMA”). NCMA allows multiple nodes to transmit simultaneously to the access point (“AP”) to boost throughput in a non-relay environment. When two nodes A and B transmit to the AP simultaneously, the AP desires to obtain both packet A and packet B rather than their network-coded packet. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049752 | COLLISION AVOIDANCE FOR TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques for avoiding collision of traffic in a wireless network are described. A station detects for synchronization of its traffic with traffic of other stations. The station may detect for synchronization based on, e.g., percentage of first transmission failures, counters indicative of statistics of transmitted frames, and/or other information. The station may confirm synchronization of its traffic, e.g., by monitoring for traffic from another station during a service period for the station. The station adjusts transmission of its traffic when synchronization is detected to avoid collision with the traffic of the other stations. The station may delay transmission of its traffic by a predetermined amount of time, by a pseudo-random amount, or until after the other stations finish their transmissions. | 02-19-2015 |
20150055639 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS TO ACKNOWLEDGE FRAGMENTED FRAMES - Logic for communications with an efficient acknowledgement (ACK) procedure for fragmented frames. Logic may determine an acknowledgement protocol to handle more fragments of a frame than the maximum that can be included in a bitmap of an NDP (null data packet) block acknowledgement (BlockACK). Logic may determine fragment indices to associate with an implicit ACK policy. Logic may read the Fragment Number field value in the Sequence Control field of a data frame to determine the fragment index. Logic may transmit an NDP BlockACK frame for every X fragments with fragment indices greater than X−1 so that L NDP BlockACK frames can acknowledge N fragmented frames. Logic may determine a bit number in a bitmap associated with a fragment index. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055640 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus for distributed services and data in a machine-to-machine (M2M) communication network are disclosed. A network server, an M2M gateway, and M2M devices include an M2M service capability layer for supporting M2M service capabilities, respectively. Reference points may be defined for interactions between network service capability layers, between gateway service capability layers, between a gateway service capability layer and a device service capability layer of an M2M device, between M2M device applications, and/or between a network, gateway, or device service capability layer and an M2M application. The network server may be split into a control server and a data server at a service capability layer to provide service capabilities for control functions and service capabilities for data functions, respectively. The data server may be configured to interact with another data server to push or pull data or resources either directly or indirectly via the control server. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055641 | Method and Apparatus for Scaling an Idle Period - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to allow the idle period to be defined in a more tailored manner, such as on a per station or per class of stations basis, as opposed to on a per access point basis. In the context of a method, an indication of an idle period is caused to be provided to a station. The method also causes an association with the station to be maintained for a period of time that is at least partially defined by the idle period. The period of time for which an association is maintained with the station is different than a period of time for which an association is maintained with another station in an absence of communication with the another station. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055642 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DELIVERING PUSH MESSAGE - A system may deliver a push message to user equipment. The system may include a push notification server and a mobile communication core network. The push notification server may be configured to create and transmit a push message when a certain data is updated. The mobile communication core network may be configured to receive the push message from the push notification server, determine whether a user equipment associated with the push message is connected to a wireless local area network (WLAN) access network, and transmit the push message to the user equipment through at least one of a mobile communication radio access network and the WLAN access network based on the determination. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063328 | SYSTEM, POLICY NODES, AND METHODS TO PERFORM POLICY PROVISIONING OF TRAFFIC OFFLOADED AT A FIXED BROADBAND NETWORK - A system, policy nodes, and methods are described herein for establishing a policy session (e.g., IP-CAN session) for a user equipment between a first policy node (e.g., BPCF) which is associated with a fixed broadband access network (e.g., non- | 03-05-2015 |
20150063329 | SELECTIVE VEHICLE WI-FI ACCESS - A method and system of selectively permitting access to a vehicle Wi-Fi network includes establishing a plurality of vehicular Wi-Fi access levels each of which provide access to different features at a vehicle; generating a short-range wireless signal that provides Wi-Fi network access at the vehicle; associating a wireless device with one of the established vehicular Wi-Fi access levels; receiving an identity of the wireless device at the vehicle via the short-range wireless signal; determining the level of Wi-Fi access associated with the received identity using the vehicle telematics unit; and controlling access to the different features according to the determined level of Wi-Fi access level associated with the received identity. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063330 | AGGREGATION OF DATA PACKETS FOR MULTIPLE STATIONS - As one example, an apparatus for wireless communications includes a processing system configured to communicate with several receivers including a first receiver and a second receiver. The processing system is configured to generate an aggregate data packet including several data packets that include a first data packet and a second data packet. The first data packet is destined for the first receiver and the second data packet is destined for the second receiver. The aggregate data packet includes a delimiter that includes a group identifier for determining, at the first receiver, that at least one of the data packets, including the first data packet, is destined for the first receiver. The group identifier is also for determining, at the second receiver, that at least one of the data packets, including the second data packet, is destined for the second receiver. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063331 | ACCESS POINT DETECTION - A wireless communications device has network interfaces for accessing cellular data networks and Wi-Fi wireless local area networks. Wi-Fi offload allows data traffic to be moved away from the cellular network to the Wi-Fi network. To avoid any existing data sessions being broken during offload, Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP) must be supported by a Wi-Fi access point and associated Mobile Access Gateway. Before Wi-Fi association and authentication, the wireless communication device scans the surrounding area for access points and determines which of the access points supports PMIP before selecting one for association. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063332 | METHOD FOR SETTING OPERATING CHANNEL IN WHITE SPACE BAND AND DEVICE THEREFOR - A method for setting an operating channel in a white space band and a device therefore are disclosed. Specifically, a method for setting an operating channel in a white space band by a device comprises the following steps: receiving a white space map including information on a an available TV channel and an offset value in the available TV channel; and setting an operating channel on the basis of the information on the available TV channel and the offset value in the available TV channel, wherein the offset value indicates a shift amount of the center frequency of the operating channel from the center frequency of the available TV channel. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063333 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVED UTILIZATION OF A WIRELESS MEDIUM - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication are provided. In an embodiment, a method of wireless communication includes receiving, at an access point, a probe request from a wireless device, transmitting a probe response including shared access point state information, receiving an association request including an indication that the wireless device has stored the shared access point state information, and transmitting an association response conditionally including the shared access point state information based on the indication in the association request. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063334 | LOW RATE DATA COMMUNICATION - A method includes generating a data packet at a source device for transmission via an Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 802.11 wireless network. The data packet includes multiple data symbols that are duplicated in the data packet. At least a portion of a preamble of the data packet is not duplicated in the data packet. The portion of the preamble indicates that the packet is a low rate mode packet. The method also includes transmitting the data packet from the source device to a destination device via the wireless network. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063335 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVED UTILIZATION OF A WIRELESS MEDIUM - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication are provided. In an embodiment, a method of wireless communication includes receiving, at an access point, a probe request, decoding the probe request to determine shared wireless device state information, storing the shared wireless device state information for at least a timeout period, transmitting a probe response indicating the timeout period; and receiving an association request omitting the wireless device state information within the timeout period. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063336 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVED UTILIZATION OF A WIRELESS MEDIUM - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication are provided. In an embodiment, a method of determining a set of communication parameters for a wireless communication includes transmitting, at an access point, one or more frames each including a transmission power indication, receiving, at the access point, a probe request using a first set of communication parameters; and transmitting, at the access point, a probe response using a second set of communication parameters, the second set of communication parameters based on the first set of communication parameters. In some aspects, each of the first and second set of communication parameters define a MCS, which defines a coding rate of the communication. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063337 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION SPEED AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method of operating an electronic device is provided. The method includes communicating data with a wireless network using a wireless communication, connecting to an external electronic device using a wired communication, exchanging data with the external device at a first data throughput using the wired communication while performing the wireless communication, and changing the first data throughput to a second data throughput while performing the wireless communication. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063338 | RESTRICTING THE OPERATION OF AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method is provided including: detecting an activation of an electronic device; detecting a current location of the electronic device; detecting whether the activation is prohibited at the current location of the electronic device; and shutting down the electronic device when the activation is prohibited. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063339 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONFIGURING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING DEVICE NAMES IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and an electronic device which is able to configure wireless communication using device names in the electronic device are provided. The method for wireless communication in the electronic device includes configuring communication connection information by designating device names to be used for connection with communication devices; and providing a communication service by establishing a wireless communication link to the communication device using the designated device name and communicating with the communication device. Configuring the communication connection information includes displaying a wireless communication configuration screen; displaying, upon selection of a device name displayed on the wireless communication configuration screen, a default device name of the communication device and a list of account names of accounts registered with the communication device; and designating an account name selected from the displayed list as a device name. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063340 | System and Method for Using SIC to Solve WiFi Collisions - An embodiment method of collision resolution includes receiving a frame A and a colliding frame B. The frame A and the colliding frame B are received over a channel and overlap in time. The method also includes decoding the frame A. The method also includes recovering and decoding the colliding frame B, at least partially, using successive interference cancellation (SIC). | 03-05-2015 |
20150063341 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus supports at least a second wireless communication scheme between a first wireless communication scheme and the second wireless communication scheme. The first wireless communication scheme requires that a wireless medium is determined to be busy when a reception level is equal to or greater than a minimum reception sensitivity level of a physical scheme. The apparatus includes a first processing unit and a second processing unit. The first processing unit is configured to set a value lower than a maximum transmission power of the first wireless communication scheme, for a maximum transmission power of the second wireless communication scheme and set a value greater than the minimum reception sensitivity level of the physical scheme, for a carrier sense level, when the second wireless communication scheme is used. The second processing unit is configured to carry out carrier sense using the carrier sense level. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071268 | REGULATORY COMPLIANCE FOR WIRELESS DEVICES - A wireless device may be subject to regulations based on the location (e.g. country). Accordingly, the wireless device may need to identify regulations for its current location. A lookup table or database that includes regulations for different locations may be used for identifying the regulations for the current location of the wireless device. The lookup table may be stored locally on the wireless device or retrieved over a network. The identified regulations may be used to modify certain operating parameters of the wireless device to comply with the local regulations and determine whether or not to associate with an incorrectly configured Access Point. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071269 | Wi-Fi/RADIO FREQUENCY CONVERTING DEVICE - A Wi-Fi/radio frequency (RF) converting device includes a Wi-Fi transceiver, a multiplexing converting module, and a RF transceiver. The Wi-Fi transceiver receives a Wi-Fi control signal from a control signal generator. The multiplexing converting module receives the Wi-Fi control signal from the Wi-Fi transceiver and converts the Wi-Fi control signal into a RF control signal. The RF transceiver receives the RF control signal from the multiplexing converting module and sends the RF control signal to a plurality of electric elements. An RF extension device may be provided to share the signal transmission between the electric elements and the Wi-Fi/RF converting device | 03-12-2015 |
20150071270 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING AN OCCUPIED WI-FI CHANNEL BY A CLIENT USING A NULLING SCHEME - A method and system for overriding Carrier-Sense-Multiple-Access/Collision-Avoidance (CSMA/CA) without harming the traffic that occupies the channel are provided. The system and method may include for example detecting at a communication node having a plurality of antennas, a preamble transmitted by a co-channel neighboring node operating in compliance with IEEE 802.11 standard within a clear channel assessment (CCA) range of the communication node; and setting uplink transmit weights of the antennas of the communication node, to isolate the communication node from the neighboring node after the neighboring node has transmitted the preamble, to allow the communication node to access the co-channel, by keeping a transmitted signal level of the communication node as received by the neighboring node, below the CCA signal level at one or more of the antennas of said neighboring node. The system may for example implement the method in software running on a baseband processor. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071271 | MODERATION OF NETWORK AND ACCESS POINT SELECTION IN AN IEEE 802.11 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for use in a front-end network communications device, arranged to operate as an access point, for establishing a data connection between a mobile communications terminal and one or more data communications networks comprises receiving, from the mobile communications terminal, a service provider request comprising a MAC address of the mobile communications terminal; sending, to a master server, request information pertaining to the service provider request; receiving, from the master server, a policy message comprising a visibility policy, said visibility policy containing rules for controlling the visibility of at least one of the one or more data communications networks; determining a subset of communications networks that should be visible to the mobile communications terminal based on said rules; and enforcing said visibility policy by allowing said mobile communications terminal to connect only to said subset of data communications networks. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071272 | MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) FEEDBACK PROTOCOL - In a wireless network having a plurality of devices configured to communicate using a beamforming technique, a method includes sending a trigger packet from a first device of the wireless network to a plurality of second devices of the wireless network. The trigger packet includes trigger data configured to cause the plurality of second devices to perform channel measurement based on the trigger data. The method also includes receiving feedback information from each of the plurality of second devices in response to the trigger packet. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071273 | EFFICIENT TRANSFER OF TCP TRAFFIC OVER WLAN - A method for communication includes receiving Transport Control Protocol (TCP) data packets from a first TCP endpoint, for forwarding over a Wireless Local-Area Network (WLAN) to a second TCP endpoint. The received TCP data packets are cached in a cache memory. The TCP data packets cached in the cache memory are forwarded over the WLAN to the second TCP endpoint, including retrying to forward one or more of the cached TCP data packets independently of the first TCP endpoint. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071274 | CABLE ASSEMBLY WITH INTEGRATED WIRELESS PROXIMITY SENSORS - In one embodiment, a cable assembly is provided that comprises a cable, one or more radio transceivers spaced along the length of the cable; and a first set of one or more integrated conductors within the cable to supplying supply DC power and ground to the one or more radio transceivers. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071275 | TECHNIQUES FOR REGION-BASED SCANNING OF DIFFERENT FREQUENCY BANDS FOR USE IN A WIRELESS LAN - A communication method implemented in a mobile device is provided. The communication method includes limiting a frequency band on which the mobile device performs a scanning operation to a first frequency band used for a wireless connection of the mobile device; determining whether it is necessary to scan a second frequency band during a subsequent scanning operation of the mobile device; and in response to determining that it is necessary to scan the second frequency band, allowing the subsequent scanning operation to be performed on a plurality of frequency bands including the first and second frequency bands. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071276 | System and Method for Performing Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) in a WLAN System - A method and device for decoding packets received via a wireless local area network. The method performed by the device including receiving a packet, the packet including a signal portion and a data portion, verifying the signal portion of the packet is valid, determining if the packet is destined for the device, determining if the packet is a retransmission, combining, when the packet is a retransmission, information from the data portion of the packet with stored information from a previously received packet having a data portion that was not successfully decoded and attempting to decode the packet based at least in part on the information and stored information. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071277 | Content Optimization Of A Physical Layer Preamble - Embodiments of the present invention provide for content optimization of a physical layer preamble. In one embodiment of the invention, a method for encapsulating a payload for transmission through a network is disclosed. The method comprises the step of programming a legacy physical layer length value in a legacy physical layer preamble. The legacy physical layer preamble is configured such that it can be received by any legacy stations that may be on the network, and such that a separate physical layer length value can be derived from the legacy physical layer preamble. Using such a system, content optimization of a physical layer preamble is provided. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071278 | CLUSTERING MANAGEMENT IN mmWAVE WIRELESS SYSTEMS - According to various embodiments, a method is disclosed that includes detecting if a first cluster capable PCP/AP is within range of a non-PCP/non-AP STA; and transmitting a message to a second cluster capable PCP/AP associated with the non-PCP/non-AP STA requesting that the second cluster capable PCP/AP start or continue the use of clustering in a basic service set (BSS) of the second cluster capable PCP/AP. | 03-12-2015 |
20150078356 | System and Method for One-Way Traffic in Wireless Communications Systems - A method for operating a sharing station includes receiving, by the sharing station, a request to send (RTS) frame on a wireless channel, wherein the RTS frame is not addressed to the sharing station, and wherein the RTS frame including a transmit only indicator indicating that a transmitting station of the RTS frame will only transmit frames without receiving frames until expiration of a first time value in a first duration field of the RTS frame. The method also includes determining, by the sharing station, if a clear to send (CTS) frame corresponding to the RTS frame is received within a specified time period after receiving the RTS frame, and transmitting, by the sharing station, a frame when the CTS frame corresponding to the RTS frame is not received within the specified time period. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078357 | ACCESS CONTROL INTERFACES FOR ENHANCED WIRELESS ROUTER - A wireless router provides access control to information resources stored at the wireless router. The wireless router supports user profiles and/or device profiles that respectively enable user level and/or device level access control. The wireless router may register users via a user registration interface presented by the client device. The wireless router may register client devices using a device identifier. Requests to initiate a communication session may be received by the wireless router from client devices over a wireless local area network. The wireless router may authenticate a client device based on a device identifier and/or authenticate a user based on user credentials obtained via a login interface presented by the client device. The wireless router may control access to information resources stored at the wireless router during the communication session based, at least in part, on access privileges for the authenticated client device and/or authenticated user. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078358 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP HIGH-SPEED LINK IN WLAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, disclosed are a method and an apparatus for setting up a high-speed link in a WLAN system. A method for a station (STA) setting up the high-speed link in a wireless communication system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: transmitting to an access point (AP) a request frame including a generic advertisement service (GAS) configuration change query; and receiving from the AP a response frame including response information with respect to the GAS configuration change query, wherein the response information may include GAS step skipping information when AS information saved in the STA matches the GAS information saved in the AP. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078359 | ACCESS POINT DETECTION - A wireless communications device has network interfaces for accessing cellular data networks and Wi-Fi wireless local area networks. Wi-Fi offload allows data traffic to be moved away from the cellular network to the Wi-Fi network. To avoid any existing data sessions being broken during offload, Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP) must be supported by a Wi-Fi access point and associated Mobile Access Gateway. After Wi-Fi association and authentication, the wireless communication device probes the access point and MAG to determine whether PMIP is supported. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078360 | Network Access Method And Apparatus - The embodiment of the present invention discloses a network access method and apparatus. The method comprises: a UE receiving WLAN access auxiliary information sent by a 3GPP access network; according to the information, the UE measuring WLAN radio signal quality and performing an access judgment to obtain a judgment result; and the UE accessing to the WLAN according to the judgment result. The present invention can accelerate the access of the UE to the WLAN and enable the UE to acquire subsequent data joint transmission and/or services, thereby improving the user experience. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078361 | RADIO NETWORK FOR SUPPORTING FARMING OPERATIONS - A farm irrigation network includes an irrigation assembly having a radio, a soil moisture sensor assembly having a radio, and a sub-master site having a first radio and a second radio. The first radio and the radios of the irrigation assembly and the soil moisture assembly form a local network and the second radio is configured to communicate with a backhaul medium to establish communications with a server. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078362 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In the present invention, a connection controller controls opening/closing of connection between a first communication unit that communicates with a terminal device and a second communication unit that communicates via a network. A connection setting unit instructs opening/closing of the connection to the connection controller in accordance with a user input received by an input unit in accordance with first identification information output from the terminal device displayed on a display unit. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078363 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATOR FOR LAPTOP COMPUTERS - A cellular communicator, including a baseband modem for connecting to the Internet via a cellular network and an Internet gateway, and a wireless modem, for connecting to a computer modem via a short range wireless communication, and for providing the computer modem with Internet access via the baseband modem. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078364 | System and Method for Online Sign Up Provider Selection - A mobile station selects a provider such as an online sign up (OSU) provider by receiving a pre-association message including OSU selection information from a Wi-Fi network component, such as an access point in communication with the OSU provider, and sending a selection of an OSU provider in accordance with the OSU selection information to the network component. The OSU selection information excludes identification of the OSU network provider or resource, but provides other attributes to the user, such as price or service configuration. The pre-association message may be transmitted as a beacon or using ANQP. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078365 | VIRTUAL ACCESS POINT USING SINGLE SERVICE SET IDENTIFIERS - An Access Point (“AP”) apparatus comprising one or more processors containing program code. The program code may be configured to: (i) cause the AP to broadcast a beacon containing a single SSID indentifying the AP; (ii) cause the AP to receive from the STA an query for network information for at least one network operator accessible through the AP; and (iii) cause the AP to send to the STA, for the at least one network operator, a network information description element, in response to the network information query. The AP providing the plural responses broadcasts only a single service set identification (“SSID”). | 03-19-2015 |
20150078366 | MULTI-CARRIER CONFIGURATION, ACTIVATION AND SCHEDULING - Embodiments of block acknowledgements request apparatus, systems, and methods are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. An aggregated block of a plurality of data frames is received from an originator transmission, with each data frame including a medium access control (MAC) header. An acknowledgement policy that is solicited by the originator is identified in a quality of service field in at least one of the MAC headers of the received transmission. A single block acknowledgement is transmitted to the originator acknowledging receipt of one or more of the plurality of data frames in the aggregated block of data frames. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078367 | COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE, COMPUTER PRODUCT, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communications device includes a processor configured to detect a wirelessly communicating base station, using a given interval; determine whether identification information of the detected base station matches identification information of a base station detected last time; and set the given interval to a second interval upon determining that the identification information of the detected base station and the identification information of the base station detected last time match. The second interval is longer than a first interval that is set upon determining that the identification information of the detected base station and the identification information of the base station detected last time do not match. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078368 | ENHANCEMENTS TO THE MU-MIMO VHT PREAMBLE TO ENABLE MODE DETECTION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure present a technique for enabling a receiver to detect mode of transmission of a signal based on a common field transmitted to all the receivers. The proposed technique includes frame structure in which information about the transmission mode is transmitted in a first portion of a SIG field to all the receivers. | 03-19-2015 |
20150085844 | ACCESS POINT COORDINATED RE-ASSOCIATION OF WIRELESS DEVICES - A first AP in a wireless network determines that a wireless client device should re-associate from the first AP to a second AP of the wireless network. The first AP communicates an AP coordination message from the first AP to the second AP to share coordination information with the second AP. The first AP coordinates with the second AP to cause the re-association of the wireless client device in accordance with the coordination information. The first and second AP may coordinate directly to synchronize re-association activities. Re-association activities may include the use of a configuration message to the wireless client device, managing transmit power of beacon messages from the first and second APs, or forced disassociation and blocking. The first AP may maintain a record of which re-association activity was successful in causing the wireless client device to re-associate to the second AP. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085845 | TUNNELING PACKET EXCHANGE IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION PROTOCOL BASED NETWORKS - A system that incorporates the subject disclosure may include, for example, receiving from a wireless device a request for a network connection and facilitating, in response to the request, a communication session between a wireless access node in communication with the wireless device and a packet data network. Control signals are exchanged between a second network device and a packet data network gateway. The second network device includes a mobility anchoring function and operating in an evolved packet core of a long term evolution system. Eligibility of the wireless communication device to participate in a direct tunnel connection is determined, the direct tunnel allowing transfer of user data packets between the wireless device and packet data network to bypass the mobility anchoring function. Establishment of the direct tunnel connection is facilitated to transfer multiple user data packets between the wireless device and the packet data network. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085846 | RADIO ACCESS METHOD FOR REDUCING ROUTING OVERHEAD IN COGNITIVE RADIO ADHOC NETWORKS - A radio access method for use in a radio access device in cognitive radio ad-hoc networks, the radio access method comprising: comparing additional information about neighboring radio access devices, which exist in the cognitive radio ad-hoc networks, in a second layer of the radio access device with additional information about the neighboring radio access devices in a third layer of the radio access device in the cognitive radio ad-hoc networks; and generating a routing control message when the additional information of the second layer is different from the additional information of the third layer to broadcast the routing control message. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085847 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Users are enabled to readily use desired applications. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085848 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Wireless Network Access Parameter Sharing - In a non-limiting and example embodiment, a method is provided for controlling access to wireless network access parameters, comprising: providing, by an apparatus to a second apparatus, credentials for accessing to a wireless network, detecting, by the apparatus, an identity of a third apparatus, and sending, by the apparatus, a message to the second apparatus to allow to deliver the credentials to the third apparatus. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085849 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for updating system information in a wireless LAN system. A method for a station (STA) to update system information in a wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: if the value of a change sequence field received by the STA from an access point (AP) is different from the value of the change sequence field stored in the STA, transmitting, to the AP, a probe request frame including the change sequence field set to the value of the change sequence field stored in the STA; and a step of receiving, from the AP, a probe response frame responding to the probe request frame including the change sequence field. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085850 | Enabling and Controlling Access to Wireless Hot Spots - A process of enabling and controlling access to a wireless hotspot by a wireless portable device is disclosed. An access request is sent, seeking access to a wireless hotspot, to an authenticating entity and response to the access request is awaited. Additional verification information is provided when requested by the wireless hotspot and wireless network data is exchanging between the wireless portable device and the wireless hotspot. Additionally, the access request includes an identifier used by the authenticating entity to authenticate the wireless portable device. | 03-26-2015 |
20150092763 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING TRAFFIC INDICATION MAP IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed are a method for transmitting and receiving a traffic indication map (TIM) in a wireless communication system and a device for supporting the same. More particularly, the method for transmitting a traffic indication map comprises the step of transmitting a TIM to a STA through a beacon frame, wherein the TIM includes: a block bitmap field for indicating a subblock including a STA in which buffered downlink data exists for respective N (N are two or more natural numbers) blocks; and a block control field for indicating an encoding method for the bitmap field. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092764 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication apparatus establishes communication with a data processing apparatus via a first network created by the data processing apparatus, receives an instruction to transmit data to an external apparatus different from the data processing apparatus after the communication with the data processing apparatus is established, transmits, to the data processing apparatus, a notification for terminating the communication with the data processing apparatus and a notification for causing the data processing apparatus to continue the first network, if the instruction is received, and establishes communication with the external apparatus via a second network after the communication with the data processing apparatus is terminated. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098455 | WiFi Enabled Wide Area Automation System - Disclosed is a Wi-Fi enabled wide area automation system. The system includes an application installed in a handheld wireless communication device for wireless controlling of the at least one appliance by accessing a specific preset hypertext markup language (HTML) page. A microcontroller server communicates with the application to control the at least one appliance. The microcontroller server is configured to operate in a web server mode using TCP/IP stack. A Wi-Fi router connected with the microcontroller server using a wireless local area network (WLAN) enables the microcontroller server to communicate with the handheld wireless communication device. A relay controls the at least one appliance based on a signal from the microcontroller server. A liquid-crystal display (LCD) displays a plurality of statuses of the microcontroller server. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098456 | MECHANISM FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - In a communication system, an access point in communication with one or more stations is configured to shift the start of transmission of its downlink data. The access point may automatically shift the transmission of the downlink data in response to receiving downlink data transmitted by a neighboring access point. Shifting the start of transmission of its downlink data permits stations to correctly synchronize to the downlink data. The transmission of data may be synchronized to a synchronization event. In some instances, the access point updates its downlink data with a value corresponding to the shift. The access point may not shift the transmission of the downlink data if the signal strength of the received downlink data is below a threshold. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098457 | ENABLING INTERNET PROTOCOL CONNECTIVITY ACROSS MULTI-HOP MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORKS VIA A SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE - The disclosure provides a method, apparatus, and computer program product directed towards enabling internet protocol (IP) connectivity across multi-hop wireless networks. A virtual adapter is generated to facilitate creating a virtual link layer between a virtual link layer node and at least one other virtual link layer node. The virtual link layer is then interfaced with an IP layer via the virtual adapter, such that data transmitted over the virtual link layer is accessible to the IP layer via the virtual adapter. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098458 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND WIRELESS NETWORK DETECTION AND SETUP METHOD APPLIED THERETO - A wireless local area network system and a wireless network detection and setup method applied thereto are provided. The system includes a base station and at least one wireless device, wherein a first service set identifier is preset in both of the base station and the at least one wireless device. The method includes following steps: the base station and the at least one wireless device use the first service set identifier to enter a first setup mode; in the first setup mode, the base station is automatically connected to the wireless device via at least one connection path and inspects the at least one connection path; the base station and the at least one wireless device end the first setup mode, stop using the first service set identifier, and switch to use a second service set identifier for connection according to an inspection result. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098459 | SCANNING METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND SUPPORTING DEVICE THEREFOR - A scanning method performed by a station (STA) in a wireless LAN system is provided. The method comprises: transmitting a probe request frame; and receiving a short probe response frame from an access point (AP) as a response to the probe request frame. The short probe response frame includes service set ID (SSID) information or compressed SSID information of the AP. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098460 | Group Based Location Service in Wireless Local Area Networks - A method of group-based location service is proposed. A wireless station initiates a ranging process with a plurality of wireless communications devices in a wireless local area network. The station belongs to a group of wireless stations. The station exchanges measurement frames with the plurality of wireless communications devices during the ranging process. The station then computes a plurality of distances to each of the plurality of wireless communications devices and thereby determining an absolute location of the station. Finally, the station informs the absolute location to a group owner of the group of wireless stations. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098461 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING AGGREGATE DATA UNITS - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of communicating aggregate data units. For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit to communicate an aggregate data unit including a plurality of data units in an increasing order of sequence numbers assigned to the data units, such that a first data unit having a first sequence number always precedes a second data unit having a second sequence number, greater than the first sequence number. | 04-09-2015 |
20150103812 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WiFi QUALITY ESTIMATION BASED ON BASIC SERVICE SET LOAD AND WIDE AREA NETWORK METRICS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for determining a quality estimation of a wireless network that may be used to determine whether a particular wireless network meets one or more criteria for association with a station. The quality estimation may be based on a load quality of a basic service set (BSS) of an available wireless network and/or one or more wide area network (WAN) metrics associated with the wireless network. A station may evaluate such load quality and WAN metrics prior to association, and/or after association with a wireless network. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103813 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR ON-DEMAND ROUTING PROTOCOLS FOR MESH NETWORKS - Various embodiments implement a set of low overhead mechanisms to enable on-demand routing protocols. The on-demand protocols use route accumulation during discovery floods to discover when better paths have become available even if the paths that the protocols are currently using are not broken. In other words, the mechanisms (or “Route Optimizations”) enable improvements to routes even while functioning routes are available. The Route Optimization mechanisms enable nodes in the network that passively learn routing information to notify nodes that need to know of changes in the routing information when the changes are important. Learning routing information on up-to-date paths and determining nodes that would benefit from the information is performed, in some embodiments, without any explicit control packet exchange. One of the Route Optimization mechanisms includes communicating information describing an improved route from a node where the improved route diverges from a less nearly optimal route. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103814 | Wireless Local Area Network Configuration Method and Wireless Terminal - A wireless local area network configuration method and a wireless terminal. In embodiments of the present application, a first MCC is acquired from a user card of the wireless terminal, and then first wireless local area network configuration information corresponding to the first MCC is determined, so that wireless local area network configuration can be performed for the wireless terminal by using the first wireless local area network configuration information. Therefore, a problem in the prior art that an operation of wireless local area network configuration for a wireless terminal is complicated and error-prone can be resolved, thereby improving configuration efficiency and reliability. | 04-16-2015 |
20150110087 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTING OR EXCLUDING AN ACCESS POINT FOR USE IN WIRELESSLY CONNECTING TO A NETWORK - A method is performed in a mobile device for selecting or excluding an access point for use in wirelessly connecting to a network. The method includes collecting historical connection data for a first access point, wherein the historical connection data identifies a plurality of previous wireless connections to the network using the first access point and identifies a corresponding duration of each previous wireless connection. The method further includes: detecting that the first access point is available for a current wireless connection to the network; calculating an expected connection duration for the first access point using the historical connection data; and determining whether to select or exclude the first access point as a candidate for the current wireless connection based on the expected connection duration calculated for the first access point. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110088 | SENDING AND RECEIVING MESSAGES OVER WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A device may receive a text message or a multimedia message to be received by a receiving device. The message may be stored by one or more storage devices. The device may determine that the message is to be received by the receiving device via a wireless local area network (WLAN). The device may send, to the receiving device, a notification associated with the message. The device may identify a storage device, of the one or more storage devices, to provide the message to the receiving device. The device may manage a synchronization between the receiving device and the storage device via the WLAN. The synchronization may cause the message to be received by the receiving device. The device may receive an indication that the receiving device has received the message, and may provide closure information. The closure information may prevent the message from being delivered via a cellular network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110089 | Network Selection for Mobile Client Devices in Integrated Cellular and Wi-Fi Networks - Techniques are provided for a network device to receive a first notification message from a first wireless network operating via a first radio frequency protocol, where the notification message indicates a presence of a mobile device within a radio frequency coverage area of a first wireless access point in the first wireless network. A connection message is transmitted from the network device to the mobile device, where the connection message comprises information configured to initiate a connection of the mobile device to a second wireless network operating via a second radio frequency protocol when a radio frequency coverage area of a second wireless access point in the second wireless network is known to overlap the radio frequency coverage area of the first wireless access point in the first wireless network. The connection message may initiate mobile device connections or transfers between, e.g., macrocell, femtocell, and Wi-Fi networks, among other networks. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110090 | GROUP OWNER SELECTION FOR A PEER-TO-PEER GROUP - A computing device of a peer-to-peer group for a wireless communication protocol may determine that a peer-to-peer connection for the group transports an application flow sourced by a Group Owner to a client of the Group Owner. The computing devices of the group select the client that receives the application flow sourced by the Group Owner to be a new Group Owner for the group. As a consequence, the computing device of the group that receives the application flow is the new Group Owner and, as a result, the Group Owner for the group receives the application flow whereas prior to the selection of the new Group Owner the Group Owner transmitted the application flow. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110091 | SCANNING METHOD AND SCANNING APPARATUS IN WIRELESS LAN - Disclosed are a scanning method and scanning apparatus in a wireless LAN. The scanning method in a wireless LAN comprises: a step in which an access point (AP) receives a first probe request frame from a first station (STA); a step in which the AP unicasts a first probe response frame to the first STA as a response to the first probe request frame; a step in which the AP receives a second probe request frame from a second STA for a specific time interval after unicasting the first probe response frame to the first STA; and a step in which the AP broadcasts a second probe response frame as a response to the second probe request frame for a specific time interval. Thus, scanning processes can be quickly performed. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110092 | APPARATUS FOR MEASURING BIOLOGICAL INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING DATA FROM APPARATUS FOR MEASURING BIOLOGICAL INFORMATION - The present invention relates to an apparatus for measuring biological information supporting multiplex communication. The apparatus for measuring biological information, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises: a measuring portion for measuring biological information through a biosensor; a data communication portion for transreceiving the biological information that is measured with an external device through a wireless communication network, which supports a client mode and an AP mode; and a control portion for accessing a communication network by controlling the client mode or the AP mode in a WiFi module. The present invention can transmit data to the external device through a connected AP by operating a wireless communication module in the client mode, or communicate data with the external device through a communication module of terminals, which connect by self-switching to the AP mode when the connected AP does not exist. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110093 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND DEVICES FOR DYNAMICALLY SETTING RESPONSE INDICATION DEFERRAL IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatuses for wireless communication are provided. A method for wireless communication comprises receiving a first physical layer protocol data unit. The method further comprises receiving a second PPDU. The method further comprises updating a value of a response indication deferral counter to a value indicated by the second PPDU when the second PPDU is associated with a same basic service set as the first PPDU. The method further comprises updating the response indication deferral counter to the value indicated by the second PPDU when the second PPDU is associated with a different basic service set than the first PPDU and the indicated value is not less than a current value of the response indication deferral counter. The current value of the response indication deferral corresponds to a value of the response indication deferral counter when the end of the second PPDU is received. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110094 | SYSTEM COORDINATED WLAN SCANNING - The invention proposes a scan control device, wherein in the scan operation a network detection is performed, the device comprising a request receiving means for receiving at least one request for providing scan information, and a scan control means for performing a scan operation independently from receiving the scan information requests. The invention also proposes a corresponding method and a computer program product. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110095 | GATEWAY SYSTEM, DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Embodiments of the present invention provide a gateway system and a communication method. The gateway system includes: a control plane entity, connected or integrated with a mobility management network element, and configured to allocate an IP address to UE and configure a data path for connecting a user plane entity with an RAN, a PDN or another gateway; one or more user plane entities, located between the PDN and the RAN, independent of the control plane entity, configured to forward data on the data path configured by the control plane entity. The gateway system is composed of the control plane entity and the user plane entity which are independent of each other, the number of the user plane entities may be independently changed to adapt to the change of network traffic without replacing all gateway entities, the network deployment is more convenient and the cost is lower. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110096 | SECURE ON-LINE SIGNUP AND PROVISIONING OF WIRELESS DEVICES - Embodiments of a mobile device and method for secure online sign-up and provisioning of credentials for Wi-Fi hotspots are generally described herein. In some embodiments, provisioning occurs using a service set identifier (SSID) to associate with a hotspot and retrieve a virtual LAN (VLAN) identifier. The VLAN identifier is used to complete the signup and provisioning process. In some embodiments, a hotspot may implement a primary SSID and a dependent SSID. The mobile device associates with the hotspot using the dependent SSID to perform the secure online signup and provisioning process. Once credentials are obtained using the signup and provisioning process, the device can connect to the hotspot using the primary SSID and the already provisioned credentials. The provisioned credentials may include certificates, username/password, or SIM-type credentials. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110097 | System and Method for Using Distributed Network Performance Information Tables to Manage Network Communications - A system, method and network communications device including a processing unit configured to communicate data packets with one or more network communications devices. The data packets include network performance information generated by the one or more network communications devices in response to receiving a portion of the data packets. The network communications device further includes a memory in communication with the processing unit. The memory is configured to store a table containing network performance information associated with the node segments through which the data packets are communicated with the one or more network communications devices. The processing unit is further configured to process the data packets to store the network performance information in the table. The network performance information is utilized to alter future communications of the data packets through the node segments. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110098 | Data Transmission Method, Device, and Gateway - A data transmission method includes: receiving, by a first device in a home network, a first message sent by a gateway, where the first message identifies that a first connection between the gateway and an external network is broken; sending, by the first device after receiving the first message, a second message to the gateway, where the second message is used to enable the gateway to set a first packet forwarding rule on the gateway, and setting, by the first device after receiving the first message, a second packet forwarding rule on the first device, where the second packet forwarding rule is used by the first device to forward packets that come from the gateway and are destined for the external network, through a second connection that is established by the first device with the external network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110099 | Service Information Discovery Method and Device - A service information discovery method includes sending a first query request message. The first query request message carries a first hash value obtained by performing a first hash operation on service identity information of a service to be discovered. The method includes receiving a first query response message sent by a peer end. The first query response message carries first result notification information identifying whether a service of which a hash value obtained by performing the first hash operation is the first hash value exists at the peer end. The method further includes performing the second hash operation on the service identity information of the service to be discovered, and obtaining the second hash value corresponding to the service to be discovered; and if the second hash value corresponding to the service to be discovered exists in the first result notification information, determining that the service to be discovered exists at the peer end. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110100 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PROJECTOR, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system performs ad-hoc mode communication, wherein a first terminal includes an identification information storing section, an IP address storing section, an SSID generating section generating a service set identifier, a beacon signal generating section generating a beacon signal including an SSID, and a priority information updating section updating priority information, and the second terminal includes an SSID acquiring section acquiring the SSID from the beacon signal, memory storing the SSID, an SSID selecting section selecting one SSID based on the priority information, an IP address acquiring section acquiring the IP address of the first terminal from the selected SSID, and a communicating section making a connection to the first terminal by using the acquired IP address. | 04-23-2015 |
20150117418 | COMMUNICATION EFFICIENCY - There is provided a method, comprising: detecting, by a node of a first wireless network, that at least one overlapping second wireless network is configured to apply contention periods and contention-free periods for communicating with different subsets of devices; detecting that a contention period timing applied by the at least one overlapping second wireless network is not aligned with a contention period timing applied by the node of the first wireless network; and causing a modification of the contention period timing in at least one of the wireless networks in order to have the contention periods to take place at least partly at the same time in each overlapping wireless network. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117419 | INTELLIGENT MESH OBJECT LIST BUILDUP - An embodiment provides a method, including: establishing a connection between a first device and a second device, the first device thereby joining a mesh network to which the second device is connected; obtaining, at the first device, identifying information for a plurality of devices of the mesh network; accessing information accessible to the first device to determine a device ranking among the plurality of devices of the mesh network; after determining a ranking, obtaining information from a ranked device regarding objects available from the ranked device; and creating, using a processor, a list of available objects on the mesh network; wherein the list of available objects is ordered taking into account the objects available from the ranked devices. Other aspects are described and claimed. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117420 | Communicating with a Distribution System via an Uplink Access Point - The present disclosure discloses a system and method for communicating with a distribution system via an uplink access point. The system includes a processor and a memory storing instructions that, when executed, cause the system to: receive, at a first network device, an original packet from a client device; identify a source MAC address of the original packet as a MAC address of the client device; identify an IP address of the original packet as an IP address of the client device; generate a modified packet from the original packet by changing the source MAC address from the MAC address of the client device to a MAC address of the first network device; preserve the IP address in the modified packet to be the IP address of the client device; and forward the modified packet from the first network device to a second network device. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117421 | ADAPTIVE DUAL BAND MIMO WI-FI APPARATUS, AND OPERATING METHOD THEREOF - An adaptive dual band Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) wireless-fidelity (Wi-Fi) apparatus may include an application processor, an interface unit transmitting data and a control signal from the application processor, a first dual band wireless communications unit performing wireless communications using at least one of a first band and a second band; a second dual band wireless communications unit performing wireless communications using at least one of the first band and the second band upon being operated, a first selecting unit providing a first path between the first dual band wireless communications unit and a first antenna and providing a second path between the second dual band wireless communications unit and the first antenna, and a second selecting unit providing a first path between the second dual band wireless communications unit and the second antenna and providing a second path between the first dual band wireless communications unit and the second antenna. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117422 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK RECEIVER AND ASSOCIATED METHOD - A wireless local area network (WLAN) includes a server and receiver, which includes a radio frequency (RF) front-end circuit that receives wireless signals from the mobile nodes within the WLAN and detects baseband signals. A signal waveform detector edge detects a signal waveform and generates a trigger signal indicative of the modulation type, data format and time-of-arrival (TOA) information of a desired signal to be captured. A baseband processor receives the trigger signal from the signal waveform detector and captures the desired signal. A system controller is connected to the baseband processor and configures the baseband processor for processing the desired signal and obtaining message data and signal metrics that are transferred to the system controller to be communicated outbound from the receiver as a client to the server. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117423 | CALL ROUTING FOR IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM USERS - A method of routing an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, connection request sent by a user of a third party service, User A, towards a peer third party service user, User B, where the originating identity and target identity fields contain respectively external third party identities of User A and User B. The method comprises receiving said request at an IMS Access Gateway to an IMS network, and extracting said external identities and determining whether the extracted external identities are registered in respect of a wildcarded IMPU or wildcarded IMPUs that in turn is or are registered in the IMS network. In the event that these are registered, it is determined whether or not service logic is to be executed in the IMS network for both User A and User B and, if not, an IMS Edge Node routable identity associated with User B is determined. The IMS Edge Node routable identity is used to forward the IMS connection request to a terminating side IMS Edge Node. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117424 | METHOD OF SCANNING ACCESS POINT - A method of scanning an access point is disclosed. The method of scanning the access point includes creating a probe request frame including information created based on an identifier of an access point to be searched, and transmitting the probe request frame. Thus, it is possible to decrease the time and power consumed by a terminal when searching an access point. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117425 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) CONNECTIVITY OPTION DISCOVERY - In embodiments, apparatuses, methods, and storage media may be described for identifying a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) with which a third generation partnership project (3GPP) user equipment (UE) should connect. Specifically, the UE may receive an indication of one or more supported connectivity options of the WLAN AP. The UE may also receive an indication of one or more public land mobile networks that the WLAN AP is able to communicate with. The UE may then select whether the UE should connect to the WLAN AP based on the received indication(s) and a selection preference rule. Other embodiments may be claimed. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117426 | PORTABLE MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD IN PORTABLE MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING APPARATUS - A portable medical diagnostic imaging apparatus includes a wireless communication connection portion configured to connect to a network wirelessly, a signal strength obtaining portion configured to obtain signal strength of the wireless connection connected to the network, and a communication control portion configured to switch processing relating to data transmission in accordance with an obtained signal strength of the wireless connection. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117427 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Provided is a data transmission apparatus including a queue management unit to manage at least one queue in which information associated with at least one buffer descriptor (BD) is stored, a scheduler to estimate information to be transmitted among information associated with at least one media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (MPDU) using at least one transmission bitmap (Tx bitmap), a data transmitter to read the estimated information from information associated with a BD indicated in the at least one Tx bitmap, and transmit the read information to a physical layer, and a physical layer management unit to generate information associated with a presentation protocol data unit (PPDU) based on the transmitted information, and transmit the generated information over the air, wherein the at least one BD includes information associated with the at least one MPDU. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117428 | MULTI-MODE WIRELESS TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - Provided is a next-generation wireless local area network (WLAN) frame communication method. The communication method may include modulating a first symbol in a signal field A (SIG-A) of a next-generation WLAN frame using a first modulation method, modulating a second symbol in the SIG-A of the next-generation WLAN frame using a second modulation method, and modulating a short training field (STF) signal of the next-generation WLAN frame in response to a next-generation WLAN mode. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117429 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL AND TRAINING SYMBOLS IN MULTI-USER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for transmitting control and training symbols to improve transmission efficiency in a multi-user wireless communication system. The method for transmitting the control and training symbols in the multi-user wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: determining whether a required transmission rate of each data can be satisfied through channel estimation in each of terminals when different data are simultaneously transmitted to each of the terminals; and transmitting a data frame to each of the terminals, the data frame being composed to discriminate the control and training symbols in each of the terminals using a combination of time, frequency, and code area when the required transmission rate of each data is not satisfied according to the determined result. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117430 | Methods, Devices, and Systems for Registering and Discovering Service - Methods, devices, and systems for registering and discovering a service. An access point (AP) may receive and maintain service information registered by an associated station (STA), and serve as a proxy for a STA to discover service information in a network, and further discover a direct association service and manage direct communication between STAs, thereby meeting a user's demand of selecting a network according to a service requirement. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117431 | METHOD AND APPARATUS USED FOR COMMUNICATION - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus used for communication, including: when a base station receives downlink data through a first system bearer of a first user equipment, detecting, by the base station, according to a context of the first user equipment stored by the base station itself, whether a radio bearer which is of other user equipment except the first user equipment and assists the first user equipment or the first system bearer in transmitting data exists in the base station; if the radio bearer exists, selecting, by the base station, from the first user equipment and the other user equipment except the first user equipment, at least one user equipment that transmits the downlink data; and sending, by the base station, the downlink data through a specified radio bearer corresponding to the at least one user equipment. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117432 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The transmission of a reference signal, such as a CSI-RS, is enabled while maintaining a power saving effect when performing inter-cell cooperative transmission/reception or the like in a plurality of cells. In order to realize inter-cell cooperative transmission/reception, a CSI-RS which is used for estimating the state of a spatial propagation path of a communication line is generated by a CSI-RS generation unit, and the CSI-RS is disposed in a predetermined subframe by a disposition unit and transmitted. At this time, when a frame has ten subframes #0 to #9, the CSI-RS is disposed in the subframes #4 and #9, which are subframes excluding the subframes #0 and #5 incapable of transmitting a CSI-RS and are subframes other than subframes capable of acting as MBSFN subframes when discontinuous communication (Extended Cell DTX) is performed so as to achieve power saving, and transmitted. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117433 | PHYSICAL LAYER FRAME FORMAT FOR WLAN - In a method for generating a physical layer (PHY) data unit for transmission via a communication channel, the PHY data unit conforming to a first communication protocol, a first communication device generates a PHY preamble for the PHY data unit, including: generating a signal field, including the signal field and a duplicate of the signal field in the PHY preamble, and formatting the PHY preamble such that a first portion of the PHY preamble is decodable by a second communication device that conforms to a second communication protocol, but does not conform to the first communication protocol, to determine a duration of the PHY data unit based on the first portion of the PHY preamble. The first communication device generates the PHY data unit to include the PHY preamble and a PHY payload. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117434 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - Provided is a wireless communication device which includes a function information transmitting unit for transmitting, via a wireless communication network, function information relating to a function of the wireless communication device, a function information receiving unit for receiving function information transmitted from another device, a function information comparison unit for comparing the function information of the wireless communication device and the function information received from such other device, and a function determination unit for determining which of the wireless communication device and such other device is to play a function of an access point, based on a result of the comparison by the function information comparison unit. | 04-30-2015 |
20150124790 | AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A controller stores preference information related to an initial configuration of wireless access points (WAPs). Based on the preference information, the controller initially activates or deactivates the WAPs to form a wireless local network (WLAN). The WLAN is monitored and operation of the WAPs may be modified based on the monitoring of the WLAN. For example, the controller may monitor an activity level associated with an active group of the WAPs and may compare the activity level to a threshold. The controller may activate an additional WAP if, for example, the activity level is above an upper threshold, and the controller may deactivate one of the active WAPs if the activity level is below a lower threshold. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124791 | DELIVERY OF SHARED WIFI CREDENTIALS - Various technologies described herein pertain to delivering shared WiFi credentials. According to various embodiments, at least one server computing device is configured to transmit shared WiFi credentials to a mobile device. The at least one server computing device receives a request, where the request includes data that identifies the mobile device. Moreover, the request indicates that the mobile device desirably receives credentials for a shared WiFi network. Responsive to receiving the request, the at least one server computing device determines that the mobile device is authorized to receive the credentials for the shared WiFi network based at least in part upon the data that identifies the mobile device. Moreover, the at least one server computing device transmits the credentials for the shared WiFi network to the mobile device responsive to determining that the mobile device is authorized to receive the credentials for the shared WiFi network. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124792 | DISCOVERY OF WI-FI DIRECT SERVICES VIA DISCOVERY PROBE - Methods, systems, and devices are described for Wi-Fi peer-to-peer (P2P) communications. A seeker user equipment (UE) may identify a desired service to be provided via Wi-Fi P2P communication. The seeker UE may broadcast a probe that identifies the desired service. An advertiser UE may receive the probe from the seeker UE. The probe identifies a desired service for the seeker UE that is to be provided via Wi-Fi P2P communication. The advertiser UE may transmit a probe response to the seeker UE only when it is determined that the advertiser UE is capable of providing the identified desired service. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124793 | METHOD FOR SCANNING FOR ACCESS POINTS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for scanning for an access point in a wireless LAN system. An active scanning method comprises the steps of: transmitting a probe request frame to an access point; and receiving, from the access point, a probe response frame corresponding to the probe request frame. The probe response frame may include time information of a beacon transmitted after the probe response frame. Thus, the efficiency of a wireless channel can be improved in a wireless LAN system. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124794 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMPROMISE GREENFIELD PREAMBLES FOR 802.11N - Aspects of the invention described herein may enable a greenfield access mode in IEEE 802.11n WLAN systems in comparison to an alternative approach that may not provide greenfield access. The utilization of greenfield access may reduce the portion of time required to transmit data due to overhead comprising preamble fields and header fields. This may enable higher data throughput rates to be achieved. This may further enable more robust transmission of data by enabling comparable data rates to be maintained while reducing the coding rate of encoded transmitted data. The reduction of the coding rate may enable comparable data rates to be maintained for transmission via RF channels characterized by lower SNR while still achieving desired target levels of packet error rates. In another aspect of the invention, mixed mode access may be achieved while reducing the portion of time required for transmitting data due to overhead. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124795 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CREATING A PREFERENTIAL AD-HOC NETWORK - A system and method are provided for identifying participants for a preferential ad-hoc network using a peer-to-peer (P | 05-07-2015 |
20150131639 | SCHEMES FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Technologies are generally described for providing wireless communications. In some examples, a method performed under control of a cloud system may include receiving, from an end device, first information including at least one of a location of the end device, a location of an access point to which the end device accesses, a media access control (MAC) address of the end device and a MAC address of the access point; determining that the end device moves to around the location of the access point and returns to around the location of the end device based at least in part on the first information; and instructing the access point to provide a wireless local area network to the end device with suppressed channel hopping. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131640 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME INCLUDING PARTIAL ASSOCIATION IDENTIFIER IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving a frame including a partial association ID (PAID) in a wireless LAN (WLAN) system are disclosed. A method for transmitting a frame from a station (STA) to an access point (AP) in a wireless communication system includes: calculating a partial association ID (Partial AID) on the basis of a basic service set ID (BSSID) of the AP; and transmitting the frame including a partial AID field set to a specific value corresponding to the calculation result of the partial AID to the AP. The partial AID is calculated by applying a modulo operation to a specific value obtained by converting values ranging from a 40 | 05-14-2015 |
20150131641 | SCANNING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method, apparatus, and computer program is presented for scanning in a wireless network. A wireless device receives a downlink frame from two access points, the downlink frames indicating their respective transmission powers. The wireless device then determines the closest access point and a transmission power sufficient to reach that access point. Then, the wireless device carries out transmission of a probe request with the determined transmission power. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131642 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD OF COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes a communication unit that executes wireless communication by a first communication scheme; a first receiving unit that receives first information, relating to communication processing executable by a first other communication apparatus through wireless communication by a different second communication scheme, from the first other communication apparatus by the communication unit; a second receiving unit that receives second information, relating to communication processing executable by a second other communication apparatus through the wireless communication by the second communication scheme, from the second other communication apparatus by the communication unit; and a transmitting unit that transmits a connection parameter required for executing the wireless communication between the first and second other communication apparatuses by the second communication scheme, and a request for the communication processing indicated by the first information from the first other communication apparatus, to the second other communication apparatus by using the communication unit. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131643 | Radio Over Ethernet Mapper Physical Layer Device (PHY) - A mapper PHY is disclosed that performs a protocol conversion of an input data stream that is formatted according to a first wired communication protocol to provide an output data stream that is formatted according to a second wired communication protocol. The mapper PHY can be synchronized to a common reference clock or clocking source to ensure that data streams provided by multiple mapper PHYs are sufficiently aligned to satisfy frame timing alignment accuracy requirements of a wireless communication protocol. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131644 | Mobile Handheld Multi-Media Gateway and Phone - A system and method for providing a mobile handheld multi-media gateway and phone. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise a first communication interface module that is adapted to communicatively couple the mobile telephone to a mobile telephone communication network. A second communication interface module may be adapted to communicatively couple the mobile telephone to a computer communication network. At least one module may utilize the second communication interface module to communicate with the computer communication network to establish an independent network presence for the mobile telephone on the computer communication network. The mobile telephone may, for example, be established as an autonomous addressable device on the computer communication network. | 05-14-2015 |
20150139203 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DIRECT LINK COMMUNICATION WITH MULTI-CHANNEL CONCURRENCY - Systems and methods are provided for allowing a multi-channel concurrent device to communicate timing information to a direct link peer, so that subsequent delivery of buffered traffic by the peer may be coordinated to minimize interference with operation of the device in another network context. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139204 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVING WLAN RANGE - Various embodiments disclose systems and methods for employing a Sub1G signal (e.g. a signal in the range of approximately 500 Mhz or 800 mHz) for use with internal and/or external components of various user devices. The Sub1G region may provide a path loss advantage over traditional 2.4 and 5 Ghz systems because of the lower frequency in free-space path loss model. Sub 1G may also present less interference compared to 2.4 GHz (e.g., better QoS for applications such as VOIP, Gaming, etc.). In some of the disclosed embodiments, Sub1G may be employed using current 2.4G or 5G Wireless LAN chipset with RF Up/Down Converters. In some embodiments, the Sub1G approach may be used to create a Long Range Bridge, Long Range Extender, Long Range Client, Long Range Hotspot, etc. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139205 | ACCESS POINT AND METHODS FOR DISTINGUISHING HEW PHYSICAL LAYER PACKETS WITH BACKWARDS COMPATIBILITY - Embodiments of a system and methods for distinguishing high-efficiency Wi-Fi (HEW) packets from legacy packets are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an access point may select a value for the length field of a legacy signal field (L-SIG) that is non-divisible by three for communicating with HEW stations and may select a value for the length field that is divisible by three for communicating with legacy stations. In some embodiments, the access point may select a phase rotation for application to the BPSK modulation of at least one of the first and second symbols of a subsequent signal field to distinguish a high-throughput (HT) PPDU, a very-high throughput (VHT) PPDU and an HEW PPDU. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139206 | HIGH-EFFICIENCY WLAN (HEW) MASTER STATION AND METHODS TO INCREASE INFORMATION BITS FOR HEW COMMUNICATION - Embodiments of an access point and method for high-efficiency WLAN (HEW) communication are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the access point may be configured to operate as a master station and may configure an HEW frame to include a legacy signal field (L-SIG), an HEW signal field (HEW SIG-A) following the L-SIG, and one or more HEW fields following the HEW SIG-A. The L-SIG may be configured for transmission using a legacy number of data subcarriers, a legacy number of pilot subcarriers and a number of additional reference subcarriers modulated with a known reference sequence. At least one symbol of the HEW SIG-A and the one or more HEW fields following the HEW SIG-A of the HEW frame may be configured for transmission using additional data subcarriers. The additional data subcarriers may correspond to the additional reference subcarriers of the L-SIG. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139207 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOW-POWER SCANNING IN WLAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, disclosed are a method and an apparatus for low-power scanning in a WLAN system. A method for a station (STA) scanning in the wireless communication system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: transmitting a null data packet (NDP) probe request frame; and receiving from an access point (AP) a probe reply frame as a replay to the NDP probe request frame, wherein the NDP probe request frame can include a compressed service set ID (SSID). | 05-21-2015 |
20150139208 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FACILITATING JOINT CHANNEL AND ROUTING ASSIGNMENT FOR WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - Systems, methods and apparatus facilitating joint channel and routing assignment are provided. In some embodiments, a system includes nodes in a network configured to perform distributed joint channel and routing assignment of traffic through exchange of information with one another. The assignments are iteratively updated based on whether the update will result in an increase in a value of a function associated with throughput for traffic in the network. In some embodiments, the assignments are determined based on random decisions that are adopted if the function is improved utilizing the routing and channel information in the assignment. In some embodiments, the assignments are determined based on traffic prioritization in which destination nodes having a high level of traffic are assigned routes and channels having characteristics amenable to reduction of interference in the network. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139209 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIAL ACCESS DISTRIBUTION OVER WIRELESS LAN - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for initial access distribution over a wireless LAN. A method for an initial access by a station (STA) comprises: a step in which the STA receives a fast initial link setup (FILS) backoff parameter from an access point (AP); and a step in which the STA implements a backoff procedure by using the final FILS backoff parameter determined on the basis of the FILS backoff parameter and an access category of the data to be transmitted by the STA. Accordingly, the initial access of the STA can be distributed. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139210 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESS PARAMETER SHARING - In a non-limiting and example embodiment, a method is provided for access parameter sharing. An access point receives a first message from a second apparatus, the first message comprising an information element indicating if access credentials may be requested for the access point. The apparatus determines, based on the first message, whether access credentials of the access point may be requested. In response to detecting that the access credentials may be requested, the apparatus transmits a request message for requesting the access credentials of the second apparatus. The access credentials are received from a third apparatus, different from the access point. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139211 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Detecting Rogue Wireless Access Point - Disclosed are a method, an apparatus, and a system for detecting a rogue wireless access point (AP) as relates to the field of communications network technologies, which is used to solve a problem of information leakage to a certain degree. An authentication client obtains a basic service set identifier (BSSID) of a radio signal to be connected and checks the BSSID of the radio signal to be connected against a valid BSSID list; the authentication client determines that an AP corresponding to the BSSID of the radio signal to be connected is a rogue AP when the BSSID of the radio signal to be connected does not exist in the valid BSSID list; and generates a prompt message. The solutions provided in the embodiments of the present invention are applicable to detecting whether an AP is a rogue wireless AP. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139212 | Snooping Sensor STA or Neighbor AP Ranging and Positioning in Wireless Local Area Networks - A method of a ranging and positioning with sensor STA/neighbor AP is proposed. An initiating wireless device establishes an FTM procedure with a responding wireless device in an indoor wireless local area network. The initiating device exchanges FTM frames with the responding device and thereby receiving a first set of timestamps from the responding device. The initiating device receives a second set of timestamps associated with the exchanged FTM frames from one or more listening devices. Finally, the initiating device determines location information from the first and the second set of timestamps. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139213 | WIRELESS DISCOVERY LOCATION AND RANGING - Systems and methods of wireless communication are described. One method includes transmitting an indication of a time window for determining a range for wireless communication between a first device and a second device. The method further includes determining the range between the first device and the second device at the indicated time window. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139214 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME IN WLAN SYSTEM - A method and a station are described for transmitting a data frame in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The station obtains a transmission opportunity (TXOP) and transmits, during the TXOP, a preceding data unit of a plurality of data units comprising a control field indicating a selected bandwidth for the preceding data unit. The station selects a transmit bandwidth parameter of a non-initial data unit of the plurality of data units from available bandwidth parameters. The available bandwidth parameters include a first available bandwidth parameter which is same as a transmit bandwidth parameter of the preceding data unit of the plurality of data units and a second available bandwidth parameter which is narrower than a transmit bandwidth parameter of the preceding data unit. The station transmits, during the TXOP, the non-initial data unit, which comprises a control field indicating a selected bandwidth for the non-initial data unit. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139215 | APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA TO PROVIDE HIGH-SPEED DATA COMMUNICATION AND METHOD THEREOF - In the present invention, data generated from a source unit are distributed to at least one bandwidth; the data distributed to the respective bandwidths are encoded in order to perform an error correction; the encoded data are distributed to at least one antenna; a subcarrier is allocated to the data distributed to the respective antennas, and an inverse Fourier transform is performed; a short preamble and a first long preamble corresponding to the subcarrier are generated; a signal symbol is generated according to a data transmit mode; and a frame is generated by adding a second long preamble between the signal symbol and a data field for the purpose of estimating a channel of a subcarrier which is not used. | 05-21-2015 |
20150146702 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACCESSING NETWORK - Disclosed are a method and a device for accessing a network. The method comprises: a network element of a 3GPP access network receives Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) network information reported by User Equipment (UE); the network element of the 3GPP access network determines a WLAN network to which the UE is allowed to access according to the WLAN network information; the network element of the 3GPP access network indicates the UE to access the WLAN network. Through the disclosure, the UE may implement stream division by accessing the proper WLAN network, and user experience is enhanced. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146703 | TERMINAL, CONTROL METHOD FOR SAME, AND CONTROL PROGRAM FOR SAME - The terminal according to the present application includes: a communication module for scanning to detect accessible access points and connecting to one of the accessible access points; and a connection controller for targeting an identical accessible access point, which has been consecutively detected by a predetermined number of times of scans at predetermined time intervals among the accessible access points, for connection. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146704 | METHOD FOR SCANNING FOR ACCESS POINT IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for scanning for an access point. An active scan method comprises the steps of: generating a probe request frame including information on the signal strength of a terminal; and transmitting the probe request frame to an access point. Thus, a waste of time and radio resources can be prevented. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146705 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DATA SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic device and a method for providing a data service in the electronic device are provided. The electronic device includes a short-range wireless communication unit configured to provide a short-range wireless communication function, and a controller configured, if the electronic device is connected to another electronic device upon activation of an Access Point (AP) function, to detect an AP connectable to the other electronic device, and if an AP connectable to the other electronic device is detected, to deactivate the AP function. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146706 | Remotely Provisioning And Operating A Headless WIFI Device - A system and apparatus for remotely provisioning and operating a headless WiFi device is described that provides for provision of the headless WiFi device so as to connect the headless WiFi device to a network, and provides for remote control of the headless WiFi using a mobile device or a monitoring computer. A direct WiFi connection may be established between the mobile device and the headless WiFi device through a software WiFi access point, or, once the headless WiFi device is provisioned onto a network, a network connection may be established. Once established, the connection may switch between the direct connection and the network connection without providing an indication to a user. A mobile device or monitoring computer may be used to control the operation of and receive status information from a legacy device connected to the headless WiFi device. The information received from the legacy device may be transmitted to the mobile device or monitoring computer for display to a user, or the information may be deployed to a web page accessible to the user. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146707 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING WIRELESS LAN ON MULTI SIM TERMINAL - A method and an apparatus for operating a subscriber identity module (SIM) card in order to perform effective wireless local area network (LAN) connection by a multi SIM terminal is provided. The method includes searching for a wireless LAN; identifying whether there is a SIM card corresponding to the wireless LAN; and when it is identified that there is the SIM card corresponding to the wireless LAN, and the SIM card corresponding to the wireless LAN is unselected, connecting a communication channel with the wireless LAN using information on the unselected SIM card. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146708 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PLCP FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a Physical Layer Convergence Procedure (PLCP) frame in a Very High Throughput (VHT) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system includes generating a MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) to be transmitted to a destination station (STA), generating a PLCP Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) by adding a PLCP header, including an L-SIG field containing control information for a legacy STA and a VHT-SIG field containing control information for a VHT STA, to the MPDU, and transmitting the PPDU to the destination STA. A constellation applied to some of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex (OFDM) symbols of the VHT-SIG field is obtained by rotating a constellation applied to an OFDM symbol of the L-SIG field. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146709 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING AVAILABLE CHANNEL INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for acquiring/providing available channel information using Generic Advertisement Service (GAS) protocol in a wireless local area network (WLAN) are disclosed. AP (Access Point) station has a capability to acquire information for available channels from a database using a specific protocol related to an operation within the White Space (e.g. Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP)). And, non-AP station can retrieve the information for available channels by transmitting a Generic Advertisement Service (GAS) initial request frame to the AP station, wherein the GAS initial request frame comprises an Advertisement Protocol Element whose element ID indicates the specific protocol, and receiving a GAS initial response frame comprising a White Space Map (WSM) the specific protocol. The WSM comprises one or more white space channel units, and each of the white space channel units comprises a channel number field indicating one of the available channels and a power constraint field indicating a maximum allowable power on the indicated channel. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146710 | COCKTAIL PARTY: SIDE CONVERSATIONS AND TALKING OVER IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORKS - The present disclosure proposes a method for minor modifications to the Distributed Coordination Function (DCF) channel access mechanism in order to enable a greater number of concurrent communications in a unit area in compliance with the current protocol design. The method comprises equipping nodes with wider neighborhood information than what is obtained with IEEE 802.11, and with a device calibration that equips the device with the knowledge of its performance in the presence of interference. The present disclosure medium access mechanism increases the aggregate throughput with every additional concurrent communication that is enabled in the shared medium. Cocktail Party-capable devices can fairly coexist with 802.11 legacy DCF devices, and co-operate with these devices in the same network without changes to those devices or to the standard. The same or similar mechanisms can be applied to other systems and standards in order to enable concurrent communications in the same contention area. | 05-28-2015 |
20150296055 | Wireless data terminal and IPv4/IPv6 dual stack support method therefor - A method for a wireless data terminal to support an Internet Protocol Version 4/Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv4/IPv6) dual stack is described in an embodiment of the disclosure, including: the wireless data terminal maps a Modem port and a Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS) port at a user terminal; and the wireless data terminal receives an instruction for establishing a network connection, initiates a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context activation request to a network which a user expects to connect, and establishes the network connection according to the mapped port, after the network successfully responds to the PDP context activation request. Simultaneously, a wireless data terminal supporting an IPv4/IPv6 dual stack is described in an embodiment of the disclosure. Applying a technical scheme of the embodiment of the disclosure the user may make the user terminal to simultaneously access an IPv4/IPv6 network through the wireless data terminal, and an IPv4 network or an IPv6 network may also be accessed according to a requirement. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296329 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED WIRELESS DEVICE - A wireless communication system and related wireless devices are disclosed. The wireless communication system includes: a source wireless device configured to operably insert an auto-pairing request and one or more source Bluetooth device addresses into one or more predetermined advertising packets to form one or more target advertising packets, and configured to operably transmit the target advertising packets; and a destination wireless device configured to operably receive and parser the target advertising packets to extract the auto-pairing request and the one or more source Bluetooth device addresses. The destination wireless device performs an auto-pairing procedure with the source wireless device according to the auto-pairing request and the one or more source Bluetooth device addresses to establish a Bluetooth bond with the source wireless device. Each of the predetermined advertising packets is an advertising indication (ADV_IND) packet, a non-connectable advertising indication (ADV_NONCONN_IND) packet, or a discoverable advertisement indication (ADV_DISCOVER_IND) packet. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296366 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING PACKET DATA NETWORK CONNECTION ON BASIS OF LOCAL AREA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for providing, setting, maintaining, and releasing a packet data network (PDN) connection on the basis of a local area in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes receiving the PDN subscription information on the basis of the local area from a business operator server, inspecting whether the current location information for the terminal exists in the PDN subscription information on the basis of the local area, and starting a procedure for setting the PDN on the basis of the local area when the current location information exists therein. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296370 | OPERATION METHOD OF STATION BASED ON STATION DENSITY IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Disclosed are operation methods of station based on station density in wireless local area network. An operation method comprises obtaining density-related information indicating a station density state within a communication area of the first station; and transmitting a notification frame including at least one of an operation mode indication information and a clear channel assessment (CCA) threshold that are set based on the density-related information. Therefore, performance of WLAN can be enhanced. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296446 | Wireless Network Scanning Strategies - A device may use positioning information to increase the efficiency a wireless local area network (WLAN) scanning process. To determine the presence of WLANs within range, a device may determine its own location. For example, the device may determine its own location using a satellite-based navigation system. The device may then determine a wireless scanning strategy based on the determined location. The determination may be further based on connection parameters, such as, channel information, network capabilities, and/or other connection parameters. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296447 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS POINT SEARCH METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - The present application discloses a wireless local area network access point search method, an apparatus, and a system, relates to the field of communications technologies, and can reduce power consumption for passive scanning. According to the method, beacon sending information of a wireless local area network access point and measurement information of a user equipment are matched, so that the user equipment can search for the wireless local area network access point only at the time when and a frequency channel number at which the wireless local area network access point sends a beacon. Compared with the prior art in which a user equipment needs to continuously keep a state of searching for a wireless local area network access point, the present application greatly shortens time spent by the user equipment in listening to a beacon, and therefore reduces power consumption of passive scanning. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296462 | INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION METHOD, SYSTEM, DEVICE AND UE - Examples of the present application provide an interference cancellation method, system, device and a UE. The interference cancellation method of a communication network including a plurality of User Equipments (UEs) and Base Stations (BSs) includes: acquiring a Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and Interference to Noise Ratio (INR) of a downlink signal detected by a first UE and a SNR and INR of a downlink signal detected by a second UE, respectively through a first BS and a second BS; and notifying the first BS and the second BS of a transmission mode of associated UEs, wherein the first UE is located in a cell served by the first BS, and the second UE is located in a cell served by the second BS. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296517 | FRAME TRANSMITTING METHOD AND FRAME RECEIVING METHOD - A method of transmitting a frame is provided by a device in a WLAN. The device sets as additional data subcarriers some of subcarriers which are not set as data subcarriers in at least part of fields included in a frame of a legacy frame format, and allocates information to the additional data subcarriers. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296528 | Wireless communication method and device - The present invention discloses a wireless communication method carried out by a wireless transmitter capable of offering an unintended wireless device a chance of starting or proceeding with a transmission procedure during a transmission duration of the wireless transmitter. An embodiment of said wireless communication method comprises the following steps: preparing a packet carrying an indication of a clear channel assessment (CCA) threshold level for an unintended wireless device to decide whether to execute a transmission procedure; and transmitting the packet to an intended wireless device under a protocol by which the unintended wireless device is expected to abide. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296541 | METHOD FOR GRANTING A TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM THAT USES A COMBINED CHANNEL CONSTITUTED BY A PLURALITY OF SUBCHANNELS, AND STATION SUPPORTING THE METHOD - According to one embodiment, a method for granting a transmission opportunity in a wireless local area network includes: transmitting a transmission opportunity (TXOP) granting frame to grant a TXOP to a plurality of target stations; and receiving a frame from each of the plurality of target stations that has acquired the TXOP upon receiving the TXOP granting frame. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296556 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROHIBITING AUTONOMOUS DENIAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for prohibiting autonomous denial in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) receives a configuration for autonomous denial over a first connection from a network, and prohibits the autonomous denial for UL transmission if the UL transmission corresponds to a specific signal. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296558 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CARRYING OUT DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention is a method for carrying out device-to-device communication by means of a first terminal in a wireless communication system, the method comprising: a step of measuring a link with a second terminal; and a step of transmitting, if the result of the link measurement satisfies a predetermined condition, a link failure declaration to a third terminal. The link failure declaration includes buffer status information relating to the data being received from the second terminal. The first terminal receives the remaining portion of the data from the third terminal. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304884 | CONTROL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A control device that performs wireless communication and is connected to another control device via a wired network includes: an acquirer that acquires information relating to a channel and a communication timing used for wireless communication via the wired network from another control device that acts as a slave; a generator that generates a setting of a channel and a communication timing in which wireless communication performed by the another control device is free of interference, based on information relating to a channel and a communication timing used for wireless communication of the control device and information relating to the channel and the communication timing used for the wireless communication that are acquired by the acquirer; and a reporter that reports the setting of the channel and the timing generated by the generator to the another control device that acts as the slave via the wired network. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304893 | Method an Apparatus for Logging Information - The present invention provides a device and a method for logging information. The device implementing the invention is operable to attach to a first node and a second node, at least one of the first node and the second node operates within a WLAN and the other of the first node and the second node operates within a WLAN or a 3rd Generation Partnership Project, 3GPP, network. The device includes a memory and a processor. The memory includes a log, the log configured to receive at least one entry comprising an identifier for the first node and a time stamp indicating the time that the device attached to the first node. The processor acts to cause an entry to be added to the log to indicate whether an attempt by the device to attach to a second node has been successful or unsuccessful. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304940 | ACTIVE SCANNING METHOD AND DEVICE - Disclosed are an active scanning method and an active scanning device. The active scanning method in a wireless LAN comprises the steps of: a second station (STA) receiving a first probe request frame which has been broadcast by a first STA; and the second STA broadcasting a second probe request frame. The second probe request frame may include a probe request frame detection field, and the probe request frame detection field may indicate that the second STA has received the first probe request frame. Accordingly, a probe response frame is broadcast to a plurality of STAs, thus simplifying a scanning procedure. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304974 | SYNCHRONIZATION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD - Provided is a synchronization establishment method capable of reducing the time required to establish synchronization in a slave station without putting an unnecessary load on a master station. In the synchronization establishment method, a one-second cycle of a message is divided into 100 time slots including slot “0” to slot “99”; ten slots including slot “90” to slot “99” as some of the slots are allocated to a fast synchronization establishment mode; and, in the fast synchronization establishment mode, messages such as Sync2, Delay_Req, and Delay_Resp are transmitted and received between the master station and the slave station so that the slave station establishes synchronization. | 10-22-2015 |
20150305070 | METHODS TO ENABLE WLAN PROXIMITY SERVICE - Methods and apparatus are described for implementing a wireless local area network (WLAN) Proximity Service (ProSe) connection in a WLAN ProSe capable wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU). The WLAN ProSe capable WTRU requests an establishment of a WLAN ProSe connection with other WLAN ProSe capable WTRU(s), where a ProSe discovery process determines the presence of other WLAN ProSe capable WTRU(s). Configuration information is received, via a non-access stratum or a radio resource control message, from a network node to facilitate the WLAN ProSe connection to the other WLAN ProSe capable WTRU(s). The configuration information includes one of a WLAN ID of the other WLAN ProSe capable WTRU(s), a medium access control ID of the other WLAN ProSe capable WTRU(s), a WLAN access point Service Set Identification (SSID) or Basic SSID, a frequency or channel number, a beacon interval, and timing information. | 10-22-2015 |
20150305072 | ENTITY OF A MOBILE CELLULAR NETWORK - Entity of a 3rd Generation Partnership Project, 3GPP, network including a 3GPP Radio Access Network, RAN. The entity includes a a receiver and a processor. The receiver is operable to receive the WLAN identifier associated with the device. The processor is operable to cause storage of the WLAN identifier in association with a 3GPP identifier identifying the device in the 3GPP network. The entity may also be provided with a transmitter operable to transmit a request to device in communication with the 3GPP RAN, the request including a request for a WLAN identifier associated with the device. There is also provided a device in communication with a 3rd Generation Partnership Project, 3GPP, network. The device includes a processor and a transmitter. The processor is operable to retrieve a WLAN identifier associated with the device in response to the request. The transmitter is operable to transmit the retrieved WLAN identifier to the 3GPP network. Methods of operating the 3GPP entity and the device are also described. The device may also include a receiver operable to receive a request from an entity of the 3GPP network at the device, the request including a request for a WLAN identifier associated with the device. | 10-22-2015 |
20150305074 | CONTENT DELIVERY METHOD - A control message transmission/reception unit ( | 10-22-2015 |
20150305081 | A Method and Apparatus for Controlling Association Between a Station and a WLAN - The invention provides a method of operating an entity in a wireless local area network, WLAN. In the method, upon determining that a device has been denied an association with or disassociated from the WLAN, the entity causes a WLAN identifier associated with the device to be stored in a database, an entry in the database indicating that the entity should not associate with the STA associated with the WLAN identifier, the WLAN identifier being stored in association with a condition such that when the condition is met the corresponding WLAN identifier is removed from the database. | 10-22-2015 |
20150311923 | TECHNIQUES FOR DIFFERENTIATING BETWEEN SIGNALS OF DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - Systems and methods for differentiating between LTE and Wi-Fi signals based on distinguishing characteristics thereof are disclosed. A radio or receiver configured for processing signals associated with a first RAT can detect a signal associated with a second RAT, wherein the signals associated with the first RAT and the signal associated with the second RAT are received over a communications medium using an unlicensed frequency spectrum. One or more characteristics of the decoded signal can be detected or identified, such as a pilot or reference signal pattern, an interframe spacing, a cyclic prefix or guard interval structure, a bandwidth utilization, etc. The decoded signal can be determined as relating to the second RAT based at least in part on determining that the one or more characteristics correspond to the second RAT. | 10-29-2015 |
20150311964 | CHANNEL SOUNDING METHOD IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method for a channel sounding in a wireless local area network. A station receives a 20 MHz null data packet announcement (NDPA) frame and at least one duplicate 20 MHz NDPA frame. The at least one duplicate 20 MHz NDPA frame is a duplicate of the 20 MHz NDPA frame. The station also receives a null data packet (NDP) following the 20 MHz NDPA frame and the at least one duplicate 20 MHz NDPA frame. The bandwidth over which the 20 MHz NDPA frame and the at least one duplicate 20 MHz NDPA frame are transmitted is the same as a bandwidth over which the NDP is transmitted. The station transmits a report frame for the channel sounding. The 20 MHz NDPA frame and the at least one duplicate 20 MHz NDPA frame comprise bandwidth information indicating the bandwidth over which the frames are transmitted. | 10-29-2015 |
20150311968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION OF MULTI-CHANNEL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method, and a device, for reporting channel state information (CSI) in a wireless local area network system are discussed. The method according to one embodiment includes receiving, by a responding station, a sounding Physical layer Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) from a requesting station; and transmitting, by the responding station, a CSI report to the requesting station, the CSI report including CSI report information in a form of angles representing a beamforming feedback matrix that is estimated by the responding station based on the sounding PPDU. If the sounding PPDU is received via a plurality of contiguous channels, the beamforming feedback matrix is estimated based on all of the plurality of contiguous channels. If the sounding PPDU is received via at least one of a plurality of non-contiguous channels, the beamforming feedback matrix is estimated based on only one of the plurality of non-contiguous channels. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312026 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR GENERATING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING ULTRAHIGH FREQUENCY BAND - Abstract: The present invention relates to a method for newly defining a synchronization signal to be used in an ultrahigh frequency band and acquiring downlink synchronization by using the synchronization signal, and a device for supporting the same. A method by which an eNode B (eNB) transmits a synchronization signal for compensating for a carrier frequency offset in a wireless access system supporting an ultrahigh frequency band, according to one embodiment of the present invention, can comprise the steps of: generating a first repetitive synchronization signal having a first repetitive characteristic; generating a second repetitive synchronization signal having a second repetitive characteristic; and transmitting the first repetitive synchronization signal and the second repetitive synchronization signal in the same subframe. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312386 | SIGNALING METHOD - A signaling method is provided by a device in a WLAN. The device includes signaling information in an address field, generates a MAC frame including the address field, and transmits a PHY frame including a data field into which the MAC frame is inserted. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312744 | CONTROLLED DISCOVERY - The invention relates to methods, apparatuses, systems and computer program products for discovery of nearby devices. To facilitate discovery of nearby, i.e. proximal, devices, a discovery control signal from a control device may be used to control the discovery, e.g. how or when the discovery is carried out. The devices may send proximity information based on the discovery they have carried out to be used by the control device or the control system. The control device, e.g. a server, may form the discovery control signal based on this proximity information. A proximity graph may be used in determining how the discovery is controlled. Controlling discovery by the devices may e.g. be done to avoid discovery collisions or to save energy. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312772 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INCIDENT TASK BASED ALLOCATION OF SERVICE INSTANCES - A method and apparatus for task-based allocation of services at an incident scene include determining assignments for a plurality of users at the incident scene, each of the plurality of users comprising a mobile device; identifying a group of the plurality of users performing a similar function near one another or at a same area; determining if the group is likely to be separated from a wireless local area network at the incident scene; and, in response to determining that the group is likely to be separated from the local area network, allocating service instances on at least one mobile device associated with the group. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312810 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A radio communication system includes a user device, a first base station, a second base station, a third base station, a gateway device, and a switching center. A user-plane path is established between the user device and the gateway device via the third base station. When the user device is handed over from the first base station to the second base station, the first base station adds an identifier of the third base station to a handover request message and transmits the handover request message to the second base station. The second base station transmits, to the third base station, a base station switch notification message that indicates that a radio connection destination for the user device has been switched to the second base station. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312821 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, BASE STATION, PROCESSOR, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a user terminal that performs D2D communication under management of a base station, the D2D communication indicating direct device to device communication. The user terminal transmits a D2D buffer status report indicating an amount of non-transmitted data in the D2D communication to the base station. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312832 | Method for Relocating Gateway, Mobile Management Entity and Host Base Station - A method for gateway relocation, an MME and a DeNB are disclosed. The method includes: in a process of an MRN performing handover of the DeNB, the MME of the MRN judging whether it is required to execute a relocation of a gateway serving the MRN according to the current location of the MRN. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312839 | Systems and Methods for Wireless Communication in Retail Media - The present invention relates to systems and methods for facilitating a Wireless Communication and management system comprising Wireless Activation Module installed on a Wireless Activation Device configured to operatively communicate with one or more Antennas to receive one or more information from a Wireless Transceiver Product, wherein a beacon is embedded to broadcast signals in regular intervals. The Wireless Activation Module is a process, plug-in, extension, script, application or driver that detects, monitors and tracks beacons and translates that activity into signals that can be used to activate and target multi-dimensional content (media, scenes, layers or other structured content) in response to the beacon activity. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312852 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONNECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for connecting to a wireless communication system is provided. The apparatus includes a controller configured to, when it is determined to restrict a connection to a base station, set base stations which are detected during a first reference time as connection candidate base stations, set any base station which fails to be detected during a second reference time as one or more base stations to be excluded from connection, and select at least one base station except for the one or more base stations to be excluded from connection from among the connection candidate base stations, and a transmitter configured to transmit a connection request signal to the selected base station. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312907 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FRAME AND METHOD FOR DETECTING TRANSMISSION MODE - In a WLAN, a device generates a short training field and a long training field following the short training field. The device generates a first signal field following the long training field, and the first signal field includes a mode field for indicating a transmission mode of a frame to be transmitted and a check bit for protecting at least the mode field. The device transmits the frame including the short training field, the long training field, and the first signal field. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312941 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME - In a WLAN, a device receives a frame where a symbol is attached to a previous version frame, the symbol including BSS information. The device determines whether the device belongs to a BSS of the frame based on the BSS information. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312945 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING INSTANT CONNECTION BASED ON WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - An apparatus and a method for managing instant connection based on a wireless local area network are provided. The method includes: creating, by an accessed terminal, connection information required for setting connection therewith; creating, by the accessed terminal, a management frame by using the connection information; transmitting, by the accessed terminal, the created management frame to a peripheral terminal; receiving, by the peripheral terminal, the management frame and extracting connection information from the received management frame; and setting, by the peripheral terminal, connection with the accessed terminal by accessing the accessed terminal by using the extracted connection information to rapidly access a desired terminal without performing a device discovery process. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319023 | EFFICIENT SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION SCHEMES FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate efficiently indicating parameter(s) associated with a base station utilizing synchronization signals in a wireless communication environment. For instance, relative locations of a PSC and a SSC in a radio frame can be a function of a parameter. Further, a PSC sequence utilized to generate PSCs can be selected based upon a parameter. Moreover, inclusion or exclusion of PSCs from a radio frame can be a function of a parameter. Additionally or alternatively, pseudo random sequence mappings (e.g., to cell IDs, tone locations) can be a function of a parameter. Example parameters can be whether the base station is part of a TDD or a FDD system, whether the radio frame employs FS1 or FS2, whether the base station is associated with a macro or a femto cell, or whether the base station is associated with a unicast or a multicast system. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319287 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING AND/OR CONFIGURING A MOBILE PLATFORM TO PROVIDE A SUITE OF SERVICES - A system and method for determining a service provider set of one or more service providers to provide a service suite of one or more services in a platform (e.g., a mobile device platform) and configuring such platform to utilize such service provider set to provide such service suite to a user, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319584 | Wireless Access Points Providing Hybrid 802.11 and Scheduled Fixed Access Communications - Wireless access points providing hybrid 802.11 and scheduled priority access communications are provided herein. An exemplary wireless access point may be configured to communicate with a set of standard access clients using an 802.11 mode of communication during standard access phases, as well as communicate with a set of priority access clients during priority access phases, when the wireless access point is not communicating with the set of standard access clients, using a priority mode of communication. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319599 | IMPROVED SCANNING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more particularly, to an improved scanning method and apparatus in a wireless LAN system. A method by which an access point (AP) supports the scanning of a station (STA) in a wireless LAN system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, includes the steps of: receiving, by the AP which supports first and second channel widths, a probe request frame in the first channel width or second channel width from the STA; and transmitting a probe response frame, which responds to the probe request frame, to the STA. When the probe request frame is received in the first channel width, the probe response frame can be transmitted in said first channel width. When the probe request frame is received in the second channel width, the probe response frame can be transmitted in said second channel width. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319604 | Processing of Access Point Crowdsourcing Data - Method and apparatus for processing access point (AP) crowdsourcing data are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method comprises receiving WiFi scan lists and their corresponding location descriptions, where the WiFi scan lists and their corresponding location descriptions include information observed about at least one access point device, consolidating the WiFi scan lists and their corresponding location descriptions based at least in part on a set of selection criteria to generate a WiFi AP record, where the set of selection criteria comprises a maximum number of scan lists to be uploaded in a predetermined period of time and the maximum number of scan lists to be uploaded in a single upload, and uploading the WiFi AP record to a crowdsourcing server. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319607 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA - A method for transmitting and receiving data between a plurality of nodes, each performing a periodical standby operation at a specific interval, includes: a step of detecting another communicable node performed by one node; a step of consecutively transmitting notice information representing data transmission timing to another node for a plurality of number of times at a predetermined interval by using the one node; a step of performing a standby operation for data according to the data transmission timing represented in the notice information performed by the another node receiving the notice information within the periodical standby operation; a step of transmitting the notice information to the another node according to the data transmission timing performed by the one node; and a step of receiving the transmission data transmitted from the one node according to the notified data transmission timing performed by the another node. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319644 | A METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR SHARING WIRELESS BROADBAND CONNECTION BETWEEN DEVICES - The method comprising allowing a wireless broadband connection between at least one wireless device including a tethering function with at least one wired broadband device, and using said tethering function for sharing said wireless broadband connection through aggregating a bandwidth of said wired broadband device to said at least one wireless device, wherein a segmentation of application packets of information, at the layer of the application protocol enabling said connection, namely the application layer, is performed into sub packets that will be transmitted to said at least one wireless device, using a proxy including a set of application handler modules handling packets of information for said connection. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319662 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND UE - A policy management device transmits an update of a mobile operator policy that requests to switch an access system for each flow that UE is going to perform communication. In addition, the policy management device requests to enable a network interface that is to be used for performing communication by making a connection to the switched access system. The UE compares the received update of the mobile operator policy with a UE policy that is held in advance and determines which is to be preferentially used. In a case where the UE determines to preferentially use the mobile operator policy, the UE switches the access system to offload communication. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319672 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ASSOCIATION OF A STATION WITH A WLAN - The present invention controls the association of a station to a wireless local area network, WLAN. In particular it enables an entity in a WLAN to control when a station requests association with the WLAN to reduce the number of requests that the entity has to process. The method involves an entity of the WLAN transmitting a message including a condition which has to be fulfilled before the station can transmit a request to associate with the WLAN. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319675 | TECHNIQUES FOR ENERGY EFFICIENT WIFI NEIGHBOR AWARENESS NETWORK OPERATION - Various embodiments are generally directed to an apparatus, method and other techniques for performing neighbor awareness network (NAN) discovery operations to discover a NAN cluster comprising one or more devices synchronized to a discovery window. In some embodiments, the NAN discovery operation may include communicating a cluster discovery message to join the NAN cluster, waiting a first time period for a response to the cluster discovery message, and joining the NAN cluster based on information in the response to synchronize to the discovery window when the response is received within the first time period. Various embodiments may also include disabling, by the processing circuitry, one or more operations to perform the NAN discovery operations if the response is not received within the first time period. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319677 | NETWORK SELECTION RECOMMENDER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method, wireless device and computer program product determine a recommended access point (AP) for the wireless device to access a wireless network. AP feature values associated with each one of a plurality of APs within an access range of the wireless device and user feature values associated with identified user features of a user of the wireless device are obtained via a wireless interface. A predicted score for each AP is determined based on the feature values and a recommended AP is determined based on the predicted scores. The wireless device connects to the wireless network based at least in part on the recommended AP. AP feature values include AP characteristic, scheduling and payment values. User features include wireless device location and velocity, services-in-use, time of day and day of week. Optionally, circumstantial feature values may be obtained and used to determine the predicted scores. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319681 | VEHICLE COMMUNICATIONS VIA WIRELESS ACCESS VEHICULAR ENVIRONMENT - Vehicle Communications using IEEE 802.11p WAVE functionality includes structure and method whereby a smart phone (SP) linked to an On Board Unit (OBU) having WAVE functionality, and incorporating Automotive Telemetry Protocol (ATP), has at least one processor to configure the SP as a GUI for the OBU, and to enable WAVE authentication of the SP through a networked Road Side Unit. Preferably, the OBU opens, after a command from an ATP Client, a virtual connection for streaming data between the vehicle data bus and a remote server providing an automotive scan tool. Also preferably, the SP may use either cellular or IEEE 802.11 control signals to trialaterate its geographic position with greater accuracy than GPS, and to hand off the geo-position fixes to the OBU. Accumulated geo-location information may be reported to a remote server, providing a centralized geographic trend analysis of plural SPs operating with OBUs. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319730 | LOCATION AWARE WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS CONTROLLER - A device may control a network based on the position of a client, and may be configured to determine a position of a client within the network. The device may determine whether the client is located inside a zone from a plurality of established zones based on the determined position of the client, and then identify a zone in which the client is located upon determining that the client is located inside one of the established zones. The device may apply a profile associated with the identified zone to the client, and then determine a logical network identifier for the client based on the identified zone. The network may appear to the client as an isolated network for the identified zone. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319749 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING NETWORK RESOURCE IMPACT OF MIGRANT WI-FI USERS - A method, apparatus and system providing migrant or unauthenticated users associating with a Wi-Fi Access Point (WAP) with a minimal amount of address, data and other managed Wi-Fi network resources until such time as the migrant or unauthenticated users actually authenticate themselves. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319787 | SELECTIVELY DECODING PACKET PAYLOADS BASED ON DECODED PACKET HEADERS - A wireless communication node selectively decodes a payload of a packet based on a measured signal strength of a decoded header of the packet and a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) used to encode the payload of the packet. In some embodiments, the MCS may be indicated in the decoded header of the packet. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319799 | Communication Device - A communication device may execute a wireless communication of object data with a mobile device via a first target network using a second type of interface after executing a sending process of sending a wireless setting, for causing the mobile device to belong to the first target network, to the mobile device using a first type of interface in a case where the communication device is determined as currently belonging to the first target network. The communication device may execute the wireless communication of the object data with the mobile device via a second target network using the second type of interface after executing a specific process of causing both the communication device and the mobile device to belong to the second target network in a case where the communication device is determined as currently not belonging to the target network. | 11-05-2015 |
20150327046 | METHOD FOR DISCOVERING DEVICE IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed are a device discovery method for device-to-device (D2D) communication in a wireless access system supporting D2D communication and a device therefor. Particularly, the device discovery method can comprise the steps of: enabling a first device in an idle mode to receive a paging message from a base station; enabling the first device to switching to an active mode if the paging message indicates the first device; enabling the first device to monitor a discovery signal transmitted from a second device if the paging message indicates that the first device operates in a reception mode with respect to transmission and reception of the discovery signal; enabling the first device to perform a random access procedure with the base station if the first device receives the discovery signal; enabling the first device to perform a connection establishment procedure with the base station after completing the random access procedure; and enabling the first device to transmit, to the base station, a D2D discovery report after completing the connection establishment procedure. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327047 | Proximity Service in Communications - Two physical layer user terminal capability alternatives are introduced for device-to-device discovery for FDD mode terminals: a full discovery physical layer capability, and a partial discovery physical layer capability. The full discovery physical layer capability corresponds to an alternative where a discovery-capable user terminal has a capability to perform both Discovery_Scan (on an uplink band) and Discovery_Tx (on a downlink band) operations. A Discovery_Tx operation corresponds to transmission of a discovery signal to another user terminal directly over the air. A Discovery_Scan operation corresponds to reception of the discovery signal from another user terminal directly over the air. The partial discovery physical layer capability corresponds to an alternative where the discovery-capable terminal has a capability to perform either Discovery_Scan operation (on the downlink band) or Discovery_Tx (on the uplink band) operation (or both). | 11-12-2015 |
20150327080 | FREQUENCY BAND SELECTION - A small cell base station, a method, a computer program product and a wireless telecommunications network are disclosed. The small cell base station is deployable in a wireless telecommunications network in which a macro base station provides a first region of radio coverage using a first frequency band and a second region of radio coverage using a second frequency band, the first region of radio coverage comprising a plurality of angularly spaced first radio beams, the second region of radio coverage comprising at least a second radio beam, the second radio beam being arranged to radiate from the macro base station between adjacent angularly spaced first radio beams, the small cell base station comprising: transmission logic operable to provide a third region of radio coverage using a small cell frequency band, the small cell frequency band comprising one of the first frequency band and the second frequency band; reception logic operable to measure a signal quality of transmissions received from macro base stations using the first frequency band and the second frequency band and to identify as an excluded frequency band that one of the first frequency band and the second frequency band which has a highest signal quality; and transmission frequency band selection logic operable to select as the small cell frequency band that frequency band other than the excluded frequency band. Through this approach both the macro base stations and the small cell base station can share frequency bands. By excluding the highest signal quality frequency band from the set and excluding that high-quality frequency band from being used by the small cell base station, the overall performance of the wireless telecommunications network is improved. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327081 | END NODE PERSONAL DEFINITION AND MANAGEMENT | 11-12-2015 |
20150327110 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of transmitting/receiving a signal in a Mobile Management Entity (MME) of a mobile communication system, the method comprising: transmitting a subscriber information request message including information of a UE, to a Home Subscriber Server (HSS); receiving, from the HSS, a response message which corresponds to the request message and includes an indicator indicating whether it is possible to perform traffic offloading using a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) with regard to an Access Point Name (APN) connection or a Packet Data Network (PDN) connection of the UE; determining whether it is possible to perform the traffic offloading using the WLAN, on the basis of at least one of information included in the received response message and information configured in the MME; and; and transmitting, to the UE, a message including information on whether it is possible to perform the traffic offloading using the WLAN. A communication method according to an embodiment of the present specification can generate one or more PDN connections with regard to one APN when the UE accesses a PDN through the WLAN. Further, the communication method according to the present invention can effectively be subjected to a traffic offloading control by the eNB even when the UE is roaming. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327120 | EFFICIENT TRANSMISSION FOR LOW DATA RATE WLAN - A fragmentation threshold is dynamically determined based on a current transmission rate. A medium access control (MAC) service data unit (MSDU) is received, and it is determined whether a length of the MSDU exceeds the fragmentation threshold. The MSDU is fragmented into multiple MAC protocol data units (MPDUs) when it is determined that the length of the MSDU exceeds the fragmentation threshold, whereas an MPDU that includes the MSDU is generated when it is determined that the length of the MSDU does not exceed the fragmentation threshold. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327206 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY DELIVERING SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES TO MULTI-TECHNOLOGY CAPABLE WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNITS - A multiple wireless access technology capable (WAT-capable) wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) includes a registration message generator configured to generate a registration message indicating that the WTRU is configured to communicate using an IEEE 802.11x technology. The WTRU also includes a transmitter configured to send the registration message via an IEEE 802.11x WLAN to a cellular network during registration with the cellular network, and a receiver configured to receive services from the cellular network via the WLAN. The registration message further indicates that the WTRU is configured to receive Short Message Service (SMS) messages from the cellular network via the WLAN. The WTRU receiver receives services that include Short Message Service (SMS) messages. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327303 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONNECTION CONTROL APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION CONTROL METHOD, SERVICE REQUEST METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system, in which a mobile terminal uses a data path that was generated with an ISP network by a base station in a home network to access a NW via the ISP network, includes an authentication means and connection control means in the ISP network. The base station accepts an access request from the mobile terminal and transmits information relating to the base station and the mobile terminal to the connection control means. The authentication means determines based on the information whether a linking service that connects to the home NW without traversing the ISP network can be provided to the mobile terminal, and if the linking service can be provided, notifies this information to the connection control means. Based on this notification, the connection control means requests the base station to generate a data path for providing the linking service, and the base station generates the data path. | 11-12-2015 |
20150334583 | Service switching method, device and system for local communication network - A service switching method, device and system for a local communication network are described. The method includes that: a current terminal receiving a service switching starting instruction sends running service information to a selected target terminal, and sends a service switching request message to a server; the server receiving the service switching request message sends service information to the target terminal; the target terminal extracts service progress time from the service information sent by the current terminal and the service information sent by the server respectively, calculates a time difference according to the extracted service progress time, and sends the time difference to the server; and the server regulates a progress of the service information sent to the target terminal according to the time difference to make the progress consistent with a progress of the service information sent to the selected target terminal by the current terminal. By the disclosure, a service can be smoothly switched, and service discontinuity can be avoided. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334598 | CENTRALIZED WIRELESS LAN LOAD BALANCING - A centralized wireless LAN load balancing mechanism is described herein. In one embodiment, in response to a request for entering a wireless network from a wireless station and forwarded from multiple access points (APs) of the wireless network, a network access device coupled to the multiple APs determines a load for each of the APs. The network access device then selects one of the APs based on the determined loads of the APs and instructs the selected AP to associate with the wireless station. The network access device further instructs the remaining APs to reject the request. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334602 | BSS-WIDE BANDWIDTH RESTRICTION MODES FOR WLAN - A method includes, in an Access Point (AP) that communicates with one or more wireless communication stations (STAs) in accordance with a communication protocol that permits the STAs to transmit to the AP at bandwidths selected by the STAs without coordination with the AP, evaluating a condition relating to signal quality of at least one of the STAs. A maximum bandwidth is chosen based on the evaluated condition, and the STAs are instructed to transmit to the AP at no more than the chosen maximum bandwidth. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334618 | Determining Network Availability Based on Geographical Location - A mobile terminal comprising: a positioning module arranged to determine a geographical location of the mobile terminal; a local transceiver for connecting to local wireless access networks; and processing apparatus for communicating with a first, packet-based network by forming connections with the wireless local area networks using the local transceiver. The processing apparatus is configured to determine measures of connection quality experienced by the mobile terminal on ones of the connections, and to record the determined measures in a database associating measures of connection quality with geographical locations. The processing apparatus is further configured to control activation of the local transceiver to scan for subsequent availability of one or more of the wireless local area networks, in dependence on one or more of the measures of connection quality and associated geographical locations in the database relative to the geographical location of the mobile terminal as determined by the positioning module. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334629 | REDUCING BROADCAST DUPLICATION IN HYBRID WIRELESS MESH PROTOCOL ROUTING - Methods, systems, and devices related to wireless communication via a mesh network are described. In particular, the disclosure is directed to selecting a path between two nodes in a wireless mesh network based on consideration of type of data requested and a determination whether an intermediate node, within a predetermined range of the requesting node, is actively broadcasting the requested data. Such opportunistic consideration in selecting a path between two nodes may avoid unnecessary activation of additional broadcasting nodes and reduce the risk of triggering interference between multiple nodes broadcasting duplicate data. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334664 | TRANSMISSION POWER DETERMINATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND PROGRAM - An electronic device comprising circuitry that controls transmitting signals through a first communication link toward a base station or a second communication link toward a mobile station. The second communication link uses an uplink resource of the first communication link. The circuity determines transmission power for the second communication link based on a first parameter and a second parameter. The first parameter indicates a signal level, a power level, or a noise level in the first communication link. The second parameter corresponds to path loss information for the first communication link. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334759 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes a storage unit that stores first information corresponding to an apparatus that establishes a predetermined wireless network, a reception unit that receives an invitation request signal indicating an invitation to a wireless network, and a confirmation unit that, in a case where a wireless network associated with the invitation request signal is not the predetermined wireless network, confirm whether to connect to the wireless network, and in a case where a wireless network associated with the invitation request signal is the predetermined wireless network, omit the confirmation. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341102 | Distributed signal field for communications within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Distributed signal field for communications within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. In accordance with wireless communications, a signal (SIG) field employed within such packets is distributed or partitioned into at least two separate signal fields (e.g., SIG A and SIG B) that are located in different portions of the packet. A first of the SIG fields includes information that may be processed and decoded by all wireless communication devices, and a second of the SIG fields includes information that is specific to one or more particular wireless communication devices (e.g., a specific wireless communication device or a specific subset of the wireless communication devices). | 11-26-2015 |
20150341189 | Base Station Deployment Configuration Method for Base Station, Base Station, and Server - The present invention provides a base station deployment configuration method. The method includes: receiving, by a base station after being powered on for a first time, a virtual local area network identity and composite information, receiving, by the base station, a plurality of ping packets, and learning, by the base station, the received virtual local area network identity in the service packet and virtual local area network identities in all the received ping packets; traversing, by the base station, the learned virtual local area network identities, and sending a DHCP request to a DHCP server; receiving, by the base station, a DHCP response message returned by the DHCP server; and establishing, by the base station, an OM IP address connection to a management channel of the wireless network manager according to the OM IP address, and receiving a complete configuration delivered through the management channel. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341197 | Short training field (STF) for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Short training field (STF) for use within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. An STF design as is made such that the power associated with the tone indices at the edges of the STF design is relatively less than the power associated with the tone indices more centrally located within the STF design. Also, when multiple respective operational modes are supported (e.g., 1 MHz and 2 MHz), the respective STF designs corresponding to those respective operational modes have a great deal of similarity. For example, the respective STF designs for different respective operational modes may have certain common STF tone indices among those respective STF designs. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341199 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA DISTRIBUTION IN VHF/UHF BANDS - Whitespace devices can use unused television frequencies for transmission and reception of WiFi OFDM signals. Three contiguous bands, such as former channels | 11-26-2015 |
20150341777 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE - A node on a core network, in accordance with a connection state of a terminal, releases a transmission path resource which is made unnecessary due to LIPA (Local IP access) or SIPTO (Selected IP traffic offload) connection configuration. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341841 | MAC HEADER BASED TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A transceiver of an apparatus supports communication with at least one additional apparatus. A processing module processes at least a portion of media access control (MAC) header content of a MAC frame within a signal received via the at least one transceiver or generated internally. In particular, the MAC header content, and optionally the MAC payload content, is processed based on a filter and classification agreement between the apparatus and the at least one additional apparatus to classify the MAC frame. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341907 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA, METHOD FOR ACQUIRING DATA, BASE STATION, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting data, a method for acquiring data, a base station, and user equipment. The method for transmitting data includes the following steps: acquiring a data set to be sent to user equipment UE (S | 11-26-2015 |
20150341959 | GROUPING-BASED DATA TRANSCEIVING METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a data transceiving method performed by a station (STA) in a wireless LAN system. The method comprises receiving a channel access information element from an access point, said channel access information element containing STA group information and channel access interval information, said STA determining whether the channel access interval specified by the channel access interval information is for the STA based on the STA group information; and transceiving data to/from said access point during the channel access interval if the channel access interval is for the STA. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341961 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL ACCESS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more particularly, to a method and apparatus for channel access in a wireless LAN system. To perform the abovementioned technical task, the method for performing channel access by a station (STA) in a wireless LAN system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, may comprise the steps of: deferring, if the channel is in an idle state, the transmission of a first frame until a second frame is detected from another station; and transmitting the first frame when the second frame is detected. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341965 | HOTSPOT NETWORK ACCESS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method are disclosed for providing wireless network access to a user of a remote device at a hotspot. In general, wireless communication is established by the system with the remote device to enable wireless transmission therefrom of social networking credentials associated with a social network profile maintained by a third party social network service provider. Using these credentials, the user is authenticated with the third party social network service provider, and, upon authentication, is provided wireless access to the network. | 11-26-2015 |
20150349860 | Differential feedback within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Differential feedback within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. After full feedback signal(s) have been received by a communication device (e.g., one that is to be performing beamforming for use in subsequent signal transmission), differential feedback signal(s) are received. Those differential feedback signal(s) are employed to update the full feedback signal(s) thereby generating updated/modified full feedback signals. Over time, such updated/modified full feedback signals may subsequently be further updated based upon later received inferential feedback signal(s). Such differential feedback signaling takes advantage of time and/or frequency correlation in a communication channel to provide for reduced feedback overhead by feeding back a difference or delta (Δ) relative to a previous value. For example, instead of providing full feedback signals in each respective/successive communication, feedback overhead is reduced by providing a difference or delta (Δ). | 12-03-2015 |
20150350387 | PHY LAYER OPTIONS FOR BODY AREA NETWORK (BAN) DEVICES - In at least some embodiments, a communication device includes a transceiver with a physical (PHY) layer. The PHY layer is configured for body area network (BAN) operations in a limited multipath environment using M-ary PSK, differential M-ary PSK or rotated differential M-ary PSK. Also, the PHY layer uses a constant symbol rate for BAN packet transmissions. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350883 | DEVICES FOR ESTABLISHING MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS - A method by a User Equipment (UE) is described. The method includes establishing a first radio interface between the UE and a first point on an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN). The method also includes establishing a second radio interface between the UE and a second point on the E-UTRAN by using the first radio interface. The method further includes mapping data radio bearers (DRBs) to at least one of the first radio interface and the second radio interface. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350925 | Radio Frequency Space Division Multiplexing - A wireless network system includes a primary wireless access point (AP) and a first access point node (APN) including a first lighting device with a first integrated wireless access point. The wireless network system further includes a second APN including a second lighting device with a second integrated wireless access point. The first APN and the second APN are wireless network clients to the primary AP and wirelessly communicate with the primary AP. The first APN is configured to wirelessly communicate with a first wireless network client. The second APN is configured to wirelessly communicate with a second wireless network client. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350929 | Wireless communication hotspot creation and connection method, hotspot creation end and hotspot connection end - Disclosed are a wireless communication hotspot creation and connection method, a hotspot creation end and a hotspot connection end. By encrypting a user name at a hotspot creation end to generate a hotspot name, the method configures a wireless communication parameter for the hotspot name generated by encryption to establish a wireless communication hotspot so as to enable a hotspot connection end to access the established wireless communication hotspot by decrypting the hotspot name, ensures that WiFi hotspot creation and automatic recognition are achieved between two or more terminals, and then achieves accurate WiFi interconnection. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350950 | PHYSICAL LAYER FRAME FORMAT FOR LONG RANGE WLAN - In a method for generating a physical layer (PHY) data unit for transmission via a communication channel, the PHY data unit is generated according to a first PHY format when the PHY data unit is to be transmitted in a regular mode, wherein the first PHY format corresponds to a first bandwidth. The PHY data unit is generated according to a second PHY format when the PHY data unit is to be transmitted in an extended range mode, wherein the second PHY format corresponds to a second bandwidth. A preamble of the PHY data unit is modulated such that a receiving device can auto-detect whether the PHY data unit was transmitted at the first bandwidth or the second bandwidth. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350951 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PPDU IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method and device for receiving a data block in a wireless communication system, the method performed by a receiver. The method includes: receiving a physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) from a transmitter over an operating channel, the PPDU including a signal field, a Very High Throughput-Signal-A (VHT-SIG-A) field, a Very High Throughput-Signal-B (VHT-SIG-B) field and a padded data block, generating a first data block by removing zero or more physical padding bits from the padded data block in a physical layer; and generating a second data block by removing zero or more Medium Access Control (MAC) padding bits from the first data block in a MAC layer. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351014 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ACCESS NETWORK AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME - Disclosed is a method for communicating carried out by a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting a multiple access network. The method comprises receiving from a first access network a report configuration of a second access network, wherein the report configuration of the second access network involves specifying information reporting criteria of the second access network, searching the second access network and discovers a second access network entity, determining whether the second access network entity satisfies the information reporting criteria of the second access network, and reporting to the first access network information on the second access network entity when the information reporting criteria of the second access network are satisfied. The report configuration of the second access network may include an entity list which includes at least one second access network entity that is allowed to process traffic of the first access network. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351017 | Verifying stored location data for WLAN access points - An apparatus receives information on a first set of wireless local area network access points obtained in a scan at a single location, the information including at least an identifier of each access point. The same or another apparatus retrieves from a database, based on the identifiers, location data for a second set of access points, the second set of access points comprising access points of the first set of access points for which location data is available in the database. The same or another apparatus determines, based on retrieved location data for the second set of access points and on a predetermined criterion, whether location data for any of the access points of the second set of access points represent an outlier. The same or another apparatus provides identifiers for a third set of access points that are not to be used for positioning purposes, the third set of access points comprising access points of the second set of access points for which the retrieved location data has been determined to represent outliers. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351018 | DISCOVERY METHOD AND DEVICE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention entails a method in which discovery is effected by a first device supporting a WiFi direct service, the method comprising the steps of: scanning usable channels; switching channel to a first channel; and effecting a procedure relating to probe sending and receiving, together with a second device on the first channel. Here, the first channel is determined from either a time stamp or the scanning result. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351019 | NETWORK SELECTION METHODS AND APPARATUS WITH USE OF A MASTER SERVICE MANAGEMENT MODULE AND A PRIORITIZED LIST OF MULTIPLE AGGREGATOR SERVICE PROFILES - A communication device is configured to store one or more aggregator service application modules for use in accessing one or more different aggregator, services. Each aggregator service offers access through a plurality of offered wireless networks identified by a plurality of offered wireless network identifiers. The communication device maintains a prioritized list of profiles which include one or more aggregator service profiles associated with the one or more aggregator services. A scanning operation is performed for identifying one or more available wireless networks in a geographic area of the device, for producing a scan list of one or more available wireless network identifiers corresponding to the one or more available wireless networks. One of the aggregator service profiles is selected from the prioritized list, causing one of the aggregator service application modules corresponding to the selected profile to be invoked. The invoked module causes one of the available wireless network identifiers from the scan list that matches one of the offered wireless network identifiers to be selected, if such matching identifier exists. A connection is established with one of the available wireless networks corresponding to the selected available wireless network identifier, for accessing a selected aggregator service corresponding to the selected aggregator service profile. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358068 | OUTDOOR WIRELESS MODEM AND SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF - Disclosure herein is related to an outdoor wireless modem and a signal processing method thereof. The outdoor wireless modem is particularly disposed in the midst of and bridging a local-area network and a wide-area network established by a mobile communication network. One of the objectives of the invention is to provide a solution replacing the present last mile connection. According to one of the embodiments, main circuit of the outdoor wireless modem includes a radio-frequency module and a baseband module. The baseband module includes at least two processing circuits for respectively processing the signals over the mobile communication network and the packets over the local-area network. The processing circuits are packaged into one module according to the design. Further in one embodiment, a bandwidth integration unit is introduced to the modem. The bandwidth integration unit serves to achieve load balance and bandwidth integration. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358377 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING RENDERING OF ELECTRONIC MEDIA CONTENT VIA A SECURE AD HOC NETWORK CONFIGURATION UTILIZING A HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) establishes an ad hoc network comprising interconnected networks for a user. The HWCD gains access to content on a first device and controls communication of the content from the first device via the HWCD to a second device. The HWCD enables the second device to consume the content. The content may be streamed from the first device via the HWCD to the second device. The first device is a service provider network device or other network device. The access may be authenticated and/or secure. Secure access to the content is extended from the first device to the second device. The ad hoc network is configured and/or reconfigured until communication is complete. The HWCD comprises multiple wireless interfaces. The ad hoc network comprises a PAN, WLAN, WAN and/or cellular network. The HWCD may hand-off among base stations during communication of the content. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358889 | FLEXIBLE ROUTING POLICY FOR WI-FI OFFLOADED CELLULAR DATA - A system/router that flexibly routes Wi-Fi offloaded data receives a data packet from a user equipment via an access point of a Wi-Fi network. The data packet includes an access point name (“APN”) and an Internet Protocol (“IP”) address. The system defines two or more routing policies, each routing policy including a routing criteria and a priority. The system evaluates the data packet based on the routing policies, and routes the data packet to one of at least two possible destinations based at least on the routing policies, including the priorities. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358900 | Network Selection Method and User Equipment - Embodiments of the present invention provide a network selection method and user equipment. The method includes accessing a first wireless local area network WLAN access device by using a non-3rd Generation Mobile Communication 3GPP subscription; attaching to a 3GPP core network by using a 3GPP access network; determining whether a 3GPP subscription has a higher priority than the non-3GPP subscription; and accessing a WLAN by using the 3GPP subscription if the 3GPP subscription has a higher priority than the non-3GPP subscription. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359017 | Method and System for Implementing Communication in WLAN - A method for implementing communication in a WLAN is provided. A routing device receives a packet from an authentication server. The packet carries an identifier of a user terminal and a pairwise master key PMK corresponding to the identifier of the user terminal. The routing device is an endpoint that initiates EAP authentication. The routing device manages the user terminal. The routing device from the packet obtains the identifier of the user terminal and the PMK. The routing device sends a control message to an access controller AC. The control message carries the identifier of the user terminal and the PMK. The AC manages the AP. The user terminal accesses the WLAN by using the AP. The routing device receives a response message from the AC. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365811 | Enhanced E911 Network Access for a Call Center Using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Messaging - A switched emergency call (e.g., a 911 call, an alarm company call) forwarded by a telematics call center is converted into a session initiation protocol (SIP) packetized phone call at the call center, and routed over an IP network, for presentation to an emergency services gateway, which connects to a selective router via dedicated circuits, gaining full access to the Enhanced 911 network. This provides a PSAP receiving a call from a telematics call center or other call center with all features available in an Enhanced 911 network, e.g., callback number of the 911 caller, and location of the 911 caller. Location of the caller is provided using a VoIP positioning center (VPC), queried from the call center. In this way, the switched emergency call is converted into a SIP packetized phone call and routed without further passage through the public switched telephone network (PSTN). | 12-17-2015 |
20150365886 | Data Transmission Method, Multi-Medium Access Point and Multi-Medium Client - A data transmission method, multi-medium access point and multi-medium client are disclosed. The method includes: a multi-medium access point (AP) acquiring a current wireless local area network (WLAN) operating mode of an opposite end multi-medium client (Client) from the opposite end multi-medium Client; and the multi-medium AP comparing an address of a target device to which a data packet to be sent is sent with an address of the opposite end multi-medium Client, if they are different, judging whether both a current WLAN operating mode of the multi-medium AP and the current WLAN operating mode of the opposite end multi-medium Client are three-address modes or not, and if yes, determining that the data packet to be sent is prohibited from being sent through a wireless fidelity (WiFi) interface of the multi-medium AP. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365888 | Method and apparatus for distributing load - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus, comprising a receiver configured to receive a first distribution factor relating to using a first access, at least one processing core configured to determine, using a probabilistic procedure, based at least in part on the first distribution factor, whether the apparatus is to use the first access, and wherein the at least one processing core is configured to, based on a result of the determination, select an access and to cause the apparatus to use to the selected access. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365910 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND TERMINAL DEVICE - Provided is a communication control device including: a communication control unit configured to control radio communication in a small cell partially or entirely overlapping with a macro cell; and an acquisition unit configured to acquire first synchronization relationship information indicating which frequency bands are mutually synchronized among a plurality of frequency bands used for the small cell. The first synchronization relationship information is supplied in the small cell by the communication control unit and is not supplied in the macro cell by a base station of the macro cell. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365911 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS NETWORK - WLAN controllers in a same mobility domain are able to dynamically discover other WLAN controllers in the same mobility domain across one or more layer 2 or layer 3 network boundaries. A WLAN controller in the mobility domain determines an address of at least one seed WLAN controller in the mobility domain from a configuration server. The WLAN controller registers with the at least one seed WLAN controller in the mobility domain and receives information for other WLAN controllers in the mobility domain from the at least one seed WLAN controller. The WLAN controller also receives synchronized wireless device information that allows a wireless device to roam from one AP adopted by the WLAN controller in a first access network to another AP adopted by another WLAN controller in a second different access network in the same mobility domain. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365983 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING FAST AND CONVENIENT WIRELESS CONNECTION - The disclosure relates to a wireless communication network. Provided are a method and device for establishing a convenient wireless connection, the method including: configuring a first wireless access device to have a wireless station function; configuring a second wireless access device to have a wireless access point function; the first wireless access device discovering the second wireless access device by scanning wireless access points; the second wireless access device discovering the first wireless access device by scanning wireless stations; after having discovered each other, the first wireless access device and the second wireless access device establishing a wireless connection through negotiation, and after connection establishment, respectively functioning as wireless access points so as to establish a wireless local area network (WLAN) easily accessible by a large number of users. The solution simplifies network interconnection and optimizes the wirelessly connected local area network. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372376 | LOW PROFILE HIGH PERFORMANCE INTEGRATED ANTENNA FOR SMALL CELL BASE STATION - The present disclosure relates to antenna design for Installation on small cell base stations. The antenna design corresponds to a conformal antenna design that fits into a traditional sun-shield of an outdoor base station. In another aspect, the antenna design supports multiple hands and multiple technologies. In a further aspect the antenna design provides a gain pattern that allows installation of the small cells into directional sectors to further enhance the spectral efficiency while providing a single installation location. In still a further aspect, the design permits the form factor of the base station to meet unique and desirable aesthetic principals such as a modem curved surface and an attractive and distinctive height, width and depth ratio. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372738 | TRANSMIT CO-CHANNEL SPECTRUM SHARING - An intelligent backhaul system is disclosed for deployment in the presence of existing radio systems. A backhaul system for co-channel deployment with existing licensed and unlicensed wireless networks, including conventional cellular backhaul radios, Common Carrier Fixed Point-to-Point Microwave Service, Private Operational Fixed Point-to-Point Microwave Service and other FCC 47 C.F.R. §101 licensed microwave networks is disclosed. Processing and network elements to manage and control the deployment and management of backhaul of radios that connect remote edge access networks to core networks in a geographic zone which co-exist with such existing systems or other sources of interference within a radio environment are also disclosed. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372742 | CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION METHOD AND APPARATUS OF DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTI-POINT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A Channel State Information (CSI) transmission/reception method and an apparatus for transmitting/receiving CSI efficiently in a Coordinated Multi-Point (CoMP) communication system are provided. The CSI transmission method of a terminal for receiving Joint Transmission (JT) from a first Transmission Point (TP) and a second TP includes receiving a first CSI Reference Signal (CSI-RS) corresponding to the first TP, receiving a second CSI-RS corresponding to the second TP, generating an aggregated CSI corresponding to the first and second CSI-RSs, and transmitting the aggregated CSI, wherein generating an aggregated CSI comprising creating the aggregated CSI with a transmission timing of the aggregated CSI. The CSI transmission/reception method and apparatus is capable of transmission CSI efficiently in the CoMP system. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372779 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SUPPORT INFORMATION FOR REMOVING INTERFERENCE OF TERMINAL, AND SERVING CELL BASE STATION - One embodiment of the present specification discloses a method by which a serving cell transmits support information for removing interference of a terminal. The method comprises: a step for determining, by the serving cell, a downlink timing offset with neighboring interference cells; and a step for to determining, by the serving cell, a channel corresponding to an interference removal target among neighboring interference cells according to the timing offset. Here, the channel to have interference removed can be the channel interfering in a control channel for the serving cell according to the timing offset. The method further includes a step for enabling the serving cell to generate the interference removal support information on the determined channel and transmit the generated information to a terminal. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372870 | Group Isolation in Wireless Networks - Methods and systems here may be used for managing a wireless network including associating a first and second wireless access device to an access point (AP), assigning the first and second wireless access device to respective first and second isolation groups, providing local communication via the AP within the isolation group, and prohibiting local communication via the AP between the first and second isolation groups. | 12-24-2015 |
20150372948 | PARALLEL PATH TRAIN COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A communication access point is disclosed for use with a mobile consist having at least a first vehicle and a second vehicle. The communication access point may have an intra-consist router configured to receive signals from a first plurality of vehicle control components located onboard the first vehicle and to generate data packets for transmission to a second plurality of vehicle control components located onboard the second vehicle. The communication access point may also have a wired Ethernet bridge configured to transmit data packets to and from the intra-consist router, and a wireless Ethernet bridge configured to transmit data packets to and from the intra-consist router in parallel with the wired Ethernet bridge. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373203 | IMPROVING CHARGING INFORMATION ACCURACY IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for improving charging information accuracy in a telecommunications network with respect to a target user equipment includes: in case of a handover or cell change procedure from a first base transceiver station to a second base transceiver station regarding the target user equipment, transmitting first non-delivered packet data volume information from the first base transceiver station to the second base transceiver station using at least one of the following: an X2 interface between the first base transceiver station and the second base transceiver station, an S1 interface between the first base transceiver station and the core network and the S1 interface between the core network and the second base transceiver station, and user equipment history information regarding the target user equipment; and determining, based on the first non-delivered packet data volume information, the second non-delivered packet data volume information. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373482 | APPLICATION FRAMEWORK FOR INTERACTIVE WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - In various example embodiments, a system and method for a light sensor network that provides an application framework for interactive applications that use location-based information are presented. In example embodiments, the light sensor network includes a plurality of lighting nodes and a plurality of sensor controller nodes (SCNs) positioned within a wireless communications range of one or more of the plurality of LNs. A LN within the light sensor network includes a communication interface having a first transceiver and a second transceiver. The first transceiver being configured to exchange communication signals to and from a service platform over a wide area network (WAN) via a lighting gateway node. The second transceiver being configured to receive beacon signals from a beacon transmitting device within a beacon communications range and further configured to transmit beacon signals to be received by a beacon-enabled device within the beacon communications range. Sensor data and beacon data are used by the interactive applications. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373509 | GROUP GAMING PLATFORM FOR MOBILE DEVICES IN PROXIMITY - Apparatus and method are provided for a group gaming platform for mobile devices in proximity. In one novel aspect, a Game Directory Service provides an ad-hoc game list to all registered UEs. A registrar UE collects locally installed games from registered subscriber UEs and updates the list based on trigger events. In another novel aspect, the Executable Distribution Service is provided to expedite the downloading. A game-host UE sends a united resource location of an installer for the group game to all invited UEs together with the invitation message. In another novel aspect, Remote Game Hosting Service enables a passive-client UE to play a group game without installing the game locally. The passive-client UE relays detected sensor readings to a passive-host UE. The passive-host UE uses peer messaging and scene streaming to run the game logic and to stream the scene sequences to one or more passive-client UEs. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373524 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME, AND PROGRAM - Another apparatus is prevented from being notified of a service which cannot be used, in spite of the service that cannot be used. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373525 | System and Method for Pre-Association Discovery - A method for operating a seeker device includes generating a first seeker truncated hash output from a sought service name, and generating a second seeker truncated hash output from the sought service name, wherein the first seeker truncated hash output and the second seeker truncated hash output are uncorrelated. The method also includes transmitting a first request message including the first seeker truncated hash output, and receiving a first response message from an advertiser device, the first response message including a second advertiser truncated hash output generated from an advertised service name, wherein the first seeker truncated hash output matches a first advertiser truncated hash output generated from the advertised service name. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373562 | UPDATING STORED INFORMATION ABOUT WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - An apparatus receives ( | 12-24-2015 |
20150373587 | METHODS FOR BANDWIDTH EFFICIENT OPERATIONS IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method of establishing a data transmission bandwidth between a transmitting node and a receiving node is provided. The method includes sending a request to send (RTS) message from a transmitting node to a receiving node, the RTS message indicating a data transmission bandwidth to be considered for use in subsequent data transmission and establishing a negotiated data transmission bandwidth comprising multiple channels, wherein each channel comprises a 20 MHz bandwidth, and wherein the multiple channels are at least one of contiguous and non-contiguous in frequency. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373620 | Probe request for relay discovery within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - A relay wireless communication device is discovered using probe request. A source device that intends to transmit one or more frames to a destination device transmits the probe request to request a probe response from one or more potential relay devices. A relay device transmits a probe response to the source device when the relay device may operate to forward the one or more frames from the source device to the destination device. The relay device employs one or more considerations to determine its eligibility to serve as relay for the source and destination devices. The source device selects one of the potential relay devices based on their provided probe responses. The source device may select an optimal relay device based upon two or more received probe responses. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373625 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING MANAGEMENT INFORMATION FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A method for reporting load information in a wireless local area network system, and a device therefore are discussed. The method according to one embodiment includes transmitting basic service set (BSS) load information, the BSS load information including a multi user (MU) multiple input multiple output (MIMO) capable station count field, a first utilization field and a second utilization field. In addition, the MU-MIMO capable station count field indicates a total number of stations with MU reception capability currently associated with a BSS managed by the AP. Additionally, the first utilization field includes information about an interval during which a 40 MHz channel width is busy. Lastly, the second utilization field include information about an interval during which a 80 MHz channel width is busy. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373628 | METHOD FOR DETECTING SMALL CELL ON BASIS OF DISCOVERY SIGNAL - According to one embodiment of the present invention, provided is a method by which a terminal detects a small cell. The small cell detection method can comprise the steps of: receiving, from a serving cell, information on discovery signals of one or a plurality neighboring small cells; and detecting a discovery signal from a small cell in an off state from the one or plurality of neighboring small cells on the basis of the information on the discovery signals. The information on the discovery signals can include information on whether the small cells independently set the discovery signals or identically set the discovery signals by cluster unit. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373631 | System and Method for Basic Service Set Association - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving, by a station (STA) from an access point (AP), a frame including a device type indicator and comparing the device type indicator with a device type accepted by a basic service set (BSS) of the AP to produce a comparison. The method also includes determining whether to associate the STA with the AP in accordance with the comparison, associating the STA with the AP upon determining to associate the STA with the AP, and not associating the STA with the AP upon determining not to associate the STA with the AP. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373654 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION AND USER TERMINAL - The present invention is designed to establish synchronization between transmission points when downlink signals are transmitted from a plurality of transmission points to a user terminal. A radio communication system has a first radio base station that forms a first cell, a second radio base station that forms a second cell, which is placed on the area of the first cell in an overlapping manner, and a user terminal that is capable of carrying out radio communication with the first radio base station and the second radio base station, and the second radio base station has a receiving section that receives synchronization correction information, which is for establishing synchronization with a synchronization target, from the user terminal, and a synchronization correction section that corrects synchronization based on the synchronization correction information. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373659 | MAINTAINING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION - In an LTE system, to maintain synchronization between different user equipment, a base station may consider one or more factors including the delay in transferring a timing advance command, an amount of time for the user equipment to process the timing advance command, and a period of time for repeated retransmissions of the timing advance command. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373716 | Method of Period Allocation for Medium and Wireless Communication System Thereof - A method of period allocation for a medium to be utilized by a first wireless communication device comprising at least one wireless local area network (WLAN) module includes while the first wireless communication device occupies the medium, detecting a termination period of a Network Allocation Vector (NAV) of the medium; and the first wireless communication device extending the termination period of the NAV of the medium if the termination period of the NAV is earlier than an expected period. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373763 | Communication Device - A communication device may accept an instruction for establishing a wireless network to which the communication device and an external device are to belong, search for the external device in a case where the instruction is accepted, to transfer from a parent state to a non-parent state in a case where the communication device is in the parent state and the searched external device is in the parent state, and execute a forming process for forming a first wireless network to which the communication device is to belong as a child station and the external device is to belong as the parent station after the state of the communication device had transferred to the non-parent state. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373764 | Management of Radio Resource Control for Device-to-Device Communication - Measures are provided for management of RRC for D2D communication. Such measures include setting a connected state of RRC for device(s) of a pair of devices. For the devices(s), both a D2D communication service between the pair of devices and a core network communication service between the device(s) and a core network entity are active. The setting enables radio resource management for the device(s) for the D2D communication service and the core network communication service. Termination of the core network communication service is detected for the device(s). A connection towards the core network entity is reconfigured for disabling the core network communication service of the device(s). The connected state of RRC is maintained for the devices(s) of the pair of devices, for which the device(s) only the device-to-device communication service is active. The maintaining enables radio resource management for the device(s) for the D2D communication service. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373771 | TECHNIQUE FOR CONNECTION ATTEMPT HANDLING IN A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK SITUATION - A technique for handling mobile terminating connection attempts for a mobile terminal for which a change of an association from a first routing node to a second routing node is accompanied by a Circuit Switched (CS) fallback is described. In one exemplary embodiment, a method may be performed by a Circuit Switched Fallback Interworking Function (CSFB-IWF) for handling mobile terminating connection attempts for a mobile terminal for which a change of an association from the CSFB-IWF to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) is accompanied by a Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB). The method may include receiving a mobile terminating connection attempt to the mobile terminal. In response to receiving the mobile terminating connection attempt, the method may include paging the mobile terminal using a Mobility Management Entity (MME). In response to paging the mobile terminal, the method may include triggering the mobile terminal to initiate a CSFB procedure. Further, the method may include determining an identity of the MSC based on a message received by the CSFB-IWF from the MSC. Also, the method may include transmitting, to the MSC, a second mobile terminating connection attempt for a CS connection to the mobile terminal. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381243 | ANTENNA SHARING DEVICE FOR WIRELESS ACCESS NODE SYSTEMS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a device for sharing the antennas of wireless access node systems in a wireless communication network comprising a wireless access node system A and a wireless access node system B, each of which comprises at least one transmission/reception unit for processing transmission/reception signals in at least one frequency band, the device comprising: an MIMO coupler A for coupling a signal in a first transmission/reception route among multiple input multiple output (MIMO) routes for said at least one transmission/reception unit of the wireless access node system A, and a signal in a second transmission/reception route among MIMO routes for said at least one transmission/reception unit of the wireless access node system B, to the antenna of the wireless access node system A; and an MIMO coupler B for coupling a signal in a first transmission/reception route among the MIMO routes for said at least one transmission/reception unit of the wireless access node system B, and a signal in a second transmission/reception route among the MIMO routes for said at least one transmission/reception unit of the wireless access node system A, to the antenna of the wireless access node system B. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381824 | MOBILE ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS WITH GRACE PERIOD - A mobile communications device receives an indication of a balance from a server when establishment of a voice call or sending of a message is requested. The mobile communications device determines whether the balance is sufficient to place the voice call or send the message over a mobile network. If the balance is sufficient to place the voice call or send the message over the mobile network, the voice call is established or the message is sent under normal operating conditions. If the balance is insufficient to place the voice call or send the message over the mobile network, a grace period is activated and the voice call is established or the message is sent during the grace period over an available wireless local-area network. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382194 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING ELECTRONIC DEVICE, ELECTRONIC DEVICE, METHOD OF CONTROLLING ACCESS POINT AND ACCESS POINT - An electronic device includes a network interface configured to communicate with an access point via a Local Area Network (LAN) cable, a wireless network interface configured to wirelessly communicate with the access point, and a controller configured to detect a connection to the access point via the LAN cable, control the network interface to receive access information for establishing a wireless connection with the access point from the access point, and control the wireless network interface to wirelessly connect to the access point using the received access information. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382264 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING CELLULAR SESSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for establishing a session of a cellular system in a wireless communication system is provided. According to embodiments of the present invention, the establishment of the session of the cellular system may be triggered by a network when a session of a Wi-Fi system already exists. By using the session of the cellular system and the session of the Wi-Fi system, simultaneous transmission through the cellular system and the Wi-Fi system can be achieved. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382272 | UNLICENSED SPECTRUM OFFLOAD ARCHITECTURE FOR SMALL-CELL BASE STATIONS - A small cell base station and method are disclosed for directing packets for the conversion of an internet protocol backhaul communications link into an RF transmit and simultaneously an RF receive signal into an internet protocol backhaul communications link between different air interface technologies. Packets are directed between licensed and unlicensed spectrum according to criteria that are implemented in algorithms running on electronic processors. The small cell base station includes a licensed spectrum baseband module that exchanges packets with the IP backhaul network, and an unlicensed spectrum baseband module that exchanges packets with the licensed spectrum baseband module but not with the IP backhaul network. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382278 | Techniques for Generating a Routing Table for a Mesh Network Having Ad Hoc Connections - Examples may include a management authority for a software-define network (SDN) receiving telemetric data from wireless devices coupled together in a mesh network having one or more ad hoc connections between the wireless devices. The management authority may then generate a routing table based on the received telemetric data and provide a routing table for use by the wireless devices to route data within the mesh network or route data to a network coupled to the mesh network. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382282 | Network Assisted ANDSF Policy Updating - Various methods and apparatuses are provided to address the need for reduced UE location reporting. In one method, an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) server receives ( | 12-31-2015 |
20150382287 | METHOD FOR FINDING INSTRUMENT FOR WI-FI DIRECT P2P (PEER TO PEER) COMMUNICATION AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for performing communication between terminals (D2D). Specifically, the method is characterized in that when a terminal communicating with another terminal is to perform an additional communication with yet another terminal, the channel sequence of the communicating terminal is determined, and one of the two terminals communicating with each other is defined as the channel synchronization reference terminal performing synchronization. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382314 | A Network Node, a Core Network Node, and Methods Therein - A method in a network node for sending a pilot power value in a heterogeneous mobile communications network. The heterogeneous mobile communications network comprises a second set of base station nodes selected to operate in a Multiple Input Multiple Output, MIMO, -mode. The second set of base station nodes share a cell identity and are deployed within a coverage area. The network node computes ( | 12-31-2015 |
20150382333 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING FRAME IN ACCORDANCE WITH BANDWIDTH THEREOF IN WLAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more specifically, provides a method and device for transmitting/receiving a frame in accordance with the bandwidth thereof in a WLAN system. The method for performing a response process in a WLAN system according to one embodiment of the present invention may comprise: a step in which a first station (STA) transmits a frame requesting a response frame to a second STA; and a step in which the first STA awaits the response frame for an ACKTimeout interval. The value of the ACKTimeout interval may be determined differently according to the preamble channel bandwidth type of the frame. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382338 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SPACE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS FOR WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM - A space division multiple access (SDMA) method is provided. The method may be performed by a station (STA), in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system. The method includes overhearing a third transmission response message transmitted by an access point (AP), and determining whether to access a channel on the basis of criteria information included in the third transmission response message. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006606 | CUSTOMIZABLE MOBILE BROADBAND NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CUSTOMIZING MOBILE BROADBAND NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a customizable mobile broadband network system and a method for customizing a mobile broadband network. The mobile broadband network system includes a forwarding layer, a control layer, and a capability opening layer. The forwarding capability and the control capability of the mobile broadband network system according to the embodiments of the present invention are decoupled from each other, and the capability opening layer combines a required capability according to the network customization request, so as to manage the corresponding customized-network instance. Therefore, a mobile network can be customized according to a requirement of a user. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006627 | METHOD FOR POWER SAVE MODE OPERATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for a power save mode operation in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The method comprising determining a type of a receiving station (STA) indicator on the basis of the number of STAs which are associated with the AP and which intend to transmit buffered traffic; generating a traffic indicator map (TIM) element including information which indicates the receiving STA indicator and the type of the receiving STA indicator, transmitting the TIM element, receiving a poll frame for requesting data frame transmission from one STA among the STAs and transmitting the data frame to the STA. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006843 | METHOD FOR ENABLING INTERCEPTION, DECODING AND/OR PROCESSING OF A MAC LEVEL MESSAGE - There is disclosed a method in a User Equipment, UE, for enabling interception, decoding and/or processing of at least parts of a Media Access Control, MAC, level message. The method comprises the steps of receiving configuration information comprising information to add additional information to a MAC level message, and creating a bit string representing the additional information. The method also comprise the step of adding the created bit string to the MAC level message, to enable a recipient of said MAC level message to determine, based on the additional information represented by the bit string, whether at least part of a payload of the MAC level message is to be intercepted, decoded and/or processed. There is further disclosed a method in a base station for decoding a corresponding MAC level message. A corresponding User Equipment, UE, and a base station configured for the methods are also disclosed. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007268 | METHOD FOR STEERING TRAFFIC IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Disclosed is a method for enabling user equipment (UE) to steer traffic in a wireless communications system. The method comprises the steps of: transmitting UE traffic steering preference information to a first access network; receiving traffic steering information from the first access network, the traffic steering information being set based on the UE traffic steering preference information; evaluating the traffic steering based on at least one of a first and a second traffic steering rule; and performing the traffic steering between the first access network and a second access network based on the result of the evaluation of the traffic steering. The first traffic steering rule is prescribed by ANDSF (Access Network Discovery and Selection Functions). The second traffic steering rule is prescribed by the first access network. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007310 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SYNCHRONIZATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for and apparatus for performing synchronization in a wireless communication system is provided. A wireless device receives information including a set of subframes in which a discovery signal or a synchronization signal is transmitted, and a muting pattern which is changed according to a downlink (DL)/uplink (UL) configuration of a corresponding cell; receives the discovery signal or the synchronization signal from a cell based on the information; and performs synchronization, wherein the information is indicated to cells via air interface from a source cell. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007342 | PHYSICAL LAYER PROTOCOL DATA UNIT FORMAT IN A HIGH EFFICIENCY WIRELESS LAN - The present invention provides a new uplink PPDU frame format to support MU-MIMO and OFDMA, and methods, apparatuses, etc. therefor. In an aspect of the present invention, a method by a STA for transmitting an UL PPDU frame to an AP simultaneously with one or more other STAs in a WLAN may include receiving a frame including a parameter for the PPDU frame from the AP; and participating in UL MU PPDU frame transmission based on the parameter. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007379 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING BACKOFF IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly to a method for enabling a station (STA) to perform a backoff in a wireless LAN system and an apparatus therefor. In a wireless LAN system according to an embodiment of the present invention, a method for enabling a station (STA) to perform a backoff includes the steps of: performing a first backoff procedure at a first primary channel for a transmission of a data unit having a size of a first channel width; performing a second backoff procedure at a second primary channel for a transmission of a data unit having a size equal to or greater than a second channel width; if a transmission opportunity (TXOP) is permitted as a result of the first backoff procedure, transmitting the data unit having a size of the first channel width; and if a TXOP is permitted as a result of the second backoff procedure, transmitting the data unit having a size equal to or greater than the second channel width. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007389 | Communication Apparatus - A communication system includes a 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Core Network (CN); a 3GPP Home Node-B GateWay (HNB-GW); a Communication Apparatus (CA) coupled to the CN and embedded in a Communication Device (CD), wherein said CA transforms a 3GPP Home Node-B (HNB) into a mobile or location independent portable entity, wherein said CA interconnects to the CN by interconnecting to the HNB-GW over a 3GPP Iuh Interface, wherein said CA includes multi-layered protocol stacks for implementing 3GPP control plane functionality, user plane functionality and management functionality. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007395 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication apparatus determines whether the communication apparatus is to operate as a transmission apparatus for transmitting service data to be transferred by a service performed via a network, or operate as both the transmission apparatus for transmitting the service data to be transferred by the service performed via the network and a reception apparatus for receiving the service data to be transferred by the service performed via the network, terminates a connection with a communication partner apparatus in response to completion of transmission of the service data if the communication apparatus operates as the transmission apparatus, and terminates the connection with the communication partner apparatus in response to a user operation if the communication apparatus operates as both the transmission apparatus and the reception apparatus. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007396 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR THE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus in which a service can more efficiently used is provided. The communication apparatus searches for an apparatus that provides a particular service and establishes a wireless connection to the other searched communication apparatus. Subsequently, an address of the other connected communication apparatus is obtained from the other communication apparatus, and the service provided by the other communication apparatus is used using the obtained address. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007403 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A radio terminal ( | 01-07-2016 |
20160007408 | SELF-ADAPTING SIGNAL COMMUNICATING SYSTEM - A wireless signal communication system controls wireless signal transmission levels in response to detection of attenuation characteristics of a medium in a line of sight of the wireless signals. In one form, the system performs real time detection of moveable objects in a line of sight of sub-terahertz electromagnetic waves delivered to data streaming, charging, and other systems. The system downscales the signal transmission level responsive to the presence of the moveable object in the line of sight or based on an increase attenuation of the signal, and up-scales the signal transmission level responsive to the absence of the moveable object in the line of sight or based on a decrease in the attenuation of the signal. | 01-07-2016 |
20160014595 | Receive Operation Mode Indication for Power Save | 01-14-2016 |
20160014633 | ASSIST ENGINE FOR TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE FUNCTIONS IN A MODULAR WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE | 01-14-2016 |
20160014638 | ENHANCING PACKET AGGREGATION PERFORMANCE IN COEXISTING WIRELESS NETWORKS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014678 | WIRELESS SPECTRUM USAGE AND CONTROL OF ACCESS POINT PROBE RESPONSES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014680 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING CELL CONNECTION FROM WIRELESS LAN IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PROVIDING VALID INFORMATION ON PERIPHERAL WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINTS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014773 | METHOD FOR EXCHANGING FRAME FOR LOW POWER DEVICE AND APPARATUS THEREFORE IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM THEREFOR | 01-14-2016 |
20160014823 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONNECTING WIRELESS NETWORK IN A DIGITAL DEVICE | 01-14-2016 |
20160021260 | LINKING EXISTING WI FI ACCESS POINTS INTO UNIFIED NETWORK FOR VOIP - A plurality of users are associated with a system having at least one information processor coupled to a communication network. Multiple wireless access points to the communication network are provided; and multiple of the users associated with the system are provided VoIP access to the communication network via the access points. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021560 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR SOCIAL PROXIMITY FINE TIMING MEASUREMENT REQUESTS MULTICAST SIGNALING - Embodiments relating to systems, methods, and devices for social proximity fine timing measurement requests (FTMR) multicast signaling between mobile devices are disclosed. Example embodiments generally relate to Wi-Fi networks, IEEE 802.11 | 01-21-2016 |
20160021609 | METHOD FOR SETTING UP HIGH-SPEED LINK IN WLAN SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, disclosed are a method and an apparatus for setting up a high-speed link in a WLAN system. A method for a station (STA) setting up the high-speed link in the wireless communication system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: scanning and discovering a plurality of access points (APs); transmitting a request frame to a portion or all of the plurality of APs by using a multicast or a broadcast technique; and receiving a response frame from the portion or all of the plurality of APs. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021688 | LOCAL AREA NETWORK MESHING - Some embodiments includes a method of forming a local area mesh network at a computing device. The method can include: receiving a connection request from a first neighbor device utilizing a Wi-Fi Direct (WFD) discovery protocol; forming a first peer-to-peer (P2P) connection with the first neighbor device utilizing WFD, wherein the computing device is set as a group owner of the first P2P connection; generating a notice of absence schedule to send to the first neighbor device indicating suspension intervals of the first P2P connection during which the computing device is suspended from being the group owner of the first P2P connection; forming a second P2P connection with a second neighbor device utilizing WFD, wherein the second neighbor device is set as a group owner of the second P2P connection, wherein the first P2P connection and the second P2P connection constitute part of a mesh communication network. | 01-21-2016 |
20160029249 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) TRAFFIC LOAD MEASUREMENT PROVISIONING TO WIRELESS CELLULAR NETWORKS - Generally, this disclosure provides devices, systems and methods for provisioning of wireless local area network (WLAN) traffic load measurements to third generation partnership project 3GPP wireless cellular networks. A WLAN element manager (EM) may include a polling module to poll a WLAN access point (AP), the polling to request traffic load data from the WLAN AP; a timer module to trigger the polling module to poll at periodic intervals; a logging module to receive and log the requested traffic load data; and an integration reference point (IRP) agent including a reporting module to generate a traffic load report for transmission to a network manager (NM), the traffic load report based on the logged traffic load data. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029297 | Method and Device for Processing, Sending, and Receiving of Service Indication Information - The embodiments of the disclosure provides a method and device for processing the sending and receiving of service indication information, wherein the method is applied to an Access Point (AP) of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). The method includes that sending time information of grouping indication information of Stations (STA) in the WLAN is acquired, wherein the sending time information is used for instructing the STAs to receive, according to sending moments indicated by the sending time information, service indication information corresponding to the STAs indicated by the grouping indication information; and the STAs indicated by the grouping indication information are notified of the sending time information. By means of the technical solution provided by the embodiments of the disclosure, the technical problems in the related art that sending of service indication information is not flexibly configured yet, it is necessary to monitor each wireless frame, and the like, are solved, thereby allowing service indication information (such as paging information of a group user) to be flexibly configured, sent and quickly acquired. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029299 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACCESSING WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for enabling a first terminal to access a wireless network, includes: receiving an access request sent from the first terminal, the access request including a terminal identification of the first terminal; determining whether the first terminal meets a condition based on the terminal identification included in the access request; sending a connection invitation to the first terminal if it is determined that the first terminal meets the condition; receiving a connection request sent from the first terminal based on the connection invitation; and enabling the first terminal to access the wireless network based on the connection request. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029301 | Managed Access Point Protocol - Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating deployment and configuration of managed access points in hierarchical wireless network systems. An embodiment of the invention facilitates deployment and configuration of conventional, substantially autonomous access points operating in connection with a central management node, such as a server or appliance. In another embodiment, the present invention facilitates deployment and configuration of light-weight access points in a hierarchical wireless network system. In one embodiment, the present invention also provides a streamlined encryption key exchange protocol adapted to hierarchical wireless network system architectures. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029373 | DOWNLINK ACKNOWLEDGMENT IN RESPONSE TO UPLINK MULTIPLE USER TRANSMISSION - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for transmitting a downlink ACK in response to an uplink multi-user transmission in a HE WLAN. In an aspect of the present invention, a method for transmitting an ACK in response to uplink data received from a plurality of STAs by an AP in a WLAN may be provided. The method may include transmitting a frame triggering transmission of a plurality of uplink data units from the plurality of STAs to the plurality of STAs, receiving a PPDU frame including a plurality of uplink data units from the plurality of STAs a predetermined IFS after transmitting the trigger frame, and transmitting an ACK frame including ACKs for the plurality of data units from the plurality of STAs. | 01-28-2016 |
20160036620 | Virtual Layer 2 and Mechanism to Make it Scalable - A network component including a receiver configured to receive a plurality of Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for a plurality of hosts in a plurality of external Layer 2 networks located at a plurality of physical locations and interconnected via a service, a logic circuit configured to map the IP addresses of the hosts in the external Layer 2 networks to a plurality of Media Access Control (MAC) addresses of a plurality of corresponding gateways in the same external Layer 2 networks, and a transmitter configured to send to the external Layer 2 networks a plurality of a plurality of IP addresses for a plurality of local hosts in a local Layer 2 network coupled to the external Layer 2 networks via the service. | 02-04-2016 |
20160036970 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INTEGRATED VOICE AND DATA SERVICES UTILIZING WIRED CORDLESS ACCESS WITH UNLICENSED/UNREGULATED SPECTRUM - Integrated voice and data services are provided that utilize wired cordless access with unlicensed/unregulated connectivity sources. A digital cordless telephone operates over unlicensed/unregulated spectrum in conjunction with one or more wireless access points (WAPs) that are installed in homes, businesses, entertainment venues, and the like. The WAPs are connected to a communications service provider's broadband packet data network. A user may use the device when they are in range of another wireless access point in a public or private building that also is connected to their communications service provider's broadband packet data network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037340 | SESSION AND SERVICE CONTROL FOR WIRELESS DEVICES USING COMMON SUBSCRIBER INFORMATION - The present disclosure provides a method and apparatus to initiate a session with a packet gateway for a connecting device configured to authenticate with a subscribing wireless device's authentication information. In some embodiments, an access node is configured to receive identification information uniquely identifying the connecting device, and based on the identification information received, provide a service to the connecting device and/or send a session request message to the packet gateway to establish a session for the connecting device, the session request message including information distinguishing the connecting device from another wireless device configured to authenticate with the authentication information associated with the subscribing wireless device. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037341 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING LINK IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method and device for configuring a link in a wireless LAN system are disclosed. The wireless link configuration method comprises the steps of: acquiring a first probe request message transmitted by a first mobile terminal; transmitting a second probe request message within a maximum channel time from a time point at which the transmission of the first probe request message ends; and receiving one probe response message, which is a response to the first probe request message and the second probe request message, from a wireless access device. Therefore, a time for configuring a link between wireless LAN devices can be reduced. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037436 | DISTRIBUTED BULK ONBOARDING PROCESS - Methods and systems for the distributed bulk onboarding of devices onto a Wi-Fi network are provided. A method may comprise receiving, at an onboarding device, Wi-Fi configuration information. Then, it may comprise detecting, at the onboarding device, broadcast information from a plurality of devices that may be onboarded onto the Wi-Fi network, the broadcast information indicating that one or more of the plurality of devices is an onboarding node capable of onboarding another of the plurality of devices. The method may further comprise creating instructions indicating an order in which the plurality of devices may be onboarded, and by which of the one or more onboarding nodes each of the remaining devices of the plurality shall be onboarded, and providing the Wi-Fi configuration information and at least a portion of the instructions to at least one of the onboarding nodes. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037438 | Communication Management and Targeted Message Delivery - A network environment includes a wireless access point providing access to a corresponding network. A server resource initiates verification (such as authorization) of a mobile communication device attempting to establish a secured wireless link between the mobile communication device and a network access point. Based on an outcome of the verification, the server resource produces control information. The server resource forwards the control information to a gateway resource that controls a flow of communications between the network access point and a network. The gateway resource facilitates transmission of one or more messages to the mobile communication device in accordance with the control information. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037441 | APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR HIGH-EFFICIENCY WIRELESS LOCAL-AREA NETWORK (HEW) SIGNAL FIELD DETECTION - Apparatuses, methods, and computer readable media are disclosed. A STA to detect a HE SIG may be configured to detect the HE SIG based on at least one from the following group: a flipped reserved bit, a scrambled portion of the HE SIG, and a rotation of a signal constellation of the HE SIG different than legacy rotations of: a rotation of a first signal constellation and no rotation of a second signal constellation, and no rotation of the first signal constellation and a rotation of the second signal constellation. The STA may determine that a reserved bit is the flipped reserved bit based on a bit being reversed from a legacy standard. The STA may unscramble a received signal field, determine whether a CRC indicates the HE-SIG contains errors, and if the CRC indicates there are no errors, then determine that the signal field is the HE SIG. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037444 | Method and Apparatus for Scanning Access Point in Wireless LAN System - The present disclosure relates to obtaining AP information or information on a channel where the AP is positioned from a neighboring mobile terminal that has recently performed AP scanning and re-attempting to scan based on the obtained information. According to an embodiment of the present disclosure, a method for scanning an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (LAN) system comprises performing first WLAN scanning by a first mobile terminal, transmitting a request for WLAN AP information to a second mobile terminal that has previously performed WLAN AP scanning, receiving the WLAN AP information from the second mobile terminal, and performing second WLAN scanning based on the WLAN AP information. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037445 | IDENTIFICATION-ASSISTED WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Systems and methods for transmitting location-specific information such as wireless network connectivity information are generally disclosed herein. One embodiment includes device configurations and techniques implemented to establish a secondary wireless network connection to exchange the location-specific information between a location-aware device and a location-unaware device. In other embodiments, the location-specific information exchanged via the secondary wireless network connection includes the transfer of the connectivity information, such as a Service Set Identifier (SSID) or network authentication information, from a primary network-aware device to establish a primary network connection at a primary network-unaware device. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037447 | Radio Communication Terminal That Selects Among Radio Communication Networks - A radio communication terminal | 02-04-2016 |
20160037458 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADAPTIVE CELL SIZE MANAGEMENT - The present disclosure discloses a method and system for adaptive cell size management. The system can determine a minimum SNR value and one or more current environmental factors for a particular environment. Also, the system dynamically determines a minimum signal strength value for receiving wireless signals based on the minimum SNR value and the one or more current environmental factors, and configures a network device to receive signals with the minimum signal strength value. Alternatively, the system can estimate a particular coverage area such that a first set of wireless signals transmitted by devices located within the particular coverage area reach a network device at a minimum signal strength. The system then computes a transmission power such that a second set of wireless signals transmitted by the network device at the transmission power reaches an edge of the particular coverage area at a particular signal strength value. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037489 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR COUPLING A BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATIONS - A wireless communication system comprising first and second transceivers. The first transceiver communicate with a base station, wherein the base station communicates with the first transceiver and a plurality of other wireless communication devices according to a wide area wireless communication protocol. The second transceiver is coupled to the first transceiver and communicates with a first mobile station, wherein the second transceiver communicates with the first mobile station according to a local area wireless communication protocol. The first transceiver receives from the base station a first downlink signal intended for the first mobile station and transmits the first downlink signal to the second transceiver. The second transceiver re-transmits the first downlink signal to the first mobile station as a second downlink signal according to the local area wireless communication protocol. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037553 | LOW LATENCY WLAN MEDIUM ACCESS - A method and apparatus for managing access to a wireless medium by one or more stations (STAs) in a wireless network. A device determines a first transmit opportunity for a first STA of the one or more STAs in the wireless network. The device enables the first STA to access the wireless medium for a duration of the first transmit opportunity by broadcasting a first grant message to the one or more STAs in the wireless network. The first grant message indicates allocation of the first transmit opportunity to the first STA. The device may selectively adjust the duration of the first transmit opportunity based at least in part on one or more properties of the wireless network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037557 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - Disclosed are method for transmitting and receiving frame in wireless local area network and apparatus for the same. A communication method performed in a first station, the communication method comprises receiving, through a channel from an access point, a first frame notifying a first period for transmission or reception of a frame; and processing the first frame, wherein a second period exists between the first frame and the first period, and wherein the second period is a contention period during which stations are allowed to contend for the channel. Therefore, performance of WLAN can be enhanced. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037571 | A METHOD AND A NETWORK STRUCTURE FOR PROVIDING DEVICE CONNECTIVITY TO A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method for providing device connectivity to a radio access network, wherein at least two devices are connectable or connected to the radio access network and wherein the at least two devices are members of a group of devices within a wireless local network, the members of the group of devices having the capability to establish a direct connection with other members of the group of devices, includes providing connection information used for a connection between a first device of the at least two devices and the radio access network to a second device of the at least two devices. The connection information enables the second device to connect to the radio access network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037581 | MOBILE WLAN GATEWAY - A technique for operating a mobile station as wireless local-area network [“WLAN”] gateway. The mobile station is provided with a gateway application to control the following operations: activating ( | 02-04-2016 |
20160043895 | TONING CONTROL METHOD OF WIFI DEVICE SETTING BY SMART DEVICE - The present invention provides a toning control method for setting a WiFi device by a smart device so that the WiFi device can link with Internet through a WiFi AP. The present invention is different from the prior art that a smart phone uses WiFi signal to set an IP camera, and is also different from the prior art that a smart phone generates QR Code for setting an IP camera. The present invention adopts methods of DTMF (Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency) or FSK (Frequency-Shift Keying) for toning encoding, and sends the toning encoding through a loudspeaker of the smart device to a toning decoder of the WiFi device for toning decoding, then performs the setting and linking of the WiFi device. | 02-11-2016 |
20160043942 | LAYER-3 MESH CONNECTIVITY OF WIRELESS LOCAL NETWORKS - A first wireless device of a wireless local network is operated in an un-associated data transfer mode at a layer-2 level. In the un-associated data transfer mode, communication between the first wireless device and a second wireless device in the wireless local network is allowed to take place without prior authentication and association between the two wireless devices. The first wireless device participates in formulation of routing information in routing nodes of a wireless mesh network while operating in the un-associated data transfer mode. If configured as an end device, the first wireless device thereafter exchanges data packets with another wireless device in the mesh. If configured as a router, the first wireless device routes packets to corresponding wireless devices in the mesh. Operation in the un-associated data transfer mode may result in reduction in power consumption of nodes in the mesh, as well as increased data throughput. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044465 | METHOD OF LIMITING USE OF A MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINT NEAR A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - To promote network security in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a mobile communication device, which is operable as a mobile wireless access point, may read a WLAN identifier that is known to be used by the WLAN and an indication of a channel on which a wireless access point of the WLAN is known to operate. The device may then monitor the channel for a transmission of the WLAN identifier. The mobile wireless access point may be configured to operate using the selected channel so that the monitoring occurs on the same channel as that on which the mobile wireless access point is operating. The transmission, if detected, may be considered to indicate that the mobile communication device is within the WLAN. Upon detecting the transmission, use of the WLAN identifier by the mobile wireless access point at the mobile communication device may be prevented, e.g. by requiring the mobile wireless access point to use a different WLAN identifier or by disabling the mobile wireless access point. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044570 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFECTIVE WIRELESS LAN SELECTION - A method for selecting an access network in a terminal of a mobile communication system according to one embodiment of the present specification comprises the steps of: if traffic is generated in the terminal, selecting an access network according to the characteristics of the generated traffic and network selection policy information; and transmitting and receiving the generated traffic via the selected access network. According to the embodiment, the present invention adjusts priorities of accesses given to users and applications in a wireless communication system including heterogenerous networks, thereby reducing processes for reselecting an access network of a user terminal, and reducing the cases of unnecessarily accessing a network having a low priority or requiring high costs for a long time. Therefore, the present invention can enhance user convenience and improve communication efficiency. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044587 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless terminal transmits a probe request message to a non-connected base station by changing the communication frequency from a first frequency to a second frequency used by the non-connected base station. The non-connected base station wirelessly sends a probe response message to the wireless terminal using the second frequency. The non-connected base station sends a probe redundant message to a connected base station by wire through a wired LAN. The connected base station wirelessly sends a probe redundant response message to the wireless terminal using the first frequency. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044623 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING BASE STATION - Provided are a method and apparatus for controlling a plurality of base stations disposed along the moving path of a moving group object, including determining a frame offset for the plurality of base stations based on a first delay time generated between the moving group object and the plurality of base stations and a second delay time generated between the plurality of base stations and the base station control device, and transferring data to be transmitted to the moving group object to the plurality of base stations based on the frame offset. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044660 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND SYSTEMS FOR RETRIEVING DATA FROM A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) ACCESS POINT - Methods, apparatuses, and systems are described related to retrieving data from a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP). In embodiments, an element manager may include an integration reference point (IRP) agent to receive data from the WLAN AP in the first format. Mapping circuitry of the element manager may convert the data from the first format to a second format to be used by an IRP manager that manages a Long Term Evolution Advance (LTE-A) network. The IRP agent may send the data to the IRP manager in the second format. The data may include, for example, performance monitoring data such as a value of one or more counters and/or a status of one or more alarms maintained by the WLAN AP. Accordingly, one or more components of the LTE-A network may monitor the performance of the WLAN AP. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044662 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING SIGNAL BY STATION IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for receiving a signal from an access point (AP) by a station (STA) in a wireless communication system, the method comprising the steps of: receiving a raw parameter set (RPS) element including a restricted access window (RAW) allocation field; and identifying, in the RAW allocation field, first information indicating whether the RAW allocation field relates to a periodic RAW and second information indicating whether the RAW allocation field relates to AP power management (PM), wherein the STA can acquire only information relating to a time interval of the RAW in subfields other than a subfield including the first information and the second information when the RAW relates to the AP PM. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044697 | Coexistence of Wireless Sensor Networks with Other Wireless Networks - A method for communicating in a wireless sensor network (WSN) is described. Using control logic, a first wireless transceiver is caused to transmit a wireless packet to a node in a wireless sensor network. The control logic bases its causing on a transmission coinciding with a break in transmission for a second wireless network, such that the transmission from the first wireless transceiver does not coincide with transmissions made on the second wireless network. Time synchronized channel hopping (TSCH) slot frames for wireless packet transmission in the wireless sensor network are caused to be time offset if the first wireless transceiver is utilizing TSCH. Wake up sequence transmissions for the wireless sensor network are caused to be time offset if the first wireless transceiver is utilizing coordinated sampled listening (CSL). | 02-11-2016 |
20160044711 | MULTI-BAND OPERATION FOR WIRELESS LAN SYSTEMS - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are provided to implement transmission scheduling. A multiband device may send a request via a first frequency band. The request may include a multiband Request to Send (MRTS) transmission. The request may be associated with a second frequency band and/or a beamforming training schedule. The first frequency band may be associated with a quasi-omni transmission and the second frequency band may be associated with a directional transmission. The first frequency band may be a 5 GHz band and the second frequency band may be a 60 GHz band. The multiband device may receive a multiband Clear to Send (MCTS) transmission via the first frequency band confirming the request. The multiband device may be configured to send a beamforming signal in accordance with the request, for example, via the second frequency band. The beamforming signal may be sent in accordance with a beamforming training schedule. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044731 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONNECTING SERVICE, ACCORDING TO USER INTENTION - A method and an apparatus for transmitting data on a wireless connection is provided. The method includes selecting a device to receive data; transmitting, to the device, a first signal including attribute information about the data, before an establishment of a wireless connection with the device is completed; receiving, from the device, a second signal indicating whether the transmission of the data is accepted by the device; and establishing the wireless connection with the device to transmit the data through the wireless connection, in response to reception of the second signal indicating the transmission of the data is accepted. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050107 | Over The Air Programming Via A Broadband Access Gateway - A system and method supporting over-the-air programming of access device such as, for example, a mobile multimedia handset and a wireless personal digital assistant (PDA) via a broadband access gateway, is disclosed. The broadband access gateway may receive identifying information from the access device via a personal area network and/or a wireless local area network, and may transfer the identifying information to a wide area network or a third party content provider, via a broadband network. The broadband access gateway may enable the registration of the access device with the wide area network, and may receive firmware/software updates and/or provisioning parameters via the broadband network. The gateway may then transfer the firmware/software update and/or provisioning parameters to the access device via the personal area network and/or wireless local area network. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050541 | Fine-Grained Indoor Location-Based Social Network - A system for providing a fine-grained indoor location-based social network (LBSN), the invention leverages the crowd-sensed data collected from a plurality of users' mobile devices during the check-in operation and knowledge extracted from current LBSNs to associate a place with its name and semantic fingerprint. This semantic fingerprint is used to obtain a more accurate list of nearby places as well as automatically detect new places with similar signatures. A novel algorithm for handling incorrect check-ins and inferring a semantically-enriched floorplan is proposed as well as an algorithm for enhancing the system performance based on the user implicit feedback. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050559 | Preventing Location Tracking Via Smartphone MAC Address - An approach is provided for a wireless mobile device that includes a processor, a wireless adapter, and a memory to connect to an access point using a generated random pseudo-MAC address that reduces address collisions with other devices. The approach generates a dynamic MAC address for the device. The dynamic MAC address includes a static portion that is based on a portion of an actual MAC address of the device and a dynamic portion that is based on a quasi-random value. The device wirelessly connects to an access point using the generated dynamic MAC address. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050634 | TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL FOR DEVICE IN HIGH EFFICIENCY WIRELESS LAN - The present invention relates to transmission power control for a device operating in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system, and a transmission and reception method and apparatus using the transmission power control. According to an aspect of the present invention, a method for transmitting an uplink frame to an Access Point (AP) by a Station (STA) in a WLAN system may include receiving first transmission power control information and second transmission power control information from the AP, if a type related to the uplink frame is a first type, determining a maximum transmission power based on the first transmission power control information, if the type related to the uplink frame is a second type, determining a maximum transmission power based on the second transmission power control information, and transmitting the uplink frame based on the determined maximum transmission power. The first type and the second type may correspond to different access schemes for uplink transmission. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050645 | Beacon Sharing Platform - Data is received that specifies at least one beacon associated with a first account and a first validity window specifying a time period during which the at least one beacon is to be associated with an additional account. Thereafter, a first entitlement is generated which, when registered by a second account, causes the at least one beacon to be associated with the second account until expiration of the first validity window. Prior to registration of the first entitlement and additionally outside the first validity window the at least one beacon is associated solely with the first account. After the registration of the first entitlement, the at least one beacon is caused to be associated with the second account during the first validity window. Other types of sharing parameters are also available such as sequencing, subsets of beacons, and the like. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050659 | RATE DETERMINATION IN HIGH EFFICIENCY WIRELESS LAN - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for determining a transmission rate in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). According to one aspect of the present invention, a method for receiving an uplink frame from a Station (STA) by an Access Point (AP) in a WLAN may be provided. The method may include transmitting to the STA a downlink frame eliciting the uplink frame, and receiving the uplink frame from the STA at a rate determined based on whether the type of the uplink frame is a single user type or a multi-user type. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050710 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT ALLOCATION AND TRANSFER - A network system includes a master wireless access point (mAP) connected to one or more slave access points (sAPs), the mAP configured to configure the wireless access password of the sAP(s) and including an open user interface wirelessly accessible by a wireless device, a security gateway and a secure user interface wirelessly accessible by the wireless device. The wireless device connects to the mAP via the open user interface and exchanges security credentials to bypass the security gateway to gain access to the secure user interface. The wireless device is connected to the secure user interface, the mAP is configured to: configure an SSID and/or wireless access password for a sAP and to share the SSID and/or wireless access password with the wireless device, whereupon, the wireless device disconnects from the mAP and re-connects to the network via the sAP using the wireless access password configured by the mAP. | 02-18-2016 |
20160056929 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS CHANNEL ASSESSMENT - A method is implemented by a network device to improve efficiency for clear channel assessment (CCA) by tracking a set of neighboring stations in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The method includes detecting, by the first network device, a wireless signal from a second network device on a wireless medium. A target network device of the wireless signal detects whether the target network device is a neighbor of the first network device. The wireless medium is determined to be busy in response to determining that the target network device is a neighbor of the first network device. | 02-25-2016 |
20160056943 | WIRELESS DEVICE, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING HIGH-EFFICIENCY SIGNAL FIELDS - Wireless devices, methods, and computer-readable media for transmitting and receiving high-efficiency signal fields. An access point (AP) may include circuitry configured to determine a high-efficiency signal (HE-SIG) field for each of a plurality of sub-channels, wherein each HE-SIG field includes a common part and a sub-channel specific part. The circuitry may be further configured to transmit, in accordance with orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA), on each of the plurality of sub-channels, a corresponding HE-SIG field as a preamble to a physical layer convergence protocol (PLCP) protocol data unit (PPDU), wherein the sub-channel specific part of the corresponding HE-SIG field includes a resource map field that enables a HEW device to determine which portion of the PPDU to demodulate, and wherein the common portion includes information of a format of the PPDU. A HEW device may include circuitry configured to demodulate a PPDU based on a HE-SIG field. | 02-25-2016 |
20160056968 | REMOTELY CONTROLLABLE ELECTRONIC DEVICE, NETWORK SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND REMOTE CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - An electronic device including: a processor configured to control the electronic device while the electronic device is turned-on and turn-off the electronic device in response to a turn-off command; a network interface card (NIC) configured to periodically exchange a keep awake message with an external server through a repeater while the processor is turned-off; and a power supply configured to supply power to the NIC while the electronic device is turned-off. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057608 | Method, Device and Terminal for Mobile Terminals to Exchange User Information - Disclosed are a method and a device for a mobile terminal to change user information, and a terminal, comprising that: a second mobile terminal obtains a wireless fidelity (wifi) hotspot shared name of a first mobile terminal by wifi searching; the second mobile terminal resolves the wifi hotspot shared name of the first mobile terminal to obtain the user information of the first mobile terminal, and the user information of the first mobile terminal is saved. In the embodiments of the present document, the operation of adding contact information is performed according to the wifi hotspot name by opening the wifi hotspot, which saves the step of the user inputting information, brings convenience to the user and saves the time. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057680 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INTERWORKING OPTIMIZATION IN CONNECTION WITH CELLULAR HANDOVER - One embodiment is directed to a method comprising receiving and storing a set of cellular network and unlicensed frequency network interworking parameters from a cellular source cell; offloading data traffic from the cellular source cell to an unlicensed frequency network based on the stored set of interworking parameters; receiving a handover command including a second set of cellular network and unlicensed frequency network interworking parameters; checking whether information regarding unlicensed frequency network has been received from a cellular target cell; and if the information regarding unlicensed frequency network has not been received, determining whether to use the second set of cellular network and unlicensed frequency network interworking parameters after the handover. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057696 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN FACILITATING ACCESS TO A COMMUNICATION SERVICE VIA A WLAN HOTSPOT - A mobile communication device identifies and selects a wireless local area network (WLAN) available for communications in its coverage area. Automatically, without detecting any requests made by a user via a browser application. The mobile device initiates a request (e.g. an HTTP GET request) to a predetermined server site of a communication network which is outside of the WLAN. In response to initiating the request, the mobile device receives a response message via the WLAN and identifies, from the response message, whether the request to the predetermined server site has been redirected to a redirect server site. The WLAN may be a WLAN “hotspot,” where the redirect server site is a login server. The identifying may be performed by comparing content from the response message to predetermined content of the predetermined server site. In response to identifying that the request has been redirected, the mobile device causes an indication to be produced at its user interface. Access to a communication service (such as a “push”-data service) may be subsequently expediently obtained. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057779 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method for accessing to a medium by a station (STA) in a wireless LAN system, the method comprising the steps of: receiving a predetermined frame including a time stamp; identifying a restricted access window (RAW) assignment field included in the predetermined frame; and performing access in a slot determined on the basis of a subfield of the RAW assignment field when the STA belongs to a RAW related to the RAW allocation field, wherein whether the STA belongs to the RAW is determined by whether an association identifier (AID) of the STA is included in a AID range and the RAW assignment field includes a subfield indicating whether the AID range is determined by a TIM bitmap. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057780 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING ACCESS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention, in a method for enabling a station (STA) to perform an access to a medium in a wireless communication system, is a method for performing an access, comprising the steps of: receiving a frame including an RPS element; checking a restricted access window (RAW) assignment field within the RPS element; and performing an access on the basis of a RAW start time when the STA corresponds to a RAW group related to the RAW assignment field, wherein the RAW start time is obtained on the basis of a start time indication sub field, and the start time indication sub field indicates whether the RAW start time sub field indicating the RAW start time is included in the RAW assignment field. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057796 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING PEER-TO-PEER DEVICES IN WI-FI COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for discovering a device for Peer-to-Peer (P2P) communication by a first device in a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) communication system. when receiving a discovery information request from a new device, the first device determines whether there is a second device that cannot be newly connected, among currently connected devices. If there is the second device, the first device generates a discovery information response based on the second device, and sends the discovery information response to the new device. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057809 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WIFI ACCESS POINT UTILIZING FULL SPECTRUM CAPTURE (FSC) - A WiFi access point (AP) includes a receive radio frequency (RF) front end and a baseband processor that controls operation of the receive RF front end. The RF front end captures signals over a wide spectrum that includes a plurality of WiFi frequency bands (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) and channelizes one or more WiFi channels from the captured signals. The baseband processor combines a plurality of blocks of WiFi channels to create one or more aggregated WiFi channels. The receive RF front end may be integrated on a first integrated circuit and the baseband processor may be integrated on a second integrated circuit. The first and second integrated circuits may be integrated on a single package. The RF front end and the baseband processor may be integrated on a single integrated circuit. The WiFi access point comprises a routing module that is communicatively coupled to the baseband processor. | 02-25-2016 |
20160065330 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING SHORT-TERM FAIRNESS AND EFFICIENCY IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A wireless communication device comprises a transceiver to communicate directly with one or more separate wireless devices in accordance with a WiFi communication protocol, and a controller. The controller is configured to initiate transmission of information using the transceiver upon expiration of a first contention window (CW) count value, detect whether the transmission is successful, change the CW count value to a second CW count value when the transmission is unsuccessful, and change the CW count value from the first CW count value to a third CW count value when the transmission is successful, wherein the third CW count value is a maximum value of one of the first CW count value divided by a specified binary number or a specified minimum CW count value. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065698 | CONTROLLING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE DEVICE AND A BASE STATION - An example of a telephone system and its operations include receiving, by a mobile device, a request for data via a first communication link with a cordless telephone base station. The request for data has a first communication format. The operations can further include communicating the request for data to a mobile network in a second communication format used for mobile network communications. The second communication format is different from the first communication format. The operations can further include receiving, by the mobile device, the data from the mobile network. The data has the second communication format. | 03-03-2016 |
20160065722 | Systems and Methods for Managing Operating Modes of an Electronic Device - Embodiments are provided for distinguishing certain transportation modes for an electronic device based on connection signal data. According to certain aspects, the electronic device may determine ( | 03-03-2016 |
20160066134 | Venue-Specific Wi-Fi Connectivity Notifications - A method includes receiving a wireless connection request at a backend computing device from a user device to allow wireless connection of the user device to a network through an access point located at a venue. The connection request includes a user identifier. The method includes validating the user identifier and granting wireless access of the user device to the access point when the user identifier is valid. The method further includes transmitting a venue-specific notification to the user device when the user device connects to the network. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066160 | Method And System For Global Navigation Satellite System Configuration Of Wireless Communication Applications - Methods and systems for global navigation satellite system configuration of wireless communication applications may comprise determining a location of a wireless communication device (WCD) comprising a satellite positioning RF path utilizing signals received by the RF path, establishing communications with a wireless access point based on the determined location, and configuring a wireless communication function of the wireless communication device based on the determined location, which may comprise a power level of WiFi circuitry in the WCD. The determined location and a transaction ID for a transaction may be stored utilizing a security processor. The RF path may be powered down based on the determined location. The wireless function may comprise a synchronization of data on the WCD with devices in a home location. The WCD may comprise a femtocell device or a set-top box, and may be controlled by a reduced instruction set computing (RISC) central processing unit (CPU). | 03-03-2016 |
20160066173 | Method and System for Discovering and Connecting Device for Streaming Connection with a Computerized Communication Device - The present invention provides a method for discovering and connecting available device for streaming connection with a computerized communication device. The method comprising the following steps: maintaining list of potential external device for streaming connectivity by tracking active connections, in accordance with at least one of the following: geographical location or common wireless local network connection, triggering discovery of external devices for streaming based on identified new geographical zone or identified new connection to wireless local network connection, discovering devices for streaming from the determined potential external devices according to triggering and connecting discovered available external devices for streaming | 03-03-2016 |
20160066198 | METHODS FOR WIFI SECTORIZATION MAC ENHANCEMENT - A method and apparatus may be used for WiFi sectorization medium access control enhancement (WiSE MAC). An IEEE 802.11 STA may receive an omni-directional indication of a first sectorized transmission opportunity (TXOP) associated with a second STA. The omni-directional indication may include an identifier (ID) of a first sector associated with the first sectorized TXOP. The STA may transmit a directional indication of a second sectorized TXOP a condition that a second sector associated with the second sectorized TXOP does not interfere with the first sector associated with the first sectorized TXOP. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066247 | Roaming for Wi-Fi/Wi-Fi Direct Devices - Methods and apparatuses for Wi-Fi network and Wi-Fi Direct operation are disclosed. In one example, audio data is exchanged between a wireless Wi-Fi/WFD device and a Wi-Fi/WFD base over a private network using a Wi-Fi Direct communications link. A Wi-Fi communications link between the wireless Wi-Fi/WFD device and a Wi-Fi Access Point is formed over a non-private network. Audio data is exchanged between the wireless Wi-Fi/WFD device and the Wi-Fi/WFD base over a non-private network using the Wi-Fi communications link. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066256 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND PROGRAM - A communication device includes a reception unit, first and second determination units, and a transmission unit. The reception unit receives a search request signal transmitted from another communication device. The first determination unit determines whether the communication device executes a specific protocol. The second determination unit determines whether information indicating the specific protocol is added to the received request signal. The transmission unit does not transmit a response to the received search request signal, when the communication device executes the specific protocol and the information is not added, or when the communication device does not execute the specific protocol and the information is added, and transmits the response when the communication device executes the specific protocol and the information is added or when the communication device does not execute the specific protocol and the information is not added, based on the determinations made by the first and second determination units. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066263 | Systems and Methods of Power Efficient Wi-Fi - In example embodiments disclosed herein, a primary wireless device infrequently sends a ping to a secondary device to determine if there are any communications from an access point intended for the primary wireless device. The secondary device, ideally connected to wall power, is wirelessly connected to the access point, acting as a connected proxy so that the primary wireless device, typically battery powered, does not always have to be connected. In a situation in which an incoming communication is intended for the primary device, the secondary device receives the notification and buffers whatever is sent from the access point intended for the primary wireless device and acknowledges the receipt. Then, when the primary wireless device pings the secondary device, the secondary device sends the buffered communication to the primary wireless device. As far as the access point is concerned, it thinks it is communicating directly with primary wireless device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066324 | Wireless Communication via Combined Channel Training and Physical Layer Header Signaling - Embodiments herein relate to wireless communication using combined channel training and physical layer header (SIG) signaling. Devices that comply with the 802.11 ax or High Efficiency WLAN (HEW) standard may generate and transmit packets that include such combined information. The combined information may be beamformed to a receiver device via an OFDM signal, which may be decoded by the receiver device to obtain subsequent data included in the signal. For example, initial training symbols associated with channel training subcarriers in the signal may be detected and used to perform a rough estimate of the channel. The rough estimate may thereafter be refined using data symbols detected from adjacent data subcarriers using the channel training symbols. In this way, data subcarriers may also be used to determine a channel response along with channel training subcarriers. Channel training information may be transmitted with data, such as user-specific information, in a single symbol. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066344 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATE - A terminal device includes circuitry configured to communicate wirelessly with an access point via a channel that has at a first signal strength and a first data rate. The circuitry is also configured to determine wireless transmission channel restrictions and obtain a position of the terminal device in order to determine if the wireless transmission channel restrictions apply to the terminal device based on the position of the terminal device. The circuitry is also configured to switch to a communications state that complies with the transmission channel restrictions and if the wireless transmission channel restrictions apply based on the position of the terminal device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066349 | METHOD FOR SENSING CHANNEL DYNAMICALLY IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communications system, and more particularly to a method for sensing a channel dynamically in a wireless LAN system and an apparatus therefor. A method for performing a back-off in a wireless LAN system according to an embodiment of the present invention includes the steps of performing CCA by applying clear channel assessment conditions in order to transmit a data unit with a different channel width, and performing a back-off based thereon. | 03-03-2016 |
20160073250 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DISCOVERY OF A WIRELESS DEVICE - An active process is monitored on the wireless device to obtain state information relating to the active process. Static information about the wireless device is determined. One or more discovery communications (e.g., advertisement) are generated for the wireless device using a wireless communication medium. The one or more discovery communications can include (i) a set of data items that are based on the static information, and (ii) dynamic information that is based on the state information of the active process. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073323 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes a connecting unit configured to execute connection processing with another communication apparatus, a receiving unit configured to receive a request signal for causing said another communication apparatus to acquire service information provided by the communication apparatus before the connection processing with said another communication apparatus is executed by the connecting unit, and a transmitting unit configured to transmit a response signal including the service information in a case where the request signal is received by the receiving unit. In the communication apparatus, the transmitting unit restricts transmission of the response signal according to a predetermined condition. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073429 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FRACTIONAL CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS WITH COLLISION AVOIDANCE (CSMA/CA) FOR WLANS - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are described to implement an interference management method in a WLAN. An access point (AP) or an inter-BSS coordinator (IBC) may identify a station (STA) associated with a first basic service set (BSS) as an edge STA or a non-edge STA. The AP or the IBC may group the edge STA into an edge group and a non-edge STA into a non-edge group. The AP or the IBC may receive information associated with a second BSS. The AP or the IBC may coordinate access of the edge group and/or the non-edge group. The access may be coordinated to minimize interference of the edge STA. The access may be based at least on the received information associated with the second BSS. The AP or the IBC may adjust transmit power of a plurality of STAs identified as edge group STAs and non-edge group STAs. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073433 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SLOT USAGE - Provided is slot use control apparatus and method, including an access point (AP) to control a slotted channel access of a station (STA) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) includes generating a synchronization (synch) frame including an identification value indicating an STA allocated to a slot, and broadcasting the generated synch frame when a channel is in an idle state at a start point of the slot. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080096 | TRANSCEIVER AND OPERATION METHOD THEREOF - A transceiver and a method operating the transceiver are provided. The transceiver includes a first communication module configured to receive a first signal based on a first communication scheme; a second communication module configured to receive a second signal based on a second communication scheme; a reception module having a low-power circuit configured to detect a signal in a frequency band which can be used by the first communication module and the second communication module; and a controller configured to establish channels for the first communication module or the second communication module based on a strength of the signal detected by the reception module. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080198 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK FIRMWARE UPGRADE SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless mesh access point receives a first notification of firmware download availability. In response to the first notification, the wireless mesh access point downloads a firmware file from a peer from which the first notification was received. The wireless mesh access point loads the downloaded firmware file into a firmware memory associated with operation of a processor. The wireless mesh access point then transmits a second notification of firmware download availability to one or more other peers. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080212 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MULTI-TENANT CONTROLLER BASED MAPPING OF DEVICE IDENTITY TO NETWORK LEVEL IDENTITY - A method includes executing at a controller a horizontally scalable service Identity Definitions Manager (IDM) Service, mapping active directory (AD) domains to WAN network elements DNS ROLE and LDAP ROLE, instructing a plurality of network elements associated with a tenant to discover a plurality of AD domains and AD servers in an enterprise using the DNS ROLE, receiving from the plurality of network elements running DNS ROLE information indicative of changes to network attributes selected from the group consisting of AD domains, additions and subtractions of AD servers and changes in an IP address of AD servers and transmitting the received AD domains and AD servers to a tenant administrator and requesting credentials to communicate with added AD servers using LDAP. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080227 | Wireless Communication Configuration Method, Wireless Communication System, and Recording Device - A recording device | 03-17-2016 |
20160080511 | Enabling Proximity Operations with Long-Range Wireless Communication Interfaces - Systems and methods for enabling proximity operations with long-range wireless communication interfaces are described. In an illustrative, non-limiting embodiment, a method may include transmitting a plurality of data packets using a WiFi interface of a first device, where each data packet has a signal strength following a predetermined pattern; and receiving an indication, via the WiFi interface, of whether the predetermined pattern has been identified by a second device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080924 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DIFFERENTIAL PEAK SIGNALING - A system and method of operating a device in a wireless communication network including a plurality of user equipment UEs and a BS, including a first device generating a signaling message defining resource elements (REs) as an encoded time slot (TS) and subcarrier pairing. A subset of the REs is encoded, such as to create a discovery signal configured to enable discovery of the first UE by a second UE or the BS. The UE is configured to engage in device-to-device communications, including device centric UEs operable in 5G networks. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080946 | COEXISTENCE SIGNALING - Methods and systems for enhanced 2-wire and 3-wire WLAN Bluetooth coexistence solution may include determining whether adaptive frequency hopping is active in a Bluetooth communication device. If the adaptive frequency hopping is active, handshaking with a collocated non-Bluetooth communication device may be disabled. The collocated non-Bluetooth communication device may be a wireless local area network communication device. If the adaptive frequency hopping is inactive, handshaking with the collocated non-Bluetooth communication device may be enabled. If the adaptive frequency hopping is inactive, the Bluetooth communication device may initiate handshaking prior to transmitting data. If the adaptive frequency hopping is inactive, the Bluetooth communication device may also respond to the handshaking initiated by the collocated non-Bluetooth communication device. The handshaking may be executed via a 2-wire Bluetooth/WLAN coexistence interface or a 3-wire Bluetooth/WLAN coexistence interface. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080958 | LOGGED MEASUREMENTS - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for reporting WLAN-related information. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include receiving, at a user equipment, a request from a cellular radio access network to obtain information about a wireless local area network, wherein the request comprises at least one of a logged measurement configuration, a measurement configuration, or a trace procedure; and reporting, in response to the request, at least one of a measurement representative of a wireless local area network access point, a load experienced by the wireless local area network access point, or a capacity experienced by the wireless local area network access point. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081003 | RELAY DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A relay device relays a signal between a first network and a second network. The relay device includes a first circuitry to wirelessly communicate with a wireless terminal over the first network and communicate with a first relay device over the second network. The relay device includes a second circuitry to detect a communication request transmitted by the wireless terminal. The relay device includes a third circuitry to decide whether relay of object information corresponding to the communication request is able to be completed with the wireless terminal while the wireless terminal stays within a wireless communication range of the relay device, and causes the first circuitry to transmit a request signal to request to relay a part or a whole of the object information to the first relay device instead of said relay device when a result of decision indicates that the relay is not able to be completed. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081013 | TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION SUPPORT - Techniques for wireless network discovery and selection support are described. In one embodiment, for example, an evolved packet core (EPC) node may comprise a processor circuit to implement an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) according to a management object that includes a branch comprising one or more policies to select a wireless local area network (WLAN), the processing circuitry to receive capabilities information and location information for a user equipment (UE) and determine access network information for the UE based on the capabilities information and the location information. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081041 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION POWER - A method for adjusting transmission power of a gateway device includes acquiring an access device identity, acquiring a predetermined wireless transmission power corresponding to the access device identity, and adjusting a current transmission power of the gateway device according to the predetermined wireless transmission power. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081057 | PAGING FOR LOCAL IP ACCESS PACKETS - Local IP access paging schemes facilitate paging of an access terminal when packets destined for the access terminal are received via local IP access. In some implementations, a local entity acquires information that enables local paging of the access terminal by sniffing messages passing through the local entity. In some implementations, a local entity sends a packet or message to cause the core network to page an access terminal when a local IP access packet destined for the access terminal arrives at the local entity. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081059 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING NETWORK BROADCAST INFORMATION TO WLAN ENABLED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - One illustrative method for a wireless device in a wireless local area network (WLAN) includes receiving a network interworking indicator at the wireless device, the network interworking indicator indicating support of a capability of the WLAN to communicate information relating to a wireless network. A request for network information identifying one or more networks is transmitted from the wireless device to the WLAN. The network information is received in response to the request for network information. The network information is provided in a container field of a generic container. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081132 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS DOCKING SERVICE - A method for performing a docking service using Wi-Fi by a wireless dockee (WD), includes transmitting a probe request including a docking information element (IE) | 03-17-2016 |
20160081139 | WIRELESS RADIO ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION - Methods and systems for configuring an access point (AP) are provided. According to one embodiment, a dual radio AP includes: two radios, a first operating at 2.4 GigaHertz (GHz) or 5 GHz and a second operating at 5 GHz; first and second directional antennas coupled to the first and second radios, respectively; first and second transmit queues buffering packets for transmission by the first and second radios, respectively; a location determination module configured to compute locations of recipient devices of the packets; a direction identification module configured to calculate angles to direct the directional antennas based on the computed locations; an interference detection module configured to determine whether interference would take place if the packets are transmitted based on the calculated angles and estimated timing of transmission; and a transmission module configured to transmit the packets without interference between the directional antennas by rescheduling packets if necessary. | 03-17-2016 |
20160087813 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND INTERFACE MODULE - An interface module according to one aspect of the invention includes an interface and a local communication device. The interface, which is connected to a field device, receives a first wireless signal from the field device. The local communication device wirelessly transmits the first signal to a wireless module by first local communications. The local communication device receives, from the wireless module by second local communications, a second signal destined for the field device that is wirelessly transmitted from an external device and wirelessly received by the wireless device. The interface device outputs the second signal to the field device. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087825 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EARLY DETECTION OF HIGH EFFICIENCY WIRELESS PACKETS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - An apparatus for wireless communication is provided. The apparatus includes a receiver configured to receive a packet including a first signal field and a second signal field, the first signal field including a single orthogonal frequency division (OFD) symbol including a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) field, a basic service set (BSS) identification, and a tail. The apparatus further includes a processor configured to determine a communication protocol of the packet based on the CRC field. | 03-24-2016 |
20160087827 | RANGE EXTENSION MODE FOR WIFI - A first plurality of OFDM symbols for a first field of a preamble to be included in a data unit that conforms to a first communication protocol are generated, wherein each OFDM symbol of the first plurality of OFDM symbols corresponds to a first long training sequence that is obtained at least by multiplying a predetermined sequence with a second long training sequence defined by a second communication protocol. A first plurality of modified constellation symbols are generated, including multiplying the first plurality of constellation symbols by the predetermined sequence. A second plurality of OFDM symbols are generated to include the first plurality of modified constellation symbols. The preamble is generated to include the first plurality of OFDM symbols for the first field and the second plurality of OFDM symbols for the second field, and the data unit to include at least the preamble. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088441 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK CHANNEL SCANNING - A mobile device capable of communication with wireless access points over wireless local area network (WLAN) channels, including prevailing channels corresponding to a region and non-prevailing channels corresponding to the region, includes: a scanning module configured to passively scan each channel of a subset of channels for a beacon signal; and a control module communicatively coupled to the scanning module and configured to control which channels the scanning module passively scans such that the subset of channels comprises multiple channels of the WLAN channels but less than all of the WLAN channels, and such that the subset of channels includes at least one of the prevailing channels. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088591 | METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING MESSAGE, DATA TRANSCEIVING APPARATUS, AND NON-TRANSITORY RECORDING MEDIUM - A method and apparatus for transceiving a message is provided. The method includes: listening for a probe request packet transmitted from another device through a predetermined channel; and, in response to receiving the probe request packet transmitted from the another device, transmitting a probe response packet, and at least one of the probe request packet and the probe response packet includes a user message. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088602 | UPLINK ACKNOWLEDGMENT RESPONSE TO DOWNLINK MULTIPLE USER TRANSMISSION - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for transmitting an Uplink (UL) ACKnowledgement (ACK) in response to a Downlink (DL) Multi-User (MU) transmission in a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). According to one aspect of the present invention, a method for transmitting an ACK in response to a DL data transmission from an Access Point (AP) by a Station (STA) in a WLAN may be provided. The method may include receiving, from the AP, a downlink frame including downlink data for the STA and downlink data for one or other STAs, and transmitting an ACK frame to the AP in response to the downlink data for the S_TA, simultaneously with transmission of ACK frames from the one or more other STAs. The ACK frames transmitted by the STA and the one or more other STAs may have the same length. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088654 | METHOD FOR ACCESS TO A MEDIUM BY A MULTI-CHANNEL DEVICE - A method of accessing a medium on a transmission system having at least two channels, in which a multi-channel device groups at least two channels for the purpose of increasing the bandwidth. The method enables multi-channel devices and single-channel devices to coexist by sending out a preamble and header on each individual channel before the channels are grouped, a single-channel device that may be scanning the channel thus detecting that the message that follows is not intended for itself. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088658 | NETWORK TRAFFIC PRIORITIZATION - Management of throughput, link rate, airtime, access, collision probability and other factors influencing performance of a wireless access point configured to wirelessly support two or more networks over the same radio channel and/or antenna is contemplated. The management may be suitable for use with access points operating according to a Distributed Coordination Function (DCF) based on Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance (CSMA/CA) whereby each device desiring airtime executes a random binary backoff procedure or other suitable contention based process before attempting to access the channel. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088667 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM AND DISPLAY DEVICE - A display device includes: a first wireless communication unit which performs wireless communication in a first format with an external device; a storage unit which stores connection information used in the wireless communication in the first format; a change unit which changes the connection information stored in the storage unit; and a display unit which displays an image received via the first wireless communication unit from the external device. A first information processing device includes: a wireless reader/writer which performs wireless communication in a second format in order to read information from or write information in a wireless tag; an acquisition unit which acquires the changed connection information; and a writing unit which outputs, to the wireless reader/writer, a signal for writing the connection information acquired by the acquisition unit into a first wireless tag. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088671 | Avoiding Idle-State Transition for WLAN-Connected Mobile Terminal - There is provided a method in a network node ( | 03-24-2016 |
20160094689 | Robust Decoding of Wireless LAN Response Packets - Embodiments described herein relate to a system and method for improving a rate of success in receiving response packets, such as 802.11 Acknowledge (ACK), Block Acknowledge (BACK), and Clear-To-Send (CTS) packets. In one embodiment, a wireless device may transmit one or more first packets according to a wireless communication protocol, and may then receive a second packet. The wireless device may determine that the receiving follows the transmitting by a specific duration of time that is specified by the wireless communication protocol for a response packet to follow one or more communication packets to which it responds. Based at least in part on this determining, the wireless device may further determine that the second packet is a response packet responding to the one or more first packets, without decoding a portion of the second packet that identifies a packet type of the second packet. | 03-31-2016 |
20160094958 | GROUP OWNER SELECTION WITHIN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A method of selecting one of a number of wireless devices to be a group owner of a peer-to-peer network includes determining, at a first wireless device, a first count value indicating how many other wireless devices are within wireless communication range of the first wireless device; determining, for a second wireless device, a second count value indicating how many other wireless devices are within wireless communication range of the second wireless device; and selecting either the first wireless device or the second wireless device as the group owner based, at least in part, on whether the first count value is greater or less than the second count value. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095046 | Method and Apparatus for Use in Network Selection - A method includes causing a user equipment to use one or more wireless local area networks based on cellular network information for a wireless cellular network indicating that a user equipment has restricted access to said wireless cellular network. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095071 | Triggering Client Device Probing Behavior for Location Applications - In one embodiment, a wireless access point that serves at least one client device in a wireless local area network transmits frames to the at least one client device so that the frames are received by the at least one client device with a receive signal strength so as to control the transmission of probe request messages by the at least one client device. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095079 | Removing Client Devices from Association with a Wireless Access Point - A wireless access point that serves one or more wireless client devices in a wireless network determines that at least one particular client device that is associated to the wireless access point should not be associated to the wireless access point. The wireless access point transmits frames so that they are received at the particular client device with reduced strength so as to provoke the particular client device to transition from the wireless access point. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095143 | REMOTE PROVISIONING OF WIRELESS STATIONS WITH CONFIRMATION - Aspects of the present disclosure are related to provisioning of wireless devices. In an embodiment, a wireless device (sought to be provisioned) receives values for provisioning parameters from an external user device, and attempts to join a wireless local network according to the received values for the provisioning parameters. The wireless device sends a response to the external user device indicating whether or not the joining was successful. The external user device may display the result indicating whether or not provisioning was successful. The wireless device may operate in a time division multiplexed manner as an access point (for securing the credentials) and as a station (once provisioning is complete). | 03-31-2016 |
20160095153 | MOBILE HOTSPOT MANAGED BY ACCESS CONTROLLER - Systems and methods are described for a mobile hotspot that can be managed by an access controller. According to an embodiment, a WAN connection is established by a mobile hotspot through a telecommunication data network via a wireless WAN module. When in a first mode, the mobile hotspot: (i) sets up a secure tunnel through the WAN connection with an AC of the enterprise that manages APs of a wireless network of an enterprise; (ii) broadcasts an SSID that is also broadcast by the APs; (iii) establishes a WLAN connection with a WiFi-enabled device based on an AP profile containing (a) authentication information regarding users approved to access the wireless network and (b) information identifying the SSID; (iv) receives WLAN traffic from the WiFi-enabled device through the WLAN connection; and (v) transmits the WLAN traffic to a server of the enterprise via the secure tunnel and the AC. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095160 | Proximity-Based Media System Disconnect - An example implementation involves a media playback system that includes one or more playback devices that are controllable by the mobile device while the mobile device is joined to the media playback system. The mobile device may join the media playback system over one or more communication paths via a cellular network from the mobile device to the media playback system. The example implementation may involve detecting that the mobile device is outside of a threshold proximity to the media playback system while the mobile device is joined to the media playback system. Based on detecting that the mobile device is outside of the threshold proximity to the media playback system, the mobile device may disconnect from the media playback system. | 03-31-2016 |
20160100281 | DEVICE, METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR COMMUNICATION ON A ZIGBEE NETWORK - In a zigbee network, reliable communications are provided by maintaining messages transmitted from a device in a message queue in the device. If no successful acknowledgement is received for a transmitted message, the message is re-transmitted when the message queue executes. Messages are deleted from the queue when the message is successfully transmitted or when a maximum number of re-tries has been exhausted. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100332 | SERVER-PUSH SERVICE IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - The disclosure is related identifying a push content frame at a transport layer and dynamically and selectively controlling a transmission path of a server push service by a server in a heterogeneous multipath transmission environment. The method may include determining whether frames are associated with the server push service when the frames are provided from an application layer to be transmitted to a user equipment, selecting at least one transmission path based on predetermined selection conditions from multiple transmission paths between the server and the user equipment, and transmitting, through the selected at least one transmission path, packetized frames associated with the server push service to the user equipment. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100399 | EMULATING VIRTUAL PORT CONTROL OF AIRTIME FAIRNESS USING PER STATION ENHANCED DISTRIBUTED CHANNEL ACCESS (EDCA) PARAMETERS - A technique for emulating virtual port control of airtime fairness for wireless stations using per station Enhanced Distributed Channel Access (EDCA) parameters. Specific parameters are received for each of a plurality of stations connected to the access point. An EDCA field of a beacon that stores a general EDCA parameter is set to an empty state. The beacon is broadcast to a plurality stations on the wireless communication network and within range of an access point. The beacon comprises a BSSID (Basic Service Set Identifier) for use by the plurality of stations to connect with the access point for access to the wireless communication network. The beacon also comprises an empty EDCA field. In response to broadcasting the empty EDCA parameter, receiving a direct inquiry from each of the plurality of stations for the general EDCA parameter. Each of the plurality of stations is responded to with a direct communication of a specific parameter corresponding to each station. A transmission is received from at least one of the stations complying with the specific parameter. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100416 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL SELECTION WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In some embodiments, a method includes calculating, at a wireless access point (WAP) from a set of WAPs within a network, an interference value for each channel from a set of channels of the WAP. The method includes calculating, based on the interference value for each channel, a total move weight of the WAP. The method includes receiving, at the WAP, a total move weight from each remaining WAP. The method includes selecting one WAP from the set of WAPs based on a random number, the total move weight of the WAP, the total move weights from the remaining WAPs, and a rank of the WAPs. The method further includes changing, if the WAP is selected, a designated channel of the WAP to one of the remaining channels; and sending a signal to modify an active channel of the WAP to correspond with the designated channel. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100443 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE D2D DATA TRANSMISSION - The present invention discloses a method, a device and a system for device to device D2D data transmission. The method includes: monitoring, by a first station in a sleep state, a beacon frame broadcast by an access point AP, setting up a direct link with a second station when it is determined that the beacon frame has a buffer information indication indicating that the second station needs to transmit data, and then receiving the data transmitted by the second station. The method and the device disclosed in the present invention aim to solve a problem of larger signaling overheads during setup of an existing D2D direct link. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100446 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN WIRELESS LAN - A method for transmitting/receiving, by a User Equipment, a signal in a mobile communication system includes: transmitting an authentication request message to a wireless LAN; receiving an authentication response message corresponding to the authentication request message from the wireless LAN; and transmitting, to a base station, a message for supporting a multi-connection mode based on the authentication response message. It is possible to generate an access connection or to provide a QoS setting when simultaneously accessing a 3GPP system and a non-3GPP system and transmitting/receiving data, so that a more improved method and device for transmitting and receiving data can be provided to a user. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105261 | System and Method for Space-Time Block Coded Communications - A method for wireless communications includes encoding a training sequence thereby producing an encoded training sequence, placing the encoded training sequence in a first part of a multi-part preamble, and transmitting the multi-part preamble using a first transmit antenna and a second transmit antenna. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105304 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZATION FOR OFDMA TRANSMISSION - In an example of wireless communications, an access point may send a downlink frame to multiple stations. The downlink frame may include information indicative of a cyclic prefix length to be utilized by the stations. In response, some or all of the stations may transmit their respective uplink frames to the access point. A cyclic prefix for a portion of each respective uplink frame may have a cyclic prefix length corresponding to the information included in the downlink frame. The downlink frame may be, for example, a beacon frame or a trigger frame. A trigger frame may allocate resources for uplink orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) transmission. Other methods, apparatus, and computer-readable media are also disclosed. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105780 | Location Identifiers in Mobile Messaging - A communication device may transmit messages to an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network through an untrusted non-3GPP radio access network (RAN). A process to be implemented on a communication device may include generating a message having a location identifier (ID) that is indicative of a current location of the communication device, and transmitting the message, through an untrusted non-3GPP RAN, to a node within the IMS network. A process to be implemented on one or more nodes of the IMS network may include receiving, from a communication device and via an untrusted non-3GPP RAN, a message having a location ID, and in response to receiving the message, estimating a current location of the communication device based at least in part on the location ID. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105796 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CAPABLE OF COMMUNICATING WITH EXTERNAL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes a first communication unit that communicates with an external apparatus using a first wireless communication, a second communication unit that communicates with the external apparatus using a second wireless communication, and a control unit, wherein in a case where the communication with the external apparatus is performed using the first wireless communication in response to an acceptance of an instruction, the control unit controls the first communication unit to communicate with the external apparatus with an identifier that is different for each connection, and wherein in a case where the communication with the external apparatus is performed using the first wireless communication in response to the communication with the external apparatus by the second communication unit, the control unit controls the first communication unit to communicate with the external apparatus with a predetermined identifier for each connection. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105829 | DIRECT LINK WIRELESS DEVICES WITH POWER SAVINGS - Various aspects of a communication device for supporting wireless communications for a plurality of stations associated with the communication device are provided. The communication device includes a processing system configured to determine whether each of the stations is capable of direct communications with another one of the stations while remaining associated with the communication device. The processing system may also maintain a list of the stations determined to be capable of such direct communications. In an aspect, the communication device may also include a transceiver configured to provide the list to a station of the plurality of stations in response to a request from the station. In an aspect, the request from the station may be included in an association request frame or an association response frame. In an aspect, the processing system may be configured to update the list and provide to the station the updated list in a beacon frame. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105842 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND PROGRAM - Even when a plurality of communication parameter providing devices exist, a communication parameter setting process is enabled. When a plurality of communication parameter providing devices exist, one of the communication parameter providing devices is determined. For example, all the communication parameter providing devices are caused to stop the providing process. Alternatively, a user is allowed to select a communication parameter providing device. Alternatively, a communication parameter providing device is determined in accordance with a predetermined rule. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105846 | DETERMINING A PREFERRED WIFI HOTSPOT - A method of determining preferred WIFI hotspots. The method includes the steps of: detecting, by a computer processor, an attempt to connect to a first WIFI hotspot by a wireless device in a first area; and in response to detecting the attempt to connect to the first WIFI hotspot: identifying, by the computer processor, at least one bandwidth requirement of the wireless device; determining, by the computer processor, preferences based on contextual information corresponding to the wireless device and its user; collecting, by the computer processor, a plurality of WIFI hotspots available in the first area and identify prices and network bandwidth offered by each of the plurality of WIFI hotspots; and recommending, by the computer processor, preferred WIFI hotspots in the first area based on the identified bandwidth requirements, the determined preferences, and the process and network bandwidth offered by each of the plurality of WIFI hotspots. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105876 | COMMUNICATIONS ENABLED APPARATUS WITH A MULTI-MAC MANAGER AND A METHOD OF OPERATING THEREOF - The present application relates to a networking device with multi-MAC manager and a method of operating thereof. The multi-MAC manager receiving a request issued in the context of a medium access control, MAC, instance, determines the MAC, instance, to which the request relates and determines whether the PHY part is available for allocation or already allocated to the MAC instance. If the PHY is available, at least the PHY part of the communications interface is allocated to the MAC instance and the received request is passed to the PHY part for further processing thereat. At least the allocated PHY part is released once a service requested by the received request is completed. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105900 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA ON WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK, USER EQUIPMENT, AND ACCESS POINT - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting data on a wireless local area network (WLAN), user equipment (UE), and an access point (AP). The method includes: receiving first indication information sent by an AP, where the first indication information is used to indicate that UE can preferentially send data to the AP when the UE obtains a transmission resource through contention; determining, according to the first indication information, a first moment for sending current data to the AP, where an interval between a second moment at which the UE receives a first feedback message sent by the AP and the first moment is a first sending interval, the first feedback message is used to indicate whether a previous piece of data is successfully received, and the first sending interval is less than a distributed interframe space (DIFS); and sending the current data to the AP at the first moment. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112071 | MULTIBAND WIRELESS DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN AIRCRAFT AND GROUND SYSTEMS BASED ON AVAILABILITY OF THE GROUND SYSTEMS - Provided are methods and systems for multiband wireless data transmission between aircraft and ground systems. The transmission uses different wavelength ranges, each wavelength range corresponding to a different data domain and establishing a different communication channel. This wavelength differentiation provides physical separation between different data domains and, as a result, improves data security. Furthermore, a single broadband antenna is used on the exterior of the aircraft for transmitting data sets from different data domains. The single antenna configuration reduces drag and weight and improves structural integrity of the aircraft in comparison to multi-antenna configurations. Different aircraft communication modules, which are connected to different aircraft systems, handle different data domains and operate at different wavelength ranges. These modules are connected to the same antenna using a multiplexer. This connection may be controlled using gate devices and may be conditioned on verification of communication channel availability, security status, and other factors. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112166 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ENHANCING WIFI REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods of enhanced real-time communications between WiFi devices. In one embodiment of the present invention a method for enhanced payload protection in a WiFi system includes transmitting multiple copies of data packets in successive frame body transmissions. In another embodiment, a method for enhanced communications over a WiFi link includes examining a unit ID packet to determine a destination of a data payload when errors are detected in IP and/or MAC headers. If a destination is determined, the packet is corrected and forwarded to the device based on the unit ID determination. In another embodiment, a method for enhanced real-time communications in a WiFi network includes establishing a communications frame that includes an active timeslot, preferably based on U-APSD, for a WiFi device to use for transmission of successive audio data packets transmitted between the WiFi handset and AP. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112239 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR PROVIDING APPLICATION SERVICES TO USERS IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A gateway network element includes a memory and at least one processor. The memory is configured to store a program routine or module. The at least one processor is configured, by executing the program routine or module, to: map a first multi-path transport control protocol (MPTCP) flow to a first evolved packet system (EPS) bearer associated with a first serving base station for the user; map a second MPTCP flow to a second EPS bearer associated with a WiFi access point for the user, each of the first and second MPTCP flows corresponding to a same MPTCP connection for an application; output the first MPTCP flow on the first EPS bearer for delivery to the user through the first serving base station; and output the second MPTCP flow on the second EPS bearer for delivery to the user through the WiFi access point. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112851 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR EXTENDING RANGE OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - Example systems, methods, and devices for extending range of WiFi networks are discussed. More specifically, methods for extending range of a Wi-Fi network are disclosed. The method may include the operations of appending, by a network device, one or more codebits to one or more original codebits or coded symbols, sending, by the network device, the original codebits or coded symbols and the appended codebits to an interleaver or a constellation mapper for transmission. The original codebits or coded symbols and the appended codebits may be sent over a plurality of subcarriers. Methods, apparatus, and systems described herein can be applied to 802.11ax or any other wireless standard. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112859 | Information Query Method, Device, and System - An information query method, including sending, by a first device, a data-excluded information query request frame, where the data-excluded information query request frame includes first control information and a first hash value; receiving, by the first device, a data-excluded information query response frame sent by a second device. The data-excluded information query response frame includes second control information, a second hash value, and an address of the second device. The method also includes sending, by the first device, a data-contained information query request frame to the second device when the first device determines that a third hash value is consistent with the second hash value, so that the second device responds to the data-contained information query request frame when receiving the data-contained information query request frame. Correspondingly, the present disclosure further provides a related device. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112899 | HIGH-EFFICIENCY STATION (STA) AND METHOD FOR DECODING AN HE-PPDU - Embodiments of a system and methods for distinguishing high-efficiency Wi-Fi (HEW) packets from legacy packets are generally described herein. In some embodiments, an access point may select a value for the length field of a legacy signal field (L-SIG) that is non-divisible by three for communicating with HEW stations and may select a value for the length field that is divisible by three for communicating with legacy stations. In some embodiments, the access point may select a phase rotation for application to the BPSK modulation of at least one of the first and second symbols of a subsequent signal field to distinguish a high-throughput (HT) PPDU, a very-high throughput (VHT) PPDU and an HEW PPDU. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112935 | REDUCING A CONNECTION TIME FOR SAVED-PROFILE ACCESS POINTS - A method of operating a user station (STA) to scan for access points (APs). The STA broadcasts a probe request on a first saved channel of one or more saved channels. More specifically, each of the one or more saved channels corresponds to a channel on which the STA had prior communications with an AP. The STA remains on the first saved channel for an extended duration to listen for a probe response from a first AP. Specifically, the extended duration is greater than a dwell time of the STA when scanning wireless channels other than the one or more saved channels. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112944 | ACCESS POINT SELECTION BASED ON ASSOCIATION PERFORMANCE - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication at a wireless device, and for selecting or coordinating with an access point (AP) based on association performance of access points. A wireless device under the coverage of more than one AP can associate with one or more APs to establish communication with a network. A wireless device may estimate a delay due to authentication with an AP, and the wireless device may communicate with another AP while waiting to be authenticated. In some examples, a wireless device may associate with an AP despite sub-optimal access metrics; this may involve certain permissions from the AP. In other examples, an AP may manage pre-association devices, post-association devices, or both, based on certain priorities. A mobile device may request and/or receive information regarding association delays and/or channel load metrics from one or several APs and may select an AP accordingly. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112945 | Small Cell eNodeB Access System and Method for Realizing Network Access Therefor - Disclosed are a small cell eNodeB access system and a method for realizing network access therefor, including: setting up a control plane link and a user plane link respectively, the small cell eNodeB access system processing control plane data of access UE through the set up control plane link, and processing user plane data of an access UE via the set up user plane link. In the embodiment of the present invention, it makes the UE have data transmission and reception with two different eNodeBs such as macro cell (eNodeB) and small cell (eNodeB) simultaneously by separating the control plane with the data plane, so as to increase the user throughput and enhance the mobility performance, and to solve the problem that the user switches between the cells so that information exchanges frequently between nodes and so as to cause an impact on the core network. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113006 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - In some embodiments, an apparatus comprises of a first Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points (CAPWAP) module implemented in at least one of a memory or a processing device that is configured to be designated as a backup control module for a wireless access point during a first time period. The first CAPWAP control module is configured to receive state information associated with the wireless access point during the first time period from a second CAPWAP control module. The second CAPWAP control module is designated as a primary control module for the wireless access point during the first time period. The first CAPWAP control module is configured to be automatically designated as the primary control module during a second time period after the first time period and in response to the second CAPWAP control module not operating according to at least one predefined criterion. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113043 | Vehicle Gateway Module Configured to Provide Wireless Hotspot - A vehicle gateway module is configured to communicate over vehicle networks connected to the gateway module with vehicle devices connected to the vehicle networks. The gateway module has a cellular data link which provides a direct connection from the gateway module to the Internet and a wireless data link which provides a direct connection from the gateway module to an area within the vehicle whereby the cellular data link in conjunction with the wireless data link establish an Internet hotspot for a mobile device within the vehicle. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113045 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR PERFORMING A COMMUNICATION CONNECTION AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - An electronic device is provided that includes a communication module; a memory configured to store communication connection information for communication connection with an external electronic device; and a processor configured to, upon a communication connection request with the external electronic device, perform communication connection with the external electronic device using pre-stored communication connection information, if the pre-stored communication connection information exists. | 04-21-2016 |
20160113060 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING DEVICE INFORMATION FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - When receiving a detachment notification message informing of detachment of a first D2D device, a D2D server in a device-to-device (D2D) communication system performs a D2D communication release procedure of an opponent D2D device which is communicating with the first D2D device, and deletes information for the D2D communication of the opponent D2D device. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119072 | INTER-RAT INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for eliminating interference from a convoluted signal comprising several signals of different radio access technologies (RATs), such as a Long Term Evolution (LTE) signal and wireless local area network (WLAN) signal, in an unlicensed or shared radio frequency spectrum band are described. In accordance with the present disclosure, a dual-radio mobile device may utilize a multiple radios to assist in the operation of interference cancellation. Specifically, in some examples, a first radio (e.g., WLAN radio) may process the received convoluted signal to reconstruct a first signal (e.g., WLAN signal). The reconstructed first signal may be utilized by a second radio (e.g., LTE radio) to identify a second signal (e.g., LTE signal) in the received convoluted signal by cancelling or removing the reconstructed first signal from the convoluted signal. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119088 | SNOOP VIRTUAL RECEIVER TIME - A snoop receiver, method and computer program product for increasing the efficiency of TCP protocol operations at the snoop receiver by assuming there is no reordering over the wireless hop. The method performs maintaining a copy of each packet received, the copy adapted for retransmission to the receiver device on behalf of the source device and maintaining for each packet received, a virtual send time (VST) value of that packet. The VST corresponds to a virtual time the packet was sent or retransmitted to the receiver device. There is further maintained an estimate of the receiver device's time (VRT) based on acknowledgement (ACK) messages for packets received from the receiver device. Responsive to receiving an acknowledgement for a packet sent at the time VST, the method infers any lost packets and retransmits a copy of any lost packets having a VST value sent before the receiver's VRT estimate. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119171 | System and Method for Wireless Communication Using Space-Time Block Code Encoding - An embodiment provides a method for wireless communications including an access point (AP) space-time block code (STBC) encoding a high efficiency wireless local area network (WLAN) (HEW) signal A (SIGA) fields, and transmitting a preamble comprising a duplicate stream portion including a repeated legacy long training field, and comprising a two-stream portion including the STBC-encoded HEW SIGA fields. In further embodiments, the method includes the duplicate stream portion including a pair of SIG-LTFs (or alternatively a compressed SIG-LTF) which is used for channel estimation and auto-detection. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119452 | PPDU format preamble design - In an example of wireless communications, an access point may generate a frame and provide the frame for transmission to one or more stations. The frame may include a first signal field, a second signal field, and a data field. The first signal field may have a duration of 4 μs and may include a first signal portion and a first guard interval. The second signal field may have a duration of 4 μs and may include a second signal portion and a second guard interval. The data field may include at least one data symbol that has a symbol duration of 12.8 μs, excluding any guard interval duration. A station may detect the frame and process the frame. Other methods, apparatus, and computer-readable media are also disclosed. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119453 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR GUARD INTERVAL INDICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method of wirelessly communicating a packet includes generating, at a wireless device, a first packet. The first packet includes a first preamble decodable by a plurality of devices and a second preamble decodable by only a subset of the plurality of devices. The first preamble includes a first signal field, and the second preamble includes a second signal field. The method further includes setting a length indication of the first signal field to carry non-length signal information. The method further includes transmitting the first packet. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119579 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus includes an acquisition unit that acquires, from another communication apparatus, information of a first service that the another communication apparatus can provide, a storage unit that stores state information indicating whether the communication apparatus is capable of providing the second service, a communication control unit that establishes a connection for data communication between the communication apparatus and the another communication apparatus for carrying out the first service or the second service, and a setting unit that sets the state information stored by the storage unit so that the state information indicates that the communication apparatus is incapable of providing the second service in response to issuance of an instruction to carry out the first service. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119861 | NETWORK SELECTION METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and provide a network selection method, apparatus, and system. The method includes: after user equipment UE connects to a cellular access network, acquiring, by an access node of the cellular access network, wireless local area network (WLAN) selection information, where the WLAN selection information includes priority information, and the priority information is used to indicate that connection of the UE to a WLAN has priority over connection of the UE to the cellular access network; selecting, by the access node of the cellular access network, a WLAN for the UE according to the priority information, where a connection priority of the selected WLAN is higher than a connection priority of the cellular access network; and instructing, by the access node of the cellular access network, the UE to connect to the selected WLAN network. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119924 | MITIGATION OF PERIODIC INTERFERENCE IN A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A wireless access point device that schedules packet transmission and reception by a set of devices in a wireless local area network is operated. The set of devices includes the access point device and one or more other devices. Operation involves detecting the presence of periodic transmissions on a first carrier frequency from a first transmitter not operating in the wireless local area network, wherein one or more future occurrences of the periodic transmissions will interfere with reception of a packet by a first device of the set of devices. Packet transmission and reception are scheduled within the wireless local area network such that the first device performs packet transmission and no reception during the one or more future occurrences of the detected periodic transmissions. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119953 | CONTENTION RESOLUTION TECHNIQUES IN FREQUENCY AND SPATIAL DOMAINS - Methods, systems, apparatuses, and devices are described for contention resolution techniques for medium access using a spatial dimension, a frequency dimension, or a combination of the both. A wireless station may determine that an access timer associated with backoff operations has expired. The wireless station may identify a domain index associated with the frequency domain, the spatial domain, or a combination. The wireless station may access the wireless medium according to the identified domain index. The wireless station may, prior to sending other transmissions, transmit a trigger frame including information associated with the resources of the wireless medium that are reserved for communications. Other wireless stations may share the medium and use the free resources. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119960 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING AN APPLIANCE TO A HOME WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods, devices and systems are provided that enable connection of an appliance to a home wireless network. A programmable device, such as a smartphone, is programmed to produce vibrations based on the SSID and password word of a home wireless system. A vibration sensor associated with the appliance produces a signal based on the vibrations when the programmable device is activated and placed in contact with the appliance. A controller within the appliance decodes the vibration signals and uses the decoded information to program a wireless radio associated with the appliance to enable connection to the wireless network. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119973 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING SSID IN WLAN - This disclosure provides a method for providing a service set identifier (SSID) in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The method includes encoding the SSID with a character encoding for each of one or more default system platforms, to generate one or more SSID codes suitable for the system platforms, and broadcasting the generated SSID codes suitable for the system platforms in the WLAN. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119975 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERWORKING WIRELESS LAN ACCORDING TO CAMPING CELL - A communication method and system for converging a 5G communication system for supporting higher data rates beyond a 4G system with a technology for Internet of Things (IoT). The present disclosure may be applied to intelligent services based on the 5G communication technology and the IoT-related technology, such as smart home, smart building, smart city, smart car, health care, digital education, smart retail, security and safety services. If a terminal in an idle state camps in a suitable cell, the terminal performs interworking between a mobile communication network and a wireless LAN by applying a network interworking parameter received from a base station. If the terminal is in a state of not camping in the suitable cell due to a temporal movement to be out of an area of the base station, the terminal does not use a function of interworking between the mobile communication network and the wireless LAN. | 04-28-2016 |
20160127146 | Communicating During Data Extraction Operations - Communicating during data extraction operations includes establishing a first connection between a job scheduler and an extraction device with the extraction device, sending information about a sensor to the job scheduler in response to a formation of a second connection between the extraction device and the sensor, and extracting data from the sensor in response to receiving a command from a data harvester in communication with the job scheduler. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127228 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CHANNEL BANDWIDTH - A first communication device transmits one or more first communication frames during a transmit opportunity period (TXOP) of the first communication device via a first composite channel. A control frame is generated, wherein the control frame includes information indicating a bandwidth of the first composite channel. After the one or more first communication frames have been transmitted, the first communication device transmits, during the TXOP, the control frame via the first composite channel. Information from a response frame that indicates a bandwidth of a second composite communication channel is extracted, the response frame having been transmitted by a second communication device and received by the first communication device during the TXOP. The first communication device transmits one or more second communication frames during the TXOP, wherein the one or more communication frames span the second composite communication channel and do not span the entire first composite communication channel. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127520 | PARTITIONING DATA SETS FOR TRANSMISSION ON MULTIPLE PHYSICAL LINKS - The present disclosure discloses a method and a network device for partitioning data sets for transmission on multiple physical links in a network. Specifically, a network device receives a particular data set addressed to a client device. The network device partitions the particular data set into at least a first subset of data and a second subset of data. Then, the network device encapsulates the first subset of data using a first header and encapsulating the second subset of data using a second header that results in (a) data with the first header being transmitted on a first physical link and (b) data with the second header being transmitted on a second physical link different than the first physical link. Finally, the network device transmits the first subset of data with the first header and the second subset of data with the second header. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127890 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF PROTECTING A SERVICE IDENTIFIER - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of securing a service Identifier (ID). For example, a wireless device may include a Secure Service Identifier (SSID) processor to determine a SSID corresponding to a service, the SSID including an encrypted value being based on a service name key from a service provider of the service and a service name corresponding to the service; and a radio to transmit a wireless message including the SSID. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127905 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENABLING COMMUNICATION WITH A RECEIVER DEVICE IN A NETWORK - This application discloses a data transfer method for transferring information concerning a service set associated with a communication network. An electronic device obtains a plurality of data packets that comply with a specific data format corresponding to a network access protocol, and each data packet includes a respective header that further includes at least one data field. A service set identifier (SSID) data set is arranged in the at least one data field of the plurality of data packets according to a link layer data structure. The SSID data set at least includes a SSID and a SSID password, and identifies a wireless network that transmits the plurality of data packets and is accessible when the SSID password is verified. The data packets that include the SSID data set are encrypted, and to a receiver device that is communicatively coupled to the electronic device via the identified wireless network. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127948 | HIGH-EFFICIENCY (HE) STATION AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURATING HE PACKETS WITH LONG AND SHORT PREAMBLE FORMATS - Apparatuses, methods, and computer readable media are disclosed. A HE station may include circuity. The circuitry may be configured to: generate a HE packet with a short preamble format or a long preamble format, wherein the HE packet comprises one or more legacy signal (L-SIG) fields followed by one or more HE signal fields (HE-SIG) and an HE long-training field (HE-LTF); and configure the HE packet to indicate whether the HE packet is configured with the short preamble format or the long preamble format. The HE packet may be configured with the short preamble format or the long preamble format based on one from the following group: a symbol after the L-SIG fields, a L-SIG polarity of a repeated L-SIG, a number of times the L-SIG fields is repeated, or a length field of one of the one or more L-SIG fields. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127981 | TRANSACTION SENSITIVE ACCESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION - Transaction sensitive access network discovery and selection function (TSANDSF) features are disclosed. TSANDSF features can include access network resource (ANR) selection based on vendor ANR information and UE information. TSANDSF features can further include facilitating access, via a UE, to vendor value added products or service, vendor selected information, or vendor advertisements as a result of establishing a communication link with a vendor ANR. In contrast to conventional ANDSF, TSANDSF can facilitate improved ANR ranking and selection based on rules that correlate UE information with determined vendor ANR features. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127988 | Method for Selecting Available Access Network and User Equipment - Disclosed are a method for selecting an available access network and a user equipment, wherein the method includes: when monitoring that a state of a wireless local area network access network consistently meets a predetermined threshold for a predetermined time period and/or a predetermined number of times, or monitoring that the state of the wireless local area network access network within the predetermined time period or for the predetermined number of times meets the predetermined threshold after filtering processing, a user equipment determining the wireless local area network access network as an available access network. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128015 | Wireless Local Area Network Hotspot Registration Using Near Field Communications - A first device that includes a processor configured to transmit/receive a trigger message to/from a second device based on wireless short-range communication. The trigger message initiates a registration process within a wireless local area network (WLAN). | 05-05-2016 |
20160128106 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL - A communication method and a terminal are provided. The terminal may be equipped with circuitry that supports connecting to a wireless router using two or more frequency bands. The router may provide multiple networks using respective frequency bands. The terminal may be connected to the router a first frequency band. The method and terminal may facilitate establishment of a direct communication between the terminal and another terminal that is connected to the router using a network of a second frequency band. The another terminal may be equipped with a circuitry that only supports the second frequency band. The method and terminal describe determining a network that a target communication device is connected to, and connecting the terminal to that network. The terminal may then communicate with the target communication device through the network. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134434 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR COMMUNICATING OVER A BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM NETWORK - A method of communication between devices of a building management system ( | 05-12-2016 |
20160134691 | Content delivery to physically-proximate devices using a mesh-assisted cache - A plurality of WiFi-enabled devices that are physically proximate to one another form an ad hoc mesh network, which is associated with an overlay network, such as a content delivery network. A typical WiFi device is a WiFi router that comprises addressable data storage, together with control software operative to configure the device seamlessly into the WiFi mesh network formed by the device and one or more physically-proximate devices. The addressable data storage across multiple such devices comprises a distributed or “mesh-assisted” cache that is managed by the overly network. The WiFi mesh network thus provides bandwidth that is leveraged by the overlay network to provide distribution of content, e.g., content that has been off-loaded for delivery (by content providers) to the CDN. Other devices that may be leveraged include set-top boxes and IPTV devices. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134709 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR A NODE TO ADVERTISE ITS PRESENCE AND SERVICE PROFILES THEREOF IN A WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT - In an example embodiment, a method to enhance wireless device advertising of service profiles includes maintaining, by an apparatus, a first service profile corresponding to a first wireless communication device address of the apparatus and a second service profile corresponding to a second wireless communication device address of the apparatus; determining, by the apparatus, a preference to communicate with wireless devices using the first service profile; transmitting, by the apparatus, wireless device discovery messages having the first wireless communication device address; and receiving, by the apparatus, a wireless response message from another wireless device, in response to the existence of the first device address in the transmitted device discovery messages, wherein the other device seeks the first service profile. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134710 | COMMUNICATION METHOD IN WIRELESS LOCAL ACCESS NETWORK AND WIRELESS APPARATUS THEREFOR - A communication method in a wireless local access network (WLAN) and a wireless apparatus therefor. According to the communication method, a station (STA) receives frames each of which contains upper layer service discovery protocol information from one or more access points (APs). The STA transmits an association request frame to an AP which is selected based on upper layer service discovery protocol information received from the APs. Then, the STA proceeds with an association process with the selected AP. The upper layer service discovery protocol information may be represented in a bitmap scheme whereby each of service discovery protocols contained in the upper layer service discovery protocol information is indicated as to whether it is supported by the AP; an enumeration scheme whereby identifier of each of supported service discovery protocols is included in the upper layer service discovery protocol information; or a hybrid scheme. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135034 | Identifying an Entity Associated with Wireless Network Access Point - Systems and methods for identifying an entity associated with a wireless network access point are provided. An estimated location of a wireless network access point and a network name associated with a wireless network access point can be accessed. The network name can be analyzed to identify at least one text signal. An entity associated with the wireless network access point can be identified based at least in part on the text signal. For instance, a confidence score for a plurality of candidate entities identified using the estimated location of the wireless network access point can be determined based on the text signal. The confidence score can be used to identify the entity associated with the wireless network access point. Information associated with the entity can be presented in a graphical user interface. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135038 | IN-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An in-vehicle communication system includes a gateway that relays communication between an external apparatus and an in-vehicle LAN; and a communication permission determination unit that inhibits communication between the external apparatus and the in-vehicle LAN through the gateway if it is determined that a vehicle having the in-vehicle LAN mounted therein is in a parking state based on acquired predetermined vehicle information. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135052 | Rogue AP Detection - Methods, systems and computer readable media for rogue access point detection are disclosed. In some implementations, the method can include initiating, at one or more processors of a wireless controller, a rogue access point detection process for a wireless network, and transmitting, from the one or more processors, a signature frame to a mobility agent in a wireless switch. The method can also include receiving, at an authorized access point, the signature frame transmitted via a wireless signal from a rogue access point. The method can further include reporting reception of the signature frame to the wireless controller, and generating, at the one or more processors, a signal to shut down a port associated with the rogue access point. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135108 | AP-LOCAL DYNAMIC SWITCHING - A technique for implementing AP-local dynamic switching involves Layer 2 switching. This may be accomplished by providing data associated with wireless stations to an AP sufficient to enable the AP to determine whether traffic from a particular wireless station should be locally switched. Alternatively, the wireless station may be able to determine whether to locally switch traffic based upon the traffic itself. For example, it may be desirable to AP-locally switch voice traffic to avoid latency, which is particularly detrimental to voice transmissions such as voice-over-IP. Traffic that is not to be switched locally is Layer 2 tunneled upstream. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135115 | NEIGHBORHOOD LEARNING USING NEIGHBOR AWARENESS NETWORKING - A method for communicating Neighborhood Information includes generating the Neighborhood Information at an access point. The method also includes communicating the Neighborhood Information from the access point to a second access point in a Neighbor Aware Network (NAN). | 05-12-2016 |
20160135118 | OBTAINING INFORMATION FROM A NETWORK SOURCE WITH LIMITED ACCESS - A mobile communications device is configured to detect one or more radio signals emitted by local Wi-Fi routers and the unique identifier associated with each Wi-Fi router. The mobile communications device searches for the unique identifier in a database of registered Wi-Fi routers. If the unique identifier is found in the database, then content including a resource locator is retrieved and displayed. When the resource locator is selected, the mobile communications device is redirected to the resource locator. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135119 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY GENERATING/CHANGING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) ACCESS INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A method and apparatus for automatically generating/changing Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) access information are provided. The apparatus includes an access information management database for storing pre-registered WLAN access information of a plurality of WLAN Access Points (APs). The apparatus also includes an access information collector for collecting information for WLAN APs being accessible at a current position of the apparatus, and an access information analyzer for analyzing the collected information, and creating a list of the accessible WLAN APs. The apparatus further includes a comparator for comparing the list with the WLAN access information to determine if the WLAN APs match. The apparatus additionally includes an access information automatic changer for automatically changing current WLAN access information according to matched APs. The apparatus includes an access information generator for automatically generating new WLAN access information when no WLAN access information is matched with the APs. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135205 | WI-FI NETWORK ACCESS AND A MOBILE TERMINAL CONFIGURED FOR THE SAME - A method for accessing a Wi-Fi network from user equipment (UE) using a preferred access point (AP) when more than one AP is available is provided. RSSI included in received responses to scanning from the US and past connectivity data associated with the APs are used to generate a preferred list of APs from which an AP for connecting or switching to is selected. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135224 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FRAME, CLEAR CHANNEL ASSESSMENT METHOD, AND APPARATUS IMPLEMENTING THE SAME METHOD - A method for transmitting frames of a device in a wireless local area network (WLAN) includes generating a symbol in which legacy cyclic prefixes are periodically located and transmitting a frame including the symbol, wherein the symbol includes a data duration excluding cyclic prefix in symbol duration, and the length of the data duration is longer than 3.2 us. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142163 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USER-EQUIPMENT (UE) CENTRIC ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems of User Equipment (UE) centric access network selection. For example, a cellular node may include a transmitter to transmit to a User Equipment (UE) a cellular communication message over a cellular communication medium, the message including a value of a predefined parameter, which is based on a cellular network load of a cellular network controlled by the cellular node. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142366 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF ENTERPRISE PRIVATE NETWORK OVER 3G/4G MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORKS WHILE MAINTAINING RESPECTIVELY CONSISTENT IDENTITIES - An intelligent mechanism to map the public user identity into the private user identity inside the mobile network is defined. The identity mapping logic supports M:N mapping where M and N can be any natural number while a user or device can still be identified without ambiguity in the network and all the protocols are handled according to the standard specifications. Such ID mapping can be used to create virtual private networks, to provide flexibility in usage of identities, to save the scarce type of identities, and to map the identities between private enterprise identity and mobile network identity. As a result MSIDSN translation, support of private static IP address and support for network initiated communication becomes much easier. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142967 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS POINT OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access point (AP) operation control method of an AP in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system and an apparatus therefor are provided. The method includes receiving connection related information with respect to the AP and at least one terminal, based on the connection related information, determining whether the AP is a dummy AP, and based on a result of the determination, performing a coverage hole detection and correction related operation for the AP. Also, provided are a method and an apparatus for operating an AP controlled by an AP controller (APC). | 05-19-2016 |
20160142972 | Method and Apparatus for Efficiently Reducing Number of Access Points in a Radio Map - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus comprises a receiver for receiving a list of access points detected at a location, a processor for determining the number of times at least one access point in the list is detected during a first period of time and a processor for determining to use an access point in generating a partial radio map based at least in part on the number of times the access point is detected during a second period of time. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142988 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SYNCHRONIZATION OF MEDIA PLAYBACK WITHIN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for synchronization of media playback within a wireless network. In one embodiment, the present disclosure is directed to precision synchronization over time, based on repeated measurements of a common time reference. In one exemplary embodiment, the common time reference is a Time Synchronization Function (TSF) of a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). In another exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, the application processor and the modem processor measure a pulse width and the aforementioned common time reference in order to adjust media playback. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143021 | System, Security and Network Management Using Self-Organizing Communication Orbits in Distributed Networks - In one aspect, machines in a managed network implements a set of rules that cause individual machines to directly interact with only a small number of machines in the network (i.e., a local neighborhood within the network), while the independent local actions of the individual machines collectively cause the individual machines to be self-organized into one or more communication orbits without any global control or coordination by a server or an administrator. The communication orbits are used for supporting network, security and system management communications in the managed network. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143028 | REMOTELY CONFIGURABLE MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DEVICE - Provided is an intelligent mobile wireless access point device that is set-up to allow for remote configuration of the access point device, via a mobile communication network, by a configuration server. A configuration file for a mobile wireless access point device is maintained by a service provider in a configuration server. The configuration file is delivered to the mobile wireless access point devices over the mobile communication network, which allows multiple mobile wireless access point devices to be configured substantially simultaneously and without the multiple mobile wireless access point devices being physically located at an enterprise location. In addition, the remote configuration examples of a mobile wireless access point device mitigate the opportunities for unauthorized use of the mobile wireless access point, and provide additional security features for authorized users. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143033 | MULTI-SPECTRUM ACCESS NODE - Systems and methods for managing a network are disclosed. In an aspect, a method can comprise receiving first information by an access node of a premises network via a first radio frequency band. At least a portion of the first information can be transmitted via a second radio frequency band to a gateway node of the premises network. Second information can be received from the gateway node via the second radio frequency band. At least a portion of the second information can be transmitted via the first radio frequency band to a source of the first information. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143066 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISPLAYING WEB APPLICATIONS OF A FIRST COMMUNICATION DEVICE ON A SECOND COMMUNICATION DEVICE BY USING BAN - A method, system and Body Area Network, BAN, enabled communication devices for displaying content of a first BAN enabled communication device on a second BAN enabled communication device are enclosed wherein the method comprising establishing a BAN link through a human body of a user that is wearing the first BAN enabled device, between the first BAN enabled device and a second BAN enabled device, transmitting the content from the first BAN enabled device to the second BAN enabled device by using the established BAN link, and displaying the transmitted content on a Graphical User Interface, GUI, on the second BAN enabled device, when the user touches the second BAN enabled device. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143088 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING SENSOR SIGNALS - A sensor signal transmission system includes: at least one wireless sensor disposed in an equipment package and configured to sense at least one type of information; a gateway configured to receive the at least one type of information sensed by the at least one wireless sensor in a wireless manner, and convert the received information into at least one communication signal; a controller configured to control the equipment package by collecting the at least one communication signal input from the gateway; and at least one wireless power supply configured to supply power to the at least one wireless sensor in a wireless manner. | 05-19-2016 |
20160150412 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS SERVICE GROUPS - The disclosed embodiments provide a system that provides wireless service groups. During operation, a wireless device's advertising mechanism advertises a service group over Wi-Fi, wherein the service group comprises at least the wireless device and wherein the service group's security requirements regulate multicast protection within the service group. In response to receiving a request from a second device to be admitted into the service group, the wireless device's security mechanism admits the second device into the service group and sends the service group's security requirements to the second device, thereby enabling the second device to initialize multicast protection in accordance with the service group's security requirements. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150417 | WIRELESS MESH NETWORK CONFIGURATION - A wireless mesh network employs an integrated interface between a plurality of access points for mitigating throughput degradation of multiple consecutive “daisy chain,” or mesh, links. The mesh network employs a plurality of access points, each linked back to a root access point by a series of “hops” through other access points. The wireless mesh network, therefore, employs a plurality of access points operable for wireless links to subscriber, or user, devices, including cellular phones, smart phones, tablet and laptop computing devices, or any suitable portable or handheld computing device. Access points establish an integrated interface with an adjacent access point for direct coupling of the access points for message traffic. The resulting integrated access point establishes a wireless link to a root access point connected to a backhaul network from which media services emanate. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150429 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS LAN SERVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREFOR - A device and a method for providing a wireless LAN service in an electronic device are provided. The electronic device includes a communication interface that transmits and receives a signal for a wireless LAN service; and a processor that selects a plurality of channels using the communication interface and based on channel scan information, accesses at least one Access Point (AP) corresponding to at least one channel among the plurality of channels, and monitors the plurality of channels in a state in which the access to at least one AP is maintained. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150534 | CHANNEL ACCESS MECHANISM - A method and system to improve backoff counter handling with relation to a clear channel assessment (CCA) process. The method and system improve a wireless medium availability by adjusting the backoff counter such that the processing of a preamble of a frame received during a backoff is taken into account. Received frames that fall between two CCA thresholds may require decoding of information in the preamble to assess whether the wireless medium is available. A portion of the preamble is decoded that identifies information utilized to determine whether the wireless medium may be considered to be busy. However, during this determination that requires the reading of the preamble of a received frame the backoff counter may be held or decremented even though the wireless medium status is unknown. The method and system provide a set of possible adjustments to the backoff counter to account for this uncertainty and the outcome of the CCA. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150557 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR ENHANCING TRANSMISSION EFFICIENCY THROUGH SEPARATING TRANSMISSION INTERVAL IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication method performed at an access point to enhance the transmission efficiency in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, the method including scheduling a transmission time of an enhanced traffic indicator map (TIM) frame based on a type of a station, and transmitting a second beacon including the enhanced TIM frame to the station at a point in time aside from a transmission point in time of a first beacon. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156392 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING DATA BETWEEN STATION AND NEIGHBOR ACCESS POINT IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-02-2016 |
20160156496 | OFDM TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM | 06-02-2016 |
20160156548 | CHANNEL AGGREGATION USING WI-FI | 06-02-2016 |
20160156673 | SENSOR GATEWAY | 06-02-2016 |
20160156750 | PHYSICAL LAYER FRAME FORMAT FOR WLAN | 06-02-2016 |
20160157163 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING WLAN | 06-02-2016 |
20160157279 | FAST INITIAL LINK SETUP DISCOVERY FRAMES | 06-02-2016 |
20160157289 | METHOD FOR USING LEGACY WI-FI AND WI-FI P2P SIMULTANEOUSLY | 06-02-2016 |
20160165392 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A SUBSCRIBER'S ZONE INFORMATION - Systems and methods for delivering customized content to wireless service subscribers are disclosed. According to the disclosed embodiments, wireless access points can be grouped into various zones. Some of all of these zones can be further associated with predefined service types or other customized attributes. When a wireless subscriber connects to an access point in a given zone, the subscriber can be provided with content and/or services based on the zone to which he is connected. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165524 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RECEIVING DATA UNIT - Method and device for receiving a data unit are disclosed. A method for receiving a PPDU including a PPDU header and a data field of an STA may comprise the step of: an STA receiving the PPDU header from an AP; the STA determining whether the PPDU transfers a scanning frame on the basis of the PPDU header; and the STA determining whether to decode the data field on the basis of whether to perform a scanning procedure and whether the PPDU transfers the scanning frame. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165528 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DISCOVER NETWORK CAPABILITIES AVAILABLE VIA WIRELESS NETWORKS - An example method for network selection involves discovering network capabilities by performing an Access Network Query Protocol (ANQP) query at a wireless terminal, and receiving a subsequent ANQP response from an access point of a wireless local area network. The network capabilities are indicated in the subsequent ANQP response. The example method also involves comparing the network capabilities with configured capabilities, finding a match between at least a portion of the network capabilities and at least a portion of the configured capabilities, and joining the wireless terminal with the access point based on the at least the portion of the network capabilities matching the at least the portion of the configured capabilities. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165529 | METHOD, APPARATUS, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS TO WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A method, apparatus, device, and system control access to a wireless local area network, and relate to the field of communications technologies. The method includes: determining, by a first cellular network access node, that a WLAN AP meets an access condition of UE; and sending instruction information to the UE to instruct the UE to access a WLAN network, where the instruction information includes an identifier of the WLAN AP or includes an identifier of the WLAN AP and an identifier of at least one other WLAN AP, and a service provided by the at least one other WLAN AP is the same as a service provided by the WLAN AP. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165530 | WLAN NETWORK SELECTION - The invention relates to a method and devices for selecting a communication network for a mobile terminal accessing the communication network via an unlicensed wireless access network. Therein, the communication network is selected by a mobile terminal to fulfill carrier grade requirements, which can include lawful interception capabilities. An access node for an unlicensed wireless access network is configured to provide a list of communication networks that fulfill carrier grade requirements. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165532 | USER TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A user terminal capable of using an Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) and a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), includes: a storage configured to store a Radio Access Network (RAN) rule for selecting a network, among the E-UTRAN and the WLAN, to be used in a unit of an Access Point Name (APN); a receiver configured to receive an Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) rule for selecting a network, among the E-UTRAN and the WLAN, to be used; and a controller configured to select a selection rule, from among the ANDSF rule and the RAN rule, to be applied to change the network, wherein the controller selects the RAN rule in a case where the user terminal has both the ANDSF rule and the RAN rule and an Inter System Routing Policy (ISRP) is not configured. The ISRP is a function, in the ANDSF rule, for selecting a network, among the E-UTRAN and the WLAN, to be used in a unit of an Internet Protocol (IP) flow. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165576 | INTEROPERATION TECHNIQUES FOR WWAN AND WLAN RECEIVE CHAINS - A user equipment (UE) may receive a wireless wide area network (WWAN) signal on a first antenna. The UE may process the WWAN signal with a portion of a WWAN receive chain of a WWAN module of the UE. The WWAN signal may be routed from the WWAN receive chain to a wireless local area network (WLAN) receive chain of a WLAN module of the UE. The UE may then process the WWAN signal with a portion of the WLAN receive chain. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165601 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME IN WLAN SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a data frame by a station in a wireless local area network (WLAN), A station obtains a transmission opportunity (TXOP) for a bandwidth. The TXOP indicates an interval of time during which the station has a right to initiate frame exchange sequences onto a wireless medium. The station selects a transmit bandwidth parameter of a non-initial data unit of a plurality of data units from available bandwidth parameters. The available bandwidth parameters include a first available bandwidth parameter which is same as a transmit bandwidth parameter of a preceding data unit of the plurality of data units and a second available bandwidth parameter which is narrower than a transmit bandwidth parameter of the preceding data unit. The station transmits, during the TXOP, the non-initial data unit according to the transmit bandwidth parameter of the non-initial data unit. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165607 | EFFICIENT DL OFDMA FREQUENCY SELECTIVITY HARVESTING - A method for communication in a wireless local area network comprises receiving a frame at a first device, the frame being transmitted by a second device. The method further comprises determining, by the first device using the frame, a channel strength for each of a plurality of sub-bands associated with a bandwidth of the frame. A sub-band of the plurality of sub-bands is selected based on the channel strength determinations made using the frame. The first and second devices communicate using the selected sub-band. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165663 | SECURE CONNECTED DEVICE CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM - Examples are disclosed that facilitate connecting in a secure and efficient manner a mobile device to networked-enabled devices located in a premises. The security of the networked-enabled, connected devices in the premises may be maintained by use of a gateway device situated behind a home router. Through the home router, the gateway device maintains a persistent connection with a network component of a service provider. When an authorized application executing on a mobile device attempts to connect with the gateway device to communicate with the respective customer connected devices, the device control application is connected to a pre-established communication port to allow direct communication between the device control application and the respective customer connected device. A service provider's network component in some examples maintains the pre-established connection for the duration of the session in which the customer connected device is to be controlled via a mobile device, or longer. | 06-09-2016 |
20160174128 | Digital Distributed Antenna System | 06-16-2016 |
20160174260 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS WITH COLLISION AVOIDANCE (CSMA/CA) WITH DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION | 06-16-2016 |
20160174265 | SELF-ORGANIZING NETWORK COMMUNICATION | 06-16-2016 |
20160174277 | METHOD OF CONNECTING WIRELESS NETWORK AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF | 06-16-2016 |
20160174288 | DETECTION AND REPORTING OF KEEPALIVE MESSAGES FOR OPTIMIZATION OF KEEPALIVE TRAFFIC IN A MOBILE NETWORK | 06-16-2016 |
20160174294 | ROUTER | 06-16-2016 |
20160174928 | TRANSMITTING SIGNALS IN A MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEM | 06-23-2016 |
20160182262 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DIGITAL-TO-TIME CONVERTER SPUR DITHERING | 06-23-2016 |
20160182294 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENFORCING WIRELESS REGULATORY COMPLIANCE | 06-23-2016 |
20160183181 | SCAN CHANNEL REDUCTION TO IMPROVE WI-FI SYSTEM POWER | 06-23-2016 |
20160183184 | REDUCING WIRELESS RECONNECTION TIME OF A COMPUTING DEVICE | 06-23-2016 |
20160183324 | BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT, AGGREGATION AND INTERNET PROTOCOL FLOW MOBILITY ACROSS MULTIPLE-ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES | 06-23-2016 |
20160191292 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for transmitting data in a wireless local area network, and a device therefore are discussed. The method according to one embodiment includes generating, by a transmitter, a very high throughput (VHT)-SIG-A field; generating, by the transmitter, a VHT-SIG-B field by applying a single column vector; and transmitting, by the transmitter, a physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) to a receiver, the PPDU including the VHT-SIG-A field and the VHT-SIG-B field. The single column vector is obtained from a number of spatial streams for the receiver. | 06-30-2016 |
20160191380 | Tunneled Routing - Systems and methods relating to transmitting data between an internetwork of multiple networks. The transmitted data uses a device address that uses a common addressing scheme regardless of network protocols used to implement the multiple networks. The multiple networks includes networks having multiple network protocols, and the multiple networks extend a connection from a home network to a service using a tunnel. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192113 | HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK OPTIMIZATION AND ORGANIZATION UTILIZING MODAL ANTENNA TECHNIQUES AND MASTER-SLAVE SCHEMES - A communication system is described where multiple communication networks are simultaneously accessible from a plurality of fixed and/or mobile communication devices. A Master and Slave hierarchy is implemented among the communication devices to improve communication properties on one or multiple networks. Slave devices are configured to access cellular networks through routing of data with a master device within a sub-network. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192230 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE COLLABORATION VIA A HYBRID NETWORK - An access point is provided that bridges a PAN with a LAN. When the access point receives, from a first mobile device, a request to authenticate with the access point for a first network service and a request to establish a second network service, wherein the second network service provides for bridging a PAN with a LAN, the access point determines a credential to be used by mobile devices who wish to join the second network service and, in response to determining that the first mobile device is authorized to make such a request, establishes the second network service. Further, in response to receiving, from a second mobile device, a request to join the second network service, which request includes the credential, the access point joins the second mobile device to the second network service and bridges traffic between the first and second mobile devices using the second network service. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192274 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MAINTAINING ROUTING TABLES IN AN AD-HOC WIRELESS NETWORK - Disclosed herein are methods and systems for maintaining routing tables in an ad-hoc wireless network. In an embodiment, a first node receives, from a second node having a second network address, a first data packet having a third network address as the source address and a fourth network address as the destination address. The first node determines that its server routing table (i) contains a stored server route to the fourth network address and (ii) does not contain a server route to the third network address, and responsively adds, to its server-to-client routing table, a server-to-client route to the third network address with the second network address as the associated next hop. The first node transmits, to the second node at the second network address, a second data packet that has the third network address as the destination address. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192281 | DISTRIBUTED METHOD FOR CLIENT OPTIMIZATION - The present disclosure discloses a distributed method and network device for providing client optimization in WLANs. Specifically, a first access point detects a plurality of client devices. The first access point also receives information identifying a first set of client devices associated with the second access point. Then first access point then identifies a subset of the detected plurality of client devices that are also identified in the first set of client devices associated with the second access point. Finally, the first access point transmits to the second access point characteristics corresponding to the subset of the plurality of client devices. The characteristics are determined based on wireless signals received by the first access point from the subset of the plurality of client devices. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192288 | PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK ("PLMN") DISCOVERY COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A mobile device may retrieve information about a network prior to associating with the network. For example, the information may be related to a public land mobile network (“PLMN”) and compatibility with Extensible Authentication Protocols (“EAPs”). | 06-30-2016 |
20160192301 | BEACONS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system and method for wireless devices to efficiently receive communications by transmitting and receiving specialized beacon messages. Particularly, a wireless device may await reception of a synchronizing beacon message from a transmitting device. A relative position identifier within the synchronizing beacon message may then allow the wireless device to anticipate future beacon message transmissions and to synchronize its reception pattern with the transmitter. In this manner the wireless device need only receive and decode beacon messages germane to its operation. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192330 | ADJACENT CHANNEL OPTIMIZED RECEIVER - The present invention offers significant improvements in the performance of a radio receiver operating in an environment with high desired band interference. The present invention comprises a high selectivity RF circuit that is located between the antenna and the radio receiver, and utilizes superheterodyne technology to filter adjacent channel interference in the desired band frequency spectrum. This type of interference is problematic for IEEE 802.11 radio receivers that are implemented with the popular direct conversion radio receiver architectures. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192405 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MAPPING A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK ACCESS POINT TO A SINK DEVICE - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and methods of mapping a wireless local area network access point to a sink device. For example, a source device may include a radio to establish a peer to peer connection over a wireless communication channel between the source device and a sink device, the peer to peer connection to communicate from the source device to the sink device content to be displayed on a display device; and a controller to receive mapping information to map the sink device to a WLAN AP, the controller to communicate WLAN traffic with the WLAN AP during the peer to peer connection. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192438 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA UNIT IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for transmitting a data unit in a wireless local area network system, according to one embodiment. The method comprises transmitting a signal field, transmitting a first data symbol for a first data field, and transmitting a second data symbol for a second data field. The signal field, the first data symbol, and the second data symbol are transmitted through a 1 MHz channel bandwidth having a band of 1 GHz or less. Two pilot tones are inserted to each of the first data symbol and the second data symbol. | 06-30-2016 |
20160197655 | COMMUNICATION METHOD USING INTERFERENCE ALIGNMENT IN WIRELESS LAN | 07-07-2016 |
20160197700 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH EXTENDED RANGE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
20160197828 | DISCOVERY OF NETWORK ADDRESS ALLOCATIONS AND TRANSLATIONS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS | 07-07-2016 |
20160198305 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING POSITIONAL INFORMATION USING WIRELESS FIDELITY (WIFI) INFORMATION | 07-07-2016 |
20160198345 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING BEACON FRAME | 07-07-2016 |
20160198387 | Media Distribution Via A Scalable Ad Hoc Geographic Protocol | 07-07-2016 |
20160198388 | WIRELESS SENSOR SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS WITH SWITCH AND OUTLET CONTROL | 07-07-2016 |
20160198391 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING DATA | 07-07-2016 |
20160198393 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR JOINING CENTRALIZED CLUSTER | 07-07-2016 |
20160198424 | Method and Apparatus for Setting Up Interface Between Access Points | 07-07-2016 |
20160198476 | METHOD FOR TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE POWER CONTROL IN MESH SYSTEMS | 07-07-2016 |
20160198498 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING A COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND STORAGE MEDIUM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198502 | SCHEMES FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION | 07-07-2016 |
20160204960 | SOUNDING METHOD | 07-14-2016 |
20160204968 | EXTENDED GUARD INTERVAL FOR OUTDOOR WLAN | 07-14-2016 |
20160205195 | Method, Apparatus, Computer Program and Computer Program Product for Transmitting Data for Use in a Vehicle | 07-14-2016 |
20160205590 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING WLAN DATA PACKET HAVING DUAL CONFIGURATIONS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205609 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD | 07-14-2016 |
20160205615 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SCANNING MULTIPLE BANDS IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
20160205618 | Apparatus, and Associated Method, for Facilitating Communications by a Mobile Node in a Multiple Network Radio Communication System Having Interworking Capability | 07-14-2016 |
20160255458 | CONTROLLING DATA TRANSMISSIONS FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATIONS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 09-01-2016 |
20160255570 | USING MULTIPLE BEACON TYPES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION | 09-01-2016 |
20160255629 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLE FRAME TRANSMISSION FOR SUPPORTING MU-MIMO | 09-01-2016 |
20160255661 | OPTIMIZING THE USE OF SHARED RADIO FREQUENCY MEDIUM USING INTELLIGENT SUPPRESSION OF PROBE REQUEST FRAMES | 09-01-2016 |
20160381531 | MESSAGING SERVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless device for providing a message service is disclosed, along with a computer readable medium. The wireless device may be capable of sending messages via a packet switched WLAN base station in a first mode, or via an SMS base station that is independent of the packet switched base station, in a second mode. A message client on the wireless device determines whether a recipient's wireless device corresponds to a subscriber of a service for receiving the outgoing message via a packet switched bearer. The wireless device sends, via a WLAN transceiver, if the recipient's wireless device corresponds to a subscriber of the service, the outgoing message to the recipient's wireless device in the first mode. Alternatively, if the recipient's wireless device does not correspond to a subscriber of the service, the outgoing message is sent by a cellular transmitter via the SMS base station in the second mode. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381569 | BEAM PRECODING MANNER REPORTING METHOD, SCHEDULING METHOD, AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a beam precoding manner reporting method, a scheduling method, and a device. The reporting method includes: determining, by UE, a used beam precoding manner, where the beam precoding manner is used to indicate a first beam combination usage result, and the first beam combination usage result includes usage manners, which are determined by the UE when the UE uses beams in combination, of the beams, where a beam combination usage manner includes one or two or three of beam selection, beam multiplexing, and beam cooperation according to different total quantities of the beams; and sending, by the UE, the beam precoding manner to a base station, so that the base station schedules the UE based on the beam precoding manner. Technical solutions of the present invention can reduce inter-cell interference in an active antenna system during vertical cell splitting, and increase a system throughput. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381628 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY GENERATING/CHANGING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) ACCESS INFORMATION AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - A method and apparatus for automatically generating/changing Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) access information are provided. The apparatus includes an access information management database for storing pre-registered WLAN access information of a plurality of WLAN Access Points (APs). The apparatus also includes an access information collector for collecting information for WLAN APs being accessible at a current position of the apparatus, and an access information analyzer for analyzing the collected information, and creating a list of the accessible WLAN APs. The apparatus further includes a comparator for comparing the list with the WLAN access information to determine if the WLAN APs match. The apparatus additionally includes an access information automatic changer for automatically changing current WLAN access information according to matched APs. The apparatus includes an access information generator for automatically generating new WLAN access information when no WLAN access information is matched with the APs. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381631 | AUTOMATED PROVISIONING OF MANAGED SERVICES IN A Wi-Fi CAPABLE CLIENT DEVICE - Methods and apparatus for deploying and configuring WiFi capable devices are described. A WiFi capable device such as security camera, temperature monitor and/or other device intended for use with a home network including a gateway device is preconfigured with WiFi network connection information, e.g., a network identifier such as a first SSID corresponding to a first WiFi LAN network used to supply configuration information. The gateway device is preconfigured to act as an access point for the configuration network to which the first SSID corresponds. The gateway device also supports one or more additional LAN networks, e.g., home networks which can be used for data traffic. The additional LAN networks may include an Ethernet network, a coax cable network, a powerline network and/or an additional WiFi network corresponding to a second SSID. A WiFi capable device is configured via the first network to communicate traffic data via the second network. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381645 | Jointly Managed Access Point Transmit Power Control - Previously available network monitoring and management systems fail to provide adequate transmit power control in WiFi networks having multiple neighboring wireless access points. By contrast, various implementations disclosed herein include systems, methods and apparatuses that generate an interference map based at least on co-channel interference reported in a number of neighbor lists, wherein each of the neighbor lists is associated with a respective one of a plurality of compliant wireless access points included in one of a local area network (LAN) and a portion of a virtual LAN (VLAN); and determine a respective transmit power adjustment for each of the plurality of compliant wireless access points included in the interference map based on at least one interference criterion characterizing the interference on each of the plurality of compliant wireless access points included in the interference map and respective neighboring wireless access points. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381646 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HIGH DENSITY WI-FI COMMUNICATIONS - Examples are disclosed for a system to improve wireless spectral efficiency, including a processor, a memory coupled to the processor, a radio coupled to the processor component, one or more antennas coupled to the radio, wireless logic to be executed on the processor component to: process reception of a higher-power request to send (RTS) signal from an initiator by an initiator's receiver; process transmission of a higher-power clear to send (CTS) signal to the initiator, to set a lower-power transmit opportunity (TXOP); and process reception of an invitation to share the TXOP at lower power, the invitation comprising an indication that devices that receive the invitation should transmit at lower power during a time period indicated by the higher-power CTS signal; and a timer to track progress of the time period. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381718 | REDUCING RE-ASSOCIATION TIME FOR STA CONNECTED TO AP - A method and apparatus for re-associating a station (STA) to an access point (AP). The STA sends a re-association request to the AP to initiate a re-association process with the AP. The re-association request indicates that a handshake operation is to be bypassed during the re-association process. The STA receives a re-association response from the AP in response to the re-association request and, upon receiving the re-association response, enables data communications with the AP using a set of preexisting cryptographic keys. For example, the set of preexisting cryptographic keys may be negotiated with the AP during at least one of a prior association process or a prior re-association process. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237531 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM | 08-17-2017 |
20170237532 | ASYMMETRIC OFDMA TONE MAPPING AND DYNAMIC CHANNEL ACCESS USING NON-PRIMARY CHANNELS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237577 | USING A CONTROL PANEL AS A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT | 08-17-2017 |
20170237673 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RETRANSMISSION RATE SELECTION TO SUPPORT FAST MOVING DEVICES | 08-17-2017 |
20170238151 | Wireless Access Points Providing Hybrid 802.11 and Scheduled Priority Access Communications | 08-17-2017 |
20170238235 | WIRELESS ROUTER AND ROUTER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20170238236 | MAC ADDRESS-BOUND WLAN PASSWORD | 08-17-2017 |
20170238239 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PRIORITIZING SERVICE SET IDENTIFIERS ON A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT | 08-17-2017 |
20170238240 | COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND EXPANDED USE OF UNIQUE NETWORK IDENTIFIERS | 08-17-2017 |
20170238346 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SMART VEHICLE GATEWAY MULTI-HOP NETWORKED COMMUNICATION USING CONTEXT AWARE RADIO COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT | 08-17-2017 |
20180026674 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND CONTROLLING METHOD THEREOF | 01-25-2018 |
20180026752 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNSOLICITED BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS | 01-25-2018 |
20180027438 | Device and Method of Reporting a WLAN Connection Status | 01-25-2018 |
20180027485 | Extended Range Networking | 01-25-2018 |
20180027487 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SERVICE DISCOVERY IN NEIGHBOR AWARENESS NETWORK NAN | 01-25-2018 |
20180027489 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING WLAN SELECTION BY A MOBILE NODE | 01-25-2018 |
20180027506 | TECHNIQUES FOR POWER ZONING IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT | 01-25-2018 |
20180027508 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027514 | RESOURCE UNIT INDICATION FOR EXTENDED RANGE PACKETS | 01-25-2018 |
20190149210 | RECEIVER ADDRESS FIELD FOR MULTI-USER TRANSMISSIONS IN WLAN SYSTEMS | 05-16-2019 |
20190149343 | Ultra Low Power Mesh Network | 05-16-2019 |
20190150063 | MULTIPLE BASIC SERVICE SET SUPPORT | 05-16-2019 |
20190150072 | ACCESS POINT AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATING RESOURCE BLOCKS WITH GUIDED ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES | 05-16-2019 |
20190150078 | SCANNING METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND SUPPORTING DEVICE THEREFOR | 05-16-2019 |
20190150091 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING TRAINING SIGNAL USING PREDETERMINED BINARY SEQUENCE IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190150106 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND TIME SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD | 05-16-2019 |
20190150146 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS BY DEVICE TO DEVICE TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |